New Holland E215B E215BLC HS Engine Hydraulic Excavator Service Repair Manual (87731204)

Page 1

E215B model E215BLC (HS Engine)

INDEX 1 SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 2 MAINTENANCE SECTION

SYSTEM

SHOP MANUAL

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR

5 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 ENGINE SECTION

OPT.

OF INSTALLING 7 PROCEDURE OPTIONS SECTION

E / G TROUBLESHOOTING

4 DISASSEMBLY SECTION

DISASSEMBLING

3 SYSTEM SECTION

Book Code No. 0-1

87731204


GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

3) CAUTION- Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against possible damage to the machine and its components and is represented as follows:

Do not operate or perform any maintenance on this machine until all instructions found in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL and this MANUAL have been thoroughly read and understood. Improper operation or maintenance of this machine may cause accidents and could result in serious injury or death. Always keep the manual in storage. If it is missing or damaged, place an order with an authorized our Distributor for a replacement. If you have any questions, please consult an authorized our Distributor.

(4) It is very difficult to forecast every danger that may occur during operation. However, safety can be ensured by fully understanding proper operating procedures for this machine according to methods recommended by Manufacturer. (5) While operating the machine, be sure to perform work with great care, so as not to damage the machine, or allow accidents to occur. (6) Continue studying the manual until all Safety, Operation and Maintenance procedures are completely understood by all persons working with the machine.

(1) Most accidents, which occur during operation, are due to neglect of precautionary measures and safety rules. Sufficient care should be taken to avoid these accidents. Erroneous operation, lubrication or maintenance services are very dangerous and may cause injury or death of personnel. Therefore all precautionary measures, NOTES, DANGERS, WARNINGS and CAUTIONS contained in the manual and on the machine should be read and understood by all personnel before starting any work with or on the machine. (2) Operation, inspection, and maintenance should be carefully carried out, and safety must be given the first priority. Messages of safety are indicated with marks. The safety information contained in the manual is intended only to supplement safety codes, insurance requirements, local laws, rules and regulations. (3) Messages of safety appear in the manual and on the machine : All messages of safety are identified by either word of "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION". 1) DANGER- Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury and is represented as follows:

2) WARNING- Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury and is represented as follows:

0-2


SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

stands, capable of supporting the machine, before performing any disassembly.

The proper and safe lubrication and maintenance for this machine, recommended by Manufacturer, are outlined in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL for the machine. Improper performance of lubrication or maintenance procedures are dangerous and could result in injury or death. Read and understand the MANUAL before performing any lubrication or maintenance.

Do not operate this machine unless you have read and understand the instructions in the OPERATOR’S MANUAL. Improper machine operation is dangerous and could result in injury or death. (6) Relieve all pressure in air, oil or water systems before any lines, fittings or related items are disconnected or removed. Always make sure all raised components are blocked correctly and be alert for possible pressure when disconnecting any device from a system that utilizes pressure.

The serviceman or mechanic may be unfamiliar with many of the systems on this machine. This makes it important to use caution when performing service work. A knowledge of the system and or components is important before the removal or disassembly of any component.

(7) Lower the bucket, dozer, or other attachments to the ground before performing any work on the machine. If this cannot be done, make sure the bucket, dozer, ripper or other attachment is blocked correctly to prevent it from dropping unexpectedly.

Because of the size of some of the machine components, the serviceman or mechanic should check the weights noted in this manual. Use proper lifting procedures when removing any components. Weight of components table is shown in the section ; SPECIFICATIONS.

(8) Use steps and grab handles when mounting or dismounting a machine. Clean any mud or debris from steps, walkways or work platforms before using. Always face to the machine when using steps, ladders and walkways. When it is not possible to use the designed access system, provide ladders, scaffolds, or work platforms to perform safe repair operations.

The following is a list of basic precautions that must always be observed. (1) Read and understand all Warning plates and decal on the machine before Operating, Maintaining or Repairing this machine.

(9) To avoid back injury, use a hoist when lifting components which weigh 20kg (45lbs) or more. Make sure all chains, hooks, slings, etc., are in good condition and are the correct capacity. Be sure hooks are positioned correctly. Lifting eyes are not to be side loaded during a lifting operation.

(2) Always wear protective glasses and protective shoes when working around machines. In particular, wear protective glasses when using hammers, punches or drifts on any part of the machine or attachments. Use welders gloves, hood/goggles, apron and the protective clothing appropriate to the welding job being performed. Do not wear loose fitting or torn clothing. Remove all rings from fingers, loose jewelry, confine long hair and loose clothing before working on this machinery.

(10)To avoid burns, be alert for hot parts on machines which have just been stopped and hot fluids in lines, tubes and compartments. (11)Be careful when removing cover plates. Gradually back off the last two capscrews or nuts located at opposite ends of the cover or device and carefully pry cover loose to relieve any spring or other pressure, before removing the last two capscrews or nuts completely.

(3) Disconnect the battery and hang a "Do Not Operate" tag in the Operators Compartment. Remove ignition keys. (4) If possible, make all repairs with the machine parked on a firm level surface. Block the machine so it does not roll while working on or under the machine. Hang a "Do Not Operate" tag in the Operators Compartment.

(12)Be careful when removing filler caps, breathers and plugs on the machine. Hold a rag over the cap or plug to prevent being sprayed or splashed by liquids under pressure. The danger is even greater if the machine has just been stopped because fluids can be hot.

(5) Do not work on any machine that is supported only by lift, jacks or a hoist. Always use blocks or jack

0-3


(21)Do not operate a machine if any rotating part is damaged or contacts any other part during operation. Any high speed rotating component that has been damaged or altered should be checked for balance before reusing.

(13)Always use the proper tools that are in good condition and that are suited for the job at hand. Be sure you understand how to use them before performing any service work. (14)Reinstall all fasteners with the same part number. Do not use a lesser quality fastener if replacements are necessary.

(22)Be careful when servicing or separating the tracks (crawlers). Chips can fly when removing or installing a track (crawlers) pin. Wear safety glasses and long sleeve protective clothing. Tracks (crawlers) can unroll very quickly when separated. Keep away from front and rear of machine. The machine can move unexpectedly when both tracks (crawlers) are disengaged from the sprockets. Block the machine to prevent it from moving.

(15)Repairs which require welding should be performed only with the benefit of the appropriate reference information and by personnel adequately trained and knowledgeable in welding procedures. Determine type of metal being welded and select correct welding procedure and electrodes, rods or wire to provide a weld metal strength equivalent at least to that of the parent metal. Make sure to disconnect battery before any welding procedures are attempted. (16)Do not damage wiring during removal operations. Reinstall the wiring so it is not damaged nor will be damaged in operation of the machine by contacting sharp corners, or by rubbing against some object or hot surface. Do not connect wiring to a line containing fluid. (17)Be sure all protective devices including guards and shields are properly installed and functioning correctly before starting a repair. If a guard or shield must be removed to perform the repair work, use extra caution and replace the guard or shield after repair is completed. (18)The maintenance and repair work while holding the bucket raised is dangerous due to the possibility of a falling attachment. Don’t fail to lower the attachment and place the bucket to the ground before starting the work. (19)Loose or damaged fuel, lubricant and hydraulic lines, tubes and hoses can cause fires. Do not bend or strike high pressure lines or install ones which have been bent or damaged. Inspect lines, tubes and hoses carefully. Do not check for leaks with your hands. Very small (pinhole) leaks can result in a high velocity oil stream that will be invisible close to the hose. This oil can penetrate the skin and cause personal injury. Use card-board or paper to locate pinhole leaks. (20)Tighten connections to the correct torque. Make sure that all heat shields, clamps and guards are installed correctly to avoid excessive heat, vibration or rubbing against other parts during operation. Shields that protect against oil spray onto hot exhaust components in event of a line, tube or seal failure must be installed correctly.

0-4


E215B E215BLC

NHK Middle East (HS Engine)

MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS

Book Code No. Distribution Year–Month

SYSTEM

S5YN0118E01 2007-7 S5YN0225E01 2007-7 S5YN0322E01 2007-7 S5YN1122E01 2007-7 S5YN1221E01 2007-7 S5YN1318E02 2007-7 S5YN2122E01 2007-7 S5YN2223E01 2007-7 S5YN2324E01 2007-7 S5YN2422E01 2007-7 S5YN2518E02 2007-7

Title

Index No.

OUTLINE

1

SPECIFICATIONS

2

ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3

TOOLS

11

STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

12 13 21

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

22

ELECTRIC SYSTEM

23

COMPONENTS SYSTEM

24

AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25

DISASSEMBLING & ASSEMBLING

31

ATTACHMENT

32

UPPER STRUCTURE

33

TRAVEL SYSTEM

34

BY ERROR CODES

46

BY TROUBLE

47

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE

48

ENGINE

51

_

E /G TROUBLESHOOTING

DISASSEMBLING

S5YN3118E01 2007-7 S5YN3218E02 2007-7 S5YN3322E01 2007-7 S5YN3421E01 2007-7 S5YN4618E02 2007-7 S5YN4718E01 2007-7 S5YN4818E01 2007-7 _

S5YN5123E01 2007-7 _ _ _

YN11-45001~ YQ11-06001~

APPLICABLE MACHINES

0-5


NOTE: This Manual is prepared as a technical material in which the information necessary for the maintenance and repairing services of our hydraulic excavators are collected, and is categorized into 7 Chapters, Specification, Maintenance, System, Disassembly, Troubleshooting, Engine, and Installation Procedures for Optional Attachment.

This Manual may be properly revised due to the improvement of products, modification of specifications, etc. And there are cases where the system on actual machine and a part of the contents of this manual may differ due to the variations of specification by countries. For the section in which the description is hardly understood, contact our distributor.

The Chapter "Specification" describes the specifications for entire machine and material, which are instructive for replacement and repairing of attachments.

The Chapter "Maintenance" describes the material, which is helpful for maintenance service and adjustments for entire machine.

The number is assigned to every part handled in this Manual on account of the description, but the parts, which cannot be supplied as service parts are contained. Therefore, the order must be placed with respective formal number with due confirmation on the Parts Manual for applicable machine.

The Chapter "System" describes the operating system like hydraulic system, electric system, components, and so on.

The Chapter "Disassembly" describes the removal and installing of assembly mounted on the upper structure and undercarriage, and the assembling and disassembling of the associated hydraulic equipment.

The Chapter "Troubleshooting" describes how to find the fault equipment.

The Chapter "Engine" describes the engines making use of the "Maintenance Manual" provided by the suppliers.

The Chapter "Installation Procedures for Optional Attachment" describes the supplements added on request as required.

0-6


1

1. OUTLINE TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.1

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS FOR MAKING REPAIRS ......................................................1-3

1.1.1

PREPARATION BEFORE DISASSEMBLING ..........................................................1-3

1.1.2

SAFETY WHEN DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING ........................................1-3

1.1.3

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT .......................1-3

1.1.4

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .....................................................................................1-4

1.1.5

HYDRAULIC PARTS ................................................................................................1-5

1.1.6

WELD REPAIR .........................................................................................................1-5

1.1.7

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES.....................................................................................1-5

1.2

INTERNATIONAL UNIT SYSTEM .....................................................................................1-6

Book Code No. S5YN0118E01 1-1


1. OUTLINE Issue

Date of Issue

First edition

July, 2006

SK330-8 : LC10-07001~ SK350LC-8 : YC10-03501~

n

August, 2006

SK200-8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC-8 : YQ11-06001~

n

October, 2006

SK250-8: LQ12-06001~ SK260LC–8 : LL12-05001~

n

Applicable Machines

Remarks S5YN0118E01 (ASIA, OCE) n (ASIA, OCE) n (ASIA, OCE) n

December, 2006 SK850LC: LY01-00101~

n

February, 2007

E235BSR : YF05-02001~ E235BSR(N)LC : YU05-02001~

n

n

SK235SRLC-2 : YU05-02001~

n

March, 2007

n

April, 2007

n

n

SK200-8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC-8 : YQ11-06001~

n

May, 2007

SK250-8: LQ12-06001~ SK260LC–8 : LL12-05001~

n

June, 2007

E225BSR : YB05-03001~ E225BSRLC : LA05-02001~

n

n

SK215SRLC : LA05-02001~

n

July, 2007

E135BSR : YY05-12001~ E135BSRLC : YH05-07001~

n

n

SK225SR : YB05-03001~ SK225SRLC : LA05-02001~

n

n

SK460-8: LS10-02001~ SK480LC–8 : YS10-01501~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

E265B : LQ12-06001~ E265BLC : LL12-05001~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

n

August, 2007

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~ SK235SR-2 : YF05-02001~ SK235SRLC-2 : YU05-02001~

n E385B : LC10-07001~ E385BLC : YC10-03501~

1-2

n (NHK) n (North America) n (NHK Russia) n (OCE) n ASIA (HS Engine) n ASIA (HS Engine) n (NHK) n (North America) n (NHK) n (OCE) n (ASIA, OCE) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

(NHK Middle East) HS Engine

n (NHK Middle East)

K


1. OUTLINE

1.1

GENERAL PRECAUTIONS FOR MAKING REPAIRS

1.1.1

PREPARATION BEFORE DISASSEMBLING

2) Attach "Don’t operate" tag to control lever, and begin a meeting before starting the work. 3) Before starting inspection and maintenance stop the engine. 4) Confirm the position of first-aid kit and fire extinguisher, and also where to make contact for emergency measure and ambulance to prepare for accidents and fire.

Read Operator's Manual before disassembling

(1) Knowledge of operating procedure Read Operator’s Manual carefully to understand the operating procedure.

5) Choose a hard, lever and safe place, and put attachment on the ground without fail. 6) Use hoist, etc. to remove parts of heavy weight (23kg [50 lb] or more).

(2) Cleaning machines Clean machines of soil, mud, and dust before carrying into the service shop. Carrying a soiled machine into the service shop, causes making less efficient work and damage of parts.

7) Use proper tools, and change or repair defective tools. 8) Machine and attachment required to work in the lifting condition should be supported with supports or blocks securely.

(3) Inspecting machines Confirm the disassembling section before starting work, determine the disassembly procedure taking the conditions in work shop into account, and request to procure necessary parts in advance.

1.1.3

(4) Recording Record the following items to keep contact and prevent malfunction from recurring.

(1) Removing hydraulic equipment assy 1) Before removing pipes, release the pressure of hydraulic oil tank, or open the cover on the return side to tank, and take out the filter.

1) Inspecting date, place 2) Model name, Serial number and Record on hour meter

2) Drain the oil in the removed pipes into pan to prevent the oil from spilling on the ground.

3) Trouble condition, place, cause

3) Pipes with plugs or caps to prevent oil leaking, entry of dust, etc.

4) Visible oil leak, water leak and damage 5) Clogging of filters, oil level, oil quality, oil contamination and looseness.

4) Clean the outside surface of equipment, etc. before disassembling, and drain hydraulic oil and gear oil before putting them on working bench.

6) Examine the problems on the basis of monthly operation rate with the last inspection date and records on hour meter.

(2) Disassembling hydraulic equipment

(5) Arrangement and cleaning in service shop

1) Since performance and function of hydraulic equipment after disassembly and assembly results in immunity from responsibility on the manufacture’s side, disassembly, assembly and modification without permission are strictly prohibited.

1) Tools required for repair work. 2) Prepare the places to put the disassembled parts. 3) Prepare oil pans for leaking oil, etc. 1.1.2

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT

SAFETY WHEN DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

2) If it is unavoidably necessary to disassemble and modify, it should be carried out by experts or personnel qualified through service training. 3) Make match mark on parts for reassembling.

WARNING

(1) Safety

4) Before disassembling, read Disassembling Instruction in advance, and determine if the disassembly and assembly are permitted or not.

1) Wear appropriate clothing, safety shoes, safety helmet, goggles, and clothes with long sleeves.

1-3


1. OUTLINE 5) For parts which are required to use jig and tools, don’t fail to use the specified jig and tools. 6) For parts which can not be removed in the specified procedure, never force removal. First check for the cause.

If hydraulic oil and lubricating oil are not filled and also air bleed is not performed, the hydraulic equipment may be damaged.

7) The removed parts should be put in order and tagged so as to install on proper places without confusion.

3) For air bleed of hydraulic pump and swing motor, loosen drain plug on the upper part, start engine, and run in low idling, then bleed air until hydraulic oil is comes out. After completion of comes, tighten plug securely.

8) For common parts, pay attention to the quantity and places. (3) Inspecting parts

4) For air bleed of travel motor and hydraulic cylinder, starts engine and operate it for 10 minutes or more at no-load and low speed.

1) Check that the disassembled parts are free from adherence, interference and uneven working face. 2) Measure the wear of parts and clearance, and record the measured values.

For cylinder, don’t move it to the stroke end at beginning.

3) If an abnormality is detected, repair or replace the parts. (4) Reassembling hydraulic equipment

5) Air in pilot circuit can be bleed out by only operating digging, swing and traveling motions thoroughly.

1) During the parts cleaning, ventilate the room. 2) Before assembly, clean parts roughly first, and then completely.

6) Check hydraulic oil level. Move attachments to hydraulic oil check position, and check hydraulic oil level of tank. Refill oil if the oil level is lower than the specified level. How to check oil level of hydraulic oil tank

3) Remove adhering oil by compressed air, and apply hydraulic oil or gear oil, and then assemble them. 4) Replace the removed O-ring, back-up rings and oil seal with new ones, and apply grease oil on them before assembling. 5) Removes dirt and water on the surface on which liquid sealant are applied, decrease them, and apply liquid sealant on them.

LEVEL GAUGE Oil level of hydraulic oil tank. If the indicator is within level marks, the oil quantity is acceptable.

6) Before assembling, remove rust preventives on new parts. 7) Use special tools to fit bearings, bushing and oil seal.

1.1.4

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

8) Assemble parts matching to the marks. 9) After completion, check that there is no omission of parts.

(1) The disassembly of electrical equipment is not allowed.

(5) Installing hydraulic equipment

(2) Handle equipment with care so as not to drop it or bump it.

1) Confirm hydraulic oil and lubrication oil. 2) Air release is required in the following cases ;

(3) Connector should be removed by unlocking while holding the connector. Never stress in tension to the caulked section by pulling wire.

1. Change of hydraulic oil 2. Replacement of parts on suction pipe side 3. Removing and attaching hydraulic pump

(4) Check that connector is connected and locked completely.

4. Removing and attaching swing motor 5. Removing and attaching travel motor

(5) Engine key off before removing and connecting connector.

6. Removing and attaching hydraulic cylinder

1-4


1. OUTLINE (2) Flexible hose (F hose)

(6) Engine key off before touching terminals of starter and alternator. (7) Remove battery grounding terminal before beginning work close to battery and battery relay with tools.

Even if the connector and length of hose are the same, the parts differ according to the withstanding pressure. Use proper parts.

Tighten it to the specified torque, and check that it is free from twist, over tension, interference, and oil leak.

(8) Wash machine with care so as not to splash water on electrical equipment and connector. (9) When water has entered in the waterproofed connector, the removing of water is not easy. So check the removed waterproofed connector with care to protect it from entry of water. If moisture adheres on it, dry it completely before connecting.

1.1.6

(1) The weld repair should be carried out by qualified personnel in the specified procedure after disconnecting the grounding cable of battery. If the grounding cable is not disconnected, the electrical equipment may be damaged. (2) Remove parts which may cause fire due to the entry of spark beforehand.

Battery fluid is dangerous. The battery fluid is dilute sulfuric acid, and causes scald and loss of eyesight by adhering on eyes, skin and clothes. When the fluid has adhered on them, take an emergency measure immediately and see a doctor for medical advice. • •

• •

(3) Repair attachments which are damaged, giving particular attention to the plated section of piston rod to protect it from sparks, and don’t fail to cover the section with flame-proof clothes. 1.1.7

When it has adhered on skin ; Wash with soap and water.

(2) Waste disposal The following parts follows the regulation. Waste oil, waste container and battery

When it has spilled out in large quantity ; Use sodium bicarbonate to neutralize, or wash away with water.

(3) Precautions for handling hydraulic oil Hydraulic oil may cause inflammation of eyes. Wear goggles to protect eyes on handling it.

When it was swallowed ; Drink milk or water. When it has adhered on clothes ; Wash it immediately.

When it has got in eyes ; Wash eyes with water until the stimulus is gone.

When it was swallowed ; Don’t force him to vomit it, but immediately receive medical treatment.

When it has adhered on skin ; Wash with soap and water.

HYDRAULIC PARTS

(4) Others For spare parts, grease and oil, use KOBELCO genuine ones.

(1) O-ring •

Check that O-ring is free from flaw and has elasticity before fitting.

Even if the size of O-ring is equal, the usage differs, for example in dynamic and static sections, the rubber hardness also differs according to the pressure force, and also the quality differs depending on the materials to be seated. So, choose proper O-ring.

Fit O-ring so as to be free from distortion and bend.

Floating seal should be put in pairs.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES

(1) Engine should be started and operated in the place where air can be sufficiently ventilated.

When it has got in eyes ; Wash in water for 10 minutes or more immediately.

1.1.5

WELD REPAIR

1-5


1. OUTLINE

1.2

INTERNATIONAL UNIT SYSTEM

(4) Derived Units bearing Peculiar Designations Table1-4

Introduction Although this manual uses the SI units system. Outline of SI units system is described here. Given hereinunder are an excerpt of the units that are related to this manual :

QUANTITY

SI unit system

SI units

Derived units

Derived units bearing peculiar designations Table 1-4

DESIGNATION Meter Kilogram Second Ampere Kelvin

m kg s A K

kg • m/s 2

Pa

N/m2

J

N•m

watt

W

J/s

coulomb

C

A•s

Electric potential difference, volt Voltage, and Electromotive force

V

W/A

Quantity of static electricity farad and Electric capacitance

F

C/V

Mol Candela

mol cd

ohm

V/A

celcius Celcius degree or temperature degree Illuminance

C

(t+273.15)K

lx

l m/m2

°

lux

(5) Prefixes of SI Table1-5 PREFIX

DESIGNATION Radian Steradian

SIGN

Giga

G

109

SIGN

Mega

M

106

rad sr

Kilo

k

103

Hecto

h

102

Deca

da

10

Deci

d

10–1

Centi

c

10–2

SIGN

Milli

m

10–3

m2 m3 m/s m/s2 kg/m3

Micro

P

10–6

Nano

n

10–9

Pico

p

10–12

Table1-3 DESIGNATION Square meter Cubic meter Meter per second Meter per second / second Kilogram per cubic meter

POWER

DESIGNATION

(3) Derived Units of Basic Units

Area Volume Velocity Acceleration Density

N

Electric resistance

SIGN

Table1-2

QUANTITIES

newton

Quantity of electricity

Derived units of base units Table 1-3

(2) Supplementary Units

Plain angle Solid angle

1Hz=1/s

Power

Table1-1

QUANTITIES

Hz

Energy, Work and Quantity of joule heat

(1) Basic Units

Length Mass Time Current Thermodynamic temperature Gram molecule Luminous intensity

hertz

Pressure and pascal Stress

Prefixes of SI (n-th power of 10, where n is an integer) Table 1- 5

QUANTITIES

FORMULA

Force

2. Construction of SI Unit System

Supplemen tary units Table 1-2

SYMBOL

Frequency

1. Etymology of SI Units English : International System of units

Base units Table 1-1

UNIT

1-6


1. OUTLINE (6) Unit Conversion Table QUANTITIES

JIS

SI

Mass

kg

kg

Force

kgf

N

1kgf=9.807N

Torque

kgf•m

N•m

1kgf•m=9.807N•m

Pressure

kgf/cm

MPa

1kgf/cm2=0.098MPa

Motive power

PS

kW

1PS=0.7355kW

Revolution

r.p.m

min–1

1r.p.m=1min–1

2

REMARKS

1-7


1. OUTLINE

[MEMO]

1-8


2

2. SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 2.1

NAME OF COMPONENTS................................................................................................2-3

2.2

GENERAL DIMENSIONS ..................................................................................................2-4

2.2.1

E215B/E215BLC [5.65m (18ft-6in) Boom+2.94m (9ft-8in) Standard Arm+0.80m3 (1.05cu•yd) Bucket Shoe] ....2-4

2.2.2

E215B/E215BLC [5.65m (18ft-6in)+2.4m (7ft-10in) Short Arm+0.93m3 (1.22cu•yd) Bucket Shoe] ......2-4

2.2.3

E215B/E215BLC [5.65m (18ft-6in) Boom+3.5m (11ft-6in) Long Arm+0.70m3 (0.92cu•yd) Bucket Shoe] ..........2-5

2.3

WEIGHT OF COMPONENTS............................................................................................2-6

2.4

TRANSPOTATION ............................................................................................................2-8

2.4.1

OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF MACHINE ON A TRAILER ........................................2-8

2.4.2

DIMENSIONS OF ATTACHMENT ...........................................................................2-9

2.5

SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE .......................................................................2-11

2.5.1

SPEED AND CLIMBING CAPABILITY.....................................................................2-11

2.5.2

ENGINE ....................................................................................................................2-11

2.5.3

HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS ..................................................................................2-11

2.5.4

WEIGHT ...................................................................................................................2-11

2.6

TYPE OF CRAWLER.........................................................................................................2-12

2.7

TYPE OF BUCKET ............................................................................................................2-12

2.8

COMBINATIONS OF ATTACHMENT................................................................................2-13

2.9

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS ..............................................................................................2-14

2.9.1

SPECIFICATIONS....................................................................................................2-14

2.9.2

ENGINE CHARACTERISTIC CURVE (HINO J05E-TG) ..........................................2-15

Book Code No. S5YN0225E01 2-1


2. SPECIFICATIONS Issue

Date of Issue

First edition

July, 2007

n

n

Applicable Machines E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~ n

2-2

Remarks S5YN0225E01 (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.1

NAME OF COMPONENTS ARM CYLINDER

ARM

BOOM BOOM CYLINDER

BUCKET CYLINDER

CAB SLEWING BEARING

IDLER LINK

SLEWING MOTOR SWIVEL JOINT

FUEL TANK HYDRAULIC TANK

BUCKET LINK CONTROL VALVE GUARD MUFFLER HYDRAULIC PUMP

BUCKET MONITOR PANEL SHOE AND TRACK LINK FRONT IDLER

ENGINE

IDLER ADJUST

COUNTER WEIGHT

UPPER ROLLER AIR CLEANER

TRACK GUIDE

RADIATOR AND OIL COOLER

ROTALY MULTI CONTROL VALVE (OPTION) LOWER ROLLER

BATTERY

TRAVEL MOTOR

2-3


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.2

GENERAL DIMENSIONS

2.2.1

E215B/E215BLC [5.65m (18ft-6in) Boom+2.94m (9ft-8in) Standard Arm+0.80m3 (1.05cu•yd) Bucket Shoe]

1395 (4'7")

2710 (8'11")

1315 (4'4") 43 (1.7")

Unit : mm(ft-in)

R2

75

9450 (31')

0

(9

')

450

(17.1")

*1060 (3'6")

2980 (9'9")

3030 (9'11")

2750 (9')

600 (23.6") 4170 (13'8") [4450 (14'7")]

2800 (9'2") [2990] (9'10")

4840 (15'11") [4980 (16'4")]

Dimensions marked * do not include the height of the shoe lug. [ ] include LC specifications. 2.2.2

E215B/E215BLC [5.65m (18ft-6in)+2.4m (7ft-10in) Short Arm+0.93m3 (1.22cu•yd) Bucket Shoe]

Unit : mm(ft-in)

9530 (31'3") 3980 (13'1")

*1060 (3'6")

3160 (10'4")

2750 (9')

4170 (13'8") [4450 (14'7")] 4840 (15'11") [4980 (16'4")]

2-4


2. SPECIFICATIONS 2.2.3

E215B/E215BLC [5.65m (18ft-6in) Boom+3.5m (11ft-6in) Long Arm+0.70m3 (0.92cu•yd) Bucket Shoe]

Unit : mm(ft-in)

9520 (31'3")

*1060 (3'6")

3180 (10'5")

2750 (9')

4170 (13'8") [4450 (14'7")] 4840 (15'11") [4980 (16'4")]

Dimensions marked * do not include the height of the shoe lug. [ ] include LC specifications.

2-5


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.3

WEIGHT OF COMPONENTS Unit ; kg (lb) Model E215B

E215BLC

Machine complete

20,200 (44,500)

20,600 (45,400)

Item 1. Upper frame assy (Assembly of following :)

9,500 (21,000)

m

1.1 Upper frame

1,770 (3,900)

m

1.2 Counter weight (Semi-weighted)

4,640 (10,230)

m

260 (570)

m

1.3 Cab

*540 (1,190)

m

1.5 Hydraulic oil tank

*150 (330)

m

1.6 Fuel tank

*110 (240)

m

1.7 Slewing motor (including reduction unit)

*210 (460)

m

1.8 Control valve

*230 (510)

m

1.9 Boom cylinder

*170 (375) u 2

m

70 (150)

m

1.11 Pump

*130 (290)

m

1.12 Radiator (including intercooler)

*90 (200)

m

2. Lower frame assy (Assembly of following :)

6,730 (14,840)

7,130 (15,720)

2.1 Lower frame

2,260 (4,980)

2,420 (5,340)

1.4 Engine

1.10 Pin (for mounting boom)

250 (550)

m

260 (570) u 2

m

2.4 Upper roller

20 (44) u 2

m

2.5 Lower roller

30 (66) u 14

30 (66) u 16

2.2 Slewing bearing 2.3 Travel motor (including reduction unit)

2.6 Front idler

110 (240) u 2

m

2.7 Idler adjuster

100 (220) u 2

m

50 (110) u 2

m

*30 (66)

m

1,260 (2,780) u 2 1,470 (3,240) u 2 1,600 (3,530) u 2

1,350 (2,980) u 2 1,560 (3,440) u 2 1,700 (3,750) u 2

510 (1,120) u 2

540 (1,190) u 2

3,420 (7,540)

m

2.8 Sprocket 2.9 Swivel joint 2.10 Track link with 600mm (23.6in) shoes assy Track link with 700mm (27.6in) shoes assy Track link with 800mm (31.5in) shoes assy 2.10.1 Track link assy 3. Attachment (Assembly of following / STD :) {5.65m (18ft-6in) Boom + 2.94m (9ft-8in) Arm + 0.80m (1cu•yd) Bucket} 3

640 (1,410)

m

1,050 (2,315)

m

3.2.1 STD Arm

660 (1,455)

m

3.2.2 Bucket cylinder

*140 (310)

m

3.2.3 Idler link

3.1 Bucket assy (STD) 3.2 STD Arm assy (Assembly of following :)

20 (44) u 2

m

3.2.4 Bucket link

90 (198)

m

3.2.5 Pin (2pcs. for mounting bucket cylinder / 2pcs. for mounting bucket)

100 (220)

m

3.3 Boom assy (Assembly of following :)

1,730 (3,815)

m

3.3.1 Boom

1,310 (2,890)

m

*255 (560)

m

80 (180)

m

3.3.2 Arm cylinder 3.3.3 Pin (Mounting arm • Mounting arm cylinder)

2-6


2. SPECIFICATIONS Unit ; kg (lb) Model Item 4. Lubricant and water (Assembly of following :) 4.1 Hydraulic oil 4.2 Engine oil 4.3 Fuel 4.4 Water

Marks * show dry weight.

2-7

E215B

E215BLC

550 (1,210)

m

200 (440)

m

20 (44)

m

310 (680)

m

20 (44)

m


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.4

TRANSPOTATION

2.4.1

OVERALL DIMENSIONS OF MACHINE ON A TRAILER

(1) 5.65m (18ft-6in) Boom+2.94m (9ft-8in) Arm+0.80m3 (1.05cu•yd) Bucket Model E215B

E215BLC

2,800 (9ft-2in)

2,990 (9ft-10in)

20,200kg (44,500 lbs)

20,600kg (45,400 lbs)

Item Width 600mm (23.6in) shoes Weight

Unit : mm (ft-in)

700 (27.6")

100 (3.94")

138 (5.43") [*145 (5.71")]

3780 (12'5")

2260 (7'5")

3080 (10'1")

9470 (31'1")

80 (3.15") 72 (2.83") [*54 (2.13")]

90 (3.54") [*83 (3.27")]

SECTION AA

* marks indicate LC specifications.

2-8


2. SPECIFICATIONS 2.4.2

DIMENSIONS OF ATTACHMENT

(1) BOOM Type 5.65m (18ft-6in) Boom

Item LengthuHeightuWidth m (ft-in) LuHuW Weight

5.86 u 1.57 u 0.67 (19'3"u 5'2"u 2'2")

kg (lbs)

1,670 (3,680)

Type

2.4m (7ft-10in) Arm + 0.93m 3(1.22cu•yd) Bucket

2.94m (9ft-8in) Arm + 0.80m 3 (1.05cu•yd) Bucket

3.5m (11ft-6in) Arm + 0.70m 3 (0.92cu•yd) Bucket

4.75 u 0.9 u 1.33 (15'7"u2'11"u4'4")

5.29 u 0.9 u1.16 (17'4"u2'11"u4')

5.88 u 0.9 u 1.08 (19'3"u2'11"u3'7")

1,740 (3,840)

1,680 (3,700)

1,880 (4,150)

2.4 m (7ft-10in) Arm

2.94 m (9ft-8in) Arm

3.5 m (11ft-6in) Arm

3.40 u 0.86 u 0.56 (11'2"u2'10"u1'10")

3.94 u 0.86 u 0.56 (12'11"u2'10"u1'10")

4.53 u 0.87 u 0.56 (14'10"u2'10"u1'10")

1,020 (2,250)

1,044 (2,300)

1,260 (2,780)

(2) ARM AND BUCKET

Item LengthuHeightuWidth m (ft-in) LuHuW Weight

kg (lbs)

(3) Arm Type Item LengthuHeightuWidth m (ft-in) LuHuW Weight

kg (lbs)

2-9


2. SPECIFICATIONS (4) Bucket Type

Hoe bucket

LengthuHeightuWidth LuHuW

m (ft-in

1.37 u 1.26u 0.87 (4'6"u4'2"u2'10")

1.37 u 1.26u 1.07 (4'6"u4'2"u3'6")

1.37 u 1.26u 1.16 (4'6"u4'2"u3'10")

1.37 u 1.26u 1.33 (4'6"u4'2"u4'4")

Weight

kg (lbs)

520 (1,150)

630 (1,390)

640 (1,410)

710 (1,560)

Bucket capacity

m cu•yd

0.51 (0.67)

0.70 (0.92)

STD 0.80 (1.05)

0.93 (1.22)

Hoe bucket

Slope finishing bucket

3

Type LengthuHeightuWidth LuHuW

m (ft-in

1.37u1.26u1.16 (4'6"u4'2"u3'10")

1.25u0.90u2.20 (4'1"u2'11"u7'3")

Weight

kg (lbs)

750 (1,650)

890 (1,960)

Bucket capacity

m cu•yd

0.80 (1.05) HD

0.82 (1.07)

3

Hoe bucket

Slope finishing bucket

2-10


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.5

SPECIFICATIONS AND PERFORMANCE

2.5.1

SPEED AND CLIMBING CAPABILITY Area & Model

E215B

Item Swing speed

min-1 {rpm}

Travel speed (1-speed/2speed)

km/h (mile/h)

Gradeability

% (degree)

2.5.2

E215BLC 12.5 {12.5} 3.6 / 6.0 (2.2 / 3.7) 70 (35)

ENGINE

Engine model

HINO J05E-TG Water-cooled, 4 cycle 4 cylinder direct injection type diesel engine with inter cooler turbo-charger

Type

4 -ø112 mm u 130 mm (4.41 in u 5.12 in)

Number of cylinders—BoreuStroke Total displacement

5.123 L (312.61 cu•in)

Rated output / Engine speed

114 kW (155 PS) / 2,000 min-1

Maximum torque / Engine speed

572 N•m (422 lbf•ft)/ 1,600 min-1

Starter

24 V / 5.0kW

Alternator

24 V / 1.2kW

2.5.3

HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS

Hydraulic pump

Variable displacement axial piston pump u 2 + gear pump u 1

Hydraulic motor (swing)

Axial piston motor u 1

Hydraulic motor (travel)

Variable displacement axial piston motor u 2 (with counterbalance valve) 8-spool control valve u 1

Control valve Cylinder (Boom, Arm, Bucket)

Double action cylinder

Oil cooler 2.5.4

Air-cooled type WEIGHT Unit : kg (lbs)

Fully equipped weight

20,200 (44,500)

20,600 (45,400)

Upper structure

9,500 (21,000)

m

Lower machinery (600mm grouser shoe)

6,730 (14,840)

7,130 (15,720)

3,420 (7,540)

m

Attachment 5.65m (18 ft-6in) Boom+2.94m (9ft-8in) Arm +0.80m3 (1.05cu•yd) Bucket

2-11


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.6

TYPE OF CRAWLER Shape

Overall width of crawler mm (ft-in)

Shoe width mm (in)

Grouser shoe

600 (23.6)

700 (27.6)

800 (31.5)

46 LINKS

Ground pressure kPa (psi)

STD

2,800 (9'2")

45 (6.53)

LC

2,990 (9'10")

43 (6.24)

STD

2,900 (9'6")

40 (5.80)

LC

3,090 (10'2")

38 (5.51)

STD

3,000 (9'10")

35 (5.08)

LC

3,190 (10'6")

33 (4.79)

Use 600mm (23.6") grouser shoes on rough ground (areas covered with rocks and gravel). If you drive or excavate with other shoes, this may cause shoe bending, shoe bolt looseness, and track assembly (link, roller, etc.)

2.7

TYPE OF BUCKET

Hoe bucket

Heaped capacity m3(cu•yd)

Outer width mm (ft-in) Struck

Number

W or W/O side cutter

Without side of tooth cutter

Availability Weight of face kg (lbs) shovel

m3(cu•yd)

With side cutter

0.51 (0.67)

0.39 (0.51)

870 (2'10")

770 (2'6")

3

W

YES

520 (1,150)

0.70 (0.92)

0.52 (0.68)

1,080 (3'6")

980 (3'3")

5

W

YES

630 (1,390)

[STD] 0.80 (1.05)

0.59 1,160 (3'10") 1,060 (3'6") (0.77)

5

W

YES

640 (1,410)

0.93 (1.2)

0.67 (0.88)

5

W

YES

710 (1,560)

1,330 (4'4")

1,230 (4')

2-12


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.8

COMBINATIONS OF ATTACHMENT Bucket

Available Arm

Heaped capacity m3 (cu•yd)

Struck 3 m (cu•yd)

0.51 (0.67)

0.39 (0.51)

0.70 (0.92)

0.52 (0.68)

[STD] 0.80 (1.05)

0.59 (0.77)

0.93 (1.2)

0.67 (0.88)

Breaker

Nibbler

Type

Hoe bucket

2.94m (9ft-8in) Arm (STD)

3.5m (11ft-6in) Arm (Long)

2.4m (7ft-10in) Arm +Arm (Short)

Standard combination General operation : Excavation or loading of sand, gravel, and clay Light operation : Mainly loading or loose gravel (e.g., cultivation or loading of sand or gravel) Prohibited combination : There are problems from the view points of strength and stability. •

Use the attachments recommended by NEW HOLLAND KOBELCO. The trouble due to the use in the condition "Use not allowed" described in the above table is not included in our responsibility

If any other bucket, except for the backhoe bucket, is turned over and used for excavation, damage to the arm and bucket may occur.

2-13


2. SPECIFICATIONS

2.9

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS

2.9.1

SPECIFICATIONS

Applicable machine

E215B, E215BLC

Engine model

HINO J05E-TG Water-cooled, 4 cycle 4 cylinder direct injection type diesel engine with inter cooler turbo-charger

Type Number of cylinderuBoreuStroke Total displacement

mm (in)

4 u 112 u 130 (4.41 u 5.12)

cc (cu•in)

5,123 (313)

Compression ratio Rated output

18.0 kW (PS) at min-1

114 (155) at 2,000

N•m (lb•ft) at min-1

572 (422) at 1,600

High idling

min-1

2,000 ± 30

Low idling

min

1,000 ± 30

Maximum torque

Injection starting pressure Thermostat action

-1

MPa (psi)

50 (7,250)

Start/Full open K (°F)

350 (170) / 363 (194)

Firing order Compression pressure

1-3-4-2 MPa (psi) at min-1

3.4~3.7 (493~537) at 280

Fuel injection timing

Valve clearance

Starter capacity Generator capacity (Alternator)

0° Valve clearance

Open

Close

Intake valve

0.3 mm at cool

14°before top dead point

30°after bottom dead point

Exhaust valve

0.45 mm at cool

54°before bottom 13°after top dead dead point point

V u kW

24 u 5.0

VuA

24 u 50 ø650 (25.6") u suction type 7 fans, V-belt drive, pulley ratio Crank / Fan= 0.89

Cooling fan drive method

Engine oil quantity

L (gal)

Full level 18.0 (4.76) Low level 15.0 (3.96) Total 20.5 (5.42)

Dry weight

kg (lbs)

580 (1,280)

g/kW•h (g/ps•h)

217 (160)

Fuel consumption ratio Allowable inclination (Limited by E/G lubrication) Dimension (LuWuH)

Front / Rear and Right / Left : 35° 1,063 u 725 u 995 (3ft-5.86in u 28.5in u 39.2in)

mm (in)

Rotating direction

Counterclockwise seeing from flywheel side

2-14


2. SPECIFICATIONS 2.9.2

ENGINE CHARACTERISTIC CURVE (HINO J05E-TG)

FUEL CONSUMPTION RATE

SHAFT OUTPUT

SHAFT TORQUE

Condition to be measured: The net value is indicated, measuring with cooling fan. marks show the rated point

ENGINE SPEED (min-1) Fuel consumption volume Fuel consumption rate X kW X Load factor ( ) 0.835 X 1000 217g/kW.h X 114kW X 0.835 X 1000 29.6

. L/h

2-15

: Standard load factor (0.70~0.80) Fuel consumption in regular operation (load factor 0.70~0.80) 20.7 L/h~23.7 L/h


2. SPECIFICATIONS

[MEMO]

2-16


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 3.1

BOOM ................................................................................................................................3-3

3.1.1

BOOM DIMENSIONAL DRAWING...........................................................................3-3

3.1.2

BOOM MAINTENANCE STANDARD.......................................................................3-4

3.2

ARM ...................................................................................................................................3-6

3.2.1

ARM DIMENSIONAL DRAWING..............................................................................3-6

3.2.2

ARM MAINTENANCE STANDARD ..........................................................................3-7

3.3

BUCKET ............................................................................................................................3-10

3.3.1

BUCKET DIMENSIONAL DRAWING .......................................................................3-10

3.3.2

BUCKET DIMENSIONAL TABLE .............................................................................3-10

3.3.3

LUG SECTION DIMENSIONAL DRAWING .............................................................3-11

3.3.4

BOSS SECTION DIMENSIONAL DRAWING...........................................................3-12

Book Code No. S5YN0322E01 3-1

3


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

July, 2007

n

n

n

n

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

3-2

Remarks S5YN0322E01 (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K K


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3.1

BOOM

3.1.1

BOOM DIMENSIONAL DRAWING

Fig. 3-1 Boom dimensional drawing Unit : mm (ft-in) 5.65M (18ft-6in) BOOM No

STD

YN02B00403F1

NAME

A

Boom length

B

DIMENSION 5,650 (18'6")

Boom foot width

670 (26.4")

C

Boom end inner width

347 (13.7")

D

Boom end outer width

482 (19")

E

Height of boom cylinder rod pin

1,008.5 (3'4")

F

Height of arm cylinder (head side) pin

1,203.5 (3'11")

G

Distance between pins of boss

R2,589 (8'6")

H

Distance between pins of bracket

R2,829.5 (9'3")

I

Arm cylinder (head side) inner width

126 (4.96")

J

Outer width of bracket on the arm cylinder (rod side) mounting

468 (18.4")

d1

Boom foot pin dia.

ø 90 (3.54")

d2

Boom cylinder (rod side) pin dia.

ø 85 (3.35")

d3

Pin dia. of boom end.

ø 90 (3.54")

d4

Arm cylinder (head side) pin dia.

ø 85 (3.35")

3-3


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS 3.1.2

BOOM MAINTENANCE STANDARD

(1) Clearance of pin and bushing on boom section

D

A C

B

Fig. 3-2 Clearance of pin and bushing on boom section Unit : mm (in) Standard value Symbol

Item

A

Boom foot

B

Boom cylinder (Head side)

C

Boom cylinder (Rod side)

D

Arm cylinder (Head side)

Pin part No.

Pin dia.

Pin dia. tolerance

Bushing i.d. tolerance

Clearance Standard value

Repaira Service Remedy ble limit level

+ 0.237 + 0.020 + 0.217 ø 90 (+0.0008) (+0.0085) (+0.0093) YN02B01719P1 + 0.051 + 0.071 (3.5433) - 0.020 (-0.0008) (+0.0028) (+0.0020) ø 85 YN02B01720P1 (3.3465)

+ 0.283 + 0.243 (0.011) (+0.010) + 0.085 + 0.085 (-0.0016) (+0.0033) (+0.0033) 0 - 0.040

+ 0.267 + 0.247 (+0.0097) (+0.0105) YN02B01721P1 + 0.073 + 0.020 + 0.093 (+0.0097) (+0.0037) ø 85 (+0.0008) (3.3465) - 0.020 + 0.272 + 0.252 (-0.0008) (+0.0099) (+0.0107) YN02B01722P1 + 0.077 - 0.099 (-0.0039) (+0.0030)

3-4

More than 2.0 (0.08)

2.5 (0.1)

Replace bushing or pin


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS (2) Clearance in thrust direction on the boom cylinder installation section

D

D

C C

A A

B B

SECTION C-C SECTION D-D SECTION A-A

SECTION B-B Fig. 3-3 Clearance in thrust direction on the boom cylinder installation section Unit : mm (in) Basic size Sec.

Item No. Boom

A-A Boom foot

Boom cylinder B-B (Head side)

C-C

Boom cylinder (Rod side)

Arm cylinder D-D (Head side)

L1

Size 670 (26.4)

Upper frame

676 (26.6)

Boom cylinder

105 (4.13)

L2 Upper frame Boom cylinder Boom

L3

105 (4.13)

L3'

468 (18.4)

Arm cylinder L4 Boom

111 (4.37)

120 (4.72) 126 (4.96)

Clearance X adjusted with shim (total of both sides) Standard value

Repairable level

Service limit

0.5 (0.02) or less 2.0 (0.08)

Pin length Remedy No. Length

PL1

831 (32.7)

PL2

241 (9.49)

2.5 (0.10)

0.6~1.0 (0.02~0.04)

0.6~2.0 (0.02~0.08)

3.0 (0.12)

4.0 (0.16)

PL3

736 (29.0)

0.6~1.0 (0.02~0.04)

2.0 (0.08)

2.5 (0.10)

PL4

260 (10.2)

3-5

Shim adjust ment


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3.2

ARM

3.2.1

ARM DIMENSIONAL DRAWING

VIEW J SECTION X-X

SECTION Z-Z

SECTION Y-Y

Fig. 3-4 ARM DIMENSIONAL DRAWING

2.94m (9ft-8in) ARM Code

YN12B00904F1

NAME

Unit : mm (ft-in)

DIMENSION

Code

NAME

DIMENSION

C

Arm length

2,940 (9'8")

N

Bracket inner width

126 (4.96")

D

Distance between pins of boss and bracket

R874 (34.4")

O

Bracket inner width

111 (4.37")

D1 I.D of boss

ø110 (4.33")

P

Idler link dimension

630 (24.8")

D2 I.D of boss

ø85 (3.35")

Q

Bucket link dimension

610 (24")

D4 I.D of boss

ø105 (4.13")

R

Height between pins of boss and center

31 (1.22")

E

Distance between pins of boss and bracket

R2,169 (7'1")

d1

Pin dia.

ø80 (3.15")

F

Distance between pins of boss and boss

R420 (16.5")

d2

Pin dia.

ø70 (2.76")

G

Height between pins of boss and bracket

665.5 (26.2")

d3

Pin dia.

ø85 (3.35")

H

Height between pins of boss and bracket

312 (12.3")

d4

Pin dia.

ø90 (3.54")

K

Arm top end boss width

325 (12.8")

d5

Pin dia.

ø80 (3.15")

L

Arm link section boss width

323 (12.7")

M

Boss width

342 (13.5")

3-6


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS 3.2.2

ARM MAINTENANCE STANDARD

(1) Clearance of pin and bushing

E

F

D, D'

B A

C

G

Fig. 3-5 Clearance of pin and bushing on arm section Unit : mm (in) Standard dimensions No.

A

Item

Pin part No.

Pin dia.

Arm point YN12B02215P1

ø80 (3.1496)

B

Bucket link (Bucket side)

C

Idler link (Connected part YN12B02216P1 of arm)

ø70 (2.7559)

D

Bucket link (Idler link side)

Pin dia. tolerance

–0.020 (-0.0008) –0.060 (-0.0024)

0 (0) –0.040 (-0.0016)

YN12B02217P1 D'

Bucket cylinder (Rod side)

ø80 (3.1496)

E

Bucket cylinder YN12B02218P1 (Head side)

F

Arm cylinder (Rod side)

YN02B01722P1

ø85 (3.3465)

G

Arm foot (Connected part YN12B02094P1 of boom)

ø90 (3.5433)

Standard value

+0.253 (+0.0100) +0.080 (+0.0031)

+0.313 (+0.0123) +0.100 (+0.0039)

+0.284 (+0.0112) +0.156 (+0.0061)

+0.364 (+0.0143) +0.0176 (+0.0069)

+0.253 (+0.0100) +0.194 (+0.0076)

+0.293 (+0.0115) +0.194 (+0.0076)

+0.232 (+0.009) +0.161 (+0.0063)

+0.272 (+0.0107) +0161 (+0.0063)

+0.278 (+0.0109) +0.141 (+0.0056)

+0.020 (+0.0008) –0.020 (-0.0008)

3-7

Clearance

Bushing i.d. tolerance

+0.318 (+0.0125) +0.141 (+0.0056) +0.298 (+0.0117) +0.161 (+0.0063)

+0.252 (+0.0099) +0.079 (+0.0031)

+0.272 (+0.0107) +0.059 (+0.0023)

+0.214 (+0.008) +0.067 (+0.003)

+0.234 (+0.0090) +0.047 (+0.0020)

Repairable level

Service limit

2.0 (0.08)

2.5 (0.01)

Remedy

Replace bushing or pin


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS (2) Clearance of arm and cylinder installing sections in thrust direction

E D, D'

B C

B A

A

D, D'

F G

C X1

L1

X

L3 X

PL1 SECTION A-A X2

L2

F

E

G

PL5 L5

X

PL3 SECTION C-C X

SECTION E-E

PL7 X7

L4

L6

PL6 SECTION F-F

L7

X4' L4' PL2 SECTION B-B

PL4 SECTION D-D

SECTION G-G

Fig. 3-6 Clearance of arm and cylinder installing sections in thrust direction

3-8


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS Unit : mm (in) Basic size Sec.

Item No. Arm

A-A Arm point

L1 Bucket Link side

B-B Bucket link

L2 Bucket

C-C

Idler link (Arm connection)

Bucket link D-D (Idler link connection)

D’-D’

E-E

Bucket link (Rod side)

Bucket cylinder (Head side)

Arm cylinder F-F (Rod side)

Arm

L3

Link side

325 (12.79)

L4’

323 (12.72) 105 (4.13)

Link side

111 (4.37)

Head side

105 (4.13)

L5 Arm

111 (4.37)

Rod side

120 (9.72)

L6 Arm

126 (4.96)

Arm

342 (13.46)

L7 Boom

Remedy

PL1 481 (18.9)

0.5 (0.02)

1.0 (0.04)

PL2

2.5 (0.10)

PL3

L4

Rod side

G-G Arm foot

2.0 (0.08)

327 (12.87) 323 (12.72)

Pin length

Standard Repairable Service limit No. Length level value

325 (12.79) 1.0 (0.04) or less 326 (12.83)

-

Rod side Link side

Size

Clearance X adjusted with shim (total of both sides)

347 (13.66)

0.6~1.0 (0.024~0.04)

0.6~2.0 (0.024~0.08)

0.5 (0.02)

3-9

427 (16.8)

2.0 (0.08)

3.0 (0.12)

1.0 (0.04)

PL4

PL5

235 (9.25)

PL6

260 (10.2)

PL7

505 (19.9)

4.0 (0.16)

2.5 (0.10)

Shim adjust -ment


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS

3.3

BUCKET

3.3.1

BUCKET DIMENSIONAL DRAWING

(1) Hoe bucket

Fig. 3-7 Bucket dimensional drawing No. A

NAME

No.

NAME

Distance between pin and bracket

G

Inner width of bucket bottom

B

Distance between bucket pin and tooth end

H

Bucket outer width of front side

C

Inner width of bucket top end

I

Pitch between teeth

D

Inner width of lug

Io

Pitch between teeth

E

Inner width of bracket

d1

Outer dia. of bushing

F

Outer width of side cutter

d2

Pin dia.

3.3.2

BUCKET DIMENSIONAL TABLE Unit : mm (ft-in)

Type

Hoe bucket

Capacity

[STD] 0.80 m3 (1.05 cu•yd)

0.51 m3 (0.67 cu•yd))

0.70 m3 (0.92 cu•yd))

0.93 m3 (1.21 cu•yd))

Part No.

YN61B00316F1

YN61B00287F1

YN61B00286F1

YN61B00288F1

A

R430 (16.9")

m

m

m

B

R1,440 (4'9")

m

m

m

C

1,003 (3'3")

712 (28")

925 (36.4")

1,176 (3'10")

D

399 (15.7")

m

m

m

E

327 (12.9")

m

m

m

F

1,157 (4')

868 (34.2")

1,079 (3'6")

1,330 (4'4")

G

863 (34")

572 (22.5")

785 (30.9")

1,036 (3'5")

H

1,057 (3'6")

766 (30.2")

979 (38.5")

1,230 (4')

I

224 (8.82")

300 (11.8")

203 (7.99")

266 (10.5")

IO

224 (8.82")

300 (11.8")

203 (7.99")

266 (10.5")

d1

ø 95 (3.74")

m

m

m

d2

ø 80 (3.15")

m

m

m

3-10


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS 3.3.3

LUG SECTION DIMENSIONAL DRAWING

B

X

J

A X 28 (1.10)

Apply rust prevention oil

19 (0.748)

N

BOSS YB61B01002P1

M

3-G B

F

D

E

H SHIM

1

Five shims are installed at shipping

Insert this pin flush with surface

BOSS YB61B01002P1

SECTION X-X

DETAIL B

Fig. 3-8 Dimension of lug section

Spring pin dia.

Boss outer dia.

Screw dia.

Boss width.

Boss outer dia.

Boss width.

Screw hole P.C.D

Part No. of bucket

Hole dia.

Capacity of bucket m3 (cu.yd)

Lug plate thickness

Type of bucket

Pin hole dia.

Unit : mm (ft-in)

A

B

D

E

F

G

H

J

M

N

[STD] Hoe bucket

0.80 (1.05)

YN61B00316F1

0.51 (0.67)

YN61B00287F1

0.70 (0.92)

YN61B00286F1

0.93 (1.21)

YN61B00288F1

80 25 95 13 180 (3.15") (0.984") (3.74") (0.512") (7.09")

3-11

M16

25 170 36 140 (0.984") (6.69") (1.42") (5.51")


3. ATTACHMENT DIMENSIONS 3.3.4

BOSS SECTION DIMENSIONAL DRAWING A

H

5 (0.197")

oD

oC

oB

oA

oG

15 (0.591")

E F

Fig. 3-9 Dimension of boss section Unit : mm (ft-in) Type

Capacity of

of

bucket

bucket

m3 (cu•yd)

Part No. of

Part No.

bucket

of boss

øA

øB

øC

øD

E

F

øG

H

I

[STD] Hoe bucket

0.80 (1.05)

YN61B00316F1

0.51 (0.67)

YN61B00287F1 YB61B01002P1

0.70(0.92)

YN61B00286F1

0.93(1.21)

YN61B00288F1

114.3

84

105.5

111.5

23

38

17

13

2.5

(4.50")

(3.31")

(4.15")

(4.39")

(0.91")

(1.50")

(0.669")

(0.512")

(0.098")

3-12


11. TOOLS

11

TABLE OF CONTENTS 11.1 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR CAPSCREWS AND NUTS............................................11-3 11.2 SCREW SIZE...................................................................................................................11-5 11.2.1

CAPSCREW (BOLT) ..............................................................................................11-5

11.2.2

CAPSCREW (SOCKET BOLT) ..............................................................................11-5

11.2.3

SOCKET SET SCREW...........................................................................................11-5

11.3 TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR HOSE AND FITTING .......................................................11-6 11.3.1

JOINT (O-RING TYPE)...........................................................................................11-6

11.3.2

HYDRAULIC HOSE (30° FLARE TYPE) ................................................................11-6

11.3.3

JOINT (ORS TYPE)................................................................................................11-6

11.3.4

SPLIT FLANGE ......................................................................................................11-6

11.4 TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR NUTS AND SLEEVES...................................................11-7 11.5 PLUG ...............................................................................................................................11-8 11.5.1

PLUG FOR HYDRAULIC PIPE JOINT ...................................................................11-8

11.5.2

PLUG FOR HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT .................................................................11-9

11.6 SPECIAL SPANNER FOR TUBE ....................................................................................11-11 11.7 SPECIAL TOOLS.............................................................................................................11-12 11.8 APPLICATION OF SCREW LOCKING COMPOUND AND SEALING COMPOUND......11-14 11.9 SUCTION STOPPER.......................................................................................................11-15 11.9.1

COMPONENTS ......................................................................................................11-15

11.9.2

DIMENSION ...........................................................................................................11-15

11.9.3

APPLICABLE MODEL ............................................................................................11-15

11.10 COUNTER WEIGHT LIFTING JIG ..................................................................................11-16 11.11 UPPER FRAME LIFTING JIG..........................................................................................11-17 11.12 ENGINE MOUNTING PEDESTAL...................................................................................11-18 11.13 TRACK SPRING SET JIG ...............................................................................................11-19

Book Code No. S5YN1122E01 11-1


11. TOOLS Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

July, 2007

n

n

n

n

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

11-2

Remarks S5YN1122E01 (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K K


11. TOOLS

11.1

TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR CAPSCREWS AND NUTS

Tables Table11-1 and Table11-2 indicate tightening torques applicable to cases where no special note is given. Overtightening of bolts may result in a twist-off and a fracture under load. Insufficient tightening may lead to a loosening or loss of bolts. Always tighten bolts to proper torques. Table11-1 Tightening torque for metric coarse threads (not plated) Unit : N•m (lbf•ft) Classification Nominal size

4.8T

7T

10.9T

No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication

M6

P=1

4.4±0.5 (3.2±0.4)

3.7±0.4 (2.7±0.3)

9.6±1.0 (7.1±0.7)

8.1±0.8 (6.0±0.6)

17.4±1.8 (12.8±1.3)

14.7±1.5 (10.8±1.1)

M8

P=1.25

10.7±1.1 (7.9±0.8)

9.0±0.9 (6.6±0.7)

23.5±2.0 (17.3±1.5)

19.6±2.0 (14.5±1.5)

42.2±3.9 (31.1±2.9)

35.3±3.9 (26.0±2.9)

M10

P=1.5

21.6±2.0 (15.9±1.4)

17.9±1.8 (13.2±1.3)

46.1±4.9 (34.0±3.6)

39.2±3.9 (28.9±2.9)

83.4±8.8 (61.5±6.5)

70.6±6.9 (52.1±5.1)

M12

P=1.75

36.3±3.9 (26.8±2.9)

31.4±2.9 (23.2±2.1)

79.4±7.8 (58.6±5.8)

66.7±6.9 (49.2±5.1)

143±15 (105±11)

121±12 (89.2±8.9)

M14

P=2

57.9±5.9 (42.7±4.4)

49.0±4.9 (36.1±3.6)

126±13 (92.9±9.6)

106±10 (78.2±7.4)

226±20 (167±15)

191±19 (141±14)

M16

P=2

88.3±8.8 (65.1±6.5)

74.5±6.9 (55.0±5.1)

191±20 (141±15)

161±16 (119±12)

343±39 (253±29)

284±29 (209±21)

M18

P=2.5

122±12 (90.0±8.9)

103±10 (75.8±7.2)

265±29 (195±21)

226±20 (167±15)

481±49 (355±36)

402±39 (297±29)

M20

P=2.5

172±17 (127±13)

144±14 (106±10)

373±39 (275±29)

314±29 (232±21)

667±69 (492±51)

559±59 (412±44)

M22

P=2.5

226±20 (167±15)

192±20 (142±15)

500±49 (369±36)

422±39 (311±29)

902±88 (665±65)

755±78 (557±58)

M24

P=3

294±29 (217±21)

235±29 (173±21)

637±69 (470±51)

520±49 (383±36)

1160±118 (856±87)

941±98 (694±72)

M27

P=3

431±39 (318±29)

353±39 (260±29)

941±98 (694±72)

765±78 (564±58)

1700±167 (1250±123)

1370±137 (1010±101)

M30

P=3.5

588±59 (434±44)

490±49 (361±36)

1285±127 (948±94)

1079±108 (796±80)

2300±235 (1700±173)

1940±196 (1430±145)

M33

P=3.5

794±78 (586±58)

667±69 (492±51)

1726±177 (1270±131)

1451±147 (1070±108)

3110±314 (2290±232)

2610±265 (1930±195)

M36

P=4

1030±98 (760±72)

863±88 (637±65)

2226±226 (1640±167)

1863±186 (1370±137)

4010±402 (2960±297)

3360±333 (2480±246)

11-3


11. TOOLS Table11-2 Tightening torques for metric fine threads (not plated) Torque value Unit : N•m (lbf•ft) Classification Nominal size

4.8T

7T

10.9T

No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication No lubrication Oil lubrication

M8

P=1.0

11.3±1.1 (8.3±0.8)

9.5±1.0 (7.0±0.7)

24.5±2.0 (18.1±1.5)

20.6±2.0 (15.2±1.5)

44.1±3.9 (32.5±2.9)

37.3±3.9 (27.5±2.9)

M10

P=1.25

22.6±2.0 (16.7±1.5)

18.7±1.9 (13.8±1.4)

48.1±4.9 (35.5±3.6)

41.2±3.9 (30.3±2.9)

87.3±8.8 (64.4±6.5)

73.5±6.9 (54.2±5.1)

M12

P=1.25

39.2±3.9 (28.9±2.9)

33.3±2.9 (24.6±2.1)

85.3±8.8 (62.9±6.5)

71.6±6.9 (52.8±5.1)

154±16 (114±12)

129±13 (95.2±9.6)

M16

P=1.5

92.2±8.8 (68.0±6.5)

77.5±7.8 (57.2±5.8)

196±20 (145±15)

169±17 (125±13)

363±39 (268±29)

304±29 (224±21)

M20

P=1.5

186±19 (137±14)

155±16 (114±12)

402±39 (297±29)

333±29 (246±21)

726±69 (535±51)

608±59 (448±44)

M24

P=2

314±29 (232±21)

265±29 (195±21)

686±69 (506±51)

569±59 (420±44)

1240±118 (915±87)

1030±98 (760±72)

M30

P=2

637±59 (470±44)

530±49 (391±36)

1390±137 (1030±101)

1157±118 (853±87)

2500±255 (1840±188)

2080±206 (1530±152)

M33

P=2

853±88 (629±65)

706±70 (521±52)

1860±186 (1370±137)

1550±155 (1140±114)

3350±334 (2470±246)

2790±275 (2060±203)

M36

P=3

1070±108 (789±80)

892±88 (658±65)

2330±226 (1720±167)

1940±196 (1430±145)

4200±422 (3100±311)

3500±353 (2580±260)

11-4


11. TOOLS

11.2

SCREW SIZE

11.2.1

CAPSCREW (BOLT)

Nominal screw size (d) M6

B mm Tool size 10

Nominal screw size (d)

B mm Tool size

M36

55

M8

13

M42

65

M10

17

M45

70

M12

19

M48

75

(M14)

22

M56

85

M16

27

(M60)

90

(M18)

27

M64

95

M20

30

(M68)

100

(M22)

32

M72

105

M24

36

M76

110

(M27)

41

M80

115

M30

46

11.2.2

B

CAPSCREW (SOCKET BOLT)

Nominal screw size (d)

B mm Tool size

Nominal screw size (d)

B mm Tool size

(M3)

2.5

M20

17

(M4)

3

(M22)

17

(M5)

5

M24

19

M6

5

(M27)

19

M8

6

M30

22

M10

8

M36

27

M12

10

M42

32

M14

12

(M45)

32

M16

14

M48

36

(M18)

14

M52

36

11.2.3

d

SOCKET SET SCREW

Nominal screw size (d)

B mm Tool size

Nominal screw size (d)

B mm

d

Tool size

M2.5

1.27

M8

4

M3

1.5

M10

5

M4

2

M12

6

M5

2.5

M16

8

M6

3

M20

10

B

11-5


11. TOOLS

11.3

TIGHTENING TORQUE FOR HOSE AND FITTING

11.3.1

JOINT (O-RING TYPE)

11.3.2

Size (PF)

Wrench (mm)

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

1/8

14

17±2 (13±1.5)

1/4

19

36±2 (27±1.5)

3/8

22

74±5 (55±4)

1/2

27

108±9.8 (80.0±7)

3/4

36

162±9.8 (119±7)

1

41

255±9.8 (188±7)

HYDRAULIC HOSE (30° FLARE TYPE) Size (PF)

Wrench(mm)

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

1/8

17

15±2.0 (11±1.5)

1/4

19

29±4.9 (21±3.6)

3/8

22

49±4.9 (36±3.6)

1/2

27

78±4.9 (58±3.6)

3/4

36

118±9.8 (87±7.2)

1

41

137±15 (101±11)

Unified screw size

Opposing flats

Tightening Torque N•m (lbf•ft)

1-14 UNS

30, 32

137±14 (101±10)

36

177±18 (131±13)

41

206±26 (152±15)

41

206±26 (152±15)

46

206±26 (152±15)

11.3.3

UNION NUT

JOINT (ORS TYPE)

1 3 / 16-12 UN 1 7/ 16-12 UN 11.3.4

SPLIT FLANGE Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) Standard pressure series 20.6 MPa

Bolt size

Hi pressure series 41.2 MPa

Bolt size

3/4

33.9±5.6 (25±4)

M10

39.5±5.6 (29±4)

M10

Size

1

42.4±5.6 (31±4)

M10

62.2±5.6 (46±4)

M12

11/4

55.1±7.1 (41±5)

M10

93.3±8.4 (69±6)

M14

11/2

70.6±8.4 (52±6)

M12

169±11 (125±8)

M16

2

81.9±8.4 (60±6)

M12

282±11 (208±8)

M20

11-6

CONNECTOR

O-RING

NUT

FITTING


11. TOOLS

11.4

TIGHTENING TORQUES FOR NUTS AND SLEEVES

Table11-3 indicates standard tightening torques applicable to cases where no particular note is given. Overtightening or undertightening of nuts and sleeves in FLARELESS JOINT may develop oil leaks through pipe connections. Always tighten nuts and sleeves to proper torques. Table11-3

Manufacturer's name

Nippon A.M.C.

Ihara Koatu

Working pressure MPa (psi)

Opposing flats (HEX) mm

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

ø10u1.5 (0.394u0.059)

19

49.0±9.8 (36±7.2)

ø15u2.0 (0.591u0.079)

27

118±12 (87±8.7)

ø18u2.5 (0.709u0.098)

32

147±15 (110±11)

ø22u3.0 (0.866u0.118)

36

216±22 (160±16)

ø28u4.0 (1.10u0.157)

41

275±27 (200±20)

ø35u5.0 (1.38u0.197)

55

441±44 (330±33)

Tube size OD u thickness mm (in)

29.4 (4270)

29.4 (4270)

SLEEVE

NUT B

d

d

Parts No.

Parts No.

Tube size ød

Ihara Koatu

Nippon A.M.C.

Tube size ød

Opposing flats (HEX) mm

Ihara Koatu

Nippon A.M.C.

6

ZF93S06000

6

14

ZF93N06000

8

ZF93S08000

8

17

ZF93N08000

10

ZF93S10000

ZA93S10000

10

19

ZF93N10000

ZA93N10000

12

ZF93S12000

12

22

ZF93N12000

15

ZF93S15000

ZA93S15000

15

27

ZF93N15000

ZA93N15000

18

ZF93S18000

ZA93S18000

18

32

ZF93N18000

ZA93N18000

22

ZF93S22000

ZA93S22000

22

36

ZF93N22000

ZA93N22000

28

ZF93S28000

ZA93S28000

28

41

ZF93N28000

ZA93N28000

32

ZF93S32000

32

50

ZF93N32000

35

ZF93S35000

ZA93S35000

35

55

ZF93N35000

ZA93N35000

38

ZF93S38000

38

60

ZF93N38000

11-7


11. TOOLS

11.5

PLUG

11.5.1

PLUG FOR HYDRAULIC PIPE JOINT

A

(1) Cap nut (Joint plug)

H1

H

T screw

Applicable tube O. D : A 6 8 10 12 15 18 22 28

Opposing flats

Cap nut parts No.

T screw

ZF83H06000 ZF83H08000 ZF83H10000 ZF83H12000 ZF83H15000 ZF83H18000 ZF83H22000 ZF83H28000

M12 X 1.5 M14 X 1.5 M16 X 1.5 M18 X 1.5 M22 X 1.5 M26 X 1.5 M30 X 1.5 M36 X 1.5

Applicable tube O. D : A

Plug parts No.

6 8 10 12 15 18 22 28

ZF83P06000 ZF83P08000 ZF83P10000 ZF83P12000 ZF83P15000 ZF83P18000 ZF83P22000 ZF83P28000

H1 14 17 17 19 24 27 32 38

H 14 17 19 22 27 32 36 41

A

(2) Plug (Tube plug)

Sleeve Type joint body

Nut

d screw

A

(3) Nut

Applicable tube O. D : A 6 8 10 12 15 18 22 28 32 35 38

11-8

Nut parts No.

d screw

Opposing flats

ZF93N06000 ZF93N08000 ZF93N10000 ZF93N12000 ZF93N15000 ZF93N18000 ZF93N22000 ZF93N28000 ZF93N32000 ZF93N35000 ZF93N38000

M12 X 1.5 M14 X 1.5 M16 X 1.5 M18 X 1.5 M22 X 1.5 M26 X 1.5 M30 X 1.5 M36 X 1.5 M42 X 1.5 M45 X 1.5 M48 X 1.5

14 17 19 22 27 32 36 41 50 55 60


11. TOOLS 11.5.2

PLUG FOR HYDRAULIC EQUIPMENT

(1) PF screw

O-ring

B PF screw Plug parts No. B mm O-ring parts No. Nominal O-ring 19 PF1/4 ZE72X04000 ZD12P01100 1B P11 22 PF3/8 ZE72X06000 ZD12P01400 1B P14 27 PF1/2 ZE72X08000 ZD12P01800 1B P18 36 PF3/4 ZE72X12000 ZD12P02400 1B P24 41 PF1 ZE72X16000 ZD12P02900 1B P29

PF screw (2) PT screw

PT screw

B PT screw Plug parts No. ZE82T02000 PT1/8 ZE82T04000 PT1/4 ZE82T06000 PT3/8 ZE82T08000 PT1/2 ZE82T12000 PT3/4 ZE82T16000 PT1 ZE82T20000 PT1 1/4 ZE82T24000 PT1 1/2

B mm 5 6 8 10 14 17 22 22

(3) Plug for (F) flare hose

PF screw

60

PF screw Plug parts No. 2444Z2728D1 PF1/4 2444Z2728D2 PF3/8 2444Z2728D3 PF1/2 2444Z2728D4 PF3/4 2444Z2728D5 PF1

60

Opposing flats B

PF screw PF1/4 PF3/8 PF1/2 PF3/4 PF1 PF1 1/4

PF screw

Opposing flats F

Opposing flats E

11-9

Plug parts No. 2444Z2729D1 2444Z2729D2 2444Z2729D3 2444Z2729D4 2444Z2729D5 2444Z2729D6

E mm 14 17 23 27 36 40

B mm 14 17 22 27 36

F mm 19 22 27 36 41 50


11. TOOLS (4) Plug for ORS joints Male

Female

(5) Plug for half clamp 4-oH

For standard pressure : 20.6 MPa (2990 psi) Size

Plug part No.

C mm D mm

1/2 ZE12Q08000 38.10

C

3/4 ZE12Q12000 47.63 1 D

ZE12Q16000 52.37

1 1/4 ZE12Q20000 58.72

G mm

25.53~ 25.40 31.88~ 22.23 31.75 39.75~ 26.19 39.62 44.58~ 30.18 44.45 17.48

H mm

O-ring part No.

9

45Z91D2

11

ZD12P02600

11

ZD12P03400

11

ZD12P03800

H mm

O-ring part No.

9

2445Z831D1

11

ZD12P02600

13

ZD12P03400

15

ZD12P03800

For high pressure : 41.2 MPa (5970 psi) G

Size

Plug part No.

C mm D mm

1/2 ZE13Q08000 40.49 3/4 ZE13Q12000 50.80 1

ZE13Q16000 57.15

1 1/4 ZE13Q20000 66.68

11-10

G mm

25.53~ 25.40 31.88~ 23.80 31.75 39.75~ 27.76 39.62 44.58~ 31.75 44.45 18.24


11. TOOLS

11.6

SPECIAL SPANNER FOR TUBE

Applicable tube diameter mm (in)

Part No.

HEX (mm)

Drawing of a special spanner mm (in)

70(2.76)

15 (0.591)

2421T160

16 (0.630)

27

22 (0.866)

(0.315)

12.7

40(1.57)

(0.500

)

70(2.76) 42(1.65)

18 (0.709)

2421T138

22 (0.866)

19 (0.748)

32

22(0.866)

48(1.89)

22 (0.866)

2421T130

12.7

22 (0.866) 12.7

60(2.36)

28 (1.10)

2421T115

2421T231

46

32 (1.26)

2421T232

50

35 (1.38)

2421T314

55

11-11

)

22 (0.866) 12.7

28 (1.10)

(0.500

109(4.29) 14.5(0.571)

29 (1.142)

41

)

70(2.76) 11.5(0.453)

23 (0.906)

36

(0.500

(0.500

)


11. TOOLS

11.7

SPECIAL TOOLS Table11-4

No.

Tools name

1

Allen wrench Nominal B : 10, C : 11.3

Tools No.

Shape

Applicable

ZT22A10000

Pump suction Commercial tool length (L1) - cut length = Required length

40 (1.57") - 10 (0.39") = 30 (1.18")

2

Spanner or socket Nominal B : 17

Pump install

General tools CUT

3

Spanner Nominal S : 36

ZT12A36000

Swing motor A,B port Commercial tool outer width (D) - cut length = Required length

81 (3.19") - 16 (0.63") = 65 (2.56")

4

Plug PF3/4

Additional M10 X 22 threading for M10 eye bolt

ZE72X12000

PF3/4

For slinging the swing motor

O-ring M12 Eye bolt

ZS91C01200 or commercial equivalent

For slinging the swing motor 22

5

Eye bolt M12u22

M12

M8 Eye bolt

6

Plug (Nominal tube dia. 22) Reference Eye bolt Nut

ZF83P22000 Reference nut

ZS91C00800 ZF93N22000

M8 X 18 Addtional threading for M8 Eye bolt

11-12

Flare hose


11. TOOLS Table11-4 M8 Eye bolt

7

Plug Nominal 1-14UNS

YN01H01001P1

Eye bolt

ZS91C00800

M8 X 18 Additional threading HEX 27

Flare hose

1-14UNS

M8 Eye bolt

Plug 8

YN01H01002P1

M8 X 18 Additional threading

Nominal 1 3/16-12UN Eye bolt

HEX 36

Flare hose

ZS91C00800 1 3/16-12UN

M12 Eye nut

9

Plug PF1/2

ZE25F08000 Weld

Coupling half

For slinging the swivel joint

Coupling half PF 1/2

10

TORX driver (with tamper proof) T30 (For M6)

5.49

—

Point shape

11-13

For instrument panel cover (RH)


11. TOOLS

11.8

APPLICATION OF SCREW LOCKING COMPOUND AND SEALING COMPOUND

(1) For general use Manufacturer

Service

Screw locking compound

Sealing compound

Features

Loctite

Three-Bond

#242

1360K

Low strength

#262

1374

Middle strength

#271

1305

High strength

#515

1215

Sealing

(2) For specific location No.

Use

Manufacturer

Name

Equivalent

Applicable

(Manufacturer ; Loctite) Three-Bond

1

Sealing Loctite compound & adhesive Loctite

# 1901

Anti-seizure

Cylinder

# 1215 gray

# 5699

Swing motor

# 1211 white

# 5301J

Swing motor

# 1303B

# 211

Main pump

(Manufacturer ; ThreeBond) # 222 # 277

# 1344N

Main pump

# 1307N

Pilot valve

(Manufacturer ; ThreeBond) Parmatex 98D

# 1121

Sumitomo Chemical Co., Cyano Bond PO-1 Ltd. Shell petroleum

Shell Alvania EP2

Hydraulic oil tank : Hose

New Molyknock Grease 2

11-14

Swing bearing grease bath


11. TOOLS

11.9

SUCTION STOPPER

11.9.1

COMPONENTS

No.

NAME

PARTS No.

Q'TY

SUCTION STOPPER ASSY 24100P978F2

1

ROD

2420T4660D1

1

2

NUT

ZN16C08007

1

3

COVER

2414T2123D2

1

4

O-RING

45Z91D6

1

1 Rod

2 Nut 3 Cover 4 O-ring

Fig. 11-1 Components of suction stopper 11.9.2

DIMENSION

50 (1.97")

R8

O113 (4.45")

(0.787") 20

O8 (1.315")

600 (23.6")

M8 NUT

O100 +0.5 0 (3.94 +0.0197 ) 0

M8

O108 (4.25") COVER

ROD Fig. 11-2 Dimension of suction stopper

24100P978F2

11-15

SK200-8

SK200-6ES

SK200-6E

SK200-6

SK235SR

SK135SR

SK115SR

SK120-3

SK100-3

SK120-2

Part No.

SK100-2

Applicable model

SK120

APPLICABLE MODEL

SK100

11.9.3

2


11. TOOLS

11.10

COUNTER WEIGHT LIFTING JIG

(1) Standard eye bolt

Size Part No. d L M8 15 ZS91C00800

80 (176)

M10 18 ZS91C01000

150 (331)

M12 22 ZS91C01200

220 (485)

M16 27 ZS91C01600

450 (992)

Vertical lifting load kg (lbs)

L

M20 30 ZS91C02000 630 (1390) M24 38 ZS91C02400 950 (2090)

d

M30 45 ZS91C03000 1500 (3310) M36 55 ZS91C03600 2300 (5070) M42 65 ZS91C04200 3400 (7490) M48 70 ZS91C04800 4500 (9920) Fig. 11-3 Eye bolt

11-16


11. TOOLS

11.11

UPPER FRAME LIFTING JIG

Q'ty : 2 sets Material : Mild steel Fig. 11-4 Upper frame lifting jig

11-17


11. TOOLS

11.12

ENGINE MOUNTING PEDESTAL Material : Wood Unit ; mm (inch)

245 (9.65)

6

744 (29.3)

2 750 (29.5)

375 (14.8)

400 (15.7) 175(6.89)

240 (9.45)

120 120 (4.72) (4.72)

175(6.89)

3

375 (14.8)

1

6

6 100 (3.94)

945 (37.2)

5 6

6

2 X 1 piece

4 X 1 piece

400 (15.7)

352 (13.9)

200(7.87)

213(8.39) 250(9.84)

0 R5 .0) (2 t 24 (0.95)

t 24 (0.95)

5 X 1 piece

3 X 1 piece

670 (26.4)

400 (15.7)

120 (4.72)

945 (37.2)

6 X 5 pieces t 24 (0.95)

R5 (2. 0 0)

10(0.39)

100(3.94)

t50 (2.0)

Fig. 11-5 Engine stand

11-18

10(0.39) 190 (7.48)

t 24 (0.95)

90 (3.5)

(2.2)

145 (5.71)

352 (13.9)

200 (7.87) 55

352 (13.9)

50(2.0)

25 (0.98)120 (4.72) 5(0.2)

t 50 (2.0)

1 X 1 piece

670 (26.4) 430 (16.9)

200 (7.9) 55 (2.2)

300 (11.8)

750 (29.5)

275 (10.8)


11. TOOLS

TRACK SPRING SET JIG M30

Retainer nut

Retainer plate )

.6"

(27.6")

(12

Stand (15.0")

11.13

Hydraulic jack

Base Fig. 11-6 Track spring set jig

11-19


11. TOOLS

[MEMO]

11-20


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE TABLE OF CONTENTS 12.1 STANDARD WORKING TIME TABLE FOR THE MAINTENANCE OF EXCAVATOR ...12-4 12.2 ENGINE MAINTENANCE SERVICE STANDARD TIME LIST (TEMPORARY EDITION) ................................................................................................12-15 12.2.1

MEASURING METHOD .........................................................................................12-15

12.2.2

WORKING CONDITION .........................................................................................12-15

12.2.3

STANDARD TIME CONSTITUENT ........................................................................12-15

12.2.4

MEANING OF WORDS IN USE .............................................................................12-17

Book Code No. S5YN1221E01 12-1

12


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

March, 2007

n

July, 2007

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

12-2

Remarks S5YN1221E01 (NHK Russia) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K K K


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE PREFACE (1) Working Conditions 1) Workers : More than one worker shall be 1st class service technician (having five years or more of field experience and having received training in the operation). 2) Equipment : Jigs, tools, apparatuses and testers used in field service work shall be available commercially. The maintenance plant shall be equipped with a service shop, a crane and inspection apparatuses necessary for specific self inspection activities. 3) Place : A flat land where work may be performed and to which a service car or a truck crane is accessible. (2) Range of standard maintenance time 1) Standard maintenance time=Direct maintenance timeuPreparation time 2) Direct maintenance time : Net time actually spent for maintenance 3) Spare time : Time needed to move machines for service, prepare safety operations, discuss work, and process the needs of the body. (3) Extra time (not included in the standard service time) 1) Repair time : Machining, sheet metal, welding, melt cutting, folding and extracting bolts, servicing parts, and painting. 2) Items excluded from service time because of uncertainty in time : Receiving a vehicle into shop, transfer, delivery, inspection on completion, investigation of causes of faults, diagnosis, and inspection. 3) Indirect time : Time for ; field work, preparation of necessary parts before leaving for work, return for field work, waiting time because of user’s convenience in the field, paper work after returning to shop, and preparation of bills. 4) Special time : Work at early morning, at midnight and on holidays are to be calculated separately. 5) Separate calculation : The operating time for service cars, trucks with a crane and crane trucks. (4) Applicable machine for estimation of standard maintenance time 1) Standard machine 2) A well maintained and controlled machine with a standard combination of attachments which is used in a general environment.

12-3


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

12.1

STANDARD WORKING TIME TABLE FOR THE MAINTENANCE OF EXCAVATOR

(1) Standard maintenance time table 1) Units of working time : 6 minutes = 0.1 hour 2) Calculating method of standard maintenance time : Maintenance time=Working timeuNumber of workers (Working time=Maintenance timeyNumber of workers) 3) When more than one operation is going on : Add each standard service time. A pure time (readily started) is given except covers easily removed by hand. Assy works include the following works marked with black dot •. 4) O/H : The removing and attaching time is not included. 5) Abbreviations in the table. A/C

: Air conditioner

C/V

: Control valve

O/H

: Over haul

ASSY

: Assembly

Cyl

: Cylinder

SOL

: Solenoid

ATT

: Attachment

E/G

: Engine

SW

: Switch

BRG

: Bearing

F hose

: Flexible hose

V

: Valve

(2) Classification of working code No.

Group

Remarks

01

Attachment

Indicates installing, removing, replacement and overhaul.

02

Cab & Guard

03

Swing frame

04

Travel system

06

Electric equipments

Indicates the installing, removing and replacement of single items.

09

E/G relation

Indicates overhaul of the single engine. (Materials prepared by manufacturer )

(3) Conditions for standard service time of the engine 1) Tools designated by E/G maker are used 2) Genuine parts are changed 3) Correct working procedures are observed. •

The time required for works specified in this Chapter shows the total time for maintenance.

12-4


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

01 Attachment

Group

Location

Work to be done

Unit

Remarks

Unit : Hour

00

Bucket relation

01

Bucket ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

02

Preparation

1 pc.

03

• Bucket attaching pin

Detach/attach

1

04

• Bucket drive pin

Detach/attach

1

0.1

05

• Bucket sling and movement

Preparation

1 pc.

0.2

06

Bucket (single)

O/H

1 pc.

07

• Tooth

Replace

1 pc.

0.6

08

• Side cutter

Replace

1 pc.

1.2

09

• Bushing

Replace

1 pc.

0.6

10

Arm relation

11

Arm ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

1.2

12

• Bucket cylinder attaching and detaching position and piping

Preparation

1 pc.

0.4

13

• Bucket cylinder rod pin

Detach/attach

1 pc.

Include stopper pin

0.1

14

• Bucket cylinder head pin

Detach/attach

1 pc.

Include stopper pin

0.1

15

• Bucket cylinder assy

Detach/attach

1 pc.

16

• Arm cylinder rod pin

Detach/attach

1 pc.

Include stopper pin

0.1

17

• Boom top pin

Detach/attach

1 pc.

Include wire stop pin.

0.1

18

• Arm sling and movement

Detach/attach

1 pc.

30

Boom relation

Bucket attaching and detaching position

See 32.1.2 Include adjustment.

0.6 0.1

Include stopper pin.

Not include attaching and detaching

0.1

2.4

See 32.1.3

0.1

0.2 See 32.1.4

31

Boom ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

1.4

32

• Boom attaching and detaching position Preparation

1 pc.

0.1

33

• Boom cylinder temporary slinging

Preparation

2 pcs.

0.2

34

• Boom cylinder rod pin

Detach/attach

2

35

• Boom cylinder piping

Detach/attach

2 pc.

0.2

36

• Arm & bucket piping

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

37

• Boom assy temporary slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

38

• Boom foot pin

Detach/attach

1

39

• Boom assy slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

40

Arm cylinder attaching and detaching Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.4

41

• Arm cylinder piping

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

42

• Arm cylinder head pin

Detach/attach

1 pc.

43

• Arm cylinder slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

50

Boom cylinder attaching and detaching

Detach/attach

2 pcs.

0.7

51

• Boom cylinder piping

Detach/attach

2

0.3

52

• Boom cylinder head pin

Detach/attach

2 pcs.

0.2

53

• Boom cylinder slinging

Detach/attach

2

0.2

60

Bucket cylinder

O/H

1

3.6

61

• Pin bushing

Replace

1

70

Arm cylinder

O/H

1

12-5

Include two stopper pins.

Include stopper pin.

Include stopper pin.

Include seal.

0.2

0.2

0.1

1.2 3.6


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

Group

02 Cab & Guard

01

71

Location • Pin bushing

Work to be done

Unit

Replace

1 set

Remarks

Unit : Hour

Include seal.

1.2

Include seal.

1.2

80

Boom cylinder

O/H

2

81

• Pin bushing

Replace

1 set

7.0

10

Cab relation

11

Cab ASSY

Detach/attach

12

• Front lower glass, floor mat

Detach/attach 1 pc. each

0.1

13

• Seat rear cover top, bottom

Detach/attach

4 places

0.2

14

• Seat rear cover top, bottom

Detach/attach 1 pc. each

0.2

15

• Right side panel (include A/C duct) Detach/attach

3

0.3

16

• Cable and harness (electric)

Detach/attach

6

0.2

17

• Cab mounting bolt

Detach/attach

8 pcs.

0.2

18

• Cab slinging

Detach/attach

3 places

0.2

20

Guard relation

21

Bonnet assy (11)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

22

Guard (5)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

23

Guard (6)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

24

Guard assy (3)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

25

Stay (7)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

26

Guard (2)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

27

Panel assy (21)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

28

Panel assy (23)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

29

Panel assy (22)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

30

Guard assy (16)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

31

Guard (14)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

32

Guard (15)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

33

Guard (17)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

34

Pillar (11)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

35

Beam (4)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

36

Pillar (10)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

37

Pillar (12)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

38

Guard assy (18)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

39

Guard assy (13)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

40

Guard (19)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

41

Cover (2)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

42

Guard assy (1)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

43

Guard assy (3)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

44

Plate (20)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

45

Cover assy (1)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

See 33.1.2 1 pc.

1.4

See 33.1.4

Note: The numbers in the parenthesis like guard (14) match the guard numbers on the upper structure.

12-6


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

03 Swing frame

02 Cab & Guard

Group

Location

Work to be done

Unit

Remarks

Unit : Hour

50

Under cover relation

See 33.1.5

51

Cover (1)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

52

Cover (2)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

53

Cover (3)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

54

Cover (4)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

55

Cover (5)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

56

Cover (6)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

57

Cover (7)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

58

Cover (8)

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

60

Counterweight relation

61

Counterweight ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.6

62

• Counterweight lifting eye bolt

Detach/attach

1 set

0.1

63

• Counterweight temporary slinging

Preparation

1 pc.

0.2

64

• Counterweight mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

65

• Counterweight slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

10

Intake relation

11

Air cleaner ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.4

12

• Hose (3)

Detach/attach

1

0.1

13

• Air cleaner mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1 set

0.2

14

• Element

Replace

1

0.1

20

Exhaust relation

21

Muffler ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.4

22

• U bolt

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

23

• Clamp ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

30

Radiator relation

31

Radiator ASSY

32

• Coolant (LLC)

33

See 33.1.11

See 33.1.9

See 33.1.10

See 33.1.12 Detach/attach

1 pc.

4.0

Replace

1 pc.

0.3

• • Concentration of coolant

Measuring

1 pc.

0.2

34

• A/C condenser

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.3

35

• Stay

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

36

• Bracket

Detach/attach

1

0.3

37

• Sub tank hose

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

38

• Fan guard

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.3

39

• Water hose (radiator ~ E/G)

Detach/attach

2

0.5

40

• Radiator mounting bolts removing

Detach/attach

1 set

0.2

41

• Under cover

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

42

• Hydraulic oil tank suction stopper

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

43

• Hydraulic oil piping

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.6

Note: The numbers in the parenthesis like cover (2) match the guard numbers on the upper structure.

12-7


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

03 Swing frame

Group

Location

Work to be done

Unit

Remarks

Unit : Hour

44

• Inter cooler hose & tube (E/G to inter cooler)

Detach/attach

2 pcs.

0.5

45

• Radiator lifting or hoisting

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

46

• Radiator inter cooler core & oil cooler

Cleaning

1 pc.

1.0

50

Fuel relation

51

Fuel tank ASSY

52

• Fuel

53

See 33.1.6 Detach/attach

1 pc.

1.8

Replace

1 pc.

0.3

• Hose (water separator side)

Detach/attach

2

0.1

54

• Water separator

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

55

• Tube (tank side)

Detach/attach

1

0.1

57

• Fuel tank installing bolts

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.3

58

• Tank slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.3

Other necessary works

Detach/attach

1 pc.

Removing and installing guard

0.4

60

Hydraulic oil tank relation

61

Hydraulic oil tank ASSY

Detach/attach

65

• Cover

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

66

• Hydraulic oil

Replace

1 pc.

0.5

68

• Pilot drain hose

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

69

• Pump suction hose

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.5

70

• Mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

71

• Hydraulic oil tank slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.3

72

• Return filter

Replace

1

0.2

73

• Suction filter

Cleaning

1

0.2

80

Pump relation

81

Pump ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

3.2

82

• Hydraulic oil tank cover

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.2

83

• Strainer & stopper

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.3

84

• Piping

Detach/attach

1 set

1.0

85

• Guard

Detach/attach

5 pcs.

1.0

86

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.5

87

• Cleaning

Cleaning

1 pc.

0.1

88

• Vent air

Adjust

1 pc.

0.1

89

Pump ASSY

O/H

1 pc.

4.0

90

Swing motor unit relation

91

Swing motor ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

2.4

92

• Piping

Detach/attach

1 set

1.0

93

• Mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.7

94

• Unit slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.5

95

• Cleaning and sealant

Cleaning

1 set

0.2

Pump slinging

See 33.1.7 1 pc.

3.0

See 33.1.8

See 33.1.18

12-8


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

Group

Location

Work to be done

Unit

Unit : Hour

96

Swing motor

O/H

1 pc.

3.6

97

Swing reduction gear

O/H

1 pc.

4.2

100 Swivel joint relation

See 33.1.19

101 Swivel joint ASSY

Detach/attach

1

2.6

102 • Piping (Top part only)

Detach/attach

1 set

0.5

103 • Whirl stop bolt

Detach/attach

1

0.2

104 • Cover

Detach/attach

1

0.4

105 • Joint & elbow

Detach/attach

1 set

0.4

106 • Mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1 set

0.4

107 • Swivel joint slinging

Detach/attach

1

0.4

108 • Cleaning

Cleaning

1 set

0.3

109 Swivel joint

O/H

1 set

Removing and installing guard

3.6

Detach/attach

1 set

Lower piping

0.6

Other necessary works 120 Main control valve 03 Swing frame

Remarks

See 33.1.15

121 Main control valve ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

2.5

122 • Attach tag to port name of pipe

Preparation

1 pc.

0.6

123 • Piping

Detach/attach

1 set

1.7

124 • Bracket mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

125 •

Valve slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

126 Main control valve ASSY

Detach/attach

1 set

6.0

Detach/attach

1 set

Other necessary works

Guard

130 Valve relation

0.4 OPT

131 Solenoid valve ASSY

Detach/attach

1

1.0

132 • Attach tag to port name of pipe

Preparation

1

0.2

133 • Piping

Detach/attach

1 set

0.5

134 • Mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1

0.3

140 Engine (E/G) mounting relation

See 33.1.13

141 Engine ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

142 • Harness connector & grounding & cable connection

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.3

143 • Fuel hose

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.1

144 • Others

Detach/attach

1 set

0.5

145 • Mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.5

146 • Engine slinging

Detach/attach

1 set

0.2

Cleaning

1 pc.

0.3

147 • Cleaning

12-9

After removing pump & radiator

1.8


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

Group

Location

148 Engine

03 Swing frame

Other necessary works

Unit

Remarks

O/H

1 set

Reference for engine (Chapter 51)

Detach/attach

1 set

Removing and installing guard

0.6

Detach/attach

1 set

Removing and installing Counterweight

0.6

Detach/attach

1 set

Removing and installing pump

3.2

Detach/attach

1 set

Removing and installing air cleaner 0.4

Detach/attach

1 set

Removing and installing muffler

0.4

Detach/attach

1 set

Removing and installing radiator

4.0

150 Upper frame

Unit : Hour

See 33.1.20

151 Upper frame ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

152 • Mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1 set

0.4

153 • Upper frame slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.4

154 • Cleaning

Cleaning

1 pc.

0.3

155 • Sealant

Apply

1 pc.

0.2

Detach/attach

1 set

Cab

1.4

Detach/attach

1 set

Guard

0.4

Detach/attach

1 set

Counterweight

0.6

Detach/attach

1 set

Boom

1.4

Other necessary works

04 Travel system

Work to be done

After removing swivel joint

1.3

00

Travel relation

01

Track link ASSY

Detach/attach

02

Preparation One side

0.1

03

• Master pin

Detach/attach

One side

0.5

04

• Track link extending and winding

Detach/attach

One side

0.5

05

Shoe plate

Replace

1 pc.

0.4

10

Upper roller relation

11

Upper roller ASSY

12

Upper roller

20

Lower roller relation

21

Lower roller ASSY

22

Lower roller

30

Front idler relation

31

Front idler ASSY

Detach/attach

One side After removing track link

0.6

32

Front idler ASSY slinging

Detach/attach

One side

0.3

33

Front idler ASSY

Detaching One side

0.3

34

Idler ASSY

O/H

One side

1.0

35

Idler adjuster ASSY

O/H

One side Replace spring

2.4

36

• Grease cylinder

O/H

One side

0.6

Track link attaching and detaching position

See 34.1.2 One side Include adjustment of tension

1.5

See 34.1.3 Detach/attach

1

O/H

1

After removing track link

0.2 1.0

See 34.1.4 Detach/attach

1

0.2

O/H

1

1.5 See 34.1.5

12-10


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

04 Travel system

Group

Location

Work to be done

Unit

Remarks

Unit : Hour

40

Sprocket

See 34.1.6

41

Sprocket

50

Travel motor relation

51

Travel motor ASSY

Detach/attach

One side After removing track link

1.7

52

• Motor cover

Detach/attach

One side

0.1

53

• Hydraulic piping

Detach/attach

One side

0.9

54

• Motor mounting bolt

Detach/attach

One side

0.5

55

• Motor slinging

Detach/attach

One side

0.1

56

Motor cleaning

Cleaning

One side

0.1

57

Travel motor

O/H

One side

3.6

58

Travel reduction gear

O/H

One side

3.6

60

Swivel joint relation

61

Pipe on swivel joint travel side

Detach/attach

1 pc.

Include bonnet assy removing and installing.

0.6

62

Swivel joint

O/H

1 pc.

See 33.2.6

3.6

70

Swing bearing

71

Swing bearing ASSY

Detach/attach

1 pc.

72

Swing bearing mounting bolt

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.5

73

Swing bearing slinging

Detach/attach

1 pc.

0.3

C-1 Controller (KPSS)

Replace

1

0.5

C-2 Gauge cluster

Replace

1

1.0

C-4 Air conditioner Amplifier

Replace

1

2.0

D-4 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-5 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-6 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-9 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-10 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-12 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-13 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-14 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-15 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-16 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-17 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-18 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-19 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

D-20 Diode

Replace

1

0.3

Replace

One side After removing track link

0.6

See 34.1.7

See 34.1.8 After removing upper frame

0.7

Controller

06 Electric equipments

Diode

12-11


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE Unit : Hour

Work to be done

Unit

E-1 Fuse & relay box

Replace

1

0.3

E-2 Alternator

Replace

1

1.0

E-3 Hour meter

Replace

1

0.3

E-5 Horn (High)

Replace

1

0.3

E-6 Horn (Low)

Replace

1

0.3

E-7 Tuner

Replace

1

0.3

E-8 Speaker left

Replace

1

0.3

E-9 Speaker right

Replace

1

0.3

E-10 Receiver dryer

Replace

1

Include gas sealing.

1.0

E-11 Air compressor

Replace

1

Include Counterweight removing and installing.

1.0

E-12 Battery

Replace

2

0.4

E-13 Travel alarm (Middle east)

Replace

1

0.3

E-14 Cigarette lighter

Replace

1

0.3

E-15 Fusible link

Replace

1

0.2

E-22 DC-DC converter

Replace

1

0.3

E-23 12V socket

Replace

1

0.3

E-27 Accel redundant volume

Replace

1

0.3

L-1 Boom work light left

Replace

1

L-2 Work light right

Replace

1

0.2

L-5 Room light

Replace

1

0.2

L-6 Boom cylinder work light (right)

Replace

1

0.2

L-7 Cab work light

Replace

1

0.2

M-1 Starter motor

Replace

1

M-3 Wiper motor

Replace

1

0.5

M-4 Washer motor

Replace

1

0.5

M-8 Grease motor (OPT)

Replace

1

0.5

M-9 Skylight wiper motor (OPT)

Replace

1

0.5

Replace

1

0.5

Group

Location

Remarks

06 Electric equipments

Electric equipments

Light Bulb

0.2

Motor Include Counterweight removing and installing.

1.0

Proportional valve PSV-A Arm variable recirculation proportional valve PSV-B

P2 bypass cut proportional valve

Replace

1

PSV-C

Travel straight proportional valve

Replace

1

0.5

PSV-D

P1 bypass cut proportional valve

Replace

1

0.5

PSV-P1

P1 pump proportional valve

Replace

1

0.5

PSV-P2

P2 pump proportional valve

Replace

1

0.5

12-12

Include proportional valve block removing and installing.

0.5


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE Unit : Hour

Work to be done

Unit

R-1 Battery relay

Replace

1

0.3

R-2 Starter relay

Replace

1

0.3

R-3 Glow relay

Replace

1

0.3

R-4 Safety relay

Replace

1

0.1

R-5 Horn relay

Replace

1

0.1

R-6 Work light relay

Replace

1

0.1

R-8 Travel alarm relay (Middle east)

Replace

1

0.1

R-23 Auto idle stop relay 1

Replace

1

0.1

R-24 Auto idle stop relay 2

Replace

1

0.1

R-25 E/G emergency stop relay

Replace

1

0.1

R-26 Safety lock lever relay

Replace

1

0.1

R-28 Alternator relay

Replace

1

0.1

R-29 Wiper motor relay (Normal rotation)

Replace

1

0.1

R-30 Wiper motor relay (Reverse rotation)

Replace

1

0.1

R-31 Wiper motor relay arc prevention relay

Replace

1

0.1

R-32 Washer motor relay

Replace

1

0.1

SE-1 Pressure sensor : Bucket digging

Replace

1

0.3

SE-2 Pressure sensor : Bucket dump

Replace

1

0.3

SE-3 Pressure sensor : Boom up

Replace

1

0.3

SE-4 Pressure sensor : Boom down

Replace

1

0.3

SE-5 Pressure sensor : Swing

Replace

1

0.3

SE-7 Pressure sensor : Arm in

Replace

1

0.3

SE-8 Pressure sensor : Arm out

Replace

1

0.3

SE-9 Pressure sensor : Travel right

Replace

1

Include under cover removing and installing

0.5

SE-10 Pressure sensor : Travel left

Replace

1

Include under cover removing and installing

0.5

SE-11 Pressure sensor : P2 side OPT.

Replace

1

Include under cover removing and installing

0.5

SE-13 Engine speed sensor

Replace

1

Include under cover removing and installing

0.5

SE-15 Engine water temperature sensor

Replace

1

Include guard removing and installing

0.5

SE-16 Accel potentio

Replace

1

SE-20 Pressure sensor : P1 side : P1 side (OPT.)

Replace

1

SE-22 Pressure sensor : P1 pump

Replace

1

0.5

SE-23 Pressure sensor : P2 pump

Replace

1

0.5

SV-1 Swing parking SOL

Replace

1

Include proportional valve block removing and installing.

0.5

SV-2 Attachment boost pressure SOL

Replace

1

Include proportional valve block removing and installing.

0.5

SV-3 2-speed travel SOL

Replace

1

Include proportional valve block removing and installing.

0.5

SV-4 Safety lever lock SOL

Replace

1

Include proportional valve block removing and installing.

0.5

Group

Location

Remarks

06 Electric equipments

Relay

Sensor

0.5 Include under cover removing and installing

0.5

Solenoid

12-13


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE Work to be done

Unit

SW-1 Key switch

Replace

1

0.3

SW-4 Swing parking release switch

Replace

1

0.3

SW-7 Engine oil pressure switch

Replace

1

0.3

SW-8 Clogged air filter switch

Replace

1

0.3

SW-10

Horn switch (left)

Replace

1

0.3

SW-11

Safety lever lock switch

Replace

1

0.3

SW-13

Travel alarm switch (For middle east)

Replace

1

0.3

SW-19

Wiper interlock switch

Replace

1

0.3

SW-20

Attachment power boost switch (right)

Replace

1

0.3

SW-26

Cab work light switch

Replace

1

0.3

SW-27

Engine cooling coolant level switch

Replace

1

0.3

SW-55

Boom work light switch

Replace

1

0.3

Group

Location

Remarks

Unit : Hour

06 Electric equipments

Switch

12-14


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

12.2

ENGINE MAINTENANCE SERVICE STANDARD TIME LIST (TEMPORARY EDITION)

Preface This standard working time is based on the work time required for service of engine like disassembly, check, adjustment and assembly and so on under a following condition. This standard working time is provided under the following conditions. 12.2.1

MEASURING METHOD

(1) The time from the worker beginning working at the regular position of machine to the returning to the regular position after completion of the work is counted as working time. (2) The measuring unit is in 0.1 minute, and then round up the fractions. (3) The work is carried out by a couple of workmen as a general rule, and the man-hour of two workers is counted as the working time. But light work which can be carried out easily by a person and the efficient is higher is counted as a workman. 12.2.2 12.2.2.1

WORKING CONDITION TOOLS, INSTRUMENT

(1) Hand tool ; Tools which are commercially available and each workman usually carries (2) Common tool ; Tools which are commercially available and each workman do not usually carry but the storing place is specified (3) Special tool ; Tools especially prepared by HINO Motor’s Ltd. and the storing place is specified (4) Machine tool ; When measuring equipment and instrument are used, the time required to move parts to the specified place is included but the time waiting for tool is not included as a general rule 12.2.2.2

WORKING PROCEDURE

The disassembly and assembly should be carried out according to working procedure prepared by HINO Motor’s Ltd. Service Technical Dept. Training Group. 12.2.2.3

STANDARD WORKMAN QUALIFICATION

Workmen shall basically acquire 2~3 years of maintenance experience of HINO 12.2.3 12.2.3.1

STANDARD TIME CONSTITUENT STANDARD WORKING TIME = NET WORKING TIME + STANDARD TIME + STANDARD ALLOWANCE TIME

(1) Net working time The time workman works actually and the time required for measurement, cleaning, and so on is included, but the time required for troubleshooting is not included (2) Standard time Time required for preparation to the beginning of work, preparation of special tool, measuring equipment, parts and so on, and for the work site clean-up. (3) Standard allowance time Calculate the allowance time directly required for workmen from the following equation. Net standard time u HINO allowance rate Allowance rate varies within the range of 0.15 ~ 0.75 according to the work difficulty, contents, working position and so on.

12-15


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE 12.2.3.2 12.2.3.2.1

ALLOWANCE RATE, STANDARD PREPARATION TIME HINO allowance rate (0.15~0.75)

(1) Basic rate : 0.10 (2) Working posture allowance (Fatigue coefficient) : Take any one of the followings according to the work contents. Standing work : 0.05 Work in bent posture : 0.10 Work while lying : 0.15 (3) Difficult work allowance : 0.30 (4) Seized rusted section (For new vehicle) : 0.50 Take any one of above (3) and (4). Min. allowance rate = Basic allowance + standing work allowance = 0.1+ 0.05 = 0.15 Max. allowance rate = Basic allowance + work allowance in lying + seized rusted section = 0.1 + 0.15 + 0.5=0.75 12.2.3.2.2

STANDARD WORKING TIME

(1) Working standard time : 3 minutes (One time for a set of works) (2) Special tool standard time : 3 minutes (One time for a set of works) (3) Standard time of non-portable machine : 3 minutes (For single work) (4) Part standard time : 6 minutes (up to 10 items), 10 minutes (10 items or more) (One time for a set of works) (5) Test : 15 minutes (One time for a set of works) (6) Preparation time for chain block, measuring instrument, piston, heater and so on : 3 minutes (One time for a set of works) (7) General cleaning : 2 minutes (One time for a set of works) (8) Safety treatment like wheel stopper, and so on : 3 minutes (9) Visual checks : 2 minutes The preparation time is classified into as described above, and only items required for the every work are selected, calculated and counted as preparation time of the work.

12-16


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE 12.2.4

MEANING OF WORDS IN USE

• Completed machine : When detaching, replacing and adjusting the specified parts, it means the time which is determined by addition of the preparation time, net working time and standard allowance time of the work. • Single unit : When detaching, replacing and adjusting the specified parts, it means the time in which the preparation time of the work is omitted and which is determined by addition and subtraction to/from the work for "Completed machine". • Removal and installation : The work to remove specified parts from machine and to attach the parts, and then to perform necessary adjustment • Simultaneous replacement : The work to remove specified parts in 2 types or more from machine and to attach the spare parts, and then to perform necessary adjustment • Adjustment : The work to carry out necessary adjustment with the specified parts removed or attached : • Overhaul : The work to remove specified assembled parts from machine, disassemble and check them, and then to attach the spare parts to machine and to perform necessary adjustment • Include : Explains the contents of work to make the specified work range clear • Exclude : Shows the work which is not included in the specified primary work • Unit : Time is shown by hour.

12-17


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE SK200-8 Work No.

Work

Work unit

Works 1

1

00101

Engine adjustment A set

2

00103

Engine adjustment B set

3

00111

Compression measuring

8

99012

9

99013

Replacing cylinder, block, piston, ring and liner simultaneously Replacing crank shaft, piston, ring and liner simultaneously

Completed Timing adjustment machine Valve clearance adjustment

SK330-8 Q'ty

Adding hour

1

by 1 each

by 1 each

2.3

2.5

—

—

3.4

4.3

Single unit From engine is removed condition

27.4

31.6

Single unit From engine is removed condition

20.8

25.8

24.4

30

Completed machine Completed machine

A set and nozzle adjustment

Adding hour

Include; Engine warm-up, valve clearance adjustment, removing air cleaner element and battery specific gravity measurement

From engine is removed condition

Replacing cylinder block

Single unit

Include; Valve clearance adjustment Exclude; Installing expansion plug knock pin

11

00126

Replacing crank shaft

Single unit From engine is removed condition

18.4

22.8

12

00127

Replacing crank shaft main bearing

Single unit From engine is removed condition

18.4

22.8

38.5

44.3

2.3

3.1

From engine is removed condition Include; Adjustment of water pump, oil pump, valve clearance, valve lapping and

15

00151

Engine overhaul

Single unit measurement/cleaning Exclude; Replacing of injection pump, electrical equipment, water pressure test, clutch overhaul and valve guide

16

00152

Compression measuring

Single unit

From piston & connecting rod are

17

00153

Replacing piston

Single unit

18

00154

Replacing piston ring

Single unit

19

00155

Replacing cylinder liner

Single unit

20

00157

Replacing connecting rod

Single unit

21

00158

Replacing piston pin bushing

Single unit condition

removed conditions From piston & connecting rod are removed conditions From piston & connecting rod are removed conditions From piston & connecting rod are removed conditions

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

From connecting rod is a single unit Include; Reaming 26

00165

Replacing expansion plug

41

00302

Valve clearance adjustment

42

00305

43

00306

44

00304

45

00312

46

00313

Replacing rocker arm

47

00314

Replacing rocker arm support

48

00315

Replacing rocker arm shaft

50

00322

Removal and installing cylinder head

51

00323

Replacing cylinder head

Replacing rocker chamber cover upper Replacing rocker chamber cover lower Replacing rocker chamber cover gasket Removal and installing rocker arm and support

Single unit Completed

1.7

2.0

One set

1.3

1.4

One set Include; Removal and installing upper

—

4.3

One set

1.3

1.4

2.6

3.3

2.6

3.4

2.6

3.4

2.6

3.4

8.2

10.4

11.5

16.9

machine

Completed machine Completed machine Completed machine Completed machine Completed Excluding; Removal and installing of nozzle machine

holder or injector and injector sub harness

Completed Include; Valve lapping machine

Exclude; Replacing of valve guide

12-18


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE SK200-8 Work No.

Work

Work unit

SK330-8 Q'ty

Works 1

Adding hour

1

by 1 each

Adding hour by 1 each

Include; Valve lapping 52

00324

Overhaul of cylinder head

Completed Exclude; Replacing of valve guide, machine

water pressure test and replacing

13.3

18.8

8.2

10.4

10.2

15.6

4.9

8.8

5.3

9.4

valve seat 53

00325

Replacing cylinder head gasket

54

00326

Replacing valve

55

00327

Replacing valve spring

57

00328

Replacing valve stem seal

61

00376

62

00377

Removal and installing camshaft housing plug

Completed machine Completed machine

Include; Valve lapping

Completed Exclude; Removal and installing of machine

cylinder head

Completed Exclude; Removal and installing of machine

cylinder head

One set

1.2

Removal and installing camshaft (with Completed machine camshaft gear)

0.2

1.6

2.6

3.4

6.1

6.5

0.2

With manifold and nozzle holder Include; Valve lapping

Replacing cylinder head 63

00352

(one piece and one set require same Single unit hour)

Excluding; Removal and installing of cylinder head, replacing valve guide, water pressure test and replacing valve seat

66

00355

Replacing valve guide

72

00361

Replacing expansion plug Replacing rocker arm

73

00371

(one piece and one set require same hour) Replacing rocker arm support

74

00372

(one piece and one set require same hour)

75

00373

Replacing rocker arm bushing

76

00374

Replacing valve

Unit of 1 cylinder Single unit

Unit of 1 cylinder Unit of 1 cylinder Unit of 1 cylinder Unit of 1 cylinder

1.0

0.8

1.0

0.8

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.1

0.3

0.1

0.3

0.1

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.5

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

0.3

0.3

From cylinder head is removed condition Include; Valve lapping

Unit of 1 From cylinder head is removed

77

00375

Replacing valve spring

78

00330

Replacing valve stem seal

81

00406

Removal and installing supply pump

2.3

2.3

84

00411

Tightening oil pan

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.5

0.5

85

00412

Removal and installing oil pan

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.5

0.5

86

00413

Replacing oil pan

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.7

0.7

87

00414

Replacing oil pan gasket

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.7

0.7

88

00421

Replacing oil pan drain cock

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.5

0.5

89

00422

Replacing oil pan drain cock gasket

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.5

92

00443

Replacing breather hose

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.3

93

00444

Replacing oil level gauge

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.1

0.1

94

00445

Replacing oil level gauge guide

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.2

0.2

cylinder condition Unit of 1 From cylinder head is removed cylinder condition One set Include; Function check

0.5 0.2

0.3

95

00446

Replacing oil level gauge bracket

Single unit From engine is removed condition

0.2

0.2

102

00512

Replacing fly wheel housing

Single unit From engine is removed condition

3.4

3.4

103

00541

Replacing fly wheel housing gasket

Single unit From engine is removed condition

5.4

5.4

104

00542

Replacing rear end plate

Single unit From engine is removed condition

5.4

5.4

105

00543

Replacing rear end plate gasket

Single unit From engine is removed condition

5.4

5.4

106

00515

Replacing crank shaft rear oil seal

Single unit From engine is removed condition

5.4

5.4

12-19

0.2


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE SK200-8 Work No.

Work

Work unit

Works 1

119

00552

Replacing crank shaft rear oil seal

Single unit From fly wheel is removed condition

SK330-8 Q'ty

Adding hour

1

by 1 each

by 1 each

0.2

0.2

131

00613

Replacing intake manifold

One set Include; Applying liquid gasket

2.0

2.3

132

00614

Replacing intake manifold gasket

One set Include; Applying liquid gasket

2.0

2.3

One set

1.3

1.6

One set

1.3

1.6

Removal and installing intake pipe

Adding hour

133

00636

134

00637

Replacing intake pipe (manifold side)

135

00622

Replacing air intake hose

One set

0.4

0.2

0.4

0.2

136

00623

Replacing air intake pipe

One set

0.4

0.2

0.4

0.2

137

00626

Replacing air intake pipe

One set Turbo charger to inter cooler

0.4

138

00627

Replacing air intake pipe

One set Air cleaner to turbo charger

0.4

0.2

0.4

0.2

0.3

0.2

0.3

0.2

(manifold side)

139

00675

Replacing silencer body

142

00641

Tightening exhaust manifold

143

00643

144

00644

Replacing exhaust manifold

145

00645

Replacing exhaust manifold gasket

146

00646

Replacing exhaust heat insulator

Removal and installing exhaust manifold

Completed machine Completed machine Completed machine

With insulator and stud bolt

Completed Include; Replacing stud bolt with new machine

one and insulator (TI system)

Completed machine One side of completed machine

Removal and installing of turbo charger

0.4

0.9

1.3

2.8

3.2

3.0

3.4

2.8

3.2

2.4

2.6

147

00651

Replacing exhaust pipe

One set

0.8

0.8

148

00653

Replacing exhaust pipe gasket

One set

0.6

0.6

164

00686

Removal and installing turbo charger

One set

2.9

2.5

165

00687

Replacing turbo charger

One set Include; Replacing stud bolt

2.6

2.5

0.9

0.9

0.4

0.4

5.4

5.4

5.4

5.4

0.7

0.7

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.0

0.2

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.2

0.1

0.1

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

167

00689

174

00624

188

00701

Replacing turbo charger oil return pipe Replacing air intake pipe upper (cooler to manifold)

One set

From engine is removed condition Single unit Include; Removal and installing of

cylinder head

(fly wheel housing) 189

00711

190

00712

191

00713

192

00714

Replacing timing gear cover (fly wheel housing) Replacing timing gear cover gasket (fly wheel housing) Replacing timing gear cover plate (rear end plate)

From engine is removed condition Single unit Include; Removal and installing of

cylinder head Single unit

Single unit

Replacing timing gear cover plate gasket

lower insulator

One set

Removal and installing engine and timing gear cover

Include; Removal and installing of

Single unit

(rear end plate gasket) 193

00725

Replacing idler gear (main)

Single unit

194

00736

Replacing idler gear (sub)

Single unit

195

00726

Replacing idler gear shaft (main)

196

00737

Replacing idler gear shaft (sub)

Single unit

197

00724

Replacing crank shaft gear rear

Single unit

201

00738

Replacing cam idle gear

Single unit

Single unit

From timing gear cover is removed condition From timing gear cover is removed condition From timing gear cover is removed condition From timing gear cover is removed condition From timing gear cover is removed condition From timing gear cover is removed condition From timing gear cover is removed condition From timing gear cover is removed condition

12-20


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE SK200-8 Work No.

Work

Work unit

Works 1 From timing gear cover is removed

SK330-8 Q'ty

Adding hour

1

by 1 each

by 1 each

202

00739

Replacing cam idle gear shaft

Single unit

203

00731

Replacing camshaft

Single unit

204

00732

Replacing camshaft gear

Single unit

205

00751

Replacing crank pulley

One set

1.9

1.9

206

00754

Replacing crank dumper

One set

2.8

2.8

207

00755

Replacing crank shaft front oil seal

One set

2.2

2.2

One set

2.8

2.8

One set

2.8

2.8

0.3

0.3

Replacing crank shaft front oil seal

condition From timing gear cover is removed condition From timing gear cover is removed condition

0.4

0.4

0.8

0.8

0.8

0.8

208

00757

209

00758

211

00801

Checking injection timing

226

00834

Replacing priming pump

One set

0.4

0.4

227

00835

Cleaning fuel feed pump strainer

One set

0.4

0.4

228

00836

Replacing through feed valve

One set

0.4

230

00838

Replacing fuel injection pipe

One set

2.5

236

00851

Replacing fuel filter assembly

One set

0.5

0.5

237

00857

Replacing fuel filter cartridge

One set

0.3

0.3

253

00875

Replacing fuel hose

One set

0.8

0.8

254

00876

Replacing fuel leakage pipe

One set

0.8

0.8

276

00912

Replacing oil filter cartridge

One set

0.4

0.4

One set

0.3

0.3

One set

0.3

0.3

retainer Replacing crank shaft front oil seal retainer gasket

Replacing oil filter relief valve (oil filter

Completed machine

0.4 0.1

2.5

277

00907

278

00908

279

00909

Replacing oil filter safety valve

One set

0.3

0.3

280

00910

Replacing oil filter safety valve spring

One set

0.3

0.3

Single unit From engine is removed condition

6.1

6.1

regulator valve) Replacing oil filter relief valve spring (oil filter regulator valve)

Adding hour

0.1

00961(tim Removal and installing fly wheel 294

ing gear housing cover)

(timing gear cover)

295

00942

Replacing oil pump

Single unit From engine is removed condition

6.3

6.3

296

00944

Replacing oil pump gear

Single unit From engine is removed condition

6.5

6.5

297

00943

Overhaul of oil pump

Single unit From engine is removed condition

6.5

6.5

298

00946

Replacing suction strainer

One set

0.1

0.1

299

00947

Replacing suction strainer O-ring

One set

0.1

0.1

301

00951

Replacing oil pipe

One set

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

302

00954

Replacing oil hose

One set

0.4

0.4

0.4

0.4

303

00971

Replacing cooling oil jet

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

327

01028

Removal and installing water pump

328

01029

Replacing water pump

329

01030

Overhaul of water pump

Single unit

330

01031

Replacing water pump pulley

Single unit

0.6

0.6

331

01032

Replacing water pump casing gasket

One set Liquid gasket

4.0

4.0

332

01036

Replacing cooling fan

One set

0.9

0.9

333

01037

Replacing fluid fan coupling

One set

0.9

0.9

334

01044

Replacing thermostat casing

One set Include; Filling engine coolant up

1.3

1.3

336

01046

Replacing thermostat casing cover

One set Include; Filling engine coolant up

1.0

1.0

337

01047

One set Include; Filling engine coolant up

1.0

1.0

338

01048

1.0

1.0

Replacing thermostat casing cover gasket Replacing thermostat

1 One set Include; Filling engine coolant up

4.0

4.0

One set Include; Filling engine coolant up

4.0

4.0

0.8

0.8

One set

Include; Checking for temperature at valve start opening

12-21


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE SK200-8 Work No.

Work

Work unit

Works 1

339

01049

Checking thermostat

One set

Include; Checking for temperature at valve start opening

SK330-8 Q'ty

Adding hour

1

by 1 each

1.0

Adding hour by 1 each

1.0

341

01053

Replacing coolant hose

One set

0.3

0.2

0.3

0.2

342

01054

Replacing radiator hose

One set

0.3

0.2

0.3

0.2

343

01071

Replacing fluid fan coupling

1

0.3

0.3

344

01072

Replacing cooling fan

1

0.3

0.3

345

01073

Replacing water pump

1

1.7

1.7

346

01074

Overhaul of water pump

1

0.8

0.8

402

01401

Removal and installing alternator

One set

0.8

0.8

403

01402

Replacing alternator

One set

0.9

0.9

From cooling fan is removed condition

404

01406

Replacing alternator support bracket

One set

1.0

1.0

405

01408

Replacing V-belt

One set

0.3

0.3

438

01801

Removal and installing supply pump

One set Include; Function check

3.0

3.0

439

01802

Replacing supply pump

One set Include; Function check

3.0

3.0

One set Include; Function check

3.8

3.8

One set Include; Function check

3.8

3.8

2.9

3.5

3.4

4.0

Removal and installing common rail 440

01830

assembly (with pressure sensor, pressure limiter) Replacing common rail assembly

441

01804

(with pressure sensor, pressure limiter)

442

01805

443

01806

444

01807

445

01808

446

01809

447

01810

Removal and installing injector assembly Replacing injector assembly Removal and installing injector assembly Replacing injector assembly Removal and installing injector sub harness assembly Replace injector sub harness assembly

Completed machine

Include; Function check

Completed Include; Function check and machine

reprogramming

One set Include; Function check One set

Include; Function check and reprogramming

1.9

0.2

1.9

0.2

2.4

0.2

2.4

0.2

One set Include; Function check

1.9

1.9

One set Include; Function check

1.9

1.9

448

01811

Removal and installing flow dumper

One set Include; Function check

1.2

0.3

1.2

0.3

449

01812

Replacing flow dumper

One set Include; Function check

1.2

0.3

1.2

0.3

450

01813

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

451

01814

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

452

01815

Removal and installing pressure limiter Replacing pressure limiter Replacing common rail pressure sensor

453

01816

Replacing main engine speed sensor

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

454

01817

Replacing sub engine speed sensor

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

455

01818

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

456

01819

Replacing fuel temperature sensor

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

457

01820

Replacing accel sensor

One set Include; Function check

1.5

1.5

460

01823

461

01824

463

01826

464

01827

Replacing coolant temperature sensor

Removal and installing pressure sensor Removal and installing pressure limiter Replacing injection pipe Replacing fuel pipe (common rail to supply pump)

1

Include; Function check

0.3

0.3

1

Include; Function check

0.3

0.3

One set Include; Function check

1.2

0.1

1.2

0.1

One set Include; Function check

1.2

0.1

1.2

0.1

465

01828

Replacing fuel leakage pipe

One set Include; Function check

1.7

1.7

469

01840

Checking leakage of pressurized fuel

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

12-22


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE SK200-8 Work No.

Work

Work unit

Works 1

471

01901

472

01902

SK330-8 Q'ty

Adding hour

1

by 1 each

by 1 each

Replacing main engine speed sensor

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

Replacing sub engine speed sensor

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

One set Include; Function check

1.2

1.2

Replacing coolant temperature

473

01903

474

01904

Replacing accel sensor

One set Include; Function check

1.5

1.5

475

01908

Removal and installing EGR valve

One set Include; Function check

2.1

2.5

sensor

476

01909

Replacing EGR valve

One set Include; Function check

2.1

2.5

479

01916

Removal and installing EGR cooler

One set

1.8

1.8

480

01917

Replacing EGR cooler

One set

1.8

1.8

One set

0.3

0.3

One set

0.3

0.3

481

01918

482

01919

Removal and installing closed ventilator Replacing closed ventilator

12-23

Adding hour


12. STANDARD MAINTENANCE TIME TABLE

[MEMO]

12-24


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 13

TABLE OF CONTENTS 13.1 HOW TO USE THE MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND CAUTIONS TO BE EXERCISED ...13-3 13.2 PERFORMANCE INSPECTION STANDARD TABLE .....................................................13-4 13.3 MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE SPEED ...........................................................................13-6 13.3.1

MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE SPEED ..................................................................13-6

13.4 MEASUREMENT OF HYDRAULIC PRESSURE ............................................................13-7 13.4.1

PREPARING TO MEASURE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE .......................................13-7

13.4.2

PLACE TO INSTALL PRESSURE GAUGE............................................................13-7

13.4.3

PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT POSITION.................................................................13-8

13.4.4

PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING RELIEF VALVE.................................................13-10

13.5 MEASURING TRAVEL PERFORMANCES.....................................................................13-12 13.5.1

TRAVEL SPEED.....................................................................................................13-12

13.5.2

DEVIATION OF TRAVEL .......................................................................................13-12

13.5.3

PERFORMANCES OF PARKING BRAKE .............................................................13-13

13.5.4

DRAIN RATE OF TRAVEL MOTOR.......................................................................13-14

13.6 MEASURING SWING PERFORMANCES.......................................................................13-15 13.6.1

SWING SPEED ......................................................................................................13-15

13.6.2

PERFORMANCE OF SWING BRAKE ...................................................................13-15

13.6.3

PERFORMANCE OF SWING PARKING BRAKE ..................................................13-16

13.6.4

DRAIN RATE OF SWING MOTOR ........................................................................13-17

13.7 MEASURING ATTACHMENT OPERATING PERFORMANCES ....................................13-18 13.7.1

OPERATING TIME OF CYLINDERS .....................................................................13-18

13.7.2

OIL TIGHTNESS OF CYLINDERS .........................................................................13-19

13.8 MEASURING PERFORMANCES OF SWING BEARING ...............................................13-20 13.9 MECHATRO CONTROLLER...........................................................................................13-21 13.9.1

ENGINE CONTROL INPUT / OUTPUT ..................................................................13-21

13.9.2

ADJUSTMENT OF MECHATRO CONTROLLER OUTPUT (A-B-C ADJUSTMENT) ...13-21

13.9.3

OPERATIONS IN THE EVENT OF A FAILURE OF EQUIPMENT OF MECHATRO CONTROLLER .......................................................................................................13-27

Book Code No. S5YN1318E02 13-1


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

August, 2006

Revision

February, 2007

n

March, 2007

n

April, 2007

SK200-8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC-8 : YQ11-06001~

n

July, 2007

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

n

n

n

n

SK200–8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC–8 : YQ11-06001~ n E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

13-2

Remarks S5YN1318E01 (ASIA, OCE)

K

S5YN1318E02 (ASIA, OCE)

K

n (NHK Russia) n ASIA (HS Engine) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K K K K


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

13.1

HOW TO USE THE MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND CAUTIONS TO BE EXERCISED

(1) Application 1) When the machine is new ; Confirm that the performances are in accordance with standard specifications as compared to the performance standards. 2) At specific self inspection ; (Rule by country) Use the data for the criterion, for the purpose of correction, adjustment and replacement. 3) When performances are deteriorated ; Determine whether it is caused by a fault or end of service life after long hours of operation, to be used for safety and economical considerations. 4) When main components are replaced ; For example, use data to restore performances of pumps and others. (2) Terminology 1) Standard values ; Values to be used to condition or assemble a new machine. Where special notes are not given, these values represent standard specifications (machine with standard attachments and standard shoes). 2) Reference values for remedy ; Values at which readjustment is required. In order to ensure performance and safety it is strictly prohibited to use the machine over the specified values. 3) Service limit ; This is the limit value at which reconditioning is impossible without replacement of parts. If the value is expected to exceed the service limit before next inspection and correction are performed, replace the parts immediately. The operation over the specified values causes increase of damage and requires the down time of machine, and also causes safety problems. (3) Cautions to be Exercised at Judgment 1) Evaluation of measured data ; Disagreement of measuring conditions, variations of data peculiar to a new machine, and measuring errors are to be evaluated. Determine generally at what levels measured values are located, instead of determining whether or not values fall within or run out of the reference values. 2) Determining correction, adjustment or replacement ; Machine performances deteriorate with time as parts wear and some deteriorated performances may be restored to new levels. Therefore, determine correction, adjustment or replacement, depending upon the operating hours, kind of work and circumstances in which the machine is placed, and condition the machine performances to its most desirable levels. (4) Other Cautions to be Exercised 1) Parts liable to degrade ; Rubber products, such as, hydraulic hoses, O rings, and oil seals deteriorate with time ; replace them at regular intervals or at overhauls. 2) Parts requiring regular replacement ; Out of critical hoses that are necessary to secure safety, we designate Very Important Parts (V.I.P) and recommend that they should be replaced regularly. 3) Inspection and replacement of oils and greases ; In performing maintenance, it is necessary for the user to familiarize himself with how to handle the machine safely, cautions to be exercised and inspection/lubrication procedures. Refer to the operators manuals as well.

13-3


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

13.2

PERFORMANCE INSPECTION STANDARD TABLE

Unless otherwise specified, measure it on "H" mode. Table13-1 Size

Port

value or less

Unit

Hi

Lo

— - 5 (23)

Adjusting Point

Measuring condition

Sampling

Atmospheric temp

Hydraulic oil temperature

Tank surface

50 (122)

+ 5 (41)

Water temperature

Radiator surface

75 (167)

+ 15 (59)

1000

+ 30

- 30

2000

+ 30

- 30

2000

+ 30

- 30

2000

+ 30

- 30

1050

+ 30

- 30

1800

+ 30

- 30

5.0 (725)

+ 0.5 (+73)

0

34.3 (4970) + 0.7 (+100)

- 0.5 (-73)

MR1 Boom up

37.8 (5480) + 1.0 (+145)

- 0.5 (-73)

MR1

37.8 (5480)

0 - 4.0 (-580)

OR4

Boom down

39.7 (5760)

0 - 5.9 (-855)

OR3

Boom up

39.7 (5760)

0 - 5.9 (-855)

OR8

Arm out

37.8 (5480)

0 - 4.0 (-580) MPa

OR7

Arm in

37.8 (5480)

0 - 4.5 (-711) (psi)

OR2

Bucket dump

39.7 (5760)

0 - 5.9 (-855)

OR1

Bucket digging

H mode Hi idle B mode Hi idle A mode Hi idle Decel

Measure the engine speed at multi display on the gauge cluster.

ATT Boost

Arm Bucket Swing

Travel

Over load relief valve pressure

Boom

RH LH

G pump

a4

P1

a1

P2

a2

P1

a1

P2

a2

R

a1

H R H R H RH LH FW RV FW RV

Main pump

valve pressure

Main relief

Pilot primary pressure circuit

PF1/4

a2 a1

°C

- 15 (5) (°F)

50°C~-10°C (122°F~14°F)

LOW throttle

min-1

Adjustment not required

H mode Lo idle

S mode Hi idle

High pressure circuit

Tolerance

Standard NAS 9

Cleanliness of hydraulic oil Hydraulic oil in tank

Engine speed

Standard Measuring condition

Position

Class

Measuring Position

Inspection Item

Full throttle (HI idle)

PR1

HI idle

Perform all measurement with the air-conditioner "OFF".

29.0 (4205) + 6.0 (+870)

0

OR6

Swing RH

29.0 (4205) + 6.0 (+870)

0

OR5

Swing LH

a1

34.3 (4970) + 0.7 (+100)

- 0.5 (-73)

a2

34.3 (4970) + 0.7 (+100)

- 0.5 (-73)

a2

13-4

— — — —

Simultaneous operation of travel RH and LH


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE Standard value

Inspection item Sprocket revolution (RH,LH)

1st speed

30.5 ~ 27.5

2nd speed

50.4 ~ 45.6

Up

2.5 ~ 3.1

Down

2.2 ~ 2.8

In

3.0 ~ 3.6

Out

2.3 ~ 2.9

Digging

2.2 ~ 2.8

Dumping

1.7 ~ 2.3

Operating speed

Boom Operating time of cylinder

Arm Bucket

Swing speed

RH LH 1st speed

Iron shoe 19.5 ~ 21.5

2nd speed

Iron shoe 11.9 ~ 13.1

Travel speed Amount of travel deviation

Performance

Parking brake drift

ATT amount of drift

min-1

sec

sec / 20 m

0 ~ 240

mm / 20 m

15 degree gradient

0

mm / 5 min

55 ~ 75

degree

15 degree gradient

0

mm

Tip of the bucket tooth

160

Boom cylinder

14

Arm cylinder

11

Amount of horizontal play at the bucket tooth

30 ~ 50

(At no load)

sec / 1 rev

2nd speed

Performance of Swing Neutral position after 180° full speed swing brake Performance of Swing parking brake

4.2 ~ 5.4

Unit

mm / 10min (At no load) mm

The port relief valves No.OR1~OR8 on the control section are adjusted to the following operation numbers in advance. (1) Bucket digging, (2) Bucket dump, (3) Boom up, (4) Boom down (5) Swing left, (6) Swing right, (7) Arm in, (8) Arm out

13-5


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

13.3

MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE SPEED

13.3.1

MEASUREMENT OF ENGINE SPEED

(1) Warming up of engine Start engine to raise the coolant temperature of engine to 60 to 90째C (140 to 194째F) at surface of radiator upper tank. The E/G coolant tem-perature gauge is used to measure. The range in white color shows the temperature of approx. 65 to 105째C (149 to 221째F), so confirm that the pointer indicates the temperature within the white range.

(2) Engine speed measured value through service diagnosis (See Fig. 13-2) 1) Turn "ON" the starter switch with the buzzer stop switch pressed. 2) A program No. and an actual engine revolution are displayed as the No.2 Item. 3) The screen advances like No.2, No.3....each time the "Wiper switch" on the gauge cluster is pushed. 4) The screen returns like No.45, No.44....each time the "Washer switch" is pushed. 5) The display does not disappear unless the starter switch is turned to"OFF". Fig. 13-1 Switch for E/G speed indication NO.2 ENG G-3 SPEED SET MEAS 1 MEAS 2 G-5 ENG OIL PRS. WATER TEMP. F MODE H-1 ACCEL. VOLT. POS ECU OUTPUT

2205 2201 2201 LIVE 100 OF HM 4.2V 100% 0.5V

Fig. 13-2 Service diagnosis for E/G speed measuring (Example)

13-6


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

13.4

MEASUREMENT OF HYDRAULIC PRESSURE

13.4.1

PREPARING TO MEASURE HYDRAULIC PRESSURE

(1) Hydraulic equipment 6.9 MPa (1000psi) pressure gauge : 1unit 49 MPa (7100psi) pressure gauge : 2 units Pressure measuring equipment and instrument for analysis : 1 set

a5

A3

A2 (A1)

PSV2 (PSV1)

(2) Measuring cleanliness of hydraulic oil

Dr3 B3

After releasing air in the hydraulic oil tank, open the cover and sample oil in the hydraulic tank, and measure with the instrument for analysis. If the measured value is higher than the standard value, replace the return filter or change the hydraulic oil.

13.4.2

PLACE TO INSTALL PRESSURE GAUGE

(1) Main circuit After releasing the pressure in hydraulic oil tank and system, replace plugs PF1/4 of main pump gauge ports (a1) (a2) with plugs for pressure measurement, and attach pressure gauge 49 MPa (7100 psi). (2) Pilot circuit Replace pilot gauge plug (a5) with plug PF1/4 for pressure measurement, and attach pressure gauge 6.9 MPa (1000 psi).

13-7

B1 a1

a2

Fig. 13-3 Gauge port on main pump


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 13.4.3

PRESSURE ADJUSTMENT POSITION

(1) Main control valve

OR8 : ARM (R)

PLUG FOR OPTIONAL RELIEF

MACHINE FRONT

MR1 : MAIN RELIEF (ATT & TRAVEL)

OR3 : BOOM (H)

OR2 : BUCKET (R)

VIEW FROM THE TOP OF THE MACHINE

OR4 : BOOM (R)

OR1 : BUCKET (H)

MACHINE FRONT

OR7 : ARM (H)

PLUG FOR OPTIONAL RELIEF

VIEW FROM THE BOTTOM OF THE MACHINE Fig. 13-4 Relief valve position on main control valve

13-8


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE (2) Pilot relief valve The pilot relief valve PR1 is located on the gear pump that is attached to the main pump.

A3

a5

Dr3 B3

PR1 ADJUST SCREW FOR PILOT RELIEF

Fig. 13-5 Pilot relief valve position (3) Swing over load relief The swing motor is equipped with plugs PA,PB for pressure measurement, but the measurement is carried out using gauge ports (a1) and (a2). (See Fig. 13-3)

Fig. 13-6 Swing over load relief position

13-9


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 13.4.4

PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING RELIEF VALVE

(1) Pilot relief valve Adjust it with adjust screw (311). : 24 mm, Tightening torque : 29.4 N•m (22 lbf•ft) : 6 mm

No. of turns of adjust screw Pressure change MPa (psi) 1 turn

Approx. 2.1 (305)

(2) 2-stage main relief valve (Commom for travel and ATT sections) Start from the boosting side, first. Loosen nut (1), adjust the pressure with adjusting screw (2) and tighten nut (1) after completion of the adjustment on the boosting side. Then, loosen nut (3), adjust the pressure on the standard side with adjusting screw (4) and tighten nut (3) after completion of the adjustment.

Fig. 13-7 Pilot relief valve

Fig. 13-8 Main relief valve (Travel section, ATT common section)

: 32 mm, Tightening torque : 27.4~31.4 N•m (20~23 lbf•ft) : 22 mm, Tightening torque : 27.4~31.4 N•m (20~23 lbf•ft) : 19 mm, Adjust screw : 6 mm

No. of turns of adjust screw Pressure change MPa (psi) Boosting side 1 turn STD side 1 turn

Approx. 17.6 (2560) Approx. 17.6 (2560)

(3) Over load relief valve (Boom, bucket, arm sections) Loosen lock nut (1) and adjust it with adjust screw (2). : 22 mm, Tightening torque : 27.4~31.4 N•m (20~23 lbf•ft) : 6 mm Fig. 13-9 Over load relief valve (Boom, bucket, arm sections)

No. of turns of adjust screw Pressure change MPa (psi) 1 turn

Approx. 17.7 (2560)

13-10


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE (4) Over load relief valve (Swing) When the adjustment of pressure is required, loosen lock nut (1) and adjust the pressure with cap (2). : 30, 38 mm, Tightening torque : 118 N•m (87 lbf•ft) : 12 mm

Fig. 13-10 Swing over load relief valve

No. of turns of adjust screw Pressure change MPa (psi) 1 turn

Approx. 10 (1450)

(5) Travel over load relief valve This valve was adjusted by valve maker. Do not replace any inner parts except for O-ring.

Fig. 13-11 Travel over load relief valve

13-11


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

13.5

MEASURING TRAVEL PERFORMANCES

13.5.1

TRAVEL SPEED

(1) Purposes Measure the travel sprocket revolution and confirm the performances between the hydraulic pump and the travel motor of the travel drive system. (2) Conditions Hydraulic oil temperature ; 45~55°C (113~131°F) Crawler on the right and left sides are tensioned evenly. (3) Preparation Attach the reflection panel with a magnet to the travel motor cover. Swing the swing frame through 90°as shown in Fig. 13-12 and make the crawler on one side take off the ground, using the attachment. (4) Measurement Engine revolution; Hi idle 2-speed travel switch; 1st speed and 2nd speed Measuring points ; Right and left Method, example 1 ; Measure revolution with a stroboscope Method, example 2 ; Measure the revolutions per minute visually.

Fig. 13-12 One side lifted position

Fig. 13-13 Adhering position of reflection panel

Measurement item RH H mode 1st speed & LH H mode 2nd speed

13.5.2

Unit

Sprocket revolution Standard value

Reference value for remedy

min-1

Service limit

30.5~27.5 23.8~21.5 19.4 or less 50.4~45.6 39.3~35.6 32.2 or less

DEVIATION OF TRAVEL

(1) Purpose Measure the amount of deviation at 20m (66ft) travel and confirm the horizontal balance between the hydraulic pump and the travel motor of the travel drive system. (2) Condition Hydraulic oil temperature ; 45~55°C (113~131°F) RH and LH crawler are tensioned evenly. Firm, level ground Engine revolution; Hi idle

BOOM FOOT PIN

ARM TOP PIN

Fig. 13-14 Travel position

13-12


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE (3) Preparation 1) Straight course more than 30m (108ft) 2) Travel position in which the bottom of the bucket is lifted by about 30cm (1ft).

A 20m (66ft)

(4) Measurement 1) Measure the max. deviation distance of the circular arc in the 20m (66ft) length, excluding the preliminary run of 3~5m (10~16ft).

Fig. 13-15 Measuring method Travel deviation

2) Operate the travel lever at the same time.

13.5.3

Unit : mm (in) / 20m (66ft)

Measuring position

Standard value

A

240 (9.45) or less

Reference value Service limit for remedy

480 (18.9)

720 (28.4)

PERFORMANCES OF PARKING BRAKE

(1) Purpose Confirm that the parking brake holds a stopped condition of the machine in a no-load travel position and on a 15 degree slope. (2) Condition A slope with (Approx. 15 deg) gradient and a stopped condition in a no-load travel position (3) Preparation Place an angle meter on the shoe plate and confirm that it makes an angle more than 15 degree. Hang a perpendicular in parallel with the guide frame rib on the track frame and put a mark (matching mark) on the shoe plate.

Fig. 13-16 Parking brake operating position

(4) Measurement Five minutes after the engine stops, measure the movement distance of the matching mark.

C

GUIDE FRAME

Fig. 13-17 Method of measurement Parking brake Measuring position

C

13-13

Unit : mm(in)/5min Reference value Standard value Service limit for remedy

0

1 (0.04)

2 (0.08)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 13.5.4

DRAIN RATE OF TRAVEL MOTOR

(1) Purpose To measure the drain rate of the travel motor and to confirm the performances of the travel motor. (2) Conditions Hydraulic oil temperature ; 45~55°C (113~131°F) Engine revolution; Hi idle

90 o 10 (3.54") (0.394")

FORWARD

o 22 PIPE (0.866") RIB "A"

150 (5.91")

STOPPER "B"

(3) Preparation

ROTARY DIRECTION

1) Place a stopper under the RH and LH travel sprockets.

40 (1.57")

o 80 (3.15")

Fig. 13-18 Location of stopper applied to travel sprocket

2) Stop the engine and release pressure from the hydraulic circuit. 3) Connect a hose with the drain port of the travel motor and take drain in a container. (4) Measurement ; at Travel Lock

Unless you observe the rotary force direction at travel lock, rib "A" may be broken by stopper "B" in some cases. (See Fig. 13-18) 1) Start the engine and relieve pressure at the full stroke of the travel lever.

Fig. 13-19 Method of measuring the drain rate of travel motor

2) Measure the drain rate for 30 seconds of relieving.

Travel deviation Measuring position

Drain rate

13-14

Unit : L(gal)/30sec

Reference value Standard value Service limit for remedy

9 (2.4)

16 (4.2)

23 (6.1)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

13.6

MEASURING SWING PERFORMANCES

13.6.1

SWING SPEED

(1) Purpose Measure the swing time and confirm the performances between the hydraulic pump and the swing motor of the swing drive system. (2) Conditions Hydraulic oil temperature ; 45~55째C (113~131째F) Firm, level ground Engine revolution; Hi idle (3) Preparation Put the bucket empty and extend the boom, arm and bucket cylinder fully. And the machine becomes a position of minimum reach.

Fig. 13-20 Swing speed measuring position (at the min. reach)

(4) Measurement Swing the machine by bringing the swing lever to its full stroke. Measure the time required to make two turns after one turn of preliminary run and calculate the time required for one turn. 13.6.2

PERFORMANCE OF SWING BRAKE

(1) Purpose Confirm the braking torque performances by the swing relief valve.

Swing speed

Unit : sec/rev

Measuring Reference value Service limit Standard value position for remedy Swing speed at 4.2~5.4 7.2~ 5.4~6.9 min. reach

(2) Conditions Hydraulic oil temperature ; 45~55째C (113~131째F) Firm, level ground Engine revolution; Hi idle

ARM TOP PIN

BOOM FOOT PIN

(3) Preparation 1) Put the bucket empty, retract the arm cylinder fully and extend the bucket cylinders fully. And move the boom so that the arm top pin is positioned at same height with boom foot pin. 2) Put a matching mark on the outer circumference of the swing bearing of the upper frame side and of the track frame side. Place two poles (flags) on the front and back of the extended line of the matching mark.

13-15

Fig. 13-21 Swing brake performance measuring position


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE (4) Measurement

MEASURING THE LENGTH OF THE ARC OVER THE OUTER CIRCUMFERENCE OF OUTER RACE

1) When operating in regular swing speed, by shifting lever to neutral position at pole position the swing operation stops.

MATCHING MARKS ON OUTER RACE

2) Calculate the swing drift angle by the following equation, after the upper swing body stops, using the amount of deflection (m) of the matching marks on the swing race and the length (m) of the circumference of the swing race :

MATCHING MARKS ON INNER RACE

Fig. 13-22 Measuring position of swing brake performances Swing brake performance Measuring position

Swing 180

13.6.3

Unit : degree

Reference value Standard value Service limit for remedy

75

85

90

PERFORMANCE OF SWING PARKING BRAKE

(1) Purpose To confirm the mechanical performances of the swing parking brake that is fitted to the inside of the swing motor. (2) Conditions On a slope of 15 degree incline. Stop the machine at right angles with the slope. Put the bucket empty, retract the arm cylinder fully and extend the bucket cylinder fully. And move the boom so that the arm top pin is positioned at same height with boom foot pin. Fig. 13-23 Swing parking brake performance measuring position (3) Preparation Put the angle meter on the shoe plate and make sure that the angle is more than 15 degree. Put a matching mark on the outer race side and on the inner race side.

MEASUREING THE LENGTH OF THE ARC OVER THE OUTER CIRCUMFERENCE OF OUTER RACE MATCHING MARKS ON OUTER RACE

(4) Measurement When five minutes has passed after the engine stops, measure the length of the movement of the matching marks.

MATCHING MARKS ON INNER RACE

Fig. 13-24 Measuring position of swing parking brake performances Performance of swing parking brake Measuring position

C

13-16

Unit : mm(in)/5min

Reference value Standard value Service limit for remedy

0

1 (0.04)

2 (0.08)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 13.6.4

DRAIN RATE OF SWING MOTOR

(1) Purpose Measure the drain rate of the swing motor and confirm the performances of the swing motor. (2) Conditions Hydraulic oil temperature ; 45~55°C (113~131°F) Firm, level ground Engine revolution; Hi idle (3) Preparation 1) Stop the engine. 2) Release pressure from inside the hydraulic circuit. 3) Disconnect the swing motor drain hose from its end returning to the hydraulic oil tank and take oil in a container. 4) Put a plug to the tank side. (4) Measurement ; at Swing Lock

Fig. 13-25

1) Start the engine and put the side faces of bucket against the inside of the right or left shoe plates. 2) Relieve the swing motor at full stroke of the swing motion.

Travel deviation Measuring position

Drain rate

3) Collect the amount of drained oil in a container for 30 seconds.

13-17

Unit : L(gal)/30sec

Reference value Standard value Service limit for remedy

2.1 (0.55)

5.2 (1.4)

6.2 (1.6)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

13.7

MEASURING ATTACHMENT OPERATING PERFORMANCES

13.7.1

OPERATING TIME OF CYLINDERS

(1) Purpose Measure the operating time of the boom, arm and bucket and confirm the performances between the hydraulic pump and the cylinder of the attachment drive system. (2) Condition Hydraulic oil temperature ; 45~55°C (113~131°F) Engine revolution; Hi idle Operating time excluding the cushion stroke

Fig. 13-26 Measuring position for bucket digging and dump

(3) Preparation Firm level ground with the bucket empty (4) Measurement 1 ; Boom up and down With the boom operating lever at full stroke, measure the required operating time of the bucket between the ground surface and its highest position. Fig. 13-27 Measuring position for boom up and down motions When lowering the boom, allow the bucket onto a soft ground or cushioning such as rubber tires ; never put the bucket against concrete or other solid material. Measurement 2 ; Arm in and out, bucket digging and dump In a position in which the tooth of the bucket rises to a level of about 30cm (1ft) above ground, measure the full stroke operating time required with the arm and bucket operating levers at full stroke.

13-18

30cm (1ft)

Fig. 13-28 Measuring position for arm in and out motions Cylinder Operating time Measuring position

Unit : sec

Reference value Service limit Standard value for remedy

2.2~2.8

2.8~3.6

3.8~

1.7~2.3

2.2~2.9

3.0~

2.5~3.1

3.2~4.0

4.2~

2.2~2.8

2.8~3.6

3.8~

3.0~3.6

3.8~4.6

5.0~

2.3~2.9

2.9~3.7

3.9~


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 13.7.2

OIL TIGHTNESS OF CYLINDERS

(1) Purpose Confirm that the cylinder oil tight by checking the moving length of the cylinder rods.

B BOOM FOOT PIN

C

(2) Condition Hydraulic oil temperature ; 45~55°C (113~131°F) Firm, level ground After cylinders are replaced, bleed off air from the cylinders, before checking for oil tightness. Retract the arm cylinder rod 50mm (2in) from stroke end so that the piston does not match a same range of the cushioning mechanism.

A ARM TOP PIN

(3) Preparation Put the bucket empty. Extend the arm cylinder rod 50mm (2in) from the most retracted position. And extend the bucket cylinders fully. Then hold the boom so that the arm top pin is positioned at same height with boom foot pin. (4) Measurement Measure the items five minutes after the engine is turned off.

13-19

D

Fig. 13-29 Oil tightness of cylinder Measuring position

Unit : mm(in)/5min

Reference value Standard value Service limit for remedy

A

7 (0.28)

11 (0.43)

14 (0.55)

B

6 (0.24)

9 (0.35)

11 (0.43)

C

-

-

-

D

80 (3.1)

120 (4.7)

160 (6.3)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

13.8

MEASURING PERFORMANCES OF SWING BEARING

(1) Purpose Measure the gap between the lower frame and the bottom face of the swing bearing and estimate the degree of wear of the swing bearing.

LOCATION OF BEARING MOUNTING BOLTS

SWING BEARING

(2) Condition Firm, level ground The swing bearing mounting bolts are not loosened. The swing bearing is lubricated well, not making abnormal sound during turning.

A

DIAL INDICATOR LOWER FLAME

Fig. 13-30 How to measure the axial play of swing bearing (3) Preparation 1) Install a dial indicator to the magnetic base and fix it to the lower frame. 2) Direct the upper swing body and the lower frame toward the travel direction, bring the probe of the dial indicator in contact with the bottom surface of the outer race on the swing body side and set the reading at zero.

Fig. 13-31 Measuring position 1

(4) Measurement 1 (Measuring position 1 and 2) BOOM FOOT PIN

ARM TOP PIN

1) Measure the displacement of the outer race in the axial direction in position 1 [The arm at 90°~110° and the crawler front is lifted by attachment about 30cm (1ft)] and in position 2, using a dial indicator.

Fig. 13-32 Measuring position 2 Axial play of swing bearing Measuring position

A

Unit : mm (in)

Reference value Standard value Service limit for remedy

0.8~1.8 (0.03~0.07)

2.3~3.3 (0.09~0.13)

3.6~ (0.14)

(5) Measurement 2 (Measuring position 3) 1) Retract the arm cylinder fully and extend the bucket cylinder fully. And move the boom so that the arm top pin is positioned at same height with boom foot pin. Then swing the bucket right and left by man power. But in this case, the gap of the attachment is included.

BOOM FOOT PIN

ARM TOP PIN

Fig. 13-33 Measuring position 3 Right and left movement of the tip of bucket Measuring position

Bucket

13-20

Unit : mm (in)

Reference value Standard value Service limit for remedy

30~50 (1.18~1.97)

80 (3.15)

120 (4.72)


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

13.9

MECHATRO CONTROLLER

13.9.1

ENGINE CONTROL INPUT / OUTPUT

E-27: EMERGENCY ACCEL

C-8: ENGINE CONTROLLER

INJECTOR E-1: FUSE&RELAY BOX

C-2: GAUGE CLUSTER

ENGINE SPEED SENSOR

STARTER SWITCH

C-1: MECHATRO CONTROLLER

ACCEL POTENTIO METER

ENGINE

PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE

Fig. 13-34 INPUT / OUTPUT 13.9.2 13.9.2.1

ADJUSTMENT OF MECHATRO CONTROLLER OUTPUT (A-B-C ADJUSTMENT) PURPOSE OF THE ADJUSTMENT

There are 3 kinds of adjustment of mechatro controller as shown below; every adjustment is an essential function to ensure performance of machine. (1) Adjustment of engine ("A" adjustment) This adjustment is performed to set the relation between the acceleration command voltage output from mechatro controller to engine controller and the engine speed. (2) Adjustment of pump ("B" adjustment) This adjustment is performed to correct the output variation by coordinating the output hydraulic pressure with engine rated output. (3) Adjustment of unloading valve ("C" adjustment) This adjustment is performed to correct the open variation of unloading valve to improve the operability further. 13.9.2.2

IN CASES WHERE THE ADJUSTMENT OF MECHATRO CONTROLLER IS REQUIRED;

When the following parts are replaced or repaired, carry out the adjustment without fail. (1) Mechatro controller (2) Engine or engine controller (3) Hydraulic pump or hydraulic pump proportional valve (4) Unloading proportional valve, spool of unloading valve

13-21


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 13.9.2.3

PREPARATION

(1) Raise the oil temperature to about 50°C (122°F) to warm up the engine. (2) Turn the air-con OFF. (3) Turn the starter key switch OFF to stop the engine. When the mechatro controller was replaced, the following error code is displayed because the adjustment data is not entered. A215, A225, A015, A025, A035 As the error codes other than those shown above may suggest failures of machine, repair the machine into the ordinary operating condition according to Error Code List.

For machines equipped with lifting magnet, turn the generator OFF.

13-22


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 13.9.2.4

ADJUSTING PROCEDURE

MULTI DISPLAY

WORK MODE SELECT SWITCH

BUZZER STOP SWITCH

WASHER SWITCH WIPER SWITCH

SELECT SWITCH

Fig. 13-35 Gauge cluster (1) Adjustment of engine ("A" adjustment) Procedure 1) Turn starter key switch ON keeping the work mode selector switch on the gauge cluster pressed, and hold it for 5~10 seconds, and then release it. (If the engine is started, the following indication is not displayed. Therefore do not start the engine.)

2) Keep buzzer stop switch on gauge cluster pressed for 5 seconds and release it and the screen for selecting adjustment is displayed. When adjustment data is not entered in mechatro controller, "READY" is indicated. If the adjustment operation is once performed, "FIN" is indicated. And the lever lock solenoid is automatically released, disabling all operations. 3) Press selector switch on gauge cluster to display "START ENG". "Engine SPEED", P1, P2 "PUMP PRESSURE" and "STEP" (acceleration command voltage) are indicated.

4) After starting engine, press selector switch on gauge cluster, and "MEMORY ENG" is displayed, the engine speed is automatically increased, and the adjustment of engine is performed. (When trying to limit engine speed, press selector switch on gauge cluster at the speed as it is, and the adjustment of engine is terminated. The torque adjustment and unloading adjustment required later are not performed, and default value is written.) 5) When normal HIGH idling speed is detected, the adjustment is completed. And "FINISH ENG" is displayed. (Press the buzzer stop switch on gauge cluster while this display is appeared, and the adjustment of engine is completed. The torque adjustment and unloading adjustment required later are not performed, and default value is written.)

13-23

FINISH ENG ENGINE SPEED 2000rpm PUMP PRESSURE C-1 2.0M C-2 STEP 400

2.0M


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE (2) Adjustment of pump ("B" adjustment) Procedure 1) The adjustment automatically shifts from engine to pump, the speed shifts from LOW idling to HIGH idling. And "MEMORY PUMP" is displayed. And the unloading proportional valve and pump proportional valve actuate, accordingly the loading of pump is increased. The "ENGINE SPEED", P1, P2 "PUMP PRESSURE" and P1, P2 pump "PROPO-VALVE" current (command value) are indicated. 2) After detection of the engine rated speed, the adjustment of pump is automatically completed. And "FINISH PUMP" is displayed. (Press the buzzer stop switch on gauge cluster while this display is appeared and the adjustment is completed. The unloading adjustment required later is not performed, and default value is written.)

FINISH PUMP ENGINE SPEED 2000rpm PUMP PRESSURE C-1 35.0M C-2 PROPO-VALVE E-1 300mA E-2

35.0M 300mA

(3) Adjustment of unloading valve ("C" adjustment) Procedure 1) The adjustment shifts from pump to unloading, and the unloading valve actuates, accordingly the pump pressure is detected. And "MEMORY UNLOAD" is displayed. The "ENGINE SPEED", P1, P2 "PUMP PRESSURE" and P1, P2 "PROPOVALVE" voltage (command value) are indicated. 2) When the unloading valve operates to the specified value, the adjustment of unloading proportional valve is automatically terminated. And "FINISH UNLOAD" is displayed. The speed is shifted to the speed corresponding to acceleration potentiometer. The adjusting current value is indicated on the display of current of P1, P2 unloading proportional valves. The adjusting range is usually 520~635mA. Stop the engine. (The adjusted data is automatically stored.) (4) Corrective actions taken when the adjustment can not be performed; 1) In cases where the adjustment of engine can not be performed; And ERROR ENG" is displayed. Judging condition: The read engine speed is 50rpm lower than the last value. It is conceived that the error is caused by the speed read error, pump load applied to the engine and unusual acceleration command voltage applied to the engine controller in the course of adjustment. a. Checking speed sensor: Check that it is free from wrong reading of speed due to engine vibration. b. Checking load applied to pump: Check that it is free from abnormal increase of pump pressure during adjustment of engine through adjustment screen. c. Checking acceleration command voltage: Measure the acceleration command voltage output from mechatro controller to engine controller. Check that signal is regularly input to the engine controller by actual measurement of voltage or with failure diagnosis tool of engine controller.

13-24

MEMORY UNLOAD ENGINE SPEED 2000rpm PUMP PRESSURE C-1 2.0M C-2 2.0M PROPO-VALVE D-1 300mA D-2 300mA


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 2) In cases where the adjustment of pump can not be performed; And "ERROR PUMP" is displayed. Judging condition 1: P1 and P2 average pump pressure at the time when the adjustment is completed is 25MPa or less. Judging condition 2: The adjustment does not complete although the pump proportional valve current reaches to the specified value. The P1 and P2 pump pressures usually increase to 33~38MPa. When the pressure does not increase; a. Identify the reason why the pressure does not increase, •

Check that the relief valve operates normally.

Check that the hydraulic circuit is free from leak of pressure.

Check that the pressure sensor functions normally. And so on.

b. Identify the reason why the actual flow rate does not increase, •

Check that the pump proportional valve operates normally.

Check that the pump regulator operates normally. And so on.

3) In cases where unloading valve can not be performed; And "ERROR UNLOAD" is displayed. Judging condition 1: The pump pressure does not increase up to the pressure in the range of the specified adjustment. Or the increased pressure is held as it is. Judging condition 2: Pressure sensor of either P1 pump or P2 pump is failed. Normally the pump pressures of P1 and p2 pumps gradually increase to 10~25MPa. (It may be affected by operating oil temperature.) When the pump pressure does not increase; a. Identify the reason why the pressure does not increase, •

Check that the relief valve operates normally.

Check that the hydraulic circuit is free from leak of pressure.

Check that the pressure sensor functions normally. And so on.

(5) Other precautions: 1) In the event of a failure, there is case where the adjustment may not be performed normally. First serve the machine, and perform the adjustment work. 2) In the condition where large load is constantly applied to engine, the adjustment could not be performed normally.

For machines equipped with lifting magnet, turn the generator OFF.

13-25


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE (6) When the adjustment of unloading valve only is performed; ("C" adjustment) In the event where only unloading valve and unloading proportional valve are replaced, perform the adjustment of unloading valve only. Procedure 1) Turn starter switch ON keeping the work mode selector switch on the gauge cluster pressed, and hold it for 5~10 seconds, and then release it. (If the engine is started, the following indication is not displayed. Therefore do not start the engine.)

2) Keep buzzer stop switch on gauge cluster pressed for 5 seconds and release it and the screen for selection of adjustment type is displayed. And "ADJUST" is displayed. When adjustment data is not entered in mechatro controller, "READY" is indicated. If the adjustment operation is once performed, "FIN" is indicated. And the lever lock solenoid is automatically released, disabling all operations. 3) Change the adjusting items with washer switch ( ) and wiper switch ( ), and select "ADJUST UNLOAD". (See Fig. 13-35) Like the output adjustment, when adjustment data is not entered in mechatro controller, "READY" is indicated. If the adjustment operation is once performed, "FIN" is indicated. 4) Press selector switch on gauge cluster to display "START ENG". "ENGINE SPEED", P1, P2 "PUMP PRESSURE" and "STEP" (acceleration command voltage) are indicated.

5) After starting engine, press selector switch on gauge cluster and "MEMORY UNLOAD" is indicated, the engine speed is automatically increased and the adjustment of unloading valve is performed. "ENGINE SPEED", P1, P2 "PUMP PRESSURE" and "PROPO-VALVE" (acceleration command current) are indicated. 6) When the unloading proportional valve operates to the specified value, the adjustment of unloading proportional valve automatically completes. "FINISH UNLOAD" is indicated. The speed is shifted to the speed corresponding to acceleration potentiometer. The value of adjusting current is indicated on the display of current of P1 and P2 unloading proportional valves. The adjusting range is usually 520~635mA. Stop the engine. (The adjusted data is automatically stored.)

13-26

MEMORY UNLOAD ENGINE SPEED 2000rpm PUMP PRESSURE C-1 2.0M C-2 2.0M PROPO-VALVE D-1 300mA D-2 300mA


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE 13.9.3

OPERATIONS IN THE EVENT OF A FAILURE OF EQUIPMENT OF MECHATRO CONTROLLER

(1) Engine emergency mode When the trouble occurs and the control of engine is impossible, the engine speed can be controlled by operating emergency acceleration (E-27) provided on the seat rear side. (See Fig. 13-34) Operating procedure: 1) Set the emergency acceleration to NORMAL position. 2) Start engine. 3) Turn the emergency acceleration to HI side and control the engine speed. 4) When stopping the engine, set the emergency acceleration to NORMAL position before stopping. Never increase the engine speed immediately after starting engine. It is dangerous. To avoid this danger, repeat the above procedure, or the engine speed does not increase. When the machine does not operate, set the emergency acceleration to NORMAL position. (2) Pump emergency mode In the event where a failure of P1 or P2 pump proportional valve represented in items of self diagnosis is indicated on multi display provided on the gauge cluster, the full power control of pump and positive control through mechatro controller are unavailable. Then the P1 and P2 pumps are automatically switched to emergency mode, making the operation with the power shift control of pump and the constant power control by means of self-pressure possible. But be careful that, at emergency mode, the accuracy of inching becomes poor, the frequency of engine down is increased, and the engine stalls in LOW speed condition.

The emergency mode should be used in only case of emergency. We recommend that the defective section is repaired by troubleshooting as early as possible.

13-27


13. MAINTENANCE STANDARD AND TEST PROCEDURE

[MEMO]

13-28


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS 21.1 SUMMARY OF MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM.........................................................21-4 21.1.1

MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM IN GENERAL ..................................................21-4

21.1.2

UNLOAD VALVE CONTROL..................................................................................21-6

21.1.3

POSITIVE CONTROL & P-Q CONTROL ...............................................................21-7

21.1.4

BOOM UP CONFLUX CONTROL ..........................................................................21-9

21.1.5

ARM IN RECIRCULATION & CONFLUX CONTROL.............................................21-10

21.1.6

ARM-IN ANTI-CAVITATION CONTROL ................................................................21-12

21.1.7

ARM-OUT CONFLUX CONTROL ..........................................................................21-13

21.1.8

BUCKET DIGGING (DUMP) CONFLUX CONTROL ..............................................21-14

21.1.9

BUCKET DIGGING ANTI-CAVITATION CONTROL ..............................................21-15

21.1.10 SWING PRIORITY CONTROL ...............................................................................21-17 21.1.11 TRAVEL STRAIGHT CONTROL ............................................................................21-18 21.1.12 PRESSURE RELEASE CONTROL ........................................................................21-20 21.1.13 N&B SWITCH CONTROL (OPTION) .....................................................................21-21 21.1.14 OPTION CONFLUX CONTROL (OPTION) ............................................................21-22 21.2 MECHATRO CONTROLLER...........................................................................................21-23 21.2.1

SUMMARY OF MULTI DISPLAY ...........................................................................21-23

21.2.2

SELF DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY..................................................................................21-28

21.2.3

SERVICE DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY FUNCTION .......................................................21-30

21.2.4

TROUBLE HISTORY DIAGNOSIS .........................................................................21-40

21.2.5

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE ..............................................................................21-41

21.2.6

SET PROCEDURE OF MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ...........................................21-42

21.2.7

ADJUSTING PROCEDURE OF DISPLAY .............................................................21-43

21.2.8

MECHATRO CONTROL EQUIPMENT ..................................................................21-47

Book Code No. S5YN2122E01 21-1

21


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

July, 2007

n

n

n

n

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

21-2

Remarks S5YN2122E01 (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K K


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM PREFACE This manual explains only those related to the electro hydraulic conversion as mechatro control. This manual summarizes the mechatro system and the function of the mechatro controller related apparatuses. Regarding the conditions before and after each conversion, refer to the hydraulic system and the electric system.

21-3


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

21.1

SUMMARY OF MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

21.1.1

MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM IN GENERAL

21-4


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

L1

MAIN CONTROL VALVE SE-29

UP

REVERSE

L2 L3

(5)

(7)

SV-13 N&B SELECTOR VALVE

(8)

OPTION

(6)

BOOM UP CONFLUX

TRAVEL LEFT

PL1 ATTACHMENT BOOST

REVERSE

LEFT ARM OUT

ARM 1 SPEED

(3)

P1 P2

(3)

P2 UNLOAD

FORWARD

(4)

SWING

(1)

DIGGING

DOWN FORWARD

TRAVEL P1 UNLOAD STRAIGHT

BUCKET

ARM 2 SPEED

(2)

TRAVEL RIGHT

DUMP

(8)

BOOM LOW SPEED

ARM OUT

SOL

RIGHT ARM IN

SOLENOID VALVE

L4 SWING MOTOR PARKING RELEASE

PSV -A

PSV PSV PSV -D -C -B

SV -2

SV -3

SV -1

BOOM CYLINDER BOOM DOWN RECIRCULATION BOOM CONFLUX

SAFETY LOCK LEVER

SWING PARKING BRAKE

TRAVEL 1,2 SPEED

ATTACHMENT BOOST

P2 UNLOAD

TRAVEL STRAIGHT

P1 UNLOAD

L5

ARM IN 2 SPEED

TRAVEL MOTOR 1,2 SPEED SELECT

SV -4

ARM CYLINDER ARM OUT CONFLUX ARM IN CONFLUX

(7)

ARM IN

L6

BUCKET CYLINDER DIGGING / DUMP CONFLUX

L7 PROPORTIONAL VALVE SOLENOID VALVE

21-5

) BLOCK


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

(LEFT)

(RIGHT)

OPTIONAL PILOT VALVE

PILOT VALVE

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD TRAVEL STRAIGHT

TRAVEL LEFT

BOOM UP CONFLUX P2 UNLOAD

SOLENOID

SWING

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

UNLOAD VALVE CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.2

P1

PILOT VALVE

PILOT VALVE FOR TRAVEL

SE-11 SE-10

SE-9

LOW LOW PRESSURE PRESSURE SENSOR SENSOR SE-1~4

SE-5,7,8

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B

P1 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

MECHATRO PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE CONTROLLER pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE SECONDARY PRESSURE

(1) On starting any one of operations, the control pilot secondary pressure switches spools and enters in respective low pressure sensors. (2) The output voltage of low pressure sensor is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and outputs command according to the input voltage to each unload pressure proportional valve. (3) Each unload pressure proportional valves output pilot secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and switches each unload spools. (4) With this operation, the bleed opening according to lever manipulated movement is obtained, consequently the pump pressure which is used to actuate each actuators are delivered and makes each actuator start operating.

21-6


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

SE-23

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD TRAVEL STRAIGHT

TRAVEL LEFT

BOOM UP CONFLUX

OPTIONAL PILOT VALVE

P2 UNLOAD

SOLENOID

SWING

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

POSITIVE CONTROL & P-Q CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.3

P1

SE-22

SE-11

(LEFT)

(RIGHT)

PILOT VALVE

PILOT VALVE

PILOT VALVE FOR TRAVEL

SE-10

SE-9

LOW LOW PRESSURE PRESSURE SENSOR SENSOR SE-1~4

SE-5,7,8

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE COMMAND

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE COMMAND

P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1

MECHATRO CONTROLLER pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE

SECONDARY PRESSURE

21-7


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (1) Positive control 1) On starting any one of operations, pilot secondary pressure switches each spool and is input to each low pressure sensor. 2) The output voltage of low pressure sensor is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and outputs command according to the input voltage to each unload pressure proportional valve. 3) Each pump proportional valve outputs pilot secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and changes the tilting angle of each pump and controls the delivery rate. 4) With this operation, the delivery rate according to lever manipulated movement is fed to the actuator, and consequently the working speed according to the lever manipulated movement will be obtained. (2) P-Q control 1) The output voltage of high pressure sensor provided on each pump line is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and operates the command according to the input voltage (load pressure). 2) The lower value between command values calculated by positive control and operated value found by P-Q control {operated value found in item 1)} is selected and is output to each pump proportional valve as command value. 3) Each pump proportional valve outputs pilot secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and changes tilting angle of each pump and controls the delivery rate. 4) With this operation, the delivery rate according to lever manipulated movement is fed to actuator and consequently working speed will be obtained according to lever movement.

P-Q CONTROL

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

PUMP PROPORTIONAL SECONDARY PRESSURE

PUMP PROPORTIONAL SECONDARY PRESSURE

POSITIVE CONTROL

PILOT PRESSURE

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

PUMP DELIVERY PRESSURE

21-8


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

PILOT VALVE

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD TRAVEL STRAIGHT

TRAVEL LEFT

BOOM UP CONFLUX P2 UNLOAD

SOLENOID

SWING

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

BOOM UP CONFLUX CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.4

P1

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR SE-3

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

BOOM UP PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

BOOM UP PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

BOOM UP PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS MECHATRO CONTROLLER BOOM UP PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1

P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B

P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE SECONDARY PRESSURE

(1) On starting boom up operation, boom up operating pilot pressure switches boom spool and boom up conflux spool and is input to low pressure sensor. (2) The output voltage of low pressure sensor is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and outputs command according to the input voltage to P1 and P2 proportional valves and P1 and P2 unload proportional valves. (3) Each proportional valve outputs pilot proportional valve secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and changes P1 and P2 pump delivery rate and switches P1 and P2 unload pressure control valve. (4) With original hydraulic pressure command, boom main spool and boom up conflux spool are switched, and also with the command by mechatro controller, P1 and P2 pumps and P1 and P2 unload valves are switched and consequently the delivery oil on P1 pump side confluxes delivery oil on P2 pump side during boom up operation.

21-9


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR SE-1~6

P1

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR SE-7

CONTROL PROCESS FOR 2 SPEED

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

ARM IN PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1

PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B

ARM IN PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE P1 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

pi PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

ARM PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

P2 PUMP PRESSURE

REVERSE PROPORTIONAL VALVE CONTROL PROCESS FOR ARM 2 SPOOL

MECHATRO CONTROLLER

21-10

REVERSE PROPORTIONAL VALVE FOR ARM 2 SPOOL PSV-A

pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE SECONDARY PRESSURE

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD TRAVEL STRAIGHT

TRAVEL LEFT

BOOM UP CONFLUX

PILOT VALVE

P2 UNLOAD

SOLENOID

SWING

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

ARM IN RECIRCULATION & CONFLUX CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.5


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (1) Recirculation and conflux (Low loading) 1) On starting arm-in operation, arm-in operating pilot secondary pressure is input to arm 1 spool, arm 2 spool and low pressure sensor. 2) The output voltage of low pressure sensor is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and outputs command according to the input voltage to P1 and P2 proportional valves, P1 and P2 unload proportional valves and reverse proportional valve for arm-in 2 spool. In case of combined operation, the pilot pressure other than arm-in operation is input to low pressure sensor and the output voltage is input to mechatro controller. And the mechatro controller processes pilot signal according to the combined operation and outputs command, which is different from the arm-in independent operation, to P1 pump proportional valve, P1 unload proportional valve and reverse proportional valve for arm-in 2 spool. 3) Primary pressure of reverse proportional valve for arm-in 2 spool is arm-in pilot secondary pressure and it switches arm 2 spool by proportional secondary pressure according to command. (Arm 2 spool controls recirculation rate and conflux rate.) The other proportional valves output proportional secondary pressure according to command from mechatro controller. These proportional valves change the delivery rate of P1, P2 pump, and switch P1, P2 unload valve. 4) The arm 1 spool is switched according to original oil pressure command, and P1, P2 pumps, P1, P2 unload spools and arm 2 spool are switched according to the command output by mechatro controller, and consequently the return oil from the arm cylinder rod side is recirculated in P1 and P2 pumps delivery oil during arm operation. (2) Recirculation cut The voltage output by high pressure sensor on P2 side is input to mechatro controller, and when the load is raised during arm operation the mechatro controller processes pilot signal processing according to the pressure detected by high pressure sensor and outputs command to cut recirculation into reverse proportional valve for arm-in 2 spool. The reverse proportional valve for arm-in 2 spool outputs pilot secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and switches arm 2 spool to recirculation cut position, and consequently recirculation passage is blocked.

21-11


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR SE-7

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD

TRAVEL LEFT

TRAVEL STRAIGHT

PILOT VALVE

P2 UNLOAD

SWING

SOLENOID

ARM 1 SPEED

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

BOOM UP CONFLUX

ARM-IN ANTI-CAVITATION CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.6

P1

ACCEL POTENTIO

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

ARM IN PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

pi P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

REVERSE PROPORTIONAL VALVE CONTROL PROCESS FOR ARM 2 SPOOL PSV-Bpi

ARM IN PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi REVERSE PROPORTIONAL VALVE FOR ARM 2 SPOOL COMMAND

ENGINE SPEED (COMMAND VALUE)

MECHATRO CONTROLLER

REVERSE PROPORTIONAL VALVE FOR ARM 2 SPOOL PSV-A

pi

pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE SECONDARY PRESSURE

(1) On starting arm-in operation, arm-in operating pilot secondary pressure switches arm 1 spool and is input to low pressure sensor. (2) The engine speed command output by accel potentiometer is input to mechatro controller. (3) Low pressure sensor output voltage is input to mechatro controller, and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal processing and outputs command according to the input voltage to P2 pump proportional valve and P2 unload proportional valve. (4) And also outputs command according to input pressure output by potentiometer to reverse proportional valve for arm 2 spool. (5) Each proportional valves output pilot secondary pressure according to each command output by mechatro controller, and consequently since the reverse proportional valve for arm 2 spool is controlled to spool stroke according to engine speed and changes recirculation rate to prevent the cavitation from occurring even if pump delivery rate is low due to low engine speed.

21-12


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

PILOT VALVE

P2

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD TRAVEL STRAIGHT

TRAVEL LEFT

BOOM UP CONFLUX P2 UNLOAD

SOLENOID

SWING

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

ARM-OUT CONFLUX CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.7

P1

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR SE-8

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

ARM OUT PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1

ARM OUT PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B

ARM OUT PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi

MECHATRO CONTROLLER ARM OUT PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

P1 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE SECONDARY PRESSURE

(1) On starting arm-out operation, arm-out operating pilot pressure switches arm 1 spool and arm 2 spool and is input to low pressure sensor. (2) The output voltage of low pressure sensor is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and outputs command according to the input voltage to P1 and P2 proportional valves and P1 and P2 unload proportional valves. (3) Each proportional valve outputs pilot proportional valve secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and changes P1 and P2 pump delivery rate and switches P1 and P2 unload pressure control valves. (4) With original hydraulic pressure command, arm 1 spool and arm 2 spool are switched and also with the command output by mechatro controller, P1 and P2 pumps and P1 and P2 unload valves are switched, and consequently the delivery oil on P2 pump side confluxes delivery oil on P1 pump side during arm-out operation.

21-13


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD

BOOM UP CONFLUX

TRAVEL LEFT

TRAVEL STRAIGHT

PILOT VALVE

P2 UNLOAD

SOLENOID

SWING

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

BUCKET DIGGING (DUMP) CONFLUX CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.8

P1

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR SE-1(2) pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

BUCKET DIGGING (DUMP) PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1

BUCKET DIGGING (DUMP) PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B

BUCKET DIGGING (DUMP) PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P1 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

BUCKET DIGGING (DUMP) PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

TRAVELSTRAIGHT PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-C

MECHATRO

BUCKET DIGGING (DUMP) PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE CONTROLLER pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE

SECONDARY PRESSURE

(1) On starting bucket digging (dump) operation, bucket digging (dump) operating pilot pressure switches bucket spool and is input to low pressure sensor. (2) The output voltage of low pressure sensor is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and outputs command according to the input voltage to P1 and P2 pump proportional valves, P1 and P2 unload proportional valves and travel straight proportional valve. (3) Each proportional valve outputs pilot proportional valve secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and changes P1 and P2 pump delivery rate and switches P1 and P2 unload valves and travel straight valve of the control valve. (4) The tandem passage is connected to P2 port because of the travel straight valve switched and P1 pump delivery oil confluxes P2 pump delivery oil because of P2 unload valve switched.

21-14


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

P1

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR SE-1 (2)

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

BUCKET DIGGING PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

BUCKET DIGGING PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS ACCEL POTENTIO

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1

P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B

BUCKET DIGGING PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

BUCKET DIGGING PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P1 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

TRAVEL STRAIGHT PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-C

BUCKET DIGGING PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

BUCKET ANTI-CAVITATION PROCESS

ATT BOOST SOLENOID VALVE SV-2

ENGINE SPEED (COMMAND VALUE)

MECHATRO CONTROLLER pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE SECONDARY PRESSURE

P1 PUMP PRESSURE

21-15

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD TRAVEL STRAIGHT

TRAVEL LEFT

BOOM UP CONFLUX

PILOT VALVE

P2 UNLOAD

SOLENOID

SWING

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

BUCKET DIGGING ANTI-CAVITATION CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.9


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (1) On starting bucket digging (dump) operation, bucket digging operating pilot pressure switches bucket spool and is input to low pressure sensor. (2) The engine speed command output by accel potentiometer is input to mechatro controller. (3) The output voltage of low pressure sensor is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and outputs command according to the input voltage to P1 and P2 pump proportional valves, P1 and P2 unload proportional valves and travel straight proportional valve. (4) Each proportional valve outputs pilot proportional valve secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and changes P1 and P2 pump delivery rate and switches P1 and P2 unload valves and travel straight valve of control valve. (5) The tandem passage is connected to P2 port because of the travel straight valve switched and P1 pump delivery oil confluxes P2 pump delivery oil because of P2 unload valve switched. (6) ATT boost solenoid valve turns the solenoid valve on according to the engine speed, and outputs secondary pressure, and actuate stroke limiter and then controls the stroke of bucket spool. The control of spool stroke makes the prevention of cavitation possible even if engine speed is low and pump delivery rate is low. (7) When P1 pump pressure was raised at cylinder stroke end, etc. the solenoid valve is closed according to the pump pressure, and when the pump pressure is high, the boost solenoid valve does not work to control the stroke limit of bucket spool.

21-16


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD TRAVEL STRAIGHT

BOOM UP CONFLUX

TRAVEL LEFT

SOLENOID

P2 UNLOAD

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

SWING

PILOT VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

SWING PRIORITY CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.10

P1

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR pi

ARM IN PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

pi

pi

SWING PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1 P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B P1 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

ARM IN PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

SWING PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

TRAVEL STRAIGHT PROPORTIONAL VALVE COMMAND

TRAVEL STRAIGHT COMMAND PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-C

REVERSE PROPORTIONAL VALVE CONTROL PROCESS FOR ARM 2 SPOOL

REVERSE PROPORTIONAL VALVE FOR ARM 2 SPOOL PSV-A

MECHATRO CONTROLLER

pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE SECONDARY PRESSURE

(1) During arm-in operation, arm operating pilot secondary pressure switches arm spool and is input to low pressure sensor on starting swing operation (or arm-in operation during swing operation), and swing operation pilot secondary pressure switches swing spool and is input to low pressure sensor. (2) The output voltage of low pressure sensor is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and outputs command according to the input voltage to P1 and P2 proportional valves, P1 and P2 unload pressure proportional valves, travel straight valve and reverse proportional valve for arm 2 spool. (3) Each proportional valve outputs pilot proportional valve secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and changes P1 and P2 pump delivery rate and switches P1 and P2 unload spool, travel straight spool, arm 2 spool. (4) With original hydraulic pressure command, arm 1 spool and swing spool are switched and also with the command by mechatro controller, P1 and P2 unload spools, travel straight spool and arm 2 spool are switched enabling for two pump flow rates to be supplied to the arm cylinder head side, and consequently the return oil on arm cylinder rod side is recirculated into arm cylinder head side. (5) Because the return oil on the arm rod side is recirculated, the working pressure is raised and pump delivery rate is used for swing operation by priority, and operated by the recirculated oil, making the operation with minimum speed drop possible.

21-17


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

(RIGHT)

PILOT VALVE FOR TRAVEL

SE-10

SE-9

SE-11

PILOT VALVE

P2

P1

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR

TRAVEL STRAIGHT SIGNAL

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

TRAVEL STRAIGHT PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-C

PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1

PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B

PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE SECONDARY PRESSURE

PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

21-18

P1 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

MECHATRO CONTROLLER

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD

BOOM UP CONFLUX

PILOT VALVE

TRAVEL STRAIGHT

(LEFT)

TRAVEL LEFT

SOLENOID

P2 UNLOAD

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

SWING

OPTIONAL PILOT VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

TRAVEL STRAIGHT CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.11


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (1) Judgment travel straight 1) During travel operation (right and left), pilot pressure switches each spool and is input to low pressure sensor on carrying out attachment system operation. 2) Mechatro controller decides as travel straight on receiving the input according to the combination shown in the table from the low pressure sensor and turns travel straight signal on. 3) On turning travel straight signal on, the following commands are output to each proportional valve. (2) Operation of each proportional valve (Basically attachment operation is actuated by P1 pump and travel operation is actuated by P2 pump in travel straight condition.) 1) Travel straight proportional valve Outputs switching pressure according to the high priority select pressure in the attachment system operating (Boom, arm, bucket, swing, option) pilot pressure during operation. 2) P1 unload proportional valve Outputs switching pressure according to the high priority select pressure in the attachment system operating pilot pressure during operation. 3) P2 unload proportional valve Outputs switching pressure according to the high priority select in the travel operating pilot pressure during operation. 4) P1 pump proportional valve Outputs switching pressure according to the high priority select pressure in the attachment system operating pilot pressure during operation. 5) P2 pump proportional valve Outputs switching pressure according to the high priority select in the travel operating pilot pressure during operation.

21-19


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD

TRAVEL LEFT

BOOM UP CONFLUX

PILOT VALVE

TRAVEL STRAIGHT

GAUGE CLUSTER

P2 UNLOAD

SOLENOID

SWING

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

PRESSURE RELEASE CONTROL

OPTION

21.1.12

P1

SE-23

SE-22

ENGINE

PRESSURE RELEASE CONTROL

ENGINE SPEED CONTROL

pi

pi

pi

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS MECHATRO CONTROLLER

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1

P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B

P1 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE SECONDARY PRESSURE

(1) Change mechatro controller to "PRESSURE DRAINING MODE" by operating switch on gauge cluster. For detail of changing mode method, refer to "How to switch to "Pressure release mode"" on item 22.11.1. (2) Once mechatro controller decides it as pressure release control, regardless of each input signal (operating pilot, accel potentiometer, etc.) the mechatro controller; 1) Outputs minimum tilt angle command to P1, P2 pump proportional valves and fixes P1, P2 pump to minimum tilt angle. 2) Outputs command of pressure release and outputs command of pressure release control to ECU and fixes engine speed to pressure release control speed. 3) Outputs maximum command to P1 and P2 unload valves and each pilot secondary pressure fixes P1 and P2 unload valves to the maximum opening. (3) Mechatro controller senses output voltage from the main pump high pressure sensor, decides the pump pressure and displays "DRAINING HYD. PRESS" or "FAIL DRAIN HYD. PRESS" on gauge cluster. (4) Each pump delivery oil is unloaded to tank passage enabling for the remained pressure (trapped pressure) to be released by operating each control lever and switching spool with the unload valve opened.

21-20


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD TRAVEL STRAIGHT

TRAVEL LEFT

BOOM UP CONFLUX P2 UNLOAD

SOLENOID

SWING

PRESSURE SENSOR N&B FOR BREAKER SELECTOR SE-29 VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

N&B SWITCH CONTROL (OPTION)

OPTION

21.1.13

P1

A MODE

B MODE GAUGE CLUSTER

pi

B MODE SWITCH

MECHATRO CONTROLLER

pi : OUTPUT OF N&B SELECTOR SOLENOID

(1) Nibbler circuit 1) Select A mode through gauge cluster. 2) Nibbler display appears on gauge cluster. 3) The return oil from the nibbler passes through selector valve and option spool and led to tank line of main control valve. 4) When selecting A mode through gauge cluster, the breaker pressure sensor has not function to output. It is in normal when there is no output from sensor in A mode, and in cases of other than above, error display is output to gauge cluster. (2) Breaker circuit 1) Select B mode through gauge cluster. 2) Breaker display appears on gauge cluster. 3) The return oil from the breaker passes through selector valve and directly returns into hydraulic oil tank. 4) When selecting B mode through gauge cluster, the breaker pressure sensor outputs signal. It is in normal when there is an output from sensor in B mode, and in cases of other than above, error display is output to gauge cluster.

21-21


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

P2

LOW PRESSURE SENSOR

ARM 2 SPEED

BUCKET

BOOM

TRAVEL RIGHT

P1 UNLOAD TRAVEL STRAIGHT

BOOM UP CONFLUX

TRAVEL LEFT

SOLENOID

P2 UNLOAD

PILOT VALVE

SWING

N&B SELECTOR VALVE

ARM 1 SPEED

OPTION CONFLUX CONTROL (OPTION)

OPTION

21.1.14

P1

SINGLE / CONFLUX SWITCH

SE-11

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

OPTION PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

P2 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P2

P1 PUMP PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-P1

OPTION PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

pi

PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

OPTION PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

OPTION PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE pi PILOT SIGNAL PROCESS

OPTION PILOT SECONDARY PRESSURE

P2 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-B

P1 UNLOAD PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-D

TRAVEL STRAIGHT PROPORTIONAL VALVE PSV-C

MECHATRO pi : PROPORTIONAL VALVE CONTROLLER SECONDARY PRESSURE

(1) Select the Conflux with the aid of Conflux/Single switch. (2) On starting option operation, option operating pilot pressure switches option spool and is input to low pressure sensor. (3) The output voltage of low pressure sensor is input to mechatro controller and the mechatro controller processes pilot signal and outputs command according to the input voltage to P1 and P2 pump proportional valves, P1 and P2 unload pressure proportional valves and travel straight proportional valve. (4) Each proportional valves output pilot proportional valve secondary pressure according to the command output by mechatro controller and changes P1 and P2 pump delivery rate and switches P1 and P2 unload valves and travel straight valve of the control valve. (5) The parallel passage on P2 side is connected to P1 port because of the travel straight valve switched and P1 pump delivery oil confluxes P2 pump delivery oil because of the P2 unload valve switched.

21-22


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

21.2

MECHATRO CONTROLLER

21.2.1

SUMMARY OF MULTI DISPLAY

Electro-hydraulic conversion information is displayed on the multi display of the gauge cluster. (1) Controls EMERGECY ACCEL DIAL GAUGE CLUSTER

SWING PARKING BRAKE RELEASE SWITCH

SAFETY LOCK LEVER RIGHT CONTROL LEVER WITH ATT BOOST SW. FUSE & RELAY BOX

STARTER SWITCH ACCEL DIAL

A (2) Gauge cluster No. 11

22:00 H 1

2 3 10 4

9

8

5

7

6

Name

1

Engine coolant temperature gauge

2

Fuel level gauge

3

Screen change switch

4

Buzzer stop switch

5

Work mode select switch

6

Washer switch

7

Wiper switch

8

Travel high speed, low speed select switch

9

Auto accel switch

10

Select switch

11

Multi display (LCD)

21-23

DETAIL A


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (3) Screen selection by work mode select switch Press the work mode selector switch ( ) in order, and "S" o "H" o "B" o "A" mode can be selected. Select the effective work mode according to the work condition and working target from the table shown below. For the selected work mode, refer to the table shown below. • S mode: For standard excavating work • H mode: For heavy duty excavating work • B mode: For works with breaker • A mode: For demolition works with crusher (Nibbler)

10:25

• The initial setting (default) of work mode had been set to "S" mode at factory. As for the work mode after the engine starts, the mode that was used the last time engine was stopped is automatically set. Check that the selected mode conforms to the work before starting work.

S

• Check that the attachment in use conforms to the work mode before starting work. If not conformed, select proper mode with the work mode select switch. • The operation under improper work mode may cause damage to machine.

Work mode

Display

Contents

S mode

10:25

H mode

10:25

B mode

10:25

For the work with breaker, select "B mode" without fail.

A mode

10:25

For the work with crusher (nibbler), select "A mode".

"S mode"is suitable for standard digging and loading works and is in fuel saving and is maintained well-balanced relations with workload.

"H mode"is suitable for heavy duty digging work which gives priority to the workload at the high speed.

For the work with breaker, select "B mode" without fail. The work with breaker in any mode other than "B mode" may cause damage to the hydraulic equipment and breaker.

21-24


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 1) Pump flow rate adjustment (A mode /B mode) No.

1

Switches

1

Screen change switch

2

Buzzer stop switch

3

KPSS work mode select switch

4

Washer switch

5

Wiper switch

6

Travel speed select switch

7

Auto accel switch

8

Select switch

2

8

3

7

4

5

6 Fig. 21-1

According to some kind of attachment, it is required to change the flow rate for service circuit. Change the flow rate in accordance with the procedure mentioned below. In this machine, last set flow rate has been stored and the initial flow rate is 220L/min. The adjustment (increase or decrease) of flow rate is changeable by 10L/min step.

Main screen

Attachment mode (A mode)

10:25

Flow rate

H

Flow rate

220 L/m

Enter

A

(a)

Flow rate

100 L/m

(b)

(d)

100 L/m

A

Increase/Decrease

In Breaker mode (B mode) Flow rate

220 L/m

Flow rate

Enter

B Screen in Attachment/Breaker mode A mode Flow rate

(c)

(d)

Flow rate

A

100 L/m

B

Increase/Decrease When the conflux switch is tuned on, the double flow rate is displayed.

B mode 220 L/m

Flow rate

100 L/m

220 L/m

B (b)

(c)

1. Turn starter key switch on and display main screen (a). 2. The display on the left lower corner of screen is changed in order of "S" o "H" o "B" o "A" each time the "MODE" switch (3) is pressed under the condition where main screen (a) is displayed. 3. Select "A" and A mode screen is displayed, and select "B" and B mode screen is displayed. 4. Press select switch (8) in A/B mode display screens (b)/(c) and the value of flow rate reverses in black and the screen (d) is displayed. In this condition, press FEED decreases.

(4)/

(5) and the flow rate value increases or

5. Select the desired setting value and then press select switch (8) and the flow rate is set to the desired value.

21-25


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (4) MAINTENANCE SCREEN DISPLAYS This screen displays the remaining time to the end of recommended replacement/change interval specified for filter/oil. For the initial set value of recommenced replacement/change time, see the following table. Replacement interval Item

Default

Engine oil

500 Hr

Fuel filter

500 Hr

Hydraulic oil filter Hydraulic oil

1,000 Hr MIDDLE EAST

2,000 Hr

RUSSIA

5,000 Hr

This menu is available for confirmation of the following items. The maintenance screen changes each time the screen change switch is pressed. 1. Remaining time display to the engine oil change This display shows the remaining time to the coming engine oil change.

492Hr

ENGINE OIL

H

2. Remaining time display to the coming fuel filter replacement This display shows the remaining time to the coming engine fuel filter replacement.

492Hr

FUEL FILTER

H

3. Remaining time display to the coming hydraulic oil filter replacement This display shows the remaining time to the coming hydraulic oil filter replacement.

992Hr

HYD. FILTER

H

4. Remaining time display to the coming hydraulic oil change This display shows the remaining time to the coming hydraulic oil change.

1992Hr HYD. OIL

H

•

The display automatically changes to the main screen, if switch is not operated for 30 seconds.

•

For the setting procedure of maintenance time to be performed to the coming oil change in each type and filter replacement, see the 21.2.6 SET PROCEDURE OF MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.

21-26


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (5) Gauge cluster display After key is switched on and logo mark display disappears, screen for operator is displayed on multi screen. The display functions of multi display are explained below. CLOCK DISPLAY SELF DIAGNOSIS / WARNING MACHINE CONDITION

H MULTI DISPLAY INDICATIONS

1) Display function for operator ......... Screen usually displayed during operation 1.1 Clock display function ......... Current time is displayed. 1.2 Self-diagnosis display ......... When abnormality is detected on mechatro system like sensor, proportional valve, etc., this displays error code. 1.3 Warning display ......... When machine was thrown into dangerous state, or was failed, displays warning contents with the symbol and statement. (For warning contents, see items shown below.) 1.4 Machine condition display ......... Displays machine operating condition. 2) Display function for maintenance ......... Displays remaining time up to replacement/change of following items. (1) Engine oil (2) Fuel filter (3) Hydraulic oil filter (4) Hydraulic oil 3) Failure history display function ......... Stores abnormality occurred on mechatro system in the past and displays in order of recent occurrence. 4) Mechatro adjustment display ......... Displays procedure for adjustment of mechatro system like output adjustment and unload adjustment, etc. 5) Service diagnosis display ......... Displays information like pressure sensor sensed value, proportional valve command, etc. output by mechatro controller 6) Failure diagnosis mode display function ......... Specifies failed section automatically for failures which are not detected by self diagnosis and displays the results.

. Warning CAUTION ATTACHMENT

These descriptions indicate error codes. LOW ENG OIL PRESS.

W005

PREHEAT

HIGH ENG WATER TEMP.

W006

CHARGE ERROR

POWER BOOST ON

LOW ENG WATER W004 LEVEL

LOW FUEL LEVEL

WARM FINISH WARM-UP

DRAIN WATER SEPA W010

WARM AUTO WARMING UP

CLOGGED AIR FLTR W008

CHANGE ENG OIL

AUTO IDLE STOP

DATA

CPU COMMUNICATION ERROR

SWING BRAKE DISENGAGED

W009

W011

ENGINE STOP

Error codes were stored as trouble history, and displayed on the monitor by the trouble history display function.

21-27


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 21.2.2

SELF DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY

(1) Outline This function identifies abnormality of control I/O signal like pressure, proportional valve, etc. during machine operation through self diagnosis. The failed items are displayed on multi display of gauge cluster. For connector No. and pin No., refer to the section "C-1 Mechatro controller" explained later. Electric circuit diagram or harness is available to identify wire No. and wire color. (2) I/O configuration

(3) Self diagnosis display items As-displayed clock (Usually main screen). When error occurred, specifies failed section and the failure type with the aid of error code.

21-28


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

Note) The numbers in the column of "page for reference" show the related page in Chapter 51 Engine.

21-29


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 21.2.3

SERVICE DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY FUNCTION

The current service diagnosis is displayed on multi display based on the data received from mechatro controller. This section explains the operating procedure and examples of each screen. The values in display changes according to the conditions like engine speed, attachment position, etc. (1) Service diagnosis display screen operating procedure 1)

Turn starter switch ON keeping buzzer stop switch pressed.

2) After logo mark is displayed, the screen changes in service diagnosis mode. The service diagnosis screen "Mode No.1", "Screen No.1" is displayed first. The service diagnosis is classified into three modes, 1, 2, and 3, and the present mode is displayed in "Screen No.1". The screen number each mode can display differs. The screen number displayed by each mode is as follows. •

Mode No.1 : Screen No.1~No.30

Mode No.2 : Screen No.1, Screen No.31~No.40

Mode No.3 : Screen No.1, Screen No.41~No.50

3) The screen changes each time each switch is pressed from now on. Washer switch: Screen gains by 1 in order. (No.2oNo.3oNo.4o...) Wiper switch: Screen loses by 1 in order. (No.24oNo.23oNo.22o...) Auto idling switch: Service diagnosis number advances from No.1 to No.3, and then returns to No.1. (No.1oNo.2oNo.3oNo.1o...) Travel 1, 2 speed switch: Service diagnosis number advances from No.3 to No.1, and then returns to No.3. (No.3oNo.2oNo.1oNo.3o...) 4) Turn key switch OFF and the display of service diagnosis mode is closed.

21-30


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (2) Service diagnosis display screen (Example) The service diagnosis display screen list is shown below. The conditions for display are H mode, engine low speed and lever to neutral position.) 1) Service diagnosis mode No.1 No. 1

Displays NO.1 MAIN CONT. P/N YN22E00001F1 PROGRAM VERSION 1-VER 11.11 2-VER 00.00 SERVICE DIAG 1

2

3

NO.2 ENG G-3 SPEED SET 2205 MEAS1 2201 MEAS2 2201 G-5 ENG PRS. LIVE WATER TEMP 100 OFF MODE HM H-1 ACCEL VOLT. 4.2V POS. 100% ECU OUTPUT 0.5V

NO.3 SOL.VALVE F-1 POWER BOOST COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF SWITCH OFF F-2 SWING-BRAKE COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF RELEASE SW OFF F-3 1/2-TRAVEL COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF SWITCH OFF

Contents

No. 4

P/No. indication

K-1 AIS RELAY 2 OFF K-2 SAFETY RLY OFF K-3 ENG STOP OFF KEY SWITCH OFF START SWITCH OFF CHARGE LIVE K-4 LOCK LEVER OFF SWITCH OFF

Program version indication MERIT controller program version Service diagnosis mode

5 No load setting rpm Actual rpm 1 Actual rpm 2 (Engine controller) Engine oil pressure Coolant temperaturre sensor Work mode Potentiometer voltage Voltage % indication Accel output voltage to engine controller

6 Set value in computer Measured value Switch Set value in computer Measured value Switch Set value in computer Measured value Switch

Displays

Contents

NO.4 RELAY

NO.5 PRESS.SENSOR B-1 BOOM RAISE 3.5V 2.6M B-2 BOOM LOWER 3.5V 2.6M B-3 ARM OUT 3.5V 2.6M B-4 ARM IN 3.5V 2.6M B-5 BUCKET DIG 3.5V 2.6M B-6 BUCKET DUMP 3.5V 2.6M

NO.6 PRESS.SENSOR B-7 SWING 3.5V 2.6M B-9 TRAVEL(R) 3.5V 2.6M B-10 TRAVEL(L) 3.5V 2.6M B-16 P1 OPT. 3.5V 2.6M B-17 P2 OPT. 3.5V 2.6M B-18 DOZER 1 3.5V 2.6M B-19 DOZER 2 3.5V 2.6M

21-31

Indicated value Indicated value Indicated value Key switch Starter switch Alternator Indicated value Switch

Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value

Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

7

8

9

10

11

NO.7 P.SENSOR PROPO-V C-1 PUMP P1 3.5V 32.6M C-2 PUMP P2 3.5V 32.6M C-3 BOOM-HEAD 3.5V 32.6M C-4 BOOM-ROD 3.5V 32.6M PROPO-VALVE E-3 OPT RELIEF 1 COMP. 600mA 14.5M MEAS. 600mA 14.5M E-4 OPT RELIEF 2 COMP. 600mA 14.5M NO.8 PROPO-VALVE D-1 P1 UN-LOAD(BP-CUT) COMP. 600mA 4.5M MEAS. 600mA 4.5M D-2 P2 UN-LOAD(BP-CUT) COMP. 600mA 4.5M MEAS. 600mA 4.5M D-3 S-TRAVEL COMP. 600mA 4.5M MEAS. 600mA 4.5M D-6 ARM IN-2-SPEED COMP. 600mA 4.5M MEAS. 600mA 4.5M

NO.9 PROPO-VALVE E-1 P1 PUMP COMP. 600mA 4.5M MEAS. 600mA 4.5M POWER SHIFT 100mA FLOW RATE 100L E-2 P2 PUMP COMP. 600mA 4.5M MEAS. 600mA 4.5M POWER SHIFT 100mA FLOW RATE 100L

NO.10 SENSOR,SWITCH H-9 FUEL LEVEL 4.5V 90 H-10 HYD.OIL TEMP 4.5V 30 GLOW OFF AIR FILTER LIVE WATER SEPA. LIVE ENG OIL FILTER LIVE FRONT WINDOW OFF DOUBLE FLOW ON KPSS SW OFF HEATER OFF ENG OIL LEVEL LIVE COOLANT LEVEL LIVE NO.11 SOL.VALVE F-4 OPT SELECT COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF SPOOL POS. NIB SELECT SWITCH NIB F-5 FAN PUMP COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF F-6 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF

12

NO.12 POTENTIO. H-2 BOOM 3.5V 137 H-3 ARM 3.5V 137

16 Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Set value in computer / Converted value from pressure Measured value / Converted value from pressure

NO.16 PRESS.SENSOR B-11 3.5V 12.6M B-12 3.5V 12.6M B-13 3.5V 12.6M B-14 3.5V 12.6M B-15 3.5V 12.6M B-20 3.5V 12.6M

Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value Sensor voltage / Pressure converted value

Set value in computer / Converted value from pressure Measured value / Converted value from pressure

18 Set value in computer / Converted value from pressure Measured value / Converted value from pressure Set value in computer / Converted value from pressure Measured value / Converted value from pressure Set value in computer / Converted value from pressure Measured value / Converted value from pressure Set value in computer / Converted value from pressure Measured value / Converted value from pressure

19 Set value in computer / Converted value from pressure Measured value / Converted value from pressure

Power shift Flow rate of pump P1

Set value in computer / Converted value from pressure Measured value / Converted value from pressure

Power shift Flow rate of pump P2

20 Fuel level Hydraulic oil temperature Glow switch Air filter clogging Water separator clogging Engine oil filter clogging Front window open/close switch Conflux/Single flow select switch KPSS switch Command from air heater Engine oil level Coolant level

21 Set value in computer Measured value (Feed back value) Spool position Mode of selector valve Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value

22 Sent value from sensor / Converted value from angle Sent value from sensor / Converted value from angle

NO.18 DIGITAL INPUT DI1 OFF DI2 OFF DI3 OFF DI4 OFF DI5 OFF DI6 OFF DI7 OFF DI8 OFF DI9 OFF DI10 OFF DI11 OFF DI12 OFF DI13 OFF DI14 OFF

ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication

NO.19 DIGITAL INPUT DI15 OFF DI16 OFF DI17 OFF DI18 OFF DI19 OFF DI20 OFF DI21 OFF DI22 OFF DI23 OFF DI24 OFF DI25 OFF DI26 OFF DI27 OFF DI28 OFF

ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication

NO.20 DIGITAL INPUT DI29 OFF DI30 OFF DI31 OFF DI32 OFF DI33 OFF DI34 OFF DI35 OFF DI36 OFF DI37 OFF DI38 OFF DI39 OFF DI40 OFF DI41 OFF DI42 OFF

ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication ON/OFF indication

NO.21 DIGITAL OUTPUT DO1 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO2 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO3 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO4 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO5 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO6 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO7 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF

Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value

NO.22 DIGITAL OUTPUT DO8 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO9 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO10 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO11 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO12 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO13 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO14 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF

Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value

21-32

See Mechatro controller connector


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

No. 23

24

25

Displays

Contents

NO.23 DIGITAL OUTPUT DO15 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO16 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO17 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO18 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO19 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO20 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO21 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF

Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value

NO.24 DIGITAL OUTPUT DO22 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO23 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO24 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO25 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO26 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO27 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF DO28 COMP. OFF MEAS. OFF

Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value Set value in computer Measured value

NO.25 WIPER SYSTEM WIPER SW OFF RISEUP SW OFF REVERSE SW OFF PREVENT ARC OFF CW MOTOR RLY OFF CCW MOTOR RLY OFF WASHER SW OFF MOTOR RELAY OFF

No. 27

Displays

Contents

NO.27 MERIT SYSTEM COMMUNICATION

OFF 4

Status of communication in MERIT controller

0412051200

28

NO.28 ENG CONT. TRANS.COUNT. 100 RECEIVE COUNT. 100 DIAG STATUS 9 NUMBER OF DIAG 100 BOOST PRESS. 100 BOOST TEMP. -100 BAROMETRIC P. 100 FUEL TEMP. -100 FUEL CONS. 200 INTAKE TEMP. -100 ENG PRESS. 300 GLOW OFF ENG STOP OFF TORQUE 1000

Counted number of transmission error Counted number of reception error Diagnosis status Numbers of error Boost pressure Boost temperature Atmospheric pressure Fuel temperature Fuel consumption Intake air temperature Engine oil pressure Glow output from ECU Engine stop command from ECU Calculated torque of ECU

Wiper switch Wiper rise-up switch Wiper reverse rotation switch Wiper motor ark prevention relay Wiper normal rotation relay Wiper reverse rotation relay Washer switch Washer motor relay

2) Service diagnosis mode No.2 No. 1

31

32

Displays NO.1 MAIN CONT. P/N YN22E00001F1 PROGRAM VERSION 1-VER 11.11 2-VER 00.00

Contents

No. 33

P/No. indication Program version indication MERIT controller program version

SERVICE DIAG 2

Service diagnosis mode

NO.31 BOOM C-1 P1-PRES 13.9M C-2 P2-PRES 13.9M E-1 P1-PSV 600mA E-2 P2-PSV 600mA D-1 P1-UL(BPC) 600mA D-2 P2-UL(BPC) 600mA B-1 BOOM RAISE 1.9M B-2 BOOM LOWER 1.9M G-3 ENG SPEED 2205 POWER SHIFT 100mA

Pump pressure sensor Pump pressure sensor Command current Command current Command current Command current Boom up pressure sensor Boom down pressure sensor Engine actual speed Power shift current

NO.32 ARM,SWING C-1 P1-PRES 13.9M C-2 P2-PRES 13.9M E-1 P1-PSV 600mA E-2 P2-PSV 600mA D-1 P1-UL(BPC) 600mA D-2 P2-UL(BPC) 600mA D-3 S-TRAVEL 600mA D-6 ARM-IN-2 600mA B-3 ARM OUT 13.9M B-4 ARM IN 13.9M B-1 BOOM RAISE 13.9M B-7 SWING 13.9M G-3 ENG SPEED 2205 POWER SHIFT 100mA

Pump pressure sensor Pump pressure sensor Command current Command current Command current Command current Command current Command current Arm out pressure sensor Arm in pressure sensor Boom up pressure sensor Swing pressure sensor Engine actual speed Power shift current

34

35

Displays

Contents

NO.33 BUCKET C-1 P1-PRES 13.9M C-2 P2-PRES 13.9M E-1 P1-PSV 600mA E-2 P2-PSV 600mA D-1 P1-UL(BPC) 600mA D-2 P2-UL(BPC) 600mA D-3 S-TRAVEL 600mA B-5 BUCKET DIG 1.9M B-6 BUCKET DUMP 1.9M G-3 ENG SPEED 2205 POWER SHIFT 100mA

Pump pressure sensor Pump pressure sensor Command current Command current Command current Command current Command current Bucket digging pressure sensor Bucket dump pressure sensor Engine actual speed Power shift current

NO.34 TRAVEL C-1 P1-PRES 13.9M C-2 P2-PRES 13.9M E-1 P1-PSV 600mA E-2 P2-PSV 600mA D-1 P1-UL(BPC) 600mA D-2 P2-UL(BPC) 600mA D-3 S-TRAVEL 600mA B-9 TRAVEL(R) 13.9M B-10 TRAVEL(L) 13.9M Pi-P1 13.9M Pi-P2 13.9M G-3 ENG SPEED 2205 POWER SHIFT 100mA

Pump pressure sensor Pump pressure sensor Command current Command current Command current Command current Command current Travel right pressure sensor Travel left pressure sensor Pilot pressure at travel straight (P1 side) Pilot pressure at travel straight (P2 side) Engine actual rpm Power shift current

NO.35 OPT C-1 P1-PRES 13.9M C-2 P2-PRES 13.9M E-1 P1-PSV 600mA E-2 P2-PSV 600mA D-1 P1-UL(BPC) 600mA D-2 P2-UL(BPC) 600mA D-3 S-TRAVEL 600mA E-3 OPT RELIEF 600mA B-16 P1 OPT 1.9M B-17 P2 OPT 1.9M F-4 OPT SELECT NIB DOUBLE FLOW SW NIB G-3 ENG SPEED 2205 POWER SHIFT 100mA

Pump pressure sensor Pump pressure sensor Command current Command current Command current Command current Command current Command current P1 side option pressure sensor P2 side option pressure sensor Optional selector SOL (Nibbler line) Conflux/ Single selector switch Engine actual rpm Power shift current

21-33


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 3) Service diagnosis mode No.3 No. 1

Displays NO.1 MAIN CONT. P/N YN22E00001F1 PROGRAM VERSION 1-VER 11.11 2-VER 00.00 SERVICE DIAG 3

41

NO.41 ADJUSTMENT 1 ENG HI-IDLE 2205 PUMP ACT I 515mA 15mA PUMP P 35.0M ESS N 2040 UN-LOAD P1 600mA P2 600mA BOOM 137 137 ARM 137 137 OFFSET 137 137 INTER-B 137 137

Contents

No. 43

P/No. indication Program version indication MERIT controller program version Service diagnosis mode

44 Engine speed high idle Current at pump adjustment Current correction at pump adjustment Pressure at pump adjustment Engine speed sensor rpm P1 unload corrective current P2 unload corrective current Angle adjustment Angle adjustment Angle adjustment Angle adjustment

Displays NO.43 MACHINE-INFORM. HOUR METER 3550 TRIP METER 3500 OPERATION 3300 TRAVEL 300 SWING 3000 HAMMER 100 CRANE 100 STARTER 1200

Contents Hour meter of controller Trip meter of controller All accumulated operating time All accumulated traveling time All accumulated swing time All accumulated breaker operating time All accumulated high-reach crane operating time

All accumulated starter operating time

NO.44 MACHINE-INFORM. PUMP PRESS. TOTAL 10Hr LEVEL1 24% 22% LEVEL2 50% 50% LEVEL3 25% 25% LEVEL4 1 % 3%

Pump pressure distribution (%) Total / In the last 10 hours Total / In the last 10 hours Total / In the last 10 hours Total / In the last 10 hours

WATER TEMP. TOTAL 10Hr LEVEL1 24% 22% LEVEL2 50% 50% LEVEL3 25% 25% LEVEL4 1 % 3%

Coolant temperature distribution (%) Total / In the last 10 hours Total / In the last 10 hours Total / In the last 10 hours Total / In the last 10 hours

21-34


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (3) Service diagnosis data list Preface and precaution The following is the data decided as normal status after service diagnosis for every operation. Use these data to decide normal/abnormal status. •

The values in following display are reference values with standard attachment attached machine.

The value of pressure sensor is calculated taking variation into accounts. When compared to performance check reference criteria, measure it with the aid of calibrated measuring instrument.

The current of proportional valve is not the measured value, but command value. The measured value should be confirmed by the value in the displayed value for each proportional valve.

The current value of pump proportional valve is reference value because it varies according to pump pressure and adjusted torque value.

The value in display during operation shows the value in steady state, rather than, at start of operation.

Check on machine after sufficiently warming up machine.

The value in display may differ according to software version. Contact our dealer/distributor.

Operation No.1 : No operation H mode Hi idle

Operation No.2 : No operation S mode Hi idle

No.32 ARM, SWING

No.32 ARM, SWING

C-1

P1-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

C-1

P1-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

C-2

P2-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

C-2

P2-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

E-1

P1-PSV

350 mA

E-1

P1-PSV

350 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

350 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

350 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

750 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

750 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

750 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

750 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

D-6

ARM-IN-2

750 mA

D-6

ARM-IN-2

750 mA

B-3

ARM OUT

0.0 M

B-3

ARM OUT

0.0 M

B-4

ARM IN

0.0 M

B-4

ARM IN

0.0 M

B-1

BOOM RAISE

0.0 M

B-1

BOOM RAISE

0.0 M

B-7

SWING

0.0 M

B-7

SWING

0.0 M

G-3

ENG SPEED

G-3

ENG SPEED

POWER SHIFT

1970~2030 0 mA

POWER SHIFT

1770~1830 0 mA

Operation No.3 : Boom up in full lever operation & relief H mode Hi idle

Operation No.4 : Boom up in full lever operation & in operation

No.31 BOOM

No.31 BOOM

H mode Hi idle

C-1

P1-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-1

P1-PRES

11.0~16.0 M

C-2

P2-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-2

P2-PRES

11.0~16.0 M

E-1

P1-PSV

415~525 mA

E-1

P1-PSV

560~750 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

415~525 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

560~750 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

B-1

BOOM RAISE

3.0 M

B-1

BOOM RAISE

3.0 M

B-2

BOOM LOWER

0.0 M

B-2

BOOM LOWER

0.0 M

G-3

ENG SPEED

G-3

ENG SPEED

POWER SHIFT

1970~2060 0 mA

POWER SHIFT

21-35

1970~2060 0 mA


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

Operation No.5 : Boom down in full lever operation & in operation H mode Hi idle

No.31 BOOM C-1

P1-PRES

12.5~16.0 M

C-2

P2-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

E-1

P1-PSV

600~617 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

350 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

427~477 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

750 mA

B-1

BOOM RAISE

0.0 M

B-2

BOOM LOWER

3.0 M

G-3

ENG SPEED POWER SHIFT

1970~2060 0 mA

Operation No.6 : Arm-in in full lever operation & relief H mode Hi idle

Operation No.7 : Arm-in in full lever operation & in operation H mode Hi idle

No.32 ARM, SWING

No.32 ARM, SWING

C-1

P1-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-1

P1-PRES

12.5~16.5 M

C-2

P2-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-2

P2-PRES

12.5~16.5 M

E-1

P1-PSV

415~525 mA

E-1

P1-PSV

550~750 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

415~525 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

550~750 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

D-6

ARM-IN-2

200 mA

D-6

ARM-IN-2

400 mA

B-3

ARM OUT

0.0 M

B-3

ARM OUT

0.0 M

B-4

ARM IN

3.0 M

B-4

ARM IN

3.0 M

B-1

BOOM RAISE

0.0 M

B-1

BOOM RAISE

0.0 M

B-7

SWING

0.0 M

B-7

SWING

0.0 M

G-3

ENG SPEED

G-3

ENG SPEED

POWER SHIFT

1970~2060 0 mA

POWER SHIFT

21-36

1970~2060 0 mA


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

Operation No.8 : Arm-out in full lever operation & relief H mode Hi idle

Operation No.9 : Arm-out in full lever operation & in operation H mode Hi idle

No.32 ARM, SWING

No.32 ARM, SWING

C-1

P1-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-1

P1-PRES

15.0~22.0 M

C-2

P2-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-2

P2-PRES

15.0~22.0 M

E-1

P1-PSV

415~525 mA

E-1

P1-PSV

488~677 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

415~525 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

488~677 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

D-6

ARM-IN-2

750 mA

D-6

ARM-IN-2

750 mA

B-3

ARM OUT

3.0 M

B-3

ARM OUT

3.0 M

B-4

ARM IN

0.0 M

B-4

ARM IN

0.0 M

B-1

BOOM RAISE

0.0 M

B-1

BOOM RAISE

0.0 M

B-7

SWING

0.0 M

B-7

SWING

0.0 M

G-3

ENG SPEED

G-3

ENG SPEED

1970~2060

POWER SHIFT

0 mA

1970~2060

POWER SHIFT

0 mA

* Measure the values after a lapse of 5 minutes or after release of low temperature mode

* Measure the values after a lapse of 5 minutes or after release of low temperature mode

Operation No.10 : Swing in full lever operation & relief H mode Hi idle

Operation No.11 : Swing in full lever operation & in operation H mode Hi idle

No.32 ARM, SWING

No.32 ARM, SWING

C-1

P1-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

C-1

P1-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

C-2

P2-PRES

28.0~35.8 M

C-2

P2-PRES

10.0~15.0 M

E-1

P1-PSV

350 mA

E-1

P1-PSV

350 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

528~750 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

750 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

750 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

750 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

D-6

ARM-IN-2

750 mA

D-6

ARM-IN-2

750 mA

B-3

ARM OUT

0.0 M

B-3

ARM OUT

0.0 M

B-4

ARM IN

0.0 M

B-4

ARM IN

0.0 M

B-1

BOOM RAISE

0.0 M

B-1

BOOM RAISE

0.0 M

B-7

SWING

3.0 M

B-7

SWING

3.0 M

G-3

ENG SPEED

G-3

ENG SPEED

POWER SHIFT

1970~2060 0 mA

POWER SHIFT

21-37

1970~2060 0 mA


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

Operation No.12 : Bucket digging in full lever operation & relief H mode Hi idle

Operation No.13 : Bucket digging in full lever operation & in operation H mode Hi idle

No.33 BUCKET

No.33 BUCKET

C-1

P1-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-1

P1-PRES

4.0~8.0 M

C-2

P2-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-2

P2-PRES

4.0~8.0 M

E-1

P1-PSV

415~525 mA

E-1

P1-PSV

650~750 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

415~525 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

540~563 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

720 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

720 mA

B-5

BUCKET DIG

3.0 M

B-5

BUCKET DIG

3.0 M

B-6

BUCKET DUMP

0.0 M

B-6

BUCKET DUMP

0.0 M

G-3

ENG SPEED

G-3

ENG SPEED

1970~2060

POWER SHIFT

0 mA

POWER SHIFT

1970~2060 0 mA

Operation No.14 : Bucket dump in full lever operation & relief H mode Hi idle

Operation No.15 : Bucket dump in full lever operation & in operation H mode Hi idle

No.33 BUCKET

No.33 BUCKET

C-1

P1-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-1

P1-PRES

6.0~15.0 M

C-2

P2-PRES

33.0~35.8 M

C-2

P2-PRES

6.0~15.0 M

E-1

P1-PSV

415~525 mA

E-1

P1-PSV

577~750 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

415~435 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

415~435 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

720 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

720 mA

B-5

BUCKET DIG

0.0 M

B-5

BUCKET DIG

0.0 M

B-6

BUCKET DUMP

3.0 M

B-6

BUCKET DUMP

3.0 M

G-3

ENG SPEED

G-3

ENG SPEED

POWER SHIFT

1970~2060 0 mA

POWER SHIFT

21-38

1970~2060 0 mA


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

Operation No.16 : P2 side option in full lever operation & relief A mode Hi idle

Operation No.17 : P2 side option in full lever operation & relief B mode Hi idle

No.35 OPT

No.35 OPT

C-1

P1-PRES

22.5~26.0 M

C-1

P1-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

C-2

P2-PRES

22.5~26.0 M

C-2

P2-PRES

22.5~26.0 M

E-1

P1-PSV

459~584 mA

E-1

P1-PSV

500 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

459~584 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

665~750 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

750 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

720 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

E-3

OPT RELIEF

0 mA

E-3

OPT RELIEF

0 mA

B-16 P1 OPT

0.0 M

B-16 P1 OPT

0.0 M

B-17 P2 OPT

2.0~2.6 M

B-17 P2 OPT

2.0~2.6 M

F-4 G-3

OPT SELECT

NIB

DOUBLE FLOW SW.

ON

ENG SPEED POWER SHIFT

F-4

1970~2060

G-3

0 mA

OPT SELECT

BRK

DOUBLE FLOW SW.

OFF

ENG SPEED POWER SHIFT

1970~2060 0 mA

* Conflux switch is ON. Relief set pressure is value of shipping.

* Conflux switch is OFF. Relief set pressure is value of shipping.

Operation No.18 : Travel right in full lever operation & travel idling H mode Hi idle

Operation No.19 : Travel left in full lever operation & travel idling H mode Hi idle

No.34 TRAVEL

No.34 TRAVLE

C-1

P1-PRES

5.0~12.0 M

C-1

P1-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

C-2

P2-PRES

0.2~1.5 M

C-2

P2-PRES

5.0~12.0 M

E-1

P1-PSV

750 mA

E-1

P1-PSV

350 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

350 mA

E-2

P2-PSV

750 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-1

P1-UL(BPC)

750 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

750 mA

D-2

P2-UL(BPC)

360 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

D-3

S-TRAVEL

350 mA

B-9

TRAVEL(R)

2.0~2.5 M

B-9

TRAVEL(R)

0.0 M

B-10 TRAVEL(L)

0.0 M

B-10 TRAVEL(L)

2.0~2.5 M

Pi-P1

0.0 M

Pi-P1

0.0 M

Pi-P2

0.0 M

Pi-P2

0.0 M

G-3

ENG SPEED POWER SHIFT

1970~2060

G-3

0 mA

ENG SPEED POWER SHIFT

21-39

1970~2060 0 mA


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 21.2.4

TROUBLE HISTORY DIAGNOSIS

The items of error detected by mechatro controller self diagnosis function are stored in mechatro controller as one of history. And the errors are able to be indicated on the multi display. The warning content is record partially in "Travel history screen". The error code for self diagnosis is stored. (1) How to display 1) Turn starter switch on. 2) Press buzzer stop switch for 10 seconds continuously 5 times and the trouble history screen is displayed.

(Example) No errors

NO ERROR

Error detected in the past

3) Transmit trouble history data (One or many) and hour meter to gauge cluster. •

Hour meter and 4 failure data are displayed on screen.

In case of more than 4 failure data, 4 data is displayed at a time for 10 seconds by turns.

4) Paging (Up and down) •

Press washer switch ( ), and the item moves upward.

Press wiper switch ( ), and the item moves downward.

5) Turn starter switch off, and the display is disappeared. (2) How to delete contents of trouble history 1) Display trouble history screen. 2) Press work mode change switch and buzzer stop switch simultaneously for 10 seconds or more. 3) When "NO ERROR" is displayed, the deletion is completed. 4) Turn starter switch off.

All the stored items are erased. It is impossible to erase data partially.

21-40


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 21.2.5

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE

The recent control system includes many electrical systems and it makes troubleshooting very difficult. The failure diagnosis mode is used to automatically specify the failed sections for the failures which can not be detected through the use of self diagnosis function (the failure can be specified through the use of error code) like disconnection and abnormal output. This is useful to save the time for troubleshooting. (1) Function There are two types of trouble diagnosis mode. 1) Trouble diagnosis mode 1: Used to diagnose unload system, pump system, travel straight system and engine system. 2) Trouble diagnosis mode 2: Used to diagnose pilot system. In any mode, with the attachment not moved, both directional valve and proportional valve are automatically actuated, the sensor detects the machine status and the mechatro controller identifies the normal condition or failed condition of the system. For details of how to use, refer to "Chapter 46 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE".

21-41


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 21.2.6

SET PROCEDURE OF MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

This machine is equipped with multi-display which allows confirmation of remaining time to the coming replacement/ change time of engine oil, fuel filter, hydraulic oil filter and hydraulic oil, therefore when the remaining time reaches to Zero (0), replace or change engine oil, fuel filter, hydraulic filter, hydraulic oil, etc. and perform the initial setting by the following order. Screen change switch

Buzzer stop switch

KPSS work mode select switch Washer switch

Interval of replacement of parts is mentioned below. • Engine oil : 500 Hr • Fuel filter : 500 Hr Select switch

• Hydraulic filter : 1,000 Hr • Hydraulic oil : 2,000 Hr (MIDDLE EAST) 5,000 Hr (RUSSIA)

Procedure

1

2

3

4

5

Operating Procedure

Auto accel switch

Travel speed select switch

Wiper switch

Display on Multidisplay After several seconds, display is changed to clock autmatically.

Turn starter key switch on.

Press " " switch press once display change switch on the switch panel once. And the clock display changes to the display of remaining time for coming engine oil change. Press " " switch press once select switch once and the display for the engine oil change reverses. When required to adjust the interval to the coming change time by 10 hours, press " " switch and the time to the coming engine oil change is added. Press " " switch and the time to the coming engine oil change is reduced. When desired to return to the initial set time, press " " buzzer stop switch once. Press " " select switch once and the set time is stored.

10:25 H

250 Hr ENGINE OIL

H

250 Hr ENGINE OIL

500 Hr ENGINE OIL

Press screen change switch once more.

Press select switch once more.

Replacing interval is changed with each pressing of switch.

To set the desired interval, press the select switch

10:25 H

250 Hr ENGINE OIL

H

250 Hr ENGINE OIL

500 Hr ENGINE OIL

500 Hr ENGINE OIL

H

1. After displaying the display for setting by pressing the display change switch, set the respective maintenance time for fuel filter, hydraulic oil filter and hydraulic oil while repeating the procedure 2 to 5. 2. The engine oil change time is displayed on the multi-display by 500 hours as a warning, but the buzzer does not sound.

21-42


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 21.2.7

ADJUSTING PROCEDURE OF DISPLAY

(1) For operator 1) Auto idling stop No.

1

Switchs

1

Screen change switch

2

Buzzer stop switch

3

KPSS work mode select switch

4

Washer switch

5

Wiper switch

6

Travel speed select switch

7

Auto accel switch

8

Select switch

Main screen

10:25

8

2

3

7

4

5

6 Fig. 21-2

SWITCH STATUS CLOCK/CONTRAST

H (a)

(b) (d)

AUTO IDLING STOP

AUTO IDLE STOP OFF

AUTO WARM-UP

OFF FEED

AUTO IDLE STOP ON

FEED

FEED

(c)

(e) AUTO IDLE STOP OFF

AUTO IDLE STOP ON

OFF ON

OFF ON

1. Press select switch (8) in main screen (a) for operator and display "SWITCH STATUS CLOCK/CONTRAST" select screen (b). 2. Press select switch (8) again and display "AUTO WARM-UP OFF" screen (c). 3. In operation of FEED

(4), the "AUTO IDLE STOP OFF" screen (d) is displayed.

4. In operation of FEED (e) is displayed.

(4), the color of "OFF" portion reverses and the "AUTO IDLE STOP OFF" screen

5. Switch from "OFF" to "ON" in operation of FEED

(4) and set it by pressing selector switch (8).

6. When auto idling is functioning, the "AUTO IDLE STOP" is displayed on the multi-display. 7. Turn starter key switch off once and store the auto idling stop setting as a memory.

21-43


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

2) Clock Adjustment Switches No.

Switches

1

1

Screen Change Switch

2

Buzzer Stop Switch

3

KPSS Work Mode Select Switch

4

Washer Switch

5

Wiper Switch

6

Travel Speed Select Switch

7

Auto Accel Switch

8

Select Switch

Main screen

10:25

8

2

3

7

4

5

6 (a)

SWITCH STATUS CLOCK/CONTRAST

13:15

H

H

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

SWITCH STATUS CLOCK/CONTRAST

(e)

ADJUST CLOCK ADJ CONTRAST

Y M D H M 06 04 01 13 15

Select Year/Month/Day/Hour/Minute

Enter

Increase/Decrese

1. Turn starter key switch on and display main screen (a) for operator, and then press select switch (8) and display "SWITCH STATUS CLOCK/CONTRAST" select screen (b). 2. In operations of FEED (4) and FEED (5), move cursor to "CLOCK/CONTRAST" screen (c) and then press select switch (8) and the "ADJUST CLOCK ADJ CONTRAST" screen (d) is displayed. 3. In operations of FEED (4) and FEED (5), move cursor to "ADJUST CLOCK" and then press select switch (8) and the "ADJUST CLOCK" screen (e) is displayed. 4. Select any of "Y•M•D•H•M" in operation of FEED of FEED

(4) and FEED

(4) and FEED

(5) and vary the values in operations

(5).

5. After adjustment, press select switch (8) and the adjusted values are stored as memory and time setting is completed, and then the screen returns to main screen (a).

21-44


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 3) Contrast Adjustment Switches No.

Switches

1

Screen Change Switch

2

Buzzer Stop Switch

3

KPSS Work Mode Select Switch

4

Washer Switch

5

Wiper Switch

6

Travel Speed Select Switch

7

Auto Accel Switch

8

Select Switch

Main screen

10:25

1

8

2

3

4

7

5

6

SWITCH STATUS CLOCK/CONTRAST

H (a)

(b)

(c) SWITCH STATUS CLOCK/CONTRAST

(d)

(a)

ADJUST CLOCK ADJ CONTRAST

10:25 H

(e) ADJUST CLOCK ADJ CONTRAST

(f) Enter

ADJ CONTRAST 55555

Adjustable range 11111~99999 (Default 55555)

Increase/Decrease

1. Turn starter key switch on and display main screen (a), and press select switch (8) and display "SWITCH STATUS CLOCK CONTRAST" select screen (b). 2. In operations of FEED (4) and FEED (5), move cursor to "SWITCH STATUS CLOCK CONTRAST" screen (c) and then press select switch (8) and the "ADJUST CLOCK ADJ CONTRAST" screen (d) is displayed. 3. In operations of FEED (4) and FEED (5), move cursor to "ADJUST CLOCK ADJ CONTRAST" and then press select switch (8) and the "ADJUST CLOCK ADJ CONTRAST" screen (e) is displayed. 4. Press select switch (8) and the "ADJ CONTRAST 55555" screen (f) is displayed. 5. Vary the values by pressing the desired figure in operations of FEED (4) and FEED The available setting range is in 9 steps from "11111" to "99999". [Example] 11111 (faint) o 99999 (clear) * The initial set value is 55555.

(5).

6. Press select switch (8) and the adjusted values are stored as a memory and the contrast adjustment is completed, and then the screen returns to main screen (a).

21-45


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (2) Function for service Following items are provided for adjustment of service function. Item Language

CONTENTS Language selection

Rise-up wiper

Wiper control change (When cab is changed)

Idle stop

ON/OFF of auto idle stop (ON/OFF of adjustment for user) and time adjust

P1 option pressure sensor

ON/OFF of self diagnosis for P1 option pressure sensor

P2 option pressure sensor

ON/OFF of self diagnosis for P2 option pressure sensor

Swing alarm

ON/OFF of swing alarm (ON/OFF of adjustment for user)

Left pedal for rotation of option attachment

Does left rotation pedal use? (Unload valve does not actuate because P4 pump is equipped in EU.)

Setting of optional equipment

Optional flow rate limitation, relief pressure limitation, combination of return selector adjustment)

Engine speed

ON/OFF of engine rpm display

Auto acceleration

Adjustment the type of the engine speed of auto deceleration runs up abruptly.

Change of starter mode

Change of start mode

Low temperature mode forcible release

Low temperature mode release

Cylinders calibration

Injection adjust mode of engine

Pressure release

For pressure release

21-46


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 21.2.8

MECHATRO CONTROL EQUIPMENT

(1) C-1 Mechatro controller 1) Outside view

2 1

10

6

2 1

22

18

4 2 1 8

2

1

16 26 34 27 CN101 CN105

9

CN102

16 12 CN103

28

22

CN104

CN106 CN107 CN108 CN109 21 7 2 16 21 9 21 7 21

21

10

31

22

16

24

8

17

12

17

7

28 10 22 13 19 20 15 16

2) List of connectors Connector No.

Pin No.

Port name

CN101

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34

GA A1 +5VA +5VA A2 GA GA A3 +5VA +5VA A4 GA GA A5 +5VA +5VA A6 GA TXD1 RXD1 GP SHG1 TXD3 RXD3 DL GP CANH1 CANL1 DO 20 DO 21 DO 22 DO 23 DO 24 DI 36

Function

Input/putput

Boom up

Input

Boom down

Input

Arm in

Input

Arm out

Input

Bucket digging

Input

Bucket dump

Input

Gauge cluster

Transmission

Down load

Transmission

E/G ECU E/G ECU Spare Safety relay Spare Rotary light (yellow) Rotary light (green) Heavy lift

21-47

Reception

Reception

Output Output Output Output Output Input

Signal level 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V RS232C communication RS232C communication 0V Shield GND RS232C communication RS232C communication EARTH / OPEN(5V 0V CAN communication CAN communication EARTH/OPEN EARTH/OPEN EARTH/OPEN EARTH/OPEN EARTH/OPEN EARTH/OPEN

8


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM Connector No. CN102

Connector No. CN103

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Port name GA A8 +5VA +5VA A9 GA GA A10 +5VA +5VA A13 GA GA A14 +5VA +5VA A27 GA GA A28 +5VA D1 37

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Port name GA A +5VA +5VA A11 GA GA A12 +5VA +5VA A15 GA GA A16 +5VA

Function

Input/putput

Travel right

Input

Travel left

Input

Accelation

Input

P1 option

Input

P2 option

Input

Spare

Input

Spare

Input

Spare

Input Function

Input/putput

Swing

Input

P1 pump

Input

P2 pump

Input

Boom angle

Input

Arm angle

Input

Reserved

21-48

Signal level 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V

GND / OPEN

Signal level 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM Connector No. CN104

Connector No. CN105

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Port name GA A17 +5VA +5VA A18 GA GA A19 +5VA +5VA A20 GA A21 GA A22 GP A23 GA GA A24 +5VA +5VA A25 GA GA A26 +5VA DI 1

Pin No. 1 2

Port name +24V +24V

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

+24V DO 7 DO 8 DO 9 DO 11 GND GND D10+ D1+ D1D2+ D2D3+ D3D4+ D4D5+ D5GND D10D6+ D6D7+ D7D8+ D8D9+ D9+24V

Function

Input/putput

Boom head

Input

Boom rod

Input

Extra pressure source

Input

Spare

Input

Spare

Input

Fuel level

Input

Spare

Input

Selector detection

Input

Spare

Input

Spare

Input

Cab slow up and down

Input

Function Battery relay output side Battery relay output side (sensor analog output) Battery relay output side

Input/putput

Output Swing P/B select valve Output Travel 1,2 speed select valve Output Attachment boost select valve Output Battery (-) Battery (-) OPT changeable relief 1 Output P1 unload Output Travel 1,2 speed select valve

P2 unload

Output

Travel straight

Output

Arm in

Output

P1 pump

Output

Battery (-) OPT changeable relief 1 P2 pump

Output Output

Cab slow stop valve

Output

Boom cushion

Output

Arm cushion

Output

Battery direct connection

21-49

Signal level 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5 4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V Power output 5V 0.5~4.5V 0V 0V 0.5~4.5V Power output 5V GND / OPEN Signal level 20~32V 20~32V 20~32V 24V/OPEN 24V/OPEN 24V/OPEN 24V/OPEN 0V 0V +0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA 0V -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA 20~32V


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM Connector No. CN106

Connector No. CN107

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Port name +24V SHGF F1+ F1F2+ F2OIL OILG D11+ D11D12+ D12D13+ D13D14+ D14GND D12+ D12E1+ E1SHG3 CANH2 CANL2

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Port name DI 3 DI 8 DI 9 DI 10 DI 11 DI 12 DI 13 DI 14 DI 15 DI 20 DI 28 DI 32 DI 38 DI 39 DI 40 DI 41

Function

Input/putput

Battery relay secondary side

0

Accel motor A phase (spare) Accel motor A phase (spare) Accel motor B phase (spare) Accel motor B phase (spare)

Oil level (spare)

Output Output Output Output 0

OPT changeable relief 2

Output

Spare

Output

Spare

Output

Spare

Output

Battery (-) Spare

Output

E/G speed sensor

Input

Proportional vlave expand unit

Function Key switch (GLOW) Water separetor E/G oil pressure Air filter Stroke end check Spare E/G coolant level Spare Spare ECU main relay Spare Hand control nibbler Quick coupler Extra pressure Spare Spare Reserved

21-50

Input/putput

Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input

Signal level 20~32V Shield GND +24V 1.5A +24V 1.5A +24V 1.5A +24V 1.5A

+0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA +0~800mA -0~800mA 0V +0~800mA -0~800mA XX~XXVp-p 0V Shiled GND CAN communication CAN communication Signal level +24V/OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN EARTH / OPEN


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM Connector No. CN108

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

Connector No. CN109

Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Port name DI 2 DI 4 DI 5 DI 6 DI 7 DI 16 DI 17 DI 18 DI 19 DI 21 DI 22 DI 23 DI 24 DI DI DI DI DI

25 26 27 29 30

GP DI 33 DI 34 DI 35 H1+ H2H2+ H2Port name DO 1 DO 2 DO 3 DO 4 DO 5 DO 6 DO 12 DO 13 DO 14 DO 15 DO 16 DO 17 DO 18 DO 19 GP TXD2 RXD2 RTS CTS SHG2 DO 10

Function Key switch (ON) Spare Swing P/B release E/G start High reach hoisting at fixed position

Wiper rise up Wiper reverse ATT boost Nibbler open check SW Elevator cab up check Spare Lever lock Hand control rotation / clamp open or close Front window open or close Hand control breaker Conflux/single select Overload select High reach (hoist at travel) Reserved Charge Spare Spare Reserved Accel signal 1

Input/putput

Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input

GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN

Input Input Input Reserved

~12V / 12V~ +24V / OPEN +24V / OPEN

Input/putput

Signal level GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN

Accel signal 2

Function Wiper arc prevention Wiper normal moving Wiper reserve moving Washer motor Bucket move limitation Reserved Rotary light (RH) Swing flasher (RH) Swing flasher (LH) Travel alarm Auto idle stop relay Engine stop Lever lock Extra pressure release Reserved IT controller

Signal level +24V / OPEN +24V / OPEN GND / OPEN +24V / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN GND / OPEN +24V / OPEN +24V / OPEN +24V / OPEN

Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output

0~5V 0V 0~5V 0V

0V

Tranmission RS232C communication

Reception RS232C communication RS232C communication RS232C communication Shiled GND Cab up and down switching valve 24V/OPEN SV Spare Spare

21-51


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (2) Gauge cluster (symbol C-2) 1) General view

MULTI DISPLAY LCD

COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE FUEL LEVEL GAUGE

MATED SIDE AMP 040 HOUSING : 174044-2 TERMINAL : 173681-2

SCREEN CHANGE SWITCH ETC. BUZZER STOP SWITCH

WORK MODE SWIHCH

2) Connector CN-600 (Harness side) No.

Item name

Wire color

No.

Item name

Wire color

White

5

GND source (+24V Battery direct connection)

Red

6

GND

Black

1

Gauge cluster o Mechatro controller (RS232C communication)

2

Mechatro controller o Gauge cluster (RS232C communication)

3

Reserved

7

Source (+24V starter switch ON)

White

4

Reserved

8

GND (RS232C communication)

Black

Yellow / Black

3) Function a. It processes signals by communication between the gauge cluster and the mechatro controller, displays them in lamps, displays them in LCDs and actuates the buzzer. b. It outputs coolant temperature signals, fuel level signals and panel switch signals to the mechatro controller through the communication port. 4) Summary of display and drive item No.

Item

Remarks

1

Monitar display

LCD dot 120u168

2

Gauge display (Coolant temp., Fuel level)

Stepping motor

3

4

Buzzer

5

Screen change switch

6

Buzzer stop switch

7

Work mode select switch

8

Back light

Piezo-electricity type

LED

21-52


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (3) Relay & fuse box (symbol E-1) 1) General view

(Overhead view of box)

LABEL

INSIDE Note) These circles indicate the parts which are used in standard specification

14

1

1

14

1

12

20

CN4-1

17

11

22

1

7

1

10

CN5

15

1

3

20

CN2-1

13

26

1

13

9

1

12

CN3-2

16

8

24

12 CN8

26

13

17

CN3-1

1

CN2-2

2

1 CN9

2

9

20

6

12

1 CN2-3 3

1

6

2

6

1

3

1

3

2

6

2

6

1

3

1

3

2

2

CN15

3 CN12

CN1 2

3

2

CN14

CN4-2

1 CN17

CN16

CN13 6

4

2 1

6 2

CN10

LOCATION OF CONNECTORS (Seen from backside)

LOCATION OF RELAY & FUSE

LABEL OF RELAY & FUSE BOX No. CODE IN CIRCUIT

21-53

PARTS NAME


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM 2) Circuit diagram

21-54


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

21-55


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

21-56


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM (4) High pressure sensor : YN52S00048P1 ECONOSEAL SERIES MARK 3POLES CAP MATING HOUSING174357-2

SPECIFICATION :

(+)>

PRESSURE RANGE : 0

50 MPa (0

7110 psi)

POWER SOURCE VOLTAGE : 5.0+0.5V DC OUTPUT : 1/10Vs-9/10Vs

COMMON

(Vs=5V DC 0.5

OUTPUT (+)

INSURANCE RESISTANCE : 100M

POWER SOURCE (+)

OR MORE

HOUSING

(BETWEEN CASING AND ALL IN/OUT

TERMINAL

TERMINALS AT 50V DC MEGGER)

CONDENSER

PLASTIC POTTING

COVER

ELECTRIC CONNECTING DIAGRAM

DIE CASING

FLEXIBLE BOARD CIRCUIT

(Ex. Construction of internal controller)

DIAPHRAGM PIPE

O-RING P14 JIS B2401 CLASS1B PF 3/8 Tightening torgue 73.5N.m (54.2lbf.ft)

4.5V DC)

THREAD

STRUCTURE

(5) Low pressure sensor : LC52S00019P1

AMP MQS CONNECTOR 3 POLE (B TYPE) OPPOSITE CONNECTOR (FEMALE) HOUSING 2-967642-1 TERMINAL (GOLD PLATED) 965906-5

A

CONNECTOR TERMINAL POSITION TERMINAL No. 1 COM 2 OUT PUT (+) 3 POWER (+)

VIEW A 19

21.9 HEX

O-RING P11 PF1/4 Tightening torgue 34.3N.m (25.3lbf.ft)

SPECIFICATION :

DETAIL OF SENSOR CONNECTOR

PRESSURE RANGE : 0

3.0 MPa (0

448 psi)

RATED VOLTAGE : 5.0+0.5V DC INSURANCE RESISTANCE : 100M

OR MORE

(BETWEEN BODY AND EACH TERMINAL AT 50V DC MEGGER)

21-57


21. MECHATRO CONTROL SYSTEM

[MEMO]

21-58


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS 24.1 HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS .........................................................................................24-3 24.1.1

HYDRAULIC PUMP • REGULATOR ......................................................................24-3

24.1.2

CONTROL VALVE..................................................................................................24-21

24.1.3

PILOT VALVE (ATT)...............................................................................................24-59

24.1.4

PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL) .......................................................................................24-63

24.1.5

SWING MOTOR UNIT ............................................................................................24-65

24.1.6

TRAVEL MOTOR ...................................................................................................24-75

24.1.7

SWIVEL JOINT.......................................................................................................24-89

24.1.8

CYLINDER..............................................................................................................24-91

24.2 ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT.................................................................................................24-97 24.2.1

ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT LIST ...............................................................................24-97

24.2.2

SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRIC EQIUPMENTS...................................................24-100

Book Code No. S5YN2422E01 24-1

24


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

July, 2007

n

n

n

n

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

24-2

Remarks S5YN2422E01 (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K K


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

24.1

HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS

24.1.1

HYDRAULIC PUMP • REGULATOR

24.1.1.1

SUMMARY

(1) Outside view and Hydraulic port 5 EYE BOLT (M10)

a3

PSV2

Dr

2X4-M12 Depth 22

A3

A1

B3

VIEW

a4

PSV1

MAX. FLOW RATE ADJUSTING SCREW

PH1 PH2 PSV1

4 MIN. FLOW 2 RATE ADJUSTING SCREW

A2

4

PSV2

PSV2 2

MIN. FLOW RATE ADJUSTING SCREW

a3 PH1 PH2

PH2 PH1

a4

a1

3

a2

a1 a2 B3

B3 B1

Dr

B1

A1

A3 Dr3 a5

A2

5 1

Dr3

A2

Hydraulic ports Parts

No.

Q'TY

Code

Ports name

Size

1

Main pump assy

1

A1,2

Delivery port

SAE 6000psi 1"

2

Regulator assy

2

B1

Suction port

SAE 2500psi 2 1/2"

3

Gear pump assy (for pilot)

1

Dr

Drain port

4

Solenoid proportional reducing valve

2

PSV1,2 Servo assist port

PF1/4-13

5

PTO unit (OPT.)

1

PH1,2 Pressure sensor port

PF3/8-17

a1~a4 Gauge port

PF1/4-15

a5

Gauge port

PF1/4-14

A3

Delivery port of gear pump

PF1/2-19

B3

Suction port of gear pump

PF3/4-20.5

Dr3

Drain port of gear pump

PF3/8-15

Fig. 24-1 Hydraulic pump • regulator

24-3

PF3/4-20


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (2) Hydraulic circuit diagram (KDRDE5K)

PSV1 a1 A1 PH1 PH2 A2 a2 PSV2 (FRONT) (REAR) (KR3G-YTOK-HV) (KR3G-YTOK-HV) (KDRDE5K) Solenoid proportional reducing valve (PSV-2)

Solenoid proportional reducing valve (PSV-1)

Regulator

Regulator

a4

Dr

a3 Engine

Main pump

a5 B1

B3

Dr3

Gear pump for pilot

A3

PTO gear case (OPT.)

Fig. 24-2 Hydraulic circuit diagram of pump (3) Specifications

Item Parts No.

Main pump

Gear pump

Pump assy

YN10V00036F1

-

Single Pump

YN10V00043F1

YN10V00014F3

K3V112DTP1K9R-YT0K-HV

ZX10LGRZ2-07G

cm3

110 X 2

10

min-1(Clockwise seen from shaft end)

2000

Pump model Max.displacement capacity Revolution

Pressure

Rated Rated ATT boost pressure

Max. flow Max. input horse power Max. input torque

Regulator

Weight

34.3 (4980)

MPa (psi)

37.8 (5480)

5.0 (725)

L/min (gal/min)

220 (58) X 2 at 7.8MPa (1130 psi)

21 (5.5)

kW (PS) N.m (lbf.ft)

114 (155)

3.4 (4.6)

544 (401)

14.7 (10.8)

Part No.

YN10V01009F1

Model

KR3G-YTOK-HV

Control function

Electric flow control, positive flow control, total power control at emergency mode and power shift control

Others

With solenoid proportional reducing valve (KDRDE5K-31/30C50)

kg (lb)

141 (310)

24-4


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.1.2

HYDRAULIC PUMP

24.1.1.2.1

CONSTRUCTION

(1) Main pump 886 717

953 806

789 532 Apply adhesive (Three Bond No.1305N) 724 A 214 548 531 702 792 534 535 732

901 808 954

717

151

152

211

261 406 824 774 111 B

B

127 123 04

710 212 401 251 490

271

153 156 157

Tightening torque Item number

Thread size

401 406 407 414 466 467 468 490 531,532 806 808

M20 M8 M6 M10 PF 1/4 PF 3/8 PF 3/4 NPTF1/16 M24X2 M16 M20

No. 111 113 116 123 124 127 141 151 152 153 156 157 211 212 214 251 261 271 312 313

468 728

313 124 710 116 467 466 312 885 314 141 727 725

Tightening torque N.m (lbf.ft) 430 (317) 29 (21) 12 (8.9) 57 (42) 36 (27) 74 (55) 170 (125) 8.8 (6.5) 240 (177) 130 (96) 240 (177)

546

414

725 727

407

271

113 05

326

325 VIEW A

SECTION B-B

SECTION B-B (OPT.)

No. Q'ty No. Parts Q'ty Parts Parts 724 O-ring ; 1B P8 1 314 Valve plate (L) 1 Drive shaft (F) 725 O-ring ; 1B P11 1 325 Sensor block 1 Drive shaft (R) 727 O-ring ; 1B P14 1 326 Cover 1 Gear #1 728 O-ring ; 1B P24 8 401 Socket bolt ; M20X210 2 Roller bearing 732 O-ring ; 1B P18 4 406 Socket bolt ; M8X20 2 Needle bearing 774 Oil seal 3 407 Socket bolt ; M6X55 3 Bearing spacer 789 Back up ring ; P18 4 414 Socket bolt ; M10X20 2 Cylinder block 792 Back up ring ; G35 2 466 VP plug ; PF1/4 18 Piston 806 Nut ; M16 2 467 VP plug ; PF3/8 18 Shoe 808 Nut ; M20 4 468 VP plug ; PF3/4 2 Retainer plate 824 Snap ring 32 490 Plug ; NPTF1/16 2 Spherical bushing 885 Valve plate pin 2 531 Tilting pin ; M24X2 18 Cylinder spring 886 Spring pin 2 532 Servo piston ; M24X2 2 Shoe plate 901 Eye bolt ; M10 2 534 Stopper(L) 2 Swash plate 953 Socket screw ; M16X35 2 535 Stopper(S) 2 Tilting bushing 954 Set screw ; M20 2 546 Spacer 2 Swash plate support 04 Gear pump 2 548 Feed back pin 1 Seal cover (F) 05 PTO unit 2 702 O-ring ; 1B G35 2 Pump casing 2 710 O-ring ; 1B G95 1 Valve block 4 717 O-ring ; 1B G145 1 Valve plate (R) The codes in a rectangle represent adjust screws. Do not tamper with the adjust screws as much as possible.

Fig. 24-3

24-5

Q'ty 16 9 3 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 1 1


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (2) Gear pump (For pilot) 700

354

351

Suction port : PF3/4 Tightening torque : 73.5N.m (54.2 lbf.ft)

433

434 Delivery port : PF1/2 Tightening torque : 53N.m (39.1 lbf.ft) 311 312 732 307

710

435

361

No.

353

Parts

850

310 Drain port : PF3/8 Tightening torque : 34.3N.m (25.3 lbf.ft)

Q’ty

308 309

434

No.

Parts

466 725

355

Q’ty

307 Poppet

1

361 Front case

1

308 Seat

1

433 Flange socket; M8u40

2

309 Ring

1

434 Flange socket; M8u55

2

310 Spring

1

435 Flange socket; M8u20

4

311 Adjust screw

1

466 VP plug ; PF1/4

1

312 Lock nut ; M14u1.5

1

700 Ring

1

351 Gear case

1

710 O-ring ; 1B G95

1

353 Drive gear

1

725 O-ring ; 1B P11

1

354 Driven gear

1

732 O-ring ; 1B P16

1

355 Filter

1

850 Locking ring

1

24-6


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (3) PTO gear case (OPT.)

125 711 118

825

468 728

710

117 126 326 115 128 826

262

414

435

886 885

No.

Parts

Q’ty

No.

Parts

Q’ty

115 Idle shaft

1

435 Flange socket ; M10u20

4

117 2nd gear

1

468 VP plug ; PF3/4

1

118 3rd gear

1

710 O-ring ; 1B G80

1

125 Ball bearing

2

711 O-ring ; 1B G85

1

126 Roller bearing

1

728 O-ring ; 1B P24

1

128 Bearing spacer

2

825 Snap ring

1

262 Cover

2

826 Snap ring

1

326 Gear case

1

885 Sprig pin

1

414 Capscrew ; M10u20

4

886 Pin

2

24-7


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.1.2.2

OPERATION

The pump assy is equipped with two pumps arranged on the same axis that are connected with gear (116) and distribute the rotating power to the gear trains on a different axis. Thus the engine rotation is transmitted to front shaft (111) that drives the two pumps and, at the same time, drives the auxiliary pump (OPT) arranged on another shaft. The pump assy consists largely of the rotary group, the main part of the pump that makes rotary on; the swash plate group that changes the delivery rate; the valve block group that selects between oil suction and delivery ; and the PTO group (OPT) that transmits the drive power to the auxiliary pump.

REGULATOR

116 111

(1) Rotary group The rotary group consists of shaft(111), cylinder block (141), piston (151), shoe (152), plate (153), spherical bushing (156), and cylinder spring (157). The shaft is supported by bearings (123) and (124) at its both ends. The shoe, which is caulked to the piston, forms a spherical joint and relieves it of thrust force that is generated by load pressure. Further, the piston is provided with a pocket so it moves lightly on shoe plate (211), taking hydraulic balance. The sub group of the piston-shoe is pressed against the shoe plate by the cylinder spring, via the retainer plate and the spherical bushing, so that it moves smoothly over the shoe plate. The cylinder block (141) is also pressed against valve plate (313) by the action of cylinder spring (157).

PTO GEAR CASE (OPT) AUXILIARY PUMP (OPT)

Fig. 24-4 Construction of hydraulic pump

124

313

312 111 124 314 141

211

151 . 153 152

156

116

157

Fig. 24-5 Rotary group

24-8


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (1) Swash plate group The swash plate group consists of swash plate (212), shoe plate (211), swash plate support (251), tilting bushing (214), tilting pin (531), and servo piston (532). The swash plate is the cylindrical part that is formed on the opposite side of the shoe sliding surface and is supported by the swash plate support. The hydraulic force controlled by the regulator flows into the hydraulic chamber that is provided on both sides of the servo piston. This moves the servo piston to the right and left. The result is that the swash plate swings on the swash plate support via the spherical part of the tilting pin and changes the tilting angle (a).

532 531

214 211 212

251

Fig. 24-6 Swash plate group

(2) Valve block group The valve block group consists of valve block (312), valve plates (313 or 314), and valve plate pin (885). The valve plates having two crescent-shaped ports are installed to valve block (312) to feed oil and recycle it from cylinder block (141). The oil switched over by the valve plate is connected with the external pipe by way of the valve block.

313 312

116 141

111

314 885

Fig. 24-7 Valve block group (3) PTO group (OPT) The PTO group is composed of 1st gear (116), 2nd gear (117) and 3rd gear (118). The 2nd and the 3rd gear are supported by bearings (125) and (126) respectively and installed to the valve block. Now, if the shaft is driven by the engine, the cylinder block rotates together by the spline linkage. If the swash plate is inclined, the pistons arranged in the cylinder block make reciprocating motion with respect to the cylinder while rotating with the cylinder block. If we keep an eye on a single piston, it makes a motion away from the valve plate (oil suction process) in the first 180°and a motion toward the valve plate (oil delivery process) in the remaining 180°. If the swash plate is not inclined (zero tilting angle), the piston does not stroke i.e. delivers no oil. The shaft rotation is taken up by the 1st gear (116) and transmitted to the 2nd gear (117) and the 3rd gear (118), in that order, to drive the gear pump that is linked to the 3rd gear.

117 126

118 125

125

Fig. 24-8 PTO group

24-9


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.1.3

REGULATOR

24.1.1.3.1

CONSTRUCTION PSV

413

PSV

B

418 079

757

D 439

438

725

730

656 438

722

a3

643

924

D 543 755 545 541 724

801

466, 755

B

708

VIEW C

646 645

644

728

SECTION B-B 641 655

654

836

651

652

601 624

734 612

897

876

874

858

755 A

412

629

653

615

814

614

631

630 628 627

C

613 875 A

898

802

732 611

753 733 622

621

625

623

626 887

763

756

SECTION A-A

At start and emergency mode

Tightening torque 662 543

545

541

466 755

496

755

SECTION E-E

642 At normal

E

E

SECTION D-D Fig. 24-9

24-10

Item No.

Thread size

412,413 438,439 418 466 496 630 801 802

M8 M6 M5 PF 1/4 NPTF1/16 M30X1.5 M8 M10

Tightening torque N.m 29 12 6.9 36 8.8 160 16 19


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

No. 412 413 418 438 439 466 496 541 543 545 601 611 612 613 614 615 621 622 623 624 625 626 627

Parts Socket bolt ; M8X50 Socket bolt ; M8X70 Socket bolt ; M5X12 Socket bolt ; M6X20 Socket bolt ; M6X25 VP plug ; PF1/4 Plug ; NPTF1/16 Seat Stopper 1 Ball Casing Feed back lever Lever (1) Lever (2) Fulcrum plug Adjusting plug Compensating piston Piston case Compensating rod Spring seat (C) Outer spring Inner spring Adjusting stem (C)

Q'ty 2 2 2 8 5 3 17 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

No. 628 629 630 631 641 642 643 644 645 646 651 652 653 654 655 656 662 708 722 724 725 728 730

Parts Adjusting screw (C) Cover (C) Lock nut ; M30X1.5 Sleeve (For PF) Pilot cover Spool Pilot piston Spring seat (Q) Adjusting stem (Q) Pilot spring Sleeve Spool Spring seat Return spring Set spring Block cover Spring O-ring ; 1B G75 O-ring ; 1B P6 O-ring ; 1B P8 O-ring ; 1B P10 O-ring ; 1B P18 O-ring ; 1B P22

The codes in a rectangle represent adjust screws. Do not tamper with the adjust screws as much as possible.

24-11

Q'ty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 8 1 1 1

No. 732 733 734 753 755 756 757 763 801 802 814 836 858 874 875 876 887 897 898 924 041 079

Parts O-ring ; 1B P16 O-ring O-ring ; 1B G25 O-ring ; 1B P9 O-ring ; 1B P11 O-ring ; 1B P26 O-ring ; 1B P12.5 O-ring ; 1B G35 Nut ; M8 Nut ; M10 Snap ring Snap ring Snap ring Pin ; 4X11.7L Pin ; 4X8L Pin ; 5X8L Pin Pin ; 5X19L Pin ; 11.5X11.8L Socket screw ; M8X20 Sub-check valve

Q'ty 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 Solenoid proportional reducing valve


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.1.3.2

OPERATION

(1) Control function Control function …… Electric flow control. •Positive flow control. •Total horsepower control. Emergency mode control. •Hydraulic positive control. •Hydraulic total horsepower control (2) Summary The regulator KR3G-YTOK for the in-line type axial piston pump K3V series is composed of the control mechanism as mentioned below: 1) Electric flow control and positive flow control The tilting angle of the pump (delivery rate) is controlled by controlling the current command value of the solenoid proportional reducing valve attached to the regulator. The regulator makes positive flow control (positive control) that increases the delivery rate as the secondary pressure of the solenoid proportional reducing valve rises. Since this function permits the output power of the pump to be varied, it is possible to attain optimum power according to the operating condition. Also, since the pump delivers only the necessary oil flow, the machine does not consume excessive power. 2) Constant power control at emergency mode When the electromagnetic proportional pressure-reducing valve cannot output the secondary pressure due to the trouble, the spool for emergency mode is switched automatically, and the control is switched from electric control to hydraulic control (emergency mode). In emergency mode, the power shift command pressure Pf shifts the power set value. The power shift pressure (secondary pressure of electromagnetic proportional pressure-reducing valve) is led to power control section of regulator on each pump through pump inside passage and shifts respective control to the same power set value. In the power shifted condition, as self pump delivery pressure Pd1 rises, the pump tilt angle (delivery rate) is automatically reduced; consequently the input torque is controlled to the constant value or less. (When the speed is constant, the input power is also constant.) This pump is controlled by Pd1 only regardless of another delivery pressure. Condition where the power is controlled, the regulator of each pump is controlled to the different tilt angle (delivery rate). Consequently in the condition where the power is controlled, the overloading of engine is automatically prevented regardless of the loading of pump 2. And in normal condition, because the power shift pressure is 0MPa, the power control is not worked. With this mechanism, it is possible to obtain proper power for the working condition. This regulator is made up of the above two kinds of control system, but when both controls are actuated together, the low tilt angle (low delivery rate) command precede on mechanical operation described later.

1) Flow rate electrical control The pump delivery rate is controlled according to the command current value corresponding to the movement of control devices. This relation is shown in right figure.

Delivery flow rate Q

(3) Explanation of operation

Command current I

Fig. 24-10

24-12


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM a. Flow rate increase (See Fig. 24-11) As the command current value I rises, the secondary pressure P2 of electromagnetic proportional pressure-reducing valve rises, and by pressing pilot piston (643) in (A) direction it stops at the position the secondary pressure P2 balances the pilot spring force (646). The movement of pilot piston is transferred to lever 2 (613) through pin (875), and rotates at (B) fulcrum in arrow direction. Furthermore the lever 2 movement is transferred to feedback lever (611) through pin (897) and rotates at (C) fulcrum in the same arrow direction as (B). Consequently the spool (652) connected to feedback lever moves towards (D). When the spool moves towards (D), the port CL connected to tank port is open and the pressure in servo piston large bore diameter chamber is released, consequently the servo piston (532) moves towards (E) according to delivery pressure Pd1 in small bore diameter piston chamber, resulting in the rise of flow rate. Since the feed back lever is connected to the servo piston and spool, the feed back lever rotates at (F) fulcrums with the movement of the servo piston towards (E), consequently the spool is returned to the original position. With this movement, the opening of spool sleeve gradually closes, and the servo piston stops at the position the opening closes completely.

24-13

CL port : Connect with large diameter chamber of servo piston

652

B 876

D

875 611 643

A C 532

E

Psv A

(KDRDE5K)

Pd1

CL port a3

Hydraulic circuit diagram B

Fig. 24-11

646 613 F 897


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM b. Flow rate decrease (See Fig. 24-12) As the command current value I is reduced, the secondary pressure P2 of electromagnetic proportional pressure-reducing valve is reduced, and by pressing pilot piston (643) in (G) direction it stops at the position the pilot spring force (646) balances the secondary pressure P2. The movement of pilot piston is transferred to lever 2 (613) through pin (875), and rotates at (H) fulcrum in arrow direction. Furthermore the lever 2 movement is transferred to feedback lever (611) through pin (897) and rotates at (I) fulcrum in the same arrow direction as (H). Consequently the spool (652) connected to the feedback lever moves towards (J). When the spool moves towards (J), the delivery pressure Pd1 is led in servo piston large bore diameter chamber through spool and port CL. The servo piston small bore diameter chamber constantly receives delivery the pressure Pd1, consequently the servo piston moves towards (K) according to the difference of area resulting in the reduction of tilt angle, and finally the flow rate is reduced. Since the feed back lever is connected to servo piston and spool, the feed back lever rotates at (L) fulcrum with the movement of servo piston towards (K), consequently the spool is returned to the original position. With this movement, the opening of spool sleeve gradually closes, and the servo piston stops at the position the opening closes completely.

Delivery flow rate Q

2) Power control (In emergency mode) When the load pressure rises, the pump tilt angle is reduced preventing the overloading of engine as shown in Fig. 24-13. The operation of power control is the same as the flow rate control, and is explained below.

Fig. 24-12

Delivery output (Pd1)

Fig. 24-13

24-14


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM a. Overload prevention operation (See Fig. 24-14) Because the delivery pressure Pd1 acts on the compensating rod stepped section with the rise of self pump delivery pressure Pd1 the compensating rod (623) is pushed towards (M), and moves to the position the delivery pressure Pd1 balances the spring force of outer spring (625) and inner spring (626). The movement of compensating rod is transferred to lever 1 (612) through pin (875), and rotates at (N) fulcrum in arrow direction. Furthermore the lever 1 (612) movement is transferred to feedback lever (611) through pin (897) and rotates at (O) fulcrum in the same arrow direction as (N). Consequently the spool (652) connected with feedback lever moves towards (P). When the spool moves towards (P), the delivery pressure Pd1 is led in servo piston large bore diameter chamber through spool and CL port. Since the delivery pressure Pd1 is constantly led to servo piston large bore diameter chamber, the servo piston moves towards (Q) according to the difference of area, resulting in the reduction of tilt angle, consequently the flow rate is also reduced. Since the feed back lever is connected with servo piston and spool, the feed back lever rotates at (R) fulcrum with the movement of the servo piston towards (Q), consequently the spool is returned to the original position. With this movement, the opening of spool sleeve gradually closes, and the servo piston stops at the position the opening closes completely.

24-15

Fig. 24-14


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM b. Flow rate recovery operation (See Fig. 24-15) Because the compensating rod (623) is pushed towards (S) with the force of outer spring (625) and inner spring (626) with reduction of self pump delivery pressure Pd1, and moves to the position the spring force of outer spring (625) and inner spring (626) balances the delivery pressure Pd1. The movement of compensating rod is transferred to lever 1 (612) through pin (875), and rotates at (T) fulcrum in arrow direction. Furthermore the lever 1 (612) movement is transferred to feedback lever (611) through pin (897) and rotates at (T) fulcrum in the same arrow direction as (N). Consequently the spool (652) connected to feedback lever moves towards (V). As the spool moves towards (V), CL port is open and connected to tank port, the pressure of servo piston large bore diameter chamber is released and the servo piston (532) moves towards (W) with delivery pressure Pd1 in small bore diameter chamber, and consequently the flow rate is raised. Since the feed back lever is connected to servo piston and spool, the feed back lever rotates at (X) fulcrum with the movement of the servo piston towards (W), consequently the spool is returned to the original position. With this movement, the opening of spool sleeve gradually closes, and the servo piston stops at the position the opening closes completely. 3) Priority mechanism of low tilt angle (low flow rate) command As the said explanation, the tilting commands of flow rate control and power control are transferred to feedback lever (611) and spool (652) through the large bore section of lever 1 (612) and lever 2 (613), but because the pin (dia 5) is extruded in large bore (dia 9), pin (897) on the side where making tilt angle smaller contacts with it, consequently the bore (dia 9) of lever on the side where larger tilt angle command is given is free without contact with pin (897). In this mechanical selecting manner, the command on the side of low tilt angle of the flow rate control and power control has a priority.

24-16

625 897 876 612 626 X T

S

CL port : Connect with large diameter chamber of servo piston

G

652 H J 875

V

623 611

621 U

W

532 (KDRDE5K)

Psv A

Pd1 CL port a3

Hydraulic circuit daigram

Fig. 24-15

B


4) Power shift control As shown in Fig. 24-16, the pump set power is controlled according to the movement of control by power shift pressure Pf. As power pressure Pf rises, the compensating rod (623) moves rightward through pin (898) and compensating piston (621). Consequently like the overloading prevention operation of power control, the pump tilt angle becomes smaller and the power setting value is reduced. Conversely, if the power shift pressure Pf is reduced, the power set value is raised. The power shift pressure Pf of this pump is ordinary set to 0MPa, but in emergency mode, the power shift pressure Pf is raised to 4.9MPa. 24.1.1.3.3

Delivery flow rate Q

24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

Delivery pressure (Pd1)

Fig. 24-16

ADJUSTING THE REGULATOR

(1) Adjusting the maximum flow (See Fig. 24-3) Adjust the maximum flow by loosening nut (808) and by tightening set screw (954) (or loosening it). Tightening set screw (954) decreases the delivery rate, as indicated in Fig. 24-17. Only the maximum flow varies, but other control characteristics remain unchanged.

Adjust screw no.

954

No. of turns for tightening

1/4

Min. increase in delivery flow L/min (gal/min)

Input current I (Pilot pressure Pi)

No change

Fig. 24-17 Adjusting the max. delivery flow

5.8 (1.5)

(2) Adjusting the minimum flow (See Fig. 24-3) Adjust the minimum flow by loosening nut (806) and by tightening socket screw (953) (or loosening it). Tightening socket screw increases the delivery rate, as indicated in Fig. 24-18. Other control characteristics remain unchanged in the same way as maximum flow adjustment, care should be used of the fact that overtightening may increase a required power at the maximum delivery pressure (at relieving action).

Adjust screw no.

953

No. of turns for tightening

1/4

Pilot pressure Pi (Input current I) Min. increase in delivery flow L/min (gal/min)

Delivery flow rate Q

Pilot pressure Pi (Input current I)

Delivery flow rate Q

The regulator may be adjusted in terms of maximum flow, minimum flow, horsepower (at emergency mode control) control characteristics, flow control characteristics using the adjust screw.

Input current I (Pilot pressure Pi)

Fig. 24-18 Adjusting the min. delivery flow

No change 4.6 (1.2)

24-17


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

1) Adjusting the Outer Spring (See Fig. 24-9) (At emergency mode) Adjust it by loosening lock nut (630) and by tightening adjust screw (628) (or loosening it). Tightening the adjust screw shifts the control chart to the right and increases the input horsepower, as indicated in Fig. 24-19. Since turning the adjust screw C (628) by N turns changes the setting of the inner spring (626), return the adjust screw C (627) by NX1.48 turns at first.

Adjust screw no.

628

No. of turns for tightening

1/4

Delivery flow rate Q

(3) Adjusting the input horsepower (At emergency mode) Since the regulator is of total horsepower control type, turn the adjust screws of both the front (No.1) and rear (No.2) pumps when changing horsepower set values. Adjust the horsepower settings of both pumps to a same level. The pressure change values by adjustment are based on two pumps pressurized at the same time, and the values will by halved when only one pump is loaded.

Delivery pressure (Pd1)

Fig. 24-19 Adjusting the input horsepower (1)

Increase delivery pressure MPa (psi) 2.06 (299) 50 (36.9)

2) Adjusting the Inner Spring (See Fig. 24-9) (At emergency mode) Adjust it by loosening nut (802) and by adjust screw (C) (627) (or loosening it). Tightening the adjust screw increases the flow and then the input horsepower, as indicated in Fig. 24-20. And the input torque raises.

Adjust screw no.

627

No. of turns for tightening

1/4 Delivery pressre (Pd1)

12 (3.2)

Increase in input torque N.m (lbf.ft) 58.7 (43.3) (4) Adjusting the flow control characteristics (See Fig. 24-9) Adjust them by loosening nut (801) and socket bolt (924) (or loosening it). Socket bolt causes the control chart to move to the right as shown in Fig. 24-21.

Adjust screw no.

924

No. of turns for tightening

1/4

Increase Pilot pressure MPa (psi)

0.18 (26)

Decrease in delivery flow L/min (gal/min)

18.5 (4.9)

Fig. 24-20 Adjusting the input horsepower (2)

Delivery flow rate Q

Increase inflow L/min (gal/min)

Delivery flow rate Q

Increase in input torque N.m (lbf.ft)

Input current I (Pilot pressure Pi)

Fig. 24-21 Adjusting the flow control characteristics

24-18


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.1.3.4

CAUSES OF FAULT RESULTING FROM REGULATOR

When trouble due to this regulator occurs, disassemble and inspect it referring to "Chapter YN33-II" (1) When the engine is overloaded, Load every unit of pump, and check on pumps on the right and left sides for possible damages. When pumps on both sides are failed, check on them for the following failures 1), 2). When pump on the one side is failed, start checking from para. 3). 1) Check that the power shift command current I is normal. 2) The power shift pressure is low. •

Check the dither of amp.

Replace solenoid proportional reducing valve.

3) Stick of compensating piston (621) and compensating rod (623) •

Disassemble and clean it.

4) Stick of pin (898) •

Disassemble and clean it.

(2) The max. flow rate is not delivered. 1) Check that pilot differential pressure Pi is normal. 2) Stick of pilot piston (643) •

Disassemble and clean it.

3) Stick of spool (652) •

Disassemble and clean it.

4) Stick of pin (898) •

Disassemble and clean it.

Note : When the damage of part is severe, replace the part with new one.

24-19


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.1.4

CONTROL CURVE OF PUMP

250

Q

[1] 99kW H mode at traveling or optional working [2] 83kW H mode at operating attachment [3] 75kW S mode at operating attachment

2000min-1: (H mode) 1800min-1: (S mode)

200

[2]

Input revolution ;2000 min-1 Input horse power ;114 kW Input torque ;544 N.m

Reference value in ( )

[1]

Delivery flow rate Q [ L/min ]

Two pumps are loaded at the same time 150 [3]

100

50 Min.Flow(at 2000min-1)

0

5

10

15 20 Delivery pressure Pd

250

300mA

30

35

40 [MPa]

[4] 91kW : At emergency mode

Input revolution ;2000 min-1 Input horse power ;114 kW Input torque ;544 N.m

718mA 220L

Q 2000min-1

25

200

Reference value in ( )

Delivery flow rate Q [ L/min ]

Two pumps are loaded at the same time Pf:Power shift pressure (Reference value) [4]

150

(P At f=4 em .9M er Pa ge ) nc y

100

1471

m

981

od

e

I-Q Curve Pd=7.8MPa at Qmax 490 Input torque Tin N.m

50 Min.Flow(at 2000min-1) 400mA 30L

Tin 0

5

10

0

1

2

15 20 Delivery pressure Pd 3 4 [MPa] Pilot pressure Pi

24-20

25

30

35

40 [MPa]


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.2 24.1.2.1 24.1.2.1.1

CONTROL VALVE SPECIFICATIONS OUTSIDE VIEW PTb

PBL

CT2

P2

CP2 CT1 P1

PAL

Pcb

CT1 PTb

PBr

PL CMR1 CMR2 Br 1

PAb

Bb (ROD)

PAc

Ac

CP1

Ab (HEAD)

LCb CRb Bc

(HEAD)

PAa2

Ar

(ROD)

LCc PCAP2 LCAT2

Travel right Boom Bucket

PAr

PAr

PB1 PBs

PBb PBb PCc

PC

PBc

Arm 2

PAL

PCb

PCb USE FOR YN30V00101 F1

Travel straight

T1

T2

P1 unload

PBa2

MU

PBa1 Pss

PBa2

PAo

PAL PB1

CT2

Travel left

AL

Boom conflux

As

Swing

PBs

PAo

Arm 1

PLc2

CRa Ba

Option

P2 unload PCa

Bs

CCb

Pss PBa1

PBL

BL CP2

LCs

PAs

Aa (HEAD)

PAa1

LCa

(ROD) Ao

LCo

PBo

Bo

PBp1 PBp2 (P3)

(P2) PBa2 PBp1

PAo PBp2 PAa2

Arm 2 Bucket (P4)

(P3)

Boom Travel right

PAa2

PBo

A Fig. 24-22 Outside view

24-21

Travel straight

Option

PBo PAc PAb PBr

PAa1

Arm 1 PAa

Swing PCa

P2 unload (T3)

PTb

PBL

VIEW A

Travel left


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.2.1.2

PORTS

Port size

Tightening torque

Ports

PF3/4

150~180 N•m (111~133 lbf•ft)

MU

Description

(T3)

Pluged

PF1/2

98~120 N•m (72~89 lbf•ft)

(P3)

Pluged

(P4)

Pluged

PF3/8

69~78 N•m (51~58 lbf•ft)

PAa1

Arm 1 (in) pilot port

PBa1

Arm 1 (out) pilot port

PAb

Boom (up) pilot port

PBb

Boom (down) pilot port

PAc

Bucket (digging) pilot port

PBc

Bucket (dump) pilot port

PAL

Travel left (forward) pilot port

PBL

Travel left (reverse) pilot port

PAr

Travel right (forward) pilot port

PBr

Travel right (reverse) pilot port

PAs

Swing (right) pilot port

PBs

Swing (left) pilot port

PAa2

Arm 2 (in) pilot port

PBa2

Arm 2 (out) pilot port

PAo

PF1/4

34~39 N•m (25~29 lbf•ft)

PBo

Option pilot port

DR

Drain port

Pss

Swing pilot high pressure select port

PLc2

Lock valve select pilot port

PBp1

Bypass cut valve (P1 side) pilot port

PBp2

Bypass cut valve (P2 side) pilot port

PL PB1

M12

M10

83~110N•m (61~81 lbf•ft)

49~65 N•m (36~48 lbf•ft)

Option pilot port

Attachment boost port Boom (up) conflux pilot port

PTb

Travel straight pilot port

PCa

Unload valve (P2 side) pilot port

PCb

Unload valve (P1 side) pilot port

PCc

Bucket (digging) stroke limiter pilot port

P1

Pump port (P1 side)

P2

Pump port (P2 side)

T1

Tank port 1

T2

Tank port 2

Ar

Right travel motor port (forward)

Br

Right travel motor port (reverse)

AL

Left travel motor port (forward)

BL

Left travel motor port (reverse)

As

Swing motor port (right)

Bs

Swing motor port (left)

Ab

Boom cylinder head side port (up)

Bb

Boom cylinder rod side port (down)

Aa

Arm cylinder head side port (in)

Ba

Arm cylinder rod side port (out)

Ac

Bucket cylinder head side port (digging)

Bc

Bucket cylinder rod side port (dump)

24-22


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Port size

24.1.2.1.3

Tightening torque

Ports

Description

Ao

Optional pilot port

Bo

Optional pilot port

SPECIFICATIONS Item

Specifications

Model

KMX15YD/B44001

Maximum flow rate [L/min (gal/min)]

220 (58)u2

Maximum set pressure [MPa (psi)]

37.8 (5480) (Pump port)/ 39.7 (5760) (Actuator port)

Main relief valve set pressure [MPa (psi)] When power boost pressure

Std 34.3 (4970) [at 70u2L/min (18.5u2gal/min)] 37.8 (5480) [at 60u2L/min (15.9u2gal/min)]

Overload relief valve set pressure (Boom head, Bucket head, Arm rod) [MPa (psi)]

39.7 (5760) [at 30L/min (8gal/min)]

Overload relief valve set pressure (Boom rod, Bucket rod, Arm head) [MPa (psi)]

37.8 (5480) [at 30L/min (8gal/min)]

24-23


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.2.2 24.1.2.2.1

CONSTRUCTION AND OPERATION CONSTRUCTION

(1) Control valve J 164

154

T2

T1

YT1

PAL

PBL

J

PCa P2-20

YBG1

PB1

PAs

YS1

PBs

101

P2

Pss PAa1

YA1

PBa1

PBo

YP1

PAo

163

(P4)

162 163 169 155 162 SECTION A-A 154

164

P1

102

973

973 PCb

PTb P1-20

973

973 YT1

PBr

PAr

973 YB1

PAb

PBb

973

973

PBc PCc YK1

PAc

974

973 YAG 1

PAa2

974

162

(P3)

162 169 155 163

SECTION B-B

Fig. 24-23 Section (1/6)

24-24

162

PBa2


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM A B

H

T2

273x10 P1 unload

977 Travel right

D

273x10

H

Travel left

(Travel straight)

C

USE FOR YN30V00101F1

C

PAL

PCb

PAr

PB1

Boom conflux (P2 unload)

978x2

D PBs

Boom

Swing

E

PBb

PCc

E

Pss

PBa1

Bucket

Arm 1

F

F PA PAo

PBa2

Arm 2

Option

MU

G

G K

(P3)

PBp1

K PBp2

B

A PAo

PBa2

PBp1

PBp2

274x4

275x4 (P4)

(P3)

212

PAa2

273x10

PBo

273x10

Fig. 24-24 Section (2/6)

24-25

213


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

Fig. 24-25 Section (3/6)

24-26


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Swing 203 333 331 336 322 321 603 331 211 261 266 160 160 514 524 556 164 511 521 551 164

204

PBs

Boom

333

Pss

331 336 AbR

322 321

266

As

CRb Ab

LCs

LCb

Bb

Bs

331 261 303 161 162 163 511 523 556 164 162 161

301 264 602

266 264 206

PAb

205

160

BbR

164 551 209 216 333 331 336 322 321 602

PAs

SECTION E-E Bucket

PCc

201 333 331 336 322 321 603 331 261 211

Arm 1

PBa1

PBc

BaR

BcR

331 261 304 CRar

Bc

511 521 551 164

Ba LCc

LCa

160 514 524 556 164 511 521 551 164

Ac

162

Aa

161 264 603 205

PAc AcR

302 264

PAa1

SECTION F-F

Fig. 24-26 Section (4/6)

24-27

AaR

205 605


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 201 333 331 340 328 321

Arm 2

Option

PBa2

201 333

PAo

331 336

331 261

324 AoR

323 604 331

MU

308

261 311

162 162 162 511 521 551 164 515 521

Ao

511 521

LCAT2 LCo LCAP2

551

551 164

164 Bo

162 161

604 264

BoR

264

PBo

PAa2

205

205

SECTION G-G

T2

161 P1

511 521

T1

163

CT1

551 164

163 162 511 521

P2 CT2

551 164

SECTION H-H

Fig. 24-27 Section (5/6)

24-28


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

PBp1

207

PBp2

606

160 278x5

266

264

264

527

528 T2

517

606

163

T1

518

SECTION J-J SECTION K-K

Fig. 24-28 Section (6/6)

24-29


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

101 Casing A

1

321 Spring

5

102 Casing B

1

322 Spring

4

220~250 (162~184)

154 Plug PF3/4

3

323 Spring

3

110~130 (81~96)

155 Plug PF1/2

2

324 Spring

3

20~24 (15~18)

159 Plug PT1/4 MEC (Pre-coat bolt)

1

325 Spring

1

7.8~9.8 (5.8~7.2)

160 Plug PT1/16 MEC (Pre-coat bolt)

5

326 Spring

1

161 O-ring

7

327 Spring

3

162 O-ring

15

328 Spring

1

163 O-ring

11

329 Spring

3

164 O-ring

19

331 Spring seat

24

169 O-ring

2

333 Spacer bolt

12

201 Cover

5

336 Stopper

10

202 Cover

4

339 Stopper

1

203 Cover

1

340 Stopper

1

204 Sub cover

1

511 Poppet

11

205 Cover

7

512 Poppet

2

206 Cover

1

514 Poppet

2

207 Back pressure check valve cover

1

515 Poppet

1

209 Cover

1

517 Poppet

1

211 Lock valve selector sub

2

518 Poppet

1

212 Plate

1

521 Spring

11

213 Plate

1

522 Spring

2

216 Piston

1

523 Spring

1

261 O-ring

12

524 Spring

2

264 O-ring

10

527 Spring

1

266 O-ring

4

528 Spring

1

25~34 (18~25)

273 Socket bolt

40

230~260 (170~192)

551 Plug

13

98~120 (72~89)

274 Socket bolt

4

130~150 (96~111)

552 Plug

2

98~120 (72~89)

275 Socket bolt

4

230~260 (170~192)

556 Plug

3

25~34 (18~25)

278 Socket bolt

5

562 O-ring

2

301 Boom spool sub

1

69~78 (51~58)

601 Main relief valve

1

302 Arm 1 spool

1

69~78 (51~58)

602 Port relief valve

2

303 Swing spool

1

69~78 (51~58)

603 Port relief valve

3

304 Bucket spool

1

69~78 (51~58)

604 Relief valve plug assy

2

305 Boom conflux spool

1

69~78 (51~58)

605 Overload relief valve

1

306 Travel spool

2

98~120 (72~89)

606 Bypass cut valve

2

307 Travel straight spool

1

140~180 (103~133)

973 Socket bolt

8

308 Arm 2 spool sub

1

140~180 (103~133)

974 Socket bolt

2

309 P1 unload spool

1

977 Name plate

1

310 P2 unload spool

1

978 Rivet

2

311 Option spool

1

9.8~14 (7.2~10.3)

24-30

16~18 (11.8~13.3) Loctite #262


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (2) Main relief valve (Two step relief) (601)

Fig. 24-29 Main relief valve (Two step relief) Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) 69~78 (51~58)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

103 Plug ; M27

1

562 Back up ring

1

104 Adjust screw

1

611 Poppet

1

121 C-ring

1

613 Stopper

1

122 Spacer

1

614 Piston

1

123 C-ring

1

621 Spring

1

124 Filter stopper

1

652 Adjust screw

1

125 Filter

1

661 O-ring

1

163 O-ring

1

663 O-ring

1

512 Plunger

1

664 O-ring

1

521 Spring

1

28~31 (21~23)

671 Lock nut ; M14

1

541 Seat

1

46~52 (34~38)

673 Lock nut ; M24

1

561 O-ring

1

24-31

1


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (3) Over load relief valve (602,603,605)

Fig. 24-30 Over load relief valve Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

Q’ty

No.

Parts

Q’ty

69~78 (51~58)

101 Body ; M27

1

541 Seat

1

69~78 (51~58)

102 Plug ; M27

1

561 O-ring

1

161 O-ring

1

562 Backup ring

1

162 O-ring

1

563 O-ring

1

123 C-ring

1

564 Backup ring

1

124 Filter stopper

1

611 Poppet

1

125 Filter

1

612 Spring seat

1

301 Piston

1

621 Spring

1

511 Plunger

1

651 Adjust screw

1

521 Spring

1

661 O-ring

1

522 Spring

1

671 Lock nut ; M14

1

28~31 (21~23)

24-32


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (4) Arm 2 spool (308)

351

317 340 361 371 350

308

371 361 340 319

Fig. 24-31 Arm 2 spool Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

308 Spool

1

16~18 (33~35) Loctite #638

350 Plug

1

317 Plunger

1

16~18 (33~35) Loctite #638

351 Plug

1

319 Plunger

1

361 O-ring

2

340 Spring

2

371 Buckup ring

2

(5) Boom spool (301)

301

317

340

361 371 350

Fig. 24-32 Boom spool Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

301 Spool

1

317 Plunger 340 Spring

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) 16~18 (12~13) Loctite #638

No.

Parts

Q’ty

350 Plug

1

1

361 O-ring

1

1

371 Buckup ring

1

24-33


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (6) Lock valve selector (211)

Fig. 24-33 Lock valve selector Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

101 Casing

1

10~14 (7.4~10.3)

171 Socket bolt

3

161 O-ring

4

49~59 (36~44)

201 Plug

1

164 O-ring

1

321 Spring

1

166 O-ring

1

511 Spool

1

167 O-ring

1

541 Sleeve

1

No.

Parts

24-34

Parts

Q’ty


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (7) Bypass cut valve (606)

Fig. 24-34 Bypass cut valve Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) 98~120 (72~89)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

101 Plug

1

301 Plunger

1

102 O-ring

1

302 Spring

1

201 Poppet

1

401 Plug

1

202 Spring

1

402 O-ring

1

69~78 (51~58)

24-35


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (8) Swing shuttle valve cover (204)

Fig. 24-35 Swing shuttle valve cover Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

166 O-ring

1

202 Cover

1

541 Steel ball

1

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

542 Seat

1

25~29 (18~21)

554 Plug

1

7.9~9.8 (5.9~7.2)

555 Plug

1

24-36


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (9) Boost check valve (517) 104

107 102 101

Fig. 24-36 Boost check valve Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

101 Poppet

1

102 Poppet

1

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft) 20~29 (15~21) Loctite #262

24-37

No.

Parts

Q’ty

104 Plug

1

107 Spring

1


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.2.2.2

HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM P1

T1

T2

P2

CMR1 PL PTb

CMR2

PBL

Travel straight

PCb

P1 unload

PAL

CT2

Travel right

CP2

(T3)

CT1

PAr

PCa CP1

Br Ar PBr

Boom conflux P2 unload

PB1 CCb PBs

Dr

LCs

LCb

Boom

Travel left

AL BL

Pss

PAb

PAs

Swing

As Bs (ROD) Bb CRb

PBa1

LCa

(HEAD) Ab PAa1

Arm 1

PBb Aa (HEAD)

LCc

Bucket

PAc

CRa

(ROD) Bc (HEAD) Ac

PLc2 Ba (ROD)

PCc PBc

Arm 2

LCAT2 LCo

LCAP2 PAa2

PAo

Ao Bo PBo

PBa2 MU PBp1

PBp2

(P3)

(P4)

Fig. 24-37 Hydraulic circuit diagram

24-38

Option


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.2.2.3

OPERATION

(1) In neutral position The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 enters port P1 of control valve, and passes through unloading valve P1 (309), low pressure circuit (D) and boost check valve (517), and returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. And when the operation of unloading valve is impossible due to failure of electric control system, because the by-pass cut valve (606) located on the downstream of center by-pass passage (52) opens, the hydraulic oil through hydraulic pump P1 port passes through travel straight spool (306), and then flows though the center by-pass passage (52) which passes through travel right, boom, bucket and arm 2 and the by-pass cut valve (606) on P1 side, and flows into low pressure circuit (D) and boost check valve (517), and then returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P2 passes through unloading valve P2 (310), low pressure circuit (D) and boost check valve (517) and returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1 similarly to the hydraulic oil from hydraulic pump P1. And when the operation of unloading valve is impossible, because the by-pass cut valve (606) located on the downstream of center by-pass passage (55) opens, the hydraulic oil through hydraulic pump P2 port passes through main passage, and then flows though the center by-pass passage (55) which passes through travel left, swing, arm 1 and option and the by-pass cut valve (606) on P2 side, and flows into low pressure circuit (D) and boost check valve (517), and then returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1.

Fig. 24-38 In neutral position

24-39


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (2) Actuation in travel operation 1) In travel independent operation On starting travel operation (forward) started, the hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 is fed into travel right motor, and the hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P2 is fed into travel left motor. The pilot pressure enters ports PAr and PAL, and the right and left travel spools (306) move rightward the force of springs (323)(324) and the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valves [X1] and [X2] acts on ports PCb and PCa and switches unloading spools (309) (310). The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 passes through travel straight spool (307) and flows into main circuit, and flows through between the perimeter of right travel spool (306) and casing and is fed into A side of right travel motor through port Ar. The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P2 flows through between the perimeter of left travel spool (306) and casing and is fed into A side of left travel motor through port Ar similarly to the stream of hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1. But in the meantime, the return oil from the B sides of left and right travel operations passes through between the perimeter of right and left travel spools (306) and casing through ports Br and BL and flows into low pressure circuit (D), boost check valve (517), and then returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. On traveling reverse (at the time when the pilot pressure actuates on ports PBr and PBL of control valve), the actuation is similar to that in forward travel operation.

Fig. 24-39 In left reverse travel (at PBL is pressurized)

24-40


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2) In travel straight operation When actuator other than travel operation and the travel operation are operated simultaneously in the said item 1) "In travel independent operation" the pilot signal from the outside acts on port PTb and the travel straight spool (307) moves upward. With this operation, the hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 mainly flows from P2 to A and is used for each actuator, and the hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P2 mainly flows from P2 to B and into main passage, and is used for right and left travel operations as hydraulic oil realizing the actuator and travel simultaneous operation. (Travel straight function) At circuit (I) position, a part of hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic oil P1 passes through circular notch on travel straight spool (307) and enters from P1 to B enabling the hydraulic oil to be supplied from actuator side to travel side. And at circuit (II) position, the circular notch on travel straight spool (307) closes and the pump line on the travel sides is independent from pump line on actuator.

Fig. 24-40 Movement of travel straight spool

24-41


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (3) Actuation in bucket operation 1) In bucket digging operation On starting bucket digging operation, the pilot pressure enters port PAc, bucket spool (304) moves leftward the force of springs (321)(322), and simultaneously the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [XI] acts on port PCb and switches unloading spool (309). The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 flows into parallel passage (53), pushes and opens load check valve LCc (511), and flows through between the perimeter of bucket spool (304) and casing through U-shaped passage, and supplied to bucket cylinder head side (H) through port (Ac). In the meantime, the return oil from bucket cylinder rod side (R) passes through between the perimeter of bucket spool (304) and casing, flows through low pressure circuit (D) and boost check valve (517), and returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. And when the flow rate of hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 with engine running in low idling is low, the pilot signal from the outside enters port PCc and piston (216) moves rightward. With this actuation, the maximum leftward stroke of bucket spool (304) is limited, consequently the area of passage between the perimeter of bucket spool (304) and casing minimizes. Consequently the flow rate of return oil from bucket cylinder rod side (R) reduces and bucket cylinder moving speed is limited preventing cavitation which may be occurred on bucket cylinder head side (H). (Stroke limiter ON) 53 216

PAc

PCc

PBc

Bc 321 322

304

(D)

Ac

LCc 511

(R)

(H)

Fig. 24-41 In bucket digging operation (Stroke limiter ON)

24-42


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2) In bucket dumping operation On starting bucket dumping operation, the pilot pressure enters port PBc and bucket spool (304) moves rightward the force of springs (321)(322), and simultaneously the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [XI] acts on port PCb and switches unloading spool (309). The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 flows into parallel passage (53), pushes and opens load check valve LCc (511), and flows through between the perimeter of bucket spool (304) and casing through U-shaped passage, and supplied to bucket cylinder rod side (R) through port (Bc). In the meantime, the return oil from bucket cylinder head side (H) passes through between the perimeter of bucket spool (304) and casing and flows through low pressure circuit (D), and returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. The return oil does not pass through boost check valve (517). Downstream of boost check valve

Fig. 24-42 In bucket dumping operation

24-43


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (4) Boom 1) In boom up operation On starting boom up operation, the pilot pressure enters port PAb and boom spool (301) moves rightward against the force of springs (321) (322), and simultaneously the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [XI] acts on port PCa and switches unloading spool (309). And the pilot pressure enters port PB1 and boom conflux spool (305) is switched against the force of springs (325) (326) and the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [X2] acts on port PCa and switches unloading spools (310). The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 flows into parallel passage (53), pushes and opens load check valve LCb (511), and flows through between the perimeter of boom spool (301) and casing through U-shaped passage, and supplied to bucket cylinder head side (H) through port (Ab). In the meantime, the return oil from boom cylinder rod side (R) passes through between the perimeter of boom spool (301) and casing, flows through low pressure circuit (D) and boost check valve (517), and returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1.

Fig. 24-43 In boom up operation (Boom spool)

24-44


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2) In boom up conflux operation The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P2 passes through travel left spool and enters parallel passage (56), and pushes and opens load check valve CP2, and flows through between the perimeter of boom conflux spool (305) and casing from the A side of U-shaped passage, and pushes and opens conflux check valve CCb (511) and enters port Ab through conflux passage inside of casing and confluents the hydraulic oil from the hydraulic pump P1 side.

Fig. 24-44 In boom up conflux operation (Boom conflux spool)

24-45


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 3) In boom down operation On starting boom down operation, the pilot pressure enters port PBb and boom spool (301) moves leftward against the force of springs (321) (322) and the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [X1] acts on PCb and switches unloading spool (309). And simultaneously the spool of lock valve selector (211) is switched, and the poppet (514) is released because the spring chamber of lock valve poppet CRb (514) is connected to the drain circuit. The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 flows into parallel passage (53), and pushes and opens load check valve LCb (511), and flows through between the perimeter of boom spool (301) and casing through U-shaped passage, and is supplied to boom cylinder rod side (R) through port (Bb). In the meantime, the return oil from boom cylinder head side (H) enters the control valve through port (Ab). Because the retention of lock valve poppet CRb (514) which is located on this side of boom spool (301) is released, the lock valve poppet (514) pushes and opens. And then the return oil enters BH chamber and passes through between the perimeter of boom spool (301) and casing, and flows through low pressure circuit (D) and boost check valve (517), and the returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. And a part of the return oil flows into the inside of boom spool (301) through circular notch of boom spool (301). Since the return oil contains sufficient pressure with the self weight of boom, arm, etc. the return oil passes through inside passage of boom spool (301) and pushes and opens poppet (317) leftward as shown in the figure and flows through the circular notch, and then supplied to boom cylinder rod (R) side again through port Bb. (Boom recirculation function)

Fig. 24-45 In boom down operation

24-46


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (5) Arm operation 1) In arm out operation On starting arm out operation, the pilot pressure enters ports PBa1 and PBa2, and arm 1 spool (302) moves rightward against the force of springs (321) (322), and simultaneously the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [X2] acts on port PCa and switches unloading spool (310). And the pilot pressure also enters PBa2, and arm 2 spool (308) is switched against the force of springs (321) (328) and the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [X1] acts on port PCb and switches unloading spools (309). The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P2 flows into parallel passage (56), pushes and opens load check valve LCa (511), and flows into AR chamber through between the perimeter of arm 1 spool (302) and casing through U-shaped passage. In the meantime, the hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 flows through center by-pass passage (52) and pushes and opens load check valve LCAT2 (511) and enters U-shaped passage, and pushes and opens load check valve LCAP2 (515) provided with orifice, and flows into U-shaped passage. And then the hydraulic oil flows through between the perimeter of arm 2 spool (308) and casing, and enters AR chamber through casing inside passage (RR) and confluences the hydraulic oil from hydraulic pump P2 side. The conflux hydraulic oil opens lock valve poppet CRar (514) and is supplied to arm cylinder rod side (R). In the meantime, the return oil from arm cylinder head side (H) flows through between the perimeter of arm 1 spool (302) and casing and passes though low pressure circuit (D’) and casing inside passage (HH) and then flows into low pressure circuit (D’) through between the perimeter of arm 2 spool (308) and casing. The return oil in low pressure circuit (D’) returns to hydraulic tank through tank port T1 without passing through boost check valve (517).

Fig. 24-46 In arm out operation

24-47


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2) In arm in operation (At light load: arm recirculation function) On starting arm in operation, the pilot pressure enters ports PAa1 and PLc2, and arm 1 spool (302) moves leftward against the force of springs (321) (322), and simultaneously the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [X2] acts on port PCa and switches unloading spool (310). At the same time, since the spool of lock valve selector (211) is switched, the spring chamber of lock valve poppet CRar (514) is connected to the drain circuit and the retention of poppet (514) is released. And the pilot pressure enters PAa2 through solenoid proportional valve [XR], and arm2 spool (308) moves leftward against the force of springs (321) (328) and the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [X1] acts on port PCb and switches unloading spools (309). But in light load operation, because the solenoid proportional valve [XR] actuates and arm 2 spool (308) stays in the position of circuit (I). The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P2 flows into parallel passage (56), pushes and opens load check valve LCa (511), and flows into port (Aa) through between the perimeter of arm 1 spool (302) and casing through U-shaped passage. In the meantime, the hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 flows through center by-pass passage (52) and pushes and opens load check valve LCAT2 (511) and enters Ushaped passage, and also the oil from parallel passage (53) pushes and opens load check valve LCAP2 (515) provided with orifice and flows into U-shaped passage. And then the hydraulic oil flows through between the perimeter of arm 2 spool (308) and casing from U-shaped passage and enters port (Aa) through casing inside passage (HH) and confluences the hydraulic oil from hydraulic pump P2 side. The conflux hydraulic oil is supplied to arm cylinder head side (H) through port (Aa). In the meantime, the return oil from arm cylinder rod side (R) enters the control valve through port (Ba). Because the retention of lock valve poppet CRar (514) which is located on this side of arm 1 spool (302) is released, the return oil pushes and opens lock valve poppet CRar (514) and enters AR chamber. The return oil in AR chamber is led to arm 2 spool (308) through arm 1 spool (302) and casing inside passage (RR), but because arm 2 spool (308) does not connect to low pressure passage (D) at circuit (I), the entire flow rate flows into arm 1 spool (302). The return oil from chamber AR passes through the perimeter of arm 1 spool (302) and casing, and flows through casing inside passage (RH) and is led to the inside of arm 2 spool (308) through circular notch (a) of arm 2 spool (308). In light load operation, since the return oil contains higher pressure than that of arm cylinder head side (H) with the self weight of arm, etc. the hydraulic oil inside of arm 2 spool (308) passes through check valve (317) and flows into casing inside passage (HH) and the supplied to arm cylinder head side (H) again. (Arm recirculation function) And a part of the return oil which was led to arm 2 spool (308) passes through check valve (319), and flows through boost check valve (517) through load pressure circuit (D) and returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. (R) AR 322 321 chamber 514 211 CRar 511 LCa Ba

(H)

302

Aa

56 PBa1

PAa1 Arm 1

(D') (D)

(D') (D)

Arm 2

RR 52

RH

LCAT2

LCAP2 P1 PBa2 Dr

PAa2 Dr

HH

(a) PAa2 [XR]

PBa2 53 MU

328 321

P1

To arm 1 spool Aa (HEAD) Ba (ROD) To pilot cut valve

Circuit (I)

308319(D)511 LCAT2 LCAP2

317 515

Fig. 24-47 In arm in operation (At light load: arm recirculation function)

24-48


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 3) In arm in operation (In heavy load operation) The arm recirculation function is effective in actuating arm cylinder quickly in light load operation, but in heavy load operation (work required large power); the function causes the power loss. This control valve selects the presence of recirculation function in light and heavy load operation with solenoid proportional valve [XR]. (Variable recirculation function) The flow path of hydraulic oil in heavy load operation, the path on the supply side to arm cylinder is the same as that in light load operation, differs from that of return oil. In heavy load operation, solenoid proportional valve [XR] actuates and arm 2 spool (308) is positioned to circuit (II). The return oil from arm cylinder rod side (R) enters the control valve through port (Ba). Because the retention of lock valve poppet CRar (514) which is located on this side of arm 1 spool (302) is released, the return oil pushes and opens lock valve poppet CRar (514) and enters AR chamber. The return oil in AR chamber is led to arm 2 spool (308) through arm 1 spool (302) and casing inside passage (RR). But because arm 2 spool (308) is connected to low pressure passage (D) at circuit (รกU), almost all the return oil passes through between the perimeter of arm 2 spool (308) and casing and flows through boost check valve (517) through low pressure (D) and returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. The return oil from AR chamber passes through between the perimeter of arm 1 spool (302) and casing and flows through casing inside passage (RH) and then is led to the inside of arm 2 spool (308) through circular notch (a) of arm 2 spool (308). In heavy load operation, since the pressure on arm cylinder head side (H) is higher than the rod side, the hydraulic oil in arm 2 spool (308) does not flow into casing inside passage (HH), but flows through check valve (319) and passes through boost check valve (517) through low pressure (D) and returns to the hydraulic tank through port T1. (R) AR 322 321 chamber 514 211 CRar 511 LCa Ba

(H)

302

Aa

56 PBa1

PAa1

Arm 1

Arm 2

RH

LCAT2

PBa2 Dr

(a)

To arm 1 spool Aa (HEAD)

PAa2 [XR] Ba

(ROD)

53

To pilot cut valve

MU

Circuit (II)

308 (D) 319 511 LCAT2 LCAP2

LCAP2 P1

PAa2 Dr

HH

PBa2

321

(D') (D)

(D') (D) RR 52

328

P1

515

317

Fig. 24-48 In arm in operation (In heavy load operation)

24-49


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (6) Swing operation On starting swing operation, the pilot pressure enters ports PAs or PBs, and swing spool (303) moves leftward or rightward against the force of springs (321) (322), and simultaneously the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [X2] acts on port PCa and switches unloading spool (310). At the same time, in the event that the pilot pressure acts on port PAs, the pilot pressure flows through shuttle valve inside of cover (204) through the inside passage and then is led to port Pss. When the pilot pressure acts on port PBs, the pilot pressure also flows through shuttle valve inside of cover (204) and then is led to port Pss. The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P2 flows into parallel passage (56), pushes and opens load check valve LCs (511) and flows through between the perimeter of swing spool (303) and casing through U-shaped passage and is supplied to swing motor A side or B side through port (As) or (Bs). In the meantime, the return oil from swing motor A side or B side passes through between the perimeter of swing spool (303) and casing through port (Bs) or (As) and flows through low pressure circuit (D) and boost check valve (517), and then returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1.

Fig. 24-49 Swing operation

24-50


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (7) Spool actuation for operation in option This spool is used to control the attachment in option like Nibbler (Crusher), etc. Where the pilot pressure acts on port PAo on operating the attachment in option, the pilot pressure enters ports PAo, and option spool (311) moves against the force of springs (323) (324), and simultaneously the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [X2] acts on port PCa and switches unloading spool (310). The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P2 flows through parallel passage (56) and pushes and opens load check valve LCo (511), and flows through between the perimeter of option spool (311) and casing through U-shaped passage and is supplied to actuator for attachment through port (Ao). In the meantime, the return oil from actuator for attachment swing passes through between the perimeter of option spool (311) and casing through port (Bo) and flows through low pressure circuit (D) and boost check valve (517), and then returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. The operation where the pilot pressure acts on PBo port is the same as the above. * The oil passage is branched toward the end side of control valve at the mid course from option spool (311) to port Ao, but when N&B (Nibbler and Breaker) selector valve is provided on the end side of control valve, this oil passage is used as passage to connect to N&B selector valve.

Fig. 24-50 Spool actuation for operation in option

24-51


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (8) Lock valve operation The lock valve is housed in between each port of the control valve connected to arm cylinder rod side (R) and arm cylinder head side (H) and the arm spool and boom spool, and reduces the leaking due to holding pressure caused by each cylinder. 1) At boom spool neutral position (Arm spool makes the same operation.) When boom spool (301) is set to neutral position, spool (511) of lock valve selector is held on the left side as shown in the figure. At this position, passages Sa and Sb are connected each other at the inside of bushing (541) and on the perimeter of spool (511). Therefore in spring chamber (RH) of lock valve poppet, the holding pressure receiving from boom cylinder head side (H) passes from passage Sa to bushing (541) spool (511) and is connected through passage Sb, consequently the lock valve poppet (514) is kept pressed the lower side as shown in the Fig. 24-51 and restricts the leaking to the minimum.

Fig. 24-51 Lock valve operation (At boom spool neutral position)

24-52


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2) In boom down operation ((In arm in operation) Pilot pressure PBb for boom down operation acts on port PLc of lock valve selector, and the spool (511) moves rightward as shown in the Fig. 25-52. After the spool (511) was moved, orifice (a) of bushing (541) first closes and then passages Sa and Sb are blocked, and therefore the holding pressure receiving from boom cylinder head side (H) does not act on spring chamber (RH) of lock valve poppet (514). And after spool (511) was moved, the inside of bushing (541) is connected from port Dr to passage DR through spring chamber (321). With this actuation, spring chamber (RH) of lock valve poppet (514) is connected from orifice (b) of bushing (541) to drain passage Dr through passage Sb, and the force which pushes lock valve poppet (514) down as shown in the Fig. 24-52 is released. And since lock valve poppet (514) receives holding pressure from boom cylinder head side (H) to the pressure receiving section in ring type which is made up of guide diameter and seat diameter of lock valve poppet (514), lock valve poppet (514) is pushed upward and is open. The said operation, in boom down operation, is performed before making the opening (meter out opening) which is used to return the return oil from the boom cylinder head side of boom spool (301) to the tank open, the operation has no effect on the operability of boom down operation. In case of arm-in operation, the operation is the same. Return oil from boom cylinder head

RH CHAMBER 514

Lock valve selector BH CHAMBER

511

541

Sb CRb

PLc

Ab

Dr

(a)

A

(b)

PLc Sa Sb

A Sa

321 Dr

SECTION A-A

321

322

PBb

(D) Dr

301

Fig. 24-52 Lock valve selector operation (At boom down operation)

24-53


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (9) By-pass cut valve This by-pass cut valve is located on the most downstream of center by-pass passage (52) on P1 side and center by-pass passage (55) on P2 side. And this by-pass cut valve controls the flow rate of hydraulic oil from each center by-pass passage to low pressure passage (D). 1) In normal operation On starting the engine, the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valves [X1] and [X2] act on pilot ports PBp1 and PBp2 of by-pass cut valve (606). This secondary pressure is the same as that actting on pilot port PCb of P1 unloading spool (309) and pilot port PCa of P2 unloading spool (310). The following explains the by-pass cut valve on P1 side, the operation of by-pass cut valve on P2 side is the same. The secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valve [X1] enters PBp1 and plunger (301) moves downward against the force of spring (302). The taper section at the top end of plunger (301) is seated on the seat of plug (101), shutting off the spring chamber of poppet (201) and spring chamber (b) of plug (101). The hydraulic oil from center by-pass passage (52) passes through the orifice of poppet (201) and enters spring chamber (a) of poppet (201). Because spring chamber (a) of poppet (201) and spring chamber (b) of plug (101) are disconnected, spring chamber (a) of poppet (201) is the same pressure as center by-pass passage (52) and poppet (201) is pushed the seat section of casing shutting off center by-pass passage (52) and low pressure passage (D). Consequently, in normal operation, center by-pass passage (52) is always disconnected from low pressure passage (D) and the hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump P1 does not flow through center by-pass passage (52), but returns to the hydraulic tank through P1 unloading spool (309). [X1] PBp1

302

301

(b) (C) Dr 101

201 (a)

(D)

52

Fig. 24-53 By-pass cut valve (In normal operation)

24-54


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2) At the time when failure occurred When the electric system is failed and consequently the secondary pressure of solenoid proportional valves [X1] and [X2] is not produced, plunger (301) is moved upward by the force of spring (302). Since the taper section at the top end of plunger (301) is lifted up from the seat section of plug (101), spring chamber (a) of poppet (201) and spring chamber (b) of plug (101) are connected each other. The hydraulic oil from center by-pass passage (52) passes through the orifice of poppet (201) and enters spring chamber (a) of poppet (201). Because spring chamber (a) of poppet (201) and spring chamber (b) of plug (101) are connected each other, the hydraulic oil in spring chamber (a) of poppet (201) passes through from seat section of plug (101) to spring chamber (b) and flows into passage (Dr) through passage (c). Consequently the pressure in spring chamber (a) of poppet (201) lowers, poppet (201) receives the pressure of center by-pass passage (52) and is lifted up against the force of spring (202), and the hydraulic oil from center by-pass passage (52) flows into low pressure passage (D) through poppet (201) of by-pass cut valve (606). Therefore when the electric system is failed, P1 unloading spool (309) is shifted to the neutral position and the passage to low pressure passage (D) is cut off, but because center by-pass passage (52) is connected to low pressure passage (D) through by-pass cut valve (606), the abnormal rise of the pump pressure is prevented. PBp1

302

301

(b)

(C) Dr 101

201 (a) (D)

202

52

Fig. 24-54 By-pass cut valve (In condition of failure)

24-55


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (10)Boost check valve, By-pass check valve 1) Boost check valve The boost check valve is located between low pressure passage (D) and tank port T1 and generates boost pressure necessary for the low pressure passage. a. In normal operation The hydraulic oil from low pressure passage (D) moves the boost check valve (517) upward against the force of spring (527), and returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T1. At this time, the pressure generated by spring (527) is used as the boost pressure for the low pressure passage. But the return oil used for the arm out and bucket dumping operation does not pass through boost check valve (517), but returns from low pressure passage (D’) to hydraulic tank through tank port T1. b. In make up operation When supplying to make up the flow rate through low pressure passage (D) after the swing operation is suspended, if the hydraulic oil quantity in low pressure passage (D) is not enough, the deficient hydraulic oil is made up from hydraulic tank into low pressure passage (D). When the deficient hydraulic oil in low pressure passage (D) is not sufficient, the pressure of low pressure passage (D) is lowered. If the pressure of low pressure passage (D) is lowered to the pressure at tank port T1, poppet (102) housed in boost check valve (517) receives the pressure at tank port T1 on the receiving section in ring type which is made up of guide diameter and seat diameter of poppet (102), and is pushed upward and opens, and the hydraulic oil flows from the hydraulic tank to low pressure passage (D) to make up the deficient flow rate.

Fig. 24-55 Boost check valve operation

24-56


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2) By-pass check valve Even if the pressure at tank port T1 goes up due to the sudden change of return flow rate, the by-pass check valve actuates and prevents the pressure at tank port T1 from going up higher than the specified pressure, and consequently the oil cooler and filter located between tank port T1 and the hydraulic tank are protected from possible damage. When the pressure at tank port T1 goes up to the pressure added by spring (528), by-pass check valve (518) is pushed and opens against the force of spring (528), and the hydraulic oil in tank port T1 directly returns to the hydraulic tank through tank port T2.

527

528 (D')

T2

518 T1

102

517

(D)

Fig. 24-56 By-pass check valve operation

24-57


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

This page is blank for editing convenience.

24-58


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.3

PILOT VALVE (ATT)

24.1.3.1

OUTLINE

(1) Outside view

Single operating angle Single operating angle (Port 2, 4) (Port 1, 3)

5-PF3/8 T=49.0 (36.1)

The adjust nut (opposing flats : 22) : Fix adjust nut (opposing flats : 22) when the lever is installed by means of spanner or the like. Then tighten the mating lock nut to 41 + 3 N.m (302.2 lbf.ft).

PF1/4 T=29.4 (21.7)

VIEW A

T=Tightening torque : N.m (lbf.ft)

YN30V00111F1

Part No.

PV48K2004

Model

Refer to the curve below

Operating torque Max. primary pressure

6.9 MPa (1000 psi) 5.0 MPa (725 psi)

Primary pressure

20 L/min (5.3gal/min)

Rated flow

Approx. 1.9 kg (4.2 lbs)

Weight

A PORT 1, 3

PORT 2, 4

3.0(2.2)

SINGLE OPERATING TORQUE

2.21(1.63)

(290)2.0

2.0(1.5)

SECONDARY PRESSURE

(145)1.0

1.0(0.74) 0.94(0.69)

(87)0.6

0

0 1.1 2 4 6 7 PUSH ROD STROKE (mm) 0

0

(464)3.2

(435)3.0

2.0(1.5)

SECONDARY PRESSURE

1.0(0.74) 0.94(0.69)

(87)0.6

0

0 P

1

2.29(1.69)

(145)1.0

5 10 15 19 Operating angle (deg.) T

3 2 HYDRAULIC SYMBOL

24-59

3.0(2.2)

SINGLE OPERATING TORQUE

(290)2.0

0

Operation torque [N.m (lbf.ft)]

(464)3.2

(435)3.0

4.0(3.0)

(580)4.0 Secondary pressure [MPa (psi)]

4.0(3.0) Operation torque [N.m (lbf.ft)]

Secondary pressure [MPa (psi)]

(580)4.0

4

1.1

2 4 6 8 PUSH ROD STROKE (mm) 5 10 15 20 Operating angle (deg.)

9.4

25

0


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.3.2

CONSTRUCTION

Apply Loctite #277

312 302 501

301

Apply grease on top section

212

Apply grease on rotating and sliding sections. Be careful the assembling direction

213

151

*246

*218-2

211

214

*218-1 216-2

216-1

241-2

241-1

201-2 Secondary pressure adjusting shim

201-1

217

221

101

PORT 1,3

PORT 2,4

Fig. 24-57 Pilot valve (ATT) Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Name

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Name

Q’ty

101

Casing

1

*218-1 Seat

2

151

Plate

1

*218-2 Seat

2

201-1 Spool

2

201-2 Spool

221

Spring

4

2

241-1 Spring

2

211

Plug

4

241-2 Spring

2

212

Push rod

4

*246

Spring

4

213

Seal

4

301

Joint : M14

1

214

O-ring : 1B P20

4

302

Circular plate

1

312

Adjust nut : M14

1

501

Boots

1

216-1 Spring seat

2

216-2 Spring seat

2

217

Washer 2 (Shim)

47.1 (34.7) 68.6 (50.6)

4

Note) The parts marked * may not be equipped depending on valve type.

24-60


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.3.3

OPERATION

(1) Lever in neutral (See Fig. 24-58) The action of spring (509) (for secondary pressure setting) that determines the output pressure of the pilot valve does not act upon spool (201). Therefore, spool (201) (for return) is pushed up by spring (221) [spring seat (216)]. The output ports (2,4) connect with the T port. The result is that the output pressure is equal to the tank pressure.

216 509 221 201 PORT (2,4)

PORT (1,3)

Fig. 24-58 Lever in neutral (2) When the pilot lever is tilted (See Fig. 24-59 ) When the lever is tilted and the push rod (511) strokes, the spool (201) [spring seat (216)] moves downward to make the port P to connect with the port 2, 4, with the result that the oil of the pilot pump flows to the port 2 ,4 to produce a pressure.

Fig. 24-59 When the lever is tilted (3) Lever held (See Fig. 24-60) When the pressure at ports (2,4) rises to a level equivalent to the action of spring (509) that is set by tilting the lever, the hydraulic pressure balances the spring action. When the pressure of ports (2,4) rises above a set value, ports (2,4) and the P port close while ports (2,4) and the T port open. When the pressure at ports (2,4) falls below a set value, ports (2,4) and the P port open while ports (2,4) and the T port close. Thus the secondary pressure is kept constant.

Fig. 24-60 When the lever is held

24-61


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (4) Operation in the area where the tilting angle of the lever is large. (varies with the model) If the lever is inclined beyond a certain angle on certain models, the top end of the spool contacts the bottom of the bore of the push rod. This keeps the output pressure connected with the P port pressure. Furthermore, on a model in which a spring seat and a spring are built in the push rod, the bottom of the bore of the push rod contacts the spring if the lever is turned beyond a certain angle. This causes the secondary pressure gradient to change by the spring action. Thereafter, the bottom of the bore of the push rod contacts the top end of the spring seat, keeping the output pressure connected with the P port.

24-62


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.4

PILOT VALVE (TRAVEL)

24.1.4.1

OUTLINE

(1) Outside view

Port size

Tightening torque Port name N.m (lbf.ft)

PF3/8

30 (22)

PF1/4 16.7 (12.3)

Function

1

LH travel forward port

2

LH travel reverse port

3

RH travel forward port

4

RH travel reverse port

T

Tank port

5

LH travel pressure sensor port

6

RH travel pressure sensor port

P

Pilot primary pressure port

(2) Specifications P Item

Specifications

Part No.

YN30V00105F1

Type

6TH6NRZ

Primary pressure

4.9MPa (711psi)

Secondary pressure

0.54~2.35MPa (78~341 psi)

Rated flow

25 L/min (6.6 gal/min)

Weight

Approx. 8kg (18 lbs) 1

(3) Performance characteristics Secondary pressure [MPa (psi)]

Secondary pressure

2.35 + 0.15 (340 + 22)

0.54 + 0.1 (78 + 15) 0 (4.7 + 0.5) 6.4 + 0.64 7.7 + 0.77 (5.7 + 0.6) 12.7 + 1.27 (9.4 + 0.9)

Operating torque

[N.m (lbf.ft)]

T

1 30' 2 30'

11 30' 12 30'

Pedal angle (degree)

Operating torque Control diagram

24-63

5

2 3 Hydraulic symbol

6

4


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.4.2

Construction and operation

The hydraulic remote control valve in TH6NR type is operated with directly-operated pressure-reducing valve. The pilot control equipment TH6NR in double foot pedal type is made up of the actuating section which is equipped with 2 foot supports (1), 4 pressure-reducing valves (11), 4 damper system (12) and body (6). Every pressure-reducing valve is made up of control spool (2), control spring (3), return spring (4) and plunger (5). The dumper system is made up of plunger (8), orifice (9) and return spring (10). In stationary condition, the pedal is held in neutral position by return spring (10). In operation, the foot pedal pushes the plunger (5) used for pressure-reducing valve and plunger (8) used for dumper system. The hydraulic oil fed into damper chamber is restricted in the orifice (9) by the pressure corresponding to the operating speed. [Similarly, when the foot pedal returns to the neutral position with the return spring, the hydraulic oil trapped in the damper chamber is forced out. Consequently the return speed is controlled by the flow rate of hydraulic oil led through orifice (9).] Simultaneously, the plunger (5) is pushed against return spring (4) and control spring (3). The control spring (3) first moves the control spool (2) downwards, and then closes the passage between control port and the return pipe to tank port (T). At the same time, the control port is connected to passage (7). When the control spool reaches to the position the force of control spring (3) balances the pressure of control port (1 or 2), it starts retaining the condition. The pressure of control port is proportional to the stroke of plunger (5) and the position of pedal (1) according to the mutual relations between the control spool (2) and control spring (3). The closed circuit pressure control makes proportional control of selector valve and high responsibility of hydraulic pump and motor possible in relation with the characteristics of foot pedal (1) position and control spring (3).

1

5 3 8

3 11

10 12

4 10 2 9

9 7

6

2 control ports 1-3

P line

control ports 2-4 T line

24-64


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.5 24.1.5.1

SWING MOTOR UNIT SPECIFICATION

(1) General view

Port name

Symbol

Port size

Tightening torque N.m (lbf.ft)

A,B

Main port

PF3/4

167 (123)

DB

Drain port

PF3/8

74 (55)

M

Make-up port

PF3/4

167 (123)

PA,PB Pressure measuring port PF1/4 PG

36 (27)

Parking brake release port PF1/4

36 (27)

L

Gear oil level gauge

PT1/2

65 (48)

IP

Gear oil filling port

PT3/4

98 (72)

M

PB

L

THREAD FOR EYE BOLT 2-M10 DEPTH 18 RELIEF VALVE (B PORT SIDE)

B

(SH)

IP PG RELIEF VALVE (A PORT SIDE)

A

DB

PA

PB A,(B)

PG PG

PA ANTI-REACTION VALVE BLOCK M DB

IP FILLING PORT PT3/4

DB

M PA

PB

A

Grease fitting

B

Hydraulic diagram

24-65


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (2) Specifications Swing motor unit part No.

YN15V00036F2

Type

M5X130CHB-10A-41C/295

Hydraulic motor

Part No. Displacement

cm (in )

129.2 (7.88)

Working pressure

MPa (psi)

32.4 (4700)

Max. flow

L/min (gal/min)

220 (58)

Braking torque

N•m (lbf•ft)

655 (483)

Release pressure

MPa (psi)

2.5~5.0 (362~725)

Relief set pressure

MPa (psi)

29 (4205)

Weight

kg (lbs)

49 (108)

AntiType reaction valve Weight block

Reduction unit

Hydraulic motor assy weight

Total weight

YN15V00035F1 3

3

2KAR6P72/240-712 kg (lbs)

2.5 (5.5)

kg (lbs)

51.5 (114)

Part No.

YN32W00022F1

Speed reduction type

Planetary 2-stage

Reduction ratio

15.38

Lubicate oil Lubicate oil volume

Gear oil SAE90 (API class GL-4 grade) L (gal)

3 (0.8)

Grease

Extreme pressure lithum base #2 grease

Grease volume

kg (lbs)

Approx. 1 (2.2)

Weight

kg (lbs)

145 (320)

kg (lbs)

Approx. 197 (434)

24-66


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.5.2

CONSTRUCTION

(1) Swing motor 993 VALVE CASING SECTION

702 712

ANTI CAVITATION PLUNGER

Arrangement of brake spring

351 355

051 RELIEF VALVE

469 488

051-1 ANTI-REACTION VALVE BLOCK

401

052 151 303 162 171 161 985

163

712

A

985

444

984

131

451

A

472

390 391 VIEW I

702 707 706 100 980 743 742 111

400-1 400-2

121 994

123 122

114 124 443

491

101

24-67

301

052

400 SECTION A-A


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM Tightening torque No. N•m (lbf•ft) 177 (130)

Parts

051 Relief valve ; M33-P1.5 051-1 O-ring ; 1B G30

29 (21)

Tightening torque No. N•m (lbf•ft)

2

69 (51)

400

Parts Anti-reaction valve ; M22P1.5

Q’ty 2

2

400-1 O-ring ; 1B P20

2

052 Anti-reaction valve sub

1

400-2 Backup ring

2

Casing for anti-reaction valve

1

100

36 (27)

Q’ty

431 (318)

401 Socket bolt ; M20u45

4

101 Drive shaft

1

443 Roller bearing

1

111 Cylinder

1

444 Roller bearing

1

114 Spring plate

1

451 Pin

2

121 Piston

9

469 ROMH plug; M30-P1.5

2

122 Shoe

9

472 O-ring ; W1516,WG40

1

123 Set plate

1

488 O-ring ; 1B P28

2

124 Shoe plate

1

491 Oil seal

1

131 Valve plate

1

702 Brake piston

1

151 Plug ; PF1/4

2

706 O-ring ; W1516,WG38

1

161 O-ring ; 1B P11

2

707 O-ring ; W1516,WG41

1

162 O-ring ; 1B P12

2

712 Brake spring

18

163 O-ring ; 1B P6

2

742 Friction plate

3

171 Socket bolt ; M8u55

4

743 Separator plate

4

301 Casing

1

0.9 (0.66)

980 Plug ; PF1/4

1

303 Valve casing

1

1.7 (1.2)

984 Plug ; PF3/8

1

351 Plunger

2

4.4 (3.2)

985 Plug ; PF3/4

3

355 Spring

2

65 (48)

993 Plug ; PT1/2

1

390 Name plate

1

98 (72)

994 Plug ; PT3/4

1

391 Rivet

2

24-68

334 (246)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (2) Swing reduction unit Punch here 2 portions near hole to prevent item 22 (spring pin) coming out.

Be careful about installation direction of retaining ring.

Apply Three Bond #1360 or equivalent.

OIL FILLING PORT PT3/4

LEVEL PORT PT1/2

Apply Loctite #515.

SURFACE OF LUBE OIL

Be careful about installation direction of spring pin.

VIEW (II) (4 places) Apply Loctite #515. Be careful about installation direction of retaining ring.

Drive this spring pin into 1mm lower than the surface of spider.

Apply Loctite #515.

Install the filling port of this fitting toward motor side.

Tightening torque 69.1+4.4 N.m (51.0+3.2 lbf.ft) Apply seal tape or Loctite #577. Fill up this space with grease.

Tightening torque No. N•m (lbf•ft)

Parts

Q’ty

Tightening torque No. N•m (lbf•ft)

Parts

Q’ty

1

Pinion shaft

1

17

Needle bearing

4

2

#1 sungear

1

18

Washer

8

3

#1 pinion

3

19

Retaining ring

1

4

#2 sungear

1

20

Retaining ring

1

5

#2 pinion

4

21

Sleeve

1

6

Ring gear

1

22

Spring pin

4

7

Spider assy

1

23

Capscrew ; M14X135

11

8

Spider

1

24

Cap

2

9

Shaft

4

25

Tube L=112

1

10

Spherical bearing

1

26

Elbow

1

11

Spherical bearing

1

27

Plug

1

12

Oil seal

1

28

Retaining ring

3

13

Housing

1

30

Oil seal

1

15

Thrust Washer

6

31

Grease fitting

1

16

Needle bearing

3

32

Relief fitting

1

24-69

181 (134)

69.1 (51)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.5.3 24.1.5.3.1

OPERATION OPERATION OF HYDRAULIC MOTOR

If the high pressure oil flows into the cylinder through the inlet port (a) of valve plate (131), as shown on the figure on the right, the hydraulic pressure acts upon piston (121) and creates force F in the axial direction. The force F may be divided into force F1 vertical to shoe plate (124) via shoe (122) and force F2 at right angles with the shaft. The force F2 is transmitted to cylinder block (111) via pistons (121) and causes drive shaft to turn so as to produce a rotating moment. The cylinder block (111) has nine pistons equally arranged. Rotating torque is transmitted to drive shaft by turns by pistons connected to inlet port of high pressure oil. If the oil supply and discharge directions are reversed, the drive shaft rotates in the opposite direction. Theoretical output torque T can be given by the following equation.

Fig. 24-61 Operation of hydraulic motor 24.1.5.3.2

VALVE CASING SECTION

(1) (1)Operation of anti-cavitation check plunger Since the system using this type of motor is not equipped with a valve having a counterbalance function, the motor is rotated beyond the oil feed rate in some cases. The system has check plunger(351) and sucks in deficient oil, in order to prevent cavitation from occurring due to oil deficiency.

Fig. 24-62 Operation of anti-cavitation check plunger

24-70


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (2) Operation of relief valve 1) Consider where the relief valve is pressurized. The pressure at the P, R ports is equal to the tank pressure at the beginning, as shown in Fig. 2463. The relief valve begins to operates when the hydraulic pressure that is determined by the product of the pressure-receiving area A1 of plunger(301) and the pressure P balances the hydraulic pressure that is determined by the product of the pressure-receiving area A2 of the plunger(301) and the pressure Pg of chamber g. Thereafter, the pressure of chamber g rises and the piston 1 (302) begins to stroke. The load to spring (321) increases by this movement of the piston. As the result, the relief pressure P is raised and controlled in the pressure boost time t1 from P1 till Ps. This process is explained in the following in the relationships between the movements of the components shown in (2) to (4) of Fig. 2464~Fig. 24-66and the relief pressure : a. Condition shown in Fig. 24-64. If the P port of the relief valve is pressurized, pressure is built up in chamber g via the restrictor m of plunger (301). The hydraulic pressure acting on plunger (301) increases and when it balances the load Fsp of spring (321), the relief valve performs relieving action by the pressure P1. This relationship is expressed as : P1uA1=FSP1+Pg1uA2 where FSP1 : primary set load value of spring (321) b. Condition shown in Fig. 24-65. The pressure of chamber g acts upon the pressure-receiving area A3-A4 of piston 1 (302). When the hydraulic pressure rises above the load of spring (321), the piston 1 begins to move to the left. On that occasion, since the machine turns to the left while discharging the oil of chamber h arranged between piston 1 and adjust plug (401) into chamber g via orifice n provided in piston 1 (302), chamber h serves as a dumping chamber. The load of the spring increases slowly till piston 1 reaches the end of the adjust plug. The relief pressure P rises smoothly.

Fig. 24-63 Functional explanation of relief valve (1)

Fig. 24-64 Functional explanation of relief valve (2)

P R

Fig. 24-65 Functional explanation of relief valve (3)

P R

Fig. 24-66 Functional explanation of relief valve (4)

24-71

Fig. 24-67 Pressure boost characteristics


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM c. Condition shown in Fig. 24-66. The machine does not travel to the left further when piston 1 (302) arrives at the end of adjust plug (401). Therefore, the relief valve keeps its normal relieving action whereby the relief pressure is held at P2. In the processes 1 to 3 above, the relief pressure changes as shown in Fig. 24-67. 2) Function when the relief valve pressure is reduced Let us consider the pressure of the P port is reduced. When the pressure at port P is reduced to zero, the pressure of chamber g falls to the tank pressure level. The result is that the plunger (301) which is now open moves to the left and is seated on seat (341). At the same time, the piston 1 (302) moves to the right by the action of spring (321) and returns to the condition of Fig. 24-63. (3) Operation of anti-reaction valve

Fig. 24-68 Hydraulic circuit diagram for antireaction valve. 1) Neutral condition : Fig. 24-68 illustrates the relationship between the neutral condition of the anti-reaction valve and the hydraulic circuits. Now, let us consider a braking condition in which brake pressure generates on the AM port side.

L

k 322

313

321

311

Fig. 24-69 Neutral condition 2) When brake pressure occurs : If pressure (P) generates at the AM port, it passes through the passage L, the hole on the shaft of seat (313) and the passage m of plunger (311) and is led to the n chamber. When the pressure P rises above a value (Ps) set by spring (321), plunger (311) compresses spring (321) and shifts it to the left. Seat (313) compresses weak spring (322) as pushed by plunger (311) and moves to the left.

24-72

m

n

P=PS L

322

313

321

311

Fig. 24-70 When brake pressure occurs


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 3) At anti-reaction action When inertia load stops moving (point Y Fig. 2472), brake pressure (P) tries to fall. When P<Ps, plunger (311) moves toward the right return side by the action of spring (321). Seat (313) tries to move to the right by the action of spring (322), but since chamber p provides damping action by orifice g, the return of the seat makes a time delay with regard to the return of the plunger. Consequently, seat t opens. This makes a passage connecting the AM port and BM ports or both ports of the hydraulic motor by way of otorok. The result is that the pressures at the AM and BM ports become equal (Pb), falling into the condition at point Z in Fig. 24-72. This prevents the hydraulic motor from swing shock by the closing pressure of the AM port.

24.1.5.3.3

p

t

P<PS L k 322 313

r

g

321

311

Fig. 24-71 At anti-reaction action P

Y

PS PB

X

Z

T

Fig. 24-72 Pressure change diagram of antireaction operation

OPERATION OF BRAKE SECTION

The cylinder (111) is jointed by drive shaft (101) and a spline. Separator plate (743) is fixed in its circumferential direction by circular grooves provided in casing (301). Now, if the friction plate (742) splined to the outer circumference of the cylinder is pressed against casing (301) via separator plate (743) and brake piston (702) by the action of brake spring (712), frictional force is created between friction plate (742) and casing (301) and between separator plate (743) and brake piston (702). The frictional force bounds the drive shaft to brake the motor. In the meantime, when brake release pressure applied to the oil chamber formed between brake piston (702) and casing (301) overcomes the spring force, the brake is released as brake piston (702) moves till friction plate (742) is separated from casing (301).

712

702 712

743

702

742

111

301

24-73

743

742

301

101

Fig. 24-73 Operation of swing brake


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.5.3.4

SWING REDUCTION UNIT

The swing reduction unit is used to reduce the rotating speed which is transmitted by the hydraulic motor and to convert it to the strong turning force (torque). This swing speed reduction unit is equipped with planetary speed reducing mechanism. The planetary mechanism is made up of sun gear, planetary pinion, planetary shaft, spider and ring gear, as shown in Fig. 24-74. For the operation of the 1st stage planetary, the hydraulic motor rotates #1 sun gear (2). Sun gear (2) is engaged with planetary pinion (3) and rotates, but since ring gear (6) is fixed, planetary pinion (3) revolves about sun gear (2) with the planetary shaft and spider (7).

Fig. 24-74 Planetary mechanism

The role of spider is to hold the planetary pinion and planetary shaft and transmits the power from the planetary pinion to the spider through the planetary shaft. The #1 spider (7) is linked with #2 sun gear (4) by the involute spline, and transmits the power to the 2nd stage planetary mechanism. For the operation of the 2nd stage planetary, the power is transmitted to sun gear (4)oplanetary pinion (5)ospider (8) similarly to the 1st stage. The #2 spider (8) is linked with pinion shaft (1) by the involute spline, and pinion shaft (1) is engaged with the swing gear fixed on the undercarriage (lower frame) and rotates.

Fig. 24-75 Function of reduction unit

24-74


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.6 24.1.6.1

TRAVEL MOTOR SPECIFICATIONS

24.1.6.1.1

General view [A] PF 1 O-ring port [D] PF 1/2 O-ring port

[B] PF 1 O-ring port

[P] PF 1/4 O-ring port

24.1.6.1.2

SPECIFICATIONS

Model

GM38VB

Item N.m (lbf.ft)

Rated output torque

min-1

Working revolution

cm3/rev. (cu.in/rev)

Hydraulic Max. revolution motor

48.2 / 29.6 1 / 55.617

Reduction ratio Max. displacement

20100 / 34200 (14800 / 25200)

78.8 / 130.8 (4.81 / 7.98)

min-1

2680 / 1648

Max. pressure

MPa (psi)

34.3 (4970)

2 speed chamber pilot pressure

MPa (psi)

2.94~5.88 (426~853)

N.m (lbf.ft)

470 (347)

MPa (psi)

1.49 (216)

Parking

Breke torque

brake

Release pressure

24-75


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.6.2

CONSTRUCTION

A

A

B

SECTION B-B

B

C

C

SECTION C-C SECTION A-A

24-76


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM No.

Parts

Q’ty

No.

Parts Piston assy

Q’ty

1

Hub

1

1

3

Carrier [1]

1

161 •Piston

1

4

Sun gear[1]

1

163 •Seal

1

5

Planetary gear[1]

3

162 Steel ball

1

6

Carrier pin [1]

3

102 Shaft

1

7

Carrier [2]

1

8

Sun gear[2]

1

9

Planetary gear[2]

3

10 Carier pin[2]

No.

Parts

Q’ty

Rear flange assy 301 •Rear flange •Spool assy

1 1

323 ••Spool

1

326 ••Plug

2

1

327 ••Valve

2

103 •Swash plate

1

328 ••Spring

2

3

167 •Pivot

2

331 ••O-ring

2

11 Thrust washer[1]

6

107 Retainer plate

1

324 •Plug

2

12 Thrust washer[2]

6

108 Thrust ball

1

325 •Spring retainer

2

13 Thrust plate

1

109 Timing plate

1

329 •O-ring

2

14 Cover

1

112 Piston

1

330 •Spring

2

15 Cupling

1

113 Spring

8

363 •Spool

1

16 Parallel pin [1]

3

114 Spring

9

364 •Connector

1

17 Parallel pin [2]

3

115 Friction plate

3

365 •Pin

1

22 Lock washer

2

116 Separator plate

4

366 •Spring

1

23 Shim

1

119 Shim

1~2

367 •Spring retainer

1

24 Angular bearing

2

132 Oil seal

1

368 •G (PF) 1/4 plug

2

Swash plate kit

27

Needle-roller bearing with cage

3

133 C-ring for hose

1

369 •O-ring

2

28

Needle-roller bearing with cage

3

135 D-ring

1

370 •G (PF) 3/8 plug

1

29 Floating seal

1

139 D-ring

1

371 •O-ring

2

30 Plug

3

149 Tapered-roller bearing

1

372 •Orifice

2

31 O-ring

3

150 Tapered-roller bearing

1

373 •Orifice spring

2

35 Socket bolt

18

374 •G (PF) 1/8 plug

5

36 C-ring for hole

1

375 •O-ring

6

Relief valve assy 201 •Valve seat

2

376 •M6 orifice

3

101 Spindle

1

202 •Valve

1

377 •Check valve

3

137 Socket plug

1

203 •Sleeve

1

378 •Check valve spring

3

138 Expander

1

204 •Plug

1

379 •O-ring

1

205 •Spring retainer

1

380 •O-ring

1

Piston kit

1

206 •Piston

1

341 •Parallel pin

1

•Piston kit

9

207 •Spring

1

343 •Socket bolt

8

105 ••Piston

1

208 •Piston seal

1

345 •Socket plug

15

106 ••Shoe

1

209 •Piston seal

1

104 Cylinder block

1

210 •O-ring

1

399 Name plate

1

24-77


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.6.3 24.1.6.3.1

OPERATION HYDRAULIC MOTOR SECTION (BRAKE VALVE, PARKING BRAKE, HIGH-LOW 2 SPEED CHANGE MECHANISM)

(1) Function 1) Function of hydraulic motor This hydraulic motor is swash plate type axial piston motor and functions to convert the force of oil pressure from the pump to rotary motions. 2) Function of brake valve a. When trying to stop travel motor, this brake valve controls the force of inertia meant to rotate the travel motor with the inertia of body so as to stop the rotation with smooth braking. b. Function like check valve used to prevent cavitation of hydraulic motor. c. This brake valve opens the port used to releases the force of parking brake when the travel motor is operated and closes it when the travel motor stops. 3) Function of parking brake This parking brake functions to prevent power shovel from runaway at the time when parking or stopping on slope and from slipping with the friction disk type braking mechanism, and is integrated into hydraulic motor section. 4) Function of high and low 2 speed change mechanism This mechanism varies the tilt angle of swash plate with functions of selector valve and control piston, and changes the speed in 2 steps, high speed-low torque rotation and low speed-high torque rotation. (2) Working principle and explanation of functions 1) Hydraulic motor The hydraulic oil delivered by hydraulic pump enters rear flange (301) of GM motor, passes through brake valve and is led to the inside of cylinder block (104) through timing plate (109). This hydraulic oil flows through only one side of [Y1-Y2] linked from the upper dead point to the lower dead point after piston (105) stroke. The hydraulic oil flowed into one side of the cylinder block pushes each piston (4 or 5 pieces) and produces force (F kg=P MPauA cm2 ). This force acts on swash plate (103), and is separated into (F2, F3) because the swash plate is fixed having angle (a degree) to motor shaft (102) line. The radial force of the separated force (F3) generates torque (T= F3uri) to [Y1-Y2]. This combined force [T= (F3uri)] makes the cylinder block rotate using the piston as turning effort. This cylinder block transmits torque by making the motor shaft rotate because the motor shaft and spline are linked each other.

24-78


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 2) Brake valve a. When starting operation and in operation When the hydraulic oil is supplied from the control valve to port A, the hydraulic oil opens valve (327) and enters port P2 on the suction side of hydraulic motor and tries to rotate the hydraulic motor. And simultaneously the hydraulic oil pushes and opens orifice (372) located on section X-X through passage (a) and enters chamber (e). This hydraulic oil acts on the end face of spool assembly (323A) and generates force, and slides the spool on the neutral condition slide rightward with the force of spring (330). At this time the hydraulic oil pushed out of chamber (f) passes through passage b1 and is discharged into port B through the orifice of throttle valve located on section Y-Y. Because the hydraulic oil flows through the orifice, the damper functions resulting in slow movement of spool assembly and consequently the shock caused when starting is reduced. When spool assembly slides, passage g is formed between rear flange (301) and spool assembly with the spool groove. Port PS located on the passage on the return side of hydraulic motor and port B on the other side are connected to this passage and consequently because the return oil returns to the control valve enabling the hydraulic motor to rotate. And because the spool assembly slides, the hydraulic oil enters port C1 through passage c. The hydraulic oil entered in port C1 actuates piston (112) of parking brake and releases parking brake force. (For details, see 24.1.6.3.1 (2)-3.) In the event that the hydraulic oil is supplied to port B, the right valve in pair opens, and the spool assembly moves leftward resulting in reverse rotation of hydraulic motor.

24-79


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM b. When slowing down the speed and in traveling down on slope On reducing the oil flow rate supplied from control valve to port A to slow down the travel speed, the pressure at port A and port P2 lowers because the force of inertia is applied to the hydraulic motor. Consequently the hydraulic pressure which is used to push spool assembly (323A) in chamber (e) is cancelled, and the spool assembly which has been shifted rightward tries to return to the neutral position with the force of spring (330). At this time passage g is restricted and the flow rate from port P3 to port B is limited. With this actuation, the pressure is generated on port P3 and the pressure gives the braking force to the hydraulic motor which is tried to continue rotating with the force of inertia to slow down the speed. When reaching to the target speed, the pressure at port A and port P2 rises and the spool assembly slides rightward to the former position and restores the operation in the former state. And when the spool assembly tries to return to the neutral position, the hydraulic oil in chamber (e) is discharged into port A side through passage b2. At the same time, the hydraulic oil passes through passage b and pushes and opens orifice (372) located on the section Y-Y and is supplied to chamber (f) to prevent cavitation generating in chamber (f). On traveling on slope, the force acts on hydraulic motor to increase the speed from the outside. Consequently the pressure at port A and port P2 lowers, like the actuation when slowing down the speed, the hydraulic pressure in chamber (e) is cancelled, and the spool assembly which has been shifted rightward tries to return to the neutral position. At this time passage g is restricted to limit the flow rate from port P3 to port B, and the pressure is generated on port P3 and the braking force is supplied to the hydraulic motor. This braking force resists the external force used to increase the speed of hydraulic motor, and prevents self traveling of hydraulic motor. And also in cases where hydraulic oil is supplied to port B, because the spool assembly which has been pushed leftward tries to return to the neutral position, the braking force is supplied to the hydraulic motor to prevent the speed from slowing down and self traveling.

24-80


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM c. When parking and stopping When the hydraulic oil supplied from control valve to port A is cut off to stop operating, the pressure at port A and port P2 lowers. Consequently because the hydraulic pressure which has pushed spool assembly (323A) is cancelled, the spool assembly which has been shifted rightward returns to the neutral position with the force of spring (330). At this time passage g is closed and the flow rate from port P3 to port B is cut off. With this actuation, the pressure is generated on port P3 and gives the braking force to the hydraulic motor which is tried to continue rotating with the force of inertia to reduce the speed and to stop operating. Because relief valve (202A) is provided on between port P3 and port P2 and restricts the pressure generated on port P3, the hydraulic motor is protected from being broken by excess pressure and the shock caused by stopping motion is reduced. And when the spool assembly tries to return to the neutral position, the hydraulic oil in chamber (e) is discharged into port A side through passage b2. At the same time, the hydraulic oil passes through passage b and pushes and opens throttle valve (372) located on the section Y-Y and is supplied to chamber (f) to prevent cavitation generating in chamber (f). And when the spool assembly returns to the neutral position, port C1 and drain port D are connected with the passage provided on the spool assembly, and the hydraulic oil which is used to slide piston (112) of parking brake is discharged to drain port D through passage c. With this operation, the released parking brake actuates again and gets back the braking force.

X

Y

SECTION Y-Y

X

Y

24-81


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 3) Parking brake a. When starting operating and in operation The hydraulic oil is supplied from the brake valve to port C1 when starting operating and then flows into cylinder chamber (a), which is made up of spindle (101) and piston (112). When the pressure in cylinder chamber (a) increases until the force reaches over the force of spring (113), the piston moves toward rear flange (301) side. With the movement of this piston, the piston pushing force the separator plate (116) and the friction plate (115) is cancelled, consequently the movement of friction plate fitted on cylinder block (104) of hydraulic motor is in a free state and the braking force to the cylinder block is released.

24-82


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM b. When parking and stopping When spool assembly (202) of brake valve returns to the neutral position after stopping the operation, port C1 is connected to the drain and the pressure in cylinder chamber (a) lowers. When the pressure in cylinder chamber (a) reduces lower than the force of spring (113), piston (112) is pushed back by the force of spring and pushes separator plate (116) and friction plate (115) in free state to spindle (101), and consequently frictional force is generated between the separator plate and friction plate and fixes cylinder block (104) which is linked to the friction plate with spline. With this operation, and also in cases where the force (torque) for rotation is applied to the traveling motor used for parking on slope and digging work from the outside, the motor is prevented rotating.

The torque of parking brake is set to 60% of output force of motor, if the external torque over the parking braking torque is applied to, the motor rotates.

24-83


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 4) Explanation of auto 2-speed change mechanism a. In low speed operation When the pilot pressure is not supplied through port P, spool (383) is pushed rightward by the force of spring (366) and the hydraulic oil is blocked at port P1 and the hydraulic oil in chamber (h) is bled into drain port D through spool. Consequently swash plate (103) turns into the maximum tilt angle 1, and the cylinder capacity of hydraulic motor reaches to the maximum and the speed changes in the low speed operation.

24-84


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM b. In high speed operation When the pilot pressure is supplied through port P, the force overcomes the force of spring (366) and the hydraulic oil pressure supplied into chamber (k) inside of spool through port A (or port B) and port C1 and spool (363) is pushed leftward. Consequently the hydraulic oil which is the highest of oil pressures at port P, P2 and P3 is led from port P1 to chamber (h) through the spool and port C1. Piston (161) is then pushed and held by the hydraulic pressure which has been led into chamber (h) until swash plate (103) strikes stopper face m provided on spindle (101). At this time the swash plate turns into the minimum tilt angle, 2, and the cylinder capacity of hydraulic motor reaches to the minimum and the speed changes in the high speed operation.

24-85


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM c. Auto change to low speed operation while operating it at high speed As the load increases during high speed operation, the hydraulic pressure at port A (or port B) increases, and the spool slides rightward when the force in combination of the force of spring (366) and the force in chamber (k) inside of spool (363) overcomes the pressure at port P. Consequently the hydraulic oil in chamber (h) which has pushed the swash plate to face m is fed into drain port D through spool (363). At this time the swash plate strikes spindle face n and turns into the maximum tilt angle 1, and the speed changes in low speed operation. And when the load lowers and the hydraulic pressure at port A (or port B) lowers, the cylinder capacity turns into the minimum and the high speed operation is restored by the operation in previous item "b. In high speed operation".

24-86


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.6.3.2

Reduction unit

(1) Function This reduction unit is made up of 2 step planetary gearing (epicycle gear, sun and planet gear) mechanism and functions to reduce the high speed rotation supplied from hydraulic motor, to convert it into the low speed high torque and to obtain hub (1) (casing) rotation. (2) Explanation of actuation The hydraulic motor axis rotation motion is transmitted to sun gear 1 (4) located on the 1st stage which is linked to shaft (102) with spline. At this time planetary gear 1 (5) on the 2nd stage stays in mesh with sun gear 1 (4), and planetary gear 1 (5) is engaged with hub (1) rotating on its axis and starts revolving. This revolution makes carrier (3) fixed to planetary gear 1 (5) and sun gear 2 (8) on the 2nd stage linked with the carrier rotate. This rotation is transmitted to hub (1) (ring gear) through planetary gear 2 (9) on the 2nd stage fixed on the column of spindle, and turns into output rotation motion of the reduction unit. (The rotation is transmitted by planetary gear1 (5) on the 1st stage, too.)

Column

Planetary gear 2

Planetary gear 1 Sun gear1

Shaft

Input

Out put Spindle Sun gear 2 Carrier

Hub (Ring gear)

24-87


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

This page is blank for editing convenience.

24-88


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.7

SWIVEL JOINT

24.1.7.1

GENERAL VIEW

Fig. 24-76 General view of swivel joint

24.1.7.2

SPECIFICATIONS Item

Specifications

Assy parts No.

YN55V00053F1

High pressure ports A, B, C, D

Working pressure Max. impact pressure Rated flow

34.3 MPa (4970 psi) 51.5 MPa (7470 psi) 255 L/min (67 gal/min)

Low pressure ports E

Working pressure Rated flow

0.5 MPa (73 psi) 50 L/min (13 gal/min)

Low pressure ports F

Working pressure Rated flow

5 MPa (725 psi) 30 L/min (8 gal/min)

Revolution speed

15 min-1 (15 rpm)

A, B, C, D (Body) A, B, C, D (Stem) E F

Ports size

PF1 PF3/4 PF1/2 PF1/4

Length : L

368 mm (14.5")

Weight

25 kg (245 lbs)

24-89


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.7.3

CONSTRUCTION

Fig. 24-77 Construction No.

Name

Q’ty

No.

Name

Q’ty

1

Body

1

7

O-ring(G95 1A)

1

2

Stem

1

8

Capscrew (M8u20)

2

3

Thrust plate

1

9

Capscrew (M8u30)

3

4

Cover

1

12

Plug

1

5

Seal

5

13

O-ring

1

6

Seal

1

24.1.7.4

OPERATION

The swivel joint consists mainly of body (1) and stem (2) that rotate mutually, thrust plate (3) preventing both components from falling off, cover (4) closing one side of body (1), seal (5) that partitions off the circuits and seal assy (6) and O-ring (7) that prevent external leaks. Four ports for the travel main circuits are provided on body (1) and stem (2). Further, four oil passing grooves are arranged in the inner surface of body (1), with seal (5) fixed above and below the circumferential groove. The body (1) and the stem (2) rotate mutually. The oil flowing in from body (1) or stem (2) keeps on flowing to stem (2) or body (1) past the circumferential groove between body (1) and stem (2) ; the oil flow is never shut off because of rotation. Further, an oil groove for lubrication that connects with the drain port is provided, in order to prevent the body (1) from seizure with the stem (2). This construction keeps on connecting the circuits between the swing bodies by means of a swivel joint.

24-90


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.8

CYLINDER

24.1.8.1

SPECIFICATIONS

(1) General view

ul

F

de

en

xt ly e

gth

n d le

F

gth

n d le

e

act

etr

r ully

B

A

Part No. and Manufacturing No. Stamp position

Fig. 24-78 General view of cylinder (2) Specifications Unit : mm (ft-in)

Use

Part No. of cylinder assy

Cylinder bore / Rod Dia.

Stroke

Center distance of pins Full extend B / Full retract A

Boom

YN01V00151F1

ø120 / ø85 (4.72" / 3.34")

1,355 (4-5)

3,199 / 1,844 (10-6 / 6-1)

Arm

YN01V00175F2

ø135 / ø95 (5.32" / 3.74")

1,558 (5-1)

3,637/ 2,079 (11-11 / 6-10)

Bucket

YN01V00153F2

ø120 / ø80 (4.72" / 3.15")

1,080 (3-7)

2,675 / 1,595 (8-9 / 5-3)

24-91

Cushion With cushion on rod side R-50 With cushion on both sides H-40,R-60 With cushion on rod side R-50

Dry weight kg (lbs) 166 (366) 249 (549) 149 (329)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.1.8.2

CONSTRUCTION AND FUNCTION

24.1.8.2.1

CONSTRUCTION

(1) Boom cylinder T= Tightening torque ; N.m (lbf.ft) 22

23

T=267 (197)

12

22

23

105 0 -0.5

105 0 -0.5

B

PS1/8

PT1/4

With hole (1 place)

DETAIL B

DETAIL C T=5460 (4027)

9

8

7

6

3

4

11

5

10

2

1

13

14

16

17

18

19

15

20

21

C

Slit

Orientation of cut off part of cushion bearing (13)

Fig. 24-79 Construction of boom cylinder

P/No YN01V00151F1 No.

Parts

Q’ty

No.

1

Cylinder tube

1

9

2

Piston rod

1

3

Rod cover

4

Parts Wiper ring

Q’ty

No.

Parts

Q’ty

1

17 Buckup ring

2

10 O-ring

1

18 Slide ring

2

1

11 Buckup ring

1

19 Slide ring

2

Bushing

1

12 Socket bolt; M16u75

12

20 Set screw; M12

1

5

Snap ring

1

13 Cushion bearing

1

21 Steel ball

1

6

Buffer ring

1

14 Cushion seal

1

22 Pin bushing

2

7

U-ring

1

15 Piston

1

23 Wiper ring

4

8

Buckup ring

1

16 Seal ring

1

24-92


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (2) Arm cylinder

12

26

27

T= Tightening torque ; N.m (lbf.ft)

T=367 (271)

27

26

120 0 -0.5

120 0 -0.5

B

PT1/4

PS1/8

With hole (1 place)

DETAIL B 9

8

7

6

3

4

5

11

10

2

1

DETAIL C 13

14

T=7890 (5820)

16

17

18

19

15

T=56.9 (42)

20

21

C

Slit

Orientation of cut off part of cushion bearing (13)

25 23 22 24

Slit

Fig. 24-80 Construction of arm cylinder

P/No YN01V00175F2

No.

Parts

Q’ty

No.

Parts

Q’ty

No.

Parts

Q’ty

1

Cylinder tube

1

10 O-ring

1

19 Slide ring

2

2

Piston rod

1

11 Buckup ring

1

20 Set screw; M12

1

3

Rod cover

1

12 Socket bolt; M18u80

12

21 Steel ball

1

4

Bushing

1

13 Cushion bearing

1

22 Cushion bearing

1

5

Snap ring

1

14 Cushion seal

1

23 Cushion seal

1

6

Buffer ring

1

15 Piston

1

24 Stopper

2

7

U-ring

1

16 Seal ring

1

25 Snap ring

1

8

Buckup ring

1

17 Buckup ring

2

26 Pin bushing

4

9

Wiper ring

1

18 Slide ring

2

27 Wiper ring

4

24-93


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM (3) Bucket cylinder T= Tightening torque ; N.m (lbf.ft) 21

22

12

T=267 (197)

21

22

105 0 -0.5

105 0 -0.5

B

PS1/8

PS1/8

With hole (1 place)

DETAIL B

DETAIL C

T=6200 (4573)

9

8

7

6

3

4

5

11

10

2

1

13

15

16

17

18

14

T=56.9 (42)

19

20

C Orientation of cut off part of cushion bearing (13)

Fig. 24-81 Construction of bucket cylinder

P/No YN01V00153F2

No.

Parts

Q’ty

No.

1

Cylinder tube

1

9

2

Piston rod

1

3

Rod cover

4

Parts Wiper ring

Q’ty

No.

Parts

Q’ty

1

17 Slide ring

2

10 O-ring

1

18 Slide ring

2

1

11 Buckup ring

1

19 Set screw; M12

1

Bushing

1

12 Socket bolt; M16u75

12

20 Steel ball

1

5

Snap ring

1

13 Cushion bearing

1

21 Pin bushing

4

6

Buffer ring

1

14 Piston

1

22 Wiper ring

4

7

U-ring

1

15 Seal ring

1

8

Buckup ring

1

16 Buckup ring

2

24-94


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM HYDRAULIC CYLINDER CONSTRUCTION (See Fig. 24-79) By construction the hydraulic cylinder consists mainly of cylinder tube assy (1), piston rod assy (2) that takes out the motion of pistons reciprocating in the cylinder tube assy, and cylinder head (3) that serves as both a lid and a guide. Cylinder tube assy (1) is equipped with a pin mount (clevis) that connects piston rod assy (2) with other parts. In addition to these main components, seal ring (16) and back-up ring (17) are located between cylinder tube assy (1) and piston rod assy (2); buffer ring (6), U-ring (7) back-up ring (8) and wiper ring (9) are located between piston rod assy (2) and cylinder head (3); and an O-ring (10) and a back-up ring (11) are placed between cylinder tube assy (1) and cylinder head (3)

24.1.8.2.2

OPERATION

If pressurized oil is fed alternatively to the oil inlet and outlet provided in the cylinder, force acts on the piston which in turn causes the piston rod (2) to extend and retract.

Cushion bearing (13) Piston (15)

Rod (2) Head side

(1) Operation of cylinder with cushion 1) Cushion on rod side The cushion mechanism is provided to prevent the generation of shock when the moving speed of piston (15) is not reduced and strikes cylinder head (3). An oil in chamber "A" returns to the tank by passing through passage "B" at a fixed flow rate in a intermediate stroke state (Fig. 24-82) of pressing head side. Next, in a state of just before stroke end (Fig. 24-83), cushion ring (13) plunges into passage "B". At this time, an oil in chamber "A" passes clearance "D" and mouth gap "C", an oil flow volume returning to tank suddenly drops and the piston part movement slows down.

Chamber "A" Passege "B" Tank

Cushion stroke

Rod side

Rod cover (3)

Fig. 24-82 Cushion mechanism on the rod side

Fig. 24-83 Cushioning action on the rod side

2) Cushion on head side (See Fig. 24-84) This construction is similar to the one of cushion on rod side. In a state of intermediate stroke pressing rod side, an oil in chamber "A" returns to tank by passing through passage "B" at a fixed flow rate. Next, in a state of just before stroke end, cushion bearing (22) plunges into passage "B". At this time, the oil in chamber "A" flows only through clearance "D" and mouth gap "C" of cushion seal (23). So the returning oil volume drops suddenly and the piston movement slows down.

Fig. 24-84 Cushion mechanism on the head side

24-95


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

This page is blank for editing convenience.

24-96


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

24.2

ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT

24.2.1

ELECTRIC EQUIPMENT LIST

(D) Diode

(C) Controller

Group

Code

Name

Parts No.

C - 1 Mechatro controller

YN22E00214F1

C - 2 Gauge cluster

YN59S00021F2

C - 4 Air-con controler (including panel)

YN20M01468P1

C - 5 Engine coolant level controller

VHS834701230

C - 8 Engine controller

VH89661E0010

D - 4 Diode

Harness accessory

D - 5 Diode

Accessory of relay box

D - 6 Diode

n

D - 9 Diode

n

D - 10 Diode

n

D - 12 Diode

n

D - 13 Diode

n

D - 14 Diode

n

D - 16 Diode

n

D - 17 Diode

n

D - 25 Diode

Harness accessory

E - 1 Fuse and Relay box

YN24E00016F2

E - 2 Alternator

VH270402192A

E - 3 Hour meter

YT58S00006P1

E - 5 Horn high

LC53S00001D1

E - 6 Horn low

LC53S00001D2

(L) Light

(E) Electric fittings

E - 7 Tuner

E - 8 Speaker left

YN54S00006P1 n

E - 9 Speaker right E - 10 Receiver dryer

YN54S00041P1

E - 11 Air-con compressor

YX91V00001F1

E - 12 Battery

YN72S00016P1

E - 13 Travel alarm (For Middle east)

YN53S00004F1

E - 14 Cigaratte lighter

YN81S00003P1

E - 15 Fusible link

LC13E01175S002

E - 22 DC-DC converter

YT77S00001P1

E - 23 12V socket

YN81S01002P1

E - 27 Accel redundant volume

YN52S00052P1

L - 1 Boom work light (LH)

YW80S00001F1

L - 2 Deck work light (RH)

YT80S00002F2

L - 5 Room light

YT80S00001P1

L - 6 Boom work light (RH)

YW80S00001F1

L - 7 Cab work light

24-97


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

(R) Reray

(P) Proportional solenoid valve

(M) Motor

Group

Code

Name

Parts No.

M - 1 Starter motor

VHS281002894A

M - 3 Wiper motor

YN53C00012F2

M - 4 Washer motor

YN54C00001F1

PSV - A

Arm 2 speed inverse propo. valve

PSV - B P2 unload propo. valve PSV - C Travel straight propo. valve

YN35V00049F1 (YN35V00047F1) Solenoid valve assy

P1 pump propo. valve

PSV - P2

P2 pump propo. valve

(YN10V00023F1) Pump

YN35V00052F1 n

R - 1 Battery relay

YN24S00008F1

R - 2 Starter relay

VHS283001271A

R - 3 Glow relay

VHS286201420A

R - 4 Safety relay

YN24S00010P1

R - 5 Horn relay

n

R - 6 Working light relay

n

R - 8 Travel alarm relay

n

R - 9 Cab working light relay

n

R - 23 Auto idle stop relay 1

YN24S00010P1

R - 24 Auto idle stop relay 2

n

R - 25 Engine emergency stop relay

n

R - 26 Lever lock relay

n

R - 28 Alternator relay

n

R - 29 Wiper motor relay (Normal rotation)

YN24S00012P2

R - 30 Wiper motor relay (Reverse rotation)

n

R - 31 Wiper motor relay (Arc prevention)

n

R - 32 Washer motor relay

n

SE - 1 Pressure sensor : Bucket digging

(SE) Sensor

n n

PSV - D P1 unload propo. valve PSV - P1

YN35V00048F1

LC52S00019P1

SE - 2 Pressure sensor : Bucket dump

n

SE - 3 Pressure sensor : Boom up

n

SE - 4 Pressure sensor : Boom down

n

SE - 5 Pressure sensor : Swing

n

SE - 7 Pressure sensor : Arm in

n

SE - 8 Pressure sensor : Arm out

n

SE - 9 Pressure sensor : Travel RH

n

SE - 10 Pressure sensor : Travel LH

n

SE - 11 Pressure sensor : P2 OPT.

n

SE - 13 E/G speed sensor

VHS894101290A

SE - 15 Fuel sensor

YN52S00045F1

SE - 16 Accel potentiometer

YN52S00032P1

SE - 20 Pressure sensor : P1 OPT.

LC52S00019P1

SE - 22 Pressure sensor : Pump P1

YN52S00048P1 n

SE - 23 Pressure sensor : Pump P2

24-98


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM

(SW) Switch

(SV) Solenoid

Group

Code

Name

Parts No. YN35V00051F1

SV - 1 Swing parking brake SOL. SV - 2 Power boost SOL SV - 3 Two speed select SOL

(YN35V00047F1) Solenoid valve assy

YN35V00050F1 n n

SV - 4 Safety lock lever SOL SW - 1 Key switch

YN50S00026F1

SW - 4 Swing parking brake release switch

YN50S00047P1

SW - 5 Horn switch (RH)

YN50E00017P1

SW - 7 E/G oil pressure switch

VHS835301471D

SW - 8 Air filter clogging switch

YR11P00008S005

SW - 10 Horn switch (LH)

YN50E00017P1

SW - 11 Safety lock lever switch

YN50S00041F1

SW - 13 Travel alarm switch (For Middle east)

YN50S00040DF

SW - 15 Conflux/single select switch

YN50S00040DD

SW - 17 Skylight wiper switch

YN50S00040D9

SW - 19 Wiper interlock switch

YT50S00004P1

SW - 20 Power boost switch (RH)

YN50E00017P1 n

SW - 21 Power boost switch (LH) SW - 26 Cab work light switch

YN50S00040D4

SW - 27 Coolant level switch

VHS834601510A

SW - 28 Water separator switch

VHS233002800A

SW - 55 Boom work light switch

YN50S00040D1

24-99


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM 24.2.2

SPECIFICATION OF ELECTRIC EQIUPMENTS

File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine C-1 Controller YN22E00214F1 Mechatro controller

Specification

Maker Rated voltage

Description

Sinko Electric Co. Ltd DC24V

Weight

4.2 kg (9.3 lbs)

Maker

Nippon seiki Co., Ltd

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

C-2 Controller YN59S00021F2 Gauge cluster

Rated voltage Insulation

DC24V More than 3M at 500V megger

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

C-4 Controller YN20M01468P1 Air-con Controller YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

24-100


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine C-5 Controller VHS834701230

Specification

Rated voltage Maker's (Hino) P/No.

Description

DC24V S8347-01230

Controller YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~ Hino P/No. : 82580-8050A (YAZAKI : 7382-1680) Hino P/No. : 82580-8870A (YAZAKI : 7283-1080)

Measurement circuit

Pin arrangement

C-8 Controller VH89661E0010

Maker's P/No.

Engine controller

Rated voltage

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Working voltage Operating voltage (at starter ON) Back-up source (reference value)

89661-E0010 SOFTWARE P/No.89663-E0750 24V (DC) 16~32V (DC) 9~32V (DC) 5mA MAX (BAT=24V)

Connector 167 pins Male

24-101


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine E-1 Fuse & Relay box

Specification

Description

Fuse capacity and circuit

YN24E00016F2 Fuse & Relay YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Front side of machine

E-2 M6 B terminal

Alternator VH270402192A Generator YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~

Terminal arrangement VIEW A

E-3 Hour meter YT58S00006P1

Movement Operating voltage

4 pin connector (Water proof) Hino P/No. 82560-2390 (Eqivalent to sumitomo 6188-0631 ) Connector Hino P/No. 82560-8640 (Eqivalent to sumitomo 6189-0351)

Quarts 10~80VC

Service meter YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

24-102

GM terminal : 2962447 GM connector : 2962448


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine E - 5, 6 Horn LC53S0001D1 (High) LC53S0001D2 (Low) Warning sound YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Specification

Description

Bottom L : Low sound

Type Rated voltage Operating voltage range

Sound level Basic frequency

H : High sound STAMP

DC24V DC20~30V 113+5dB(A)/2m 420+20Hz high sound 350+20Hz low sound

Insulation resistance More than 3M /DC500V

o 8.5

E - 8, 9 Speaker YN54S00006P1 Radio YT02 - 04001 ~ YT03 - 05293 ~ YT04 - 07001 ~ YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~ E - 10 Receiver dryer YN54S00041P1 Air-con YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Maker Airtight test pressure

Sanden Corp. 3.5MPa (508 psi)

Pressure proof test pressure

5.3MPa (769 psi)

Breaking test pressure Desiccant moisture adsorption capability

9.8MPa (1420 psi)

Refrigerant Inner volume/Desiccant

Outlet (To unit)

17% or over than the weight of desiccant (Include initial absorption 2%)

HFC-134a 578cm3/300g

24-103

Inlet (From condenser)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine

Specification

Description

E - 11 Air-con compressor YX91V00001F1 Air-con YX03 - 01601 ~ YX04 - 01773 ~ YX05 - 02001 ~ YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

12V 96Ah

Weight (Incl. fluid)

Approx. 26.5kg (58.4 lbs)

Electrolyte

Approx. 6.7 L (1.77 gal) Negative terminal

17.9 (0.705")

502 (19.76")

24-104

Positive terminal

19.5 (0.768")

180 (7.09")

17 (0.67")

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Capacity (5HR)

115F51

Taper

Power

Voltage

17 (0.67")

YN72S00014P1

Type

Taper

Battery

255 (10") 210 (8.27")

E - 12


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine E - 13 Alarm YN53S00004F1

Specification

Model Rated voltage

Description

BA3111A DC 12V~36V

Travel alarm (Middle east)

Housing : 174354-2 Terminal : 171661-1

GND AV 0.5 Black Power AV 0.5 Red / Green AMP Econoseal J series Mark II water-proof Harness seal : 172888-2 Retainer : 1-174355-1

VIEW A

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Vinyl tube

E - 14 Cigarette lighter YN81S00003P1 Cigarette lighter YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

E - 15 Fusible link LC13E01175S002 Fuse YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

E - 22 DC-DC converter YT77S00001P1 DC24VoDC12V YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~

DC 24V

Input voltage Output voltage

DC 12V

Output current

2.5A Max

Ground

Negative

YV WG

YB OL B

Fix the wire with tape HOUSING YAZAKI 7122-2262 TERMINAL YAZAKI 7114-2020 VIEW A

24-105

A


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine E - 23 12V socket YN81S00001P1 Power socket

Specification

Description

Power supply

For 12V

Max. current

Less than 10A

Insulation resistance More than 10M /500v megger

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~

GROUND TERMINAL

Open and shut direction

POSITIVE TERMINAL 980-10760

E - 27 Accel redundant volume YN52S00052P1

Rated voltage

Resistance 2

DC 5V

Resistance 2 TOCOS Parts E-27 RA30YME20FB202

Accel redundant volume YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

After soldering, insulate this part with heat shrinkable tube Clip Adhesive

Fix this resistance with tape Dial

PVC tube (Black)

VIEW I

L - 1, 6 Light (Halogen) YW80S00001F1 Boom work light (LH, RH)

LC08 - 06201 ~ YC08 - 03001 ~ LC09 - 06201 ~ YC09 - 03701 ~ YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~ L-2 Light (Halogen) YT80S00002F2 Deck work light

Type Bulb Effective area of lens

HOUSING : 172131-5 TERMINAL : 170340-1

BL84-200 DC 24V,70W 71cm2

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

24-106


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine L-5 Light YT80S00001P1

Specification

Bulb

Description

24V,5W

Body

Lens

Note) Equivalent to 2456Z322F1

Room light YT02 - 04001 ~ YT03 - 05293 ~ YT04 - 07001 ~ YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~ M-1 Motor VHS281002894A Starter motor YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Bulb

SECTION A-A

Rated output

DC 24V, 15kW

Yazaki P/No. Terminal : 7114-6047 Connector : 7282-3013-30 (Black) Hino P/No. : 82580-6720 Mating connector Hino P/No. : 82580-6730

Pinion gear

VIEW A

M-3 Motor YN53C00012F2 Wiper motor YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

159800-5710 (Motor only)

Denso corp. P/No.

24V

Rated voltage

Applox. 80

Swing angle Controller Wiper motor

24V

Wiper sw OFF-Stop ON-Start

Stop signal Reverse signal Electric diagram

M-4 Motor (Reservoir) YN54C00001F1 Window washer YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Rated voltage

DC 24V

Injection flow

600cc (0.16 gal) / min or more

Capacity Injection pressure

1.5L (0.4 gal) 88.3 kPa (12.8 psi) or more

24-107

Switch A

Door

B Terminal : M8X1.25


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine R-1 Relay YN24S00008F1 Battery relay YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Specification

Description

At start 24V2000A(0.1 sec) Rated voltage / current At charge 28V120A(Continuous)

0.4A or less / 24V

Exciting current

Lock section

37.2N {8.4 lb} or more

Contact pressure Closed circuit voltage

16V or less

Open circuit voltage

7V or less

Terminal A

VIEW A

Terminal A

VIEW I HOUSING AMP 174359-2 RETAINER AMP 1-174360-7 TERMINAL AMP 171661-1 WIRE PROOF PLUG AMP 172888-2

Insulation resistance 3M or more/500V megger

VIEW Z

Flowing direction of main current Terminal A Terminal B

Terminal B

AVS 1.25G

I Terminal B

F HOUSING YAZAKI 7123-4220-30 F TERMINAL YAZAKI 7116-3251 REAR HOLDER YAZAKI 7157-6801-30 WIRE PROOF PLUG 7157-3580-60

P coil

H coil

Terminal B

Terminal L

F HOUSING YAZAKI o 9 X 30L Heart shrinkage tube 7123-4210-30

F TERMINAL YAZAKI

AVS 1.25B 7116-3251* GND wire

z

Circuit diagram

GND terminal

Terminal L

WIRE PROOF PLUG 7157-3580-60

Terminal B

AVS 1.25L

Bracket groud o 7.0 X 150L Corrugete tube (Black) Fusible link assy B

R-2 Relay VHS283001271A Starter relay YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Hino P/No.

S2830-01271A

Rated voltage

DC24V

Rated time

30 sec

Exciting current

o 7.0 X 150L Fusible link assy A Corrugete tube (Black)

3A or more (at 20

18 o4 MAX )

Length of coupler harness (From outlet to coupler) L=215mm Vynil tube (Red)

Min operating voltage DC18V or less (at 20 ) Insulation resistance

1M or more Black

Blue Vynil tube (Red) Terminal C

M6 Terminal B

Electric diagram E (AVX 0.85mm2 Black) E (AVX 0.85mm2 Blue) Tape M6

24-108


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine R-3 Relay VHS286201420A Glow relay YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Specification

Hino P/No.

Description

S2862-01420A

Rated voltage

DC 24V

Rated load

100A flow DC 18V or less

Min. operating voltage

S terminal Name plate (Red)

F terminal

SW terminal

Electric diagram

R - 4,5,6,8,9,23,24,25, 26,28 Relay YN24S00010P1 Safety relay Horn realy Work light relay

Mating connector 090 II Non water-proof female 2P Hino P/No. 82580-7330A Yazaki P/No. 7383-1020-**

Tyco Electronics

Maker Maker's p/No.

L terminal

Connector 090 II Non water-proof male 2P blue Hino P/No. 82580-7320A Yazaki P/No. 7282-1020-90

V23074-A2002-A403 Micro relay A

Type Rated voltage Contact

DC 24V 1C

* Accessory of relay box

Travel alarm relay Cab working light relay Auto idle stop relay 1, 2 Engine emergency stop relay

Pin assignment

Lever lock relay Alternator relay

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Terminal arrangement

24-109


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine R - 29,30,31,32 Relay YN24S00012P2 Wiper motor relay Washer motor relay

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~

Specification

Maker's P/No.

Description

V23134-A0053-C643 Relay

Parts name

DV 24V

Rated voltage

1C

Contact * Accessory of relay box

Pin assignment

SE - 1 ~ 5, 7 ~ 11,20 Pressure sensor (Low pressure) LC52S00019P1 Bucket dig and dump, Boom up and down, Swing, Arm in and out, Travel RH and LH and other

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ SE - 13 Speed sensor VHS894101290A

Output voltage

2.8V or more

Clearance

1.0mm

E/G speed sensor YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~ M16 x 1

Hex. : 17 Hex. : 22 Tightening torque : 47N.m (34.7 lbf.ft)

24-110

Sumitomo : 090-II (4P : B) P/No. : 6188-0265 Hino. P/No. Sensor side : 82580-6120A (B) Harness side : 82580-6130A (B)


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine SE - 15 Fuel sending unit YN52S00045F1 Fuel level YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Specification

Description

Float operation Resistance

Float

+0.1

10 -0.6

FULL 3/4

(19)

1/2

32+5

1/4

(49.5)

EMPTY

85 +10 0

Machine side controller

Float

VIEW A

Electric diagram

SE - 16 Potentio meter YN52S00032P1 Accel dial YT02 - 04001 ~ YT03 - 05293 ~ YT04 - 07001 ~ YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~ SE - 22, 23 Pressure sensor (High pressure) YN52S00048P1 P1 pump P2 pump YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Total resistance value Effective electric angle

Number of notches Source voltage Notch part Potentio Bracket

3MA JM II + AMP HOUSING : 174359-2 TERMINAL : 171661-1

Dial

Pressure range

0~50MPa (7250 psi)

Max. allowable press.

120MPa (17400 psi)

Operating source voltage

5+0.5V DC

Electric diagram

(Arrangement)

100M or more/DC50V megger Insulation resistance (Between casing and terminal)

P3/8 Tightening torque O ring P14 : 73.5 N.m JIS B2401 (54.2 lbf.ft)

24-111

Source (+) Output (+) Common (+)

Econo seal J series (Mark II (+) 3 pole


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine

Specification

Description

PSV - A, B, C, D Proportional solenoid valve Hydraulic solenoid valve Hydraulic symbol A5 to A8

(YN35V00047F1) YN35V00048F1 YN35V00049F1 YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

PSV - P1, P2 Solenoid YN35V00052F1 Pump P1, P2 proportional valve YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

SV - 1, 2, 3, 4 Solenoid directional valve (8 spool) assy Hydraulic symbol A1 to A4 (YN35V00047F1) YN35V00050F1 YN35V00051F1

Type Max. feed press Rated feed press Allowable back press Control pressure range

Rated voltage

Solenoid directional pressure

O-ring 1B P20

Lever lock

Swing parking

Travel 1,2 speed

KDRDE-5K 13.7MPa (1987 psi) Spring 5.0MPa (725 psi) Orifice Spool 1MPa (145 psi) 0~2.7MPa (392 psi) DC 24V

Sleeve

Rated pressure

Attachment boost

P2 unload

Travel straight

P1 unload

Arm 2 speed

HYDRAULIC SYMBOL

AMP MARK II HOUSING : 174354-2 TERMINAL : 173706-1 HEX 10 T=7.4N.m (5.5lbf.ft)

Solenoid

5.0 MPa (725 psi) Rated voltage DC 24V

Solenoid proportional Dither current 100Hz,200mA P-P valve Coil resistance 17.5 (at 20C) AMP MARK II HOUSING 174354-2 Connector specification TERMINAL 173706-1

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

24-112

P1, P2, T, A1, A8 port PF3/8 A2~A7 port PF1/4 AMP MARK II

Seal nut


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine

Specification

Description

SW - 1 Switch YN50S00026F1 Starter switch

Auto return Connection Terminal Position

Auto return

YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

SW - 4 Switch YN50S00047P1 Swing parking brake release YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~

VIEW A

Type

ST110D

Rated

DC30V, 10A

Terminal arrangement

Insulation tape R B W

Insulation resistance Vinyl tube

T No. Contact construction : Position Swing parking release

Red (2)

YAZAKI 7122-2237 7114-2020

Normal White (3)

Blue (1)

SW - 5, 10, 20, 21 Switch YN03M01861F1 (Right grip) YN03M01862F1 (Left grip) Horn, ATT Power boost YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~ SW - 7 Switch VHS835301471D E/G oil pressure switch YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Type Working pressure Rating Insulation resistance

Normal close 39.2~58.8kPa (5.7~8.5psi) DC 24V/12W More than 100M / DC500V megger

24-113

090 II Water proof connector Color : Black Hino P/No. : 82580-6830 Yazaki P/No. : 7383-1114


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine

Specification

Description

SW - 8 Switch YR11P00008S005 Air cleaner Clogging switch YT02 - 04001 ~ YT03 - 05293 ~ YT04 - 07001 ~ YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~ SW - 11 Switch YN50S00041F1 Lock lever YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

SW - 13 Switch YN50S00040DF Travel alarm (Middle east) YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

SW - 15 Switch YN50S00040DD Conflux / single flow switching (OPT) YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Rated voltage

DC 24V

Single pole single throw Type (alternate) More than 1M / Insulation resistance DC500V megger

UP

Terminal connector Connector Position

Rated voltage

DC 24V

Single pole single throw Type (alternate) More than 1M / Insulation resistance DC500V megger Terminal connector Connector Position

24-114

UP


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine SW - 17 Switch YN50S00040D9 Roof window wiper switch (OPT) YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Specification

Rated voltage

Description

DC 24V

Single pole single throw Type (alternate) More than 1M / Insulation resistance DC500V megger

UP

Terminal connector Connector Position

SW - 19 Switch YT50S00004P1 Wiper inter lock YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

SW - 26 Switch YN50S00040D4 Cab work light switch YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

SW - 27 Switch VHS834601510A

Rated voltage

DC 24V

Single pole single throw Type (alternate) More than 1M / Insulation resistance DC500V megger

UP

Terminal connector Connector Position

Purpose Working temperature

Coolant level detection -40

~130 Hino P/No. : 82580-71708 Sumitomo P/No. : 6188-0110

Coolant level switch YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Electrode side CONNECTOR Housing side (To ground)

M18, P=1.5

24-115

Mating connector Hino P/No. : 82580-71808 Sumitomo P/No. : 6189-0189


24. COMPONENTS SYSTEM File No. Name of part Part No. Use Applicable Machine

Specification

Description

SW - 28 Switch VHS233002800A Fuel filter YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

Fuel inlet

Fuel outlet

Deposit container

Drain Water proof connector Yazaki 7383-7028-40

SW - 55 Switch YN50S00040D1 Boom work light switch YN11 - 45001 ~ YQ11 - 06001 ~ LC10 - 07001 ~ YC10 - 03501 ~

24-116


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS 25.1 BASIC SYSTEM OF AIR CONDITIONER (HVAC AIR CONDITIONER).........................25-3 25.1.1

AIR CYCLE.............................................................................................................25-3

25.1.2

AUTO AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM OUTLINE ....................................................25-4

25.2 COMPONENT AND CONSTRUCTION ...........................................................................25-5 25.2.1

COMPONENT ........................................................................................................25-5

25.2.2

CONSTRUCTION ...................................................................................................25-6

25.3 PIPING.............................................................................................................................25-9 25.3.1

AIR CONDITIONER................................................................................................25-9

25.3.2

AIR DRYER ASSY..................................................................................................25-11

25.4 FUNCTION ......................................................................................................................25-12 25.4.1

MECHANISM OF COOLING CIRCUIT...................................................................25-12

25.4.2

COOLING CIRCUIT................................................................................................25-14

25.4.3

COMPONENT PARTS ...........................................................................................25-15

25.5 DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY...................................................................................25-19 25.5.1

PRECAUTIONS TO BE EXERCISED IN OPERATION .........................................25-19

25.5.2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF UNIT ..........................................................25-20

25.6 CHARGING REFRIGERANT...........................................................................................25-24 25.6.1

PRECAUTIONS TO BE EXERCISED IN OPERATION .........................................25-24

25.6.2

OPERATING PROCEDURE...................................................................................25-25

25.6.3

CHARGING PROCEDURE ....................................................................................25-26

25.7 ELECTRIC CIRCUIT........................................................................................................25-32 25.7.1

WIRING DIAGRAM AND CONNECTORS .............................................................25-32

25.7.2

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION OF EACH FUNCTIONAL PARTS AND THE INSPECTION ...25-34

25.8 TROUBLESHOOTING.....................................................................................................25-37 25.9 SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ON DISPLAY OF PANEL ..............................................25-44 25.9.1

POSITION OF INDICATION FOR FAILURE. .........................................................25-44

25.9.2

EXPLANATION OF INDICATION FOR FAILURE. .................................................25-44

25.9.3

EXPLANATION OF MONITOR MODE ...................................................................25-46

Book Code No. S5YN2518E02 25-1

25


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

August, 2006

Revision

February, 2007

n

March, 2007

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

July, 2007

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

n

n

n

n

SK200–8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC–8 : YQ11-06001~ n

25-2

Remarks S5YN2518E01 (ASIA, OCE)

K

S5YN2518E02 (ASIA, OCE)

K

n (NHK Russia) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K K K


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25.1

BASIC SYSTEM OF AIR CONDITIONER (HVAC AIR CONDITIONER)

Air-conditioner is the unit which places evaporator and heater core parallel, and unifies a blower fan and an inside / outside air switching unit. And this unit changes hot air to cool air. 25.1.1

AIR CYCLE

Heater Inside air or outside air is taken in through intake port and the air is passing through filter and heat exchange is performed with hot air (heating) at the heater core of air-con unit, and then the heated air blows off from grille through duct.

Cooler Inside air or outside air is taken in through intake port and the air is passing through filter and heat exchange is performed with cold air (dehumidifying and cooling) at the evaporator of air-con unit, and then the cooled air blows off from grille through duct.

Heater system The heater recycles (circulates) the cooling water in the engine, and the hot water delivered by the engine flows in the heater core of air-con unit and then heat exchange is performed. The intake air is heated and the heated air blows off from the grille provided on the inside of cab. The blow off air temperature is controlled by the temperature control switch on the control panel, and the operation is controlled by air mixing damper on the air-con unit.

25-3


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.1.2

AUTO AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM OUTLINE AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL PANEL COMPRESSOR

COMPRESSOR DRIVE SOURCE

SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH

AIR MIXED DAMPER SIGNAL AIR-CON AIR OUTLET SWITCHING SIGNAL

BLOWER REVOLUTION SIGNAL

CONTROLLER INNER AIR SENSOR

EVAPORATION SENSOR

INNER AIR AND OUTER AIR SWITCHING SIGNAL

MOTOR ACTUATOR

VENT

OUTER AIR INTAKE INNER AIR

MOTOR ACTUATOR

AIR CONDITIONER UNIT

FACE

FOOT

MOTOR BLOWER ACTUATOR CONTROLLER

25-4


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25.2

COMPONENT AND CONSTRUCTION

25.2.1

COMPONENT 27

30

33

27-1 40

32 39 27-3

27-4

27-2 35 35-6

35-7

35-1 35-5

35-2

35-8

34

35-9

35-10

Fig. 25-1 Air-conditioner group

A/C ASSY No.

YN20M00104F1 Q’ty

No.

1

33

Pulley

1

35–7 L hose

1

27–1 Air-conditioner unit

1

34

Condenser

1

35–8 L hose : Ø 15.5

1

27–2 Hose

2

35

Air dryer assy

1

35–9 S tube : Ø 16

1

27–3 Clamp

2

35–1 Receiver dryer

1

35–10 L tube : Ø 8.5

1

27–4 Filter

1

35–2 Bracket

1

39

Filter

1

40

Solar radiation sensor

1

27

Parts

(12)

Air-conditioner assy

Parts

Q’ty

30

Panel assy

1

35–5 S hose : Ø 24.5

1

32

Compressor

1

35–6 D hose

1

25-5

No.

Parts

Q’ty


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.2.2

CONSTRUCTION

(1) Air conditioner unit 49 47

48 46

42

44

41

50

1

3

45

1

31

31

1

A

43

32

1 39

37

38 36

40

B

2

33

Fig. 25-2 Air conditioner unit (1/2)

25-6


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

14 6

1

1

1

16

31 5

15 1

31 3

1

62

1

1

D

E

4 7

28

A

1 1

1

27

1 20

26

C

13 60

11

29 23 22 24

21 24 51

9

83 54 63 78

82 79

C

23

84

1

E

17

31

18

D 10 12

31

B 19 1

25

3 77

Fig. 25-3 Air conditioner unit (2/2)

25-7

61


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM No.

Parts

Q’ty

No.

Parts

Q’ty

No.

Parts

Q’ty

1

Screw M5u16

23

21

Expansion valve

1

44

MA mode lever

1

2

Main harness

1

22

O-ring

1

45

Foot lever

1

3

MA air mix

3

23

O-ring

1

46

Face lever cam

1

4

Blower controller

1

24

Screw M5u40

2

47

Vent lever cam

1

5

Upper casing

1

25

Thermistor

1

48

Face rod

1

6

Air mix door

1

26

Thermistor holder

1

49

Vent rod

1

7

Air mix lever

1

27

Heater core

1

50

Foot rod

1

8

Lower casing

1

28

Pipe holder

1

51

Plate

1

9

Air mix door sub

1

29

Thermistor

1

54

Screw

1

10

Air mix lever sub

1

31

Screw M4u30

9

60

Casing packing A

1

11

Blower

1

32

Upper casing

1

61

Casing packing B

1

12

Lever MA air mix

1

33

Lower casing

1

63

O-ring

1

13

Intake door

1

36

Foot door

1

77

Packing

1

14

MA intake lever

1

37

Vent door

1

78

Tube

1

15

Intake lever

1

38

Face door

1

79

Tube

1

16

Intake rod

1

39

KK box upper packing

1

82

Tube

1

17

Air mix rod

1

40

KK-box lower packing

1

83

Bracket

1

18

Air mix rod sub

1

41

Vent lever

1

84

Lower casing

1

19

Relay

2

42

Face lever

1

20

Evaporator

1

43

Foot joint lever

1

(2) Receiver dryer

REFRIGERANT INLET

2 REFRIGERANT OUTLET

1

2-M6

No

NAME

Q'TY

1

1

3

PRESSURE SWITCH

2

SIGHT GLASS

1

4

3

DESICCANT

1

4

SUCTION PIPE

1

5

FILTER

1

6

RECEIVER TANK

1

5

6

Fig. 25-4 Receiver dryer

25-8


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25.3

PIPING

25.3.1

AIR CONDITIONER 30 40

27

NOTE 1. Apply oil for refrigerant R134a to the O-rings of all air-conditioner hose fittings. 2. Refrigerant volume : 900 50g 3. T : Tightening torque N.m(lbf.ft)

8

8

8

58 25 6 24

8

6 24

8

5 1

A 12

55

2 6 24

13

INITIAL BELT TENSION When the belt is pushed by the force of 28N, adjust the deflection of L part to be 6mm.

54 39

JAM NUT FOR TENSION PULLEY T=46.1(33)

25

4 18 20

8 51

22 25

5

10 11 16

2 3 6

21

L

59 25

A

25 49

9 10

33 25

23

9 10

32

15

35

52 53

7

13

1

50 5 25

25

8

25

17

25

3 6

12

56 57

14 23 34

56 57

Fig. 25-5

25-9


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Air conditioner Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

YN20M00104F1 No.

Parts

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

1

Hose : L = 3550

1

24 Clip

3

2

Hose : L = 2950

1

25 Clip

15

3

Bracket

2

27 Air conditioner assy

1

4

V-belt

1

30 Panel

1

5

Clip

4

32 Compressor assy

1

6

Sems bolt : M10u25

5

33 Pulley assy

1

7

Sems bolt : M6u20

2

34 Condenser

1

8

Sems bolt : M8u20

9

35 Air dryer assy

1

9

Capscrew : M8u100

4

39 Filter

1

10 Washer

6

40 Solar radiation sensor

1

11 Capscrew : M8u25

2

49 Clip

1

12 Tube for heater : L = 2400

1

50 Connector

1

13 Tube for heater : L = 1500

1

51 Bracket

1

14 Tube for D hose : L = 2350

1

52 Clip

1

15 Tube for S hose : L = 2050

1

53 Sems bolt : M10u20

1

16 Bracket

1

54 Grommet

1

17 Tube for L hose : L = 1800

1

55 Grommet

1

18 hose : L = 90

1

56 Capscrew : M6u50

4

20 Clip

2

57 Washer

4

21 Bracket

1

58 Tube for L hose

1

46.1 (34.0)

22 Sems bolt : M10u40

2

59 Clip

1

23.5 (17.3)

23 Sems bolt : M8u25

4

3.92~4.9 (2.9~3.6)

23.5 (17.3)

UNIT CONNECTION TUBE ASSY UNIT CONNECTION BOLT

4.4 (3.2)

COMPRESSOR CONNECTION BOLT

S TUBE (9)

27 AIR CONDITIONER ASSY

D HOSE (6)

S D

32 COMPRESSOR ASSY RECEIVER CONNECTION BOLT

S HOSE (5) L TUBE (10)

L HOSE (8)

L HOSE (7)

35 RECEIVER DRYER Note : Numbers in ( ) shows the number in Fig. 25-6.

25-10

34 CONDENSER

RECEIVER DRYER MOUNTING BRACKET


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.3.2

AIR DRYER ASSY

Fig. 25-6

Air dryer assy Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

YN96V00024F1 No.

Parts

(02)

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

1

Receiver dryer

1

6

D hose

1

2

Bracket

1

7

L hose

1

3

Capscrew

2

8

L hose

1

4

Capscrew

2

9

S tube

1

5

S hose

1

10 L tube

1

25-11


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25.4

FUNCTION

25.4.1

MECHANISM OF COOLING CIRCUIT

(2) Mechanism of Cooling In the cooling process, the refrigerant that flows through the cooling circuit changes its phases from liquid to gas and vice versa during which process heat is transferred from the low temperature part (compartment) to the high temperature part (outside of the vehicle). 1) Kind of Refrigerant Many kinds of refrigerants that change in that way are available, but the following requirements are needed for use in such applications: •

Latent heat of vaporization (heat of vaporization) is large.

It is easy to liquefy (condense). (It dose not require very high pressure for condensation.)

It is easy to gasify (evaporate). (It evaporates sufficiently at not too low pressure, i.e. cools down an object.)

It has small specific heat. (Since the refrigerant itself is cooled by the expansion valve, the loss resulting from it must be held down to a minimum.)

It has a high critical temperature and a low solidification point.

It is stable chemically and does not corrode and permeate into the circuit parts.

It is free from toxicity, objectionable odor, flammability and explosiveness and excels in thermal conductivity and electric insulation.

It has small specific volume.

It is easy to find out leakage. Out of refrigerants meeting the abovementioned requirements, ones having characteristics that suit the intended cooling unit are chosen and used. If a refrigerant other that those designated is used, sufficient refrigeration will not be performed or the equipment in which the refrigerant is used may be broken. Therefore, always use a designated refrigerant for the cooling unit. Table shows the principal characteristics of the R134a refrigerant that is used in this machine.

25-12

Item

HFC-134a (R134a)

CH2FCF3 Chemical formula 102.03 Molecular weight -26.19 (-15.14 ) Boiling point 101.14 (214.05 ) Critical temperature 4.065 MPa (41.45kgf/cm2 1) Critical pressure 511 kg/m3 (31.9lb/ft3) Critical density Density of saturated 1206 kg/m3 (75.3lb/ft3) liquid[25 (77.0 )] Specific volume of saturated 0.0310 m3/kg (0.496ft3/lb) vapor [25 (77.0 )] Latent heat of 197.5 KJ/kg {47.19kcal/kg} vaporization [0 (32 )] Flammability Nonflammable Ozone destruction 0 coefficient 1 : 1MPa (mega pascal) equals 10.1972kgf/cm2 (145psi)


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (3) Characteristics of Refrigerant (Fig. 25-7) In general, the fluid (general term of gas and liquid) has the following qualities: 1) As a gas under certain pressure is cooled down, it begins to condensate at a certain temperature to take a liquid state. The temperature at which condensation begins is unique to each substance (fluid) at a given pressure. The temperature determined by a given pressure is called saturation temperature.

PRESSURE MPa(psi)

R134a

4(580) 3(435)

LIQUID

2(290)

GAS

1(145) 0.5(75)

2) Inversely to 1) above, the pressure at which a gas condenses for a temperature is determined. This pressure is called saturation pressure. Fig. 25-7 illustrates the relationships between the saturation temperature and the saturation pressure in the case of refrigerant R134a used in the air-conditioner. At the temperature and the pressure on the lower righthand side of the curve in Fig. 25-7 the refrigerant take a gaseous state, while at the temperature and the pressure on the upper lefthand side of the curve, the refrigerant takes a liquid state. Let us think of a case where an air-conditioner is operated in the midst of summer. As the refrigerant evaporates, it absorbs evaporation heat from the air of the compartment. In order to cool the inside of the compartment down to 25째C (77째F), the refrigerant must transform (evaporate) from a liquid to a gaseous state at a lower temperature. It can be seen from Fig. 25-7 that R134a under a pressure above the atmospheric pressure is capable of cooling the inside of the compartment sufficiently. (If a refrigerant that requires a pressure below the atmospheric pressure to cool it to a required temperature is used, air is mixed into the circuits, thereby deteriorating the performance of the cooling unit.) In the process in which gaseous refrigerant is brought back to a liquid state, the refrigerant is cooled and condensed by the outer air exceeding 35째C (95째F). Accordingly the refrigerant is capable of condensing at a pressure exceeding 1 MPa (145psi), as seen from Fig. 25-7.

25-13

0

0 (32)

15 18 35 50 (59)(64) (95) (122)

TEMPERATURE [ ( )] 100 (212.0)

Fig. 25-7 Pressure-temperature characteristics of R134a


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.4.2

COOLING CIRCUIT

Fig. 25-8 illustrates the cooling circuit of the car airconditioner. In this circuit diagram, the portion that cools the air of the compartment is the evaporator. The object air is cooled off by utilizing the fact that the refrigerant takes heat off the surrounding area as evaporation heat as it evaporates in the cooling circuit. Since the part at which vaporization of the refrigerant takes place is the evaporator, cooled air is constantly delivered to the circumference of the evaporator by the blower fan. In the meantime, liquid refrigerant (slightly wet vaporized refrigerant) is fed into the evaporator, when "cooling" effect is attained. For instance, in order to cool the air to 15째C (59째F), the refrigerant can not absorb evaporation heat from the air unless it evaporates at a temperature lower that 15째C (59째F). For that purpose, it can be seen from Fig. 25-7 that the pressure of the refrigerant in the evaporator must be less than 0.51 MPa (74psi). Furthermore, the cooling effect deteriorates unless the feed rate of the refrigerant is controlled so that all of the refrigerant supplied to the evaporator vaporizes and turns into dry vapor. Consequently, the cooling circuit is so constructed that the evaporator can cool down an object (air in this case) sufficiently (i.e. so as to decrease the pressure in the evaporator) and that an adequate amount of refrigerant can be fed to the evaporator. The feed rate of the refrigerant is controlled by the expansion valve, but the pressure in the evaporator is held low by the throttling action of the expansion valve and the suction action of the compressor. The compressor acts as a pump that allows the refrigerant to circulate. The compressive action of the compressor and the heat exchange (heat radiation) action of the condenser transform the refrigerant in a dry vapor state back to a liquid state.

25-14

INSIDE OF COMPARTMENT(CAB)

EVAPORATOR

BLOWER

S

EXPANSION VALVE

INSIDE OF ENGINE D ROOM

COMPRESSOR

COOLING FAN

RECEIVER DRYER CONDENSER

Fig. 25-8 Construction of cooling circuit


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.4.3

COMPONENT PARTS

(1) Evaporator (See Fig. 25-9.) The evaporator is an important heat exchanger that absorbs the heat of the compartment air (object) by the utilization of the latent vaporization heat of the low-temperature, low-pressure liquid-state refrigerant. Therefore, it is necessary that satisfactory heat transfer between the object and the refrigerant take place in the evaporator. To that end, the evaporator is equipped with fins on the air side in order to increase the heat transfer area of the air side and thereby perform excellent thermal transfer between the refrigerant and the air. The humidity in the air condenses as the air cools down and adheres to the outside of the evaporator as water drops. The cooling effect deteriorates if the water drops freeze. Therefore, how to discharge water is an important point. The amount of refrigerant supplied to the evaporator is controlled by the expansion valve which is described in the following. In order to attain proper control, it is necessary to reduce the pressure drop of the refrigerant of the evaporator. Accordingly, reducing the pressure drop is one element that makes the evaporator attain its full performances. (2) Expansion Valve In order for the evaporator to fulfill its performances, a proper amount of low-pressure low-temperature liquid refrigerant must be fed to the evaporator. If the feed rate is too low, the refrigerant completes vaporization early in the evaporator which results in deterioration of the cooling effect. If the feed rate is too high, unvaporized liquid refrigerant returns to the compressor (liquid back). This not only deteriorates the cooling effect, but also damages the compressor valves. The expansion valve feeds the flowing highpressure high-temperature liquid refrigerant to the evaporator as low-pressure low-temperature liquid refrigerant (damp vapor of low dryness). The expansion valve controls the feed rate of the refrigerant at the same time.

25-15

EVAPORATOR

O-RING

EXPANSION VALVE

SOCKET BOLT M5X40(2 PCS.)

Fig. 25-9


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM Fig. 25-10 shows how the block type expansion valve is constructed. The temperature sensing part is provided in the shaft of the expansion valve to directly detect the refrigerant temperature at the outlet of the evaporator. The diaphragm contains R134a in saturated state. The pressure in the diaphragm changes according to the temperature detected by the sensor. The change in the pressure causes the force acting upon the diaphragm to vary accordingly. The high-pressure high-temperature liquid refrigerant that is fed from the receiver side reduces the pressure abruptly as it passes through the valve (throttling action). On that occasion, part of the refrigerant evaporates by the very heat of the refrigerant and cooled off. The result is that low-pressure low-temperature damp refrigerant vapor is fed to the evaporator. The opening of the valve is determined by the equilibrium between the pressure (low) of the evaporator side, the action of the adjust spring and the pressing force of the diaphragm (the temperature of the refrigerant at the outlet of the evaporator to be sensed by the thermowell). The feed rate is controlled automatically so that under the pressure in the evaporator, the refrigerant is properly overheated (3~8 degrees C) and goes out of the evaporator. This action is carried out by sensing the refrigerant temperature at the outlet of the evaporator as against the inlet pressure of the evaporator and consequently controlling the feed rate of the refrigerant. This means that if the refrigerant pressure drop in the evaporator is excessive, it is difficult to control the overheating or the feed rate of the refrigerant. For this reason, the smaller the pressure drop of the evaporator, the better. The expansion valve senses the pressure and the temperature at the outlet of the evaporator and controls the overheating of the refrigerant and the refrigerant supply to the evaporator more securely. The air-conditioner of this machine adopts a block type expansion valve.

25-16

DIAPHRAGM

EVAPORATOR SIDE

REFRIGERANT OUTLET SHAFT

REFRIGERANT INLET BALL VALVE SPRING

Fig. 25-10 Block type expansion valve

Fig. 25-11 Expansion valve outside view


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (3) Compressor (See Fig. 25-12.)

D HOSE

The compressor performs the following three functions in the cooling circuit: 1) Suction action

S HOSE

2) Pumping action 3) Compressive action 1) The suction action, as combined with the throttling action, works to decrease the refrigerant pressure in the evaporator. This permits the refrigerant to vaporize at low temperature in order to perform cooling effect. 2) The pumping action serves to cause all the refrigerant to circulate in the cooling circuit. This enables enables continuous cooling. 3) The compressive action, as combined with the action of the condenser which is mentioned hereunder, transforms vaporized refrigerant back to a liquid state again. The saturation temperature gets higher as the pressure increases. For instance, it becomes possible to cool down the refrigerant by the use of an outer air of 35°C (95°F) and liquefy it. The compressive action of the compressor works to turn low pressure vaporized refrigerant to high pressure vapor refrigerant. The condenser then serves to cool down the refrigerant. However, since the compressive action takes place only for a short period, the refrigerant hardly exchanges heat with outer air. That is to say, it takes a near form of thermally insulated compression, so that the refrigerant discharged by the compressor turns into high-temperature high-pressure vapor and is delivered to the condenser.

Fig. 25-12

(4) Condenser ( See Fig. 25-13.) This is a heat exchanger that cools the vaporized refrigerant at high temperature and high pressure by the use of outer air and condenses the refrigerant. The direction in which heat moves is from the refrigerant to air, the opposite to the case of the evaporator. Fins are equipped on the outer air side to improve thermal transfer. If the refrigerant is not cooled well by the condenser, the air in the compartment can not be cooled sufficiently by the evaporator. For that purpose, it is necessary to secure ventilation required for the cooling of the refrigerant.

Fig. 25-13 Condenser

25-17


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (5) Receiver dryer ( See Fig. 25-14.) 1) Receiver Tank On the air-conditioner, the revolution of the compressor varies greatly which causes the proper flow of refrigerant in the cooling circuit to vary. It is the receiver tank that receives the variations. When the cooling circuit does not need much refrigerant, the receiver tank stores extra refrigerant temporarily and supplies it when the cooling circuit needs much refrigerant. The receiver tank also stores an extra amount of refrigerant to be used for filling balance and supplement small amounts of leakage of the refrigerant through penetration into rubber hoses.

SIGHT GLASS

REFRIGERANT INLET

REFRIGERANT OUTLET

PRESSURE SWITCH

2) Dryer If water is mixed in the cooling circuit, it deteriorates the compressor valves and oil, corrodes the metallic parts of the circuit or clogs the circuit as the water freezes in the expansion valve. It is desirable that the amount of water mixed in the refrigerant should be held below a concentration of 30ppm. The air-conditioner uses a molecular sieve as desiccant suited for the circuit, in order to absorb water content that intrudes into the circuit when the dryer is installed or when refrigerant is charged.

DESICCANT SUCTION PIPE

FILTER

3) Sight Glass This is a inspection window with which the refrigerant level in the circuit is determined, the only means of confirming the inside of the circuit visually.

RECEIVER TANK

4) Filter 5) Pressure Switch This machine employs pressure switches of high/low pressure type. The pressure switch protects the circuit by cutting off the power supply to the compressor when high pressure increases abnormally high [more than 3.14MPa (460psi) ]. The pressure switch also detects the leakage of refrigerant by cutting the power supply to the compressor when the pressure of the circuit falls below 0.2MPa (28psi).

25-18

Fig. 25-14


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25.5

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

25.5.1

PRECAUTIONS TO BE EXERCISED IN OPERATION

(1) Special Refrigerator Oil This air-conditioner uses special refrigerator oil SP20 for use with new refrigerant R134a. Oils other than SP20 may not be used. Since SP20 tends to absorb moisture and may corrode paint and resin, the following points must be noted: 1) Do not keep open all pipe connections on a new compressor and the component parts of the installed refrigeration circuit (Remove valves and caps at the pipe openings of the compressor, just before connecting pipes. If you have removed a pipe joint for repair, put a cap to both ports immediately.) 2) Use care so SP20 does not adhere to the painted surface and resin parts. In case SP20 has adhered to such surfaces, wipe it off immediately.

Unit : N.m (lbf.ft) PIPE FASTENING PART

TIGHTENING TORQUE

D hose and compressor (M8 bolt)

19.6~24.5 (14~18)

D hose and condenser

19.6~24.5 (14~18)

L hose and condenser

11.8~14.7 (8.7~11)

L hose and receiver dryer (M6 bolt) 7.8~11.8 (5.8~8.7) L hose and air-conditioner unit

11.8~14.7 (8.7~11)

S hose and air-conditioner unit

29.4~34.3 (22~25)

Expansion valve

1.96~2.45 (1.4~1.8) Unit : N.m (lbf.ft)

(2) The receiver dryer is filled with desiccant to absorb moisture in the circuit. Therefore, remove the valve at the pipe port immediately before connecting pipes. (3) Tightening Torque 1) Pipe Joints When connecting pipe joints, coat the O-ring with special oil (SP20) and fasten to the tightening torque indicated in the table, using a double spanner. 2) Screws and Bolts Fasten to the tightening torque indicated in the table

SCREW SIZE

TIGHTENING TORQUE

N4,T4 machine screw, M4

0.78~1.18 (0.58~0.87)

N5,T5 machine screw, M5

1.96~2.45 (1.4~1.8)

M6 (mounting part of L hose joint) 7.85~11.8 (5.8~8.7) M6 (except mounting part of L hose joint)

9.8~11.8 (7.2~8.7)

M8 (mounting part of S,D hose joints)

19.6~24.5 (14~18)

M8 (mounting part of A/C unit)

9.8~11.8 (7.2~8.7)

M8 (other than those mentioned above) 11.8~15.7 (8.7~12) M10

REPLACED PARTS

(4) Amount of Oil for Compressor The compressor SD7H (HD type) is filled with 135cc (8.2cu•in) of oil. If the oil volume is small, seizure at high revolution and shortening of service life will occur. If the oil volume is large, the cooling ability will be deteriorated. Once the air-conditioner is operated, part of the oil is dispersed in the refrigeration circuit. Therefore, when replacing the parts in right Table, adjust the oil level to that of table. (5) Before performing operation, stop the engine and turn off all power supplies to the equipment related to the air-conditioner. (6) After the operation is over, confirm that all faults have been repaired completely, by operating the air-conditioner.

25-19

39.2~53.9 (29~40)

AMOUNT TO BE FILLED IN

EVAPORATOR

40 cc (2.4cu.in)

CONDENSER

40 cc (2.4cu.in)

COMPRESSOR

Drain out the volume of oil left in the compressor to be replaced, from the new compressor.

RECEIVER DRYER

20 cc (1.2cu.in)

HOSES

20 cc (1.2cu.in)


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.5.2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF UNIT

(1) Removing inner air filter Slide the inner air filter leftward and remove it from the unit.

Fig. 25-15 (2) Removing selector box Remove 6 plus screws, remove connector connected to the mode actuator on mode selector box, and separate the mode selector box from the unit.

MODE ACTUATOR

PLUS SCREW

MAIN HARNESS

CONNECTOR SELECTOR BOX

(3) Removing main harness Pull out 3 harness clamps from the unit, and disconnect all connected connectors and remove harness on the body from the unit.

UNIT

Fig. 25-16

(4) Removing upper unit case

AIR MIX LEVER

PLUS SCREW

1) Remove air MIX rod and air MIX rod sub from air MIX lever. 2) Remove 12 plus screws which are used to install the upper and lower unit casings. Pull out the upper unit casing upward giving attention to the thermistor harness so as not to be caught by the casing.

UPPER UNIT CASING AIR MIX ROD SUB AIR MIX ROD SUB

LOWER UNIT CASING

Fig. 25-17

25-20


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (5) Replacing blower controller

UPPER UNIT CASING

1) Remove 2 plus screws and remove the blower controller from the upper unit casing. 2) Install new blower controller by the reverse procedure of removal. * Do not disassemble the blower controller.

PLUS SCREW

BLOWER CONTROLLER

Fig. 25-18 (6) Removing heater core

PIPE CLAMP

HEATER CORE

1) After draining the coolant, remove heater hose from the heater core.

PLUS SCREW EVAPORATOR ASSY

2) Remove 1 plus screw, and remove pipe clamp which is used to secure the heater core and then remove the heater core from the lower unit casing.

BLOWER MOTOR

3) Install it by the reverse procedure of removal. (7) Replacing blower motor 1) Disconnect connector which is connected to the blower motor and remove the blower motor from the lower unit casing. * Do not remove the fan from the blower motor. LOWER UNIT CASING

2) Install it by the reverse procedure of removal.

Fig. 25-19 (8) Replacing evaporator and expansion valve 1) Take the evaporator with expansion valve off from the lower casing.

EVAPORATOR

2) Remove evaporator sensor with sensor holder from the removed evaporator.

SENSOR HOLDER

3) Insert the sensor holder into the new evaporator at the position shown in Fig. 25-20 and install the evaporator sensor again.

105mm (4.1 inch)

11TH ROWS OF FIN

EVAPORATION SENSOR

Fig. 25-20

25-21


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 4) Remove 2 socket bolts M5u40 with Allen wrench (4mm) and remove the expansion valve from the evaporator.

EVAPORATOR

5) Fit O-ring (NF O-ring 5/8 and 1/2 one each) to new evaporator.

A

* When assembling again, fit O-ring paying attention so as not to be caught with others. (Socket bolt M5u40 (2 pcs.) Tightening torque : 6.9N•m (5.1lbf•ft)

O-RING

* Do not apply undue force to pipe of evaporator outlet. This undue stress causes the leak of refrigerant from "A" part of evaporator. Moreover, when tube (78), (79) (see Fig. 25-3) connected with expansion valve is disconnected from expansion valve, similar careful work is necessary.

EXPANSION VALVE

SOCKET BOLT M5X40(2 PCS.)

Fig. 25-21

(9) Replacing motor actuator

VENT ROD

1) Replacing mode actuator

FACE ROD

a) Remove connector connected to the motor actuator.

MA MODE LEVER PLUS SCREW 3PCS.

b) Remove FACE rod and VENT rod which is used to connect MA mode lever and mode cam from the holder.

CONNECTOR MODE ACTUATOR

c) Remove 3 plus screws and remove the motor actuator with lever MA mode from the unit. d) Remove the lever MA mode from the removed motor actuator, and install it on new motor actuator by the reverse procedure of removal. 2) Replacing air mixing actuator

Fig. 25-22

AIR MIX ROD

a) Remove connector connected to the motor actuator.

MA AIR MIX LEVER

b) Remove rod air MIX which is used to connect the motor actuator and the lever MA air MIX.

CONNECTOR

c) Remove 3 plus screws and remove the motor actuator with MA lever air MIX from the unit. d) Remove the MA lever air MIX from the removed motor actuator, and install it on new motor actuator by the reverse procedure of removal.

AIR MIX ACTUATOR

PLUS SCREW 3PCS.

Fig. 25-23

25-22


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 3) Replacing inner and outer air switching actuator a) Disconnect connector connected to the motor actuator. b) Remove intake rod from MA intake lever. c) Remove 3 plus screws and remove the motor actuator with MA intake lever from the unit. d) Remove the MA intake lever from the removed motor actuator, and install it on new motor actuator by the reverse procedure of removal.

Fig. 25-24

25-23


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25.6

CHARGING REFRIGERANT

25.6.1

PRECAUTIONS TO BE EXERCISED IN OPERATION

(1) Always assign a person in charge of handling refrigerant. Refrigerant charge operation involves dangers as it handles high pressure gas. Always assign a person familiar with how work is done for handling refrigerant.

Wear protective goggles. (You may lose your sight if the refrigerant gets in your eyes.)

The refrigerant in liquid state is at very low temperature [approx. -26°C (-15°F)]. Therefore, handle it with care. (You may get a frostbite if the refrigerant is sprayed over your skin.)

(2) Storage and Transportation 1) Keep the service can (hereinafter called can) less than 40°C (104°F). Since high pressure gas of R134a is filled in the can in a saturated liguefied state, the pressure in the can increases sharply as temperature rises. The can may blast as the result. It is for this reason why the can temperature must be kept below 40°C (104°F). 2) For storage, choose a cold dark place not exposed to direct sunlight. 3) If the can is placed near a fire source, it is subject to radiation heat and gets hot. This causes the inside pressure to rise and may cause the can to blow out. Do not bring the can close to a fire. 4) The inside of the closed compartment gets very hot as the radiation heat of the sunlight enters the compartment. The areas of the compartment which are exposed to direct sunlight may rise to a dangerous temperature level. Do not bring the can into the compartment. Also, the inside of the trunk room may rise to a dangerous temperature level even in the summer time. Use sufficient care, therefore, taking the above into account. 5) Note that if the can has scratches, dents and distortion, the strength of the can will deteriorate. 1. Do not drop or knock on the can. 2. When transporting, loading or unloading cans and packages containing cans, do not throw or drop them. 6) Store cans beyond the reach of children. (3) Charging 1) When warming the can in which refrigerant is charged, do not fail to open the service can valve and the low pressure valve of the gauge manifold and warm the can in warm water of 40°C (104°F or below (to an extent that you do not feel hot when you put your hand in the water.) If the can is put in hot water or heated by a direct fire, the pressure of the can may rise sharply, thereby blowing off the can. 2) When charging refrigerant while running the engine, do not open the high pressure valve (HI) of the gauge manifold in any case. (4) Others Reuse of service cans is prohibited by law; never use them again. Do not allow foreign matter to enter the airconditioner circuit. Air, water and dust are detrimental to the refrigeration cycle. Install the components of the airconditioner correctly and speedily. Pay full attention to the entry of water and dust.

Be careful about overcharge of gas.

Fasten pipes to a specified torque.

25-24


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.6.2

OPERATING PROCEDURE

(1) Refrigerant charge into the air-conditioner consists mainly of "vacuum making operation", and "gas charge operation". 1) The "vacuum making operation" consists of removing water in the air-conditioner circuit. If only a little water remains in the circuit, the small holes of the expansion valve are frozen during operation. This causes the circuit to clog up or rust, resulting in a variety of malfunctions. Therefore, before filling refrigerant in the circuit, make vacuum and allow the water in the circuit to boil and vaporize. Water in the circuit is thus eliminated. 2) The "gas charging operation" consists of filling refrigerant in the circuit after forming vacuum. Filling gas not only depends upon the cooling performances of the air-conditioner, but also affects the service life of the component parts of the circuit. Extreme overcharge will make the circuit pressure extremely high and causes the cooling performance to deteriorate. On the contrary, undercharge causes poor circulation of the lubricating oil of the compressor and causes seizure of the moving parts of the compressor. The gas filling operation involves handling of high pressure gas; filling gas according to incorrect operation procedure is dangerous. Fill refrigerant correctly following the operation procedures and cautions stated in this manual. (2) Operation Chart

Refrigerant filling operation

Vacuum making operation

More than 30 min. Begin vacuum making

Leave it as it is, for five minutes.

Stop vacuum making

Lower than -750mmHg

Fill in refrigerant

Check air-tightness

Gauge indicates abnormality

Check for gas leak

Fill in refrigerant

Charge refrigerant gas to a gauge pressure of 0.1MPa (14 psi)

Check and correct joints (3) Tools No.

1

Parts

Gauge manifold

Q’ty

Sketch

Service

No.

Parts

Q’ty

Sketch

Service

4 Quick joint

1

Low pressure side

5 T joint

1

For service can valve

2

For service can

1

For vacuum pump

1

Red : high pressure side

Charging 2 hose

3

Blue : low pressure side

6

Service can valve

Yellow : vacuum pump side

3 Quick joint

1

High pressure side

Vacuum 7 pump adapter

25-25


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.6.3

CHARGING PROCEDURE

25.6.3.1

VACUUM MAKING OPERATION

(1) Connecting gauge manifold (See Fig. 25-25) 1) Close the high pressure valve (HI) and the low pressure valve (LO) of the gauge manifold.

HIGH PRESSURE GAUGE GAUGE MANIFOLD HIGH PRESSURE VALVE(CLOSED) RED

LOW PRESSURE GAUGE

2) Connect the charging hoses (red and blue) with the service valves of the compressor. Red hose : High pressure side (HI) of the gauge manifoldohigh pressure side (DIS) of compressor

(CLOSED)LOW PRESSURE VALVE BLUE HIGH PRESSURE SIDE DIS

Blue hose : Low pressure side (LO) of gauge manifoldolow pressure side (SUC) of compressor

YELLOW LOW PRESSURE SIDE SUC COMPRESSOR VACUUM PUMP(STOP)

Fig. 25-25 •

Do not mistake the high pressure hose for the low pressure hose in any circumstances when connecting them. Put the hose in firmly till a clicking sound is heard. 3) Connect the center valve of the gauge manifold with the charging hose of the vacuum pump. Fig. 25-26 Connecting gauge manifold

Some kinds of gauge manifolds are not equipped with an open/close valve in the center.

25-26


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (2) Vacuum making (See Fig. 25-27)

(CLOSE) LOW PRESSURE VALVE(OPEN) HIGH PRESSURE VALVE(OPEN) More than (CLOSE) 30 min

1) Open the high pressure valve (HI) and the low pressure valve (LO) of the gauge manifold. 2) Turn on the switch of the vacuum pump and make vacuum for more than 30 minutes.

GAUGE MANIFOLD

3) When vacuum making for a specified duration is over (degree of vacuum : less than - 750 mmHg), close the high pressure valve and the low pressure valve of the gauge manifold. 4) Then turn off the vacuum pump. (3) Air-tightness Check Close the high pressure valve and the low pressure valve of the gauge manifold, leave it as it is for more than five minutes and make sure that the gauge indication does not return toward 0.

DIS

SUC

Fig. 25-27 Vacuum making operation

If the gauge indication swings toward 0, there is somewhere that is leaking. Retighten pipe joints, make vacuum again and make sure of no leakage.

25-27


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.6.3.2

GAS CHARGING OPERATION

(1) Charging from high pressure side (See Fig. 25-28.) 1) After making vacuum repeatedly, change the charging hose (yellow) of the gauge manifold from the vacuum pump to the service can. 2) Air purge Open the service can valve. (However, close the high and low pressure valves of the gauge manifold.) Then push the gas valve of the side service port on the low pressure side of the gauge manifold, using a screw driver, in order to let out the air in the charging hose by the pressure of the refrigerant. (See Fig. 25-28.) (The operation ends when a hissing sound is heard.)

AIR PURGE

CLOSE

SCREW DRIVER YELLOW BLUE

OPEN SERVICE CAN VALVE

RED

Fig. 25-28 Gas charging operation 3) Open the high pressure valve of the gauge manifold and charge in refrigerant. [Charge in gaseous refrigerant to a gauge pressure of 0.1MPa (14psi).] After charging, close the high pressure valve of the gauge manifold and the service and valve. (See Fig. 25-29.)

LOW PRESSURE VALVE(CLOSE) BLUE

HIGH PRESSURE VALVE (OPEN) (CLOSE) RED FILL IN 1~1.5 CANS OF REFRIGERANT

DIS

•

Do not run the compressor during this work, (Otherwise the refrigerant flow in reverse direction which causes the service can and the hoses to rupture. This is very dangerous.)

YELLOW

SUC

Fig. 25-29 Gas charging operation (High pressure side)

(2) Checking for gas leak Check for gas leak in the cycle, using a gas leak detector (electric type). Retighten and correct leaking points.

•

SERVICE CAN VALVE (OPEN) (CLOSE) CHARGE

Always use the leak tester for R134a. (Do not use one for flon gas service as it provides poor sensitivity.)

25-28


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (3) Charging from low pressure side (See Fig. 25-30) 1) Make sure that the high-pressure and lowpressure valves of the gauge manifold and the service can valve are closed.

LOW PRESSURE VALVE OPEN CLOSE

2) Start the engine and run the revolution to 1500±100rpm and fully close the cab door and the windows.

HIGH PRESSURE VALVE(CLOSE) RED (CLOSE SECURELY)

WHEN AIR BUBBLES IN THE SIGHT GLASS DISAPPEAR

3) Turn on the air-conditioner switch, set the fan switch to Max and the temperature control switch to cool Max.

DIS

YELLOW BLUE SERVICE CAN VALVE(OPEN)

4) When charging gas, set the discharge pressure of the compressor to 1.4~1.6 MPa (200~230psi).

SUC COMPRESSOR OPERATION

SERVICE CAN (DO NOT TURN IT OVER)

Fig. 25-30 Gas charging operation (Low pressure side) 5) Open the low pressure valve of the gauge manifold and the service can valve and fill in refrigerant till air bubbles of the sight glass of the receiver go away. (See Fig. 25-30) [Total amount of gas to be charged : 900g±50g (2.0±0.11 lbs)] 6) When refrigerant charge is over, close the low pressure valve of the gauge manifold and the service can valve.

• •

SIGHT GLASS

RECEIVER DRYER

Do not open the high pressure valve of the gauge manifold in any circumstances.

Fig. 25-31 Receiver dryer

Never place the service can upside down. (The compressor valve may be scored because the refrigerant is sucked in a liquid state.)

25-29


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (4) Criterion for checking the amount of refrigerant filled in JUDGMENT OF REFRIGERANT LEVEL THROUGH THE SIGHT GLASS OF RECEIVER DRYER PROPER LEVEL

After A/C is turned on, only a little bubbles are seen and thereafter light milky white is seen.

OVERCHARGE

After A/C is turned on, no air bubbles are seen.

UNDERCHARGE

After A/C is turned on, continuous air bubbles are seen.

•

If the air-conditioner is run with poor refrigerant R134a, it has adverse effect on the compressor.

•

If the refrigerant is charged too much (overcharged), the cooling performance is deteriorated. Moreover, the circuit pressure gets abnormally high : Always keep a proper level.

(5) Removing Gauge Manifold When the refrigerant level has been checked, disconnect the charging hoses from the compressor in the following manner : 1. Press the "L" shape metal fitting of the charging hose (blue) on the low pressure side against the service valve of the compressor so the refrigerant does not leak out and loosen the nut. As soon as the nut has been removed, disconnect the charging hose from the service valve. 2. Leave the high pressure side as it is till the high pressure gauge reading falls. [below 1MPa (140psi)]. 3. Disconnect the charge hose (red) on the high pressure side the same way as on the low pressure side.

25-30


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

This page is blank for editing convenience.

25-31


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25.7

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT

25.7.1

WIRING DIAGRAM AND CONNECTORS JAE : JAPAN AVIATION ELECTRONICS INDUSTRY, LTD. JAE HOUSING : IL-AG5-14D-S3C1 TERMINAL : IL-AG5-C1-5000

JAE HOUSING : IL-AG5-22D-S3C1 TERMINAL : IL-AG5-C1-5000

MAKER : YAZAKI CORP. HOUSING No. : 7122-6060 REAR HOLDER : 7157-6260-30 TERMINAL : 7114-2871

MAKER : YAZAKI CORP. HOUSING No. : 7123-6060-40 TERMINAL : 7116-2871

NIPPON AMP KK 170889-1 170003-5

MAKER : YAZAKI CORP. 7120-8019 CP3.96MA

PRESSURE SWITCH (RECEIVER DRYER)

MAKER : SUMITOMO HOUSING No. : 6189-0094 HARNESS SEAL : 7160-8234 TERMINAL : 1500-0110 FUSE 20A

MAKER : YAZAKI CORP. HOUSING No. : 7123-2249 TERMINAL : 17111

MAKER : YAZAKI CORP. HOUSING No. : 7123-6020 TERMINAL : 7116-2871

MAIN KEY SW

LIGHT SWITCH

FUSE 5A

FUSE 15A

POWER SUPPLY FOR NIGHT LIGHTING A/C MAIN POWER POWER SUPPLY FOR COMPRESSOR CLUTCH

FUSE 5A MAKER : YAZAKI CORP. HOUSING No. : 7123-2237 TERMINAL : 17111

JAE IL-AG5-7S-S3C1 TERMINAL : AG5-C1-5000

MAKER : YAZAKI CORP. HOUSING No. : 7123-2228 TERMINAL : 17111

FUSE BOX

MAKER : YAZAKI CORP. HOUSING No. : 7123-2228 TERMINAL : 17111 COMPRESSOR

NIPPON AMP KK 174056-2 TERMINAL : 175062-1

JAE IL-AG5-7S-S3C1 TERMINAL : AG5-C1-5000

JAE IL-AG5-7S-S3C1 TERMINAL : AG5-C1-5000

MAKER : YAZAKI CORP. HOUSING No. : 7123-2249 TERMINAL : 17111

NOTE) 1. THe double chain lines indicate the wiring on the excavator side. 2. The connector colors indicate the cord colors seen from the connecting part. P W B R Y

MACHINE SIDE WIRING (PARTS) G

L

Br Lg O

LIGHT PINK WHITE BLACK RED YELLOW GREEN BLUE BROWN GREEN ORANGE

Fig. 25-32 Electric diagram (1/2)

25-32


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

CCU (OPERATION PANEL + CONTROLLER)

EVA SENSOR

AIR INLET SENSOR

SUN SENSOR

MOTOR ACTUATER (FOR AIR MIX)

MOTOR ACTUATER (FOR MODE)

BLOWER OFF RELAY

BLOWER MOTOR

BLOWER AMP

MOTOR ACTUATER (REC/FRESH) COMPRESSOR RELAY

AIR CONDITIONER SIDE WIRING (PARTS)

IN THE CAB

Fig. 25-33 Electric diagram (2/2)

25-33


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.7.2

STRUCTURE AND OPERATION OF EACH FUNCTIONAL PARTS AND THE INSPECTION

(1) Control panel and control unit The control unit is integrated into control panel, and processes the signal input by each sensor, etc. and the signal input by each switch through control panel with the function of the built-in micro computer, and comprehensively controls each actuator (Inner and outer air flow select, air mix), fan motor and compressor on the output side. And the self-diagnosis performance is provided to facilitate the trouble shooting.

Fig. 25-34

(2) Blower controller (TKS-B215A1) The power transistor shifts the fan motor into variable speed with base current from the control unit. TERMINAL NO. 1 2 3

CONTINUITY CONTINUED

TESTER

NOT CONTINUED CONTINUED(DIODE PARALLEL AND FORWARD DIRECTION FLOW)

In normal operation 1. Disconnect the connector of blower amplifier. 2. Check continuity between terminals on the blower amplifier side. Fig. 25-35 * The installing position is provided on the left side of air-con unit.

25-34


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (3) Relay Four-electrode relay is used for the blower OFF relay and compressor relay. 1) Blower OFF relay The blower OFF relay turns on after receiving the signal from the control amplifier. When the blower OFF relay turns on, the source voltage is supplied to the blower motor and the blower motor starts running. 2) Compressor relay The relay ON—OFF is tripped by the control amplifier and electronic thermostat control.

Fig. 25-36

3) Relay inspecting items 1. Relay (24-4PE) 2. Coil resistance: 320 3. Specified voltage: DC20V~30V 4. Be careful about the coil side of relay because this relay has polarity. 5. Inspection: Inspect the continuity between 3 and 4 according to the conditions mentioned below. 20~30V applied between terminals 1-2: Continued 20~30V not applied between terminals 1-2: Not continued (4) Air mix actuator Air mix actuator is installed at the center of air-con unit, and opens and closes air mix damper through the link. The air mix actuator contains potentiometer which is switched by being coupled to the shaft of actuator. When the target air mix door position is determined through the temperature control switch, the control unit reads the level of potentiometer of the actuator, and determines the rotating direction of motor in either normal rotation or reverse rotation. Then as the motor rotates, the contact point is moved, and when the contact point is detached or the output signal of control unit turns OFF, the motor stops rotating.

25-35

CONTROL AMPLIFIER LIMITER COOL POTENTIO 5V POTENTIO POTENTIO GND

HOT

Fig. 25-37

MOTOR ACTUATOR


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (5) The actuator for inner and outer The actuator for inner and outer air flow select is installed on the blower intake unit, and opens and closes inner and outer air damper through the link. The actuator for inner and outer air flow select contains position detection switch which is switched with the movement of shaft of the actuator. When the inner and outer damper position is set by the inner and outer switch on the control panel, the control unit reads the signal of the position detection switch in the actuator and determines the rotation direction of motor in either normal rotation or reverse rotation. Then as the motor rotates, the position detection switch also rotates and makes it stop at the set position of the inner and outer air damper.

AMPLIFIER

MOTOR ACTUATOR

INNER AIR SIDE OUTER AIR SIDE LIMITER

Fig. 25-38

(6) Evaporator sensor This sensor is used to control the evaporator outlet temperature with the compressor ON-OFF to protect the evaporator from freezing, and this evaporator sensor functions as a sensor of this control. • Evaporator sensor inspecting items (Specification) Terminal resistance :

Fig. 25-39

at 0 degree C : 7.2 k at 25 degree C : 2.2k (7) Dual pressure switch This dual pressure switch is attached on L-hose and is used to turn OFF the compressor, and employs dual type (for high and low pressure control) to protect the cooler cycle from possible failure at the time when abnormal pressure was generated on the high pressure side.

Fig. 25-40

SPECIFICATION OF DUAL PRESSURE SWITCH 0.02MPa(2.9psi)

0.59MPa(86psi)

ON OFF

0.20MPa(29psi)

3.14MPa(455psi)

(LOW PRESSURE SIDE) (HIGH PRESSURE SIDE)

(8) Solar radiation sensor This solar radiation sensor, which is used to correct the solar radiation to the auto air conditioner detects the strength and solar orientation of sunbeam after transforming them into current by means of photo diode. Inspection : Check for the continuity between terminals.

25-36

Fig. 25-41


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25.8

TROUBLESHOOTING Air temperature does not fall.

Note : M/A is motor actuator * is any of the numbers 0 ~ 9.

If AUTO switch or A/C switch is pushed, "HL.E" is indicated on the set temp. display of the panel. NO

YES

. Connector for air mix M/A is disconnected or in poor contact. . Air mix M/A is failed. . Main harness shows poor continuity.

"HL.*" is shown on the set temp. display of the panel. NO

YES A snow mark ( ) on panel is flashing.

A snow mark ( ) on the panel is flashing.

NO

Inspect and correct or replace parts.

YES

. Inner air sensor or harness is disconnected or shorted. . Inner air sensor connector is disconnected or in poor contact.

. Both inner air sensor and .

See section monitor mode.

evaporation sensor are disconnected or shorted. Controller failed.

See section monitor mode.

Inspect and correct or replace parts.

A NO

YES

. Evaporation sensor connector is disconnected or in poor contact. . Evaporation sensor is disconnected or shorted.

Blowout temp. falls if temp. is set at 18.0 (64.4 ) (COOLMAX) and the blowout mode is changed to vent mode. NO Air mix damper is in COOLMAX. NO

Inspect and correct or replace parts.

YES

Cool air flowing into inner air sensor

Inspect and correct or replace parts.

YES

If M/A is at stop halfway, eliminate cause, correct and measure operating force. (less than 14.7N : OK)

Turn compressor clutch on and off. Inspect and correct electric circuits. Refer to Troubleshooting for refrigeration cycle. NO

. Inspect, correct or replace M/A lever link. . After cleaning lever link,

NO Controller is faulty or inner air sensor is faulty. Inspect and replace.

YES M/A failed or controller is out of order.

apply grease.

Replace.

25-37

YES Inspect duct or eliminate cause for cool air intrusion.


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Air temperature does not rise.

Note : * is any of the numbers 0 ~ 9.

HL.E is shown on the set temp. display of the panel. NO

YES

. Connector for air mix M/A is disconnected or in poor contact. . Air mix M/A is failed. . Main harness shows poor continuity.

"HL.*" is shown on the set temp. display of the panel. NO

YES

. Inner air sensor or harness is disconnected or shorted. . Inner air sensor connector is disconnected or in poor contact.

Inspect and correct or replace parts.

See section monitor mode. NO YES Inspect and correct or replace parts.

NO YES Blowout temp. rises at blowout mode if temp. is set at HOT MAX 32.0 (64.4 ) NO

YES

Air mix damper is in HOT MAX. NO

Warm air is flowing into inner air sensor.

YES NO

If M/A action is at stop, eliminate cause, correct and measure operating force. (less than 14.7N : OK)

YES

Inspect warm water piping. Controller or inner air sensor is out of order. NO

. Inspect, correct or replace M/A lever link. . Clean lever link and apply grease.

YES

Inspect and replace.

M/A failed or controller is out of order. Replace.

25-38

Inspect duct or eliminate causes for warm air entry.


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Blower motor does not run.

Note 1)

At air flow HI, battery voltage acts across both terminals (+) and (-) of blower motor. NO

YES

Battery voltage acts across red (+) and body of blower motor. NO

Approx. 10V acts across light green wire and grounding of blower amplifier. NO

YES

YES

Controller is out of order. Remove blower amplifier and check for continuity across light green wire Replace and black wires ; you get continuity.

Wire harness is faulty. Inspect and correct or replace.

NO

Battery voltage acts across white / red wire and body of blower motor relay. NO Inspect and repair harness or replace.

Replace.

YES

Inspect blower motor relay. Blower motor Note 2) rotates if white / red wire and red wire of blower motor relay are direct connected. NO

Blower motor fails.

YES

Eliminate cause and replace blower amplifier.

YES Inspect and repair harness.

Blower turns if orange wire of blower motor relay is connected with ground. NO Replace relay.

YES Inspect and correct harness or replace controller.

Note 1) Measure with connector set. Note 2) Always turn off air-conditioner, starter key switch and light switch before work.

25-39


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Blower motor speed does not change.

CASE (1)

*

"HL. " is shown on the set temp. display of the panel. NO

Replace blower amplifier controller.

Note)

*

is any of the numbers 0 ~ 9.

YES

. Inner air sensor or harness is disconnected or shorted. . Inner air sensor connector is disconnected or in poor contact. See section monitor mode. Inspect and correct or replace parts.

CASE (2) Does not blower motor speed change because the setting mode is other face mode? YES

NO

Is door or front window open?

YES

See CASE (1).

NO

The limiting or control operation is actuated by door switch or front window switch.

See CASE (1).

25-40


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Magnet clutch does not engage.

Snow mark ( ) lights if A/C switch is pressed. No

Yes

Snow mark ( ) flickers and E is shown on panel display. To A On page 25-37.

Voltage acts upon clutch. No

Voltage is applied to pressure switch harness. No

Yes

Inspect clutch fuses.

Clutch faulty.

Yes

Voltage acts across white / green wire and Ground (Black) connector connected to excavator. No

Yes

Pressure switch is faulty or refrigerant gas is under charged or overcharged. Refer to troubleshooting for refrigeration cycle.

Inspect air-conditioner harness. No fault. No

Replace harness.

Yes Replace controller.

Inner air and outer air do not change over.

Inner / outer air mode display on operation panel is flickering. No

Yes Connector of inner/outer air M/A is disconnected or in poor contact. Or M/A failed or main harness failed.

M/A lever includes foreign matter or is broken. No M/A failed

Yes Remove foreign matter and replace parts.

Replace

25-41

Inspect or replace.


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Modes do not change.

Mode display (Mark of person) on operating panel is flickering. No

Yes Mode M/A connector is disconnected or in poor contact or M/A failed or main harness is faulty.

M/A rod does not disengage. No

Yes

Repair. Each damper lever does not disengage. No Repair.

Yes

Inspect or replace.

When rod is removed and cam is operated by hand, it is heavy. (more than 19.6N.) No Yes

M/A or controller is out of order. Replace.

. Cam or damper shaft includes foreign matter or is broken . Erroneous motion occurs due to dirty grease.

. Remove foreign matter or replace parts. . Clean cam and apply new grease.

25-42


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Trouble with refrigeration cycle.

Both high and low pressures are lower. Low pressure is higher.

Cooling does not work if run at high speed. NO

Expansion valve is clogged or maladjusted.

Adjust or replace expansion valve.

Air bubbles are seen in sight glass.

YES

NO

YES

Expansion valve is frozen or intruded by water.

After making vacuum, refill refrigerant and replace receiver.

Oil comes out from piping and parts. NO

YES

NO

Air bubbles are seen in sight glass.

YES

Natural leak from hose.

Gas leaks from pipe joints and parts.

Charge gas.

Retighten or replace parts.

High pressure is lower.

Compressor cylinder does not get hot.

Compressor cylinder gets very hot.

Expansion valve is maladjusted. (too much open)

Compressor does not discharge well.

Replace expansion valve.

Replace compres

High pressure is lower.

Air bubbles are seen in sight glass. YES

NO

Condenser is fouled or clogged.

High pressure gets lower slowly.

High pressure circuit before receiver is clogged up.

Remove clogging or replace parts.

25-43

YES

NO

Air bubbles are hard to go out even if water is poured on condenser. Clean condenser.

Air is mixed. Make vacuum and refill refrigerant.


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

25.9

SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ON DISPLAY OF PANEL

The failure of motor actuator and each sensor can be identified on the display of panel. 25.9.1

POSITION OF INDICATION FOR FAILURE.

The error is indicated on 3 digits segment.

25.9.2

EXPLANATION OF INDICATION FOR FAILURE.

(1) Failure of Motor Actuator 1) HL.E is indicated on 3 digits segment.

Check harness or connector to motor actuator for the air mix damper for disconnection.

2) MODE

is flickering.

Check harness or connector to motor actuator for the air outlet damper for disconnection.

3) R/F

is flickering. Check harness or connector to motor actuator for the inner and outer air damper for disconnection. Note) The above indication and flickering does not function if the harness and connector were disconnected under the condition the panel ON/OFF switch is ON. After the failure was occured, if the panel ON/OFF switch is turned ON, it functions. After correction of failure, if the main switch is not switched from OFF to ON the error indication and flickering are not released.

25-44


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (2) Failures of sensors 1) HL.* is indicated on 3 digits segment.

Check the inner air sensor or the harness for disconnection and short circuit, and also connectors for disconnection. (* is any of the numbers 0 to 9.)

2) **E and

mark are flickering. (** is displayed leaving the present set temperature value.) Check evaporator sensor or the harness for disconnection and short circuit, and also connectors for disconnection.

Note) The above displays in items 1) and 2) are indicated by 3 digits segment when error occurred under the condition the panel ON/OFF switch is ON. And, after correction of failure if the panel ON/OFF switch is switched from OFF to ON, the error indication is released.

(3) Communication error of control amplifier and panel 1) E is indicated on the only use segment of display.

25-45


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM 25.9.3

EXPLANATION OF MONITOR MODE

When error of 25.9.2 (2) sensors is displayed, the monitor mode is available to identify the sensor condition (disconnection, short circuit). (1) Position of monitor mode indication

SEGMENT FOR ONLY MONITOR INDICATION 3 DIGITS SEGMENT

(2) Operation of monitor mode SPEED UP AND DOWN

INNER OR OUTER

SWITCH FOR BLOWER

AIR INLET SELECT SWITCH (R/F)

ON/OFF SW

1) Press inner and outer air flow select switch and ON/OFF switch simultaneously for 1 second. 2) Press AUTO switch. (After all segments are lit on for 1 second, the mode is switched into monitor mode.) 3) Any figures of figures from 0 to 9 or any letters of alphabet from A to F are displayed on the 3rd digit and 2nd digit of segment in three digits. The 1st digit is indicated by "H". 4) Any digit indicated by one of figures 0 to 2 for the exclusive segment in three digits is selected by pressing UP or DOWN of blower switch, and the required sensor is selected from the list below. SEGMENT ASSIGNMENT LIST 0

INNER AIR SENSOR

1

EVAPORATOR SENSOR

2

SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR

(Excluding above mentioned indications, for example "from 3 to 9 and from B to F" are not used at service work.)

5) The monitor display is terminated by pressing the inner and outer air flow select switch (R/F) and ON/OFF switch for 1 second again, or turning off the main switch of excavator. Notes) 1. The air conditioner is turned off while the monitor mode is in operation, and all switches are not available for operation and setting until the monitor mode is cancelled. 2. Even if each sensor is corrected while the monitor mode is in operation, the error display is memorized. Therefore turn on ON/OFF switch again, and the error display is disappeared.

25-46


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM (3) Contents of monitor mode display Refer to the list of segment display exclusively used for monitor and the list of segments in three digits. 1)

Example 1 THIRD SEGMENT SECOND SEGMENT When the segment exclusively used for monitor indicates 0 (displays the inner air sensor condition), since the segment indicates 3F, the sensor is in normal operating condition according to the list of 3 segments. --> The inner air sensor is in normal operating condition.

2) Example 2 When the segment exclusively used for monitor indicates 1 (displays the evaporator sensor condition), since the segment indicates 00, the sensor is in disconnection condition according to the list of 3 segments --> The evaporator sensor is in disconnection condition.

3) Example 3

When the segment exclusively used for monitor indicates 2 (displays the solar radiation sensor condition), since the segment indicates FF,the sensor is in short-circuiting condition according to the list of 3 segments. -->The solar radiation sensor is in short-circuiting condition.

4) List of 3 segments SECOND SEGMENT

THIRD SEGMENT

INNER AIR SENSOR DISCONNECTION (0CH0 INDICATED) EVAPORATOR SENSOR DISCONNECTION (0CH1 INDICATED) SOLAR RADIATION SHORT-CIRCUITING (0CH2 INDICATED)

EACH SENSOR IS NORMAL

SOLAR SENSOR 5V SIDE SHORT-CIRCUITING (C7H2 INDICATED) INNER AIR SENSOR SHORT-CIRCUITING (F6H0 INDICATED) EVAPORATOR SENSOR SHORT-CIRCUITING (F6H1 INDICATED)

25-47


25. AIR-CONDITIONER SYSTEM

[MEMO]

25-48


31. DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING TABLE OF CONTENTS 31.1 EXPLAINING CHAPTER OF WHOLE DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY ...........................31-3 31.1.1

FORM FOR CHAPTER OF DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY ..................................31-3

31.1.2

INDICATION OF TIGHTENING TORQUE .............................................................31-3

31

Book Code No. S5YN3118E01 31-1


31. DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING Issue

Date of Issue

First edition

July, 2006

SK330–8 : LC10-07001~ SK350LC–8 : YC10-03501~

n

August, 2006

SK200–8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC–8 : YQ11-06001~

n

October, 2006

SK250-8: LQ12-06001~ SK260LC–8 : LL12-05001~

n

Applicable Machines

Remarks S5YN3118E01 (ASIA, OCE) n (ASIA, OCE) n (ASIA, OCE) n

December, 2006 SK850LC: LY01-00101~

n

February, 2007

E235BSR : YF05-02001~ E235BSR(N)LC : YU05-02001~

n

n

SK235SRLC-2 : YU05-02001~

n

March, 2007

n

April, 2007

n

n

SK200-8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC-8 : YQ11-06001~

n

May, 2007

SK250-8: LQ12-06001~ SK260LC–8 : LL12-05001~

n

June, 2007

E225BSR : YB05-03001~ E225BSRLC : LA05-02001~

n

n

SK215SRLC : LA05-02001~

n

July, 2007

E135BSR : YY05-12001~ E135BSRLC : YH05-07001~

n

n

SK225SR : YB05-03001~ SK225SRLC : LA05-02001~

n

n

SK460-8: LS10-02001~ SK480LC–8 : YS10-01501~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

E265B : LQ12-06001~ E265BLC : LL12-05001~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

n

August, 2007

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~ SK235SR-2 : YF05-02001~ SK235SRLC-2 : YU05-02001~

n E385B : LC10-07001~ E385BLC : YC10-03501~

31-2

n (NHK) n (North America) n (NHK Russia) n (OCE) n ASIA (HS Engine) n ASIA (HS Engine) n (NHK) n (North America) n (NHK) n (OCE) n (ASIA, OCE) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

(NHK Middle East) HS Engine

n (NHK Middle East)

K


31. DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

31.1

EXPLAINING CHAPTER OF WHOLE DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

31.1.1

FORM FOR CHAPTER OF DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

This chapter is consist of 3-Section as follows. (1) ATTACHMENTS .................................................................Chapter 32 1) Removing and Installing 2) Disassembling and Assembling a. Cylinder (2) UPPER STRUCTURE ........................................................Chapter 33 1) Removing and Installing 2) Disassembling and Assembling a. Hydraulic pump b. Control Valve c. Pilot Valve (ATT) d. Pilot Valve (Travel) e. Slewing Motor f.

Swivel Joint

(3) TRAVEL SYSTEM ..............................................................Chapter 34 1) Removing and Installing 2) Disassembling and Assembling a. Travel Motor 31.1.2

INDICATION OF TIGHTENING TORQUE

Tightening torque is indicated as follows, for example ; T=98N•m(72 lbf•ft) Tolerance is ±10% unless otherwise specified. •

Refer to "Chapter 11 TOOLS" for standard tightening torque.

31-3


31. DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

[MEMO]

31-4


32. ATTACHMENT TABLE OF CONTENTS 32.1 REMOVING AND INSTALLING.......................................................................................32-3 32.1.1

ATTACHMENT ASSY.............................................................................................32-3

32.1.2

BUCKET .................................................................................................................32-3

32.1.3

ARM........................................................................................................................32-6

32.1.4

BOOM.....................................................................................................................32-9

32.2 DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING...........................................................................32-13 32.2.1

CYLINDER..............................................................................................................32-13

32

Book Code No. S5YN3218E02 32-1


32. ATTACHMENT Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

August, 2006

Revision

February, 2007

n

March, 2007

n

April, 2007

SK200-8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC-8 : YQ11-06001~

n

July, 2007

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

n

n

n

n

SK200–8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC–8 : YQ11-06001~ n E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

Remarks S5YN3218E01 (ASIA, OCE)

K

S5YN3218E02 (ASIA, OCE)

K

n (NHK Russia) n ASIA (HS Engine) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n

K K K K K

(NHK Middle East) HS Engine

PREFACE (1) This Manual describes all the procedures from removing to attaching, arranging them by item. (2) This Manual consists of 2 sections. "Removing and Installing", and "Disassembling and Assembling". (3) The removing and installing can be performed in the procedure specified in Table of Contents, but in view of actual repairing or time saving some process can be omitted. (4) The removing and installing procedure does not completely cover all possible situations because of differences of field condition and defective section. (5) Please be aware that the procedure to be followed must be determined according to the above conditions. When disassembly and assembly are required, select the necessary section, itemize the work contents with good understanding, then starts working.

32-2


32. ATTACHMENT

32.1

REMOVING AND INSTALLING

32.1.1

ATTACHMENT ASSY

(D) ARM CYLINDER HEAD PIN

(C) BOOM CYLINDER ROD PIN 4. BOOM

(A) BOOM FOOT PIN

ARM CYLINDER (F) BOOM TOP PIN

(E) ARM CYLINDER ROD PIN

2. BUCKET

(G) BUCKET CYLINDER HEAD PIN BUCKET CYLINDER

(J) BUCKET DRIVE PIN

3. ARM (I) IDLER LINK PIN

BUCKET LINK

IDLER LINK

(H) BOOM CYLINDER HEAD PIN

(K) BUCKET ATTACHING PIN

(H) BUCKET CYLINDER ROD PIN

Fig. 32-1 Front attachment and position 32.1.2 32.1.2.1

BUCKET REMOVING BUCKET

(1) Put the machine in position to remove bucket.

Fig. 32-2 Position to remove bucket (2) Removing pin (2) Expand slit of ring (1) with screwdriver, and remove it. Push out the pin (2) with flat-blade screwdriver .

BOSS SECTION 1

DRIVER 2

SECTION OF BOSS Fig. 32-3 Removing pin (2)

32-3


32. ATTACHMENT (3) Removing bucket attaching pin (K) Lift up bucket, position it so that bucket attaching pin (K) is not loaded, adjust bucket link, and pull out bucket attaching pin (K).

K

Fig. 32-4 Removing bucket attaching pin (4) Removing bucket drive pin (J) Put bucket on the ground, position it so that the bucket drive pin (J) is not loaded, adjust bucket link, and pull out pin (J). Store the removed pin (J) in original position again.

J

Fig. 32-5 Removing bucket drive pin 32.1.2.2

ATTACHING BUCKET

(1) Attaching bucket drive pin (J) Attach bucket drive pin (J) first, then continue in the reverse procedure of removing. J

When aligning the pin holes, do not put your finger in the pin holes, but align them visually.

Check the seals for damaged and replace as necessary.

When inserting the pin, coat the shaft with grease. Fig. 32-6 Attaching bucket

32-4


32. ATTACHMENT 32.1.2.3

PROCEDURE FOR ADJUSTING CLEARANCE

Adjustment of clearance between bucket and arm

+1.0

Apply rust preventive oil

(1) Shift O-ring (3) toward the bucket boss, using a spatula. (aob)

12 : WASHER 11 : CAPSCREW

(2) When adjusting clearance (B), bring the nonadjusting side of the bucket in contact with the arm. (3) Measure clearance (B) and check that it is within 1.0mm (0.04in).

+0.039"

326 -0.5 (12.84 -0.020" ) New bucket B

3 : O-RING

b a

7 : BUSHING 8 : PLATE

(4) Adjust clearance (B) where it is more than 1.0mm (0.04in).

9 : SHIM

(5) An average of 5 shims (9) of 1mm (0.04in) thickness are set in the plate (8) fixed by the three capscrews (11). The clearance can be decreased by 1mm (0.04in) if one shim is removed.

Fig. 32-7 Adjusting clearance between bucket and arm

: 24mm, Tightening torque : 279N•m (206 lbf•ft) (6) After adjustment, tighten the capscrews evenly. • The gap exceeding the specified dimension causes early wear. (7) Operate the bucket and confirm that the total sum of both clearance is within 1.0mm (0.04in). (8) Replace O-ring (3) on its original position.

When shifting O-ring (3) by means of a spatula, use care so as not to damage O-ring (3).

Remove shims (9), push out bushing (7) rightwards by means of three capscrews (11) and adjust clearance (B) so it settles within the standard value evenly all round.

Install pin (10) until the top 10 : PIN of pin is even surface with bushing.

32-5


32. ATTACHMENT 32.1.3

ARM

32.1.3.1

REMOVING ARM

(1) Put the machine in position to remove arm. Extend the arm cylinder, retract the bucket cylinder and bring the arm down on the ground.

Fig. 32-8 Position to remove arm (2) Disconnecting piping of bucket cylinder Release pressure of hydraulic tank, place oil pan to prepare for oil leaking, and disconnect pipes.

Plug both end of disconnected pipes. Plug : Tools section 11.5.2-(4) Tools section 11.5.2-(5) OIL PAN

When the removal of bucket cylinder is not required, skip to procedure (6).

Fig. 32-9 Disconnecting piping of bucket cylinder

(3) Removing bucket cylinder rod pin (H)

After adjustment of shim, the total gap should be within 0.6~1.0mm (0.02~0.04in). SHIM

Loosen nut (9), remove capscrew M16u140 (8), and push out pin (H).

8

: 24mm

9 H

D

G A

A

H

SECTION D-D

Install plastic shims to bucket link side.

D PLASTIC SHIM

STEEL SHIM

Fig. 32-10 Detail of bucket cylinder rod pin (H) (4) Removing cylinder head pin (G) Loosen nut (3), remove capscrew M16u150 (2), and push out pin (G).

Install plastic shims to bucket link side. SHIM

3

2

After adjustment of shim, the total gap should be within 0.6~1.0mm (0.02~0.04in).

: 24mm

Apply grease to inner wall of bushing

SHIM

G

SECTION A-A

Fig. 32-11 Detail of bucket cylinder head pin (G)

32-6


32. ATTACHMENT (5) Removing bucket cylinder Sling tube of bucket cylinder with nylon sling, and remove it. Bucket cylinder weight : 140 kg (310 lbs)

Fig. 32-12 Slinging bucket cylinder (6) Removing arm cylinder rod pin (E) Put a wooden block between the arm cylinder and the boom. Loosen nut (3), remove capscrew M16u150 (4), and push out arm cylinder rod pin (E).

Apply grease to inner wall of bushing

2

Install plastic shims to bucket link side. SHIM

E

: 24mm

3

Retract arm cylinder rod, and return pin (E) to the original position (hole).

SHIM After adjustment of shim, the total gap should be within 0.6~2.0mm (0.02~0.08in). SECTION B-B

E

Fig. 32-13 Detail of arm cylinder rod pin (E)

BLOCK

F (7) Removing boom top pin (F) Loosen capscrew M14u30 (2), and pull out boom top pin (F).

Tightening torque 144N.m (106 lbf.ft) Apply loctite #242 to bolt.

1

2

SHIM Install plastic shims to arm side.

: 22 mm Insert pin (F) into the original hole.

Apply grease to inner wall of bushing

SHIM After adjustment of shim, the total gap should be within 0.5mm (0.02in).

F

SECTION A-A

Fig. 32-14 Detail of boom top pin (F)

32-7


32. ATTACHMENT (8) Slinging arm assy Sling arm with nylon sling and remove it. Arm weight : 660 kg (1,455 lbs)

Fig. 32-15 Slinging arm assy 32.1.3.2

ATTACHING ARM

Instal the arm in the reverse order of removing, paying attention to the following : 1) When aligning the pin holes, do not put your finger in the pin holes, but align them visually. 2) Check the seals for damage and replace as necessary. 3) When inserting the pin, coat the shaft with grease.

(0.02")

4) Pin lock nut handling procedure

CLEARANCE

: 24 mm 5) When installing the arm and the cylinder, inspect the clearance in the thrust direction of the pins and decide the thickness of shims by referring to the Maintenance Standard. 6) Tightening torque

Classfication Metric threads PF,PT threads

Size

Tightening torque N.m lbf.ft

M14

144

106

M16

147

108

1/8"

16.7

12.3

32-8


32. ATTACHMENT 32.1.4 32.1.4.1

BOOM PREPARATION FOR REMOVING AND ATTACHING BOOM

When removing and attaching boom in the position shown in Fig. 32-16, to remove and attach boom foot pin (A), removing and attaching of cab and guard are required. 32.1.4.2

REMOVING BOOM

(1) Put the machine in position to remove boom. Place top end of boom down on block, etc. giving attention for arm cylinder rod not to be extended.

BLOCK

Fig. 32-16 Position to remove boom (2) Lifting up boom cylinder temporarily Remove the right and left boom cylinders one side by one side according to the following procedure: Lift up boom cylinder temporarily to prevent it from dropping.

A A

C

STAND

Fig. 32-17 Lifting up boom cylinder temporarily (3) Press the boom cylinder rod pin (C) At the one side of pin (C), loosen nut (5), remove capscrew (3) (M16X150), and remove boss (4). And push pin (C) to the end of boom boss.

Install plastic shim to cylinder side. SHIM After adjustment of shim, the total gap should be within 0.6~2.0mm (0.02~0.08in).

SHIM

: 24 mm

3

4 (4) Preparing for disconnecting cylinder pipes Retract the above mentioned cylinder rod, and place one side of cylinder on stand. (See Fig. 3217)

C

4 5 SECTION A-A

Fig. 32-18 Detail of boom cylinder rod pin (C)

32-9


32. ATTACHMENT (5) Disconnecting the arm cylinder and bucket cylinder pipings Release pressure from arm and bucket circuit and bleed air in hydraulic tank, and then disconnect pipe at (A1), (A2), (A3), (A4) and hose (B1), (B2), (B3), (B10).

A1 A4 A3 A2

: 36, 41 mm After disconnection of pipe, plug every pipe. ORS Plug : See Tools 11.5.2-(4).

O-RING B2

O-RING B1 B3 BUCKET (H) BUCKET (R)

B10 ARM (R)

ARM (H)

Fig. 32-19 Boom piping disconnection (6) Lifting up boom assy temporarily Lift up boom cylinder with nylon sling so that boom foot pin (A) is not loaded. Weight of single boom : 1,310 kg (2,890 lbs)

A

A

A Boom assy temporary lift up procedure

(7) Removing boom foot pin (A)

After adjustment of shim, the total gap should be SHIM within 0.5mm (0.02in).

1) Loosen nut (3) and remove capscrew (2) M20u175.

2 A

: 30 mm Apply molybdenum addition grease to inner wall of bushing.

2) Draw out pin (A).

3

SHIM Install plastic shim to boom side. SECTION A-A

Fig. 32-20 Details of boom foot pin (A) section

32-10


32. ATTACHMENT

(8) Hoisting boom assy Hoist and remove boom assy. Weight of single boom : 1,310 kg (2,890 lbs)

D

D

Boom assy hoisting procedure (9) Completion of removal of front attachments When the removing and attaching of cylinder are not required, the work is finished.

2

(10)Removing and installing arm cylinder

F2

1) Lift up arm cylinder (2) with nylon sling so that the head of cylinder is not loaded. 2) Disconnect hose (F1) and (F2) at position A. After disconnection of hose, plug both ends of hose. Plug : TOOLS 11.5.2-(4) Plugs for ORS fitting 11.5.2-(5) Plugs for half clamp

After adjustment of shim, the total gap should be within F1 0.6~1.0mm (0.02~0.04in).

Install plastic shim to cylinder side. SHIM

3

A

2

SHIM Apply grease to inner wall of bushing

:36 mm :12 mm SECTION D-D

3) Removing arm cylinder head pin (D) Loosen nut (3), remove capscrew M16u150 (2) and pull out pin (D).

D

Fig. 32-21 Removing arm cylinder

: 24mm 4) Removing arm cylinder (2) Weight of arm cylinder : 255 kg (560 lbs)

32-11


32. ATTACHMENT (11)Removing and installing boom cylinder 1) Release pressure from boom circuit and bleed air in hydraulic tank. 2) Sling boom cylinder (2) using nylon sling temporally not to act the weight of cylinder upon the cylinder head.

2

3) Disconnect each two hoses (C2) and (C3). And plug their both ends.

2 B

Plug : TOOLS 11.5.2-(4) Plugs for ORS fitting

C3

: 27,32,36,41mm C3

C2

Fig. 32-22 Removing and installing boom cylinder 4) Removing boom cylinder foot pin (B) (See Fig. 32-23,Fig. 32-24) Loosen nut (5), remove capscrews M16u150 (3) and pull out pin (B).

After adjustment of shim, the total gap should be within 0.6~1.0mm (0.02~0.04in).

SHIM

Apply grease to inner wall of bushing

3 B

B

: 24mm 5) Remove boom cylinder (2). Weight of boom cylinder : 170 kg (375 lbs)

Apply grease to inner wall of bushing

6) Remove another boom cylinder the same way.

5

SECTION B-B

SHIM Install plastic shim to cylinder side.

Fig. 32-23 Removing and installing boom cylinder head pin (B) 32.1.4.3

ATTACHING BOOM

(1) Attaching boom foot pin (A) First of all, insert boom foot pin (A) and install the boom assy. Attach it in the reverse procedure of removing, paying attention to the following points.

A

1) When aligning the pin holes, do not put your finger in the pin holes, but align them visually. 2) Check that the dust seals is not damaged and replace as necessary. 3) When inserting the pin, coat the shaft with grease. 4) Refer to paragraph 32.1.3.2 (page 32-8) about installing of jam nut.

B

5) When installing boom and cylinder, check the clearance of mounting section in thrust direction, and decide the thickness of shim according to the maintenance standard. Install plastic shim first, and insert iron shim into remaining gap. Regarding the position of shim, refer to Fig. 3220.

32-12

Fig. 32-24 Boom foot pin (A)


32. ATTACHMENT

32.2

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

32.2.1

CYLINDER

32.2.1.1

PREPARATION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY

Before assembly, secure a dustfree workshop and necessary equipment and facilities. 32.2.1.1.1

WORK AREA

The following working area is required for disassembly: (1) Ample space For the disassembly of the hydraulic cylinder, the cylinder tube and the piston rod must be drawn out. For this reason, the first condition is that the working area is long enough for the work. In terms of width, it is also necessary to keep sufficient space to disassembly, cleaning and measuring equipment are placed and the work can be performed. (2) Suitable working environment The hydraulic cylinder is a precision-machined product that uses seals and packings made of rubber and plastic materials. For this reason full care should be exercised so the hydraulic cylinder is free from dust, dirt, and in particular, such hard particles as sand, metal chips, and weld slag (spatter). If the hydraulic cylinder is assembled with hard particles adhered on such components as the cylinder tube and the piston rod, the tube inner surface and the rod surface are scratched as the cylinder operates, consequently disabling it in worst cases. Damage to the piston seals and the rod seals will result in oil leaks. For this reason, grinding and welding operation should not be performed in the neighborhood of the working area to keep it clean. 32.2.1.1.2

APPARATUS

The following equipment are required for disassembly: (1) Hoist or crane The hoist or crane must be capable of carrying the cylinder in an assembled condition. It must also be capable of making level and liner movement under load for retracting and extending the piston rod and the tube. (2) Work bench The work bench must have strength and rigi-dity capable of accommodating the total length of the cylinder in its most retracted condition and of withstanding the repulsive force of the tightening torques of the cylinder head and the piston nut. Since a vise is attached to the bench, the width of the work bench must be sufficiently large. (3) Support stand If the piston rod is fully extended in a free condition, the bushing and the seals may be damaged as the rod bushing and the piston are twisted due to the weight of the rod. A stand is required to support the rod to prevent damage of seals. (4) Hydraulic source A Hydraulic source is required for disassembly and assembly of the cylinder head and piston nut and for oil leak tests after completion of assembly. (5) Jet air source It is used for drying after oil draining and cleaning of the cylinder. (6) Cleaning bath, cleaning oil and detergent (7) Oil pan and oil reservoir An oil pan is necessary to contain oil drained from the cylinder and oil spilt during work. An oil reservoir is required to collect oil spilt on the floor and waste oil. (8) Others Oil extracting hoses, wooden blocks, clean cloths and sawdust in which oil soaked are also necessary.

32-13


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.1.3

NECESSARY TOOLS

Tools and jigs vary with types of cylinder, but it is necessary to prepare the tools in Table32-1 as a guideline. Table32-1 List of Tools and Jigs Tool / Jig Hammer

Remarks

Tool / Jig

1. Steel hammer 2. Wooden or plastic mallet

Screwdriver A few types of large and small sizes Chisel

Flat chisel

Remarks

Spatula

Metallic one with smooth corners.

Gimlet

A sharp-point tool may be used in place of a gimlet.

Special jig 1. For removing and press-fitting bushing. (A), (D), (C) 2. For press-fitting wiper ring. (D) 3. For inserting and reforming seal ring. (E),(F),(G),(H) See para 32.2.1.9 for detail)

Vise

Wrench

Rust remover

One having an operation wide enough to hold cylinder head O.D. and tube mounting pins (clevis)

Measuring 1. Slide caliper instruments 2. Micrometer

1. Eye wrench 2. Allen wrench 3. Extension pipe for wrenches

3. Cylinder gauge ( Fig. 32-25) 4. V-block

•

For the details of special tools and jigs, refer to the back pages of this manual.

32.2.1.1.4

EXTERNAL CLEANING

The cylinder taken off the excavator has dust and foreign matter, and grease is usually adhered to the clevis part. For this reason, remove external soil and contamination from the cylinder with water and steam before bringing it into the workshop. •

Fig. 32-25 Cylinder gauge

The following describes the construction of boom cylinder. When disassembling and servicing the cylinder, confirm the construction of cylinder referring to Parts Manual.

32.2.1.1.5

DISCHARGING OIL

Place a wooden-block on the work bench and place the cylinder on it to prevent it from rotating. Charge air into ports A and B alternately to actuate the piston rod till the hydraulic oil in the cylinder is drained out. At this time, connect a suitable hose to each port so that the hydraulic oil may not gush out.

WOODEN BLOCK PORT B V BLOCK PORT A

AIR

OIL PAN

Fig. 32-26 Preparation

32-14


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.2

CONSTRUCTION OF CYLINDER (GENERAL EXAMPLE OF CYLINDER)

25

24

12

24

25 B

PS1/8

PT1/4 15

SLIT

DETAIL 6

9

8

7

6

DETAIL B

4

5

3

11 10

ONE HOLE DETAIL C

2

1

Piston with piston nut type

13 14

15

17 16 18 19 *20 *21 22 23

SLIT

C

Fig. 32-27 Construction of general cylinder No.

Parts name

Q’ty

No.

Parts name

Q’ty

No.

Parts name

Q’ty

1

Cylinder tube

1

10 O-ring

1

19 Slide ring

2

2

Piston rod

1

11 Back-up ring

1

20 Shim

*1

3

Rod cover

1

12 Socket bolt

12

21 Piston nut

*1

4

Bushing

1

13 Cushion bearing

1

22 Setscrew ; M12

1

5

Snap ring

1

14 Cushion seal

1

23 Steel ball

1

6

Buffer ring

1

15 Piston

1

24 Pin bushing

2

7

U-ring

1

16 Seal ring

1

25 Wiper ring

4

8

Back-up ring

1

17 Back-up ring

2

9

Wiper ring

1

18 Slide ring

2

Note : In case of piston with piston nut type, the parts with * are not used.

32-15


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.3

DISASSEMBLY

• When disassembling and servicing the cylinder, check the construction and the availability of service parts as well as necessary tools and jigs on separate Parts Manual. • The figures in parentheses after part names correspond to those in Fig. 32-27. • The following explanation and quantities are for a general use cylinder which has separated piston and piston nut. In case that piston and piston nut are combined, the construction differs from separated type, refer to the sentence in parenthesis. 32.2.1.3.1

REMOVING ROD COVER AND PISTON ROD

(1) Hold the clevis section of the tube in a vise.

Use mouth pieces so as not to damage the machined surface of the cylinder tube. Do not make use of the outside piping as a locking means. (2) Pull out piston rod (2) about 200mm (8in). Because the piston rod is heavy, finish extending it with air pressure after the above-mentioned oil draining operation.

200mm (8")

(3) Loosen and remove socket bolts (12) of the rod cover in sequence.

2 Cover the extended piston rod (2) with cloths to prevent it from being accidentally damaged during operation.

Fig. 32-28 ALLEN WRENCH

12

(4) Strike the corner of the rod cover flange by means of a plastic mallet till rod cover (3) comes off. Turn counterclockwise

3 2

Cover here with cloths

Fig. 32-29

32-16


32. ATTACHMENT • At this time, the weight of piston rod (2) is loaded on rod cover (3). Therefore, lift the top end of the piston rod with a hoist to the extent that only the rod weight may be held.

KNOCK THIS EDGE WITH A PLASTIC MALLET.

LIFT HERE.

1

3

2

Fig. 32-30 Drawing out piston rod assy (2). (5) Draw out the piston rod assy from cylinder tube (1).

Since the piston rod assy is heavy in this case, lift the tip of the piston rod (2) with a hoist and draw it out. However, when piston rod (2) has been drawing out to approximately two thirds of its length, lift it in its center to draw it completely. However, since the plated surface of piston rod (2) is lifted, do not use a wire rope which may score the surface, but use a strong cloth belt or a rope.

1

LIFT HERE. PULL STRAIGHT SIDEWAYS HORIZONTALLY

OIL PAN

Fig. 32-31 Method of drawing out the piston rod assy

(6) Place the removed piston rod on a horaizontal wooden V-block. PISTON ROD ASSY

• Cover a V-block with cloths. WOODEN V-BLOCK

(PLACE CLOTHS)

Fig. 32-32 Method of placing the piston rod (7) Remove slide ring (18) and (19) from piston (15).

15 Remove slide ring by widening the slit toward the arrow

19 18 Fig. 32-33 Remove slide ring (18) and (19)

32-17


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.3.2

REMOVING PISTON ASSY

(1) Fix piston rod (2) by holding its clevis section in a vise. Fix the piston rod (2) securely as piston nut (21) is tightened to a high torque.

2

15

3

WOODEN BLOCK

21

Note that the tightening torque differs with the type, the working pressure and the mounting method of the piston (15), though the rod diameter remains the same.

It is also necessary to place a suitable supporting block near the piston (15). In case a V-block is used, put cloths or something over the rod to prevent it from damage.

WOODEN V-BLOCK (PLACE CLOTHS)

Fig. 32-34 How to loosen piston nut (21) (2) Scrape off the caulked part of setscrew (22) of piston nut (21) by means of a hand drill and loosen setscrew (22) and remove ball (23).

22

DRILL

21 23 Fig. 32-35 Removing setscrew (22) and ball (23) (3) Loosen and remove piston nut (21) or [piston (15)].

Since piston nut (21) is tightened to a high torque, use a eye wrench suitable for the outside diameter of piston nut (21). In case that piston and piston nut are combined, apply the eye wrench to hexagonal part of piston and loosen the piston directly.

TURN COUNTER CLOCKWISE.

15

EYE WRENCH

21

Fig. 32-36 How to loosen piston nut (21)

(4) Remove piston (15) by tapping with plastic mallet, supporting weight of piston (15) with hoist.

In case that piston and piston nut are combined, the shim (20) is not used.

4

15

Fig. 32-37 Removing piston (15)

32-18


32. ATTACHMENT (5) After removing cushion bearing (13) and cushion seal (14), separate rod cover (3) from piston rod (2). If it is too hard to slide it, knock the flanged part of rod cover (3) with a plastic mallet. But when drawing it out, lift rod cover (3) by hoist and pull it straight horizontally.

LIFT WITH A HOIST. PULL STRAIGHT.

NOTE: DO NOT DAMAGE PISTON ROD SURFACE.

Take care so rod bushing (4) and the lip of packings (6,7,8,9) may not be damaged by thread of the piston rod (2).

32.2.1.3.3

STRIKE WITH A PLASTIC MALLET.

3

4

6 8,7 9

2

Fig. 32-38 Removing rod cover (3)

DISASSEMBLING PISTON ASSY

(1) Remove seal ring (16) and back-up ring (17). HAMMER SCREWDRIVER (OR CHISEL)

Cut the seal ring (16) by tapping it with a screwdriver or a chisel. Take care not to strike it too hard, otherwise the groove may be damaged.

BACK-UP RING

SEAL RING

17

15

USE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE THE GROOVE.

16

O-RING

Fig. 32-39 Removing seal ring (16) and back-up ring (17)

32-19


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.3.4

DISASSEMBLING ROD COVER ASSY

(1) Remove O-ring (10) and back-up ring (11). Remove back-up ring (11) and O-ring (10) in that order. Remove back-up ring (11) and O-ring (10) by pulling and stretching them with an spatula like earpick.

SPATULA

10 11 3

Fig. 32-40 Removing the outer circumferential seal of rod cover (3) (2) Remove buffer ring (6), U-ring (7) and back-up ring (8). Each seal is fixed in the groove on the bore and removing in flawless is impossible. Stab each seal with a gimlet and pull it out of the groove.

GIMLET

8 7

3

6 Take care in this operation not to damage the grooves.

Fig. 32-41 Removing the inner circumferential seal of rod cover (3) (3) Remove wiper ring (9). When taking out wiper ring (9), fix rod cover (3) in a vise.

HAMMER SCREWDRIVER

3 9

WOOD PIECE VISE

WOOD PIECE

Fig. 32-42 Removing wiper ring (9) (4) Remove snap ring (5) and bushing (4). Remove snap ring (5) first, and remove bushing (4). But the bushing (4) is press fitted in rod cover (3), so push it out by press with jig as shown in the figure. See para 32.2.1.9.3 (1) for removing.

CHUCK ASSY TOOL A

PRESS HERE

BUSHING 4

BLOCK TOOL C

Fig. 32-43 Removing rod bushing (4)

32-20


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.3.5

REMOVING PIN BUSHING

(1) Apply driver to wiper ring (25) of cylinder tube (1) and piston rod (2), and strike it by hammer lightly. (2) Push out pin bushing (24) press fitted in cylinder tube (1) and piston rod (2) with press.

Fig. 32-44 Drawing out pin bushing (24) 32.2.1.4

CLEANING

(1) After disassembly the cylinder, wash all parts with commercial detergent.

Never use benzene(gasoline, thinner, etc.) because it may be damage the rubber, etc. (2) Do not use the used oil seal, O-ring, back-up ring, etc. even if they are not damaged after inspection. (3) After cleaning, dry all parts by compressed air, and put them on the working bench taking care not to damage them. 32.2.1.5

ASSEMBLING PIN BUSHING

Start assembling the following sub assy • Cylinder tube assy • Piston assy • Rod cover assy 32.2.1.5.1

ASSEMBLING PIN BUSHING

(1) Press fit pin bushing (24) in cylinder tube (1) and piston rod (2) respectively with press.

PUSH WITH A PRESS

(2) Press fit wiper ring (25) in the upper and lower sides of cylinder tube (1) and piston rod (2) respectively with press.

• •

Before press fitting, apply grease on wiper ring and boss hole.

2

24

OIL HOLE LOCATION

Fig. 32-45 Press fitting of pin bushing (24)

Before press fitting the pin bushing, align the position of oil hole.

32-21


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.5.2

ASSEMBLING OF PISTON ASSY

(1) The fitting of seal ring (16) requires special tool as shown in Fig. 32-46. Seal ring (16) is pushed in by press, etc. with pushing in tool as shown in the figure. (The O-ring of seal ring (16) and back-up ring (17) on one side should be installed beforehand.)

PRESS HERE METAL (G) PRESS JIG (E) SLIDE JIG (F)

15 16

Heat them, and they may be soften. But never heat them over 100°C (212.0°F) or more.

O-RING

17 (2) Fit back-up ring (17) on the other side. After fitting, correct it immediately to prevent from expansion of seal ring (16) with correcting jig (H) as shown in Fig. 32-47.

Fig. 32-46 How to fit seal ring (16)

16

17

PRESS HERE

CORRECTIONAL JIG (H)

For piston, stop it once tentatively (for 3 to 5 seconds), and then push it in fully.

After fitting, wind tape around seal ring (16) 2 or 3 times, and remove it immediately before piston (15) is inserted in cylinder tube (1).

Fit slide rings (18) (19) at the same time when piston (15) is inserted in cylinder tube (1). Fig. 32-47 Installing seal ring (16)

32.2.1.5.3

ASSEMBLING ROD COVER ASSY

(1) Press fit bushing (4) in rod cover (3) with bushing press-fitting jig (A). Then, fit snap ring (5) in the groove. Apply hydraulic oil on internal surface of rod cover (3).

The snap ring (5) can not be fitted when the bushing (4) is not press-fitted fully to the stop end. (2) Apply grease to wiper ring (9), and fit wiper ring (9), directing the lip side toward the groove of retainer tool (D). And set retainer tool (D) on rod cover (3) and press fit wiper ring (9) with press.

PRESS HERE. (STRAIGHT DOWN) RETAINER TOOL (D)

9 U-RING GROOVE

Fig. 32-48 Press fitting of bushing (4)

32-22


32. ATTACHMENT (3) Fit buffer ring (6), back-up ring (8) and U-ring (7) in their grooves in that order. Before setting packings, coat them with hydraulic oil (or vaseline if not available). If you forget the coating, the packings may be scored. When attaching seals, deform them in a heart shape as illustrated.

U-ring (7) is harder than other packing and it would be difficult to deform them in a heart shape. In such a case, put a U-ring in the groove obliquely by hand as deep as possible and push in the last part with a push bar till it is set with a click.

INSERT U-RING INTO GROOVE FROM THIS SIDE.

Fig. 32-49 Inserting a seal into the inner circumference of rod cover.

Buffer ring (6) should be fitted taking care of the fitting direction. The reverse fitting may cause deformation, damage, etc. of the piston due to high pressure generated between the buffer ring and Uring.

If U-ring (7) is set upside down, the lip may be damaged. Check that it is positioned correctly.

Attach back-up ring (11) on the open air side of Oring (10). (See Fig. 32-50).

PUSH BAR (WOOD OR PLASTIC)

10 11

Tube side

3

6 7 8 9 Fig. 32-50 How to fit U-ring (7) 32.2.1.5.4

INSERTING ROD COVER ASSY TO PISTON ROD

Inserting rod cover (3) to piston rod assy by the following procedure.

INSERT GUIDE JIG (I)

3

PUSH

(1) Fix piston rod assy on working bench. (2) Install rod cover (3) on piston rod (2) with inserting guide jig (I) as shown in Fig. 32-51 paying attention for the lip section of U-ring not to be caught on the stepped section.

2

Fig. 32-51 Inserting rod cover (3)

For the rod the outer diameter of piston installing section is small, insert spacer on the faucet section of rod first, and attach inserting guide jig.

Apply hydraulic oil on the inserting guide jig and outer surface of piston rod lightly to make the insertion smooth.

32-23


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.5.5

ASSEMBLING PISTON ASSY ONTO PISTON ROD

(1) Install cushion on the extraction side, cushion bearing (13) and cushion seal (14) by the following procedure.

14

PISTON

13

1) Put cushion seal (14) on it, directing the slit machined side toward the piston side. 2) Fit cushion bearing (13) on it directing the flattening side as shown in Fig. 32-52. FLAT SECTION Direct slit toward piston side

Fig. 32-52 Cushion mechanism on extension side (2) When cushion is installed on the retraction side, fit cushion bearing (13) and cushion seal (14) by the following procedure.

Direct slit toward thread side THREADED PART

1) Fit cushion bearing before fitting piston nut. The nut attached obstructs the fitting of cushion bearing.

PISTON ROD

2) Put cushion seal on it, directing the slit machined side toward the piston side. 3) Fit cushion bearing on it directing the flattening side as shown in Fig. 32-53.

SNAP RING

4) Put stopper in the groove. Push cushion bearing to stopper fully, and drive snap ring. Use plastic mallet in order not to damage the rod, cushion bearing.

CUSHION SEAL (Slit 1 place)

STOPPER CUSHION BEARING (Divide into 2 portions)

Fig. 32-53 Cushion mechanism on retraction side

Cushion seal and cushion bearing should be fitted taking care of the fitting direction. If they are fitted in reverse directions, the cushion does not effective. After installing cushion, be sure that the cushion bearing moves up and down, and right and left.

32-24


32. ATTACHMENT (3) Insert shim (20), and tighten piston nut (21) or [piston (15)] till it gets tight. Always tighten the piston nut (21) or [piston (15)] of each piston to specified torque (Refer to 32.2.1.7.3).

In case that piston and piston nut are combined, the shim (20) is not used. Apply the eye wrench to hexagonal part of piston and loosen the piston directly.

Always correct the threads in piston nut (21) or [piston (15)] before fixing piston nut, using a tapping.

Insufficient tightening torque causes an inner leak and a damage of thread. And over tightening torque causes a bulge of cushion bearing and a deformation of piston contacted surface.

Clean and decrease (with solvent) the parts of piston assembly, and dry it, then tighten this piston assembly.

21

EYE WRENCH

Fig. 32-54 Tightening piston nut (21) ANTI-LOOSENING

22 CAULKING

20

2

23

V-BLOCK

21

Fig. 32-55 Attaching setscrew (22)

22

18

19

2

(4) Put steel ball (23) into hole and tighten setscrew (22).

: 6mm After tightening the setscrew to a specified torque, caulk the two places of the thread of the piston nut side to secure the setscrew. See para 32.2.1.7.3 for torque. (5) Attach two slide rings (18) and (19). Take off vinyl tape wound around the perimeter of piston (15), apply high-quality grease (or vaseline) to slide ring (18), (19) and attach the slide rings in a manner that they may be coiled around the groove. Set the slide rings about 180 degrees apart with each other so that the slits may not point to the same direction.

32-25

21

V-BLOCK

Fig. 32-56 Attaching slide ring (18), (19)


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.5.6

OVERALL ASSEMBLY

(1) Place a V-block on a work bench (A wooden Vblock is preferable.). Place the cylinder tube assy (1) on it and fix the assy by passing a wooden bar through the clevis pin hole to lock the assy. (2) Insert the piston rod assy into the cylinder tube assy, while lifting and moving the piston rod assy with a hoist. In this operation, apply hydraulic oil (or vaseline) to the inner surface of the tube mouth and the circumference of the piston. Align the center of the piston rod assy with the center of the cylinder tube assy and put it in straight forward. When inserting, make sure that slide rings (18), (19) on the perimeter of the piston is not out of the groove.

1 LIFT

STRAIGHT

(3) Tighten socket bolt (12). Match the bolt holes of the rod cover flange to the threaded holes in the cylinder assy, and screw in socket bolts (12) one by one. Tighten the bolts to a specified torque, taking care so the bolts may not be tightened unevenly. See para. 32.2.1.7.3 for torque.

PREVENT TURNING WITH WOODEN BAR.

Fig. 32-57 Inserting piston rod assy

12 PLACE CLOTH

: 14 mm ALLEN WRENCH TURN CLOCKWISE

Fig. 32-58 Tightening socket bolts (12) Take care so as not to damage the rod surface by accidentally slip a wrench. Covering the rod surface with cloth is recommended to prevent damage to it.

32-26


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.6

INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY

(1) No-load functional test Place the cylinder level at no load, operate the piston rod 5 to 6 strokes by the directional valve and make sure that it operates without failure.

DIRECTIONAL VALVE

H

Do not raise the hydraulic pressure above the maximum pressure of 37.8MPa (5480psi) for the cylinder of the machine.

Grease coated on the O-rings and the seals of the rod cover may come out. Wipe it off and retest the cylinder in such a case.

(2) Leak test 1) Apply a test pressure to the retracting and extending sides of the cylinder for three minutes independently, and check that the rod section and the welds have external leaks and permanent deformation. For an internal leak test, connect the cylinder with a test unit as shown in Fig. 32-60.

PUMP

R

HYDRAULIC CYLINDER

Fig. 32-59 External leak test MEASURE THE INTERNAL LEAK.

FROM DIRECTIONAL VALVE

Fig. 32-60 Internal leak test 2) After completing the test, apply a plug to each port and store the cylinder. (Fig. 32-61) • For storage, place the cylinder on wooden Vblocks and bring the cylinder to the most retracted condition.

Fig. 32-61 How to store the cylinder

32-27


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.7

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

32.2.1.7.1

INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY

Visually inspect all parts after cleaning to see that excessive wear, crack and other damage that are detrimental to use are not present. (1) Inspection Item Table32-2 Part Name

Piston rod

Inspecting Section

Inspection Item

Remedy

1. Neck of rod pin

Presence of crack

Replace.

2. Weld on rod hub

Presence of crack

Replace.

3. Stepped part to which piston is attached

Presence of crack

Replace.

4. Threads

Presence of seizure

Recondition or replace

5. Bend

Measure degree of bend (See Fig. 32-62)

Refer to (Table32-3)

Check that: 1) Plating is not worn off to base metal

1) Replace or replate

6. Plated surface

2) Rust is not present on plating. 2) Replace or replate

Cylindertube

3) Scratches are not present.

3) Recondition, replate or replace.

7. Rod

Wear of O. D.

Recondition, replate or replace.

8. Bushing at mounting part

Wear of I. D.

Replace.

1. Weld on bottom

Presence of crack

Replace.

2. Weld on head

Presence of crack

Replace.

3. Weld on hub

Presence of crack

Replace.

4. Tube interior

Presence of damage

Replace if oil leak is seen.

5. Bushing at mounting part

Wear on inner surface

Replace.

1. Bushing

1) Wear on inner surface

1) See para. 32.2.1.7.2

2) Flaw on inner surface

2) Replace if score is deeper than coating.

Rod cover

(2) Repair method Check all seals and parts to see that they do not show excessive damage and wear. For correction of scores on the piston rod, observe the following procedure: 1) Correct very fine longitudinal scratches with an oilstone. Replace the piston rod if the scratch is so deep as may be caught by your nail. 2) In case of a smooth indention, recondition by removing the sharp area around the indention with an oilstone. If the score or the indention is excessive, replace or replate the damaged part. • Always regrind after replating. The thickness of the plating must be maximum 0.1mm (0.004in). • In case plating is removed to the base metal during reconditioning with an oilstone, do not fail to replate the surface.

32-28


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.7.2

LIMIT OF SERVICEABILITY

Serviceability limits represent the limits of wear on the sliding surfaces of the cylinder tube and the rod that have no such damage as may degrade the sealing effect. (1) Clearance between piston rod and rod bushing Replace the bushing if the clearance between the piston rod and the rod bushing exceeds 0.25mm (0.01in). (2) Bend of piston rod The allowable bend of the rod is maximum 1mm / 1m (0.04"/3’3"). For measurement, support both ends of the parallel section of the piston rod with Vblocks, set a dial indicator in the center between the two V-block turn the piston rod, and read the difference between the maximum and minimum deflection on the dial indicator.

Fig. 32-62 Measuring Method

Table32-3 shows an example of measurement. Table32-3 Example of Measurement Distance between Deflection of the dial indicator in the middle of the rod. Remedy V-blocks mm (in) m (ft-in) 1 (3’3")

1 (0.04")

Replace

Even if the bend is within the above limit, the cylinder may not operate smoothly because of localized bend. Beware of it during function test after assembly. Replace the rod if the cylinder makes a squeaking noise or dose not operate smoothly.

32.2.1.7.3

TIGHTENING TORQUE

B

32.2.1.7.4

Unit : N.m (lbf.ft)

A C Cylinder

A Piston nut or [Piston]

B

C

Socket bolt

Setscrew

Boom

5460 (4030)

267 (200)

56.9 (42)

Arm

7890 (5820)

367 (270)

56.9 (42)

Bucket

6200 (4570)

267 (200)

56.9 (42)

VOLUME OF OIL LEAK

The oil leak rates as mentioned in 1.6 (2) of Inspection after Assembly are as shown in INSPECTION AFTER ASSEMBLY32.2.1.6 (2). Cylinder

Volume of Internal Oil Leak

Boom

1.0cc (0.06 cu•in) or below / 3min

Arm

1.0cc (0.06 cu•in) or below / 3min

Bucket

1.0cc (0.06 cu•in) or below / 3min

32-29


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.8

TROUBLESHOOTING Table32-4 Trouble

Failed Parts

1. Oil leak through sliding 1. Back-up ring surface of piston rod. Oil ring is formed on piston rod, and the ring grows up to oil drops, and they drip.

2. U-ring OIL LEAKS FROM HERE

Cause

Remedy

1. Foreign matter is trapped in the bore of back-up ring

1. Remove foreign matter.

2. Lips on outer and inner diameter surfaces of back-up ring are scored.

2. Replace back-up ring.

3. Other back-up ring are failed.

3. Replace back-up ring

1. Foreign matter is trapped in the bore of ring.

1.Remove foreign matter.

2. Score is present on the bore of ring. 2. Replace U-ring.

3. Buffer ring

3. Other rings are failed.

3. Replace U-ring.

1. Foreign matter is trapped in the bore of ring.

1.Remove foreign matter.

2. Score is present on the bore of ring. 2. Replace buffer ring.

4. Wiper ring

5. Piston rod

3. Other rings are failed.

3. Replace buffer ring.

1. Foreign matter is trapped in the bore of wiper ring.

1.Remove foreign matter.

2. Lip on the bore of wiper ring is scored.

2. Replace wiper ring.

3. Another wiper ring is failed.

3. Replace wiper ring.

1. Score is present on the sliding surface of piston rod.

1.Smooth out the sliding surface with an oilstone. If leakage occurs even if the sliding surface is finished below 1.6S, rod packings may be scored. Disassemble and inspect it and replace rod packings as required. If leak will not stop by that treatment, replace piston rod.

2. Hard chromium plating has peeled 2. Replate. off 2. Oil leaks from the 1. O-ring circumference of rod cover. 2. Backup ring

1. O-ring is damaged.

1. Replace O-ring.

1. Back-up ring is damaged.

1. Replace back-up ring.

3. Cylinder tube 1. Swelling of cylinder tube.

1. Replace cylinder tube.

1. Cylinder tube 1. Welds of cylinder are broken.

1. Replace cylinder tube.

1. Piston seal

1. Remove foreign matter

OIL LEAKS FROM HERE 3. Oil leaks from welds.

WELDS 4. Cylinder falls by it-self.

[When the rod is loaded with a static load equal to the maximum working pressure multiplied by the area of the 2. Slide ring cylinder bore, the maximum movement of the piston is 3. Piston rod more than 0.5mm (0.02") in ten minutes.]

1. Foreign matter is trapped in the sliding surface of seal ring. 2. Score is present on the sliding surface of seal ring.

2. Replace seal ring..

1. Sliding surface of slide rings is scored.

1. Replace slide ring.

1. Elongation.Piston rod and piston are elongated. (Loose nut)

32-30

1. Replace piston rod.


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.9 32.2.1.9.1

JIGS LIST SPECIAL JIG LIST (POSSIBLE TO SUPPLY)

When assembling, the following jigs are required. Table32-5 Application

A For removing and press fitting bushing

Described paragraph

Shape

D 32.2.1.3.4, 32.2.1.5.2

C

EDGE OF CHUCK

D

For press fitting wiper ring

32.2.1.5.2

E

H F

For correcting seal ring

32.2.1.5.2

G INSERTING JIG

CORRECTING JIG

I For inserting rod cover

32.2.1.5.4

For above jigs, contact our dealer. (The Jig No. List provided by cylinder maker is shown in the following page.)

32-31


32. ATTACHMENT Special Jig No. List (1) For jigs for rod cover, select jig corresponding to respective rod diameter. (2) For jigs for piston, select jig corresponding to the cylinder bore. Table32-6

Jig for rod cover removing & installing

Jig for seal ring inserting & correcting

Application rod diameter (mm)

Kit No. of maker

65

3006J-56001

70

3007J-06001

75

3007J-56001

80

3008J-06001

85

3008J-56001

90

3009J-06001

95

3009J-56001

100

3010J-06001

105

3010J-56001

110

3011J-06001

115

3011J-56001

120

3012J-06001

Application cylinder bore (mm)

Kit No. of maker

95

3009J-51001

100

3010J-01001

105

3010J-51001

110

3011J-01001

115

3011J-51001

120

3012J-01001

125

3012J-51001

130

3013J-01001

135

3013J-51001

140

3014J-01001

145

3014J-51001

150

3015J-01001

160

3016J-01001

170

3017J-01001

32-32


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.9.2

OTHER SPECIAL JIGS (PREPARED BY SERVICE SHOP)

(1) Bushing removing jig (Symbol J)

80 15 R0.2

5 10 25-S

12-S oD -0.2 -0.4

R2

oD -3-4

oD -0.5 -1

C2

15

12-S

50

MATERIAL : Mild steel D 94 94 99

d 80 85 85

Unit : mm (inch) Cylinder Used Bucket Arm Boom

Fig. 32-63 Bushing removing jig (2) Wrench for piston nut or [piston]

Unit : mm (inch) B 110 95 95 B Fig. 32-64 Wrench for piston nut or [piston]

32-33

Cylinder Used Arm Boom Bucket


32. ATTACHMENT 32.2.1.9.3

SPECIAL JIG HANDLING PROCEDURE

(1) How to remove bushing from rod cover. 1) Attaching chuck assy tool Insert tool in rod cover slowly until the edge top end of chuck assy reaches to the end of bushing (4). • Special attention must be paid so that the inner surface of rod cover is not damaged by the edge of tool. • Attach top on the position 5mm (0.2 in) from the bushing end face so that the edge does not protrude from the end face.

4

5 (0.197")

(CHUCK)

2) Tightening chuck assy tool temporarily a. Fit allen wrench to the head of adjuster bolt on the top end of tool, and insert lever in the round hole on the rear end of tool. b. Fix it with allen wrench and lever to the position where the tool does not drop even if the rod cover is raised, inclining it forward and rearward. • Move rod cover onto the working bench holding tool attached. • Be careful not to drop it on foots, etc.

A

32-34


32. ATTACHMENT 3) Attaching tools for retainer Put retainer on the press bench directing the wiper ring fitting section of rod cover upward, then put retainer tool (D) on the rod cover. • Fit retainer tool as shown in the right figure directing large diameter section (flange section) upward. • Clean the surface of press bench, and take care for the tool bottom face not to be damaged by foreign matter like dust, chip, etc.

4) Cutting into of the edge of chuck Press the upper section of retainer tool gradually so that the edge of chuck tool (A) cuts into the bushing surface. Set the pressing force to 2~3 tons (4410~6615 lbs).

PRESS HERE

After completion of pressing, tighten adjuster bolt again by hand. • Press it with retainer tool (D).

CHUCKING JIG A

32-35


32. ATTACHMENT 5) Setting of tools for block Prepare block (C), and put rod cover (3) on it aligning them. Select corresponding block (C) in shape, dimensions, etc. from the table shown below.

15 (0.59") 15 (0.59")

oD od

10

h

10 Unit : mm (inch) Class (Nominal size) o55 (2.17) o60 (2.36) o65 (2.56) o70 (2.76) o75 (2.95) o80 (3.15) o85 (3.35) o90 (3.54) o95 (3.74) o100 (3.94) o105 (4.13) o110 (4.33) o115 (4.53) o130 (5.12)

d

D

h

62 (2.44) 67 (2.64) 72 (2.83) 77 (3.03) 82 (3.23) 87 (3.43) 92 (3.62) 97 (3.82) 102 (4.02) 107 (4.21) 112 (4.41) 117 (4.61) 122 (4.80) 137 (5.39)

88 (3.46) 96 (3.78) 96 (3.78) 100 (3.94) 110 (4.33) 112 (4.41) 124 (4.88) 135 (5.31) 145 (5.71) 145 (5.71) 150 (5.91) 165 (6.50) 170 (6.69) 190 (7.48)

80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 80 (3.15) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54) 90 (3.54)

C

6) Removing of bushing a. Move block (C) and rod cover (3) with tool under the press. b. Press the upper part of retainer tool (D) slowly until bushing (4) is take out from rod cover (3) (until there is a sound that the chuck tool (A) drops on the work bench) • The force of 3 tons (6615 lbs or less) is necessary to press it out. The stroke of press ram is about 32~52mm (1.26in~2.04in). (But it varies according to the difference of dimension of cylinder head.) • Press it with retainer tool (D). When the block and rod cover assy are not aligned, interrupt the work and align the block and rod cover assy.

32-36

D


32. ATTACHMENT 7) Removing of rod cover a. Remove block (C) with rod cover (3) near side, remove retainer tool (D) from rod cover (3), and then move rod cover (3) to other place. b. Take out the chuck tool (A) with bushing from block (C).

D

4

Do not work under the press because it is very dangerous.

A

C

8) Removing of bushing a. Place chuck tool (A) with bushing (4) sideways, and loosen adjuster bolt with allen wrench and lever. b. Place the chuck tool (A) vertically and turn the adjuster by hand until the wedge is raised about 5mm (0.2 in). c. Remove the wedge from the edge of chuck.

• Clean the surface of work bench, and be careful for the tool not to be damaged by foreign matters like dust, chips, etc.

4

A

32-37


32. ATTACHMENT 9) Tightening of adjuster bolt Tighten the chuck tool (A) the bushing (4) is removed to the extent that there is no gap between the chuck and the wedge upper face, turning the adjuster bolt by hand. • This special tool differs according to the corresponding piston rod diameter. • The chuck edge is an important portion. Take care of handling and storage.

32-38


32. ATTACHMENT (2) Rod cover bushing press-fitting procedure

4

1) Temporary setting of head bushing Put rod cover (3) on the press-working bench directing the tube connection upward. Set bushing (4) on the inner surface of rod cover (3) temporarily. • Make sure that the inner and outer surfaces of bushing (4) are free from foreign matter.

3

2) Setting chuck assy tool (A) Insert the chuck assy tool (A) in temporary-set bushing (4) directing the flange downward, and set it on rod cover (3).

A

• Be sure that the adjuster bolt is tightened to the extent that there is no gap between adjuster of chuck assy (A) and wedge.

3

32-39


32. ATTACHMENT 3) Attaching retainer tool Put retainer tool (D) on the wedge stepped section of chuck assy tool (A) slowly directing the flange upward. • Align chuck assy (A) and the wedge.

4) Preparation for press-fitting Move the rod cover on which chuck tool (A) and retainer tools are attached under the press. • Adjust it so that the press ram is centered to the tool.

PRESS RAM

RETAINER(D)

CHUCK(A) BUSHING(4)

BUSHING PRESSFITTING PART

32-40


32. ATTACHMENT 5) Press-fitting of bushing Push the head of retainer (D) with press, and press fit bushing (4) to the specified position of rod cover (3) slowly. STEP OF WEDGE

• The pressing force should be held 5 tons (11025 lbs) or less, keeping the required force for the press-fitting. • Raise the pressure gradually adjusting the force by means of pressure adjusting valve of press unit. • Be sure that the end face of bushing is located on the interior of the groove for snap ring. When it is located on near place, press fit and adjust the location again.

LIFTING THREAD RETAINER JIG (D)

ADJUSTER BOLT

WEDGE CHUCK TOOL ASSY (A) CHUCK

BLOCK TOOL (C)

Bushing removing and press fitting jig (For reference only)

32-41


32. ATTACHMENT

[MEMO]

32-42


33. UPPER STRUCTURE TABLE OF CONTENTS 33.1 REMOVING AND INSTALLING.......................................................................................33-3 33.1.1

OPERATOR SEAT .................................................................................................33-3

33.1.2

CAB ........................................................................................................................33-4

33.1.3

BATTERY ...............................................................................................................33-6

33.1.4

GUARD...................................................................................................................33-7

33.1.5

UNDER COVER .....................................................................................................33-13

33.1.6

FUEL TANK ............................................................................................................33-14

33.1.7

HYDRAULIC TANK ................................................................................................33-16

33.1.8

HYDRAULIC PUMP................................................................................................33-20

33.1.9

AIR CLEANER........................................................................................................33-25

33.1.10 MUFFLER...............................................................................................................33-26 33.1.11 COUNTERWEIGHT................................................................................................33-28 33.1.12 RADIATOR & OIL COOLER ...................................................................................33-29 33.1.13 ENGINE ..................................................................................................................33-35 33.1.14 CONSOLE COVER ................................................................................................33-38 33.1.15 CONTROL VALVE..................................................................................................33-40 33.1.16 PILOT VALVE (FOR ATT) ......................................................................................33-43 33.1.17 PILOT VALVE (FOR TRAVEL) ...............................................................................33-44 33.1.18 SWING MOTOR UNIT ............................................................................................33-46 33.1.19 SWIVEL JOINT.......................................................................................................33-48 33.1.20 UPPER FRAME......................................................................................................33-51 33.2 DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING...........................................................................33-54 33.2.1

HYDRAULIC PUMP • REGULATOR ......................................................................33-54

33.2.2

CONTROL VALVE..................................................................................................33-80

33.2.3

PILOT VALVE (ATT)...............................................................................................33-111

33.2.4

PILOT VALVE (FOR TRAVEL) ...............................................................................33-121

33.2.5

SWING MOTOR UNIT ............................................................................................33-130

33.2.6

SWIVEL JOINT.......................................................................................................33-157

Book Code No. S5YN3322E01 33-1

33


33. UPPER STRUCTURE Issue

Date of Issue

First edition

July, 2007

n

n

Applicable Machines E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~ n

Remarks S5YN3322E01 (NHK Middle East) n

K K

(NHK Middle East) HS Engine

PREFACE (1) This Manual describes all the procedures from removing to installing, arranging them by item. (2) This Manual consists [Removing and installing], and [Disassembling and assembling]. (3) The removing and installing can be performed in the procedure specified in Table of Contents, but in view of actual repairing or time saving some process can be omitted. (4) The removing and installing procedure does not completely cover all possible situations because of differences of field condition and defective section. (5) Recognize well that the service man must decide a work procedure before proceeding to repair. When deciding the work procedure, choose an item that is needed, familiarize yourself with the contents of the work and itemize the work procedure, before starting work. (6) Disconnect the negative terminal of battery first, when the removing and the installing of the electric component and wiring are performed. (7) The explanatory note and figure of this manual may differ from the actual machine by the difference in specification.

33-2


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

33.1

REMOVING AND INSTALLING

33.1.1

OPERATOR SEAT

33.1.1.1

REMOVAL

(1) Preparation for removal 1) Remove the head rest (A1-1) of the operator’s seat (A1) to ease handling.

A1-1

2) Move the whole control stand to its foremost position.

A1

3) Move the operator’s seat to its forward end. B2

4) Incline the reclining seat as forward as possible. C1

(2) Remove operator’s seat. (Include upper rail.) 1) With the above-mentioned condition, remove two cap screws (B2) M8u20 from the upper rail. Then move the control stand to its rearmost end and remove two capscrews (B2) M8u20.

C1

C2 C2

: 6 mm 2) Remove the operator’s seat. [about 28kg (62 lbs).] Carry out the following operations as required.

7

1

3) Remove seat belt (C1).

13

10

4) Remove armrest (A3)(A4). 5) Remove bracket assy (1), rail (7).

Fig. 33-1 Disassembling and Assembling seat 33.1.1.2

INSTALLATION

Install it in reverse procedure of removing according to the tightening torque table.

Tightening position Capscrew (B2) Sems bolt (C2) Capscrew (A5) Sems bolt (A6)

A4 A5

Allen wrench Tightening torque N·m (lbf·ft) HEX (mm)

6 17 13 13

A6

23.5 (17.3) 46.1 (34) 23 (17) 23 (17)

A3

A1 A2

A5

Reference : Movement on rail Upper rail …… Fixed on lower surface of seat [Forward 80mm (0.26in), backward 80mm (0.26in)] Lower rail …… Fixed on seat stand. [Forward 60mm (0.19in), backward 60mm (0.19in)] Amount of adjustment of seat height [Up; 23mm (0.07in), down; 37mm (0.16in)] Suspension stroke [Up; 37.5mm (1.48in), down; 37.5mm (1.48in)]

Fig. 33-2 Disassembling and Assembling armrest

33-3


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.2 33.1.2.1

CAB REMOVAL

(1) Remove floor mat.

A7

(2) Remove cover (A7) Lift cover (A7) upwards and remove it. (Fixed with 2 clips) (3) Remove cover assy (A1) 1) Loosen 4 sems bolts (A22) M6u16 and lift cover assy (A1) up. 2) Disconnect each connector for both speakers. Then remove cover assy (A1).

A22

(4) Remove the harness connector (See Chapter 23)

A1

1) Disconnect connectors of cab harness (CN515), (CN-518), (CN-71) (CN-72) and (CN-500) at rear right of cab. 2) Disconnect antenna cable coming from backside of tuner at rear left of cab.

Fig. 33-3 Disassembly and assembly of cover (A7) and cover assy (A1)

(5) Remove the plastic tube for the window washer from the rear left of cab. (6) Remove the right panel of cab 1) Remove 2 caps (A29) loosen 2 sems bolts (A40) M6u25 and 1 sems bolt (A39) M6u16. And right panels (A4) and (A4-2) are freed.

A3

A14

: TORX driver T30 2) Lift cover (A3) upwards and remove it. (Fixed with 3 clows and 2 clips)

A22

3) Unfix 3 harness clips (A4-8) of inside on right panel (A4-2). And free the harnesses connected to key switch.

A40

B2

A4-8 A4

A29

A4-8 A40

4) With harnesses are connected condition, install key switch cover (A3) to bracket (A1) of rear cab temporally. (See Fig. 33-5)

A39 A4-8

A29

5) Disconnect harness connectors of work light switch on right panel (A4), air conditioner panel and cigarette lighter, and remove right panel (A4) and (A4-2). (See Chapter 23)

A4-2

A22

6) Loosen sems bolts (A22) M6u16 and (A23) M6u40 one each, and remove front panel (A5-2) with air conditioner duct. : Plus driver

A5-2 A23

Fig. 33-4 Disassembly and assembly of right panels (A4-2), (A3) and (A5-2)

33-4


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

RELAY BOX ASSY

Fig. 33-5 Move switch cover assy (7) Remove cab attaching bolt 1) 5 capscrews (A1) M12u65 and 1 capscrew (A3) M12u30. (Mark

B4

)

2) 2 nuts (B4) M16 (Mark

)

(8) Slinging cab 1) Remove two plastic plugs at the front of the ceiling of the cab. Then place a wire sling with eye rings and a hook around the cab, as shown in Fig. 33-7.

A3 A1

2) Then lift up slowly avoiding interference with surroundings. Wire with hook ; Length 1.5m (4ft 11in)uDia. 8mm (0.315in)u3pcs. Weight of cab ; Approx. 250kg (550 lbs) 33.1.2.2

Fig. 33-6 Removing and installing cab mounting bolts.

INSTALLATION

Install it in reverse order of removing according to the Tightening Torque Table.

Tightening position Nut M16 (B4) Capscrew (A1)(A3) Sems bolt M6 (A39)(A40)

Allen wrench HEX

Tightening torque N·m (lbf·ft)

24 19

191 (140) 79.4 (60

Torx driver

(T30)

Sems bolt M6 (A22)(A23) Plus driver

EYE BOLT M10

8.5 (6.3) 5.0 (3.7)

Fig. 33-7 Slinging cab

33-5


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.3 33.1.3.1

BATTERY REMOVING

(1) Open left panel assy (21). 1) Open it with starter key. 2) Open left panel assy (21). 3) Fix it with stay. (2) Remove battery cover (1) Loosen nut (6) M10 and remove battery cover (1). : 17 mm (3) Remove battery cable 1) Remove cable (A4) [between the earth and battery (–)]. (Always remove (-) terminal first and install it at last.)

21

Fig. 33-8

2) Cable (A3) [between battery (+) and (-)] 6

3) Cable (A2) [between battery (+) and battery relay]

Tightening torque 15.7 N.m (11.6 lbf.ft)

: 13 mm 1

Follow the battery removal order. Start removing battery from grounding side, and finish attaching to grounding side. If this order is missed, short-circuits may occur. (4) Remove battery (B1) 1) Loosen 2 capscrews (3) M10u235. A2

: 17 mm

A4

2) Remove plate (2).

A3 2

3) Remove battery (B1). B1

3

Fig. 33-9 Removing and installing battery 33.1.3.2

INSTALL

(1) Install the battery in the reverse order of removing. Hold down plate (2) against battery (B1), and tighten capscrew (3). : 17 mm, Tightening torque : 10.8N•m (8.0 lbf•ft) (2) Installing grounding cable Install grounding cable (A4) last. Especially care must be taken that the grounding face is free from painting, rust, etc. : 13 mm

33-6


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.4

GUARD

33.1.4.1

PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

(1) Remove guard in the following procedure. Remove the guards in the order of (11)o(5)o(6)o(7)o(2)o(21)o(23)o(3)o(4)o (22) and (1).

1

7

2

6

22 5

(2) All the locked cover, open them using starter key.

11 3 23 4 21

Fig. 33-10 Arrangement of guard assy 33.1.4.2

REMOVE GUARD

(1) Remove bonnet assy (11)

2 11

1) Unlock catches (2) and unlatch catches (2), (3), and open bonnet (11).

3

2) Remove four nuts (7) M12. 3) Remove bonnet (11). : 19 mm Weight : 37kg (82 lbs) 7 7

Fig. 33-11 Removing bonnet assy (11) (2) Remove guard (5)

41b

1) Remove 4 sems bolts (41a) M12u25 on upper side.

41a 5

2) Remove 3 sems bolts (41b) M12u25 on the side. 3) Remove guard (5)

41a

: 19 mm Weight :10kg (22 lbs)

C

Fig. 33-12 Removing guard (5)

33-7


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (3) Remove guard (6) and guard assy (3).

41a

1) Remove 4 sems bolts (35) M12u25.

35

2) Remove a sems bolt (41a) M12u25.

6

35

3) Remove guard (6). 4) Remove a sems bolt(41b) M12u25. 41b

5) Remove guard assy (3).

D

: 19 mm

3

Fig. 33-13 Removing guard (6) (4) Remove stay (7) 1) Remove 2 sems bolts (41) M12u25. 7

2) Remove 2 sems bolts (43) M12u40.

41

3) Remove stay (7). : 19 mm 43

A

Fig. 33-14 Removeing stay (7) (5) Remove guard (2)

41

1) Remove 2 sems bolts (41) M12u25. 2) Remove connector for right side deck light.

2

3) Remove guard (2).

Deck light

: 19 mm

Fig. 33-15 Removing guard (2) (6) Remove panel assy (21)

21

1) Unlock panel assy (21). 2) Remove 4 nuts (4) M10. 3) Remove panel assy (21). : 17 mm Weight : 15kg (33 lbs)

4

Fig. 33-16 Removing panel assy (21)

33-8


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (7) Remove panel assy (23)

23

1) Remove 4 nuts (4) M10. 4

2) Remove panel assy (23). : 17 mm Weight : 10kg (22 lbs)

Fig. 33-17 Removing panel assy (23) (8) Remove panel assy (22)

22

1) Unlock and open panel assembly (22). 2) Remove 4 nuts (4) M10. 3) Remove panel assy (22). : 17 mm Weight : 15kg (33 lbs)

4

Fig. 33-18 Removing panel assy (22) (9) Remove guard assy (16) and guard (14), (15), (17). 1) Remove 9 sems bolts (41) M12u25 and a sems bolt (6A) M12u30 and guard assy (17), (15), (16), (14) in order.

41 14

41 41

41

41

16

6A

: 19 mm

17

41

41 41

41

15

Fig. 33-19 Removing guard assy (16) and guard (14), (15), (17). (10)Remove pillar (11)

C

1) Remove 4 sems bolts (42) M12u30 and remove pillar.

11 42

: 19 mm

B B

Fig. 33-20 Removing pillar (11)

33-9


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (11)Remove beam (4)

41

1) Loosen 6 sems bolts (41) M12u25. 2) Remove beam (4). : 19 mm Weight : 13kg (29 lbs)

4

10

12

Fig. 33-21 Removing and installing of beam (4) (12)Remove pillar (10), (12) Remove battery relay box in advance and remove pillar (10). (See Chapter 23)

10

1) Loosen 2 sems bolts (42) M12u30. 2) Loosen 2 sems bolts (43) M12u40.

12

3) Loosen a sems bolt (51) M12u35. 42

: 19 mm 4) Remove pillar (10), (12). Weight : Pillar (10) : 12kg (26 lbs)

51

43

Fig. 33-22 Removing and installing of pillar (10),(12) (13)Remove guard assy (18) and (13)

41

1) Loosen 4 capscrews (33) M12u20, and remove guard assy (18).

19 18

2) Loosen 2 sems bolts (42) M12u20, and remove guard assy (13). 33

: 19 mm Weight : 12kg (26 lbs)

E

13

33

(14)Remove guard (19) Loosen 6 sems bolts (41) M12u25, and remove guard (19).

E 42

Fig. 33-23 Removing and installing of guard assy and guard

33-10


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (15)Remove cover (2) 3 3-1

1) While air cleaner is removed, loosen hose clamp of engine intake and disconnect the hose. 2) Loosen 6 sems bolts (6) M12u25, and remove cover (2). : 19 mm

6

(16)Remove guard assy (1) Loosen 4 sems bolts (6) M12u25, and remove guard assy (1).

3-2 1-2

: 19 mm Weight : 20kg (44 lbs)

5

4

6

2-2 2 2-1

1 1-1

(17)Remove guard assy (3) Loosen 4 sems bolts (6) M12u25, and remove guard assy (3).

6

6 6

: 19 mm Weight : 15kg

6

Fig. 33-24 Removing and installing of cover and guard assy (18)Remove plate (20) Loosen 3 sems bolts (41) M12u25, and remove plate (20). : 19 mm Weight : 15kg (33 lbs)

B

41

41

20 41

Fig. 33-25 Removing and installing of plate (20)

33-11


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (19)Remove cover assy (1) 1) Disconnect the hose (14) which is connected to fuel feed pump and fuel tank. And disconnect the connector of harness for fuel pump. (See Fig. 33-28) 2) Unlock the locks and open cover (1-2).

1-2

3) Remove 4 sems bolts (41) M12u25. 4) Remove cover assy (1). : 19 mm Weight : 30kg (20)Remove other brackets, as required.

1

Fig. 33-26 Remove cover assy (1) 33.1.4.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. (2) Tightening torque

Unit : N.m (lbf.ft) Size

Capscrew

Sems bolt

M8 M10 M12

121 (90)

23 (17) 46.5 (34.3) 80 (59)

33-12

41


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.5 33.1.5.1

UNDER COVER REMOVAL

(1) Remove under cover (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8) 1) Remove attaching sems bolts (9) M12u30 and (10) M12u25. 2) Remove covers. : 19 mm

8

1

4 10

10

2 9

3

10

10 10

5

9

6

9

Fig. 33-27 Under cover assy 33.1.5.2

INSTALLATION

(1) Install under cover (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8) : 19 mm Tightening torque : 79.4 N•m (60 lbf•ft)

33-13

7


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.6 33.1.6.1

FUEL TANK PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

(1) Draining fuel. (See Fig. 33-30) 1) Unlock cap (B2) with a starter key and open it. 2) Loosen valve (A8) under the tank. 3) Draining fuel Capacity of tank : 367L (97gal) (2) Remove stay (7) and guard (2). (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (3) Remove the connector for level sensor (A4). (See Fig. 33-30) (4) Disconnect the connector of automatic fuel stop switch (12).

12 CONNECTOR

(5) Removal of fuel feed hose

8 14 6

1) Loosen 2 sems bolts (6) M12u25.

6

: 19 mm 2) Loosen clip (8) and disconnect hose (14). 3) Install the plug which fits to hose bore. (6) Remove the connector of fuel feed pump (1) from the tank.

1

Fig. 33-28 Removing fuel feed hose (14) (7) Remove fuel hose 1) Loosen clip (16),(23) and draw out hoses (24) and (7). 2) Put in plugs that match the hose bore.

14 21 27 7

Fig. 33-29 Removing fuel hose (7), (24)

33-14


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.6.2

REMOVAL

(1) Remove 4 capscrews (A1) M16u40.

B2

: 24 mm (2) Hook the wire to the lifting eye on the fuel tank assy (C1) and remove the fuel tank. Weight : 102kg (225 lbs)

A4 C1

A6

(3) Remove shim (A3).

Record the shim locations.

A3 A1 A8

Fig. 33-30 Removing fuel tank 33.1.6.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. Tank attaching bolt (A1) M16u40 : 24 mm, Apply Loctite #262 Tightening torque : 191 N•m (140 lbf•ft)

If the gap (looseness) between tank mount and frame exceeds 1mm (0.04inch), adjust the gap with shim (A3) and tighten capscrew (A1) to install the tank. (2) Tightening torque

No.

Name

Q'ty

Tightening torque N.m (lbf.ft)

A1

Capscrew

4

191 (140)

A6

Machine screw

5

1.96 (1.4)

A8

Cock

1

34 (25)

6

Sems bolt

2

80 (59)

33-15


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.7 33.1.7.1

HYDRAULIC TANK PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

(1) Remove panel assy (2), guard (6) and other guards necessary to remove the hydraulic oil tank. (See 33.1.4 GUARD.)

Fig. 33-31 Remove guard (2) Release internal pressure of tank Remove cap on air breather and push valve (head of bolt) by your finger.

Keep pressing until the hissing stops. Fig. 33-32 Bleeding internal pressure of tank (3) Remove cover (C2).

C5

1) Remove 6 sems bolts (C5) M10u25.

C5 C3

: 17 mm 2) Remove cover (C2).

C2

3) Remove suction strainer (B2). (4) Remove cover (C3). 1) Remove 6 capscrews (C5) M10u25. : 17 mm

B

2) Remove cover (C3).

B2

C

3) Remove filter element (B6). B6

(5) Turn the handle of element assy (B), and disassemble the removed filter element (B6). Disassemble parts : (B), (C), (D)u2, (E), (F)

D D

Air breather

E

(6) Draining hydraulic oil Place pump in tank and draw up hydraulic oil. Capacity of tank : 146 L (39gal)

F

Hyd.tank

Fig. 33-33 Remove cover (C2), (C3)

33-16


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.7.2

REMOVAL

(1) Draw out the suction hose (A3) Remove 2 clips (A19) of the tank side and pull out hose (A3). 2 : Flat-blade screwdriver

A19 At installing suction hose, A3 apply PERMATEX to the A12 inner end of both hoses.

Fig. 33-34 Removing and installing the suction hose (2) Disconnecting the main pipe return hose Remove sems bolt (15) M8u35 and remove return hose (3). 9

: 17 mm

6 S/M

(3) Remove drain hose (6) of pump

Dr

: 36 mm

C/V

15

T2

H/P

3

(4) Remove drain hose (9) of swing motor

Dr

Fig. 33-35 Removing main piping return hose

: 27 mm (5) Disconnecting pilot return hose 1) Remove pilot hose (A1). : 22 mm

A1

2) Remove pilot hose (A10).

C/V DR

: 22 mm

A13 PT T

3) Remove pilot hose (A13).

S/V T

: 22 mm

A10

Fig. 33-36 Remove pilot return hose (6) Remove drain hose (2) of pilot pump : 22 mm 2

Fig. 33-37 Removing pump drain hose

33-17


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (7) Remove hydraulic tank attaching bolt Remove 4 capscrews (A1) M16u40. : 24 mm (8) Slinging hydraulic oil tank Place a wire sling, using the lifting plate on top of the tank. Tank weight : Approx : 140kg (310 lbs) (9) Remove shim (A3).

A3 A1

Fig. 33-38 Removing hydraulic tank Record the shim locations.

33.1.7.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Cleaning hydraulic oil tank (2) Cleaning suction hose (3) Cleaning mount of tank. Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. (4) Install 4 mounting capscrews (A1) M16u40 with Loctite #262. (See Fig. 33-38.) : 24 mm, Apply Loctite # 262 Tightening torque : 191 N•m (40 lbf•ft)

If the gap (looseness) between tank mount and frame exceeds 1mm (0.04inch), adjust the gap with shim (A3) and tighten capscrew (A1) to install the tank.

33-18


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (5) Connection of suction hose (A3)(See Fig. 33-34)

O-RING

1) Apply PERMATEX on pipe side of hose connection and insert it. 2) Put the hose with clip (A19). Tightening torque : 5.39 N•m (4.0 lbf•ft)

C

(6) Assembling return element Assemble filter element by the use of element kit (B-100). (See Fig. 33-33,Fig. 33-39)

D B2 SUCTION

1. Two elements (D) are used as one set. 2. Replace O-ring (C) and packing (F) with new ones respectively.

STRAINER YW50V00004F7

F ELEMENT KIT YN52V01008R800

(7) Install return element. (See Fig. 33-33) (8) Installing suction strainer (B2) (9) Tighten sems bolts (C5) M10u25 that attach tank covers (C2), (C3). M10 Tightening torque : 46.1 N•m (34 lbf•ft)

Fig. 33-39 Element & suction strainer

Replace O-ring fitted on the back side of tank cover with new one.

33-19


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.8 33.1.8.1

HYDRAULIC PUMP PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

(1) Release pressure in hydraulic oil tank. (See 33.1.7HYDRAULIC TANK)

C5

(2) Remove six capscrews (C5) M10u25.

C2

(3) Remove cover (C2) Suction stopper

: 17 mm (4) Take out suction strainer. (5) Install suction stopper. For suction stopper, see chapter 11. Tools.

Suction strainer

Hyd.tank

Fig. 33-40 Suction stopper installing (6) Remove guards 1) Remove bonnet assy (1). 2) Remove guard (5), (14), (15), (17) and guard assy (16). 1

3) Remove those parts that are required to remove the hydraulic pump such as the fuel filter assy. 4) Remove drain hose at the bottom of the muffler.

5

14 17

16

15

Fig. 33-41 Removing guards

33-20


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.8.2

REMOVAL

(1) Loosen sems bolts (13) M12u40 and remove half clamp (A10). And disconnect 2 hoses (A1), (A2) from the delivery side.

A13

A1

A2

A13

: 17 mm

A10 C/V

(2) Remove pilot pump suction hose (1) (See Fig. 33-43)

A2

6

P2

A13

A10

A4

A10

: 36 mm (3) Remove suction hose (A3) and drain hose (6)

A1

A13

Dr a2

A10

1) Remove 4 capscrews (B2) M12u30.

a1

C/V

: 10 mm

P1

A3

PH2

2) Remove elbow (B1) of suction hose (A3) from pump.

PH1

3) Remove drain hose (6) (Dr). B1

: 36 mm B2

Fig. 33-42 Removing hoses (4) Removing other hoses

2

1) Disconnect hoses of the following ports.

Port

Hose No.

Dr3

3

Remarks

Tool 22

A3 Dr3

Drain

*Psv1

4

19

Pilot primary pressure P1 side

*Psv2

2

19

Pilot primary pressure P2 side

Psv1

A11

22

Pilot pump delivery

B3

3 Psv2 Psv1

B1

1 SOL/V

A11

P1

Fig. 33-43 Removing other hoses

Remove the parts marked * only if necessary. 2) Attach tags to hoses to identify. 3) Put a plug in the hoses and the pump.

33-21


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (5) Remove connector Remove 4 connectors of all pressure sensors and proportional valves.

Tightening torque 25.5N.m SEMS BOLT (19 lbf.ft)

PSV-P1:

P1 pump proportional valve

PSV-P2:

P2 pump proportional valve

Engine side

CLIP

SE-22:

Using Zip-tie, clamp the corrugated part of harness to the solenoid.

Pressure sensor : P1 pump

CLIP

Using Zip-tie, clamp the corrugated part of harness to the pressure sensor.

SE-23:

Pressure sensor : P2 pump

Fig. 33-44 Removing connector (6) Remove main pump

0

3

1) Put a wire sling on the hydraulic pump and tension the wire sling a little. Loosen 8 capscrews (4) M10u30. : 17 mm 2) Draw out the power take-off assy from the flywheel housing slowly, adjusting the tension of the wire rope. On that occasion, the assembly is drawn out with the insert NA (2-3) remaining on the flywheel side.

4

2-4

2-5

3) Remove element (2-1) from the tip of the spline shaft. 2-6

4) Remove 4 capscrews (2-5) M16u50 that fasten insert R (2-4) and remove insert R (2-4).

2-2

1

: 14 mm 2-5

5) Remove hub (2-2) If you loosen 2 set screws (2-6) M16u22, hub comes off from the spline shaft of the pump.

2-7

2-1

2-3

Fig. 33-45 Removing pump

: 8 mm 6) Remove 4 capscrews (2-5) M16u45 that fasten the insert NA (2-3) with the engine side flywheel, as necessary. Then remove and spring pin (2-7) from insert NA (2-3). : 14 mm 7) Removing bracket (1) Loosen 4 capscrews (3) M20u55, and remove bracket (1) from pump (0).

33-22


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.8.3

INSTALLATION

Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. (1) Installing bracket (1) Tighten bracket (1) with capscrew (3) and install bracket temporarily. : 17 mm Tightening torque : 431 N•m (318lbf•ft) Apply Loctite #262 (2) Installing hub (2-2) Put hub (2-2) into the pump spline till it enters 3mm (0.12in) from the end face of the spline (See Fig. 33-46 Detail aa). Then install two set screws (2-6) and fix them together. : 8 mm Tightening torque : 110 N•m (81 lbf•ft) (3) Installing insert R (2-4) Install insert R (2-4) into hub (2-2) by means of capscrews (2-5). : 14 mm Tightening torque : 210~230 N•m (155~170 lbf•ft) (4) Installing element (2-1) Put element (2-1) into hub (2-2) and insert R (2-4). (5) Installing insert NA (2-3) Put spring pin (2-7) into insert NA (2-3) and install it to the engine flywheel by means of capscrews (25). : 14 mm Tightening torque : 210~230 N•m (155~170 lbf•ft) (See Fig. 33-45 about above mentioned (1) ~ (5).)

33-23


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (6) Installing the pump (See Fig. 33-45,Fig. 33-46) Lift the pump with bracket (1). Place coupling (2) in the groove of element (2-1) so as to receive insert NA (2-3). (7) Coat 8 capscrews (4) M10u35 with Loctite #262 and put them in place. : 17 mm Tightening torque : 64.7N•m (48 lbf•ft) (8) Fasten hoses (A1), (A2) on the delivery side with half clamp (A10) and sems bolt (A13) M12u40. (See Fig. 33-42) : 17 mm Tightening torque : 62.2N•m (46 lbf•ft) (9) Install suction hose (A3) with 4 capscrews (B2) M12u30. (SeeFig. 33-42) : 10 mm Tightening torque : 66.7 N•m (49 lbf•ft) (10)Install the hydraulic piping by referring to "HYDRAULIC SYSTEM". (11)Installing the hose (See Fig. 33-43)

Fig. 33-46 Installing hydraulic pump

(12)Installing pressure sensor connector and proportional valve connector. (13)Remove suction stopper (14)Install suction strainer

When the pump is replaced, replenish more than 1L (0.26gal) of hydraulic oil from the drain port (Dr). (15)Bleed air in pump Bleed air by loosening the drain port (Dr).

Dr

(16)Check hydraulic oil level. (17)Start engine and check it for oil leak and noise. (18)Attach drain down pipe under engine muffler. (19)Install guards (See Fig. 33-41,Fig. 33-19)

Fig. 33-47 Bleed air port (Dr) in pump

33-24


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.9

AIR CLEANER

33.1.9.1

PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

(1) Opening bonnet assy (21) and (23). (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (2) Open bonnet assy (11). (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (3) Remove Panel assy (3). (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (4) Unplug terminals on indicator (1-8) wiring. (See Fig. 33-49)

31 3

23

21

Fig. 33-48 Preparation for removal 33.1.9.2

REMOVAL

(1) Pulling out hose (3). 1) Loosen clips (5), (6) on both sides of hose (3). 2) Pulling out hose (3) : Flat-blade screw driver (2) Remove air cleaner assy (1) 1) Remove 4 sems bolts (8) M10u25 : 17 mm 2) Remove air cleaner assy (1) from plate (4).

Fig. 33-49 Removing air cleaner 33.1.9.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Installing is the reverse order of removing with attention paid to the following items:

Replacing parts

1) Put in air hoses (2), (3) to the end as shown in Fig. 33-49. 2) Tightening torque :

No. 1-8 8

Name Indicator Sems bolt

5,6,7 Clip

O RING (1-6) (YN11P00029S006)

Tightening torque N.m (lbf.ft)

FILTER ELEMENT (1-3) (YN11P00029S003)

3.9 (2.9) 39.2 (29) (Apply Loctite #262)

FILTER ELEMENT (1-2) (YN11P00029S002)

5.9 (4.4)

33-25


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.10 33.1.10.1

MUFFLER PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

(1) Remove bonnet assy (11) and guard (5).

11

5

(2) Remove panel assy (22). (3) Remove guard (14), (15), (17) and guard assy (16). (See Fig. 33-19)

22

Fig. 33-50 Preparation for removal 33.1.10.2

REMOVAL

(1) Remove U bolt (4).

1

1) Remove 4 nuts (10) M8.

4

: 13 mm 2) Remove 2 U bolts (4). 9

(2) Remove clamp assy (5) 5

1) Remove 2 capscrews (9) M10u35 : 17 mm

11

2) Separate clamp assy (5) from muffler (1).

10 10

(3) Removing other parts Remove brackets (2) as necessary.

A 2

8

A

: 19 mm

Attach washer (12) to nut (11) side. Tightening torque: 68.6~98 N.m (51~72lbf.ft) Tighten nut (11) till the no gap is here between plates of clamp.

12,11,9

10mm (0.4 in) from the tip of muffler slit

5 B A

C Procedure of fastening U bolt

Installing clamp side (5)

Fig. 33-51 Removing and installing the muffler

33-26


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.10.3

INSTALLATION

Installing is the reverse order of removing with attention paid to the following items: (1) Procedure of fastening U bolt (4) (See Fig. 33-51) 1) Tighten 4 nuts (A) till there is no space and make sure that the dimension C is even all around. 2) Tighten nuts (A) to specified torque and confirm the C dimensions on the right and left once again. 3) Tighten nuts (B) to specified torque and make sure that U bolts are not inclined. 4) Tightening torque Nut A : 8.8 N•m (6.5 lbf•ft) Nut B : 10.8 N•m (8.0 lbf•ft) (2) Installing clamp assy (5) 1) Place the end of clamp (5) 10mm (0.40in) away from the tip of the muffler slit so the joint of clamp does not extend over the slit in the muffler. (See Fig. 33-51) 2) Install the clamp assy (5) in the illustrated direction. (3) Tightening torque :

(4) Replacing parts

33-27


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.11 33.1.11.1

COUNTERWEIGHT REMOVAL

(1) Lifting up counterweight temporarily Hook wire rope to slinging plate, and lift it and stretch wire rope to the degree where it is providing no slack temporarily. Weight of counterweight ; Approx. 4,640kg (10,230 lb) Wire more than ø16 (0.63 inch) ; 1.5m (5ft)u2 pcs. (2) Removing counterweight 1) Remove 4 capscrews (A1) M27u355. Fig. 33-52 Lifting up counterweight

: 41 mm 2) Remove shim (A3), (A4), (A5). (Select) 3) Remove counterweight (C1).

C1

A5 A4 A3

A2 A1

Fig. 33-53 Removing counterweight 33.1.11.2

INSTALLATION

(1) Install counterweight in the reverse order of removing. (2) Install shim (A3), (A4), (A5) as it was. (select) (3) Slinging counterweight Check that the attaching bolts can be screwed in by hand.

A3,A4,A5

(4) Apply Loctite #262 on capscrews (A1), and tighten them with washers (A2). : 41 mm Tightening torque : 1270 N•m (940 lbf•ft) (5) Remove slinging tools.

A1,A2 Fig. 33-54 Fastening the counterweight attaching capscrew

33-28


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.12 33.1.12.1

RADIATOR & OIL COOLER PREPARATION FOR REMOVAL

(1) Bleed air from the hydraulic tank and install the suction stopper.(See 33.1.7 and 33.1.8) (2) Remove bonnet assy (11) (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (3) Remove battery (See 33.1.3 BATTERY) 4

(4) Remove beam (4). (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (5) Open panel assy (21). (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (6) Removing under cover installed on lower side of radiator.

10

1) Remove 2 sems bolts (10) M12u25.

Fig. 33-55 Removing under cover (4)

2) Remove cover (4). Clip

: 19 mm

19 13 19

(7) Drain down of radiator Put container 18L (4.8gal) under drain valve hose for draining water. [Water capacity of radiator : 5.5L (1.5gal)]

12

8 1

(8) Remove hose from radiator sub tank (1) Remove clip of radiator cap side and disconnect hose (8).

A

A

Fig. 33-56 Removing hose of sub tank (1) Do not loosen the joints of the hoses related to the airconditioner. Otherwise the refrigerant leaks. A

(9) Move air-conditioner condenser and receiver tank 1) Loosen 2 sems bolts (23) M8u25 and 2 sems bolts (6) M10u25. : 13 mm, 17 mm 2) Move a set of air-conditioner condenser and receiver tank. (10)Disconnect connector of coolant level switch (B5). (See Fig. 33-58)

23

34 Tightening torque 46.1N.m (34 lbf.ft)

6

35

Fig. 33-57 Moving condensers and receiver tank

33-29


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.12.2

REMOVAL

(1) Remove radiator stay (A1).

B10

1) Remove a sems bolt (A2) M12u35 and 3 sems bolts (A3) M12u30. : 19 mm 2) Remove 2 stays (A1).

B5

A3

(2) Remove water hose (2),(3)

B9

A1

1) Loosen the hose bands (30) for water hose (2).

B1

A

: Flat-blade screwdriver 2) Remove hose (2).

A2

A3

A3

3) Loosen hose band (30) on water hose (3) and remove capscrew (22) M10u25.

A1

: Flat-blade screwdriver

A2

B

: 17 mm 4) Remove hose (3). A B

Fig. 33-58 Removing radiator assy (3) Remove hoses (4)(5) for inter-cooler

11 17 6

1) Remove two fixing U-bolts (17) from tube (11). 23

: 13 mm 2) Loosen sems bolt (21) M10u20.

C

30

19 21

30

23

C

19

17

D

33

: 17 mm

E

4

B

3) Loosen hose bands (30), (31) and remove hose (4).

15

31 2

: Flat-blade screwdriver 4) Loosen hose bands (30) and remove hose (6).

30

: Flat-blade screwdriver

30

D

E

B

29

31 3 5

5) Loosen hose bands (31) and remove hose (5). : Flat-blade screwdriver

22 22

30 31

Fig. 33-59 Removing hose for radiator/inter-cooler (4) Remove guard (12), (13) (See Fig. 33-56) 1) Remove 4 sems bolts M8u20. 2) Remove guard (12), (13). : 13 mm

33-30


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (5) Disconnecting hydraulic oil hose (1), (2) 15

1) Loosen 2 capscrews (16) M12u55 for attaching clamp (13).

OUT C/V

1

2) Place an oil pan under the hose joint. Loosen 4 sems bolts (15) M12u35, and remove hoses (1) and (2).

T2

16

13

C/V T1

2

(6) Remove radiator assy. (See Fig. 33-58) 16

1) Remove 4 sems bolts (A2) M12u35. : 19 mm

13

A2 15

: 19 mm

IN

Fig. 33-60 Removing hydraulic oil hose (1), (2)

2) When lifting the engine fan, shift the radiator so it does not interfere with the engine fan. 3) Plug up pipe ends with clean cloth, etc. 4) Removing radiator Place a wire sling in the lifting eyes of the radiator assy and remove the assy by crane. Weight : 92kg (203 lbs)

33-31


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.12.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. And removed clips of hose should be clamped at original position. (2) Install radiator assy Place a wire sling in the lifting eyes of the radiator and move it to original position temporally. And install hydraulic hose, radiator hose and hose of inter-cooler. Regarding Inserting width of hose. (See Fig. 33-61)

Insert width of hose

Insert width of hose (

1.3 35 8in)

CLIP

) (1.57in

Torque 5.9N.m (4.4 lbf.ft)

45

40

(1.57in)

: 19 mm Tightening torque : 121 N•m (89 lbf•ft)

(1.77in)

40

(3) Radiator attaching bolt Apply Loctite #262 on 4 semsbolts (A2) M12u35.

(4) Adjust the clearance between the fan and the radiator shroud all around the circumference, as below : Circumferential direction: 20±5mm (0.8in±0.2in) 39±5mm (1.5in±0.2in)

40 (1.57in)

Insert width of hose

CLIP

Torque 5.9N.m (4.4 lbf.ft)

Fig. 33-61 Inserting width of hose

(5) Clean the plastering area of the insulation thoroughly before plastering it. (6) Making up hydraulic oil and LLC (Long Life Coolant) After completion of other installation, make up hydraulic oil and water. Coolant volume of engine body : 9 L (2.4gal) Coolant capacity of radiator : 5.5 L (1.5gal) Hydraulic oil capacity of oil cooler : 2.4 L (0.63gal) Fig. 33-62 Back-and-forth adjusting position of radiator

33-32


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.12.4

PROCEDURE OF DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING THE RADIATOR/INTER COOLER CORE

(1) Preparation for disassembly and assembly 1) Remove one under cover at the bottom of the radiator. 2) Wait till the engine coolant cools down so you do not get burned. Then remove the cap of the radiator, discharge the coolant by opening the drain valve located at the back bottom and receive it in a container. * In case of removing inter cooler only, the above mentioned work is not necessary. (2) Disassembly 1) Loosen each 2 bolts (30), (31) at head and bottom of shroud, remove upper plate (27) and lower plate (28). 2) Disconnect wiring connector of radiator coolant level switch. 3) Loosen 4 sems bolts (9) M8u20 attaching plate assy (10), remove plate assy (10). 4) Loosen 2 capscrews (15) M10u30 attaching radiator core. 5) After confirming that the coolant has been drained out completely, loosen and remove only the radiator side of hose bands (30) at the top and bottom of the radiator. (See Fig. 33-59) 6) Lift and remove radiator core using lifting eyes and hoist on the radiator core. Weight : 10kg (22lbs) Confirm the missing of rubber bushing (14) under the radiator core. 7) Loosen 2 capscrews (15) M10u30 attaching the top of the inter-cooler core. 8) Loosen and remove only the inter-cooler side of hose bands (31) at the top and bottom of the inter-cooler. (See Fig. 33-59) 9) Lift and remove inter-cooler using lifting eyes and hoist on the inter-cooler. Confirm the missing of rubber bushing (14) under the inter-cooler.

Fig. 33-63 Removing radiator and inter-cooler

33-33


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 10) Disconnection of oil cooler hose Disconnect hose (1), (2) from upper and lower of cooler, and drain hydraulic oil. (See Fig. 33-60) 11) Lift cooler temporally using cooler head flange for slinging. 12) Loosen 4 bolts (16) M8u25 attaching oil cooler. 13) Lift the oil cooler.

There is no predetermined sequential order in removing radiator core, inter-cooler core and oil cooler. Removing these components can be done as necessary. (3) Installing Installing is done in the reverse order of removing.

33-34


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.13

ENGINE

33.1.13.1

PREPARATION FOR REMOVING

(1) Remove battery ground (See 33.1.3 BATTERY) (2) Remove bonnet and guard (See 33.1.4 GUARD ) Remove under cover (See 33.1.5 UNDER COVER) (3) Remove air cleaner hose (See 33.1.9 AIR CLEANER) (4) Remove counterweight (See 33.1.11 COUNTERWEIGHT) (5) Remove radiator hose and inter-cooler hose (See 33.1.12 RADIATOR & OIL COOLER) (6) Remove fuel hose and heater hose, and if necessary disconnect air-con hose. (7) If necessary, remove pump, muffler and radiator. (8) Remove harness connector (Refer to ELECTRIC SYSTEM) 1) Remove E/G ground cable 2)

Starter cable-Starter B terminal

3) Remove the connector that connects the upper harness with the engine and ECU harness. 4) Upper harness

CN-206-E/G sub harness P5-Alternator B terminal CN-136-E/G speed sensor CN-141, CN142-Pump proportional valve CN-139, CN-140-P1,P2 pump pressure sensor CN-212-Glow P3-Starter motor C terminal

Prepare a stand, which withstands the weight of the engine assy and can place the removed engine firmly. (Refer to Tools)

Fig. 33-64 Outside view of engine

33-35


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.13.2

REMOVAL 27

27

14

14 2

16

C

27

10

*

12 26

20

27 14 11 11 12

*

20

23

25

23

10 12

3 10 12

11

25

B

36 26

5

11

10

17

3

25 14

Pin

20

20

A

28

A

A

22 30

D

16

2

*

1

17

2

D

5 B

C

Fig. 33-65 Dismantling and mounting engine (1) Remove hose of engine oil filter Place oil pan under the connection of filter (1), and disconnect hoses (2), (16), (17) at connector of filter side and hose.

positions. (2) Plug

: 17 mm, 41 mm (2) Plug connector of filter side and hose. (3) Loosen engine mounting bolt of frame 1) Loosen 4 nuts (20) M18. : 27 mm 2) Loosen 4 capscrews (27) M18u150. 3) Remove 4 plates (14). 4) Remove upper rubber mounts (10) and (11) 2 each. (4) Slinging engine body

Prepare a stand, which withstands the weight of the engine assy and can place the removed engine firmly. (Refer to "Tool".) 1) Sling engine hooking wire to lifting lugs on the front and rear sides. Weight: Approx. 580 kg (1,280 lbs) Wire: ø6 (0.236")u1m (3ft 3in) - 2pcs. (5) Position engine on the stand stably.

33-36


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.13.3

INSTALLATION

Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. (1) Tightening torque

33-37


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.14 33.1.14.1

CONSOLE COVER REMOVAL

(1) Removing right-hand console cover 1) During pushing 4 locked claws of boot retaining plate (4) with flat-blade screw driver, lift the plate (4) and remove it. : Flat-blade screwdriver 2) Loosen 3 sems bolts (16) M6u15. : Plus screw driver 3) During lifting right upper console cover (3A) up; disconnect connector of tuner and antenna. Move boot (3) upwards and remove console cover (3A). •

Removing of boot and lever is unnecessary.

Fig. 33-66 Removing plate (4)

4) Loosen 3 sems bolts (16A) M6u15 and remove lower console (4).

16 3A 16

: Plus screw driver (2) Removing left-hand console cover

16B

1) Remove the boot retaining plate (4) in the same way as right-hand console cover. (See Fig. 3366) : Flat-blade screwdriver 2) Loosen 2 sems bolts (A6) M8u20 and remove left armrest assy.

16A 4

16B

5

16B

16A

16C

6

: 13 mm 3) Loosen 4 sems bolts (16B) M6u15. : Plus screw driver 4) Remove the left upper console cover (5) in the same way as right-hand console cover. 5) Loosen 2 sems bolts (16C) M6u15 while lifting left under console cover (6) up, and remove left lower console cover. 33.1.14.2

Fig. 33-67 Removing console covers

INSTALLATION

Install it in reverse order of removing according to the tightening torque table.

Item

Bolts

A6

Tightening torque N.m (lbf.ft)

16~16C

Sems bolt M6

8.5 (6.3)

A6

Sems bolt M6

23.5 (17.3)

Fig. 33-68 Removing left armrest

33-38


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

This page is blank for editing convenience.

33-39


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.15

CONTROL VALVE

33.1.15.1

PREPARATION FOR REMOVING

(1) Remove guard (6) (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (2) Remove under cover (5). (See 33.1.5 UNDER COVER) (3) Install the suction stopper to the hydraulic oil tank.

1

(4) Remove the hoses in Fig. 33-70 and Fig. 33-71.

Tightening torque 284N.m(209 lbf.ft)

Mark each hose with a port name before removing it.

4 4

Tightening torque 235N.m (173 lbf.ft)

Fig. 33-69 Removing the standard main control valve 33.1.15.2

REMOVAL

(1) Remove 3 capscrews (4) M16u45, and remove control valve (1) by hoist. : 24 mm Weight :Approx. 232kg (512 lbs) 33.1.15.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Installing is done in the reverse order of remove. 1) Install control valve by tightening 3 capscrews (4) M16u45. : 24 mm Tightening torque : 235 N•m (173 lbf•ft) 2) Tread size

PF1/4

PF3/8 PF3/4 M10 M12

Connector / Bolt Ports Pss,PLc2,PBp1,PBp2,PL, PB1,PTb,PCa,PCb,PCc PAa1,PBa1,Pab,PBb,Pac, PBc,PAL,PBL,Par,PBr,Pas, PBs,PAa2,PBa2,Pao,Pbo,DR MU Ar,Br,AL,BL,As,Bs,Aa,Ba,Ac,Bc Ab,Bb P1,P2 T1,T2

Name

Hose nut

Opposing Tightening Opposing Tightening torque torque flats flats N.m (lbf.ft) N.m (lbf.ft)

ORS Joint

Sems bolt

(2) Check for oil leak and operation.

33-40

19

36 (27)

19

29 (21)

22 36 14 14 17 17

74 (55) 162 (119) 42.4 (31) 57 (42) 62.2 (45) 96 (70)

22 36

49 (36) 118 (87)

Remarks


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

Functions

Ports

Ports on upper sides LEFT

Ports RIGHT

P2 bypass cut PBp2 Option Arm (R) relief valve

Functions

PBp1 P1 bypass cut PBa2 Arm 2 in

PAo

Mu

-

-

Arm 1 out PBa1

PBb

Make-up line Bucket (R)relief valve Boom down

Swing (LH)

PBs

Boom conflux

PB1

PAr

Travel left forward

PAL

-

T2

PCb

P1 unload

P1

P1 pump

P2

P2 pump

Tank return

-

Boom (H) relief valve Travel right forward Main relief valve

Ports on rear sides (on machine) LEFT

RIGHT

Ports on right sides (on machine) UPPER SIDE

LOWER SIDE

Bucket dump

BC

Bucket dump

PBc

Bucket (H) stroke limit

PCc

AC

Bucket digging

Boom up

Ab

Bb

Boom down

Drain

Dr

BR

Travel right reverse

Travel right forward

AR

ATT power boost

PL Fig. 33-70 Control valve ports (1/2)

33-41


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

Fig. 33-71 Control valve ports (2/2)

33-42


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.16 33.1.16.1

PILOT VALVE (FOR ATT) PREPARATION FOR REMOVING

The removing procedure for right and left is the same, so the preparation for left side is described here. (1) Put attachment on ground, stop engine and release pressure in tank. (2) Remove left console cover (5), (6) assy referring to Section 33.1.14CONSOLE COVER.

3 2-1

(3) Disconnect harness connector for horn at position.

5

(4) Attach a tag to the hose to make assembly work easier.

* Fig. 33-72 Installing and removing boot and lever part

33.1.16.2

REMOVAL

(1) Remove hoses from your side to far side in order. : 19 mm, 22 mm (2) Move the boot (3) up and loosen nut (5). (See Fig. 33-72) : 22 mm (3) Turn and loosen lever (2-1) tightened in pilot valve, and remove lever assy in a set. (See Fig. 33-72) (4) Remove 4 capscrews (A14) M6u25. (See Fig. 3373) : 5 mm (5) Remove pilot valve. (6) Plug hose ends. Plug PF1/4, PF3/8 Fig. 33-73 Pilot valve connector 33.1.16.3

INSTALLATION

Install it in the reverse order of removal and tighten it.

Front of machine T

: 5 mm T = 11.8 N•m (11 lbf•ft) capscrew

Arm (R) (Green)

(A14)

T

Boom (R) (Gray)

Swing (R) (Red)

Bucket (R) (Blue)

Swing (L) (Gray)

Make sure the tightening torque for capscrews, because pilot valve is made of aluminum.

Arm (H) (Blue)

LEFT SIDE

Bucket (H) (Red) P Boom (H) (Green) RIGHT SIDE

P

Fig. 33-74 Pilot valve port position (from upper side)

33-43


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.17 33.1.17.1

PILOT VALVE (FOR TRAVEL) PREPARATION FOR REMOVING

(1) Release pressure in hydraulic oil tank (See 33.1.7 HYDRAULIC TANK) (2) Remove under cover (1) (See 33.1.5 UNDER COVER)

A1

(3) Remove floor mat (B1).

A7

A2 A7

A8 A6

A5 B1

A8

Fig. 33-75 Removing floor mat, pedal and and lever 33.1.17.2

REMOVAL

(1) Separate the two pressure sensors SE-9 (A9) and SE-10 (A9) at the connector. : 24 mm (2) Attach tag, and discount connectors and hoses (A2), (A3), (A4), (A5) : 19 mm (P port) : 22 mm (T port, 1~4 port) (3) Plug hose ends Plug PF1/4, PF3/8 (4) Remove 4 sems bolts (A8) M8u20, and remove right and left pedals (A5), (A6). : 13 mm (5) Remove 4 sems bolts (A7) M10u20 and remove right and left lever (A1), (A2). : 17 mm (6) Remove 4 sems bolts (A11) M10u30. : 17 mm (7) Remove pilot valve lifting it upward. (8) Stop up holes with plugs PF1/4.

Fig. 33-76 Installing and Removing pilot valve

33-44


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.17.3

INSTALLATION

Install it in the reverse order of removal and tighten it. Sems bolt (A11) : 17 mm T = 37 N•m (27.3 lbf•ft) Sems bolt (A7) : 17 mm T = 46.1 N•m (34.0 lbf•ft) Sems bolt (A8) : 13 mm T = 23.5 N•m (17.3 lbf•ft) Pressure sensor : 24 mm T = 16.7 N•m (12.3 lbf•ft)

33-45


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.18 33.1.18.1

SWING MOTOR UNIT PREPARATION FOR REMOVING

(1) Park machine on firm level ground and place attachment on ground. (2) Remove the guard (6). (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (3) Operate the switch on gauge cluster and select the pressure release mode, and then release the inner pressure in circuit by operating control lever. (See 22.11 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM PRESSURE DRAINING(RELEASING) CIRCUIT) (4) Bleed air from the hydraulic oil tank and attach to each hose a tag showing port name and other information. 33.1.18.2

REMOVAL

(1) Remove hose.

8

S/J

1) Remove hose (7) from the connector in the makeup port M.

9

E

C/V MU

: 36 mm

H/D TANK

Dr

2) Remove 2 hoses (8), (9) from the Tee in the drain port Dr.

7

M

: 27 mm 3) Remove hose (3) from the elbow of the PG port (For swing parking brake) (See Fig. 33-78) B

A

: 19 mm 4) Remove 2 hoses (A4), (A7) from the connectors of the A, B port.

A7

: 36 mm Put in plugs PF3/4, PF1/2, and PF1/4 into the removed ports.

C/V

A4

Bs

C/V As

Fig. 33-77 Removing swing unit piping

2

2

1

PG

A17 A3

Fig. 33-78 Removing swing unit

33-46


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (2) Removing the swing unit Remove 13 capscrews (1) M20u55. : 30 mm 1) Remove two plastic caps (2) M12 at the top of the swing motor and install eye bolts. : Flat-blade screwdriver 2) Put a wire sling in the eye bolts and remove the swing motor unit. Weight of swing motor unit ; Approx. 192kg (423 lbs) (Include reduction assy) 33.1.18.3

PREPARATION FOR INSTALL

(1) Clean mating surfaces of swing motor unit and upper frame. Tools : spatula, wash oil (2) Apply Loctite #515 on entire mounting surface of swing motor unit. 33.1.18.4

INSTALLATION

Install the swing motor unit in the reverse order of disassembly, confirming the orientation of the swing motor unit.

Coat all the mounting surface of 1 the swing motor with Loctite #515 equivalent.

(1) Tighten 13 capscrews (1) M20u55. Detail of swing motor unit assy mount

: 30 mm Tightening torque : 539N•m (400 lbf•ft) Apply Loctite #262

Put sealing tape on the both sides of thread portion of filling tube. Tightening torque 108 N.m (80 lbf.ft)

FILLING PORT

(2) Fill inside from motor drain port to casing with hydraulic oil before piping for drain

Apply Loctite #262

1 equivalent. Tightening torque

539N.m (400 lbf.ft)

LEVEL GAUGE

Put sealing tape on the thread portion of tube for level gauge. Tightening torque 69.1 N.m (51 lbf.ft)

Fig. 33-79 Installing swing motor unit 33.1.18.5

PREPARATION FOR DRIVE

(1) Before starting operation, check that gear oil #90 (API grade GL-4) level of swing reduction is sufficient. Amount of oil : 3L (0.8gal) (2) When starting operation, operate motor in low idling and at low speed for several minutes, and check it for possible oil leak and noise.

33-47


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.19 33.1.19.1

SWIVEL JOINT PREPARATION FOR REMOVING

Remove boom piping hose 33.1.19.2

REMOVAL

(1) Remove travel motor hose and tube 1) Remove 2 hoses (A16). (E port : PF1/2) : 27 mm, Tightening torque : 78.5 N•m (58 lbf•ft) 2) Remove tubes (A1), (A2). (C, D port : PF1) : 41 mm, Tightening torque : 275 N•m (203 lbf•ft) 3) Remove tubes (A3), (A4). (A, B port : PF1) : 41 mm, Tightening torque : 275 N•m (203 lbf•ft) 4) Remove 2 hoses (A7). (F port : PF1/4) : 19 mm, Tightening torque : 29.4 N•m (22 lbf•ft)

(TRAVEL MOTOR) VB (LOWER) (LH) REVERSE VA (UPPER) FORWARD

(TRAVEL MOTOR) VA (LOWER) REVERSE (RH) VB (UPPER) FORWARD

A2

T : Tightening torque of connector N.m (lbf.ft) A4

SWIVEL JOINT

T=255 (188)

A7 B2 T=36.3 (26.8) A7

T=255 (188) A3 A1 T=108 (80)

A16 T=108 (80)

A16

Fig. 33-80 Removing piping (lower side)

33-48


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (2) Disconnecting the hoses on the top part of swivel joint 1) Remove drain hose (8). (E port : PF1/2) : 27 mm Tightening torque : 78 N•m (58 lbf•ft) 2) Remove hoses (A8), (A5). (A, C port : 1-3/16-12UN) : 36 mm Tightening torque : 177 N•m (130 lbf•ft) 3) Remove hoses (A9), (A6). (B, D port : 1-3/16-12UN) : 36 mm Tightening torque : 177 N•m (130 lbf•ft) 4) Remove hose (A7). (Travel 2-speed change over port : PF1/4) : 19 mm Tightening torque : 29 N•m (21 lbf•ft)

Fig. 33-81 Disconnecting the hoses on the top part of swivel joint (3) Remove whirl-stop of swivel joint. 1) Loosen the nut (36) M24. 2) Remove a capscrew (35)M124u130. : 36 mm

Fig. 33-82 Removing whirl-stop nut & the capscrew (4) Remove joint for piping (See Fig. 33-80,Fig. 33-81) 1) Remove 2 connectors (B2). (F port) 2) Remove connector (1) (F port) for travel 2-speed change over. (PF1/4) : 19 mm (5) Remove seal (B4)

Tightening torque 6.8N.m (5 lbf.ft) B9 Tightening torque B8 14.7N.m (11 lbf.ft) To prevent from entering water, apply Loctite 572 or 577 around this plate (B5).

B5

1) Remove 6 capscrews (B8) M10u25. : 17 mm 2) Remove clip (B9).

B4

: Flat-blade screwdriver Fig. 33-83 Removing seal (B4)

3) Remove seal (B4).

33-49


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (6) Remove capscrew for installation Attach eye bolt, lift it up temporarily, and remove 3 capscrews (C2) M12u25. : 19 mm (See 11.7 SPECIAL TOOLS No.9 Plug)

Fig. 33-84 Removing capscrew for installation (7) Slinging the swivel joint Weight : Approx. 28kg (62 lbs) 33.1.19.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. Piping tightening torque

Tightening torque N.m (lbf.ft) O-ring type Hydraulic hose Connector 29 (22) 36 (27)

Size PF

Tool. HEX

1/4

19

3/8

22

74 (54)

49 (36)

1/2

27

108 (80)

78 (58)

3/4

36

162 (120)

118 (87)

1

41

255 (180)

137 (100)

1-3/16-12UN

36

-

177 (130)

(2) Check for oil leak and the hydraulic oil level. (3) Check for operating.

33-50


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.20 33.1.20.1

UPPER FRAME PREPARATION FOR REMOVING

(1) Remove attachment (See chapter 32) (2) Remove cab (See 33.1.2 CAB) (3) Remove guard (See 33.1.4 GUARD) (4) Remove counterweight (See 33.1.11 COUNTERWEIGHT) (5) Remove swivel joint (See 33.1.19 SWIVEL JOINT)

Fig. 33-85 Temporarily lift upper frame 33.1.20.2

REMOVAL

(1) Lifting up upper frame temporarily Insert two upper swing body lifting jigs and 2 counterweight fastening cap screws (A1) M27u335 into the counterweight mounting holes from above. Attach 2 chain blocks to the boom foot side and lift the upper frame at four points. Wire rope ; ø16 (0.630")u2.5m(8ft-2in), 2pcs. ø16 (0.630")u1.5m(4ft-11in), 2pcs Chain block ; For 2,000kg (4,410 lbs) 2pcs. (2) Marking match marks on swing bearing Put match marks on upper frame and swing bearing.

Fig. 33-86 Matching mark on swing bearing and upper frame

(3) Removing upper frame attaching bolts Remove 32 capscrews M20u100 and a reamer bolt (11) used to install swing bearing and upper frame. : 30 mm (4) Slinging upper frame Sling according to Fig. 33-85, and remove upper frame and put it on a stand. Weight : Approx. 5ton (11,000lbs)

Fig. 33-87 Removing upper frame attaching bolts

33-51


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.1.20.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Installing is done in the reverse order of removing.

Apply Loctite #515 to the race surface over the whole circumference (shaded area) on the inside of capscrew.

(2) Cleaning mating surfaces of upper frame and swing bearing. (3) Apply Loctite #515 to the inside of the capscrews on the contact surface. (4) Slinging upper frame Match marks and install it with a reamer bolt (11) and a washer (12) temporarily.

Apply Loctite #262 equivalent. T=392N.m (290 lbf.ft) 11,12

Confirm the reamer bolt positions referring to Fig. 3389.

Fig. 33-88 Bearing mount

: 30 mm Apply Loctite #262 Tightening torque : 392 N•m (290 lbf•ft) Apply Loctite #262 (5) Install swing bearing Install 32 capscrews (10) M20u100. : 30 mm Apply Loctite #262 Tightening torque : 392 N•m (290lbf•ft) Install a reamer bolt (11). : 30 mm Tightening torque : 392 N•m (290lbf•ft) Fig. 33-89 Reamer bolt position (*) Apply Loctite to shaded area

33-52


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

This page is blank for editing convenience.

33-53


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

33.2

DISASSEMBLING AND ASSEMBLING

33.2.1

HYDRAULIC PUMP • REGULATOR

33.2.1.1

HYDRAULIC PUMP

33.2.1.1.1

Structural exploded view

(1) Main pump 983

953 806

981

789 535 886

531 . 548 B

732

534 792 702 532

X Z

W Y

A

728 468

113 123 127 824

127 271 717 490

04

808 954 546901

325

251 401

725

407

312 490 C

124 314

156

B 212

151 . 152

157

717

141

886

727

D

546

153

E

885 886

211

214

261 710

406

727 467 725 466

D E

774

F

A 116 717 124

724

710

313 F

326

111

C 885

Fig. 33-90 Structural exploded view of main pump

33-54

414

05


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

Marks No. 111 113 116 123 124 127 141 151 152 153 156 157 211 212 214 251 261 271 312 313

in Fig. 33-109 show the position where regulator is installed.

Name Shaft(F) Shaft(R) 1st gear Roller bearing Needle bearing Bearing spacer Cylinder block Piston Shoe Retainer Spherical bushing Cylinder spring Shoe plate Swash plate Tilting bushing Swash plate support Seal cover (F) Pump casing Valve block Valve plate (R)

Q'ty 1 1 1 2 2 3 2 18 18 2 2 18 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 1

No. 314 325 326 401 406 407 414 466 467 468 490 531 532 534 535 546 548 702 710 717

Name Valve plate (L) Sensor block Cover Socket bolt ; M20X210 Socket bolt ; M8X20 Socket bolt ; M6X55 Socket bolt ; M10X20 VP plug ; PF1/4 VP plug ; PF3/8 VP plug ; PF3/4 Plug ; NPTF1/16 Tilt pin ; M24X2 Servo piston ; M24X2 Stopper (L) Stopper (S) Spacer Feed back pin O-ring ; 1B G35 O-ring ; 1B G95 O-ring ; 1B G145

Q'ty 1 1 1 8 4 3 4 2 2 4 32 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4

No. 724 725 727 728 732 774 789 792 806 808 824 885 886 901 953 954 04 05

Name O-ring ; 1B P8 O-ring ; 1B P11 O-ring ; 1B P14 O-ring ; 1B P24 O-ring ; 1B P18 Oil seal Backup ring P18 Backup ring G35 Nut ; M16 Nut ; M20 Stop ring Valve plate pin Spring pin Eye bolt ; M10 Socket screw ; M16X30 Set screw ; M20 Gear pump PTO gear case

No. 16 9 3 4 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 2 2 2 1 1

The numbers in a rectangle represent adjust screws. Do not tamper with the adjust screws as much as possible. Tightening torque of bolt, plug, nut and servo piston No.

Thread size

401 406 407 414 466 467 468 490 531,532 806 808

M20 M8 M6 M10 PF 1/4 PF 3/8 PF 3/4 NPTF1/16 M24X2 M16 M20

Tightening torque N.m (lbf.ft) 430 (317) 29 (21) 12 (8.9) 57 (42) 36 (27) 74 (55) 170 (125) 8.8 (6.5) 240 (177) 130 (95) 240 (177)

33-55


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (2) Gear pump (For pilot) 700

354

351

Suction port : PF3/4 Tightening torque : 73.5N.m (54.2 lbf.ft)

433

434 Delivery port : PF1/2 Tightening torque : 53N.m (39.1 lbf.ft) 311 312 732 307

710

435

361

353

850

310 Drain port : PF3/8 Tightening torque : 34.3N.m (25.3 lbf.ft)

308 309

434

466 725

355

Fig. 33-91 No.

Parts

Q’ty

No.

Parts

Q’ty

307 Poppet

1

361 Front case

1

308 Seat

1

433 Flange socket; M8u40

2

309 Ring

1

434 Flange socket; M8u55

2

310 Spring

1

435 Flange socket; M8u20

4

311 Adjust screw

1

466 VP plug ; PF1/4

1

312 Lock nut ; M14u1.5

1

700 Ring

1

351 Gear case

1

710 O-ring ; 1B G95

1

353 Drive gear

1

725 O-ring ; 1B P11

1

354 Driven gear

1

732 O-ring ; 1B P16

1

355 Filter

1

850 Locking ring

1

33-56


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.1.1.2

Disassembly and assembly of main pump

(1) Tools The right list shows the tools required for remove and install. (2) Disassembling procedure 1) Selecting a place for disassembly. •

Choose a clean place.

Spread rubber sheet or cloth on work bench to protect parts from damaging.

2) Cleaning Remove dust and rust, etc. on pump surface with wash oil.

3) Drain oil Drain out the oil in the pump casing by removing drain port plug (466), (468).

REGULATOR

: 19 mm, 36 mm •

Drain out oil from the plug of the front pump and the rear pump.

4) Removing regulator and PTO gear casing Remove the socket bolts [412, 413, 414 (See Fig. 33-90, Fig. 33-109)]. Then remove the regulator and the PTO cover (326). : 6 mm, 8 mm •

Regarding the disassembly of the regulator, refer to article of Regulator.

5) Remove gear pump Remove the socket bolts (435). Then remove the gear pump (04). : 6 mm 6) Remove socket bolt (401) Loosen socket bolts (401) that fasten swash plate support (251), pump casing (271) and valve block (312). : 17 mm Fig. 33-92 Remove socket bolt (401)

33-57


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 6) Disassembling the pump casing and the valve block Place the pump level on a work bench with its mounting surface of the regulator facing down. Then separate pump casing (271) and valve block (312).

312

When facing the mounting surface of the regulator down, place a rubber sheet on a work bench so as not to score the mounting surface.

When the pump casing has been separated from the valve block, draw out the 1st gear (116) at the same time.

271

Fig. 33-93 Disassembling the pump casing (271) and the valve block (312)

7) Drawing out the cylinder assy Draw out cylinder (141) out of pump casing (271) in parallel to shaft (111). At the same time draw out piston (151), plate (153), spherical bushing (156) and cylinder spring (157). •

Use care so as not to score the sliding surface of the cylinder, spherical bushing, shoe and the swash plate.

Fig. 33-94 Drawing out the cylinder assy 8) Remove seal cover (F) Remove socket bolt (406) M8 and seal cover F (261).

406 261

: 6 mm •

The seal cover (F) may be drawn out with ease if it is taken out by tightening bolts in the tapped holes (M6 tap) of the seal cover (F).

An oil seal is fitted to seal cover (F). Therefore, use care so as not to score the oil seal. Fig. 33-95 Removing seal cover F (261)

33-58


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 9) Separating the swash plate support and the pump casing Knock lightly on the mounting flange of swash plate support (251) from the pump casing (271) side and separate the swash plate support from the pump casing.

Fig. 33-96 Separating the swash plate (251) support and the pump casing (271) 10) Remove shoe plate and swash plate Draw out shoe plate (211) and swash plate (212) from pump casing (271).

Fig. 33-97 Removing shoe (211) and swash plate (212) 11) Drawing out the shaft Tap lightly the shaft end (111, 113) by means of a plastic hammer and draw out the shaft from the swash plate support.

Fig. 33-98 Drawing out the shaft (111), (113)

33-59


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 12) Remove valve plate Remove valve plate (313, 314) from valve block (312). 312

The valve plate may come off during the operation under 6). 314 (313 :

Opposite Side)

Fig. 33-99 Removing valve plates (313), (314) 13) Remove other parts If necessary, remove stopper (L) (534), stopper (S) (535), servo piston (532) and tilting pin (531) from pump casing (271), and remove needle bearing (124) from valve block (312). •

When removing the tilting pin, use care so as not to score the head of the tilting pin, using a jig.

It is hard to separate the tilting pin from the servo piston in some cases as Loctite is coated on the mating part between them. Use care so as not to score the servo piston by applying undue force.

Do not draw out needle bearings except when their service life has ended.

Do not loosen hex nuts (806),(808) of valve block (312) and swash plate support (251). A set flow rate changes.

531

806

534

535

532

808

271

312

251

Fig. 33-100 Removing other parts

33-60

124


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (3) Installing procedure 1) Precautions to be exercised in installation Assembly is a reverse order of disassembly, but notice the following. 1. Repair scored parts at disassembly. Get replacements ready beforehand. 2. Wash parts sufficiently in cleaning oil and dry them with jet air. 3. Do not forget to coat the sliding areas and bearings with clean hydraulic oil. 4. In principle, replace sealing parts such as Orings and oil seals. 5. Tighten socket bolts and plugs to specified torques in this manual, using a torque wrench. 6. Do not mix up front pump parts with rear pump parts. 2) Installing swash plate support Attach swash plate support (251) to pump casing (271) by tapping the swash plate support lightly with a plastic hammer. •

When the servo piston, the tilting pin, the stopper (L) and the stopper (S) have been removed, install them to the pump casing beforehand.

When tightening servo piston and tilting pin, use a jig so as not to damage the head of the tilting pin and feedback pin. Coat the screwed part with Loctite #262. Fig. 33-101 Installing swash plate support (251)

3) Installing swash plate Place the pump casing with its mounting surface of the regulator facing down, insert the tilting bushing of the swash plate into tilting pin (531), and fit swash plate (212) to swash plate support (251) properly. •

Confirm by the fingers of your both hands that swash plate moves smoothly.

The shaft be installed easily if grease is applied to the sliding parts of swash plate and swash plate support.

Do not damage the sliding surface of shoe plate.

Fig. 33-102 Installing swash plate (212)

33-61


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 4) Installing shaft Install shaft (111) fitted with bearing (123), bearing spacer (127) and snap ring (824), to swash plate support (251). •

Do not knock on the shaft with a hammer or something.

Fix the bearing by lightly tapping the outer race of it by means of a plastic hammer and set it exactly to the end by using a steel rod and others.

Fig. 33-103 Installing shaft (111) 5) Installing seal cover Assemble seal cover (F) (261) to pump casing (271) and fix it with socket bolts (406). : 6 mm Tightening torque : 29 N•m (22 lbf•ft) •

Coat the oil seal in seal cover (F) with a thin film of grease.

Handle the oil seal with sufficient care so it is not scored. Fig. 33-104 Installing seal cover F (261)

6) Inserting piston cylinder sub Assemble the piston cylinder sub [cylinder block (141), piston (151), shoe (152), plate (153), spherical bushing (156) and cylinder spring (157)]. Align the spherical bushing with the cylinder spline and insert them into the pump casing.

Fig. 33-105 Inserting piston cylinder sub 7) Installing valve plate Install valve plate (313), (314) to valve block (312) by aligning pin.

312 •

Do not mistake the suction and delivery sides of the valve plate.

314 (313 : Opposite Side)

Fig. 33-106 Installing valve plates (313), (314)

33-62


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 8) Installing valve block Install valve block (312) to pump casing (271) and fasten them together with socket bolts (401).

312

271

401

: 17 mm Tightening torque ; 430 N•m (320 lbf•ft) •

Work will be promoted if assembly is started from the rear pump.

Exercise care so as not to mistake the direction of the valve block (312). (Install it so the regulator comes up as seen from the front side and the suction flange comes on the right.)

Fig. 33-107 Installing valve block (312)

Insert the 1st gear into the valve block beforehand and connect it with the spline of the shaft.

9) Installing gear pump Install gear pump (04) and fasten them together with socket bolts (435). : 6 mm, Tightening torque ; 17 N•m (12.5 lbf•ft) 10) Installing regulator and PTO cover Pinch feedback pin of tilting pin in feedback lever of the regulator and PTO cover (326), install the regulator and fasten socket bolt. (412)(413) (See Fig. 33-109] Socket bolt (412)(413) …… For regulator : 6 mm, Tightening torque ; 29 N•m (21 lbf•ft) Socket bolt (414) …… PTO Cover (326) : 8 mm, Tightening torque ; 57 N•m (42 lbf•ft) •

Do not mistake the front regulator for the rear regulator.

11) Installing drain port plug The work is complete when drain port VP plugs (466), (468) have been set. : 19 mm, 36 mm Tightening torque ; 36 N•m (27 lbf•ft) Tightening torque ; 170 N•m (125 lbf•ft)

33-63

Fig. 33-108 Installing regulator and PTO cover


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.1.1.3

Maintenance standards

(1) Replacement standards for abrasive parts Replace or readjust parts that exceed the following standards of wear. However, always replace such parts that show excessive damage on appearance. Standard dimension

Recommended value forreplacement

0.039 (0.0015 )

0.067 (0.0026 )

Replace piston or cylinder.

0 ~ 0.1 (0.004 )

0.3 (0.012 )

Replace piston shoe assy.

Thickness of shoe

4.9 (t) (0.193 )

4.7 (0.185 )

Replace piston shoe assy.

Free height of cylinder spring

41.1 (L) (1.618 )

40.3 (1.587 )

Replace cylinder spring.

23.0 (0.906 )

22.0 (0.866 )

Replace a set of spherical bushing or retainer plate.

Part name and inspection item Clearance between piston and cylinder bore (D-d) Gap between piston and caulked part of shoe

Remedy

( )

Combined height of retainer plate and spherical bushing (H-h)

(2) Repair standards for cylinder, valve plate and swash plate (shoe plate face) Valve plate (sliding section) Swash plate (shoe plate face) Cylinder (sliding section) Roughness of each surface

Surface roughness requiring correction

3-Z

Standard surface roughness (correction value)

Less than 0.4Z (lapping)

33-64


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.1.1.4

Troubleshooting

(1) Locating causes of troubles The pump is usually fitted with a regulator, auxiliary valves and auxiliary pumps, and this makes fault location extremely difficult. However, faults would be found out easily if the following check items were attended to. 1) Inspecting the filter and drain oil Inspect the filter element to check for abnormal contaminations. Some metallic particles will be deposited on it as the shoe and the cylinder wear off. In case metallic particles are found in large quantity, the elements may be damaged. In that case check the drain oil in the pump casing as well. 2) Checking for abnormal vibration and sound Check that the pump does not vibrate and make an abnormal sound. Check that the hunting of the regulator and the attached valveÅfs relief valve are of regular frequency. In case vibration and sound are abnormal, the pump may be making a cavitation or internally broken. 3) When two pumps are used In case two single pumps or motors are used or when a double pump is used. change pump pipelines. This will make clear that the pumps are faulty or the circuit after the pumps is faulty. 4) Pressure measurements If the problem is related to control functions, avoid disassembling the pumps carelessly, but look for causes by measuring pressures. (2) Troubleshooting 1) Overloading to engine Cause

Remedy

Remarks

1. Revolution and pressure are higher 1) Set pressure to specified value. than set values. 2. Regulator torque is set higher than 2) Readjust regulator. normal.

2)Refer to Regulator Manual.

3. PumpÅfs internal parts are seized or 3) Replace damaged parts. broken.

3) Check filter and drain oil to see if abnormal wear particles are present.

4. Regulator is piped incorrectly.

4) Pipe regulator correctly.

2) Pump’s oil flow rate is extremely low and delivery pressure is not available. Cause 1. Regulator is out of order

Remedy 1) Repair regulator.

Remarks 1) Refer to Regulator Manual.

2. Pump’s internal parts are seized or 2)Replace damaged parts. broken.

2)Check filter and drain oil.

3. Attached pump is out of order

3) Replace damaged parts.

3) Remove attached pump and check shaft joint.

4. Attached valve is out of order.

4) Check attached valve. Particularly poppet, seat and spring.

4) Refer to Manual for Attached Valve.

5. Regulator is piped incorrectly.

5) Pipe correctly.

33-65


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 3) Abnormal Sound and Vibration Cause

Remedy

Remarks

1. Cavitation

1) Prevent cavitation. Check that hydraulic oil is not clouded.

2. Caulked part of shoe is broken.

2)Replace piston shoe and shoe plate.

3. Cylinder is cracked

3) Replace cylinder.

4. Pump is installed improperly.

4) Correct installation.

5. Regulator is hunting.

5) Repair regulator,

5) See Regulator Manual.

6. Relief valve in attached valve is hunting.

6) Repair attached valve.

6) See the Manual for Attached Valve.

33-66

1-1) The boost pressure is low. 1-2) The attached pump is in trouble. 1-3) The suction pipe is inhaling air. 1-4) The suction resistance is high.


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

This page is blank for editing convenience.

33-67


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.1.2 33.2.1.2.1

REGULATOR Structural exploded view

626 625 624

753 627

623 621

732 631 898

B

D

F

622 733

874 613

875 612

652

875 643 G

836 654 653 814

646 644

A

651

728

645

611

E

C

897

655

438

630

629 802 756

763

628

924 412 413

656 757

438

Y 418

D

X

E 601

722

496

755

W

Z

079 041 755

466

734 887

876 615

439

A

B

F

642 755

C

876 614

724 730 725

8-724 041 755

466

755

466

641

Fig. 33-109 Structural exploded view of regulator

33-68

755 858

G

708 662

801

755 858


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

Marks

No. 412 413 418 438 439 466 496 541 543 545 601 611 612 613 614 615 621 622 623 624 625 626 627

in Fig. 33-90 show the position where regulator is installed.

Name Socket bolt ; M8X50 Socket bolt ; M8X70 Socket bolt ; M5X12 Socket bolt ; M6X20 Socket bolt ; M6X25 VP plug ; PF1/4 Plug ; NPTF1/16 Seat Stopper 1 Ball Casing Feed back lever Lever (1) Lever (2) Fulcrum plug Adjust plug Compensating rod Piston case Compensating rod Spring seat (C) Outer spring Inner spring Adjusting stem (C)

Q'ty 2 2 2 8 5 3 17 2 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

No. 628 629 630 631 641 642 643 644 645 646 651 652 653 654 655 656 662 708 722 724 725 728 730

Name Adjust screw (C) Cover (C) Lock nut ; M30X1.5 Sleeve (For PF) Pilot cover Spool Pilot piston Spring seat (Q) Adjust stem (Q) Pilot spring Sleeve Spool Spring seat Return spring Set spring Block cover Spring O-ring ; 1B G75 O-ring ; 1B P6 O-ring ; 1B P8 O-ring ; 1B P10 O-ring ; 1B P18 O-ring ; 1B P22

Q'ty 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 8 1 1 1

No. 732 733 734 753 755 756 757 763 801 802 814 836 858 874 875 876 887 897 898 924 041 079

Name O-ring ; 1B P16 O-ring O-ring ; 1B G25 O-ring ; 1B P9 O-ring ; 1B P11 O-ring ; 1B P26 O-ring ; 1B P12.5 O-ring ; 1B G35 Nut ; M8 Nut ; M10 Snap ring Snap ring Snap ring Pin ; 4X11.7L Pin ; 4X8L Pin ; 5X8L Pin Pin ; 4X19L Pin ; 7.5X11L Socket screw ; M8X20 Check valve sub Solenoid proportional reducing valve

No. 1 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 1

The numbers in a rectangle represent adjust screws. Do not tamper with the adjust screws as much as possible. Tightening torque of bolt, plug and nut No.

Thread size

412,413 438,439 418 466 496 630 801 802

M8 M6 M5 PF 1/4 NPTF1/16 M30X1.5 M8 M10

Tightening torque

N.m (lbf.ft) 29 (21) 12 (8.9) 6.9 (5) 36 (26) 8.8 (6.5) 160 (118) 16 (12) 19 (14)

33-69


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.1.2.2

Disassembly and assembly

(1) Tools The right list shows the tools required for remove and install. (2) Disassembling procedure 1) Selecting a place for disassembly. •

Choose a clean place.

Spread rubber sheet or cloth on work bench to protect parts from damaging.

2) Cleaning Remove dust and rust, etc. on regulator surface with wash oil.

3) Remove regulator (SeeFig. 33-109) Remove socket bolts (412, 413) and separate the regulator from the pump body.

438 656

413

412 629

: 6 mm 4) Remove port plate (See Fig. 33-109) Remove socket bolt (438) and separate the port plate (656).

438 601

: 5 mm

Fig. 33-110 Removing regulator 5) Remove cover (See Fig. 33-109) Remove socket bolts (438) and remove cover (C) (629). : 5 mm •

624,625,626

The cover is equipped with adjust screws (628), adjust stem (627), lock nut (630), hex nut (801) and set screw (924). Do not loosen those screws and nuts. If they are loosened, preadjusted set pressure and flow values change.

627 801 629( 628 )

630 924 Fig. 33-111 Removing cover (C) (629)

33-70


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 6) Remove compensating parts (See Fig. 33-109 (D) section, See Fig. 33-111, Fig. 33-112) After removing the cover (C) (629) sub assy, take out outer spring (625), inner spring (626) and spring seat (624) from the compensating part. Then take out adjust stem (645), pilot spring (646) and spring seat (644) from the pilot part. •

Adjust stem (645) comes out easily if an M4 bolt is used. Fig. 33-112 Removing compensating parts

7) Remove pilot cover and the set spring Remove socket bolt (439) and pilot cover (641). Once the pilot cover comes off, separate set spring (655) from the pilot section. (Fig. 33-109 (A) and (B) section) : 5 mm

439 641 Fig. 33-113 Removing pilot cover (641) and set spring (655) 8)Remove spring seat, return spring and sleeve (Fig. 33-109 (A) section) Remove snap ring (814). Then remove spring seat (653), return spring (654) and sleeve (651). •

Sleeve (651) is equipped with snap ring (836).

When removing snap ring (814), return spring (654) comes out : Use care so as not to lose it. Fig. 33-114 Removing spring seat (653), return spring (654) and sleeve (651)

9) Remove adjust plug (Fig. 33-109 (F),(G) section) emove snap ring (858) and take out fulcrum plug (614) and adjust plug (615). •

Fulcrum plug (614) and adjust plug (615) come off easily if a M6 bolt is used.

Fig. 33-115 Removing adjust plug (615)

33-71


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

Fig. 33-116 Removing fulcrum plug (614) 10) Remove lever (Fig. 33-109 (G) section) Remove lever 2 (613). Do not draw out pin (875). •

The work is eased if tweezers is used.

Fig. 33-117 Removing lever 2 (613) 11) Remove feedback lever Draw out pin (874) and remove feedback lever (611). •

Push out pin (874) [pin dia : ø4mm (0.157in)] from above with a slender steel rod so as not to interfere with lever 1 (612).

Fig. 33-118 Removing feedback lever (611) [1]

Fig. 33-119 Removing feedback lever (611) [2]

33-72


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 12)Remove lever (Fig. 33-109 (F) section) Remove lever 1 (612). Do not draw out pin (875). 13) Remove pilot piston and spool (Fig. 33-109 (C),(A) section) Draw out pilot piston (643) and spool (652). 14) Remove piston casing, compensating piston and compensating rod (Fig. 33-109 (B) section) Draw out piston casing (622), compensating piston (621) and compensating rod (623). •

Piston casing (622) comes out from the opposite side of the piston casing if compensating rod (623) is pushed out.

Fig. 33-120 Part of exploded view of regulator 15) Remove spool (642) and spring (662) Remove VP plug (466) from pilot cover (641), and draw out spool (642) and spring (662). This completes disassembly.

Fig. 33-121 Part of exploded view of regulator

33-73


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (3) Installing procedure : Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly. Do the work paying attention to the following : • Repair those parts that were damaged during disassembly and prepare replacement parts beforehand. • If foreign matter enters, it causes malfunction; clean parts thoroughly in cleaning oil, blow them with jet air and assemble parts in a clean place. • Always tighten bolts and plugs to the specified torque. The tolerance of torque should be within 10%. • Do not fail to coat the moving parts with clean hydraulic oil, before assembly. • In principle, replace seals such as O-ring. 1) Installing compensating rod (Fig. 33-109 (B) section) Assemble compensating rod (623) into the compensating hole of casing (601). 2) Assembling lever Put the pin pressed in lever 1 (612) into the groove of the compensating rod (623). Then assemble the lever to the pin (875) that is pressed in the casing. Fig. 33-122 Part of exploded view of regulator 3) Assembling spool and sleeve (See Fig. 33-109 (A) section) Assemble spool (652) and sleeve (651) into the spool hole of the casing. •

Make sure that the spool and the sleeve move smoothly in the casing.

Beware of the direction of the spool.

Fig. 33-123 Direction of the spool (652)

4) Assembling feedback lever Assemble feedback lever (611). Then put pin (874) into the pin hole of the feedback lever. •

The work is eased if the pin is put in the feedback lever a little, beforehand.

Take care so as not to mistake the direction of the feedback lever.

Fig. 33-124 Assembling feedback lever (611)

33-74


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 5) Assembling pilot piston (See Fig. 33-109 (C) section) Assemble pilot piston (643) into the positive control hole of the casing. •

Make sure that the pilot piston moves smoothly.

6) Assembling lever (See Fig. 33-109 (G) section) Place pin (875) pressed in lever 2 (613) into the groove of the pilot piston and assemble lever 2 (613).

Fig. 33-125 Assembling lever 2 (613)

7) Installing fulcrum plug (See Fig. 33-109 (F) section) Assemble fulcrum plug (614) so pin (875) pressed in the fulcrum comes in the pin hole of lever 2 (613). Then fit snap ring (858).

Fig. 33-126 Installing fulcrum plug (614) 8) Installing adjust plug (See Fig. 33-109 (G) section) Insert adjust plug (615) and fit a snap ring (858). •

Use care so as not to mistake the holes into which the fulcrum and adjust plug are inserted.

•

At this point, operate the feedback lever and make sure that the gap is not large and that the lever moves smoothly. Fig. 33-127 Installing adjust plug (615)

9) Installing return spring and the spring seat (See Fig. 33-109 (A) section) Assemble return spring (654) and spring seat (653) into the spool hole and fit snap ring (814).

Fig. 33-128 Installing return spring (654) and spring seat (653)

33-75


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 10) Assembling compensating parts (See Fig. 33109 (A),(B) section) Assemble set spring (655) into the spool hole. Place compensating piston (621) and piston casing (622) into the compensating hole and attach pilot cover (641). Then fasten them together with socket bolts (438), (439). : 5 mm Tightening torque ; 12 N•m (8.7 lbf•ft) Fig. 33-129 Assembling compensating parts 11) Installing spool and spring Assemble spool (642) and spring (662) into pilot cover (641), and tighten VP plugs (466).

Fig. 33-130 Assembling spool (642) 12) Assembling into the pilot hole and the compensating hole (See Fig. 33-109 (E),(D) section) Put spring seat (644), pilot spring (646) and adjust stem (645) into the pilot hole. Then assemble spring seat (624), inner spring (626) and outer spring (625) into the compensating hole. •

Do not mistake the direction of the spring seat.

Fig. 33-131 Assembling into the pilot hole and compensating hole

13) Installing cover Attach cover (C) (629) fitted with adjust screws (628), (925), adjust stem (627), lock nut (630), nut (801) and socket bolt (924). Then fasten them with socket bolts (438). : 5 mm Tightening torque ; 12 N•m (8.7 lbf•ft) 14) Installing block cover (See Fig. 33-110) Attach block cover (656). : 5 mm Tightening torque ; 12 N•m (8.7 lbf•ft) Fig. 33-132 Installing cover (C) (629) This completes assembly.

33-76


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.1.3

PTO GEAR CASING (For OCEANIA)

33.2.1.3.1

Structural exploded view

414 117

128

128 435

216

826

886

711

326

414 115

886

262 728

125

885

468

118 125 825 435

710

435

414

262

414

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

33 (25)

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

115 Idle shaft

1

33 (25)

435 Flange socket ; M10u20

4

117 2nd gear

1

74 (54)

468 VP plug ; PF3/4

1

118 3re gear

1

710 O-ring ; 1B G80

1

125 Ball bearing

2

711 O-ring ; 1B G85

1

126 Roller bearing

1

728 O-ring ; 1B P24

1

128 Bearing spacer

2

825 Snap ring

1

262 Cover

2

826 Snap ring

1

326 Gear casing

1

885 Spring pin

1

414 Socket bolt ; M10u20

4

886 Pin

2

No.

Parts name

33-77

No.

Parts name

Q’ty


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.1.3.2

Disassembly and assembly

(1) Tools The right list shows the tools required for remove and install.

Tool name

(2) Disassembling procedure

Dimension

Allen wrench

Opposing flats 8,10mm

Plier

For snap ring RR-20 For snap ring RR-72

1) Selecting a place for disassembly. •

Choose a clean place.

Spread rubber sheet or cloth on work bench to protect parts from damaging.

2) Cleaning Remove dust and rust, etc. on pump surface with wash oil. 3) Drain oil Drain out the oil in the pump casing by removing drain port plug (468). : 27 mm •

Drain out the oil from the plugs of the front pump and the rear pump.

4) Remove cover Remove the socket bolts (414). Then remove the cover (262).

FLANGE SOCKET (M10) Tightening torque : 33N.m (25 lbf.ft)}

: 8 mm 5) Remove PTO gear casing Remove flange socket (435) and PTO gear casing.

414

: 8 mm

262 COVER PTO GEAR CASING

414 262 COVER Fig. 33-133 Removing gear pump

HOLE FOR FLANGE SOCKET (435)

PTO GEAR CASING

Fig. 33-134 Removing PTO gear casing

33-78


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 6) Removing the 2nd gear, the roller bearing and the bearing spacer Draw out the spring pin (885) and remove idle shaft (115). Then draw out 2nd gear (117), roller bearing (126) and bearing spacer (128). •

HOLE FOR IDLE SHAFT (115)

117 (126,128)

Roller bearing (126) can not be separated from 2nd gear (117).

Fig. 33-135 Removing 2nd gear (117) 7) Removing the 3rd gear and the ball bearing Remove snap ring (825) and draw out 3rd gear (118) and ball bearing (125). •

Ball bearing (125) can not be separated from 3rd gear (118).

125

118

Fig. 33-136 Removing 3rd gear (118) and ball bearing (125) (3) Installing procedure Assembly is a reverse order of disassembly, but notice the following. 1) Repair scored parts at disassembly. Get replacements ready beforehand. 2) Wash parts sufficiently in cleaning oil and dry them with jet air. 3) Do not forget to coat the sliding areas and bearings with clean hydraulic oil. 4) In principle. replace sealing parts such as O rings and oil seals. 5) Tighten socket bolts and plugs to specified torques in Service Standard, using a torque wrench. 6) Do not mix up front pump parts with rear pump parts. 33.2.1.3.3

Maintenance standards

In case a pitching (1 pit is more than 1mm (0.039in), while the area ratio is more than 5%.) is seen on the gear tooth surface of 2nd gear (117) and 3rd gear (118), replace the gears. Replace the gears also in case they show excessive damage.

33-79


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

SECTIONAL VIEW J 164

154

T2

T1

YT1

PAL

PBL

J

PCa P2-20

YBG1

PB1

PBs

101

P2

PAs

YS1

Pss PBa1

PAa1

YA1

33.2.2.1

CONTROL VALVE

PAo

PBo

YP1

33.2.2

163

(P4)

162 163 169 155 162 SECTION A-A 154

164

P1

102

973

973 PCb

PTb P1-20

973

973 YT1

PBr

PAr

973 YB1

PAb

PBb

973

973

PBc PCc YK1

PAc

974

973 YAG 1

PAa2

974

162

(P3)

162 169 155 163

SECTION B-B

Fig. 33-137 Section (1/6)

33-80

162

PBa2


33. UPPER STRUCTURE A B

H

T2

273x10 P1 unload

977 Travel right

D

273x10

H

Travel left

(Travel straight)

C

USE FOR YN30V00101F1

C

PAL

PCb

PAr

PB1

Boom conflux (P2 unload)

978x2

D PBs

Boom

Swing

E

PBb

PCc

E

Pss

PBa1

Bucket

Arm 1

F

F PA PAo

PBa2

Arm 2

Option

MU

G

G K

(P3)

PBp1

K PBp2

B

A PAo

PBa2

PBp1

PBp2

274x4

275x4 (P4)

(P3)

212

PAa2

273x10

PBo

273x10

Fig. 33-138 Section (2/6)

33-81

213


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

Fig. 33-139 Section (3/6)

33-82


33. UPPER STRUCTURE Swing 203 333 331 336 322 321 603 331 211 261 266 160 160 514 524 556 164 511 521 551 164

204

PBs

Boom

333

Pss

331 336 AbR

322 321

266

As

CRb Ab

LCs

LCb

Bb

Bs

331 261 303 161 162 163 511 523 556 164 162 161

301 264 602

266 264 206

PAb

205

160

BbR

164 551 209 216 333 331 336 322 321 602

PAs

SECTION E-E Bucket

PCc

201 333 331 336 322 321 603 331 261 211

Arm 1

PBa1

PBc

BaR

BcR

331 261 304 CRar

Bc

511 521 551 164

Ba LCc

LCa

160 514 524 556 164 511 521 551 164

Ac

162

Aa

161 264 603 205

PAc AcR

302 264

PAa1

SECTION F-F

Fig. 33-140 Section (4/6)

33-83

AaR

205 605


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 201 333 331 340 328 321

Arm 2

Option

PBa2

201 333

PAo

331 336

331 261

324 AoR

323 604 331

MU

308

261 311

162 162 162 511 521 551 164 515 521

Ao

511 521

LCAT2 LCo LCAP2

551

551 164

164 Bo

162 161

604 264

BoR

264

PBo

PAa2

205

205

SECTION G-G

T2

161 P1

511 521

T1

163

CT1

551 164

163 162 511 521

P2 CT2

551 164

SECTION H-H

Fig. 33-141 Section (5/6)

33-84


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

PBp1

207

PBp2

606

160 278x5

266

264

264

527

528 T2

517

606

163

T1

518

SECTION J-J SECTION K-K

Fig. 33-142 Section (6/6)

33-85


33. UPPER STRUCTURE Tightening torque No. N•m (lbf•ft)

Parts name

Q’ty

Tightening torque No. N•m (lbf•ft)

Parts name

Q’ty

101 Casing A

1

321 Spring

5

102 Casing B

1

322 Spring

4

220~250(162~184) 154 Plug PF3/4

3

323 Spring

3

110~130(81~96)

155 Plug PF1/2

2

324 Spring

3

20~24(15~18)

159 Plug PT1/4 (Capsule coating)

1

325 Spring

1

7.8~9.8(5.8~7.2)

160 Plug PT1/16 (Capsule coating)

5

326 Spring

1

161 O-ring

7

327 Spring

3

162 O-ring

15

328 Spring

1

163 O-ring

11

329 Spring

3

164 O-ring

19

331 Spring seat

24

333 Spacer bolt

12

16~18(11~13)

169 O-ring

2

201 Cover

5

336 Stopper

10

202 Cover

4

339 Stopper

1

203 Cover

1

340 Stopper

1

204 Cover sub

1

511 Poppet

11

205 Cover

7

512 Poppet

2

206 Cover

1

514 Poppet

2

1

515 Poppet

1

209 Cover

1

517 Poppet

1

211 Lock valve selector sub

2

518 Poppet

1

212 Plate

1

521 Spring

11

213 Plate

1

522 Spring

2

216 Piston

1

523 Spring

1

261 O-ring

12

524 Spring

2

264 O-ring

10

527 Spring

1

266 O-ring

4

528 Spring

1

25~34(18~25)

273 Socket bolt

40

98~120(72~89)

274 Socket bolt

4

98~120(72~89)

275 Socket bolt

4

25~34(18~25)

278 Socket bolt

5

301 Bom spool sub

1

302 Arm 1 spool

207

9.8~14(7.2~13)

Back pressure check valve cover

Loctite #262

230~260(170~192) 551 Plug

13

552 Plug

2

230~260(170~192) 556 Plug

3

130~150(96~111)

562 O-ring

2

69~78(51~58)

601 Main relief valve

1

1

69~78(51~58)

602 Over load relief valve

2

303 Swing spool

1

69~78(51~58)

603 Over load relief valve

3

304 Bucket spool

1

69~78(51~58)

604 Plug assy for relief valve hole

2

305 Boom conflux spool

1

69~78(51~58)

605 Over load relief valve

1

306 Travel spool

2

98~120(72~89)

606 By-pass cut valve

2

307 Travel straight spool

1

140~180(103~133) 973 Socket bolt

8

308 Arm 2 spool sub

1

140~180(103~133) 974 Socket bolt

2

309 P1 unload spool

1

977 Name plate

1

310 P2 unload spool

1

978 Pakerrizing rivet

2

311 Option spool

1

33-86


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.2

PREPARATION FOR DISASSEMBLY

(1) General precautions 1) As all the hydraulic components are precisely machined, it is essential to carry out disassembly and reassembly in an especially clean location. 2) When handling the control valve, take special care to prevent the entry of foreign matter, such as dust or sand. 3) Cap each port of the control valve before removing the valve from the machine. Before disassembly, confirm that each cap is in place and then clean the exterior of the assembly. Use a workbench. Lay a clean sheet of paper or rubber mat over the workbench. 4) When carrying or moving the control valve, hold the body, and never put pressure on a lever, an exposed spool, or the end cover. Handle the valve with care. 5) Tests(for relief characteristics, leaks, overload valve setting, flow resistance, etc.) that are desired after disassembly and reassembly require hydraulic testing apparatus. For this reason, do not disassemble hydraulic units that you are capable of disassembling but cannot test or adjust. Prepare beforehand washing fluid, hydraulic oil, grease, etc. . (2) Tools Prepare the following tools before disassembling the control valve. No.

Tools

Q’ty

Remarks

a

Vise

1

b

Box end wrench

1 of each 24mm, 27mm, 32mm size

c

Allen wrench

1 of each 5mm, 6mm, 10mm, 12mm, 14mm, 22mm size

d

Spanner

1

e

Loctite #262

1

f

Spatula

1

g

Pincers

1

h

Adjustable wrench

1

33.2.2.3

32 mm

DISASSEMBLY

The figures in parentheses after part names in this manual represent those item numbers in the structural sectional drawing under Fig. 33-137 to Fig. 33-142. (1) Place the control valve on a work bench so as to locate back pressure check valve upwards.

Disassemble the valve in a clean place, and be careful not to damage flange surfaces or plate mounting surfaces. Fig. 33-143 Preparation for disassembly

33-87


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.1

Disassembling P1 unload spool

(1) Loosen the socket bolts (273) and remove the spring cover (202) and the O-ring (261) for P1 unload spool.

Fig. 33-144 Removing spring cover (202) for P1 unload spring cover (2) Draw out, from casing B (102), as a assy of P1 unload spool (309), spring seat (331), springs (327), (329), stopper (336) and bolt (333).

When drawing out the spool assy, use care so as not to score casing B (102).

Fig. 33-145 Drawing out P1 unload spool assy (309) (3) Fix the P1 unload spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate, etc.) and remove bolt (333). Then separate spring seat (331), springs (327), (329) and stopper (336) from P1 unload spool (309).

Fig. 33-146 Disassembling P1 unload spool assy (309)

33-88


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.2

Disassembling the travel spool (left travel and right travel)

(1) Loosen the socket bolts (273) and remove the spring cover (201) and the O-ring (261) for travel.

Fig. 33-147 Removing spring cover (201) (2) Draw out the assy of travel spool (306), spring seat (331), springs (323), (324), stopper (336) and bolt (333) from casing A (101) or casing B (102).

When drawing out the spool assy, take care so as not to score the casing A (101) or the casing B (102).

Fig. 33-148 Drawing out travel spool (306) assy (3) Fix the travel spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate, etc.). Remove bolt (333) and separate spring seat (331), springs (323), (324) and stopper (336) from travel spool (306).

Fig. 33-149 Removing right travel spring cover (201)

Fig. 33-150 Disassembling travel spool (306) assy

33-89


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.3

Disassembling the boom conflux spool

(1) Loosen socket bolts (273) and remove spring cover (201) for boom conflux and O-ring (261). (2) Draw out the assy of boom conflux spool (305), spring seat (331), springs (325), (326), stopper (339) and bolt (333) from casing A (101).

When drawing out the spool assy, use care so as not to score casing A (101).

Fig. 33-151 Removing spring cover (202)

(3) Fix the boom conflux spool with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate, etc.) and remove bolt (333). Then separate spring seat (331), springs (325), (326) and stopper (339) from boom conflux spool (305).

Fig. 33-152 Drawing out boom conflux spool (305) assy 33.2.2.3.4

Disassembling the boom spool

(1) Loosen socket bolts (273) and remove spring cover (203) for boom spool and O-ring (261), (266). (2) Draw out the assy of boom spool (301), spring seat (331), springs (321), (322), stopper (336) and bolt (333) from casing B (102).

When drawing out the spool assy, take care so as not to score casing B (102).

Fig. 33-153 Removing spring cover (203)

33-90


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (3) Fix the boom spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate, etc.) and remove bolt (333). Then separate spring seat (331), springs (321), (322) and stopper (336) from boom spool (301). Do not disassemble boom spool (301) further unless there is special reason.

Fig. 33-154 Drawing out boom spool (301) assy 33.2.2.3.5

Disassembling the swing spool

(1) Loosen the socket bolts (273) and remove the spring cover sub (204) and the O-ring (261), (266) for swing. Do not disassemble spring cover sub (204) further unless there is special reason. (2) Draw out the assy of swing spool (303), spring seat (331), springs (321), (322), stopper (336) and bolt (333) from casing A (101).

When drawing out the spool assy, use care so as not to score casing A (101).

Fig. 33-155 Removing spring cover sub (204)

(3) Fix the swing spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate, etc.) and remove bolt (333). Then separate spring seat (331), springs (321), (322) and stopper (336) from swing spool (303).

Fig. 33-156 Drawing out swing spool (303) assy

33-91


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.6

Disassembling bucket spool

(1) Loosen socket bolts (273) and remove bucket spring cover (209) and O-ring (261).

Fig. 33-157 Removing spring cover (209) (2) Draw out the assy of bucket spool (304), spring seat (331), springs (321), (322), stopper (336) and bolt (333) from casing B (102).

When drawing out the spool assy, use care so as not to score casing B (102).

Fig. 33-158 Drawing out bucket spool (304) assy (3) Fix the bucket spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate, etc.) and remove bolt (333). Then separate spring seat (331), springs (321), (322) and stopper (336) from bucket spool (304). (4) When needed to disassemble the spring cover of bucket spool, loosen plug (551) with casing B (102) installed. After removed cover (209) from casing B (102), remove plug (551) and then take out piston (216). Fig. 33-159 Disassembling bucket spring cover (209)

33-92


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.7

Disassembling arm 1 spool

(1) Loosen socket bolts (273), and remove spring cover (201) and O-ring (261) of arm 1 spool. (2) Draw out the assembly which is consist of arm 1 spool (302), spring seat (331), spring (321, 322), stopper (336) and bolt (333) from casing A (101).

When drawing out the spool assy, use care so as not to score casing A (101).

Fig. 33-160 Removing arm 1 spring cover (201)

(3) Fix the arm 1 spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate etc.) and remove bolt (333). Then remove spring seat (331), spring (321, 322) and stopper (336) from arm 1 spool (302).

Fig. 33-161 Disassembling arm 1 spool (302) assy 33.2.2.3.8

Disassembling arm 2 spool

(1) Loosen socket bolts (273), and remove spring cover (201) and O-ring (261) of arm 2 spool. (2) Draw out the assembly which is consist of arm 2 spool (308), spring seat (331), spring (321, 328), stopper (340) and bolt (333) from casing B (102).

When drawing out the spool assy, use care so as not to score casing B (102).

Fig. 33-162 Removing arm 2 spring cover (201)

(3) Fix the arm 2 spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate etc.) and remove bolt (333). Then remove spring seat (331), spring (321, 328) and stopper (340) from arm 2 spool (308). Do not disassemble arm 2 spool (308) further unless there is special reason.

Fig. 33-163 Disassembling arm 2 spool (308) assy

33-93


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.9

Disassembling option spool

(1) Loosen socket bolts (273), and remove spring cover (201) and O-ring (261) of option spool. (2) Draw out the assembly which is consist of option spool (311), spring seat (331), spring (323, 324), stopper (336) and bolt (333) from casing A (101).

When drawing out the spool assy, use care so as not to score casing A (101).

Fig. 33-164 Removing option spring cover (201)

(3) Fix the option spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate etc.) and remove bolt (333). Then remove spring seat (331), spring (323, 324) and stopper (336) from option spool (311).

Fig. 33-165 Drawing out option spool assy (311) 33.2.2.3.10

Disassembling travel straight spool

(1) Loosen the socket bolts (273) and remove the spring cover (202) and the O-ring (261) for travel straight. (2) Draw out the assy of travel straight spool (307), spring seat (331), springs (327), (329), stopper (336) and bolt (333) from casing B (102).

When drawing out the spool assy, take care so as not to score the casing B (102).

Fig. 33-166 Drawing out travel straight spool (307) assy

(3) Fix the travel straight spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate, etc.). Remove bolt (333) and separate spring seat (331), springs (327, 329) and stopper (336) from travel straight spool (307).

33-94


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.11

Disassembling P2 unload spool

(1) Loosen socket bolts (273), and remove spring cover (202) of P2 unload spool and O-ring (261). (2) Draw out the assembly which is consist of P2 unload spool (310), spring seat (331), spring (327, 329), stopper (336) and bolt (333) from casing A (101).

When drawing out the spool assy, use care so as not to score casing A (101).

Fig. 33-167 Removing P2 unload spring cover (202)

(3) Fix the P2 unload spool assy with vise via a protective plate (aluminum plate etc.) and remove bolt (333). Then remove spring seat (331), spring (327, 329) and stopper (336) from P2 unload spool (310).

Fig. 33-168 Drawing out P2 unload spool assy (310) 33.2.2.3.12

Removing spool covers

(1) Travel, boom, bucket, arm 1, arm 2 and option Loosen socket bolts (273) and remove spool cover (205) and O-ring (264). (2) Swing Loosen socket bolts (273) and remove spool cover (206) and O-ring (264), (266). Do not disassemble spool cover (206) further unless there is special reason.

Fig. 33-169 Removing spool cover (205),(206)

33-95


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.13

Removing relief valve and plug assy for relief valve hole

(1) Remove the main relief valve (601) and overload relief valve (602), (603) and (605) from the casing.

•

Distinguish overload relief valve between (602), (603) and (605) with a tag to prevent them from being confused during reassembly, as they are the same in appearance and shape but differ in pressure setting.

•

Regarding the disassembly of the relief valves themselves, do not disassemble it.

Fig. 33-170 Removing main relief valve (601)

Fig. 33-171 Removing overload relief valve (602), (603) and (605)

Fig. 33-172 Removing plug assy (604) for relief valve hole

33-96


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.14

Removing by-pass cut valve

(1) Remove by-pass cut valve (606) from the casing.

Remove the by-pass cut valve, giving particular attention to the poppet (606-201) and spring (606-202) which may be remained on the inside of casing.

Fig. 33-173 Removing by-pass cut valve (606) 33.2.2.3.15

Removing lock valve selector valve sub

(1) Loosen socket bolt (211-171) and remove lock valve selector valve sub (211) from the casing. Further disassembly of the lock valve selector sub is not allowed.

Fig. 33-174 Removing lock valve selector sub (211) 33.2.2.3.16

Removing back pressure check valve

(1) Loosen socket bolt (278) and remove back pressure check valve (207) from the casing.

Fig. 33-175 Removing back pressure check valve cover (207)

33-97


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (2) Remove springs (527), (528), boost check valve poppet sub (517) and by-pass check valve poppet (518) from the casing. The further disassembly of boost check valve poppet sub (517) is not allowed. Replace control valve so that the spool cover face directs downward.

When replacing, take care so as not to score the spool cover.

33.2.2.3.17

Fig. 33-176 Removing boost check valve sub (517) and by-pass check valve poppet (518)

Removing plate

(1) Loosen socket bolts (274), (275) and remove plates (212), (213). (2) After removing plates, remove all O-rings (162), (163) remained on the casing side.

Fig. 33-177 Removing plate (212),(213)

33-98


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.18

Removing check valve

(1) Remove plugs of load check valve, conflux check valve, etc. and then remove poppet (511) and spring (521). (2) Load check valve on the swing section Remove plug (556) and then remove poppet (511) and spring (523).

The plug and spring in use differ from the above (1). Do not mix the parts when assembling parts again. Fig. 33-178 Removing plug (551),(556),(552)

(3) Load check valve on arm 2 section Remove plug (551) and then remove poppet (515) and spring (521).

The poppet in use differs from the above (1). Do not mix the parts when assembling parts again. (4) Lock valve Remove plug (556) and then remove poppet (514) and spring (524). Fig. 33-179 Removing poppet (511),(512),(514),(515) The plug, poppet and spring in use differ from the above (4). Do not mix the parts when assembling parts again.

(5) Main relief valve Remove plug (552) and then remove poppet (512) and spring (522).

The plug, poppet and spring in use differ from the above (5). Do not mix the parts when assembling parts again.

The plugs in which the procedure for disassembly is not included in the above procedure are usually used to block auxiliary holes and holes caused by casting. Do not disassemble further if unnecessary.

33.2.2.3.19

Disassembling casing

Further disassembly of the casing is not allowed.

33-99


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.3.20

Inspection after disassembly

Thoroughly clean all disassembled parts with wash oil, and dry them with jet air. Place each part on a clean sheet of paper or cloth for inspection. (1) Control valve 1) Inspect the entire surface of each part for burrs, scratches, cuts, and other defects. 2) Confirm that the O-ring groove surface of the casing or the block is free from foreign matter, dents or rust. 3) If the check valve seat of the casing or the block has dents or damage on its surface, smooth it by lapping.

Take care not leave lapping compound behind in the casing or block. 4) Confirm that O-ring or the outer circumference of the sliding part of a manual spool is free from scratches, dents, and the like. Remove any small defects with an oil stone or lapping compound. 5) Manually confirm that all sliding and fitted parts move smoothly. Confirm that all grooves and passages are free from foreign matter. 6) Replace any broken or deformed spring with new one. 7) Of a relief valve malfunctions, repair it by following the relief valve disassembly and reassembly procedures. 8) Replace all O-ring with new ones. (2) Relief valve 1) Make sure that the poppet and the seat surface at the tip of the seat are without fault and that the contact surface is even all over. 2) Manually confirm that the main poppet slides smoothly onto and off the seat. 3) Confirm that the outer circumference of the main poppet and the inner circumference of its seat are free from defects such as scratches. 4) Confirm that each spring is free from breakage, deformation, and excessive wear. 5) Confirm that the orifices of the main poppet and its seat are not clogged. 6) Replace all O-rings with new ones. (Between casing and seal)

33.2.2.4

REASSEMBLY

(1) Here, only the reassembly procedures are described. Regarding drawings, refer to the disassembly procedures. (2) Figures in parentheses after part names in this instruction represent those item numbers in the structural sectional drawing. (Fig. 33-137 to Fig. 33-142) (3) Precautions on reassembling O-ring 1) Confirm that O-rings are free from defects caused by poor handling. 2) Apply thin coat of grease or hydraulic oil to O-rings and their mating parts. 3) Do not stretch O-rings to the extent that they become permanently set. 4) When installing O-rings, do not roll them into place. Twisted O-rings do not easily untwist by themselves after installation, and can cause oil leaks. 5) Use a torque wrench to tighten each attaching bolt. Tighten to the specified torque in "Maintenance Standards."

33-100


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.4.1

Installing check valve

(1) Load check valve, conflux check valve, and so on Attach poppet (511) and spring (521) in place, place O-ring (164) in plug (551) and tighten them to the specified torque. (9 places) (2) Load check valve of swing section Attach poppet (511) and spring (523) in place, place O-ring (164) in plug (556) and tighten them to the specified torque. (1 place) (3) Load check valve of arm 2 section Attach poppet (515) and spring (521) in place, place O-ring (164) in plug (551) and tighten them to the specified torque. (1 place) (4) Lock valve section Attach poppet (514) and spring (524) in place, place O-ring (164) in plug (556) and tighten them to the specified torque. (2 places) (5) Main relief valve section Attach poppet (512) and spring (522) in place, place O-ring (562) in plug (552) and tighten them to the specified torque. (2 places)

Take care to prevent misassembling of parts and assembling position error because the parts in (1) to (5) are similar in shape.

33.2.2.4.2

Assembling plate

(1) Place O-rings (162), (163) in casing. (2) Attach plates (212), (213) and tighten socket bolts (274), (275) to the specified torque. Replace control valve so that this plate face directs downward.

33.2.2.4.3

Assembling back pressure check valve

(1) Attach boost check valve poppet sub (517), by-pass check valve poppet (518) and springs (527), (528). (2) Attach O-rings (264), (266) in back pressure check valve cover, attach it to casing A (101) and tighten socket bolt (278) to the specified torque.

33.2.2.4.4

Assembling lock valve selector sub

(1) Attach lock valve selector sub (211) to the casing and tighten socket bolt (211-171) to the specified torque.

33.2.2.4.5

Assembling by-pass cut valve

(1) Attach by-pass cut valve (606) to casing and tighten it to the specified torque.

Take care to prevent drop of poppet (606-201) and spring (606-202) when attaching by-pass cut valve.

33-101


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.4.6

Assembling relief valve and relief valve hole plug assembly

(1) Tighten main relief valve (601), port relief valves (602), (603), (605) and relief valve hole plug assembly (604) in respective place to the specified torque.

Assemble it giving attention to the label attached when disassembling to prevent mistake because the port relief valves (602), (603), (605) are similar in shape.

33.2.2.4.7

Assembling p2 unload spool

(1) Hold the mid section of P2 unload spool (310) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (327), (329) and stopper (336) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform P2 unload spool (310) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place P2 unload spool assembly in item (1) in casing A (101).

Place P2 unload spool assembly in casing A (101) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (202) with O-ring (261) attached to the spring side of P2 unload spool assembly and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33.2.2.4.8

Assembling travel straight spool

(1) Hold the mid section of travel straight spool (307) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (327), (329) and stopper (336) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform travel straight spool (307) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place travel straight spool assembly in item (1) in casing B (102).

Place travel straight spool assembly in casing B (102) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (202) with O-ring (261) attached to the spring side of travel straight spool assembly, and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33-102


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.4.9

Assembling spool in option

(1) Hold the mid section of spool in option (311) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (323), (324) and stopper (336) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform option spool (311) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place spool assembly in option in item (1) in casing A (101).

Place option spool assembly in casing A (101) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (201) with O-ring (261) attached to the spring side of spool assembly in option and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33.2.2.4.10

Assembling arm 2 spool

(1) Hold the mid section of arm 2 spool (308) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (321), (328) and stopper (340) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform arm 2 spool (308) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place arm 2 spool assembly in option in item (1) in casing B (102).

Place arm 2 spool assembly in casing B (102) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (201) with O-ring (261) attached to the spring side of arm 2 spool assembly and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33.2.2.4.11

Assembling arm 1 spool

(1) Hold the mid section of arm 1 spool (302) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.) and fit spring seat (331), springs (321), (322) and stopper (336) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform arm 1 spool (302) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place arm 1 spool assembly in item (1) in casing A (101).

Place arm 1 spool assembly in casing A (101) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (201) with O-ring (261) attached to the spring side of arm 1 spool assembly, and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33-103


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.4.12

Assembling bucket spool

(1) Hold the mid section of bucket spool (304) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (321), (322) and stopper (336) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform bucket spool (304) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place bucket spool assembly in item (1) in casing B (102).

Place bucket spool assembly in casing B (102) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (209) with O-ring (261) attached to the spring side of bucket spool assembly and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque. (4) Attach piston (216) to spring cover (209), place O-ring (164) in plug (551) and tighten to the specified torque.

33.2.2.4.13

Assembling swing spool

(1) Hold the mid section of swing spool (303) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (321), (322) and stopper (336) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform swing spool (303) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place swing spool assembly in item (1) in casing A (101).

Place swing spool assembly in casing A (101) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover sub (204) with O-rings (261), (266) attached to the spring side of swing spool assembly and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33-104


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.4.14

Assembling boom spool

(1) Hold the mid section of boom spool (301) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (321), (322) and stopper (336) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform boom spool (301) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place boom spool assembly in item (1) in casing B (102).

Place boom spool assembly in casing B (102) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (203) with O-rings (261), (266) attached to the spring side of boom spool assembly and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33.2.2.4.15

Assembling boom conflux spool

(1) Hold the mid section of boom conflux spool (305) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (325)(326) and stopper (339) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform boom conflux spool (305) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place boom conflux spool assembly in item (1) in casing A (101).

Place boom conflux spool assembly in casing A (101) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (202) with O-ring (261) attached to the spring side of boom conflux spool assembly and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33.2.2.4.16

Assembling travel spool (travel right and left)

(1) Hold the mid section of travel spool (306) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (323), (324) and stopper (336) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

Take care not to deform travel spool (306) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place travel spool assembly in item (1) in casing A (101) or casing B (102).

Place travel spool assembly in casing A (101) or casing B (102) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (201) with O-ring (261) attached to the spring side of travel spool assembly and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33-105


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.4.17

Assembling P1 unload spool

(1) Hold the mid section of P1 unload spool (309) with vise provided with protection plate (aluminum plate, etc.), fit spring seat (331), springs (327), (329) and stopper (336) and tighten bolt (333) to the specified torque.

•

Apply Loctite #262 when tightening bolt (333).

•

Take care not to deform P1 unload spool (309) because of careless over clamping.

(2) Place P1 unload spool assembly in item (1) in casing A (101).

Place P1 unload spool assembly in casing A (101) carefully. Do not squeeze it into place. (3) Attach spring cover (202) with O-ring (261) attached to the spring side of P1 unload spool assembly and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33.2.2.4.18

Assembling spool cover, and so on

(1) Travel, boom, bucket, arm 1, arm 2, option Place O-ring (264) in spool cover (205) and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque. (2) Swing Place O-rings (264), (266) in spool cover (206) and tighten socket bolt (273) to the specified torque.

33-106


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.5 33.2.2.5.1

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS Inspection of components

Part name Casing

Inspection item

Criterion and remedy

1) Look for scratches, rusting and corrosion. 1) If any of the following parts are damaged, replace the casing. • Sliding part of casing hole and spool, particularly the land, to which holding pressure is applied. • Area of sealing part that is in contact with O-ring. • Sealing and seating part of main or overload relief valve. • Area of seating part or sliding part of poppet. • Sealing part of plug. • Defects of other parts that seem to prevent normal function.

Spool

1) Look for scratches, galling, rusting and corrosion.

1) If a detectable defect with your fingernail is found on the sliding part of the outer circumference, replace the spool.

2) Insert the spool in the casing bore, and move it while turning it.

2) If the spool damages the O-ring or does not move smoothly, repair or replace the spool. If spring is damaged, replace it.

Poppet 1) Look for damage on the poppet and the spring. 2) Insert the poppet in the casing, and move it.

1) If the seat of poppet or spring are damaged, correct or replace it. 2) If the poppet moves lightly without catching, it is normal.

Spring and related parts 1) Look for rust, corrosion, deformation, and 1) If damaged heavily, replace. breakage of the spring, spring seat, stopper, spacer bolt and cover. Main relief valve Port relief valve By-pass cut valve

1) Look for rust and damage on outer surface.

1) Replace.

2) Inspect the contact face of the valve seat. 2) If damaged, replace. 3) Inspect the O-ring, backup ring, and seal. 3) As a general rule, replace all parts with new ones. (Between casing and seal)

33-107


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.2.6

TROUBLESHOOTING

(1) If an abnormal condition is noticed, check to see if the problem is with the control valve itself, one of the main pumps, the gear pump, or a circuit. To this end, you will need to measure pilot pressure, pump delivery pressure, load pressure, etc. If any part of the system is to be disassembled for inspection, follow the disassembly and reassembly procedures in this manual. (2) Dust is the enemy of hydraulic components. Pay strict attention to protection from dust. If any part of the system is to be disassembled, take dust protection measures beforehand. (3) Moving parts must be handled with care. If they are damaged, smooth the damage using an oil stone or the like. (4) Take care not to damage the contact face of O-rings. A damaged contact face will certainly cause oil leaks.

33.2.2.6.1

Control valve

Trouble 1. Travel does not occur. Slow to start up (or poor power). Slow response.

Cause

Remedy

1) Malfunctioning main relief valve. • Foreign matter between main poppet and seat.

1) Check travel relief valve pressure • Disassemble and clean. If damaged heavily, replace the assy as a unit. • Same as above.

• Foreign matter between poppet and seat. • Sticking main poppet.

• Correct sticking part with oil stone. • Replace spring. • Remove foreign matter.

• Broken or deformed spring. • Clogged main poppet throttle.

• Readjust, and tighten lock nut to specified torque.

• Loosened adjusting screw. 1) Malfunctioning travel straight valve. 2. Machine does not move straight during • Sticking spool. simultaneous operation of travel • Broken or deformed spring. and attachment. • Clogged small hole in spool. 2) Malfunctioning main relief valve.

33-108

1) Check pilot pressure. • Correct sticking part with oil stone. • Replace spring. • Remove foreign matter. 2) Remove main relief valve.


33. UPPER STRUCTURE Trouble

Cause

Remedy

1) Excessive clearance between casing and 1) Replace spool. 3. Excessive natural spool. falls of attachment under its own weight 2) Spool is not completely in neutral position. 2) Check secondary pilot pressure. when spool is in • Foreign matter between casing and • Disassemble, clean and smooth neutral. spool, or sticking spool. sticking part with oil stone. • Broken or deformed spring.

• Replace spring.

• Clogged pilot circuit.

• Remove foreign matter.

3) Malfunctioning overload relief valve. Refer 3) Check overload relief valve pressure. to item 1. 1) above. (See 33.2.2.3.20 (2)) (See 33.2.2.3.20 (2)) • Clean and check damage on seat surface. • Foreign matter between valve seat and casing. 4) Lock valve function is faulty. (Arm, boom)

4) Replace

• Foreign matter between poppet seat and casing.

• Disassemble, clean. • Correct stuck part with oil stone or replace.

• Poppet is stuck.

• Replace spring. • Broken or deformed spring.

• Replace lock valve selector assy.

• Selector spool is stuck. 1) Malfunctioning load check valve. 4. When raising attachment, at first it • Foreign matter between poppet and drops. casing.

1) • Disassemble and clean. If heavily damaged, replace control valve. • Correct sticking part with oil stone. • Replace spring.

• Sticking poppet. • Broken or deformed spring. 5. Bucket, boom, arm or 1) Malfunctioning main spool. swing does not • Excessive clearance between casing operate. and spool. Slow to start up (or • Foreign matter between casing and poor power).Slow spool. response. • Sticking spool.

1) Check secondary pilot pressure. • Replace spool. • Disassemble and clean. • Correct stuck part with oil stone. • Replace spring. • Remove foreign matter.

• Broken or deformed return spring. • Clogged pilot circuit. 2) Malfunctioning main relief valve. Refer to 2) Check main relief valve pressure. Refer to item 1. 1) above. item 1. 1) above. (See 33.2.2.3.20 (2)) (See 33.2.2.3.20 (2)) 3) Malfunctioning overload relief valve. Refer 3) Check overload relief valve pressure. (See 33.2.2.3.20 (2)) to item 1. 1) above. (See 33.2.2.3.20 (2))

33-109


33. UPPER STRUCTURE Trouble 6. Boom conflux does not operate.

Cause

Remedy

1) Malfunctioning conflux valve.

1) Measure pilot pressure.

• Excessive clearance between casing and spool.

• Replace spool.

• Foreign matter between casing and spool.

• Correct stuck part with oil stone.

• Sticking spool.

• Disassemble and clean. • Replace spring. • Remove foreign matter.

• Broken or deformed return spring. • Clogged pilot circuit. 33.2.2.6.2

Relief valve

Trouble

Cause

Remedy

1.No pressure rise.

Main or pilot poppet of relief valve is sticking Check for foreign matter on each poppet. and valve is open, or there is foreign matter Confirm that each component slides smoothly. on valve seat. If failure is found, replace it in an assembly.

2. Unstable relief pressure.

Main or pilot poppet of relief valve seat is damaged.

If failure is found, replace it an assembly.

3. Incorrect relief pressure setting.

1) Wear due to foreign matter.

1) Replace damaged assembly

2) Loosened locknut or adjusting screw.

2) Adjust pressure.

4. Oil leak.

Confirm that each component operates smoothly. Replace damaged or worn component.

1) Damaged seat. Damaged O-ring.

1) If failure is found, replace it an assembly.

2) Sticking component due to foreign matter. 2) Confirm that there are no scratches, scores, or foreign matter present before reassembling. If failure is found, replace it an assembly.

33-110


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.3

PILOT VALVE (ATT)

33.2.3.1

CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW

312 302

Apply grease on rotating and 301 sliding sections. Be careful the assembling direction

501 Apply grease on top section 212

213

151

* 246

* 218-2

211

214 216-2

* 218-1 216-1

241-2

241-1

201-2 Secondary pressure adjusting shim Designed value t=0.4 (0.061 in), 1 pc

201-1

217 101

221

PORT

PORT

2,4

1,3

Fig. 33-180 Pilot valve (For ATT) Apply loctite #277 to areas marked Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

101 Casing

1

*218-1 Seat

2

151 Plate

1

*218-2 Seat

2

201-1 Spool

2

221 Spring

4

201-2 Spool

2

241-1 Spring

2

211 Plug

4

241-2 Spring

2

212 Push rod

4

*246 Spring

4

213 Seal

4

301 Joint : M14

1

214 O-ring ; 1B P20

4

302 Circular plate

1

312 Adjust nut : M14

1

501 Boots

1

216-1 Spring seat

2

216-2 Spring seat

2

217 Washer 2 (Shim)

47.1 (35)

68.6 (51)

4

Note) The parts marked * might not be equipped depending on valve type.

33-111


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.3.2

DISASSEMBLY

(1) Plug each port of pilot valve, and clean it with kerosine. P port : PF1/4 1~4 and T port : PF3/8

501

(2) Fix pilot valve with vise via a protective plate (Alminum plate etc.), and remove boots (501).

Fig. 33-181 Removing boot (501) (3) Remove adjusting nut (312) applying spanners to adjusting nut (312) and circular plate (302).

312

: 22mm, 32mm

302

Fig. 33-182 Removing adjusting nut (312) (4) Remove circular plate (302)

302

: 32mm

Fig. 33-183 Removing circular plate (302)

Fig. 33-184 Circular plate is removed

33-112


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

Fig. 33-185 Installing Jig A (5) Turn joint (301) in counterclockwise with Jig A to remove. Jig A : See page 33-120. : 24mm

301 When the force of return springs (221) is strong, never loosen joint (301). If loosened, it might result in jumping out of plate (151), plug (211) and push rod (212). Remove joint (301) pressing plate (151) downward with two fingers.

Fig. 33-186 Removing joint (301)

(6) Remove plate (151)

151

• When the force of return springs (221) are strong, press plate to let it come up slowly.

Fig. 33-187 Removing plate (151) • When the force of return springs (221) are weak, plug is left in casing (101) due to sliding resistance of O-ring (214). Pull plug (211) out with a driver.

To prevent personal injury, plug (211) must be removed slowly and evenly until the return spring (221) force is completely released.

211 Fig. 33-188 Removing plug (211)

33-113


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (7) Remove push rod (212), plug (211), pressure reducing valve assy (spool), return springs (221) from casing (101).

212 211 221

Record combination of port holes on casing and the pulled out parts. The stroke differs according to direction.

101 Fig. 33-189 Removing push rod, plug, pressure reducing valve and spring (8) Push springs (241-1), (241-2) in the range of 7mm (0.276in) that the movement of spring seats (2161), (216-2) and shift the seats (216) in a side direction, and remove spools (201-1), (201-2) through the larger hole of seat.

216-1 216-2

Never push down spring seat (216-1) in 7mm (0.276in) or more. (For port 1,3) Never push down spring seat (216-2) in 9.4mm (0.370in) or more. (For port 2,4)

201-1 201-2 Fig. 33-190 Removing spool (201)

(9) Remove spool (201-1), (201-2), spring seats (2161), (216-2), spring (241-1), (241-2) and washer (217).

241-1 241-2

216-1 216-2

217

201-1 201-2 Fig. 33-191 Disassembling pressure reducing valve (10)Remove spring (*246), spring seat (*218-1), (*2182) from push rod (212).

*218-1 *218-2

*246

214

The parts marked * might not be equipped depending on valve type.

212 211 Fig. 33-192 Disassembling push rod

33-114


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (11)Pull out push rod (212) from plug (211). (12)Remove O-ring (214) from plug (211).

212 Fig. 33-193 Removing push rod (212) (13)Remove inside seal (213) from plug (211) with small driver.

213 Fig. 33-194 Removing seal (213) 33.2.3.3

CLEANING PARTS

(1) Clean parts with wash oil roughly. (2) Clean parts with wash oil completely. (3) Dry parts by swabbing clean rag. (4) Apply rust preventives on parts. 33.2.3.4

ASSEMBLING

(1) Fit washer 2 (217), springs (241-1), (241-2), spring seats (216-1), (216-2) to spool (201-1), (201-2).

201-1

241-1

201-2

241-2

216-1 216-2

217 Fig. 33-195 Assembling pressure reducing valve

33-115


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (2) Push spring (241-1), (241-2) in the range of that the movement of spring seats (216-1), (216-2) in a side direction, and install spools (201-1) through the larger hole of spring seat. (See Fig. 33-190)

216-1 216-2

Never push down spring seat (216-1) in 7mm (0.276in) or more. (For port 1,3) Never push down spring seat (216-2) in 9.4mm (0.370in) or more. (For port 2,4)

201-1 201-2 Fig. 33-196 Installing spools (201-1), (201-2)

(3) Place spring (221) into ports 1,3 of casing (101), and then install pressure reducing valve assy in it. Place springs (221) into ports 2,4 and install it.

PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE ASSY

221 Install the removed respective assy into respective holes.

101

Fig. 33-197 Installing pressure reducing valve assy (4) Fit O-ring (214) and seal (213) into plug (211).

211

• Apply hydraulic oil on surface of push rod.

SEAL (213)

213

214

PLUG (211)

-RING (214) PUSH ROD (212)

Apply hydraulic oil

For the assembling direction of seal (213).

Fig. 33-198 Installing O-ring (214) and seal (213)

(5) Insert push rod (212) in plug (211) and install spring (*246) and spring seat (*218-1) to push rod (212) on port 1,3 side. And install spring seat (*218-2) to push rod on port 2,4 side.

The parts marked * might not be equipped depending on valve type.

212

211

246

218-1

Fig. 33-199 Assembling push rod, spring (246) and seat (218)

33-116


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (6) Fit plug (211) assy to casing (101). 1) When the force of spring (211) is weak, it stops at the position where it is pushed in by the sliding resistance of O-ring (214).

101

211

Fig. 33-200 Installing plug assy 2) When the force of spring (221) is strong, attach plate (151) and press 4 push rods by hand at the same time, and tighten joint (301) temporarily.

301

• Install spool (201) straight and evenly into the hole of casing (101). • Take care so that plug (211) and plate (151) do not jump out of casing (101).

151 Fig. 33-201 Installing plug assy and plate (151) (7) Install joint (301) on casing (101) with jig A securely. Jig A : See page 33-120. Tightening torque : 47.1 N•m (35±2.2 lbf•ft)

101

Fig. 33-202 Installing joint (301)

33-117

A


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (8) Install circular plate (302) to joint (301)

Screw it in until it comes in contact with 4 push rods (212) equally.

The exceeding of screw in may cause malfunction of machine.

312

302

(9) Screw adjusting nut (312) in until it touches circular plate (302), and tighten it applying spanner to stop circular plate returning. Fig. 33-203 Installing circular plate (302) : 32mm : 22mm • Apply Loctite #277 to threads of joint. Tightening torque : 68.6 N•m (51 lbf•ft) (10)Apply heat-resisting grease to joint (301) rotating section and the top of push rod (212). GREASE

(11)Cover it with boots. (12)Spray rust preventives through each port and attach plug respectively.

212

301

Fig. 33-204 Applying grease to joint section and push rod

33-118


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.3.5

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS

Check item

Standard

Remarks

Leakage

When leakage quantity reaches to 1000cc/ min. or more where handle is set in neutral position, Conditions or to 2000cc/min. or more in operation, replace Primary pressure 2.94 MPa (426 psi) spool with new one. Hydraulic oil viscosity 23 cSt If leaked, even if the spool is replaced, replace pilot valve assy with new one.

Spool

When the wear of sliding section is 10 more This condition may be the same as the than the that of non sliding section, replace it above. with new one.

Push rod

When the wear of top is 1mm (0.04in) or more, replace it with new one.

When looseness of 2mm (0.08in) or more on In case of the looseness due to the Looseness of control circular plate (302) on control section and joint loosening on tightening section, adjust section (301) due to wear is pro- duced, replace section it. them with new ones. When trouble such as noise, hunting, drop of primary pressure, etc. has occurred in operation, and it does not restore after taking Stability of operation corrective action according to below 33.2.3.6 ( TROUBLESHOOTING), replace pilot valve assy with new one.

•

O-ring, etc. should be replaced with new one at every disassembling.

•

If socket bolt (125) was loosened, seal washer (121) should be replaced.

33.2.3.6

TROUBLESHOOTING

It is very difficult to find defective section. The following table explains the several estimated causes. For repair, refer to the estimated causes and corrective actions. The following table explains general phenomenon, estimated causes and corrective actions. However, most machine problems are not caused by the failure of only one part, but involve relations with other parts. Therefore corrective action other than those described in this table is often required. The following table does not cover causes and corrective actions for all the troubles. So it may be necessary to perform further investigation of troubles and causes. Trouble

Cause

Remarks

1) Primary pressure is insufficient.

Secondary pressure does not rise .

Secondary pressure is unstable. Secondary pressure is high

1) Secure primary pressure.

2) Secondary pressure springs (241) are 2) Replace with new ones. broken or fatigued. 3) Clearance between spool (201) and cas-ing (101 ) is abnormally large.

3) Replace spool (201).

4) Handle has a looseness.

4) Disassembly and reassembly or replace handle section.

1) Sliding parts are caught.

1) Repair the unsmoothed section.

2) Tank line pressure varies.

2) Bring pressure directly to oil tank.

3) Air has mixed into pipeline.

3) Bleed air by operating it several times.

1) Tank line pressure is high.

1) Bring pressure directly to oil tank.

2) Sliding parts are caught.

2) Correct.

33-119


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.3.7

JIG

(1) Jig for removing and installing joint (301)

(1)

Material ; SCM415 (N) Carburizing and Quenching

(2)

BUSHING

Material ; S45C

SECTION AA

A

A

Installing condition on joint

* (1) and (2) are tight fitted Sectional drawing of jig

Material ; SCM415 (N) Carburizing and Quenching Q'ty ; 2

Detail of bushing

33-120


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.4

PILOT VALVE (FOR TRAVEL)

33.2.4.1

CONSTRUCTION T=Tightening torgue N.m (lbf.ft)

12-o 12-o

5

7-h

12-o 12-y

12-y 12-x

12-x

13 6

8

f d Loctite 262 g T=3 g

10

q

T=5 (3.7)

14 r

u t T=4 (3) 15

7-i T=30 (22) 7-k T=1.2 (0.9) 7-h

15

7-j

u 17

t

r

r

z

21 T=3~5 (2.2~3.7)

Fig. 33-205 Exploded view of pilot valve

5

Rubber boots

6

Foot pedal (Switch plate)

Q’ty 2 (2)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

12-x Seal ø14u20u3

6

12-y Wiper ring

6

6-d Switch plate

2

13

Damper spring

4

6-f Regulation screw M8u28

4

14

Check valve kit

(2)

6-g Set screw M5u8 7

Retaining plate kit

4 (1)

14-q Plug M8

2

14-r Ball M6, 35

2

7-h Plate

1

7-i

Capscrew M10u20

2

15-u Plug M6

7-j

Shaft

2

15-t Orifice M6, ø0.6

7-k Set screw M4u10

2

15

17

Orifice

4 4 (2)

17-w’ Shuttle valve & orifice

2

Flange kit

4

10

Control spool

4

17-r Ball M6, 35

11

Return spring

4

17-z Orifice M5, ø0.8

12

Damper flange kit

12-o Damper plunger ø14

(4)

Shuttle valve kit

8

(4)

21

4

33-121

Plug

q 21

21

w'

Parts

u t T=4 (3) 14 T=5 (3.7)

21

Loctite 262

No.

11

15

2 2 4


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.4.2

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

(1) Boot replacement

The pilot control unit does not need to be removed from the machine to perform this operation. 1) Remove both faulty boots. (using a flat screw driver if necessary) 2) Replace both boots with a new one. * Reassembly : •

First fit the lower part of the rubber boot on the retaining plate between the 2 switch plates

Then put the lower part in the external groove of the retaining plate

Finish by fitting the upper part of the rubber boot on the switch plate.

Fig. 33-206 (2) Switch plate removal 1) Remove : •

The pilot control unit from the machine.

Both rubber boots (See 33.2.4.2 (1))

2) Remove the screw locking the axis using a 2mm socket wrench. (See Fig. 33-207 No.1) * Reassembly : •

Apply a droplet of Loctite #262 on the locking screw thread.

Torque :1.2 N•m (0.89 lbf•ft)

3) Fit a M3 screw on the switch plate axis in order to remove it (Using pliers if necessary). (See Fig. 33-207 No.2) * Reassembly : •

Position the axis so that the hole is aligned with the locking screw as shown on the picture (See Fig. 33-207 No.3)

4) Mark out the position of the switch plate before removing it. 5) Repeat the operation for the second switch plate. 6) Reassemble parts in reverse order.

33-122

Fig. 33-207


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (3) Switch plate adjustment

If the switch plate is replaced, it is necessary to adjust the regulation screws. 1) Unscrew the 2 locking screws using a 2,5mm socket wrench (See Fig. 33-208) * Reassembly : •

Apply a droplet of Loctite #262 on the locking screw thread.

Torque :3 N•m 2.2 (lbf•ft)

2) Set the switch plate horizontally. 3) Screw on simultaneously both regulation screws using a flat screw driver (5,5u150) until feeling some resistance.

Do not misadjust the two damping screws. (See Fig. 33-209) 4) Tighten the locking screws to hold the regulation screws in position.

Fig. 33-208

Regulation screws to adjust

Damping screws already adjusted and glued

5) Repeat the operation for the second switch plate making sure both switch plates are parallel. (See Fig. 33-208)

SWITCH PLATE

The figure is shown from the backside.

(4) Retaining plate removal Fig. 33-209

1) Remove •

The pilot control unit from the machine.

Both rubber boots (See 33.2.4.2 (1))

Both switch plates (See 33.2.4.2 (2))

2) Unscrew simultaneously both screws holding the retaining plate using a 8mm socket wrench. (See Fig. 33-210) * Reassembly : •

Apply a droplet of Loctite #262 on the screw thread.

Torque :30 N•m (22 lbf•ft)

Fig. 33-210

33-123


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 3) Lift the retaining plate to remove it. (See Fig. 33-211) * Reassembly : •

Use the retaining plate to insert the 4 guides into the body simultaneously and perpendicularly. (See Fig. 33-211 left side)

4) Reassemble parts in reverse order. 5) Drain the pilot control unit (See 33.2.4.3). Fig. 33-211 (5) Damping plunger seals replacement 1) Remove •

The pilot control unit from the machine.

Both rubber boots. (See 33.2.4.2 (1))

Both switch plates (See 33.2.4.2 (2))

The retaining plate (See 33.2.4.2 (4))

2) Remove the wiper ring of the damping plunger (1). (See Fig. 33-212 No.1)

1

WIPER RING

2

Fig. 33-212

* Reassembly : •

Replace with a new wiper ring.

Always place the damping plunger prior to the wiper ring, and make sure the wiper ring is correctly positionned. 3) Remove the damping plunger (2). (Fig. 33-212 No.2)

Fig. 33-213 4) Using a needle, remove the seal placed inside the body (See Fig. 33-214 No.3, 4) * Reassembly : •

Replace with a new seal and grease it.

3

4 Fig. 33-214

33-124

DAMPER PLUNGER


33. UPPER STRUCTURE •

Squeeze the seal between your fingers to obtain a 8-shape. (See Fig. 33-215 No.5)

Insert the seal within the groove with your fingers (lip in bottom position). (See Fig. 33-215 No.6, 7)

Push the seal against the side using the round head of a small socket wrench. (Fig. 33-215 No.8)

During the reassembly, make sure the seal is correctly positionned, and pay attention not to damage nor twist it. 5) Repeat the operation for the other 3 assemblies.

5

6

7

8 Fig. 33-215

6) Extract the damping springs from the body (using flat nose pliers). 7) Inspect the damping springs. If defects are detected, replace the 4 springs. 8) Reassemble parts in reverse order. (6) Guide/plunger and regulation unit replacement 1) Remove •

The pilot control unit from the machine.

Both rubber boots (See 33.2.4.2 (1))

Both switch plates (See 33.2.4.2 (2))

The retaining plate (See 33.2.4.2 (4))

2) Guide/plunger replacement : •

Insert the end of a thin screwdriver between the guide and the body, carefully lift the guide to remove it from the body.

Hold the guides with the other hand during the extraction operation to limit the effect of the return spring. 3) Remove the guide / plunger assembly. 4) Repeat the operation for the other 3 subassemblies. 5) Visually check that the guides / plungers are in good condition. If defects are present, replace the 4 sub-assemblies.

Fig. 33-216

33-125


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 6) Guide/plunger and relulation unit replacement •

Extract the regulation units from the body (using flat nose pliers).

Inspect the regulation units. If defects are detected on the parts, replace the 4 units.

7) Return spring replacement : •

Extract the return springs from the body (using flat nose pliers).

Fig. 33-217 •

Inspect the return springs. If defects are detected, replace the 4 springs.

8) Reassemble parts in reverse order.

Fig. 33-218 (7) Throttle kit replacement 1) Remove •

The pilot control unit from the machine

Both rubber boots (See 33.2.4.2 (1))

Both switch plates (See 33.2.4.2 (2))

The retaining plate (See 33.2.4.2 (4))

The damping plungers and springs (See 33.2.4.2 (5))

Fig. 33-219

33-126


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 2) Unscrew the screw using a 3mm socket wrench. (See Fig. 33-219) * Reassembly : •

Apply a droplet of Loctite #262 on the screw thread

Screw on until it sets just above the body. (See Fig. 33-220)

3) Unscrew the throttle using a 3mm socket wrench. * Reassembly : •

Torque :4 N•m (3 lbf•ft)

4) Repeat the operation for the other 3 assemblies. 5) Replace with new screws and new throttles. 6) Reassemble parts in reverse order.

Fig. 33-220 (8) Shuttle valve kit removal 1. Remove the pilot control unit from the machine

The pilot control unit does not need to be disassembled to perform this operation. 2) Unscrew the shuttle valve using a 4mm socket wrench. (See Fig. 33-221 and Fig. 33-222) * Reassembly : •

Thoroughly clean the body to remove any trace of loctite.

Apply a droplet of Loctite #242 on the shuttle valve thread.

Torque :4 N•m (3 lbf•ft)

Fig. 33-221

Wait for 8 hours before using the machine to let the Loctite #242 dry completely.

Fig. 33-222

33-127


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 3) Put the body up-side-down to remove the shuttle valve and the ball. (See Fig. 33-224) 4) Unscrew the throttle using a 2,5mm socket wrench. * Reassembly: •

Hand tighten.

5) Repeat the operation for the other subassemblies. 6) Inspect the shuttle valves, balls and throttles. If defects are detected, replace all the assemblies. 7) Reassemble parts in reverse order.

Fig. 33-223

Fig. 33-224 (9) Check valve kit removal 1) Remove the pilot control unit from the machine

The pilot control unit does not need to be disassembled to perform this operation. 2) Unscrew the check valve plug using a 4mm socket wrench. (See Fig. 33-225) * Reassembly : •

Drain the pilot control unit (See 33.2.4.3)

Torque :5 N•m (3.7lbf•ft)

Fig. 33-225

3) Put the body up-side-down to remove the ball. 4) Repeat the operation for the second check valve kit. 5) Inspect the check valve plugs, O-rings and balls. If defects are detected, replace all the assemblies. (See Fig. 33-226) 6) Reassemble parts in reverse order.

Fig. 33-226

33-128


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.4.3

DRAIN OF HYDRAULIC PILOT CONTROL UNIT

(1) When removing the retaining plate, the throttle kit or the shuttle valve kit, it is necessary to drain the pilot unit. (2) Reassemble the pilot unit control completely. (3) Install the pilot unit control in the machine. (4) Slightly unscrew the check valve plug using a 4mm socket wrench. (See Fig. 33-227) (5) Switch on the machine. (6) Operate gently the pedal until the bubbles disappear. (7) Tighten the check valve plug. • Torque : 5 N•m (3.7 lbf•ft) (8) Repeat the operation for the other check valve plug.

Fig. 33-227

33-129


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.5 33.2.5.1

SWING MOTOR UNIT CONSTRUCTION

(1) Swing motor

Fig. 33-228 Swing motor

33-130


33. UPPER STRUCTURE Tightening torque No. N•m (lbf•ft) 177 (130)

Parts

051 Relief valve ; M33-P1.5 051-1 O-ring ; 1B G30

36 (27)

29 (22)

Q’ty

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

No.

Parts

Q’ty

2

69 (51)

400

Anti-reaction valve ; M22-P1.5

2

2

400-1 O-ring ; 1B P20

2

052 Anti-reaction valve sub

1

400-2 Backup ring

2

100 Casing for anti-reaction valve

1

401

Socket bolt ; M20u45

4

101 Drive shaft

1

443

Roller bearing

1

111 Cylinder

1

444

Roller bearing

1

114 Spring plate

1

121 Piston

9

122 Shoe 123 Set plate

431 (320)

451

Pin

2

469

ROMH plug ; M30-P1.5

2

9

472

O-ring

1

1

488

O-ring ; 1B P28

2

334 (250)

124 Shoe plate

1

491

Oil seal

1

131 Valve plate

1

702

Brake piston

1

151 Plug ; PF1/4

2

706

O-ring

1

161 O-ring ; 1B P11

2

707

O-ring

1

162 O-ring ; 1B P12

2

712

Brake spring

16

163 O-ring ; 1B P6

2

742

Friction plate

3

171 Socket bolt ; M8u55

4

743

Separator plate

4

301 Casing

1

0.9 (0.65)

980

Plug ; PF1/4

1

303 Valve casing

1

1.7 (1.2)

984

Plug ; PF3/8

1

351 Plunger

2

4.4 (3.3)

985

Plug ; PF3/4

3

355 Spring

2

65 (48)

993

Plug ; PT1/2

1

390 Name plate

1

98 (72)

994

Plug ; PT3/4

1

391 Rivet

2

33-131


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (2) Swing reduction unit Be careful about installation direction of retaining ring.

Apply Three Bond #1360 or equivalent.

OIL FILLING PORT PT3/4

Caulk these 2 places with punch. LEVEL PORT PT1/2

Apply Loctite #515.

SURFACE OF LUBE OIL

Be careful about installation direction of spring pin.

VIEW (II) (4 places) Apply Loctite #515. Be careful about installation direction of retaining ring.

Drive this spring pin into 1mm lower than the surface of spider.

Apply Loctite #515.

Install the filling port of this fitting toward motor side.

Tightening torque 69.1+4.4 N.m (51.0+3.2 lbf.ft) Apply seal tape or Loctite #577. Fill up this space with grease.

Fig. 33-229 Sectional view of swing reduction unit Tightening torque No. N•m (lbf•ft)

Parts

Q’ty

Tightening torque No. N•m (lbf•ft)

Parts

Q’ty

1

Pinion shaft

1

17

Needle bearing

4

2

#1 sun gear

1

18

Thrust washer

8

3

#1 pinion

3

19

Snap ring

1

4

#2 sun gear

1

20

Snap ring

1

5

#2 pinion

4

21

Sleeve

1

6

Ring gear

1

22

Spring pin

4

7

Spider assy

1

23

Socket bolt ; M14u135

11

8

Spider

1

24

Cap

2

9

Shaft

4

25

Tube ; L=112

1

10

Spherical bearing

1

26

Elbow

1

11

Spherical bearing

1

27

Plug

1

12

Oil seal

1

28

Snap ring

3

13

Housing

1

30

Oil seal

1

15

Thrust washer

6

31

Grease fitting

1

16

Needle bearing

3

32

Relief fitting

1

33-132

181 (134)

69.1 (51.0)


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.5.2 33.2.5.2.1

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF SWING MOTOR Tools Tools

Socket wrench

Relief valve

Remarks M33uP1.5

M8, M20 Allen wrench

41mm 6,10,12,17mm

ROMH PLUG

M30uP1.5

14mm

ROH PLUG

PF1/4

6mm

Screwdriver

Flat-bladed type, medium size 2 pcs.

Steel bar

10u8u200(0.39"u0.31"u7.87") (key material) 1 pc.

Hammer

Plastic hammer 1 pc.

Torque wrench N•m (lbf•ft)

10~45 (7.2~33) 40~180 (29~130) 120~480 (87~350)

Slide hammer bearing puller 14 (0.551")

85 (3.35") 75 (2.95") 30 (1.18")

35 (1.38")

15 (0.591")

100 (3.94")

M16 Through

4 (0.158")

44 (1.73") 8 (0.315")

Brake piston drawing tool

5 2. 2") R1 .49 0 (

M18

BRAKE PISTON DRAWING TOOL

o 8 (0.315")

BRAKE PISTON CASING

33-133


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.5.2.2

Disassembly

(1) General cautions 1) Hydraulic components are precision products and have small clearance. Therefore, assemble and disassemble in a less dusty clean place. Use clean tools and cleaning oil and handle components with full care. 2) If a component is removed from the main body, clean the area around the ports thoroughly and plug them up so no dust and water do not enter. When fitting them back to the body, do not remove the plugs till piping is completed. 3) Study the structural drawing before the work begins and prepare necessary parts according to your purpose and the scope of work. Seals and O-rings once removed can not be used again. Some parts can not be supplied as single parts and available only in sub assy. Prepare such parts according to the parts manual. 4) The piston and the cylinder block are shop fitted when new. If you intend to reuse them, put a matching mark on the piston and the cylinder block. (2) Disassembly procedure The figures in parentheses after part names in this manual represent those item numbers in Fig. 33228 1) Draining oil Remove the drain plug and drain hydraulic oil from casing (301). 2) Preparation for removing the valve casing Fix the motor on a work bench so the drive shaft (101) end comes down. On that occasion, put a matching mark on the mating parts of casing (301) and valve casing (303). •

Choose a clean place, and lay with a rubber sheet or a cloth on a work bench. Handle the valve casing with care so parts do not have dents.

Fig. 33-230 Removing valve casing (303)

33-134


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 3) Loosen relief valve (051) and separate it from valve casing (303). : 41 mm 4) Loosen anti-reaction valve sub assy (052) and remove from valve casing (303). (See Fig. 33230) : 6 mm 5) Separate ROMH plug (469) from valve casing (303) and draw out spring (355) and plunger (351). Fig. 33-231 Removing relief valve (651), anti-reactionvalve (052), anti-cavitation plunger (351) and valve casing (303)

: 14 mm 6) Loosen socket bolt (401) and separate valve casing (303) from casing (301). If the socket bolt (401) are loosened, the valve casing floats off casing (301) by the force of brake spring (712). Then separate valve plate (131) from valve casing (303). : 17 mm 7) Draw out brake spring (712) from brake piston (702). 8) Put the claw of the brake piston removing jig in the concaved part of brake piston (702). Tighten 2 bolts of jig simultaneously, and draw out the brake piston (702) with the jig, from the casing.

Fig. 33-232 Removing brake piston (702)

9) Lay the motor on its side again and draw out cylinder block (111) from drive shaft (101). Then draw out piston (121), set plate (123), spring (114) and shoe plate (124).

Handle the parts with care so as not to score the sliding surfaces of cylinder block (111) and shoe (122).

Fig. 33-233 Drawing cylider block (111), piston sub assy, friction plate (742) and separator plate

33-135


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 10) Draw out friction plate (742) and separator plate (743) from casing (301). 11) Draw out drive shaft (101) from casing (301), while lightly tapping the side face of valve casing (303) in drive shaft (101), using a plastic mallet. •

Do the following work as required.

a. Drawing the inner race of roller bearing (443) from drive shaft (101), using a press. •

Do not reuse the removed bearing. Fig. 33-234 Removing drive shaft (101)

b. Drawing out the outer race of roller bearing (443) from casing (301), by lightly tapping the steel rod from the oil seal (491) housing side. (Do not reuse the bearing.) c. Separate the outer race of roller bearing (444) from valve casing (303), using a slide hammer bearing puller.

PRESS 101

443

Put the inner race on the press bench.

Fig. 33-235 Removing inner race of roller bearing (443)

33-136


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.5.2.3

Assembly

(1) General precautions 1) Repair those parts damaged after disassembly and prepare replacement parts beforehands. 2) Clean all parts thoroughly in cleaning oil and dry them with jet air. 3) Always coat the moving parts with clean hydraulic oil, before assembly. 4) Replace such seals as O-ring and oil seal in principle. 5) Tighten socket bolts and plugs to specified torques, using a torque wrench.

(2) Assembly procedure The figures in parentheses after part names in this manual represent those item numbers in the Fig. 33-228.

OUTPUT SHAFT SIDE

1) Preparation for assembly Place casing (301) on a proper bench so its valve casing (303) faces upward.

443

•

101

This operation is necessary only when the roller bearing is removed.

2) Shrinkage fit the inner race of roller bearing (443) into drive shaft (101). 3) Shrinkage fit the inner race of roller bearing (444) to drive shaft (101). •

444

Fig. 33-236 Assembling the inner race of bearings (443), (444)

This operation is necessary only when the oil seal is removed. Fit oil seal (491) to casing (301). On that occasion, coat the lip of the oil seal with grease and check the direction of it, before fixing it.

4) Assemble the outer race of roller bearing (443) into casing (301), by lightly tapping the steel rod. 5) Attach drive shaft (101) to casing (301).

Fig. 33-237 Fitting oil seal (491), outer race of roller bearing (443), and drive shaft (101)

33-137


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 6) Place casing (301) as shown in Fig. 33-238 and insert shoe plate (124). On that occasion, the shoe plate does not come off if it is coated with grease. The larger chamfer side 124 301

443 101

Fig. 33-238 Inserting shoe plate (124) 7) Set the set plate (123) and spring (114), then set piston sub (121, 122) assy. 8) Assemble piston sub assy (121, 122) fixed in retainer plate (123) into cylinder (111). Match it to the spline of drive shaft (101) and insert it in place.

Fig. 33-239 Inserting cylinder assy 9) Replace casing (301) with oil seal (491) facing downward and assemble separator plate (743) and friction plate (742) into casing (301), in that order. Assemble four separator plates and three friction plates.

Assemble the same phases of four slits in the gears of friction plate (742). Assemble four slits in the four claws of separator plate (743) in the position of Fig. 33-240.

Fig. 33-240 Installing of separator plate (743), friction plate (742).

33-138


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 10) Fit O-rings (706), (707) to casing (301). In that case, if the O-rings are coated with grease, they are hard to tear off when brake piston (702) is inserted.

702

11) Assemble brake piston (702) into casing (301). 12) Assemble brake spring (712) into brake piston (702). In that case, make sure that a spring is placed securely in the spot faced part of the brake piston.

SLIT (OPPOSITE SIDE) PG PORT

This operation is necessary only where roller bearing (444) is removed.

13) Insert the outer race of roller bearing (444) into valve casing (303), while lightly tapping the steel rod placed on the outer race, using a hammer. 14) Assemble valve plate (131) into valve casing (303) and fit O-ring (472) in it. 15) Install valve casing (303) to casing (301) and fasten them with socket bolts (401). : 17 mm, Tightening torque : 431 N•m (320 lbf•ft) 16) Fit plunger (351) and spring (355) to valve casing (303). Then tighten ROMH plug (469) fitted with O-ring (488) against valve casing (303). : 14 mm, Tightening torque : 334 N•m (250 lbf•ft) 17) Fit relief valve (051) to valve casing (303). : 41 mm, Tightening torque : 177 N•m (130 lbf•ft) 18) Fit anti-reaction sub assy (052) to valve casing (303). : 6 mm, Tightening torque : 29 N•m (22 lbf•ft)

33-139

Fig. 33-241 Assembling brake piston


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

33.2.5.3.1

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY OF SWING REDUCTION UNIT Tools

Code

Tool name

Remarks 412 270

Material : Mild steel

230

Stand

Material : Mild steel

Spherical bearing (10) removing jig (I)

190

b

o 162 22

a

13-o 16 (Position space equally)

P.C.D 146

VIEW X

X

c

Spherical bearing (11) removing jig (II)

d

Spherical bearing (10) removing jig (I)

Material : Mild steel

e

Oil seal (30) installing jig

f

Spherical bearing (11) press-fit jig

g

Oil seal (12) installing jig

h

Spherical bearing (10) press-fit jig

150 125

33-140

9

33.2.5.3


33. UPPER STRUCTURE Code

Tool name

Remarks

i

Snap ring plier

For shaft 200 N•m (148 lbf•ft) class

j

Torque wrench

k

Plastic hammer (Wooden mallet)

m

Press

n

Flat-bladed screw driver

p

General tools

Allen wrench, Steel bar

Thread sealant

Three Bond #1360K

Sealant

Loctite #515

q 33.2.5.3.2

30 ton (66150 lb) class

Disassembly

The numbers in parentheses correspond to the ones in construction drawings Fig. 33-228. (1) Preparation 1) Before disassembly, clean the outside of the reduction unit thoroughly and check for no damage and scoring. 2) Drain gear oil from the reduction unit. 3) Disconnect the drain tube. 4) Matching Mark To facilitate the reassembly of the unit, put matching mark on the joining parts of the housing before disassembly. (2) Disassembling swing motor from reduction unit 1) Preparation for disassembly Place the reduction unit assy on a stable work bench as shown in Fig. 33-242, remove plug (27), drain out oil and put a matching mark on the matching surface of the figure on the right. 2) Removing swing motor assy Loosen all socket bolt (23) (M14). Attach eye bolts (M10) in the lifting bolt holes in the top surface of the swing motor and lift the assy by crane. If it is hard to remove the swing motor assy from the reduction unit, float it by inserting a flat-blade screwdriver in the groove of the flange. : 12 mm (3) Disassembling reduction unit

SWING MOTOR 23

MATCHING MARK

n

27

Fig. 33-242 Removing swing motor assy 7

2

6

1) Remove #1 sun gear (2). 2) Removing #1 spider assy (7). The spider assy (7) [consisting of thrust washer (15), #1 pinion (3), needle bearing (16) and snap ring (28)] can be removed from the spline easily if it is lifted up in that condition.

33-141

13

Fig. 33-243 Removing #1 sun gear and #1 spider assy


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 3) Removing ring gear (6) Attach eye bolts (M10) to the top surface of ring gear (6) and lift the ring gear lightly by a wire sling. Put a flat-blade screwdriver (n) into the matching surface of ring gear (6) and housing (13) and remove ring gear (6) by lightly tapping the outer circumference of the ring gear with a plastic mallet (k).

Fig. 33-244 Removing ring gear (6) 4) Remove #2 sun gear and #2 spider assy. Draw out #2 sun gear (4) and remove the #2 spider assy. Regarding the disassembly of the #2 assy, refer to par. (4) which will come up later.

Fig. 33-245 Removing #2 spider assy •

Particularly if no failure is found, the further disassembly (under condition shown in Fig. 33-246) is not allowed. Check on parts for possible failure according to the inspection procedure shown in item 33.2.5.4.2 separately in this condition. And we recommend that the pinion shaft and housing assy are replaced together as one set. But if it is unavoidably necessary to replace a part of them, follow the procedure shown below.

•

If no failure is found in this step, the disassembly later is not required. Fig. 33-246

5) Remove retaining ring (20) from pinion shaft (1).

33-142


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 6) Pulling out pinion shaft Pull pinion shaft (1), sleeve (21), oil seal (30) and spherical bearing (lower) (11) out by means of press while supporting housing (13) as shown in the figure. •

PRESS 10 12 1

Spherical bearing (upper) (10) and oil seal (12) are left in the housing.

13

JIG (a)

Fig. 33-247 Pulling out pinion shaft (1) 7) Removing spherical bearing (lower) (11) Pull oil seal (30), sleeve (21) and spherical bearing (lower) (11) out by means of jigs (b) (c) while supporting pinion shaft assy as shown in the figure. Press force : 30t •

PRESS

JIG (b)

Do not use the removed oil seal and bearing. JIG (c) 21 30 11

Fig. 33-248 Removing spherical bearing (lower) (11)

33-143


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 8) Removing spherical bearing (upper) Set housing (13) as shown in the figure, insert jig (d) between bearing (10) and oil seal (12) and remove bearing (10) by striking from the upper side. 9) Remove oil seal (12) from housing (13). •

Do not use the removed oil seal and bearing.

Fig. 33-249 Removing spherical bearing (upper) (10) and oil seal (12) (4) Disassembling spider assy

7

1) Disassembling #1 spider assy

3

28

16

15

1. Remove retaining ring (28) with a plier (i). 2. Remove thrust washers (28) (15), pinion (3) needle bearing (16).

15

Fig. 33-250 Disassembling #1 spider assy

The shaft attached to spider assy (7) is caulked. When replacing parts, replace the spider assy as a set.

Pinions (3) can not be replaced singly. Replace them it in a set of three. 2) Disassembling #2 spider assy

9

18

1. Draw out spring pin (22). 2. Draw out shaft (9) from spider (8) and remove thrust washer (18), pinion (5) and needle bearing (17).

17 5 18 8

Pinions (5) can not be replaced singly. Replace them it in a set of four.

33-144

22

Fig. 33-251 Disassembling #2 spider assy


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.5.3.3

Assembly

(1) Preparation 1) Sufficiently clean every part with wash oil and dry it with compressed air. 2) Check on every part for failure. (2) Assembling pinion shaft assy 1) Attaching oil seal Attach oil seal (30) to sleeve (21) by means of jig (e).

JIG (e)

30 Apply Loctite #515

21

Fig. 33-252 Attaching oil seal (30) 2) Inserting sleeve Insert sleeve (21) and oils seal (30) assy in pinion shaft (1). 3) Applying gear oil Apply gear oil to the perimeter of axis of pinion shaft (1) lightly to prevent seizure.

Fig. 33-253 Inserting sleeve in pinion shaft 4) Fitting spherical bearing (lower) Seal sufficient grease in spherical bearing (lower)(11) and force it in pinion shaft (1) by means of jig (f). Press force : 4~5t •

Since the bearing is formed with a partition at the center section, seal grease in it from both sides.

Fig. 33-254 Fitting spherical bearing (lower)

33-145


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 5) Apply sufficient grease to the pinion shaft assy. Grease : Lithium extreme-pressure grease (SHELL Albania EP2 or equivalent) (3) Placing pinion shaft assy in 1) Place housing (13) on level bench. 2) Attach eye bolt to screw (M10) at the axis end of pinion shaft assy, and perpendicularly hang up pinion shaft assy and place it in the housing. •

Horizontally orient the outer race of spherical bearing and insert it in by striking lightly. If the outer race is tilted, it is hard to insert even if striking. Then do not force to insert it in, but take it away once and horizontally orient the outer race twice and insert it in again.

Fig. 33-255 Apply grease

Fig. 33-256 Placing pinion shaft assy in 3) Set housing assy so that the pinion directs downward.

JIG (g)

4) Fit oil seal (12) in housing (13) by means of jig (g).

12

Apply Loctite #515 to the perimeter of oil seal.

Fill one third (1/3) of the space of the grooveshaped section provided on the oil seal (12) lip with grease.

Insert it horizontally giving attention to the lip of oil seal so as not be damaged.

13

Fig. 33-257

33-146


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 5) Press fit spherical bearing (upper) (10) in pinion shaft (1) and housing (13) at the same time by means of jig (h).

Fig. 33-258 Spherical bearing (upper) Press-fitting 6) Attach retaining ring (20).

20

Fig. 33-259 Attach retaining ring

33-147


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (4) Assembling spider assy

7

1) Assembling #1 Spider assy

3

28

16

15

a. Coat the bore surface of pinion (3) with grease. Put pinion (3) on thrust washer (15) and assemble needle bearing (16) into the bore surface

15

Fig. 33-260 Assembling #1 spider assy

b. Fit thrust washers (15) and pinion (3) as in Fig. 33-261 and fit snap ring (28) by means of pliers (i).

i

Fix the snap ring with the sharp edge on the motor side (top side in the position of Fig. 33-261).

Motor side

15

SNAP RING (28) 7

3

28

Fig. 33-261 Fixing snap ring 2) Assembling #2 Spider assy

GEAR SIDE Caulk two points with a punch.

a. Coat the bore surface of pinion (5) with grease. Put pinion (5) on thrust washer (18) and fit needle bearing (17) to the bore surface. b. Fit thrust washer (18) and pinion (5) as in Fig. 33-262 insert shaft (9) into spider (8) and drive spring pin (22).

SLIT

6~7mm 6~7mm (0.24~0.28 in) (0.24~0.28 in) VIEW I (Direction of spring pin)

18

9

Insert shaft (6) into spider (8) so spring pin hole (22) is aligned.

17 5 18 8

22

Fig. 33-262 Assembling #2 spider assy (5) Installing #2 spider assy Insert #2 spider assy in spline axis of pinion shaft (1).

#2 SPIDER ASSY

Fig. 33-263 Assembling #2 spider assy

33-148


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (6) Installing #2 sun gear (2) Install #2 sun gear (2) directing the spline upward.

2

Fig. 33-264 Installing #2 sun gear (2) (7) Installing ring gear (6) Apply a thin film of sealant Loctite #515 to the matching surface of housing (13) and ring gear (6) and assemble them, aligning the gear teeth and according to the matching marks given.

#2 SPIDER ASSY 6

Align maching marks.

13

Fig. 33-265 Installing ring gear (6) (8) Installing #1 spider assy 1) Mesh the #1 spider assy with ring gear (6) and set them in place. 2) Mesh #1 sun gear (2) with #1 pinion (3) and set them in place. (9) Fit drain tube (25) and plug (27). : 12 mm (10)Filling Lube Oil Fill in 3.0L (0.8gal) of gear oil SAE90 (API Service Grade GL-4). (11)Installing swing motor assy Attach eye bolts (M10) in the tapped holes of the swing motor and put a wire sling in them Coat the matching surface of ring gear (6) with sealant Loctite #515, insert the spline joint of the swing motor and match the matching marks. Coat socket bolts (23) with sealant Three-Bond 1360K and fasten them.

Fig. 33-266 Installing #1 spider assy

M14X135 23

MACHING MARKS

: 12 mm, Tightening torque : 181 N•m (130 lbf•ft)

Fig. 33-267 Installing swing motor assy

33-149


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.5.4 33.2.5.4.1

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS Swing motor

(1) Replacement standards for parts The following are the standards to determine whether or not parts may be reused from values taken at disassembly. These are only general standards and in case the motor displays poor performance or parts shows extreme damage and discoloration before disassembly, it is most important to determine how many parts should be replaced, depending upon the purpose of disassembly and the remaining service life of the motor that the user expects.

Item

Standard Dimension mm (in)

Recommended Value for Replacement mm (in)

0.027 (0.00160)

0.052 (0.00205)

0

0.3 (0.0112)

Replace piston and shoe assy.

5.5 (0.217)

5.3 (0.209)

Replace piston and shoe assy.

2.0 (0.0787)

1.8 (0.0709)

Replace.

Remedy

Clearance between piston and cylinder bore (D-d) Replace piston or cylinder.

Gap between piston and caulked part of shoe ( )

Thickness of shoe (t)

Thickness of friction plate

33-150


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (2) Standard for correcting sliding surfaces If the surface roughness of the sliding surface of parts exceeds the following standard, correct it or replace the parts. Standard for correcting sliding surfaces Standard surface roughness

Surface roughness requiring correction

Shoe

0.8—Z (Ra=0.2) (lapping)

3—Z (Ra=0.8)

Shoe plate

0.4—Z (Ra=0.1) (lapping)

3—Z (Ra=0.8)

Cylinder

1.6—Z (Ra=0.4) (lapping)

12.5—Z (Ra=3.2)

Valve plate

0.8—Z (Ra=0.2) (lapping)

6.3—Z (Ra=1.6)

Name of parts

Lap each sliding surface to a standard roughness level or finer.

If the spherical sliding surface of the spring (114) and cylinder (111) are roughened, replace parts in pairs.

33-151


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.5.4.2

Swing reduction gear

(1) Inspection at disassembly 1) Spacer and thrust washer a. Inspect that the parts are not seized or worn abnormally or unevenly. b. Inspect and measure the parts to see that the wear does not exceed the allowable values. 2) Gears a. Inspect that the gear teeth do not show pitting and seizure. b. Inspect by dye penetrant examination that the bottom of the teeth does not show cracks. 3) Bearing Turn the bearing and check that it does not develop abnormal sound, catching and other faults. Do not reuse spherical bearing 4) O-rings and oil seals Do not reuse O-rings and oil seals; always replace them with new ones at reassembly. (2) Inspection after assembly 1) Operation Check to see that #1 sun gear (2) is not faulty when turned by hand. 2) Checking for oil leak and oil condition Check for oil leak. Check the oil level by level gauge and confirm that the oil is not dirty. If the oil is short, replenish gear oil SAE90 (API Service Grade GL-4).

33-152


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (3) Maintenance standards

G

A

D

H LUBE OIL LEVEL

E C E B

F

Unit : mm (in) Code

Item

A

Wear in #1 planetary shaft

B

C

Wear in #2 planetary shaft

Gears

Repairable level 0

ø39

1.53 -0.0004

ø29

0.0787 -0.0079

Replace four shafts as a set.

There should be no pitting exceeding 1.6mm (0.0630in) dia, abnormal wear or seizure.

Condition of tooth flank

There should be no cracks. 0

1.6

0.063 -0.0079

E

Thickness of thrust washer

2.0

0.0787 -0.0079

F

Wear in shaft (Diameter of part coming in contact with oil seal )

G

Socket bolt tightening torque Lube oil

Replace entire spider assy.

Condition of tooth face

Thickness of thrust washer

Gear oil SAE90 (API Service Grade GL-4)

ø95

Remedy

No flaking

0

D

H

Service Limit

Replace (Planetary pinion should be replaced in a set of four.)

1.3

0.0512

Replace

0

1.6

0.063

Replace

0

ø94.9

3.736

Replace

0.0787 -0.003

M14— 181 N•m (130 lbf•ft)

Apply Three-Bond 1360K and tighten to specified torque.

3.0 L (0.8 gal)

Replenish or replace.

33-153


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.5.5

TROUBLESHOOTING

33.2.5.5.1

Swing motor

(1) Hydraulic motor does not rotate. Trouble Pressure does not rise.

Pressure rises

Cause

Remedy

1. Relief valve pressure in circuit is not adjusted correctly.

1. Set to correct value.

2. Malfunction of relief valve.

2.

2-1. Sticking plunger.]

2-1. Correct the stuck areas or replace the plunger.

2-2. Orifice on plunger is clogged.

2-2. Disassemble and clean.

3. Plunger seat is faulty.

3. Check the seat surface and replace the plunger if scored.

4. Anti-reaction valve seat is faulty.

4. Replace the anti-reaction valve cartridge or block.

1. Overload.

1. Eliminate overload.

2. Moving parts are seized.

2. Inspect and repair piston, shoe and cylinder valve plate.

3. Brake release pressure is not working on the motor

3. Check circuit and correct it.

4. Brake piston is stuck.

4. Disassemble and check.

5. Spool for releasing brake is stuck.

5. Disassemble and check.

6. Friction plate is seized.

6. Disassemble, check and repair.

(2) Rotating direction is reverse. Trouble Rotating direction is reverse.

Cause

Remedy

1. Motor’s assembling direction is reversed. 1. Assemble correctly. 2. Piping inlets and outlets are reversed.

2. Pipe correctly.

(3) Revolution does not rise to set value. Trouble Revolution does not rise to set value

Cause

Remedy

1. Oil inflow is deficient.

1. Check pump’s delivery rate and circuits to motor.

2. Oil leaks are excessive due to high temperature.

2. Lower oil temperature.

3. Sliding surfaces are worn or damaged.

3. Replace.

33-154


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (4) Brake torque is insufficient. Trouble Brake torque isinsufficient.

Cause

Remedy

1. Friction plate is worn.

1. Disassemble and check. Replace if wear is beyond standard value.

2. Brake piston is stuck.

2. Disassemble and check.

3. Brake release pressure is not released.

3. Check and correct circuit.

4. Break release spool is stuck.

4. Disassemble and check.

5. Spline of friction plate is damaged.

5. Disassemble and check. Replace damaged part.

(5) The swing motor drifts much. Check the drain rate of the hydraulic motor. If it is less than 4 L/min (1.1 gal/min), you should think that the motor is not faulty. Trouble The swing motor drifts much when it is actuated by external torques. (e.g. Machine is on a slope.)

Cause

Remedy

1.Relief valve malfunctions. Same as (1).

1. Replace. Same as (1).

2. Plunger seat is faulty.

2. Replace.

3. Seat of the anti-reaction valve is no good. 3. Replace the anti-reaction valve cartridge or block.

(6) Oil leaks 1) Oil leak from oil seal Trouble Oil leaks from oil seal

Cause

Remedy

1. Lip of seal catches contaminant and damaged.

1. Replace oil seal.

2. Shaft is damaged or worn.

2. Shift the lip and shaft positions or replace oil seal.

3. Casing inner pressure has risen abnormally high, with the result that lip of oil seal is flipped.

3. Repair drain piping if clogged up.

4. Shaft is rusted.

4. Disassemble and correct.

2) Oil leak from matching surface Trouble Oil leak from matching surface

Cause

Remedy

1. O-ring is missing.

1. Set O-ring correctly and assemble it.

2. O-ring has a scratch.

2. Replace.

3. Seal surface has a scratch.

3. Disassemble and correct.

4. Bolt is loose or damaged.

4. Tighten to specified torque or replace.

33-155


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.5.5.2

Reduction unit

33-156


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.6

SWIVEL JOINT

33.2.6.1

CONSTRUCTION VIEW

Fig. 33-268 Construction of swivel joint No.

Part name

Q’ty

No.

Part name

Q’ty

1

Body

1

7

O-ring (G95 1A)

1

2

Stem

1

8

Socket bolt (M8u20)

2

3

Thrust plate

1

9

Socket bolt (M8u30)

3

4

Cover

1

12

Plug

1

5

Seal

5

13

O-ring (P80)

2

6

Seal assy

1

33-157


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.6.2 33.2.6.2.1 No. a b

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Tools Tool Name

Used for

Remarks

Hammer

1. Steel hammer 2. Wooden or plastic mallet

Rubber mat Wrench

Disassembly Assembly

c

750 mm (30in) square or more 1. Allen wrench 2. Double-ended and single-ended wrench 3. Extension pipe

d

Torque wrench

Assembly

98 N•m (72 lbf•ft)

Pin e

Grind the tip of "a nail" to shape as a screwdriver.

Disassembly

Spatula

Make from a hack-saw blade

Disassembly Assembly

f

Approx. 120mm (4.72in)

Vinyl tape

g

Vise

h

Loctite

i

Lubricating oil

j

Cleaning oil

33.2.6.2.2

Disassembly Assembly

Remove the edge completely and make corner round smooth.

Vise movable over 150mm (6in) # 242 Hydraulic oil or vaseline

Apparatus

(1) Hoist or crane The lifting device should be capable of lifting the swivel joint assy. (2) Work bench The work bench should have an area of 1.2mu1.5m (4ftu5ft). (3) Others Also prepare cloth, wooden block and oil pan. 33.2.6.2.3

Cleaning outside

Clean the swivel joint to be free from dirt and dust, using steam and cleaning oil. • Keep all ports plugged up while cleaning.

33-158


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.6.2.4

Disassembly

The part numbers used in this disassembly procedure correspond to those of a construction drawing in Fig. 33-268. (1) Removing cover 1) Mark cover (4) and body (1) with matching marks for convenient reassembly. 2) Place a V-block on a work bench, place a swivel joint set on the side, fix it and loosen socket bolt (9) by means of a pipe and wrench. Alternately, the swivel joint may be fixed by holding stem (2) in a vise. : 6 mm

Fig. 33-269 Removing cover (4)

3) Remove cover (4) from body (1) and draw out Oring (7) from cover (4).

Fig. 33-270 Removing O-ring (7) (2) Removing thrust plate Loosen socket bolt (8) fastening thrust plate (3), in the same manner as the removing of the abovementioned cover. : 6 mm

When removing thrust plate (3) by fixing body (1), support stem (2) so it may not fall down.

Fig. 33-271 Removing thrust plate (3) (3) Removing stem Place body (1) on a V-block. Put a wooden block against stem (2) via the body so about half of the stem is covered by the wooden block and knock it out using a mallet. By hitting out the stem over about 1/2 from the body, it can be easily pulled out by hand. Stem weight : 10.5 kg (23 lbs)

Fig. 33-272 Drawing out stem (2)

33-159


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (4) Removing sealing parts

SPATULA (f)

1) Remove rings (13) of seal assemblies (6) and (5) with spatula (f). 13

Pay attention to the body (1) not to be damaged by the top edge of spatula (f).

Fig. 33-273 Removing O-ring (13) 2) Pierce slipper ring of seal assemblies (6) and (5) with pin (e) and remove them from the seal groove. Fig. 33-274 shows only one pin, but use two pins to remove it securely.

SLIPPER RING

BACKUP RING DETAIL (6) O-RING GROOVE SEAL (6) ASSY

PIN (e)

SEAL GROOVE OIL GROOVE

SEAL (5)

SEAL GROOVE

Fig. 33-274 Removing out seal assy (5)(6) 33.2.6.2.5

Assembly

Prior to assembly, clean each parts (excluding the Oring and seal), and arrange in the sequence of assembly. Apply grease on the groove of seal to be installed on seal assembly (6) and O-ring (13). (1) Assembling seals to body 1) Apply hydraulic oil to O-ring (13) thinly and insert it in O-ring groove. Check the twist of O-ring

33-160


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 2) Slipper ring is assembled, after first inserting the backup ring, by slightly-distorting the shape as shown in Fig. 33-275. Also after inserting all of the seals, be certain that these are installed in the seal groove by use of the spatula. 3) Assemble seal (5) by the same procedure above mentioned.

Fig. 33-275 Inserting slipper ring (6)

Remove grease, hydraulic oil and vaseline from the groove of seal. And insert seal (5). Seals (5) have no back-up ring. (2) Assembling stem Lightly coat the outer circumference of stem (2) and the inner surface of body (1) with grease or vaseline and slowly insert stem (2) into body (1).

If stem (2) is pressed in too fast, the seal may be damaged. Do it slowly.

The clearance between body (1) and stem (2) is about 0.1mm (0.004in). Push stem straight along the shaft center.

Press in by applying your weight by your hands.

2 STEM

O-RING 13 SEAL ASSY 6

1 BODY

SEAL 5 WORK BENCH

Fig. 33-276 Inserting stem (2) (3) Assembling thrust plate 1) While holding stem (2) and body (1), match the hole of thrust plate (3) and the stem (2) hole. 2) Next, after removing any oil from the thread of socket bolt (8), coat it with Loctite #242 and tighten to stem (2). : 6 mm, Tightening torque : 30.4 N•m (22 lbf•ft) Fig. 33-277 Tightening socket bolt (8)

33-161


33. UPPER STRUCTURE (4) Assembling cover After installing O-ring (7) to cover (4) and aligning the matching marks of the cover (4) and body (1), coat socket bolt (9) with Loctite #242 and tighten it which will then complete assembly. : 6 mm, Tightening torque : 30.4 N•m (22 lbf•ft)

Fig. 33-278 Tightening socket bolt (9)

33-162


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.6.3 33.2.6.3.1 Interval 2,000hr

MAINTENANCE STANDARDS Inspection procedure and remedy Check Item Seal for oil leakage outside

All sealing parts 4,000hr In principle, disassemble All sliding parts and check regardless of oil leakage or not. When All parts disassembled for repair

33.2.6.3.2

Remedy Replace O-ring or dust seal , if any oil leakage can be found.

Check oil leakage outside

Replace all sealing parts such as slipper seal with back-up ring and O-ring. Check abnormal wear, scoringor corrosion caused by foreignmatters or seizure.

Repair or replace referring to their limit of service.

Check them for seizure, foreignmatters, abnormal wear, anddefect of seals.

Repair or replace referring to their limit of service. O-rings and dust seal should be replaced.

Service limit of the parts Parts Sliding surface with sealing sections

Body, Stem

Checking Procedure

Maintenance Standards Plating worn or peeled due to seizure or contamination.

Sliding surface between 1) Worn abnormally or damaged more than 0.1mm (0.004in) in depth due to seizure or contamination. body and stem other than sealing sections 2) Damaged less than 0.1mm (0.004in) in depth. 1) Worn more than 0.5mm (0.02in) or abnormality. Sliding surface with thrust 2) Worn less than 0.5mm (0.02in). plate 3) Damage due to seizure or contamination repairable within wear limit 0.5mm (0.02in). 1) Worn more than 0.5mm (0.02in) or abnormality.

Cover

Sliding surface with thrust 2) Worn less than 0.5mm (0.02in). plate 3) Damage due to seizure or contamination

repairable within wear limit 0.5mm (0.02in).

33-163

Remedy Replace Replace Smooth with oilstone. Replace Smooth Smooth Replace Smooth Smooth


33. UPPER STRUCTURE Parts

Maintenance Standards

Remedy

1) Protruded excessively from seal groove.

Replace (With back-up ring)

2) Slipper ring 1.5mm (0.06in) narrower than seal groove, or narrower than back-up ring.

Slipper ring

1.5mm (0.02in) (max.)

Replace (With back-up ring)

BACKUP RING 3) Worn unevenly more than 0.5mm (0.02in)

Replace (With back-up ring)

33-164


33. UPPER STRUCTURE 33.2.6.3.3

Inspection after assembly

After completion of assembly, inspection for oil leakage, pressure resistance, etc., using a device as shown in Fig. 33-279. (1) High pressure port (A,B,C,D and F port) Install a directional valve and pressure gauge to the stem side port and body side port respectively, and while watching the pressure gauge (for high pressure) installed on the body side and also by regulating high pressure relief valve (7), gradually increase the pressure and when the pressure has reached 1.5 times the maximum working pressure, close stop valve (3) and lock in the hydraulic oil in the swivel. Keep stop valve (6) on the low pressure relief valve side closed at this time. Check that it is free from looseness, deformation, breakage, etc. under three minutes pressurizing. And, the oil leakage must be checked for the first 1 minute, and if there be a pressure drop for any reason, the pressure drop should be in 10% of the trapped pressure. This checking must be carried out for every circuit. Fig. 33-279 Hydraulic circuit for inspection equipment (2) Low pressure port (E port) Similar to the high pressure port, install a directional valve and pressure gauge on each port of the stem side and body side. Open stop valve (6) on the side of low pressure relief valve (5) and while watching the pressure gauge (for low pressure) connected to the body side and also by regulating low pressure relief valve (5), gradually increase the pressure and check for outside leakage with a color check at a pressure of 0.49MPa (71psi).

33.2.6.3.4

Troubleshooting Trouble

Cause

Remedy

1. External leakage of hydraulic oil

Defective O-ring & seal

2. Internal leakage of hydraulic oil

1) Defective slipper seal

1) Replace all seals.

2) Sliding face worn excessively

2) Replace assy.

1) Stem and body seized

1) Grind and hone. Replace assy, if stem and body are too loose and causing oil leakage.

3. Swivel stem seized

Replace all seals.

2) Inappropriate swivel stopper bracket 2) Reinstall Secure 2~3mm (0.08~0.12in) allowance for bolt stopper. 4. Loose swivel stem and cover

Socket bolt tightened insufficiently.

33-165

Retighten.


33. UPPER STRUCTURE

[MEMO]

33-166


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM TABLE OF CONTENTS 34.1 REMOVING AND INSTALLING.......................................................................................34-3 34.1.1

TRAVEL SYSTEM .................................................................................................34-3

34.1.2

CRAWLER..............................................................................................................34-3

34.1.3

UPPER ROLLER ....................................................................................................34-7

34.1.4

LOWER ROLLER ...................................................................................................34-13

34.1.5

FRONT IDLER (IDLER ADJUSTER ASSY) ...........................................................34-21

34.1.6

SPROCKET ............................................................................................................34-30

34.1.7

TRAVEL MOTOR ..................................................................................................34-33

34.1.8

SWING BEARING ..................................................................................................34-35

34.2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TRAVEL MOTOR UNIT .......................................34-38 34.2.1

TRAVEL MOTOR ...................................................................................................34-38

34

Book Code No. S5YN3421E01 34-1


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

March, 2007

n

July, 2007

n

n

n

n

n

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

Remarks S5YN3421E01 (NHK Russia) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n

K K K K

(NHK Middle East) HS Engine

PREFACE (1) This Manual describes all the procedures from removing to attaching, arranging them by item. (2) This Manual consists of first part. Removing and attaching, and sequel. Disassembling and assembling. (3) The removing and attaching can be performed in the procedure specified in Table of Contents, but in view of actual repairing or time saving some process can be omitted. (4) The removing and attaching procedure does not completely cover all possible situations because of differences of field condition and defective section. (5) Please be aware that the procedure to be followed must be determined according to the above conditions. When disassembly and assembly are required, select the necessary section, itemize the work contents with good understanding, then starts working.

34-2


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

34.1

REMOVING AND INSTALLING

34.1.1

TRAVEL SYSTEM

8. SWING BEARING 2. CRAWLER 7. TRAVEL MOTOR 5. FRONT IDLER

6. SPROCKET

GUARD

LOWER FRAME 3. UPPER ROLLER

GREASE NIPPLE OF THE TRACK SPRING ADJUSTER

4. LOWER ROLLER

Fig. 34-1 Designation and location of undercarriage 34.1.2 34.1.2.1

CRAWLER REMOVING CRAWLER

(1) Position the machine to remove crawler. (2) Pushing out master pin. 1) Find the master pin and place it in its removing/ fixing position in Fig. 34-3. 2) Loosen the grease nipple and slacken crawler. : 19 mm

When loosening the grease nipple of the adjuster, do not loosen it more than one turn.

Where grease does not come out well, move the machine back and forth. The over loosening of grease nipple may cause it to jump out incurring danger of injury. So be careful not to over loosen the grease nipple.

Fig. 34-2 Crawler removing position

3) Pushing out master pin Apply jig on master pin and strike it out with a mallet. (Refer to Fig. 34-7 Press fitting of master pin)

When using a big hammer, wear protective goggles and a long-sleeved uniform so you do not injure yourself by flying objects.

Fig. 34-3 Removing/fixing position of master pin

34-3


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (3) Removing crawler Put attachment on ground so that weight is not loaded to the lower frame, and remove track link assy rotating sprocket.

Crawler end section may fall on the ground just before extending it on the ground incurring danger of injury. Please keep well away from the equipment. Fig. 34-4 Removing crawler 34.1.2.2

INSTALLING

Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. (1) Checking crawler installation direction. Place the track links on the ground so they converge, facing the front idler, as shown in the figure on the right. (2) Installing crawler 1) Preparation for installation Treat paint flaking protection with care not to damage lower flame.

Fig. 34-5 Installing direction of crawler

2) Winding crawler Insert a crowbar into the master pin hole, lift the lower frame 1 to 2cm above the ground level by holding it by hand so the machine body weight is not exerted on the shoe. Retract the sprocket to help push the back winding of the crawler. (3) Preparation for press fitting master pin 1) Preparing for installation Put square wood under the shoe plate. 2) Aligning master pin holes Aligning master pin holes through fine adjustment turning sprocket.

•

When using a big hammer, exercise care so you are not injured by flying objects the same way as when pushing out the master pin.

•

Coat the master pin with molybdenum disulfide grease, before pressing it in.

Fig. 34-6 Winding crawler

(4) Press fitting of master pin Apply press fitting jig on master pin, and strike it with a mallet to press fit.

Fig. 34-7 Press fitting of master pin

34-4


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (5) Adjusting crawler tension (See Fig. 34-8) After installing, adjust tension of crawler. : 19 mm

A

Fig. 34-8 Adjusting crawler tension 34.1.2.3

CONSTRUCTION

1-1

1-8

1-3

1-4

FLAT SHOE 2

1-6

1-8 TRIANGLE SHOE 2

1-2

1-7

1-2

1-5

4

RUBBER PAD SHOE 2

1-7

1-1

3

3

3

Fig. 34-9 Track link assy and shoe plate

YN60D00054F5

YN60D00055F4

Shoe assy

LC undercarriage YN60D00055F2

Shoe assy

STD undercarriage YN60D00054F2 YN60D00054F6

No. NAME 1 .LINK ASSY YN62D00017F1 1-1 ..TRACK LINK R 1-2 ..TRACK LINK L 1-3 ..BUSHING 1-4 ..PIN 1-5 ..MASTER BUSHING 1-6 ..MASTER PIN 1-7 ..COLLAR 1-8 ..SEAL 2 .SHOE 600mm .SHOE 700mm .SHOE 800mm 3 .BOLT 2420Z1292 4 .NUT 2420Z1293

No. 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 2

Q'TY 1 1 1 46 46 46 46 46 46 45 45 45 45 45 45 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 90 90 90 46 - - 46 - - 46 184 184 184 184 184 184

3 4

34-5

YN60D00055F5 NAME

.LINK ASSY YN62D00017F3 ..TRACK LINK R ..TRACK LINK L ..BUSHING ..PIN ..MASTER BUSHING ..MASTER PIN ..COLLAR ..SEAL .SHOE 600mm .SHOE 700mm .SHOE 800mm .BOLT 2420Z1292 .NUT 2420Z1293

Q'TY 1 1 1 49 49 49 49 49 49 48 48 48 48 48 48 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 96 96 96 49 - - 49 - - 49 196 196 196 196 196 196


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.2.4

MAINTENANCE STANDARD E D

F D

G

B

A

C

H

Fig. 34-10 Unit : mm (in) No.

ITEM

A

Link pitch

B

O.D. of bushing

C

Height of link

STANDARD VALUE

SERVICE LIMIT

198 (7.80) Replace the link ø 58.78 (2.3142 ) ø 55 (2.17) ø 54 (2.13) assy if the service 106 ± 0.3 (4.1732 ± 0.0118) 100 (3.94) 98 (3.86) limit is exceeded

Interference between bushing and link

Tolerance

Fit

Fit

+ 0.11 Interference Interference (+0.0043) ø 58.78 0.05 Shaft 0 - 0.05 (2.3142) (0.0020) (-0.0020)

Interference between track pin and link

+ 0.1 Interference Interference (+0.0039) ø 36.63 0.05 Shaft 0 - 0.05 (1.4421) (0.0020) (-0.0020)

F

Interference between master pin and link

- 0.03 Interference (-0.00118) Interference ø 36.50 0.05 Shaft - 0.088 0 (1.43701) (0.0020) (-0.00315)

G

Clearance between links

H

Tightening torque of shoe bolt

E

34.1.2.5

1.5 (0.06) (both side)

(1) Tightening tools Unit : mm (in)

Socket

OPPOSING FLATS 30 (1.2)

(2) Jig NAME

8 (0.32) 10 (0.39) (both side) (both side)

853 N•m (629 lbf•ft)

TOOLS AND JIGS

NAME

REMEDY

190 ± 0.1 (7.4803 ± 0.0039) 194 (7.64)

Basic dimension D

REPAIRAB LE LEVEL

SHAPE

Master pin fixing jig for iron crawler

34-6

Replace

Replace Link

Replace Reassembly


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.3

UPPER ROLLER

34.1.3.1

UPPER ROLLER ASSY

UPPER ROLLER ASSY No. ITEM

NAME

YN64D00032F1 Q’TY

REMARKS

1

ROLLER ASSY

4

YN64D01068F1

2

CAPSCREW (SEMS SCREW)

4

M20uP2.5u100

3

NUT

4

4

WASHER

4

34.1.3.2

REMOVING

(1) Preparation for removal Remove crawler (Above mentioned).

3

4

(2) Removing upper roller (1) 2

1) Remove nuts on support tightening section, and also remove capscrew (2) M20u100.

1

: 30 mm

Fig. 34-11 Removing upper roller 34.1.3.3

INSTALLING

Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. (1) Inspection Before reassembling, check it that it rotates smooth manually and for leak.

COUNTERSINKING

(2) Installing upper roller (1) 1) To install the upper roller, turn up socket bolts (2) toward the center of machine. 2) Insert it until collar comes in contact with support. CENTER OF MACHINE

3) Fit it directing the countersinking mark of shaft end upward. 4) Apply Loctite #262 on capscrew M20u100, and tighten it to the specified torque. : 30 mm Tightening torque : 539 N•m (400 lbf•ft) 2

1

3,4

Fig. 34-12 Installing upper roller

34-7


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.3.4

CONSTRUCTION 11

1

8

10

4

5

6

7

3

2

9

Fig. 34-13 Construction of upper roller 34.1.3.5

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

(1) Disassembly 1) Draining out oil Remove plug (10) and drain out oil. : 6mm 2) Removing snap ring (11) Mount the end face inside upper roller (1) on stand jig (f) and separate snap ring (11), using snap ring pliers. 3) Removing cover (5) Take off cover (5) upwards, utilizing the screwed hole for the plug. 4) Removing O-ring (8) Separate O-ring (8) from cover (5).

Fig. 34-14 Construction of upper roller

5) Removing plate (4) Loosen 2 socket bolts (9) and draw out plate (4) from roller (1). : 10mm 6) Removing shaft (2) Put the extrusion jig (h) against the end face of shaft (2) and push shaft (2) with collar (3) for floating seal (7), using a press or hammer.

Fig. 34-15 Extruding shaft

34-8


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 7) Removing floating seal (7). Take out floating seal (7) from roller (1).

Fig. 34-16 Taking out floating seal 8) Removing floating seal (7). Remove from collar (3), floating seal (7) that is located on the side from which shaft (2) was disassembled.

Collar (3) is press fitted into shaft (2). Therefore do not disassemble it.

Fig. 34-17 Removing floating seal and extruding bushing 9) Removing bushing (6) Since the bushing is thin, machine it on a lathe or scrape it off, take care so as not to damage the bore of roller (1). If the bushing is not worn much, mount upper roller (1) on jig (f), insert jig (g) into the end face of bushing (6) and push it out with a press.

Push with press (e) i 6 1

(2) Assembly Assembly of the upper roller is done in the reverse order of disassembly.

f

1) Place upper roller (1) on the top end face of jig (f), with its floating seal setting side facing down. 2) Confirm that the outer surface of bushing (6) is not scuffed and coat the outer surface of the inserting side of the bushing, with molybdenum disulfide grease.

Fig. 34-18 Pushing in bushing

2 7

3) Put jig (i) into bushing (6) and press it in, using the bore of the bushing and the bore of the roller as guides.

7 3

If you fail in this operation by pressing the bushing unevenly, the bushing is distorted and gets unserviceable. In that case, do not re-use the bushing as it may develop malfunctioning after assembly.

Fig. 34-19 Fixing floating seal

34-9

1


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 4) Installing floating seals (7) Two floating seals (7) make a pair. Attach one floating seal to retainer fixed in shaft (2), and another to the inside of upper roller (1).

2

7

• Prior to placing floating seal (7) in, apply engine oil lightly to seal surface.

1

5) Inserting shaft (2) Coat shaft (2) with a thin film of oil and insert it into upper roller (1). Fig. 34-20 Inserting shaft

6) Installing plate (4) Mount upper roller (1) on the stand jig (f) and attach plate (4) to the end face of the shaft with bolt (9). : 10mm, Tightening torque : 115N•m (85 lbf•ft) 7) Installing O-ring (8) Fit O-ring (8) to the groove of cover (5). • Apply grease to O-ring. 8) Installing cover (5) Attach cover (5) to upper roller (1). Use a press in this operation as a press fit is used. 9) Installing snap ring (11) Fix snap ring (11) into upper roller (1), using snap ring pliers.

Fig. 34-21 Installing cover

10) Filling oil Fill in 30cc (1.83cu•in) of engine oil API grade CD #30 through the plug hole in cover (4). 11) Installing plug (10) Wind seal tape around plug (10) and screw it into the plug hole of cover (4). : 6mm, Tightening torque : 23N•m (17 lbf•ft) • After assembling the upper roller, confirm that oil is not leaking from it and that it rotates smoothly by hand.

Fig. 34-22 Filling oil

34-10


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

E F

C

MAINTENANCE STANDARD

A

34.1.3.6

D

D B G

Unit : mm (in) No.

ITEM

A

Dia.

B

Width

C

Tread dia.

D

Tread width

STANDARD VALUE

REPAIRABLE LEVEL

SERVICE LIMIT

ø 140 (6.30)

150 (5.91)

ø 120 (4.72)

ø 107 (4.21) ø 105 (4.13)

33 (1.30)

Fit

Fit

ø 45 (1.772) Shaft

- 0.025 (-0.00098) - 0.040 (-0.00157)

Clearance 0.7 (0.028)

Clearance 1.0 (0.039)

F

Interference between ø 50 (1.969) Hole roller and bushing

+ 0.030 (+0.00118) 0

Interference Clearance 0 0.01 (0.0004)

G

Tightening torque of socket bolt

Basic dimension E

Clearance between shaft and bushing

Oil Roller rotation

Tolerance

REMEDY

Replace

Replace bushing

115 N•m (85 lbf•ft) Engine oil API grade CD #30, 30cc (1.83cu•in)

Refill

Roller rotates smoothly by hand.

Reassembly

34-11


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.3.7

TOOLS AND JIGS

(1) Tightening tools Unit : mm NAME

OPPOSING FLATS 30

Socket

6,8

Allen wrench (2) Jigs

Unit : mm (in) No.

NAME

SHAPE

(0.709)

(1.46)37

50(1.97)

87(3.43)

1.949 +0.004 0

(1.18) (1.26)32

+0.1 49.5 0

Bushing fixing jig

18

i

49(1.93)

+0.1 0

h

For extruding shaft

52.5(2.07)

44.6

g

For extruding bushing

1.756 +0.004 0

Stand jig

60(2.36)

f

160 (6.30)

120 (4.72) 90 (3.54)

34-12


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.4

LOWER ROLLER

ROLLER ASSY

34.1.4.1

B5 Apply Loctite #262

STD undercarriage YN64D00020F1

T=397N.m (290 lbf.ft)

LC undercarriage

YF64D00002F1 NAME Q'TY

ITEM

1

LOWER ROLLER ASSY

LOW ROLLER : YN64D00019F1 - 14 LOW ROLLER : YF64D00001F1 16 CAPSCREW : M18X80(P=1.5) 64 56

2

2

1

Apply Loctite #262 T=397N.m (290 lbf.ft)

B2

Fig. 34-23 Lower roller assy and track guide 34.1.4.2

REMOVAL

(1) Preparation for removal 1) Loosen the tension of the crawler, lift up the lower frame by the front attachment and stop the engine in that condition. 2) Place a safety block (wood) at the front and back of the lower frame. (2) Removing track guide Remove capscrews (B5) and remove track guide (B2).

Fig. 34-24 Preparation for removal

LOW ROLLER

: 27mm, Weight of track guide : Approx. 25kg (55 lbs)

ITEM

STD undercarriage YN01F00035F1

B2,B5

LC undercarriage

YN01F00036F1 NAME Q'TY

B2 TRACK GUIDE : YN63D00003P1 2 B5 CAPSCREW : M18X40(P=1.5) 8

STD

2 8

(3) Remove lower roller Remove capscrews (2) and remove lower roller (1). : 27 mm, Weight of lower roller : Approx. 33kg (73 lbs)

B2,B5 LC

Fig. 34-25 Installing track guide

Fig. 34-26 Installing lower roller

34-13


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.4.3

INSTALLATION

(1) Installation of lower roller Coat mounting capscrews (2) with Loctite #262 and fasten all 4 capscrews temporarily. Then tighten them to a specified torque. : 27 mm, Tightening torque : 397N•m (290 lbf•ft) (2) Installation of track guide Capscrews (4) with Loctite #262 and fasten all 4 capscrews temporarily. Then tighten them to a specified torque. : 27 mm, Tightening torque : 397N•m (290 lbf•ft) (3) Adjusting tension of crawler Tighten grease nipple and fill it with grease. : 19 mm, Tightening torque : 59N•m (43 lbf•ft)

34-14


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.4.4

CONSTRUCTION

LOWER ROLLER

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

STD undercarriage YN64D00019F1 LC undercarriage

NAME ROLLER COLLAR SHAFT BUSHING PIN FLOATING SEAL O RING PLUG

34.1.4.5

4 1 6 2 7 5

8

YF64D00001F1

REMARKS Q'TY 1 2 1 2 2 2 1A G60 2 PT1/4 2

3

Fig. 34-27 Construction of lower roller

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

(1) Disassembly 1) Drain oil Remove plug (8) and drain out oil. : 6mm 2) Removing pin (5) Put both ends of lower roller assy on the Vshaped blocks (K), apply push-out bar (L) on upper end face of pin (5), and push pin (5) out striking with mallet. 3) Removing collar (2), O-ring (7) Put lower roller on jig (M) for repair stand so that the shaft (3) is perpendicularly located, apply push-out jig (P) on shaft end on upper side, and push shaft (3) until the O-ring (7) separate from collar (2) with press or mallet, and take out collar (2) and O-ring (7).

Fig. 34-28 Pushing out collar fixing pin (5)

JIG P 7

4) Removing shaft (3) In addition, push out and remove shaft (3) together with the lower collar (2) and O-ring (7).

2 1 3 JIG M

The shaft (3) extrusion operation may cause the remaining lube oil to flow out. Prepare an oil container beforehand.

Fig. 34-29 Removing shaft (3), collar (2), O-ring (7)

34-15


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 5) Removing collar (2), O-ring (7) Remove O-ring (7) from shaft (3) that was drawn out in the previous paragraph. 6) Removing floating seal (6) Remove floating seal (6) from collar (2). 7) Removing floating seal (6) Remove floating seal (6) from roller (1). Fig. 34-30 Removing floating seal (6)

Fig. 34-31 Removing floating seal (6) 8) Removing bushing (4) Since thickness of bushing (4) is thin [thickness is 2.0mm (0.079in)], remove it through lathe or strip it with care not damage inner hole of roller. When the wear of bushing is not large, place upper roller (1) on jig (M) for repair stand and apply the end of push-out jig on the end face of bushing (4) end, and push it out striking it with mallet.

N 1

4 JIG M

Hammer the inside surface of roller lightly so as not to damage the surface. Put the extrusion jig (N) uniformly over the circumference of bushing (4) and extrude it perpendicularly little by little.

34-16

Fig. 34-32 Extruding bushing (4)


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (2) Installing 1) Attach O-ring (7) to one side Install O-ring (7) to groove on shaft. • Grease O-ring. Fig. 34-33 Attach O-ring (7) to one side

• Replace O-ring with new one without fail at reassembling. 2) Press fitting bushing (4) Align inner hole of roller (1) and bushing (4) and press fit it vertically in capacity of press fit load, 5ton (11000 lbs), in the condition that bushing push-in jig (Q) is inserted into bushing (4).

JIG Q

4

• Apply molybdenum disulfide grease on pressfit section of bushing, and press fit it in ordinary temperature. • Bushing which fails to press-fit because of the one-side pressing should not be fitted. 3) Press fitting collar (2) Fit O-ring (7) to the one side of shaft (3) mating pin hole of collar (2) on which floating seal (6) is fit with pin hole of shaft (3) in advance. Use the press of capacity 17 ton (37500 lbs) or more.

Fig. 34-34 Press fitting bushing (4) PRESS PIN HOLE 2

6

PIN HOLE 3

• Care should be taken not to damage O-ring (7) while press-fitting collar (2) to shaft (3). 4) Inserting pin (5) Press-fit pin (5) to pin hole on aligning pin holes of shaft (3) and collar (2).

Fig. 34-35 Press fitting collar (2)

6

5

3

7

2

Fig. 34-36 Inserting pin (5)

34-17

7


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 5) Attach floating seal (6) to roller side Fit floating seal (6) to inner holes on both ends of roller (1). • Check that the seal surface is free from flaws, rusts, etc. before reusing the floating seal.

1

6

3

6) Inserting roller (1) Insert roller (1) from the side where collar (2), O-ring (7) is not press-fitted to the shaft (3).

2

7

Fig. 34-37 Inserting roller (1) 7) Installing O-ring (7) Install O-ring (7) to groove on shaft.

PRESS PIN HOLE

• Grease O-ring.

2

• Replace O-ring with new one without fail at reassembling.

PIN HOLE 7

8) Press fitting collar (2) Press-fit collar (2) to shaft (3). 3

• Press-fit collar (2) on aligning pin (5) hole. 9) Inserting pin (5) Press-fit pin (5) in to the pin hole mating pin hole of collar (2) with pin hole on the end side of shaft (3).

Fig. 34-38 Installing O-ring (7), collar (2) 10) Filling oil Remove plug (8) and fill in 160cc (9.8cu•in) of engine oil API grade CD #30. 11) Check it for leakage Before tightening plug (8), check it for leakage in the condition of air pressure 0.2 MPa (29 psi). 12) Installing plug (8) Apply oil resistant sealant on plug (8), and tighten it in the plug hole on the collar (2) end face.

8

TIGHTENING TORQUE 23N.m (17 lbf.ft)

2

: 6 mm, Tightening torque : 21.6~24.5 N•m (15.9~18.1 lbf•ft)

Fig. 34-39 Installing filling oil plug (8)

After assembling the lower roller, confirm that oil is not leaking and that the roller rotates smoothly by hand.

34-18


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.4.6

MAINTENANCE STANDARD

Fig. 34-40 Lower roller (Track roller) Unit : mm (in) STANDARD VALUE

REPAIRABLE LEVEL

SERVICE LIMIT

O.D. of flange

ø 185 (7.28)

B

Tread dia.

ø 150 (5.91)

ø 134 (5.28)

C

Flange width

23.5 (0.925)

18 (0.709)

16.5 (0.65)

Fit

Fit

- 0.060 (-0.00236) ø 65 Shaft - 0.090 (2.55905) (-0.00354)

Clearance 0.7 (0.276)

Clearance 1.0 (0.394)

+ 0.030 (+0.00118) Hole - 0.020 (-0.00079)

Interference 0

Clearance 0.01 (0.0004)

No. A

D

ITEM

Clearance between shaft and bushing (Wrapped bushing)

E

Interference between roller and bushing

F

Oil

H

Plug (8) Roller rotation

Basic dimension

ø 69 (2.71653)

Tolerance

REMEDY

Reinforcement weld, repair or replace ø 128 (5.04)

Engine oil API grade CD #30, 160cc (9.8 cu•in)

Replace bushing

Refill

Execute air leak test at 0.2MPa (28psi) before tightening the plug. Rotates smoothly by hand.

34-19

Reassembly


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.4.7

TOOLS AND JIGS

(1) Tightening tools Unit : mm NAME

OPPOSING FLATS 19, 27

Socket

6

Allen wrench (2) Jig

Unit : mm (in) No.

NAME

K

V-block

L

Pin (5) extrusion rod

N

Bushing extrusion rod

SHAPE

16 (0.630)

14 (0.551)

100(3.94)

200(7.87)

Stand jig

P

Shaft extrusion jig

160(6.30)

M

125 (4.92)

290(11.4)

Bushing fixing jig

94.5(3.72)

Q

64.5(2.54)

86(3.39)

30 (1.18)

64 (2.52)

270(10.6)

+0.1

64.6 0 (2.543 +0.004 ) 0

34-20


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.5

FRONT IDLER (IDLER ADJUSTER ASSY)

34.1.5.1

FRONT IDLER ASSY

FRONT IDLER ASSY

YN52D00034F1

No.

NAME

Q'TY

1 2 3 4

IDLER ASSY IDLER ADJUSTER ASSY CAPSCREW GREASE NIPPLE

2 2 4 2

APPLY LOCTITE #262 OR EQUIVALENT T=279N.m(210 lbf.ft) 1 3

REMARKS YN52D00009F1 YN54D00014F1 M16X45

2

4

Fig. 34-41 Front idler assy 34.1.5.2

REMOVING

(1) Preparation for removal Remove crawler. (Above mentioned) (2) Removing idler assy Sling idler assy, and push it forward with bar. Weight of front idler assy : 210kg (463 lbs)

BAR

Keep away from the front side of front idler. (3) Installing Installing is done in the reverse order of removing. (4) Where idling assy (1) has to be separated Loosen capscrew (3), and separate idler assy (1) from idler adjuster assy (2). Fig. 34-42 Removing and installation the front idler : 24 mm Weight of idler assy : 107kg (236 lbs) Weight of idler adjuster assy : 103kg (227 lbs) • The separated idler assy (1) should be placed on square timbers.

Fig. 34-43 Separating idler assy (1) from idler adjuster

34-21


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.5.3

IDLER ASSY

34.1.5.3.1

CONSTRUCTION

Fig. 34-44 Idler assy 34.1.5.3.2

REMOVING AND INSTALLING

(1) Removing

5

1) Drain oil Remove plug (8) on the side of collar (3) to drain.

R

: 5 mm 2) Removing pin (5) Apply pin push bar (jig R) to the top of pin, and push out striking bar (jig R) lightly by hammer.

Fig. 34-45 Removing pin (5) PUSH WITH PRESS

3) Removing collar (3) Put idler (1) on stand (U), apply push-out jig (S) on shaft (6), push out shaft (6) with collar (3), then remove collar (3).

6

S 3

1

U

3

Fig. 34-46 Removing collar (3) 4) Removing collar (3) from shaft (6) If removal of collar (3) on the opposite side is required, turn over front idler and proceed with the procedure described in Par. 3).

PUSH WITH PRESS S 6

3

U

Fig. 34-47 Removing collar (3)

34-22


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 5) Removing bushing (2) With idler (1) mounted on the stand, tap bushing (2) lightly by hammer, while placing the bushing drawing rod (T) against the end face of bushing (2) evenly all round, till it comes out. 6) Removing floating seals (4) Take out floating seals (4) from idler (1), collar (3). If you intend to re-use floating seals (4), confirm that there is no scoring and rusting on the contact surface and store the floating seals in pairs by placing card board between the sealing faces.

Fig. 34-48 Removing bushing (2)

7) Removing O-ring (7) Separate O-ring (7) from shaft (6). (2) Assembly

2

1) Pressing in bushing (2) Align inner hole of idler (1) and bushing (2) and press fit it vertically with press so that jig (V) for bushing press-fitting is inserted into bushing (2).

PUSH WITH PRESS

V 1

2) Installing O-ring (7) Fit O-ring (7) to O-ring groove on shaft (6). Fig. 34-49 Pressing in bushing (2) •

Apply grease to O-ring

3) Installing collar (3) (See Fig. 34-50) Press fit the O-ring (7) installed side of shaft (6) into collar (3), and drive pin (5).

PRESSING 6

4) Installing floating seal (4) Fit the half of floating seal (4) on each side of collar (3) and idler (1).

3 5

5) Inserting idler (1) Insert floating seal (4) fitted side of idler (1) into shaft (6).

Fig. 34-50 Installing collar (3), shaft (6)

6) Installing floating seal (4) Fit floating seal (4) on the other side of idler (1).

Fig. 34-51 Inserting idler (1) and installing floating seal (4)

34-23


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 7) Installing collar (3) Fit the half of floating seal (4) on the other collar (3), press fit it in shaft (6), and drive pin (5) in with hummer. 8) Filling oil•Inspection Fill in 200cc (12.2cu•in) of engine oil API grade CD #30 through the plug hole of collar (3), wind seal tape and tighten plug (8). : 5 mm Fig. 34-52 Installing collar (3) and filling oil •

34.1.5.3.3

After installing the idler assy to the idler adjuster assy, make certain that no oil leaks from floating seal and plug (8) and that idler (1) rotates smoothly. MAINTENANCE STANDARD 160(6.30) C

D

E

B

A

F

Fig. 34-53 Front idler Unit : mm (in) No. A

ITEM Dia. of idler projection

B

Tread dia.

C

Flange width

STANDARD VALUE ø 535 (21.1) ø 497 (19.6) 84 ± 0.5 (3.307±0.020)

REPAIRABLE SERVICE LEVEL LIMIT —

ø 490 (19.3) ø 487 (19.2) 78 (3.07)

76 (2.99)

Fit

Fit

ø 75 Shaft (2.95275)

- 0.03 (-0.00118) - 0.06 (-0.00236)

Clearance 1.5 (0.059)

Clearance 2.0 (0.079)

E

Interference between idler and ø 83 Hole bushing (3.26771)

+ 0.035 (+0.00138) 0

Interference 0

Clearance 0.01 (0.0004)

F

Oil

Basic dimension D

Clearance between shaft and bushing

Idler rotation

Tolerance

REMEDY

Replace

Replace bushing

Engine oil API grade CD #30, 200cc (12.2cu•in)

Refill

Rotates smoothly by hand

Reassemble

34-24


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.5.3.4

TOOLS AND JIGS

(1) Tightening tools Unit : mm NAME

OPPOSING FLATS 24

Socket Allen wrench

5

No.

NAME

SHAPE

R

Pin striking jig

(2) Jigs

30 (1.18)

(0.591) 15

Unit : mm (in)

105(4.13)

(0.591) 15

340 (13.4)

T

Bushing drawing rod

U

Stand

105(4.13)

Bushing press fitting jig

70(2.76)

V

20 (0.787)

300(11.8)

(0.630) 16

74 (2.91)

Shaft push out jig

74.6

90(3.54)

S

+0.1 0

(2.937 +0.004 ) 0

W Collar press fitting jig

(1.18) 30

103(4.06)

34-25


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.5.4 34.1.5.4.1

IDLER ADJUSTER ASSY CONSTRUCTION

IDLER ADJUSTER ASSY No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

NAME GREASE CYLINDER BRACKET NUT SPRING PIN SPRING PISTON COLLAR O-RING U-PACKING PIN COVER

34.1.5.4.2

YN54D00014F1 Q'TY

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1

REMARKS

8X80

Fig. 34-54 Idler adjuster assy

1B G80

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

(1) Disassembly

M30

1) Spring set special jig Before disassembling and assembling the idler adjuster assy, prepare spring setting jig (V). Capacity of hydraulic jack : more than 20 tons (44000 lbs)

HOLDING-DOWN NUT RETAINER PLATE

V

: 46 mm HYDRAULIC JACK

Large power is needed to set the spring. Prepare a special jig before disassembly and assembly.

BASE

Fig. 34-55 Spring set special jig (V) 2) Preparation for working Place a hydraulic jack between the jig base and the stand. Loosen the holding-down nuts of the jig and draw out the retainer plate upward.

2

: 46 mm 3) Draw out grease cylinder (See Fig. 34-54) Draw out piston (6) from grease cylinder (1) of the idler adjuster assy.

5

4) Removing U-packing (9), O-ring (8) (See Fig. 3454) Remove U-packing (9) and O-ring (8) from grease cylinder (1). 5) Slinging work idler adjuster Set the idler adjuster assy on the stand of the jig, with its bracket side facing up.

34-26

V

Fig. 34-56 Slinging work idler adjuster


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 6) Fixing idler adjuster assy Fit retainer plate to bracket (2), tighten holdingdown nuts alternately, and secure idler adjuster assy.

3

: 46 mm

HOLDING-DOWN NUT

RETAINER PLATE

4

Fig. 34-57 Fixing idler adjuster assy 7) Compression of spring (5) Remove spring pin (4), press spring (5) lifting it with jack so that nut (3) can be turned freely, and remove nut (3). : Bar ø7.5u120 : 80 mm

Fig. 34-58 Compression of spring (5) 8) Removing bracket (2) Allow the hydraulic jack to retract slowly till the spring is extended to its free length. Remove the retainer plate and take off bracket (2), cover (11). The free length of the spring : 540.1 mm (21.3 in)

RETAINER PLATE

2 11

Fig. 34-59 Removing retainer plate, bracket (2) 9) Removing spring (5), grease cylinder (1) Hook lifting eye nut (W) to screw M52uP3 on grease cylinder (1) top end and hoist it. Then, remove the set of grease cylinder (1) and spring (5) using crane from the jig. Remove spring (5), collar (7), grease cylinder (1), in that order.

Fig. 34-60 Removing spring (5), grease cylinder (1)

34-27


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (2) Assembly Assembly is done in the reverse order of disassembly.

W 1

1) Installing spring (5), grease cylinder (1) Insert grease cylinder (1), collar (7) into spring (5) and attach lifting eye nut (W) to screw M52uP3 at the tip of the grease cylinder. Lift the grease cylinder by crane and erect it in the center of the jig stand upright. 2) Fixing idler adjuster assy Install bracket (2), cover (11) on top of spring (5). Center the rod of grease cylinder (1) and the holes in bracket (2). Attach the retainer plate and four holding-down nuts. Fasten the nuts evenly all round and fix the idler adjuster assy to the jig body. (See Fig. 34-65)

5

Fig. 34-61 Attach spring (5) and grease cylinder (1) to the jig

: 46 mm 3) Compressing spring (5) and tightening nut (3) Extend the hydraulic jack, compress spring (5) to a set length and screw in nut (3) to the screwed part at the tip of grease cylinder (1). Set length of the spring : 429mm (16.9in)

HOLDINGDOWN NUT RETAINER PLATE

2 4 3

4) Installing spring pin (4) Tighten nut (3) till the holes for locking spring pins (4) are aligned. Then fit spring pin (4). 11

: 80 mm

7 1 5

Fig. 34-62 Compression of spring (5), and attaching nut (3) and spring pin (4) 5) Removing idler adjuster assy Remove idler adjuster assy from jig.

Fig. 34-63 Removing idler adjuster assy

34-28


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 6) Installing U-packing (9), O-ring (8) Fit U-packing (9) and O-ring (8) to grease cylinder (1). •

1

9

8

Grease oil seal (9) and O-ring (8).

7) Filling grease cylinder(1) with grease. Fill up grease in cylinder (1), remove the grease nipple from piston (6) to discharge the inside air, and press in the piston by hand. •

GREASE NIPPLE

Fig. 34-64 Grease cylinder (1)

Direct grease nipple hole downward to make air discharge easier.

8) Installing grease nipple Tighten grease nipple to piston (6). : 19 mm, Tightening torque : 59 N•m (43 lbf•ft) 34.1.5.4.3

MAINTENANCE STANDARD

No.

ITEM

STANDARD VALUE

A

Installed length of spring

429mm (16.9 in)

B

Free length of spring

C

Stroke

51.8mm (2.04in)

D

Set length

716mm (28.2in)

E

Outside view of piston

F

Tightening torque of grease nipple

Approx. 540.1mm (21.3 in)

Nor scoring and rusting 59N•m (43 lbf•ft)

X

C X

E

A, B

Y

D

F

INSTALL A SPRING WHOSE STARTING POINT AT BRACKET SIDE TO BE 35 DEGREE.

BRACKET

DETAIL Y SECTION XX

Fig. 34-65

34-29

6


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.6 34.1.6.1

SPROCKET REMOVING

(1) Preparation for removal Remove crawler referring to "34.1.2 CRAWLER", lift up crawler frame with attachment, and put it on square timbers to float and stabilize.

Fig. 34-66 Preparation for removal (2) Removing sprocket Loosen 26 capscrews (2) M16u45, for the attaching of the sprocket by means of a socket and remove the sprocket (1). Weight of sprocket : 48kg (106 lbs) : 24 mm

3 2

Fig. 34-67 Removing sprocket 34.1.6.2

INSTALLING

(1) Check before installing Check the mating portion of the travel reduction unit and the sprocket, eliminate burrs and contamination thoroughly and install the sprocket. (2) Installing sprocket temporarily Coat the sprocket attaching capscrews with Loctite #262 and fasten the sprocket temporarily. (3) Installing sprocket completely Remove the wooden blocks under the truck frame, bring the machine down on the ground and tighten the sprocket. : 27 mm Tightening torque : 279 N•m (206 lbf•ft) Fig. 34-68 Installing sprocket completely

34-30


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.6.3

MAINTENANCE STANDARD (YN51D01003P1) PITCH

96.07mm (3.78in)

NUMBER OF TEETH

21

ROLLER DIA.

ø58.72mm (2.31in)

PITCH DIA.

644.602 (25.333in)

SPECIFICATION

C

A

B

Fig. 34-69 Sprocket Unit:mm (in) No.

NAME

STANDARD VALUE

REPAIRABLE LEVEL

SERVICE LIMIT

ø 659 (25.9)

ø 651 (25.6)

ø 649 (25.6)

A

O.D. of sprocket

B

Width of sprocket teeth

66±2 (2.520±0.079)

60 (2.36)

58 (2.28)

C

O.D. of sprocket bottom

ø 586 (23.1)

ø 578 (22.8)

ø 576 (22.7)

34.1.6.4

TOOLS AND JIGS

(1) Tools Unit : mm NAME Socket

OPPOSING FLATS 24

34-31

REMEDY Reinforcement weld, repair or replace. Replace. Reinforcement weld, repair or replace.


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (2) Sprocket tooth profile gauge : W

Unit : mm (in)

.7823) 96.07(3

)

R ( 6 0 .23 6"

Fig. 34-70 Tooth profile gauge (Full scale)

34-32


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.7 34.1.7.1

TRAVEL MOTOR TRAVEL MOTOR

3

APPLY LOCTITE #262 OR EQUIVALENT TIGHTENING TORQUE: 279 N.m(206 lbf.ft)

4

Fig. 34-71 Installing travel motor 34.1.7.2

REMOVING

(1) Preparation for removal Remove crawler, lift up crawler frame using attachment, and put it on square timbers to float and stabilize. (2) Removing cover (1) Remove sems bolt (6) M12u25 and also remove covers (1). : 19 mm (3) Preparation of oil pan (4) Removing hydraulic pipe Release pressure from travel circuit, and bleed air in hydraulic oil tank, then remove all pipes connecting to travel motor. Then plug up all pipes and joint section to protect them from entry of dust.

Fig. 34-72 Removing and installing cover (1)

: 19mm, 27mm, 41mm Refer to "Hydraulic pipe plug" 5.1 (See Chapter 11. TOOLS) "Plug for flare hose" 5.2 (3) (See Chapter 11. TOOLS)

Fig. 34-73 Removing and installing hydraulic pipe

34-33


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (5) Removing sprocket Removing twenty two (one side) capscrews (2) M18u55. : 24 mm

Fig. 34-74 Removing and installing sprocket (6) Loosening travel motor attaching bolts (3) Apply match marks on travel motor and crawler frame, and remove seventeen (one side) capscrews (3) M20u60.

REMOVE PIPES (DISCONNECT)

: 24 mm 3

Fig. 34-75 Removing and installing travel motor attaching bolts (7) Slinging travel motor assy Sling travel motor with nylon sling applied on the side close to sprocket installing section and remove the motor. Weight of motor : About. 260kg (573 lbs)

Fig. 34-76 Slinging travel motor 34.1.7.3

INSTALLING

Installing of the travel motor piping is performed in the reverse order of removal. 1) Cleaning Check that contact surface of travel motor and crawler frame is free from burr and stain. 2) Tightening torque Tighten capscrew and hydraulic pipes to the torque specified in "Tightening Torque". 3) Fill inside from motor drain port to casing with hydraulic oil before piping for drain. When starting operation, operate motor in low idling and at low speed for several minutes, and check it for possible oil leakage and noise.

34-34


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.8 34.1.8.1

SWING BEARING SWING BEARING ASSY

FRONT

A

A

INNER S ZONE POSITION OF SWING BEARING

1 2 SECTION AA

Fig. 34-77 Swing bearing assy 34.1.8.2

REMOVING

(1) Matchmarks Remove upper structure, apply matchmarks on inner race of swing bearing and lower frame.

SWING BEARING OUTER RACE INNER RACE

(2) Remove 36 capscrews (2) M20u65 for installation inner race.

MATCHMARKS

: 30 mm (3) Removing grease Remove grease in grease bath.

Fig. 34-78 Matchmarks SWING BEARING

(4) Removing swing bearing Attach eyebolt on swing bearing and sling it.

EYE BOLT

Weight of swing bearing : 243kg (536 lbs)

GREASE BATH

Fig. 34-79 Removing and installing swing bearing

34-35


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.1.8.3

INSTALLING

(1) Cleaning Clean it completely so that installing surfaces of swing bearing and lower frame are free from dust and dirt. (2) Installing Install swing bearing on lower frame meeting the matchmarks and positioning the S mark on inner race as shown in Fig. 34-80. (3) Temporary fastening of inner race Coat the threads of the capscrews (2) with Loctite #262 and tighten all the capscrews (2) temporarily. : 30 mm (4) Regular tightening of inner race Tighten the capscrews (2) at 180 degrees intervals alternately to a specified torque.

Fig. 34-80 Location of S mark on swing bearing

: 30 mm, Tightening torque : 563 N•m (415 lbf•ft) (5) Filling grease Fill grease bath with 8.6kg (19 lbs) of grease NLGI2 (containing molybdenum disulfide) or equivalent.

Fig. 34-81 Removing and installing capscrew (2) 34.1.8.4

CONSTRUCTION 6 8

1 9

7

3 5 2

Fig. 34-82 Sectional view of swing bearing 34.1.8.5

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

(1) Disassembly 1) Remove seal (5) fitted in the groove in the outer circumference under inner race (2) and seal (6) fitted in the groove in the inner circumference on top of outer race (1) and place them level on a square wooden block or something. 2) Remove taper pin (7), using a hammer and an extrusion rod.

EYE BOLT 7

6

2

1 SQUARE WOODEN BLOCK 8

3) Remove plug (8), utilizing an pull bolt inserted in the screwed hole (M10) in the center of the plug and using a puller.

34-36

5

Fig. 34-83 Disassembling swing bearing


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 4) While rotating outer race (1) little by little, take out ball (3) and retainer (4) through plug hole, in that order.

1

3

4

2

Fig. 34-84 Removing balls (3) and retainers (4) (2) Installing 1) Thoroughly degrease the groove for seal (6) located on the inner surface of outer race (1) and the groove for seal (5) located on the outer surface of inner race (2). Coat the grooves with adhesive Cyano Bond PX-3000 equivalent, fit seal (5) and place it on a surface plate. 2) Lower outer race (1) to the position where upper surface of inner race (2) and lower portion of seal groove is mated, put adjusting washer under outer race (1) so that outer raceway surface of ball (3) aligns with inner raceway, and support it. 3) Insert ball (3) and retainer (4), on which grease is applied, through plug (8) hole on outer race (1), alternately.

1 PUSH ROD

6 2

SQUARE WOODEN BLOCK

5

3

Fig. 34-85 Fitting balls (3) EYE BOLT

HOOKED ROD

To insert ball (3) and retainer (4), use a push rod, etc., to protect persons from injury from inserting fingers into plug hole. 4) Fit plug (8) to outer race (1) while checking it for direction and position of taper pin hole.

4 SQUARE WOODEN BLOCK

Fig. 34-86 Fitting retainer (4)

5) Coat seal (6) with adhesive Cyano Bond PX3000 equivalent and fit it in the groove of outer race (1). 6) After completion of assembly, caulk the edge of taper pin (7) by punching. 7) Check that grease nipple (9) is properly fitted, and fill it with grease. Then, check bearing for smooth rotation and flaws on seal lip portion. • Shell Albania EP#2 ; 160cc (9.76cu•in) 34.1.8.6

MAINTENANCE STANDARD

Maintenance standard concerning wear of swing bearing is described in the section 13.6 MEASURING SWING PERFORMANCES of "Maintenance Standard and Test Procedure" in this manual.

34-37


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

34.2

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TRAVEL MOTOR UNIT

34.2.1

TRAVEL MOTOR

34.2.1.1

CROSS-SECTIONAL VIEW

A

A

B

SECTION B-B

B

C

C

SECTION C-C SECTION A-A

34-38


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM No.

Parts

Q'ty

No.

Parts Piston assembly

Q'ty

1

Hub

1

1

3

Carrier [1]

1

161 • Piston

1

4

Sun gear [1]

1

163 • Seal

1

5

Planetary gear [1]

3

162 Steel ball

1

6

Carrier pin [1]

3

102 Shaft

1

7

Carrier [2]

1

8

Sun gear [2]

1

9

Planetary gear [2]

3

10 Carrier pin [2]

No.

Parts

Q'ty

Rear flange assembly 301 • Rear flange • Spool assembly

1 1

323 •• Spool

1

326 •• Plug

2

1

327 •• Valve

2

103 • Swash plate

1

328 •• Spring

2

3

167 • Pivot

2

331 •• O-ring

2

11 Thrust washer [1]

6

107 Retainer plate

1

324 • Plug

2

12 Thrust washer [2]

6

108 Thrust ball

1

325 • Spring retainer

2

13 Thrust plate

1

109 Timing plate

1

329 • O-ring

2

14 Cover

1

112 Piston

1

330 • Spring

2

15 Coupling

1

113 Spring

8

363 • Spool

1

16 Parallel pin [1]

3

114 Spring

9

364 • Connector

1

17 Parallel pin [2]

3

115 Friction plate

3

365 • Pin

1

22 Lock washer

2

116 Separator plate

4

366 • Spring

1

23 Shim

1

119 Shim

1~2

367 • Spring retainer

1

24 Angular ball bearing

2

132 Oil seal

1

368 • G (PF) 1/4 plug

2

27 Needle-roller bearing

3

133 Snap ring (for hole)

1

369 • O-ring

2

28 Needle-roller bearing

3

135 D ring

1

370 • G (PF) 3/8 plug

1

29 Floating seal

1

139 D ring

1

371 • O-ring

2

30 Plug

3

149 Taper roller bearing

1

372 • Orifice

2

31 O-ring

3

150 Taper roller bearing

1

373 • Orifice spring

2

35 Socket bolt

18

374 • G (PF) 1/8 plug

5

36 Snap ring (for hole)

1

375 • O-ring

6

Swash plate kit

Relief valve assembly 201 • Valve seat

2

376 • M6 orifice

3

101 Spindle

1

202 • Valve

1

377 • Check valve

3

137 Socket plug

1

203 • Sleeve

1

378 • Check valve spring

3

138 Expander

1

204 • Plug

1

379 • O-ring

1

205 • Spring retainer

1

380 • O-ring

1

Piston kit

1

206 • Piston

1

341 • Parallel pin

1

• Piston assembly

9

207 • Spring

1

343 • Socket bolt

8

345 • Socket plug

15

399 Name plate

1

105 •• Piston

1

208 • Piston seal

1

106 •• Shoe

1

209 • Piston seal

1

104 Cylinder block

1

210 • O-ring

1

34-39


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.2 34.2.1.2.1

GENERAL FOR MAINTENANCE Tools

(1) Standard tools No.

Tools

1

Allen wrench

2

Socket wrench (Ratchet handle) (JIS B 4641)

Size

Q'ty

3 (For M6), 4 (For PT1/16) 5 (For PF1/8), 6 (For PF1/4) 8 (For M10 and PF3/8) 10 (For PF1/2), 14 (For M16)

1 each

1

Torque wrench

Dial type Approx. 50N•m (37lbf•ft) Dial type Approx. 100N•m (74lbf•ft) Dial type Approx. 300N•m (221lbf•ft) Dial type Approx. 400N•m (295lbf•ft)

1 each

4

Adapter for torque wrench

Nominal 32 (O.D. 44mm (1.73inch) or less), 46 Socket, Nominal 3,4,5,6,8,10,14 Hex key

1 each

5

Torque wrench (Wrench type)

Opposing flats 21mm (0.83inch)

1

6

Extension bar

150mm (5.91inch)

1

7

Hammer

Various size

8

Plastic mallet

L= Approx. 400mm (15.7inch)

Flat-bladed screw driver

Approx. 50mm (2 inch) Approx. 150mm (6 inch)

3

9

1 each

Snap ring

For shaft For hole

11

Lifting tool

Lifting capacity 9800 N (7230 lbf) Eye bolt for M16 Eye bolt for M10 Eye bolt for PF1/2 Wire with hook

12

Leather gloves

10

1 1 each 1 1 1 set (2) (3) (2) (1) 1 set

(2) Apparatuses Application item (Use or number of relevant parts)

Apparatus

Disassembly and assembly

Work bench for general-use

Cleaning the parts

Cleaning bath

For rough cleaning and finish cleaning

1 set

24 (Angular ball bearing)

Work bench for press

Pressing capacity 9800 N (7230 lbf) or over

1 set

Drying after cleaning

Compressed air

Pressure 0.29 to 0.49 MPa (42 to71 psi)

Size

Remarks

Q'ty 1 set

34-40


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (3) JIGS Name: Work bench for travel motor •

This is used to disassemble and to assemble of travel motor safely and securely.

Name: Fixing metal •

This is used to assemble spindle (101) and hub (1).

Name: Jig for installing lock washer •

Jig for installing lock washer (22) into groove of spindle (101).

Name: Jig for press-fitting angular ball bearing •

Jig for press-fit angular ball bearing (24) into hub (1).

Name: Steel bar (I) •

This is used to remove angular ball bearing (24) from hub (1).

34-41


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM Name: Long eye bolts •

These are used to lift travel motor, spindle (101) and hub (1).

Name: Spatula •

This is used to remove timing plate (109) from rear flange (301).

Name: Jig for installing floating seal (I) •

This is used to install floating seal (29) into hub (1).

Name: Jig for installing floating seal (II) •

This is used to install floating seal (29) into hub (1) and spindle (101).

Name: Jig for installing floating seal (III) •

This is used to install floating seal (29) into spindle (101).

34-42


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.2.2

Tightening torque Bolt / Nut

Number of relevant parts (In cross-sectional view)

Opposing flats Q'ty mm (inch)

Tightening torque N•m (lbf•ft)

Name

Size

30

Plug

PF1/2

10 (0.394)

3

98.1±19.6 (72.4±14.5)

35

Socket bolt

M10 (P1.5)

8 (0.315)

18

57.9±9.81 (42.7±7.24)

137

Socket plug

PT1/16

4 (0.1575)

1

13.7±1.37 (10.1±1.01)

204

Plug

M27 (P1.5)

32 (1.2598)

2

157~177 (116~131)

324

Plug

M38 (P1.5)

46 (1.811)

2

304~324 (224~239)

364

Connector

PF3/8

21 (0.8268)

1

49.0~58.8 (36.1~43.4)

368

Plug

PF1/4

6 (0.2362)

2

29.4±2.94 (21.7±2.17)

370

Plug

PF3/8

8 (0.315)

1

49.0~58.8 (36.1~43.4)

374

Plug

PF1/8

5 (0.1969)

5

14.7±1.47 (10.8±1.08)

343

Bolt

M16

14 (0.5512)

8

230±23.0 (170±17)

34.2.1.2.3

Weight of component

Number of relevant parts (In cross-sectional view)

Components

Weight kg (lb)

Travel motor assembly

Approx. 277 (610)

1

Hub

Approx.79 (175)

101

Spindle

Approx. 60 (130)

3 and others

Carrier (ÇP) Assy

Approx. 27 (60)

7 and others

Carrier (ÇQ) Assy

Approx. 47 (105)

34-43


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.3 34.2.1.3.1

DISASSEMBLY Preparation

The following preparations must be made before disassembly. (1) Preparing working bench •

Prepare work bench for travel motor.

•

Prepare work bench which is sturdy for disassembly and assembly of the travel motor's inner parts and has enough space to put the parts, and from which the possibility of the dropping and movement of parts is eliminated.

•

Cover the work bench with rubber sheet, vinyl sheet, etc.

(2) Preparing tools and materials. Prepare the tools and materials which are specified in paragraph 34.2.1.2.1. 34.2.1.3.2

General cautions required to perform the work

The inner parts which are under disassembly may be easily slipped because they are coated by gear oil and hydraulic oil. Special attention must be given to the handling of parts which might fall and injure, and might be damaged.

When flammable like diesel oil or kerosene, etc. is used to wash and clean the removed parts, pay attention to the handling so as not to start a fire and get burn because the flammable is tending to catch fire. (1) Identify the items to be checked and the property of abnormalities detected rightly before disassembly, and carry out the disassembly according to the specified procedure. (2) Handle parts taking care so as not to collide each other and not to drop because the each part is precisely made. (3) Do not strike or pry parts even if made by hard material, otherwise the assembly might be difficult due to burrs and damage and may cause the deterioration of performance. (4) If the parts removed or under disassembly are left, it may cause rusting of parts due to moisture and dusts. If it is unavoidably necessary to suspend the work, do not fail to protect the parts form rust and dust. (5) Mark the mating face of each part at the time of disassembly. (6) Go ahead with the work while putting the removed parts in order so as not to damage or miss the parts during disassembly. (7) The removed seals, etc. must be replaced with new ones even if no damage is found. Prepare the spare parts before starting disassembling. (8) The pictures and figures carried in this document are taken by typical models. Even if a part of the picture and figure differs from those of products in use, it has not an effect on the disassembling procedure.

34-44


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.3.3

Disassembling procedure

(1) Cleaning travel motor 1) Tighten eye bolt to the tapped hole for spindle (2), hang up the travel motor with hoist and carry it to washing bath.

Tighten two eye bolts to the tapped holes for spindle in such locations that they are symmetrical each other. 2) Clean each section of travel motor with car washing brush.

Carefully clean the space between hub (1) and spindle (101) (floating seal fitting section) because earth and sand might be entered.

(2) Installing travel motor 1) Put travel motor on work bench.

Align the thread hole of hub (1) to the threaded hole of work bench and softly insert the travel motor in attaching hole of work bench. 2) Attach the travel motor on the work bench in such locations that two socket bolts are symmetrical each other.

Securely tighten the socket bolt. If not, there is a possibility of injury due to the drop of travel motor when it has been turned over.

(3) Draining lube oil. 1) Lay the travel motor horizontally. (Direct the drain port downward.) 2) Loosen oil filler plug (30) and release the pressure in the reduction unit, and then lightly tighten the plug again.

If the pressure is applied to the inside of reduction unit, lubricating oil may be gushed out when loosening the plug of drain port. 3) Put the oil pan under the top end of drain port and slowly loosen the plug of drain port and then drain lubricating oil.

Prepare the oil pan of which the capacity is sufficient for the lubricating oil quantity specified to the reduction unit, 5.3L.

34-45


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 4) If it is hard to drain lubricating oil, slowly loosen and remove the plug of oil filler port. 5) Remove O-ring (31) from the removed plug.

Do not use the removed O-ring (31). It may cause oil leak. (4) Removing cover 1) Turn over travel motor. (Direct reduction unit upward.) 2) Loosen and remove bolt 18-M10. 3) Since the sealant is used on the mating faces of cover (14) and hub (1), apply a protecting plate to the cover obliquely and remove the cover while striking it upward.

Be careful about the cover which might be sprung up when striking the cover obliquely upward. Pay attention to the cover which might be drop on foot, etc. 4) Attach eye bolt to the PF1/2 port and hang up and move the cover from the hub. (5) Removing 1st gear 1) Attach eye bolts to 3 tapped holes M10 for carrier [1] (3) and hang up and move carrier [1] assembly by hoist.

When lifting carrier [1] assembly, slowly lift it directing center shaft of hub and carrier [1] assembly upright to protect the internal gear of hub from being damaged by the edge of planetary gear [1] (5). 2) Lift and remove sun gear [1] (4) by hand.

Pay attention to sun gear [1] in order not to drop because it is slippery because of lubricating oil applied.

34-46


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (6) Removing 2nd gear 1) Attach eye bolts to 3 tapped holes M10 for carrier [2](7) and lift and move carrier [2] assembly by hoist.

When lifting carrier [2] assembly, slowly lift directing center shaft of hub and carrier [2] assembly upright to protect the internal gear of hub from being damaged by the edge of planetary gear [2] (9). 2) Lift and remove sun gear [2] (8) from carrier [2] assembly by hand.

Pay attention to sun gear [2] in order not to drop because it is slippery because of lubricating oil applied. (7) Removing coupling 1) Remove coupling (15) from shaft (102).

(8) Removing lock washer 1) Direct the spindle side upward. 2) Secure it in shaft direction with special jig to protect the spindle from dropping out by making use of threaded hole M16 of hub (1) and spindle (101).

34-47


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 3) Apply flat-blade driver or equivalent to the space between two lock washers (22) and remove it while striking the driver obliquely downward.

(9) Removing spindle 1) Direct the spindle side upward. 2) Remove the special jig used to secure hub and spindle. 3) Attach eye bolt to spindle and lift the spindle by hoist.

Slowly lift the spindle in parallel with the shaft of hub. If the spindle is obliquely lift, a large force which might cause the breakage of the hoisting accessory, eye bolt, etc. is applied resulting in injury by being hit by the hoisting accessory. When it is hard to pull it out, do not be forced to lift, but use press, etc. to pull it out safely. (10) Removing floating seal 1) Touch the inner side of floating seal (29) by hand, and remove it pushing upward.

There is a case where the edge of floating seal cuts your finger. We recommend using glove when removing it. And when it is stuck due to the intrusion of mud, remove it using screw driver as a lever.

(11) Removing angular ball bearing 1) Apply iron bar to the inner ring of angular ball bearing (24) and remove it little by little while striking 3 or 4 points divided into equal divisions on the circumference by hammer.

If the inner ring is struck, the raceway surface may be damaged, and consequently the reuse of ball bearing might be impossible. Therefore the angular ball bearing should be removed only when required to be replaced.

34-48


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (12) Removing rear flange assembly 1) Directs rear flange (301) upward. 2) Loosen 8 socket bolts (348) and remove rear flange.

3) Remove rear flange from spindle (101).

When the rear flange is removed by both hands, pay attention to timing plate (109) and spring (113) so as not to drop.

When disassembling the parts of rear flange section, loosen each plug before loosening socket bolts used to secure rear flange [operation of (12) 2] to facilitate going ahead with the disassembly which is carried out later.

34-49


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (13) Removing taper roller bearing 1) Secure sliding surface of cylinder block (104) with fixing plate.

Insert rubber-like cushioning material between cylinder block sliding surface and fixing plate giving attention to the sliding surface of cylinder block so as not to damage. 2) Apply puller axis to the center hole of shaft (102) and hook claw to the inner ring of taper roller bearing (150). 3) Pull the taper roller bearing out of the shaft while slowly turning the axis of puller with spanner, etc. Put rear flange (301) on work bench while directing the mating face with spindle (101) upward.

When the retainer (cage) of the taper roller bearing is accidentally damaged by puller, replace the retainer (cage) with new one. (14) Disassembling parking brake 1) Pull the piston out making use of the threaded hole M6 of piston (112).

2) Turn work bench sideways. 3) Remove separator plate (116) and friction plate (115).

34-50


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (15) Disassembling rotary section 1) Pull out cylinder block, piston (105) and retainer plate (107) together.

2) Remove swash plate (103).

3) Remove shaft (102).

Slowly pull the shaft out being care not to damage the lip of oil seal (132).

(16) Removing piston 1) Apply cloth on piston (161), blow air through the drilled hole and remove the piston of spindle (101).

34-51


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.4

SERVICE STANDARDS

Disassemble GM motor according to this standard. At this time do not damage the moving and sliding part. 34.2.1.4.1

Seals

Replace all seals (O-ring, oil seal, floating seal with new one) once used even if no damage is seen. 34.2.1.4.2

Wear parts maintenance standard

(1) Replace any part that shows damage on appearance. (2) Replace such parts that show the following abnormalities, as well. Item No.

Parts

Trouble

Reference value

Allowable value

Clearance on diameter 0 to 0.05mm (0.002inch)

Clearance on diameter 0 to 0.2mm (0.008inch)

• Severe damage to appearance. (1)

Hub

• Pitting occurs on tooth surface of ring gear. • Abnormal wear such as scoring is present.

(101)

Spindle

(3) and other

Carrier assembly

(4) (8) (5) (9)

Sun gear 1 Sun gear 2 Planetary gear 1 Planetary gear 2

(11) (12)

Thrust washer 1 Thrust washer 2

• Severe damage to appearance. • Abnormal wear such as scoring is present. • Abnormal wear such as scoring is present.

• Pitting occurs on tooth surface of gear. • Flaking is seen on race of bearing. • Discoloration and abnormal wear appears on the sliding surface. • Dent is present.

(24)

Angular ball bearing • Flaking is seen. • Uneven wear is present.

(27) (28)

Needle-roller bearing

(301)

Rear flange

(102)

Shaft

• Pitting occurs on roller. • Abnormal wear is present on the end of cage. • Sliding part is damaged due to valve (263) motion. • Contact face between shaft and oil seal (132) was worn. • Spline was worn.

(103)

Swash plate

• Seizure is present. • Spline is worn.

(104)

Cylinder block

• Bore surface is worn badly. • The face between sliding surface and timing plate (109) was scored or worn unevenly.

(105) (106)

Piston assembly piston shoe

• Clearance is present in the axial direction between piston and shoe. • Shoe is worn abnormally and unevenly. • Deformation is present.

(107)

Retainer plate

• The sliding surface between thrust ball (108) and plate is scored and worn unevenly.

34-52


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

Parts

Trouble

Reference value

Allowable value

(108)

Thrust ball

• The sliding surface between retainer plate (107) and spherical sliding part is worn unevenly.

(109)

Timing plate

• Sliding surface is seized or worn unevenly.

(115) (116)

Friction plate Separator plate

Item No.

• Both end face are worn unevenly. • Special torque can not be reached. • Seizure is seen. (112) (135) (139)

Piston D ring D ring

• Outer circumstance is scored. • Wear or nibbling are seen on D ring.

Braking torque Braking torque 470N•m 470N•m (347lbf•ft) (347lbf•ft) —

• Dent is present. (149) (150)

Taper roller bearing

• Flaking is seen. • Uneven wear is present.

(161) (163)

Piston Seal

(323) (363)

Spool

• Wear or nibbling are seen on seal. • Outer circumstance is scored. • Outer circumstance is worn unevenly.

34-53


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 34.2.1.5

ASSEMBLY

The assembly is carried out by the reverse procedure of disassembly.

34.2.1.5.1

Preparation

Prepare work bench, tools and materials similarly to the disassembly specified in paragraph 34.2.1.3.

34.2.1.5.2

General caution necessary to perform the work

(1) Pay attention to the same general caution as the disassembly explained in paragraph 34.2.1.3. (2) On assembling, remove metal chips and foreign matters from all parts and make sure that parts are free from burr, dent, etc. If burr and dent are found, remove them by means of oil stone. (3) Replace O-ring, oil seal and floating seal with new one. (4) Remove adhesive left on the threaded hole of hub (1) by passing tap M10uP1.5 through the hole. Then clean and degrease the threaded hole, and blow air to remove cleaning fluid. Replace socket bolt (7) with new one. (5) Use care about O-ring, oil seal and floating seal when fitting them so as not to damage. (Apply grease in small amounts to smooth.) (6) Be sure to apply clean hydraulic oil (NAS grade 9 or more) to the moving parts and sliding parts provided on the hydraulic motor and valve before assembling. (7) Do not use cloth glove during assembling work. (To prevent malfunction due to lint of fiber) (8) Torque bolts and plugs to values specified in paragraph 34.2.1.2.2 "Table of Torque". (9) At the time the assembly was completed, plug all ports to prevent dust entering. (10)The pictures and figures carried in this document are taken by typical models. Even if a part of the picture and figure differs from those of products in use, it has not an effect on the assembling procedure.

34.2.1.5.3

Assembling procedure

Remove adhesive adhered on female thread hole M10 of hub (1) by means of tapping.

Remove sealant adhered on mating surface of hub (1) and cover (14) with scraper, grindstone, etc.

Sufficiently clean all parts in cleaning bath before assembling.

34-54


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (1) Assembling spindle 1) Set spindle (101) on work bench. 2) Fit outer ring of taper roller bearing (149) into the center hole of spindle. 3) Place piston (161) in the cylinder hole of spindle. 4) Place steel balls (162) in piston hole.

Apply grease to the steel ball to fix on the piston hole to be sure the steel ball does not drop out of the piston during assembly which will be carried out later. 5) Attach L side of pivot (167) to the left side in the picture. 6) Insert shaft (102).

Apply grease to spline of shaft and slowly insert it taking care not to damage the lip of oil seal.

(2) Assembling rotary section 1) Apply grease to the sliding surface of swash plate (103) and pivot. 2) Tilt the swash plate and place it in spindle.

Make sure that the speed is changed in High and Low smoothly while blowing air through the drilled hole after assembling the swash plate in.

Apply clean hydraulic oil to the sliding surface of swash plate. 3) Turn work bench sideways. 4) Set cylinder block (104), piston (105), spring (114), thrust ball (108) and retainer plate (107) and insert it in the shaft.

Apply clean hydraulic oil to the sliding surface of cylinder block, piston, thrust ball and shoe (106).

On inserting cylinder block assembly in the shaft, fix the reduction unit side of shaft first and the insertion can be performed smoothly.

34-55


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (3) Assembling parking brake 1) Direct rear flange attaching face of piston upward while turning the work bench. 2) Install separator plate (116), friction plate and separator plate in that order.

3) Apply soft metal bar to piston (112) and insert it in spindle (101) while striking the bar with a hammer.

Strike 3 or 4 points divided into equal divisions on the circumference of piston in order and assemble it in the condition where the piston is held in level because the sliding surface might be damaged if the piston is largely tilted. (4) Assembling taper roller bearing 1) Push taper roller bearing (150) on which the outer ring has been removed against shaft (102), and then apply metal bar to the inner race and insert it while striking the bar with a hammer.

34-56


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (5) Adjusting clearance of taper roller bearing

When spindle (101), shaft (102), rear flange (301) or taper roller bearing (149) (150) is replaced, adjust the clearance of taper roller bearing. When the clearance is improper, the life of taper roller bearing might be shortened. 1) Direct the mating surface with the rear flange of spindle (101) upward. 2) Press taper roller bearing (150) into shaft (102) while striking it with plastic hammer. 3) Measure dimension A. 4) Measure dimension B of rear flange (301). 5) Subtract dimension A from dimension B, and select shim (119) which makes the clearance to 0~0.17mm (0~0.0067in).

(6) Assembling rear flange 1) Place shim and outer race of taper roller bearing (150) in the center hole of rear flange (301) in that order. 2) Install timing plate to rear flange so that parallel pin (341) which is press-fitted in the rear flange aligns with the hole on the perimeter of timing plate (109). 3) Install spring (113) into the hole of rear flange.

Apply grease to timing plate and spring to prevent the parts from missing when the rear flange assembly is assembled to the spindle. 4) Make sure those O-rings (375), (379), (380) are fitted into O-ring grooves of rear flange.

34-57


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 5) Turn work bench sideways. 6) Install rear flange.

7) Tighten socket bolt (343) to the specified torque.

When the parts of rear flange are disassembled, tighten each plug to the specified torque.

34-58


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (7) Assembling hub PRESS

1) Place hub (1) on press work bench. 2) Install angular ball bearing (24) in the hub, place ball bearing press fitting jig on the outer race of angular ball bearing, and press fit it in the hub by means of press.

HUB JIG FOR PRESS-FITTING ANGULAR BALL BEARING

3) Turn over the hub. 4) Press fit angular ball bearing in the hub by the same procedure as that described in above 2).

BALL BEARING STAND

Pay attention to the direction of ball bearing (24) to be attached.

JIG FOR INSTALLING F/S (II)

5) Place the hub on work bench and fix it.

JIG FOR INSTALLING F/S (I)

FROATING SEAL (F/S)

6) Apply grease to O-ring of floating seal (29), and fit floating seal into floating seal groove of hub (1). 7) Similarly, fit floating seal into floating seal groove of spindle (101).

•

When applying grease to O-ring of floating seal, take O-ring out of floating seal and apply thin coat of grease to perimeter of O-ring.

•

Remove jig F/S (I) for installing floating seal and make sure that spindle groove end face is in parallel with floating seal surface within the range of 1mm. When it is not in parallel, it might cause leaking oil and seizure. Perform the procedure from the first again.

34-59

HUB


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (8) Adjust clearance of angular contact ball bearing

When hub (1), angular ball bearing (24) or spindle (101) is replaced, do not fail to adjust the clearance. When the clearance is improper, the life of angular ball bearing might be shortened.

1) Temporarily attach lock washer (22) to spindle, and measure dimension C. 2) Measure bearing width D of angular ball bearing as shown in figure.

Turn hub and angular ball bearing several times to make the bearing level.

3) Subtract dimension D from dimension C and select shim (23) which makes the clearance within -0.08~+0.02mm (-0.0031~+0.0008in). (9) Assembling spindle : 1) Fit shim (23) in spindle (101) with grease. 2) Align the lifted spindle with the center shaft of hub (1) and insert the spindle in angular ball bearing (24) while lowering the spindle slowly.

3) Tighten and secure it with special jig making use of the threaded hole M16 of hub and spindle. 4) Direct the reduction unit upward while turning work bench. 5) Apply metal bar to the inner race of angular ball bearing on the reduction side and strike it lightly by means of hammer to make the inner race level.

34-60


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM 6) Fit lock washer (22) to the groove of spindle.

7) Press lock washer into the groove of spindle by means of jig.

Be sure to press lock washer into the groove bottom to prevent the interference with the lock washer when placing carrier [2] (7) in. 8) Direct spindle upward while turning work bench. 9) Remove special jig which is used to fix hub and spindle. 10) Turn spindle several times.

The sliding surface of floating seal fits surface of hub and spindle by turning the spindle. This results in prevention of imitated oil leaks at test run. (10)Assembling 2nd stage gear 1) Assemble coupling (15) to shaft (102).

2) Hoist carrier [2] assembly. And install it in hub (1).

When placing carrier [2] assembly in, align the center shaft of carrier [2] assembly with the hub and lower it in slowly giving attention to the internal tooth of hub in order not to be damaged by the edge of planetary gear [2] (9).

34-61


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM

Locate planetary gear [2] and the port of flange as shown in the figure.

PLANETARY GEAR (2)

(11)Assembling 2nd stage gear 1) Hoist carrier [1] assembly. And install it in the hub (1).

When placing carrier [2] assembly in, align the center shaft of carrier [2] assembly with the hub and lower it in slowly giving attention to the internal tooth of hub in order not to be damaged by the edge of planetary gear [1] (5). 2) Place sun gear [1](4) in while being matched to the spline of coupling.

In cases where it is hard to place sun gear [1] in because the spline of sun gear [1] interferes with the gear tooth of planetary gear, lift carrier [1] assembly once until the connection of coupling to sun gear [2](8) comes off and place sun gear [1] in again. 3) Place thrust plate (13) in carrier [1](3).

34-62


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (12)Assembling cover 1) Apply sealant "Loctite #515" to the surface of hub in contact with the cover.

Apply sealant throughout the end face of hub (1) as shown in figure.

2) Place cover on hub to the position of bolt hole.

3) Tighten socket bolts (35) to the specified torque.

34-63


34. TRAVEL SYSTEM (13)Lubricating 1) Fill lubrication oil through filling port.

2) Tighten plug (30) to the specified torque at respective ports.

34-64


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) TABLE OF CONTENTS 46.1 JUDGMENT OF ACTUAL THING AT SITE .....................................................................46-3 46.2 CLASSIFICATION OF FAILURE AND TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................46-4 46.3 THE BLOWN FUSE OF MECHATRO CONTROLLER ....................................................46-4 46.4 TROUBLESHOOTING BY ERROR CODE......................................................................46-4

46

Book Code No. S5YN4618E02 46-1


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

July, 2006

SK330-8 : LC10-07001~ SK350LC-8 : YC10-03501~

n

August, 2006

SK200-8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC-8 : YQ11-06001~

n

K

n

October, 2006

SK250-8 : LQ12-06001~ SK260LC-8 : LL12-05001~

n

K

Revision

February, 2007

n

March, 2007

n

April, 2007

SK200-8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC-8 : YQ11-06001~

n

July, 2007

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

E265B : LQ12-06001~ E265BLC : LL12-05001~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

n E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

46-2

Remarks S5YN4618E01 (ASIA, OCE)

S5YN4618E02 (ASIA, OCE) n (NHK Russia) n ASIA (HS Engine) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K

K K K K K K K


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Preface Troubleshooting provides process locating for the cause of trouble in the order that trouble occurred. This manual describes how to solve the specific phenomenon systematically as early as possible. For troubleshooting concerning the inside of equipment, refer to troubleshooting for each manual of equipment.

Fig. 46-1 Attending the field to verify actual thing.

46.1

JUDGMENT OF ACTUAL THING AT SITE

(1) Get to the site as quickly as possible. Verify model, serial number, situation of trouble and field, and notify person of arrival time. (2) Verify background of trouble occurred 1) Model name and serial number 2) Kind of attachment Check that the combination of attachment is proper or that the operating method is not unreasonable. 3) Operating time by hour-meter 4) History of trouble occurred and additional works. 5) Recurrence of past trouble, or problems on the additional works.

Fig. 46-2 Verifying background of trouble occurred.

(3) How to diagnose trouble 1) Verify defective part 2) Make the condition of trouble again 3) Where defective parts can not be verified, surmise causes systematically. 4) Verify reasons for surmise 5) Report methods, procedure, and period for repairing to user. (4) Explanation of the cause of trouble 1) Explain the cause of trouble to clients. For example, oil leak through piston is caused by flaws on the piston rod. And the method of using the machines should be explained so that the same kind of trouble does not reoccur.

Fig. 46-3 Confirm the symptoms of the trouble.

2) Treatment of damaged parts The damaged parts to be claimed and returned are evidence so they should be handled with care. Protect them from entry of water, soils, etc. into port of hydraulic unit, etc. and return them. And also use care not to flaw and damage those surfaces.

Fig. 46-4 Diagnosing fail by means troubleshooting.

46-3


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES)

46.2

CLASSIFICATION OF FAILURE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

Classify failures into the following 3 types and carry out the troubleshooting. No.

Classes of failure

Troubleshooting

A

When error code after self-diagnosis is displayed on gauge cluster

B

When no failure is detected currently but error code When it is hard to recreate the failure situation, cancel after self diagnosis is remained in trouble history the data in the history and reproduce the failed situation or suppose the cause according to the troubleshooting by error code, and then repair it.

C

When error code after self diagnosis is not displayed or is not remained in the history

46.3

Carry out troubleshooting according to the error code.

• Carry out troubleshooting according to instructions in Chapter 47 "TROUBLESHOOTING BY TROUBLE". • Carry out troubleshooting according to instructions in Chapter 48 "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE".

THE BLOWN FUSE OF MECHATRO CONTROLLER

If the fuse of mechatro controller has blown, the following display appears on the gauge cluster. (1) The blown fuse of mechatro controller a. Blown fuse 5A of mechatro controller : "DATA COMMUNICATION ERROR" is displayed on the gauge cluster in the condition where the controller program is not executed. b. Blown fuse 20A of mechatro controller The controller functions normally but the power supply applied when the controller drives the solenoid, etc. stops. Many error codes are displayed on the gauge cluster. D013, D023, D033, D063, E013, E023, F021

46.4

TROUBLESHOOTING BY ERROR CODE

When error code was displayed on the gauge cluster with the aid of self-diagnosis display function, carry out the troubleshooting referring to applicable page in the contents of error codes.

Error Code

Trouble

Described page

A015

Engine adjustment (A adjustment) is not adjusted yet or is failed.

46-7

A025

Pump propo. valve adjustment (B adjustment) is not adjusted yet or is failed.

46-7

A035

Unload valve adjustment (C adjustment) is not adjusted yet or is failed.

46-8

A215

Written data of ROM adjustment data is incorrect.

46-8

A225

Writing of ROM adjustment data is incorrect.

46-9

A235

Written data of ROM hour meter data is incorrect.

46-9

A245

Writing of ROM hour meter data is incorrect.

46-10

A255

Writing of proportional valve adjustment data is incorrect.

46-10

B012

Incorrect output of boom up pressure sensor

46-11

B013

Disconnection of boom up pressure sensor

46-11

B014

Short-circuit of boom up pressure sensor

46-12

B022

Incorrect output of boom down pressure sensor

46-12

B023

Disconnection of boom down pressure sensor

46-13

B024

Short-circuit of boom down pressure sensor

46-13

46-4


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Error Code

Trouble

Described page

B032

Incorrect output of arm out pressure sensor

46-14

B033

Disconnection of arm out pressure sensor

46-14

B034

Short-circuit of arm out pressure sensor

46-15

B042

Incorrect output of arm in pressure sensor

46-15

B043

Disconnection of arm in pressure sensor

46-16

B044

Short-circuit of arm in pressure sensor

46-16

B052

Incorrect output of bucket digging pressure sensor

46-17

B053

Disconnection of bucket digging pressure sensor

46-17

B054

Short-circuit of bucket digging pressure sensor

46-18

B062

Incorrect output of bucket dump pressure sensor

46-18

B063

Disconnection of bucket dump pressure sensor

46-19

B064

Short-circuit of bucket dump pressure sensor

46-19

B072

Incorrect output of swing pressure sensor

46-20

B073

Disconnection of swing pressure sensor

46-20

B074

Short-circuit of swing pressure sensor

46-21

B092

Incorrect output of travel right pressure sensor

46-21

B093

Disconnection of travel right pressure sensor

46-22

B094

Short-circuit of travel right pressure sensor

46-22

B102

Incorrect output of travel left pressure sensor

46-23

B103

Disconnection of travel left pressure sensor

46-23

B104

Short-circuit of travel left pressure sensor

46-24

B113

Disconnection of pressure sensor of optional selector positioning

46-24

B114

Short-circuit of pressure sensor of optional selector positioning

46-25

B162

Incorrect output of P1 optional side pressure sensor

46-25

B163

Disconnection of P1 side optional pressure sensor

46-26

B164

Short-circuit of P1 side optional pressure sensor

46-26

B172

Incorrect output of P2 optional side pressure sensor

46-27

B173

Disconnection of P2 side optional pressure sensor

46-27

B174

Short-circuit of P2 side optional pressure sensor

46-28

C012

Incorrect output of P1 pump pressure sensor

46-28

C013

Disconnection of P1 pump pressure sensor

46-29

C014

Short-circuit of P1 pump pressure sensor

46-29

C022

Incorrect output of P2 pump pressure sensor

46-30

C023

Disconnection of P2 pump pressure sensor

46-30

C024

Short-circuit of P2 pump pressure sensor

46-31

C033

Disconnection of boom head pressure sensor

46-31

C034

Short-circuit of boom head pressure sensor

46-32

C043

Disconnection of boom rod pressure sensor

46-32

C044

Short-circuit of boom rod pressure sensor

46-33

D012

Failure of output transistor ON at P1 unload proportional valve

46-33

D013

Disconnection of P1 unload proportional valve

46-34

D022

Failure of output transistor ON at P2 unload proportional valve

46-34

D023

Disconnection of P2 unload proportional valve

46-35

D032

Failure of output transistor ON at travel straight proportional valve

46-35

D033

Disconnection of travel straight proportional valve

46-36

D062

Failure of output transistor ON at arm in high speed proportional valve

46-36

D063

Disconnection of arm in high speed proportional valve

46-37

E012

Failure of output transistor ON at P1 pump proportional valve

46-37

46-5


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Error Code

Trouble

Described page

E013

Disconnection of P1pump proportional valve

46-38

E022

Failure of output transistor ON at P2 pump proportional valve

46-38

E023

Disconnection of P2 pump proportional valve

46-39

F011

Failure of output transistor OFF and GND short of attachment boost SOL valve

46-39

F013

Failure of output transistor ON and disconnection of attachment boost SOL valve

46-40

F021

Failure of output transistor OFF and GND short of swing parking SOL valve

46-40

F023

Failure of output transistor ON and disconnection of swing parking SOL valve

46-41

F031

Failure of output transistor OFF and GND short of travel 1-2 speed SOL valve

46-41

F033

Failure of output transistor ON and disconnection of travel 1-2 speed SOL valve

46-42

F041

Failure of output transistor OFF and GND short of optional selector SOL valve

46-42

F043

Failure of output transistor ON and disconnection of optional selector SOL valve

46-43

G032

Overrun of speed sensor of direct input Mechatro-controller

46-43 46-44

G033

Disconnection of speed sensor of direct input Mechatro-controller

G042

Overrun of speed sensor of direct input Mechatro-controller and received data from E/G controller. 46-44

G043

Disconnection of speed sensor of direct input Mechatro-controller and received data from E/G controller.

46-45

H013

Disconnection of acceleration potentio

46-46

H014

Power short-circuit of acceleration potentio

46-46

H023

Disconnection of boom angle potentio

46-47

H024

Power short-circuit of boom angle potentio

46-47

H033

Disconnection of arm angle potentio

46-48

H034

Power short-circuit of arm angle potentio

46-48

H091

Failure of GND short-circuit of fuel sensor

46-49

H093

Disconnection of fuel sensor

46-49

I111

Received error of CAN1 communication (passive error)

46-50

I113

Received error of CAN1 communication (time-out)

46-50

I313

Received error of cluster communication (time-out error)

46-51

K014

Adhesion of battery relay terminal

46-51

R014

Failure of arc prevention relay of wiper motor

46-52

R024

Failure of normal rotation relay of wiper motor

46-53

R034

Failure of reverse rotation relay of wiper motor

46-54

R044

Failure of washer motor relay

46-55

R134

Failure of swing flasher relay

46-55

R144

Failure of swing flasher relay

46-56

R154

Failure of travel alarm relay

46-56

R164

Failure of auto idling stop relay 2

46-57

R174

Failure of engine forcible stop relay

46-58

R184

Failure of lever lock relay

46-59

R214

Failure of safety relay

46-59

46-6


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-1 Error code

A015

Trouble

Not yet adjusted engine or failed adjustment of engine (A adjustment)

Judging condition

Engine adjustment is missed. Or it is impossible to set the adjusting value within the adjusting range.

Symptom

Deviated from the reqired value, but no problem in normal operations.

Control in the event of failure

Rotate with the default engine

Returned in The engine adjustment is completed normally. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

2

G-3 SPEED SET

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

•Checking

Carry out engine adjustment (A adjustment). When "ERROR ENG" was displayed during adjustment, refer to the section "Adjustment procedure Measures to be taken with the adjustment failed"

2

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

3 Table46-2 Error code

A025

Trouble

Not yet adjusted engine or failed adjustment of pump proportional valve (B adjustment)

Judging condition

Pump proportional valve adjustment is missed. Or it is impossible to set the adjusting value within the adjusting range.

Symptom

Deviated from the rated output, but no problem in normal operation

Control in the event of failure

Workable with the default proportional valve output.

Returned in The pump proportional valve adjustment is completed normally. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

9

E-1 P1 PUMP

9

E-2 P2 PUMP

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

•Checking

Carry out pump adjustment (B adjustment). When"ERROR PUMP" was displayed during adjustment, refer to the section "Adjustment procedure - Measures to be taken with the adjustment failed"

2

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

3

46-7


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-3 Error code

A035

Trouble

Not yet adjusted unload valve or failed adjustment of unload valve (C adjustment)

Judging condition

The adjustment of unload valve is missed. Or the adjusting value can not be set in the adjusting range.

Symptom

It is not normal output, but no problem in normal operation

Control in the event of failure

Work with the aid of output by default proportional valve.

Returned in The adjustment of unload valve is completed normally. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

8

D-1 P1 UN-LOAD (BP-CUT)

8

D-2 P2 UN-LOAD (BP-CUT)

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

•Checking

Carry out adjustment of unload valve (C adjustment). When"ERROR PUMP" was displayed during adjustment, refer to the section "Adjustment procedure - Measures to be taken with the adjustment failed"

2

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

3 Table46-4 Error code

A215

Trouble

The data of ROM adjustment is written incorrectly.

Judging condition

Check adjustment data, and judge the content of memory is correct or not. (Trouble history only)

Symptom

No affect.

Control in the event of failure

Control at side of correct memory data.

Returned in It does not regain. Replace controller. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object 1

Mechatro controller

Checking contents and remedy Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

2 3

46-8


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-5 Error code

A225

Trouble

The data of ROM adjustment is written incorrectly.

Judging condition

Check adjustment data, and judge the data is correct or not.

Symptom

It is not normal output, but no problem in normal operation

Control in the event of failure

Control can be done by default value.

Returned in It does not regain. Replace controller. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object 1

Mechatro controller

Checking contents and remedy Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

2 3 Table46-6 Error code

A235

Trouble

The data of ROM hourmeter is written incorrectly.

Judging condition

Check hourmeter memory, and judge the data is correct or not. (Trouble history only)

Symptom

No affect.

Control in the event of failure

Control at side of correct memory data.

Returned in It does not regain. Replace controller. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object 1

Mechatro controller

Checking contents and remedy Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

2 3

46-9


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-7 Error code

A245

Trouble

The data of ROM hourmeter is written incorrectly.

Judging condition

Check hourmeter memory, and judge the data is incorrect.

Symptom

The hour meter data which was judged as error is taken as 0 Hr. No problem in normal operation

Control in the event of failure

Normal control is available.

Returned in It does not regain. Replace controller. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object 1

Mechatro controller

Checking contents and remedy Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

2 3 Table46-8 Error code

A255

Trouble

The data of proportional valve adjustment is written incorrectly.

Judging condition

Check proportional valve adjustment data, and judge the data is incorrect.

Symptom

It is not normal output, but no problem in normal operation

Control in the event of failure

Using fixed value of proportional valve correction data, usual control is done.

Returned in It does not regain. Replace controller. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object 1

Mechatro controller

Checking contents and remedy Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

2 3

46-10


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-9 Error code

B012

Trouble

Boom up pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The boom up operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

B-1 BOOM RAISE

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom up pressure sensor SE-3

When B012 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between boom up pressure sensor and controller CN-126F CN-101F

When B012 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-10

Error code

B013

Trouble

Boom up pressure sensor’s wiring disconnects.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom up pressure sensor is less than 0.1V.

Symptom

The boom up speed slows down.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

Checking object

B-1 BOOM RAISE

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom up pressure sensor SE-3

When B013 is cancelled and other error occurs after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

When B013 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. • Wiring between boom up pressure sensor and controller Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. CN-126F CN-101F

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-11


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-11 Error code

B014

Trouble

Boom up pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom up pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The boom up speed slows down.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

B-1 BOOM RAISE

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom up pressure sensor SE-3

When B014 is cancelled and other error occurs after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

When B014 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. • Wiring between boom up pressure sensor and controller Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. CN-126F CN-101F

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-12

Error code

B022

Trouble

Boom down pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The boom down operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

Checking object

B-2 BOOM LOWER

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom down pressure sensor When B022 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on SE-4 after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between boom down pressure sensor and controller CN-127F CN-101F

When B022 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-12


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-13 Error code

B023

Trouble

Boom down pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnecting.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom down pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The boom down operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

B-2 BOOM LOWER

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom down pressure sensor When B023 is cancelled and other error occurs after exchanging the SE-4 connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between boom down When B023 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. pressure sensor and controller Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. CN-127F CN-101F

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-14

Error code

B024

Trouble

Boom down pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom down pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The boom down operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

Checking object

B-2 BOOM LOWER

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom down pressure sensor When B024 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on SE-4 after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between boom down pressure sensor and controller CN-127F CN-101F

When B024 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-13


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-15 Error code

B032

Trouble

Arm-in pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The arm-out operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

B-3 ARM OUT

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Arm-out pressure sensor SE-8

When B032 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between arm-out pressure sensor and controller CN-131F CN-101F

When B032 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-16

Error code

B033

Trouble

Arm-out pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnecting.

Judging condition

The input voltage from arm-out pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

Shock at stopping of arm-out is great.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

Checking object

B-3 ARM OUT

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Arm-out pressure sensor SE-8

When B033 is cancelled and other error occurs after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

When B033 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. • Wiring between arm-out pressure sensor and controller Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. CN-131F CN-101F

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-14


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-17 Error code

B034

Trouble

Arm-out pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from arm-out pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

Shock at stopping of arm-out is great.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1, P2 unload proportional valves to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

B-3 ARM OUT

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Arm-out pressure sensor SE-8

When B034 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between arm-out pressure sensor and controller CN-131F CN-101F

When B034 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-18

Error code

B042

Trouble

Arm-in pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the arm-in pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The arm-in operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

Checking object

B-4 ARM IN

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Arm-in pressure sensor SE-7

When B042 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between arm-in pressure sensor and controller CN-130F CN-101F

When B042 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-15


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-19 Error code

B043

Trouble

Arm-in pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnecting.

Judging condition

The input voltage from arm-in pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

Cavitation occurs at independent work of arm-in. Arm horizontal arm pulling can be barely done but if attachment is pulled in the air, arm falls first. Bucket can drag under the condition that the bucket bottom put on the ground.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 and P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode) Set output of arm 2 arm-in proportional valve to 200mA.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

B-4 ARM IN

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Arm-in pressure sensor SE-7

When B043 is cancelled and other error occurs after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

When B043 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. • Wiring between arm-in pressure sensor and controller Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. CN-130F CN-101F

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-20

Error code

B044

Trouble

Arm-in pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from arm-in pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

Cavitation occurs at independent work of arm-in. Arm horizontal arm pulling can be barely done but if attachment is pulled in the air, arm falls first. Bucket can drag under the condition that the bucket bottom put on the ground.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1, P2 unload proportional valves to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode) Set output of arm 2 arm-in proportional valve to 200mA.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

Checking object

B-4 ARM IN

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Arm-in pressure sensor SE-7

When B044 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between arm-in pressure sensor and controller CN-130F CN-101F

When B044 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-16


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-21 Error code

B052

Trouble

Bucket digging pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the bucket digging pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The bucket digging operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

B-5 BUCKET DIG

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Bucket digging pressure sensor SE-1

When B052 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between bucket digging pressure sensor and controller CN-124F CN-101F

When B052 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-22

Error code

B053

Trouble

Bucket digging pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from bucket digging pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The bucket digging speed slows down a little.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

Checking object

B-5 BUCKET DIG

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Bucket digging pressure sensor SE-1

When B053 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between bucket digging pressure sensor and controller CN-124F CN-101F

When B053 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-17


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-23 Error code

B054

Trouble

Bucket digging pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from bucket digging pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The bucket digging speed slows down a little.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

B-5 BUCKET DIG

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Bucket digging pressure sensor SE-1

When B054 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between bucket digging pressure sensor and controller CN-124F CN-101F

When B054 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-24

Error code

B062

Trouble

Bucket dump pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the bucket dump pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The bucket dump operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

Checking object

B-6 BUCKET DUMP

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Bucket digging pressure sensor SE-2

When B062 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between bucket digging pressure sensor and controller CN-125F CN-101F

When B062 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor.

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

3

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

46-18


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-25 Error code

B063

Trouble

Bucket dump pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from bucket dump pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The bucket dump speed slows down a little.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

B-6 BUCKET DUMP

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Bucket digging pressure sensor SE-2

When B063 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between bucket digging pressure sensor and controller CN-125F CN-101F

When B063 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-26

Error code

B064

Trouble

Bucket dump pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from bucket dump pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The bucket dump speed slows down a little.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

5

Checking object

B-6 BUCKET DUMP

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Bucket digging pressure sensor SE-2

When B064 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between bucket digging pressure sensor and controller CN-125F CN-101F

When B064 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-19


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-27 Error code

B072

Trouble

Swing pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the swing pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The swing operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

B-7 SWING

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Swing pressure sensor SE-5

When B072 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between swing pressure sensor and controller CN-169F CN-103F

When B072 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-28

Error code

B073

Trouble

Swing pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from swing pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The swing operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

Checking object

B-7 SWING

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Swing pressure sensor SE-5

When B073 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between swing pressure sensor and controller CN-169F CN-103F

When B073 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-20


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-29 Error code

B074

Trouble

Swing pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from swing pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The swing operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

B-7 SWING

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Swing pressure sensor SE-5

When B074 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between swing pressure sensor and controller CN-169F CN-103F

When B074 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-30

Error code

B092

Trouble

Travel right pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the travel right pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The travel right operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

Checking object

B-9 TRAVEL (R)

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Travel right pressure sensor SE-9

When B092 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between travel right pressure sensor and controller CN-301F CN-102F

When B092 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-21


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-31 Error code

B093

Trouble

Travel right pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from Travel right pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The Travel right operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) P1, Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

B-9 TRAVEL (R)

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Travel right pressure sensor SE-9

When B093 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between travel right pressure sensor and controller CN-301F CN-102F

When B093 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-32

Error code

B094

Trouble

Travel right pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from Travel right pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The Travel right operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) P1, Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

Checking object

B-9 TRAVEL (R)

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Travel right pressure sensor SE-9

When B094 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between travel right pressure sensor and controller CN-301F CN-102F

When B094 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-22


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-33 Error code

B102

Trouble

Travel left pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the travel left pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The travel left operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

B-10 TRAVEL (L)

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Travel left pressure sensor SE-10

When B102 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between travel left pressure sensor and controller CN-302F CN-102F

When B102 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-34

Error code

B103

Trouble

Travel left pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from Travel left pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The Travel left operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) P1, Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

Checking object

B-10 TRAVEL (L)

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Travel left pressure sensor SE-10

When B103 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between travel left pressure sensor and controller CN-302F CN-102F

When B103 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-23


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-35 Error code

B104

Trouble

Travel left pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from Travel left pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The Travel left operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) P1, Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

B-10 TRAVEL (L)

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Travel left pressure sensor SE-10

When B104 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between travel left pressure sensor and controller CN-302F CN-102F

When B104 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-36

Error code

B113

Trouble

Option selector position detect pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from option selector position detect pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

When B mode is selected, option selector valve error is indicated.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

16

Checking object

B-11

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Option selector position detect pressure sensor SE-29

When B113 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between option selector position detect pressure sensor and controller CN-162F CN-104F

When B113 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-24


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-37 Error code

B114

Trouble

Option selector position detect pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from selector position detect pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

When B mode is selected, option selector valve error is indicated.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

16

B-11

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Option selector position detect pressure sensor SE-29

When B114 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between option selector position detect pressure sensor and controller CN-162F CN-104F

When B114 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-38

Error code

B162

Trouble

P1 side option pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the P1 side option pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The P1 side option operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

Checking object

B-16 P1 OPT.

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 side option pressure sensor SE-20

When B162 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P1 side option pressure sensor and controller CN-304F CN-102F

When B162 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-25


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-39 Error code

B163

Trouble

P1 side option pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from P1 side option pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The P1 side option does not work.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode) But normal control is done when the left control pedal selection is ON.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

B-16 P1 OPT.

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 side option pressure sensor SE-20

2

• Wiring between P1 side option When B163 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector pressure sensor and controller is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure CN-304F and repair it if necessary. CN-102F

3

• Mechatro controller

When B163 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-40

Error code

B164

Trouble

P1 side option pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from P1 side option pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The P1 side option does not work.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode) But normal control is done when the left control pedal selection is ON.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

Checking object

B-16 P1 OPT.

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 side option pressure sensor SE-20

2

• Wiring between P1 side option When B164 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector pressure sensor and controller is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure CN-304F and repair it if necessary. CN-102F

3

• Mechatro controller

When B164 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-26


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-41 Error code

B172

Trouble

P2 side option pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the P2 side option pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The P2 side option operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

B-17 P2 OPT.

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 side option pressure sensor SE-11

When B172 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P2 side option pressure sensor and controller CN-303F CN-102F

When B172 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-42

Error code

B173

Trouble

P2 side option pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from P2 side option pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The selection of conflux does not work.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

Checking object

B-17 P2 OPT.

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 side option pressure sensor SE-11

When B173 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P2 side option pressure sensor and controller CN-303F CN-102F

When B173 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-27


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-43 Error code

B174

Trouble

P2 side option pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from P2 side option pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The selection of conflux does not work.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode) Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

6

B-17 P2 OPT.

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 side option pressure sensor SE-11

When B174 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P2 side option pressure sensor and controller CN-303F CN-102F

When B174 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-44

Error code

C012

Trouble

P1 pump pressure sensor outputs error

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the P1 pump pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The P1 pump operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

Checking object

C-1 PUMP P1

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 pump pressure sensor SE-22

When C012 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P1 pump pressure sensor and controller CN-139F CN-103F

When C012 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-28


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-45 Error code

C013

Trouble

P1 pump pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from P1 pump pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The delicate operability of P1 pump related attachment becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

C-1 PUMP P1

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 pump pressure sensor SE-22

When C013 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P1 pump pressure sensor and controller CN-139F CN-103F

When C013 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-46

Error code

C014

Trouble

P1 pump pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from P1 pump pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The delicate operability of P1 pump related attachment becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

Checking object

C-1 PUMP P1

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 pump pressure sensor SE-22

When C014 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P1 pump pressure sensor and controller CN-139F CN-103F

When C014 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-29


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-47 Error code

C022

Trouble

P2 pump pressure sensor outputs error.

Judging condition

After starter switch ON and engine does not start yet. And the input voltage from the P2 pump pressure sensor after starter switch ON is in the range of 1.4V or more to less than 4.7V.

Symptom

The P2 pump operability becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

C-2 PUMP P2

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 pump pressure sensor SE-23

When C022 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P2 pump pressure sensor and controller CN-140F CN-103F

When C022 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-48

Error code

C023

Trouble

P2 pump pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from P2 pump pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

The delicate operability of P2 pump related attachment becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

Checking object

C-2 PUMP P2

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 pump pressure sensor SE-23

When C023 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P2 pump pressure sensor and controller CN-140F CN-103F

When C023 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-30


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-49 Error code

C024

Trouble

P2 pump pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from P2 pump pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

The delicate operability of P2 pump related attachment becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

C-2 PUMP P2

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 pump pressure sensor SE-23

When C024 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P2 pump pressure sensor and controller CN-140F CN-103F

When C024 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-50

Error code

C033

Trouble

Boom head pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom head pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

Indication load value of High-reach crane becomes abnormal.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

Checking object

C-3 BOOM-HEAD

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom head pressure sensor When C033 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on SE-24 after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between boom head pressure sensor and controller CN-706F CN-104F

When C033 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-31


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-51 Error code

C034

Trouble

Boom head pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom head pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

Indication load value of High-reach crane becomes abnormal.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

C-3 BOOM-HEAD

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom head pressure sensor When C034 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on SE-24 after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between boom head pressure sensor and controller CN-706F CN-104F

When C034 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-52

Error code

C043

Trouble

Boom rod pressure sensor’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom rod pressure sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

Indication load value of High-reach crane becomes abnormal.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

Checking object

C-4 BOOM-ROD

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom rod pressure sensor SE-25

When C043 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between boom rod pressure sensor and controller CN-705F CN-104F

When C043 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-32


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-53 Error code

C044

Trouble

Boom rod pressure sensor’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom rod pressure sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

Indication load value of High-reach crane becomes abnormal.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

7

C-4 BOOM-ROD

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Boom rod pressure sensor SE-25

When C044 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between boom rod pressure sensor and controller CN-705F CN-104F

When C044 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-54

Error code

D012

Trouble

P1 unload proportional valve and output transistor ON are failure.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 1000mA or more.

Symptom

Option conflux can not be done.

Control in the event of failure

Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

8

Checking object

D-1 P1 UN-LOAD (BP-CUT)

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 unload proportional valve When D012 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on PSV-D after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P1 unload proportional valve and controller CN-120F CN-105F

When D012 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-33


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-55 Error code

D013

Trouble

P1 unload proportional valve’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 100mA or less. (If output is 100mA or less, judging is not done.)

Symptom

Option conflux can not be done.

Control in the event of failure

Set output of P1 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

8

Checking object

D-1 P1 UN-LOAD (BP-CUT)

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 unload proportional valve When D013 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on PSV-D after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P1 unload proportional valve and controller CN-120F CN-105F

When D013 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-56

Error code

D022

Trouble

P2 unload proportional valve and output transistor ON are failure.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 1000mA or more.

Symptom

Independent operations of boom up and of bucket digging/dump become slow.

Control in the event of failure

Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

8

Checking object

D-2 P2 UN-LOAD (BP-CUT)

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 unload proportional valve When D022 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on PSV-B after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P2 unload proportional valve and controller CN-118F CN-105F

When D022 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-34


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-57 Error code

D023

Trouble

P2 unload proportional valve’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 100mA or less. (If output is 100mA or less, judging is not done.)

Symptom

Independent operations of boom up and of bucket digging/dump become slow.

Control in the event of failure

Set output of P2 unload proportional valve to 0mA. (Valve emergency mode)

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

8

D-2 P2 UN-LOAD (BP-CUT)

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 unload proportional valve When D023 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on PSV-B after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between P2 unload proportional valve and controller CN-118F CN-105F

When D023 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-58

Error code

D032

Trouble

Travel straight proportional valve and output transistor ON are failure.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 1000mA or more.

Symptom

Travel deviation occurs by combined operation of travel and attachment.

Control in the event of failure

Set Travel straight proportional valve output to 0mA.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

8

Checking object

D-3 S-TRAVEL

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Travel straight proportional valve When D032 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on PSV-C after exchanging the connector with other sensor.

2

• Wiring between Travel straight proportional valve and controller CN-119F CN-105F

When D032 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

46-35


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-59 Error code

D033

Trouble

Travel straight proportional valve’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 100mA or less. (If output is 100mA or less, judging is not done.)

Symptom

Travel deviation occurs by combined operation of travel and attachment.

Control in the event of failure

Set Travel straight proportional valve output to 0mA.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

8

Checking object 1

D-3 S-TRAVEL

Checking contents and remedy

• Travel straight proportional valve When D033 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on PSV-C after exchanging the connector with other sensor.

Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it. 2

• Wiring between Travel straight proportional valve and controller CN-119F CN-105F

When D033 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-60

Error code

D062

Trouble

Arm-in spool 2 proportional valve and output transistor ON are failure.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 1000mA or more.

Symptom

Operability of combined operation with arm-in becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set Arm-in spool 2 proportional valve output to 0mA.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

8

Checking object

D-4 ARM IN-2-SPEED

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Arm-in spool 2 proportional valve When D062 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on PSV-A after exchanging the connector with other sensor.

2

• Wiring between Arm-in spool 2 proportional valve and controller CN-121F CN-105F

When D062 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

46-36


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-61 Error code

D063

Trouble

Arm-in spool 2 proportional valve’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 100mA or less. (If output is 100mA or less, judging is not done.)

Symptom

Operability of combined operation with arm-in becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set Arm-in spool 2 proportional valve output to 0mA.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

8

D-4 ARM IN-2-SPEED

Checking object 1

Checking contents and remedy

• Arm-in spool 2 proportional valve When D063 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on PSV-A after exchanging the connector with other sensor.

Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it. 2

• Wiring between Arm-in spool 2 proportional valve and controller CN-121F CN-105F

When D063 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-62

Error code

E012

Trouble

P1 pump proportional valve and output transistor ON are failure.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 1000mA or more.

Symptom

The delicate operability of P2 pump related attachment becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode)

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

9

Checking object

E-1 PUMP P1

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 pump proportional valve PSV-P1

When E012 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it. When replacing of connector is executed, turn off power source once.

2

• Wiring between P1 pump proportional valve and controller CN-141F CN-105F

When E012 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. When replacing of connector is executed, turn off power source once.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-37


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-63 Error code

E013

Trouble

P1 pump proportional valve’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 100mA or less. (If output is 100mA or less, judging is not done.)

Symptom

The delicate operability of P2 pump related attachment becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode)

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

9

E-1 PUMP P1

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P1 pump proportional valve PSV-P1

When E013 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it. When replacing of connector is executed, turn off power source once.

2

• Wiring between P1 pump proportional valve and controller CN-141F CN-105F

When E013 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. When replacing of connector is executed, turn off power source once.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-64

Error code

E022

Trouble

P2 pump proportional valve and output transistor ON are failure.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 1000mA or more.

Symptom

The delicate operability of P2 pump related attachment becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode)

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

9

Checking object

E-2 PUMP P2

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 pump proportional valve PSV-P2

When E022 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it. When replacing of connector is executed, turn off power source once.

2

• Wiring between P2 pump proportional valve and controller CN-142F CN-105F

When E022 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. When replacing of connector is executed, turn off power source once.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-38


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-65 Error code

E023

Trouble

P2 pump proportional valve’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The feed-back value from proportional valve is 100mA or less. (If output is 100mA or less, judging is not done.)

Symptom

The delicate operability of P2 pump related attachment becomes poor.

Control in the event of failure

Set proportional valve output rate of P1 and P2 pumps to 0mA. (Hydraulic pump emergency mode)

Returned in Not returned automatically under normal condition. Switch the power OFF once and turns on it normal condition again. Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

9

E-2 PUMP P2

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• P2 pump proportional valve PSV-P2

When E023 is cancelled and other error occurs by turning starter switch on after exchanging the connector with other sensor. Check sensor unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it. When replacing of connector is executed, turn off power source once.

2

• Wiring between P2 pump proportional valve and controller CN-142F CN-105F

When E023 is displayed after turning the starter switch on after the connector is exchanged with other sensor. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. When replacing of connector is executed, turn off power source once.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-66

Error code

F011

Trouble

ATT boost solenoid valve and output transistor OFF are failure, and grounding is short-circuit.

Judging condition

The feed-back signal is grounding level while exciting command is output.

Symptom

ATT boost is not available.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in The feed-back signal is 24V level while exciting command is output. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

3

F-1 POWER BOOST

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• ATT boost solenoid valve SV-2

When F011 is cancelled and other error occurs by exchanging the connector for other solenoid valve. Check solenoid valve unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between ATT boost solenoid valve and controller CN-117F CN-105F

When F011 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other solenoid valve. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-39


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-67 Error code

F013

Trouble

ATT boost solenoid valve and output transistor ON are failure, and disconnection.

Judging condition

The feed-back signal is 24V level while exciting command is not output.

Symptom

ATT boost is not available or is leaving available.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in The feed-back signal is grounding level while exciting command is not output. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

3

F-1 POWER BOOST

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• ATT boost solenoid valve SV-2

When F013 is cancelled and other error occurs by exchanging the connector for other solenoid valve. Check solenoid valve unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between ATT boost solenoid valve and controller CN-117F CN-105F

When F013 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other solenoid valve. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-68

Error code

F021

Trouble

Swing parking solenoid valve and output transistor OFF are failure, and grounding is short-circuit.

Judging condition

The feed-back signal is grounding level while exciting command is output.

Symptom

Swing parking is not available.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in The feed-back signal is 24V level while exciting command is output. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

3

Checking object

F-2 SWING-BRAKE

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Swing parking solenoid valve When F021 is cancelled and other error occurs by exchanging the connector SV-1 for other solenoid valve. Check solenoid valve unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it. Check solenoid valve unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between swing parking solenoid valve and controller CN-123F CN-105F

When F021 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other solenoid valve. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-40


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-69 Error code

F023

Trouble

Swing parking solenoid valve and output transistor ON are failure, and disconnection.

Judging condition

The feed-back signal is 24V level while exciting command is not output.

Symptom

Swing parking is not available or is leaving available.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in The feed-back signal is grounding level while exciting command is output. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

3

F-1 POWER BOOST

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Swing parking solenoid valve When F023 is cancelled and other error occurs by exchanging the connector SV-1 for other solenoid valve. Check solenoid valve unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between swing parking solenoid valve and controller CN-123F CN-105F

When F023 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other solenoid valve. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-70

Error code

F031

Trouble

Travel 1, 2 speed solenoid valve and output transistor OFF are failure, and grounding is shortcircuit.

Judging condition

The feed-back signal is grounding level while exciting command is output.

Symptom

Travel 2 speed is not obtainable.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in The feed-back signal is 24V level while exciting command is output. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

3

Checking object

F-3 1/2-TRAVEL

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Travel 1, 2speed solenoid valve SV-3

When F031 is cancelled and other error occurs by exchanging the connector for other solenoid valve. Check solenoid valve unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between travel 1, 2speed solenoid valve and controller CN-122F CN-105F

When F031 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other solenoid valve. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-41


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-71 Error code

F033

Trouble

Travel 1, 2 speed solenoid valve and output transistor ON are failure, and disconnection.

Judging condition

The feed-back signal is 24V level while exciting command is not output.

Symptom

Travel 2 speed is not obtainable or is keeping 1 speed.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in The feed-back signal is grounding level while exciting command is not output. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

3

F-3 1/2-TRAVEL

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Travel 1, 2speed solenoid valve SV-3

When F033 is cancelled and other error occurs by exchanging the connector for other solenoid valve. Check solenoid valve unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between travel 1, 2speed solenoid valve and controller CN-122F CN-105F

When F033 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other solenoid valve. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-72

Error code

F041

Trouble

Option selector solenoid valve and output transistor OFF are failure, and grounding is shortcircuit.

Judging condition

The feed-back signal is grounding level while exciting command is output.

Symptom

Option selector valve does not change to breaker side.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in The feed-back signal is ground level while exciting command is output. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

11

Checking object

F-4 OPT SELECT

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Option selector solenoid valve When F041 is cancelled and other error occurs by exchanging the connector SV-13 for other solenoid valve. Check solenoid valve unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between option selector solenoid valve and controller CN-251F CN-105F

When F041 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other solenoid valve. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-42


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-73 Error code

F043

Trouble

Option selector solenoid valve and output transistor ON are failure, and disconnection.

Judging condition

The feed-back signal is 24V level while exciting command is not output.

Symptom

Option selector valve does not change to breaker side or it does not change from breaker to nibbler.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in The feed-back signal is ground level while exciting command is not output. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

11

F-4 OPT SELECT

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Option selector solenoid valve When F043 is cancelled and other error occurs by exchanging the connector SV-13 for other solenoid valve. Check solenoid valve unit for possible failure. If failure found, replace it.

2

• Wiring between option selector solenoid valve and controller CN-251F CN-105F

When F043 is displayed after the connector is exchanged with other solenoid valve. Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-74

Error code

G032

Trouble

Mechatro controller direct input speed sensor is overrun.

Judging condition

Engine rpm input is 3000rpm or more. (Only trouble history)

Symptom

Operate without problem.

Control in the event of failure

Receive rpm from engine controller and control the rpm.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object 1

• Engine speed sensor SE-13

2

G-3 MEAS 1 (for mechatro controller)

2

G-3 MEAS 2 (receive from engine controller) Checking contents and remedy Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor. Normal value: 1.6~2.0k

2

• Wiring between engine speed Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. sensor and controller Especially check wiring for false disconnection and noise included. CN-136F CN-106F

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. (Controller is broken by only applying power to grounding of signal.)

46-43


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-75 Error code

G033

Trouble

Mechatro controller direct input speed sensor, Disconnection

Judging condition

Voltage of alternator is 12V or more, and speed sensor indicates excess low engine rpm.

Symptom

Operate without problem.

Control in the event of failure

Receive rpm from engine controller and control the rpm.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

2

G-3 MEAS 1 (for mechatro controller)

2

G-3 MEAS 2 (receive from engine controller)

Checking object 1

Checking contents and remedy

• Engine speed sensor SE-13

Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor.

2

• Wiring between engine speed sensor and controller CN-136F CN-106F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. (Controller is broken by only applying power to grounding of signal.)

Normal value: 1.6~2.0k

Table46-76 Error code

G042

Trouble

Mechatro controller direct input speed sensor and received data from engine controller are overrun.

Judging condition

Engine rpm input is 3000rpm or more. (Only trouble history)

Symptom

Operate without problem.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

2

G-3 MEAS 1 (for mechatro controller)

2

G-3 MEAS 2 (receive from engine controller)

Checking object 1

2

Checking contents and remedy

• Engine speed sensor SE-13

Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor.

• Wiring between engine speed sensor and controller CN-136F CN-106F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. Especially check wiring for false disconnection and noise included.

Normal value: 1.6~2.0k

3

• Wiring between ECU engine Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. speed sensor and controller pressure sensor and controller Especially check wiring for false disconnection and noise included.

4

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. (Controller is broken by only applying power to grounding of signal.)

5

• Engine controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-44


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-77

Error code

G043 When cranking is executed for five seconds or more, this error code might be displayed. In case that the engine does not start, check by the table of "Section 47.3 Engine related Troubleshooting". Execute the following check when the error code G043 is displayed after starting the engine.

Trouble

Mechatro controller direct input speed sensor and received data from engine controller are disconnected.

Judging condition

Voltage of alternator is 12V or more, and speed sensor and receipt data from engine controller indicate excess low engine rpm.

Symptom

Engine speed down may cause extension by abrupt loading.

Control in the event of failure

Enter 0 rpm for engine speed. Enter 0 for ESS power shift command.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

2

G-3 MEAS 1 (for mechatro controller)

2

G-3 MEAS 2 (receive from engine controller)

Checking object 1

2

Checking contents and remedy

• Engine speed sensor SE-13

Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor.

• Wiring between engine speed sensor and controller CN-136F CN-106F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

Normal value: 1.6~2.0k

3

• Wiring between ECU engine Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. speed sensor and controller pressure sensor and controller

4

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. (Controller is broken by only applying power to grounding of signal.)

5

• Engine controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-45


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-78 Error code

H013

Trouble

Accel potentiometer is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from accel potentiometer is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

LOW idling is fixed.

Control in the event of failure

LOW idling is fixed.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

2

H-1 ACCEL VOLT.

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Accel potentiometer SE-16

Measure the resistance between terminals of speed sensor. 1.6~2.4k Turn the potentiometer and measure resistance between signal and GND.

2

• Wiring between accel potentiometer and controller CN-402F CN-102F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-79

Error code

H014

Trouble

Accel potentiometer’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from accel potentiometer is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

LOW idling is fixed.

Control in the event of failure

LOW idling is fixed.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

2

Checking object 1

H-1 ACCEL VOLT.

Checking contents and remedy

• Accel potentiometer SE-16

Measure the resistance between terminals of accel potentiometer.

2

• Wiring between accel potentiometer and controller CN-402F CN-102F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

1.6~2.4k Turn the potentiometer and measure resistance between signal and GND.

46-46


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-80 Error code

H023

Trouble

Boom angle potentiometer’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom angle potentiometer is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

Indications of rating load and working radius of High-reach crane become abnormal.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

12

H-2 BOOM

Checking object 1

Checking contents and remedy

• Boom angle potentiometer SE-17

Measure the resistance between terminals of boom angle potentiometer.

2

• Wiring between boom angle potentiometer and controller CN-702F CN-103F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

4.0~6.0k Turn the potentiometer and measure resistance between signal and GND. Normal value: 0 to all resistance (4.0~6.0)k

Table46-81 Error code

H024

Trouble

Boom angle potentiometer’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from boom angle potentiometer is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

Indications of rating load and working radius of High-reach crane become abnormal.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

12

Checking object 1

• Boom angle potentiometer SE-17

H-2 BOOM

Checking contents and remedy Measure the resistance between terminals of boom angle potentiometer. 4.0~6.0k Turn the potentiometer and measure resistance between signal and GND. Normal value: 0 to all resistance (4.0~6.0)k

2

• Wiring between boom angle potentiometer and controller CN-702F CN-103F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-47


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-82 Error code

H033

Trouble

Arm angle potentiometer’s wiring is disconnected.

Judging condition

The input voltage from arm angle potentiometer is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

Indications of rating load and working radius of High-reach crane become abnormal.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

12

H-3 ARM

Checking object 1

Checking contents and remedy

• Arm angle potentiometer SE-19

Measure the resistance between terminals of arm angle potentiometer.

2

• Wiring between arm angle potentiometer and controller CN-703F CN-103F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

4.0~6.0k Turn the potentiometer and measure resistance between signal and GND. Normal value: 0 to all resistance (4.0~6.0)k

Table46-83 Error code

H034

Trouble

Arm angle potentiometer’s power source is shortcut.

Judging condition

The input voltage from arm angle potentiometer is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

Indications of rating load and working radius of High-reach crane become abnormal.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

12

Checking object 1

• Arm angle potentiometer SE-19

H-3 ARM

Checking contents and remedy Measure the resistance between terminals of arm angle potentiometer. 4.0~6.0k Turn the potentiometer and measure resistance between signal and GND. Normal value: 0 to all resistance (4.0~6.0)k

2

• Wiring between arm angle potentiometer and controller CN-703F CN-103F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-48


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-84 Error code

H091

Trouble

Fuel sensor grounding is short-circuited.

Judging condition

The input voltage from fuel sensor is 0.1V or less.

Symptom

Warning for low fuel level is indicated.

Control in the event of failure

Fuel level becomes 0%.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

10

H-9 FUEL LEVEL

Checking object 1

Checking contents and remedy

• Fuel sensor potentiometer SE-15

Move fuel sensor and measure the resistance between terminals of fuel sensor. EMPTY 95

~ FULL 5

2

• Wiring between fuel sensor and controller CN-152F CN-104F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-85

Error code

H093

Trouble

Fuel sensor’s wiring is disconnection.

Judging condition

The input voltage from fuel sensor is 4.7V or more.

Symptom

Warning for low fuel level is indicated.

Control in the event of failure

Fuel level becomes 0%.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

10

H-9 FUEL LEVEL

Checking object 1

• Fuel sensor potentiometer SE-15

Checking contents and remedy Move fuel sensor and measure the resistance between terminals of fuel sensor. EMPTY 95

~ FULL 5

2

• Wiring between fuel sensor and controller CN-152F CN-104F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-49


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-86 Error code

I111

Trouble

Reception of CAN1 communication is abnormal. (Passive error)

Judging condition

Reception from engine controller can not receive correctly.

Symptom

It has been affected little.

Control in the event of failure

Keep the last receiving condition.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Wiring between ECU and controller CN-3F CN-101F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. (There is a possibility of false disconnection.)

2

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-87

Error code

I113

Trouble

Reception of cluster communication is abnormal. (Time-out error)

Judging condition

Reception from gauge cluster can not receive correctly. It has been affected little.

Symptom

It has been affected little.

Control in the event of failure

It can be operated in condition that coolant temperature is 20°C.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object

2

G-5 WATER TEMP

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Wiring between ECU and controller CN-3F CN-101F

Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary.

2

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-50


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-88 Error code

I313

Trouble

Reception of cluster communication is abnormal. (Time-out error)

Judging condition

Reception from gauge cluster can not receive correctly.

Symptom

Switch operation of gauge cluster can not be done.

Control in the event of failure

Keep the condition after immediately key-on is operated.

Returned in It returns automatically in normal condition. normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Wiring between gauge cluster Check wiring for possible failure according to the wiring checking procedure and repair it if necessary. and controller CN-600F CN-101F

2

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-89

Error code

K014

Trouble

Battery relay contact welded

Judging condition

The power 24V is continuously supplied to controller for 40 seconds or more while the key switch ON signal turned OFF

Symptom

The power on the battery relay secondary side does not turn OFF even if the key switch is turned OFF.

Control in the event of failure

Normal control with key switch OFF

Returned in Turn key switch ON. normal condition Or when the power supply 24V to mechatro controller is stopped Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

4

K-1 AIS RELAY 2

4

K-3 KEY SWITCH OFF

Checking object 1

2

Checking contents and remedy

• Battery relay R-1 CN-256F

Turn key switch off and disconnect the connector (CN-256F) on the battery relay coil. If 24V power lives on battery relay secondary side, check on battery relay for failure and replace it if failed.

• Auto idle stop relay 2 R-24 • Alternator relay R-28

Turn off the key switch, and remove the connector (CN-256F) on the battery relay coil side. If power of battery relay on secondary side falls, remove either auto idling stop relay 2 or alternator relay. The failure may be occurred in case where the power falls after the relay was removed, and therefore check on the relay unit and replace it with new one if failed.

3

• Wiring between auto idle stop relay/alternator relay and controller CN-109F, CN2-1 • Fuse& relay box E-1

When K014 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and K014 is left displayed Replace fuse/relay box.

4

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-51


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-90 Error code

R014

Trouble

Wiper motor arc prevention relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to wiper motor arc prevention relay is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Wiper does not move.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

25

Checking object 1

PREVENT ARC

Checking contents and remedy

• Wiper motor arc prevention relay When error is cancelled after removing wiper motor arc prevention relay, R-31 check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed.

When resistance between relays (1) and (2) is 0 , it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between wiper motor arc prevention relay and controller CN-109F, CN2-1 • Fuse & relay box E-1

When R014 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and R014 is left displayed Replace fuse/relay box.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-52


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-91 Error code

R024

Trouble

Wiper motor forward rotation relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to wiper motor forward rotation relay is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Wiper does not move.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

25

Checking object

CW MOTOR RLY

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Wiper motor forward rotation When error is cancelled after removing wiper motor forward rotation relay, relay check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. R-29 When resistance between relays (1) and (2) is 0 , it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between wiper motor forward rotation relay and controller CN-109F, CN2-1 •Fuse & relay box E-1

When R024 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and R024 is left displayed Replace fuse/relay box.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-53


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-92 Error code

R034

Trouble

Wiper motor reverse rotation relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to wiper motor reverse rotation relay is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Wiper does not move after forward rotation.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

25

Checking object

CCW MOTOR RLY

Checking contents and remedy

1

• Wiper motor reverse rotation When error is cancelled after removing wiper motor reverse rotation relay, relay check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. R-30 When resistance between relays (1) and (2) is 0 , it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between wiper motor forward rotation relay and controller CN-109F, CN2-1 •Fuse & relay box E-1

When R034 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and R034 is left displayed Replace fuse/relay box.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-54


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-93 Error code

R044

Trouble

Washer motor relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to washer motor relay is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Washer motor does not move.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

25

MOTOR RELAY

Checking object 1

Checking contents and remedy

• Washer motor relay R-32

When error is cancelled after removing washer motor relay, check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. When resistance between relays (1) and (2) is 0 , it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between washer motor relay and controller CN-112F, CN2-1 •Fuse & relay box E-1

When R044 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and R044 is left displayed Replace fuse/relay box.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-94

Error code

R134

Trouble

Swing flasher relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to swing flasher relay is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Right swing flasher does not light.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

Checking object 1

• Swing flasher relay R-19

22

D13

Checking contents and remedy When error is cancelled after removing connector (CN-74F) of swing flasher relay, check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. When resistance between relays (HB) and (HC) is 0

, it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between swing flasher When R134 is left displayed with the relay removed relay and controller Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line (as shown right upper CN-74F, CN-109F figure C) according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-55


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-95 Error code

R144

Trouble

Swing flasher relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to swing flasher relay is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Left swing flasher does not light.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

22

D14

Checking object 1

Checking contents and remedy

• Swing flasher relay R-19

When error is cancelled after removing connector (CN-74F) of swing flasher relay, check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. When resistance between relays (HB) and (HC) is 0

, it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between swing flasher When R144 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line (as shown right upper relay and controller figure B) according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if CN-74F, CN-109F necessary.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-96

Error code

R154

Trouble

Travel alarm relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to travel alarm relay is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Travel alarm does not actuate.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

23

Checking object 1

• Travel alarm relay R-8

D15

Checking contents and remedy When error is cancelled after removing of travel alarm relay, check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. When resistance between relays (1) and (2) is 0 , it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between travel alarm relay and controller CN-109F, CN2-2 •Fuse & relay box E-1

When R154 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and R154 is left displayed. Replace fuse/relay box.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-56


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-97 Error code

R164

Trouble

Auto idle stop relay 2 relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to auto idle stop relay 2 is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Power source for mechatro controller often turns off. Auto idle stop relay 2 does not actuate.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

4

Checking object 1

• Auto idle stop relay 2 relay R-24

K-1 AIS RELAY 2

Checking contents and remedy When error is cancelled after removing of auto idle stop relay 2, check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. When resistance between relays (1) and (2) is 0 , it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between auto idle stop relay 2 and controller CN-109F, CN2-2 •Fuse & relay box E-1

When R164 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and R164 is left displayed. Replace fuse/relay box.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-57


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-98 Error code

R174

Trouble

Engine forcibly stop relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to engine forcibly stop is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

When key switch is turned off but engine does not stop. Engine auto idle stop function does not actuate.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

4

Checking object 1

• Engine forcibly stop relay R-25

K-3 ENG STOP

Checking contents and remedy When error is cancelled after removing of engine forcibly stop relay, check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. When resistance between relays (1) and (2) is 0 , it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between engine forcibly stop relay and controller CN-109F, CN2-2 • Fuse & relay box E-1

When R174 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and R174 is left displayed. Replace fuse/relay box.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-58


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES) Table46-99 Error code

R184

Trouble

Safety lock lever relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to safety lock lever relay is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Safety lock lever timer does not actuate.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

4

K-4 LOCK LEVER

Checking object 1

Checking contents and remedy

• Safety lock lever relay R-26

When error R184 is cancelled after removing of safety lock lever relay, check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. When resistance between relays (1) and (2) is 0 , it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between safety lock lever relay and controller CN-109F, CN2-2 • Fuse & relay box E-1

When R184 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and R184 is left displayed. Replace fuse/relay box.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller. Table46-100

Error code

R214

Trouble

Safety relay error

Judging condition

The mechatro controller output line to safety relay is short-circuited with the power source.

Symptom

Safety relay does not actuate.

Control in the event of failure

Relay output is stopped.

Returned in When the power is OFF normal condition Screen No. Service Screen No. diagnosis checking screen Screen No.

4

Checking object 1

• Safety lock lever relay R-26

K-2 SAFETY RLY

Checking contents and remedy When error R214 is cancelled after removing of safety relay, check relay unit for failure, replace it with new one if failed. When resistance between relays (1) and (2) is 0 , it is in abnormal condition.

2

• Wiring between safety lock lever relay and controller CN-109F, CN2-2 • Fuse & relay box E-1

When R214 is left displayed with the relay removed Check that no power 24V is produced on relay (-) line according to the wiring checking procedure and replace it if necessary. When no failure found after checking on wiring and R214 is left displayed. Replace fuse/relay box.

3

• Mechatro controller

Check that the error is corrected after replacement of controller.

46-59


46. TROUBLE SHOOTING (BY ERROR CODES)

[MEMO]

46-60


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) TABLE OF CONTENTS 47.1 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ....................................................................................................47-3 47.2 ELECTRIC SYSTEMS .....................................................................................................47-27 47.2.1

WIRING CHECKING PROCEDURE ......................................................................47-27

47.2.2

TROUBLE...............................................................................................................47-30

47.3 ENGINE RELATED TROUBLESHOOTING ....................................................................47-33

47

Book Code No. S5YN4718E01 47-1


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

Augst, 2006

SK200–8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC–8 : YQ11-06001~

n

October, 2006

SK250-8 : LQ12-06001~ SK260LC-8 : LL12-05001~

n

February, 2007

E235BSR : YF05-02001~ E235BSR(N)LC : YU05-02001~

n

March, 2007

n

April, 2007

n

n

SK200-8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC-8 : YQ11-06001~

n

May, 2007

SK250-8: LQ12-06001~ SK260LC–8 : LL12-05001~

n

June, 2007

E225BSR : YB05-03001~ E225BSRLC : LA05-02001~

n

n

SK215SRLC : LA05-02001~

n

July, 2007

E135BSR : YY05-12001~ E135BSRLC : YH05-07001~

n

n

SK225SR : YB05-03001~ SK225SRLC : LA05-02001~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

E265B : LQ12-06001~ E265BLC : LL12-05001~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~ SK235SR-2 : YF05-02001~ SK235SRLC-2 : YU05-02001~

n

47-2

Remarks S5YN4718E01 n n (NHK) n (NHK Russia) n (OCE) n ASIA (HS Engine) n ASIA (HS Engine) n (NHK) n (North America) n (NHK) n (OCE) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE)

47.1

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Preface: The troubleshooting for the failures shown below is explained here. Identify the failure and trouble and carry forward the troubleshooting in order of the failure item number. (1) All controls do not function/slow (2) Engine down/stalled (3) Move at lever neutral position (4) Poor fine operability (5) Slow boom up, insufficient power (6) Slow boom down, insufficient power for lifting up body (7) Slow arm in, insufficient power (8) Slow independent arm out (in the air) (9) Slow bucket digging (10)Slow bucket dumping (11)Swing operation not functioned/slow (12)Noise during swing operation (13)Swing on a slope drifts when control lever is in neutral position (14)Swing drifts when swing operation is stopped (15)Slow travel speed/weak (16)Travel deviation (17)Travel 1st/2nd speed not changed (18)Travel parking on a slope is not held (19)Travel does not run straightly when both crawlers and attachment operated simultaneously. (20)Slow breaker (crusher) operation, weak power (21)Option selector valve malfunction: not switched to breaker circuit (22)Option selector valve malfunction: not switched to nibbler (crusher) circuit

47-3


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) (1) All controls do not function/slow No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Fuse

Check fuse No.4 (10A)

If the fuse is blown out, check on the short-circuited section.

2 Safety lever lock switch

Carry out service diagnosis

No.4 K-4 switch: Check action of switch by tester, Push down the lever and it turns on, push or check that the power voltage up and it turns off. is lowered by pushing the lever down.

3 Safety lever lock switching

Check that the solenoid is switched correctly

Measure both terminals of solenoid Check solenoid unit for possible connector. 24V by pushing the lever down, failure. 0V by pushing it up Check harness for possible failure.

4 Safety lever lock relay Carry out service diagnosis

No.4 K-4 lock lever: Check action of relay by tester Push down the lever and it turns off, push up and it turns on.

5 Pilot pressure sensor

•Stop engine stop and key is on position. Check 5V power for controller All pilot low pressure sensors are 0MPa to 0.1MPa.

6 Solenoid valve for safety lock lever

Measure pressure of About 0MPa by pushing the lever up, and Replace solenoid valve solenoid A1 port 4MPa or more by push it down.

7 Pilot line filter

Disassemble and check it visually

8 Pilot gear pump

Measure pilot primary Check that it is 4MPa or more in high idling Check gear pump and the relief pressure at gear valve for possible failure pump

9 Multi control valve (in case that travel is operable)

Change position

Check filter for clogging

Clean filter

Since all are blocked due to poor switching performance, check that the lever select pattern is set to the proper position.

10 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis unload proportional valve

•No.8 D-1 P1 unload valve (cut valve) D-1 P2 unload valve (cut valve)

11 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1, P2 unload proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A5 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary pressures are within the range of 0.5 to 1.2MPa in boom up full lever and high idling operation

Replace proportional valve

12 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis. pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

13 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump pump proportional proportional valve valve secondary pressure directly in idling operation. (Ports a3, a4)

Check that pump proportional valve Replace proportional valve secondary pressure is 2.7MPa or more in right (left) travel full lever and high idling operation Right travel: P1 pump proportional valve Left travel: P2 pump proportional valve

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.3 Boom up full lever & relief proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.18 Travel right full lever & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

47-4


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

14 Main relief pressure

Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Measure the relief pressure Operation No.3 Boom up full lever & relief actually

15

Check set pressure

Check that P1 and P2 pump pressures are Reset or replace 32MPa in boom up full lever, high idling and H mode operation.

16 Pump regulator

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding. Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring free from breakage, damage, etc.

Replace

17 Pump

Visual check

When removing, inside parts (cylinder block, piston, valve plate, shaft, etc.) are free from abnormal resistance against sliding, abnormal damage, etc.

Replace

(2) Engine down/stalled No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

2 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1, P2 pump proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1/P2 pump proportional Replace proportional valve valve pressures are within the range of 0.5 to 1.0MPa in control lever neutral and high idling operation.

3 Pressure sensor of P1, Check pressure P2 pump

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil Operation No.3 Boom up full lever & relief

Check pressure sensor and replace it if necessary

4 Pump regulator

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring free from breakage, damage, etc.

Replace

5 Pump

Visual check

When removing, inside parts (cylinder Replace block, piston, valve plate, shaft, etc.) are free from abnormal resistance against sliding, abnormal damage, etc.

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

(3) Move at lever neutral position No.

Sections

Contents/normal value Check that targeted pilot pressure of sensor is 0MPa in high idling

Corrective action, others

1 Pilot pressure sensor

Carry out service diagnosis

2 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

3 Main spool

Check targeted spool visually

Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace damage and spring is free from breakage

4 Over load relief valve

Check targeted spool visually

Free from dust entered in port relief valve. Seat is free from abnormality

47-5

Check remote control valve

Replace


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

5 Lock valve poppet (in case of boom and arm)

Check targeted poppet Seat is free from abnormality visually

Replace

6 Lock valve selector (in case of boom and arm)

Exchange lock valve selector of boom/arm and boom/arm

Replace

Check that the trouble is reversed

7 Holding valve spool for Check that smooth Free from abnormal resistance against Replace boom sliding of spool in sleeve sliding Do not pull spool out of sleeve (in case of boom) forcibly. 8 Holding valve relief valve for boom (in case of boom)

Check targeted spool visually

Filter free from abnormal contamination

9 Cylinder

Check targeted cylinder Make sure of no problem of seals by visually disassembling and investigation

Replace

Replace cylinder or seals

(4) Poor fine operability No.

Sections

1 Pressure sensor

Contents/normal value Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil

Corrective action, others Replace pressure sensor

•All low pressure sensors are 0MPa to 0.1MPa 2 Actual measuring current value of P1/P2 unload proportional valve

Carry out service diagnosis

•No.8 D-1 P1 unload valve (cut valve) In case where the reading is D-1 P2 unload valve (cut valve) largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List proportional valve and controller Operation No. 1 Operation is nil for possible failure.

3 Secondary pressure of Measure the unload proportional proportional valve valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A8 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P1/P2 unloads secondary Replace proportional valve pressures is within the range of 2.7MPa or more in control lever neutral and high idling operation

4 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

5 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1, P2 pump proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly. (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1/P2 pump proportional Replace proportional valve valve pressures are within the range of Check regulator 0.5 to 1.0MPa in control lever neutral and high idling operation

6 Slow return check valve Visual check of pilot line (in case of boom up or arm out)

Check that slow return check valve Clean and replace installed on pilot line is free from dust entered

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil

47-6

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) (5) Slow boom up, insufficient power No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Boom up pressure sensor

Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Check and replace pressure Operation No.3 boom up full lever and sensor relief Check remote control valve

2 Remote control valve

Measure directly remote Check that pressure is 3.0MPa or more Check remote control valve control pressure of in boom up full lever and high idling When equipped with multi boom up operation control valve, check it while changing lever pattern

3 Pump pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis for P1, P2 pump pressures in operation.

•See Service Diagnosis Data List When there is difference Operation No.4 boom up full lever and between P1 and P2 pump in operation pressures, check high pressure sensor.

4 Actual measuring current value of P1/P2 unload proportional valve

•No.8 D-1 P1 unload valve (cut valve) In case where the reading is D-1 P2 unload valve (cut valve) largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.3 Boom up full lever & proportional valve and controller for possible failure. relief

Carry out service diagnosis

5 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1, P2 unload proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A5 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of 0.5~1.2MPa in boom up full lever and high idling operation

6 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

7 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1, P2 pump proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1/P2 pump proportional Replace proportional valve valve pressures are within the range of 1.8 to 3.0MPa in boom up full lever and high idling operation

8 P2 by-pass cut valve Visual check <Trouble> Only P2 pressure is low.

No problem for sliding ability of main Clean and replace poppet and no contamination on orifice No problem for sliding ability of internal piston (Check it through PBp2 port.)

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.4 boom up full lever & in proportional valve and controller for possible failure. operation

9 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

10 Lock valve poppet <Trouble> Both P1 and P2 pressures are low.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

11 Conflux check valve <Trouble> Only P2 pressure is high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

12 Holding valve for boom Visual check (poppet) <Trouble> Both P1 and P2 pressures are high.

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

47-7


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

13 Boom spool <Trouble> Only P1 pressure is high.

Contents/normal value Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Spring is free from breakage.

Corrective action, others Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

14 Check boom spool and Disassembly and recirculation investigation <Trouble> Only P1 pressure is low.

Free from abnormal resistance against Replace spool assembly sliding Spring is free from breakage.

15 Conflux spool <Trouble> Only P2 pressure is high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Spring is free from breakage. Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface

16 Main relief valve <Trouble> Relief pressure is low.

Check set pressure

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Reset or replace Operation No.3 boom up full lever and relief

17 Over load relief valve <Trouble> Relief pressure is low.

Visual check (Head side)

Pressure is 32MPa or more in boom up When only relief pressure of full lever and high idling. Free from boom up is low, replace valve dust entered in over load relief valve. Seat is free from abnormality

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

(6) Slow boom down/insufficient power for lifting up body No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Boom down pressure sensor

Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Check and replace pressure Operation No.5 boom down full lever sensor. & in operation Check remote control valve.

2 Remote control valve

Measure remote control Check that pressure is 3.0MPa or more Check remote control valve pressure of boom down in boom down full lever and high idling When equipped with multi directly operation control valve, check it while changing lever pattern.

3 Actual measuring current value of P1 unload proportional valve

Carry out service diagnosis

P1 unload valve (cut valve)

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.5 boom down full lever & measured value, check proportional valve and controller in operation for possible failure.

4 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1 unload proportional proportional valve valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 of 8 sections solenoid block.

Check that P1 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of 0.8 to 1.2MPa in boom down full lever and high idling operation

5 Actual measuring Carry out service diagnosis current value of P1 pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump

6 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1 pump proportional proportional valve valve secondary pressure directly (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1 pump proportional valve Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of 2.0 to 2.5MPa in boom down full lever and high idling operation

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.5 boom down full lever measured value, check proportional valve and controller & in operation for possible failure.

47-8


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

7 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve

Carry out service diagnosis

8 Travel straight proportional valve secondary pressure

Measure directly the travel straight proportional valve secondary pressure.

9 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

10 Lock valve poppet <Trouble> Boom down is low.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

11 Holding valve (poppet) <Trouble> Boom down is slow.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

12 Boom spool <Trouble> Boom down is slow.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

Check that the value is not change regardless of operation

•Check pressure sensor of travel

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil Operation No.18 Travel right full lever & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

•In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

High idling pressure is 0.8MPa or less Replace proportional valve regardless neutral/operation

13 Check boom spool and Disassembly and recirculation investigation <Trouble> Machine can not be lifted by supporting with boom.

Free from abnormal resistance against Replace spool assembly sliding Spring is free from breakage.

14 Main relief valve <Trouble> Relief pressure is low.

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Reset or replace Operation No.3 boom up full lever and relief

Check set pressure

15 Over load relief valve Visual check <Trouble> Machine can not be lifted by supporting with boom.

Free from dust entered in port relief valve. Seat is free from abnormality

Replace

(7) Slow arm in, insufficient power No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

1 Arm in pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis 2 Remote control valve pressure

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.6 arm in full lever and relief

Corrective action, others Check and replace pressure sensor Check remote control valve

Measure directly remote Check that pressure is 3.0MPa or more Check remote control valve control pressure of arm in arm in full lever and high idling When equipped with multi in operation control valve, check it while changing lever pattern

47-9


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

3 Pump pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis for P1, P2 pump pressures in operation.

•See Service Diagnosis Data List When there is difference Operation No.7 arm in full lever and in between P1 and P2 pump operation pressures, check high pressure sensor

4 Actual measuring current value of P1/P2 unload proportional valve

•No.8 D-1 P1 unload valve (cut valve) In case where the reading is D-1 P2 unload valve (cut valve) largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List proportional valve and controller Operation No.6 Arm in full lever & for possible failure. relief

Carry out service diagnosis

5 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1, P2 unload proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A5 of 8 sections solenoid block.

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of 0.5 to 1.2MPa in arm in full lever and high idling operation.

6 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

7 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1, P2 pump proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly. (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1/P2 pump proportional Replace proportional valve valve pressures are 2.0MPa or more in arm in full lever and high idling operation. (Secondary pressure is affected by oil temperature and attachment weight)

8 Actual measuring current value of arm in spool 2 proportional valve

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil Operation No.6 Arm in full lever & relief Operation No.7 Arm in full lever & in operation

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

Check that secondary pressure of proportional valve secondary pressures are within the range of following Lever neutral: 0MPa Motion in the air: 1.7 to 2.2MPa Arm in relief: 2.5MPa or more

Replace proportional valve

Check that the value is not change regardless of operation

•Check pressure sensor of travel

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil Operation No.18 Travel right full lever & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

•In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

Carry out service diagnosis

9 Secondary pressure of Measure directly the arm in spool 2 proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure at the ports A8 (arm 2 spool) of 8 sections solenoid block. 10 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve

Carry out service diagnosis

11 Secondary pressure of Measure directly the travel straight proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure at the ports A6 (travel straight) of 8 sections solenoid block

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.7 Arm in full lever & in operation

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

0.8MPa or less in high idling operation Replace proportional valve regardless of neutral/operation

47-10


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

12 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

13 Main relief valve <Trouble> Relief pressure is low.

Check set pressure

14 Over load relief valve Visual check (Head <Trouble> side) P1, P2 pressure is low.

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Reset or replace Operation No.3 boom up full lever and relief Pressure is 32MPa or more in arm in and relief. Free from dust entered in over load relief valve. Seat is free from abnormality

When only relief pressure of arm in is low, replace valve

15 Over load relief valve Visual check (Rod side) Pressure is 32MPa or more in arm out When only relief pressure of arm <Trouble> and relief. out is low, replace valve P1, P2 pressure is low. Free from dust entered in over load relief valve. Seat is free from abnormality. 16 Arm 1 spool Visual check <Trouble> P1, P2 pressure is high.

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

17 Arm 2 spool Visual check <Trouble> P1, P2 pressure is high or low.

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

18 Check arm 2 spool and Disassembly and recirculation investigation <Trouble> Arm in power is poor.

Free from abnormal resistance against Replace spool assembly sliding Spring is free from breakage.

19 Check lock valve poppet Visual check <Trouble> Both P1, P2 pressures are high.

Free from abnormal resistance against Replace sliding (Check on the casing side for Free from abnormal damage, etc on damage) outside surface

(8) Slow independent arm out (in the air) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Arm out pressure sensor

Carry out service diagnosis

2 Remote control valve

Measure directly remote Check that pressure is 3.0MPa or more Check remote control valve control pressure of arm in arm out full lever and high idling When equipped with multi out operation control valve, check it while changing lever pattern

3 Pump pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis for P1, P2 pump pressures in operation. 4 Actual measuring current value of P1/P2 unload proportional valve

Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Check and replace pressure Operation No.8 arm out full lever and sensor relief Check remote control valve

When there is difference •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.9 arm out full lever and between P1 and P2 pump in operation pressures, check high pressure sensor •No.8 D-1 P1 unload valve (cut valve) In case where the reading is D-1 P2 unload valve (cut valve) largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List proportional valve and controller Operation No.8 Arm out full lever & for possible failure. relief

47-11


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

5 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1, P2 unload proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A5 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of 0.5 to 1.2MPa in arm out full lever and high idling operation

6 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

7 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1, P2 pump proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1/P2 pump proportional Replace proportional valve valve pressures are within the range of 1.5 to 2.7MPa in arm out full lever and high idling operation (Secondary pressure is affected by oil temperature and attachment weight)

8 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve

Check that the value is not change regardless of operation

•Check pressure sensor of travel

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil Operation No.18 Travel right full lever & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

•In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

Carry out service diagnosis

9 Secondary pressure of Measure directly the travel straight proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure at the ports A6 (travel straight) of 8 sections solenoid block

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.9 Arm out full lever & in proportional valve and controller for possible failure. operation

0.8MPa or less in high idling operation Replace proportional valve regardless of neutral/operation

10 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

11 Main relief valve <Trouble> Relief pressure is low.

Check set pressure

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Reset or replace Operation No.3 boom up full lever and relief

12 Over load relief valve Visual check (Rod side) Pressure is 32MPa or more in arm out When only relief pressure of arm <Trouble> and relief. out is low, replace valve P1, P2 pressure is low. Free from dust entered in over load relief valve. Seat is free from abnormality 13 Arm 1 spool <Trouble> P2 pressure is high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

14 Arm 2 spool <Trouble> P1 pressure is high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

47-12


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

15 Check arm 2 spool and Disassembly and recirculation investigation (spring <Trouble> side) Both P1, P2 pressures are low.

Free from abnormal resistance against Replace spool assembly sliding Spring is free from breakage.

16 Check lock valve poppet Visual check <Trouble> Both P1, P2 pressures are high.

Free from abnormal resistance against Replace sliding (Check on the casing side for Free from abnormal damage, etc on damage) outside surface

(9) Bucket digging is slow No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

1 Bucket digging pressure Carry out service sensor diagnosis 2 Remote control valve

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.12 bucket digging full lever and relief

Corrective action, others Check and replace pressure sensor Check remote control valve

Measure directly remote Check that pressure is 3.0MPa or more Check remote control valve control pressure of in bucket digging full lever and high When equipped with multi bucket digging idling operation control valve, check it while changing lever pattern

3 Pump pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis for P1, P2 pump pressures in operation.

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.13 Bucket digging full lever and in operation

4 Actual measuring current value of P1/P2 unload proportional valve

•No.8 D-1 P1 unload valve (cut valve) In case where the reading is D-1 P2 unload valve (cut valve) largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.12 Bucket digging full proportional valve and controller for possible failure. lever & relief

Carry out service diagnosis

When there is difference between P1 and P2 pump pressures, check high pressure sensor

5 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1, P2 unload proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A5 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of 0.5 to 1.2MPa in bucket digging full lever and high idling operation

6 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

7 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1, P2 pump proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1 pump proportional valve Replace proportional valve pressures is 2.7MPa or more and P2 pump proportional valve pressure is 1.6 to 2.2MPa in bucket digging full lever and high idling operation.

8 Attachment boost solenoid command

Carry out service diagnosis

No.3 POWER BOOST Bucket digging COMP OFF, MEAS OFF

9 Attachment boost solenoid secondary pressure

Measure switching valve secondary pressure

Check that pressure is 0MPa in bucket Replace solenoid valve digging full lever and high idling operation

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.13 Bucket digging full lever & in operation

47-13

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

Check harness Replace solenoid valve


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

10 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve

Contents/normal value Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.12 Bucket digging full lever & relief

Corrective action, others In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

11 Secondary pressure of Measure directly the travel straight proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure at the ports A6 (travel straight) of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that travel straight secondary Replace proportional valve pressure is 2.7MPa or more in bucket digging full lever and high idling operation

12 P2 by-pass cut valve Visual check <Trouble> Only P2 pressure is low.

No problem for sliding ability of main Clean or replace poppet and no contamination on orifice No problem for sliding ability of internal piston (Check it through PBp2 port.)

13 Check stroke limiter <Trouble> Both P1, P2 pressures are high.

Visual check

When piston is removed from cover, it Replace is free from abnormal resistance (Check on the casing side for against sliding damage.) Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface

14 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

15 Main relief valve

Check set pressure

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Reset or replace Operation No.3 Boom up full lever and relief

16 Travel straight spool <Trouble> P2 pressure is high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

17 Bucket spool <Trouble> Both P1, P2 pressures are high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

18 Over load relief valve

Check targeted spool visually

Free from dust entered in over load relief valve. Seat is free from abnormality.

Replace

(10)Bucket dump is slow No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

1 Bucket dump pressure sensor

Carry out service diagnosis

2 Remote control valve

Measure directly remote Check that pressure is 3.0MPa or more Check remote control valve control pressure of in bucket dump full lever and high When equipped with multi bucket dump idling operation control valve, check it while changing lever pattern

3 Pump pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis for P1, P2 pump pressures in operation.

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.14 Bucket dump full lever and relief

Corrective action, others

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.15 Bucket dump full lever and in operation

47-14

Check and replace pressure sensor Check remote control valve

When there is difference between P1 and P2 pump pressures, check high pressure sensor


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

4 Actual measuring current value of P1/P2 unload proportional valve

Contents/normal value Carry out service diagnosis

Corrective action, others

•No.8 D-1 P1 unload valve (cut valve) In case where the reading is D-1 P2 unload valve (cut valve) largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List proportional valve and controller Operation No.14 Bucket dump full for possible failure. lever & relief

5 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1, P2 unload proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A5 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of 0.5~1.2MPa in bucket dump full lever and high idling operation. Replace proportional valve

6 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve Carry out service diagnosis.

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

7 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1, P2 pump proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1 pump proportional valve Replace proportional valve pressures is 2.7MPa or more and P2 pump proportional valve pressure is 0.9 to 1.4MPa in bucket dump full lever and high idling operation.

8 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.14 Bucket dump full lever & relief

Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.15 Bucket dump full lever & in operation

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

9 Secondary pressure of Measure directly the travel straight proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure at the ports A6 (travel straight) of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that travel straight secondary Replace proportional valve pressure is 2.7MPa or more in bucket dump full lever and high idling operation

10 P2 by-pass cut valve Visual check <Trouble> Only P2 pressure is low.

No problem for sliding ability of main Clean and replace poppet and no contamination on orifice No problem for sliding ability of internal piston (Check it through PBP2 port.)

11 Check stroke limiter <Trouble> Pilot pressure is low.

Visual check

Free from abnormal damage and wear Replace on outside of piston inside cover (Check on the casing side for damage.)

12 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace damage and spring is free from control valve breakage

13 Main relief valve <Trouble> Relief pressure is low.

Check set pressure

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Reset or replace Operation No.3 Boom up full lever and relief

14 Travel straight spool <Trouble> P2 pressure is high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

15 Bucket spool <Trouble> Both P1, P2 pressures are high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

47-15


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

16 Over load relief valve

Contents/normal value Check targeted spool visually

Free from dust entered in over load relief valve. Seat is free from abnormality.

Corrective action, others Replace

(11)Swing does not move/slow No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

1 Swing pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis

Corrective action, others

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Check and replace pressure Operation No.11 Swing full lever and sensor in operation Check remote control valve

2 Remote control valve

Measure directly remote Check that pressure is 3.0MPa or more Check remote control valve control pressure of in boom up full lever and high idling When equipped with multi swing operation control valve, check it while changing lever pattern

3 Swing parking brake solenoid

Carry out service diagnosis

No.3 F-2 SWING-BRAKE Lever neutral: COMP ON, MEAS ON Swing: COMP OFF, MEAS OFF

Check swing pressure sensor Check harness

Measurement of solenoid valve A2 port

Lever neutral: 0MPa In operation: 4MPa or more

Replace solenoid valve

Visual check

No contamination on spool cover Clean or replace (short side) and orifice No damage on spool cover (long side) and shuttle

4

Swing parking brake solenoid

5 Shuttle valve <Trouble> Pilot pressure is low.

6 Pump pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis for P2 pump pressures in operation

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Check high pressure sensor Operation No.11 Swing full lever and in operation

7 Actual measuring current value of P2 unload proportional valve

•No.8 D-2 P2 unload valve (cut valve) In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.11 Swing full lever & in measured value, check proportional valve and controller operation for possible failure.

Carry out service diagnosis

8 Secondary pressure of Measure the P2 unload proportional proportional valve valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A5 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of 0.5 to 1.2MPa in swing full lever and high idling operation

9 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-2 P2 pump

10 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P2 pump proportional proportional valve secondary pressure valve directly (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P2 pump proportional valve Replace proportional valve pressure is 2.7MPa or more in swing full lever and high idling operation

11 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve (Check this trouble by only swing operation)

Carry out service diagnosis

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.11 Swing full lever & in proportional valve and controller for possible failure. operation

Check that the value is not change regardless of operation

•Check pressure sensor of travel

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil Operation No.18 Travel right full lever & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

•In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

47-16


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

12 Secondary pressure of travel straight proportional valve (Check this trouble by only swing operation)

Measure directly the proportional valve secondary pressure at the ports A6 (travel straight) of 8 sections solenoid block

13 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

14 Travel straight spool <Trouble> P2 pressure is low.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

15 Swing spool <Trouble> P2 pressure is high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

16 Swing relief valve <Trouble> Relief pressure is low.

Check set pressure

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Reset or replace Operation No.10 Swing full lever and relief

17 Swing motor

Visual check

Inner parts (cylinder block, piston, valve brake etc) are to be free from abnormal resistance against sliding. Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface (brake plate etc)

Replace

18 Swing reduction gear oil Take sample oil from swing reduction gear drain

Sampling oil does not include a lot of metal powder.

Disassemble and inspect reduction gear

19 Swing reduction

Tooth surface is not worn abnormally and is not chipped.

Replace

Visual check

0.8MPa or less in high idling operation Replace proportional valve regardless of neutral/operation

(12)Noise occurred at swing operation No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Swing parking brake solenoid

Carry out service diagnosis

No.3 F-2 SWING-BRAKE Lever neutral: COMP ON, MEAS ON Swing: COMP OFF, MEAS OFF

Check swing pressure sensor Check harness

2

Measurement of solenoid valve A2 port

Lever neutral: 0MPa In operation: 4MPa or more

Replace solenoid valve

3 Boost check valve (Sound of cavitation at stopping)

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Spring is free from breakage.

Replace

4 By-pass check valve (Sound of cavitation at stopping)

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Spring is free from breakage.

Replace

5 Swing motor (Brake valve/friction plate)

Visual check

Disassemble and inspect abnormal wear and scuffing

Replace

6 Swing motor piston

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Spring is free from breakage.

Replace

47-17


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

7 Swing reduction gear oil Take sample oil from swing reduction gear drain.

Sampling oil does not include a lot of metal powder.

8 Swing reduction

Tooth surface has no abnormally worn Replace and chipped.

Visual check

Disassemble and inspect reduction gear

(13)Swing drifts on a slope while swing control lever is in neutral position No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

1 Swing pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis

•Engine stop & starter key ON All pilot low pressure sensors are within range of 0 to 0.1MPa.

Corrective action, others Check and replace pressure sensor

2 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

3 Swing parking brake solenoid

Carry out service diagnosis

No.3 F-2 SWING-BRAKE Lever neutral: COMP ON, MEAS ON Swing: COMP OFF, MEAS OFF

Check swing pressure sensor Check harness Check parking brake release switch

4

Measurement of solenoid valve A2 port

Lever neutral: 0MPa In operation: 4MPa or more

Replace solenoid valve

5 Swing motor (Brake valve/friction plate)

Visual check

Disassemble and inspect abnormal wear and scuffing

Replace

6 Parking brake

Visual check

Piston and friction plate do not have abnormal resistance against sliding Free from spring damage

Replace

(14)Swing drifts at stopping No.

Sections

1 Shuttle valve <Trouble> Pilot pressure is low

Contents/normal value Visual check

Corrective action, others

No contamination on spool cover Clean or replace (short side) and orifice. No damage on spool cover (long side) and shuttle.

2 Swing pressure sensor Carry out service diagnosis

•Engine stop & starter key ON All pilot low pressure sensors are within range of 0 to 0.1MPa.

3 Swing relief valve <Trouble> Relief pressure is low.

Check set pressure

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Reset or replace Operation No.10 Swing full lever and relief

4 Anti-reaction valve

Visual check

Free from dirt entering Clean or replace Sliding part should be free from foreign matter entering, abnormal damage and wear.

5 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

6 Swing motor

Visual check

Inner parts (cylinder block, piston, valve brake etc) are to be free from abnormal resistance against sliding. Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface (brake plate etc)

47-18

Replace pressure sensor

Replace


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) (15)Travel speed is slow/poor No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Travel right and left pressure sensor

Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Check and replace pressure Operation No.18 Travel right full lever sensor and idling Check remote control valve Operation No.19 Travel left full lever and idling

2 Remote control valve

Measure directly remote Check that pressure is 2.1MPa or more Check remote control valve control pressure of in travel right (left), forward (reverse) travel right and left full lever and high idling operation

3 Actual measuring current value of P1/P2 unload proportional valve

Carry out service diagnosis

•No.9 D-1 P1 unload valve (cut valve) In case where the reading is D-1 P2 unload valve (cut valve) largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.18 Travel right full lever proportional valve and controller for possible failure. & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

4 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1, P2 unload proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A5 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of followings in travel right (left), forward (reverse) full lever and high idling operation Travel right (P1 unload): 0.5 to 1.0MPa Travel left (P2 unload): 0.5 to 1.0MPa

5 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.18 Travel right full lever proportional valve and controller for possible failure. & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

6 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1, P2 pump proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of followings in travel right (left), forward (reverse) full lever and high idling operation Travel right (P1 pump): 2.7MPa or more Travel left (P2 pump): 2.7MPa or more

7 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve

Check that the value is not change regardless of operation

Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil Operation No.18 Travel right full lever & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

8 Secondary pressure of Measure directly the travel straight proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure 9 Remote control valve

•Check voltage of low pressure sensor other than sensor for travel •In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure

0.8MPa or less in high idling operation Replace proportional valve regardless of neutral/operation

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace damage and spring is free from control valve breakage Check sealing ability of shuttle valve and entry of dust in orifice

47-19


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

10 Travel straight spool <Trouble> P1 pressure is high.

Contents/normal value Visual check

Corrective action, others

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

11 Travel spool Visual check of targeted When removing, free from abnormal <Trouble> spool resistance against sliding Pump pressure is high. Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

12 Travel motor relief valve Check set pressure

Check P1 and P2 pump pressures are 32MPa or more in right and left travel levers full lever (relief operation at locked crawler belt) and high idling

If P1 is low, right travel motorÅfs relief valve is failed. If P2 is low, left travel motorÅfs relief valve is failed.

13 Travel motor

Visual check

Inner parts (piston, cylinder block, valve plate, brake valve spool) are to be free from abnormal resistance against sliding. Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface (brake plate etc)

Replace

14 Parking brake in travel motor

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding No sticking on friction plate and separator plate

Replace

15 Travel reduction gear oil Take sample oil from travel reduction gear drain

Sampling oil does not include a lot of metal powder.

Disassemble and inspect reduction gear

16 Travel reduction

Tooth surface is not worn abnormally and is not chipped.

Replace

Visual check

(16)Travel deviation No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Travel right and left pressure sensor

Carry out service diagnosis

2 Remote control valve

Measure directly remote Check that pressure is 2.1MPa or more Check remote control valve control pressure of in travel right (left), forward (reverse) travel right and left full lever and high idling operation

3 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve

Carry out service diagnosis

4 Secondary pressure of Measure directly the travel straight proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Check and replace pressure Operation No.18 Travel right full lever sensor and idling Check remote control valve Operation No.19 Travel left full lever and idling

Check that the value is not change regardless of operation •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No. 1 Operation is nil Operation No.18 Travel right full lever & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

•Check voltage of low pressure sensor other than sensor for travel •In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

0.8MPa or less in high idling operation Replace proportional valve regardless of neutral/operation

47-20


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

5 Actual measuring current value of P1/P2 unload proportional valve

Contents/normal value Carry out service diagnosis

Corrective action, others

•No.8 D-1 P1 unload valve (cut valve) In case where the reading is D-1 P2 unload valve (cut valve) largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.18 Travel right full lever proportional valve and controller for possible failure. & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

6 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1, P2 unload proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A5 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of followings in travel right (left), forward (reverse) full lever and high idling operation Travel right (P1 unload): 0.5 to 1.0MPa Travel left (P2 unload): 0.5 to 1.0MPa

7 Actual measuring Carry out service current value of P1/P2 diagnosis pump proportional valve

•No.9 E-1 P1 pump E-2 P2 pump

In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.18 Travel right full lever proportional valve and controller for possible failure. & idling Operation No.19 Travel left full lever & idling

8 Secondary pressure of Measure the pump P1, P2 pump proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly (Ports a3, a4)

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of followings in travel right (left), forward (reverse) full lever and high idling operation Travel right (P1 pump): 2.7MPa or more Travel left (P2 pump): 2.7MPa or more

9 Exchange P1 for P2

Exchange delivery pipe Check the direction of deviation of P1 for P2

If the direction is changed, inspect a pump. If the direction is not changed, inspect a valve and travel unit.

10 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage Check sealing ability of shuttle valve and entry of dust in orifice

11 Travel straight spool <Trouble> P1 pressure is high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

12 Travel spool Visual check of targeted When removing, free from abnormal <Trouble> spool resistance against sliding Pump pressure is high. Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

13 Travel motor relief valve Check set pressure

If P1 is low, right travel motorÅfs relief valve is failed. If P2 is low, left travel motorÅfs relief valve is failed. Replace as necessary

Check P1 and P2 pump pressures are 32MPa or more in right and left travel levers full lever (relief operation at locked crawler belt) and high idling

47-21


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

14 Travel motor

Contents/normal value Visual check

Corrective action, others

Inner parts (piston, cylinder block, valve plate, brake valve spool) are to be free from abnormal resistance against sliding. Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface (brake plate etc)

Replace

15 Travel reduction gear oil Take sample oil from travel reduction gear drain

Sampling oil does not include a lot of metal powder.

Disassemble and inspect reduction gear

16 Travel reduction

Visual check

Tooth surface is not worn abnormally and is not chipped.

Replace

17 Pump regulator

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring free from breakage, damage, etc.

Replace

18 Pump

Visual check

When removing, inside parts (cylinder Replace block, piston, valve plate, shaft, etc.) are free from abnormal resistance against sliding, abnormal damage, etc.

(17)Travel 1/2 speed cannot be switched (In case of the traveling under heavy loading (for example traveling on a slope or traveling on a soft ground), the speed may sometimes does not change from 1st to 2nd because this machine equips the function of automatic speed change.) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Travel 1/2 speed switching solenoid

Carry out service diagnosis

Switch travel 1/2 speed to 2nd speed No.3 F-3 1/2-TRAVEL Lever neutral COMP OFF, MEAS OFF Travel operation COMP ON, MEAS ON

Check pressure sensor Check harness Check travel 1/2 speed switch on gauge cluster

2 Travel 1/2 speed switching solenoid

Measure A3 port pressure on solenoid valve

Lever neutral: 0MPa In operation: 4MPa or more

Replace solenoid valve

3 1/2 speed switching spool in travel motor

Visual check

Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace damage and spring is free from (Check on the casing side for breakage damage)

4 1/2 speed switching orifice in travel motor

Visual check

Free from entry of dust

Remove dust or replace

5 Tilting piston in travel motor

Visual check

Free from abnormal wear on piston and seal

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

(18)Machine does not stay on a slope in traveling No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Pilot pressure sensor

Carry out service diagnosis

•Engine stop & starter key switch is ON Check pressure sensor and Targeted pilot low pressure sensor is replace as necessary in range of 0 to 0.1MPa Check remote control valve

2 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check that spool is free from abnormal Replace control valve damage and spring is free from breakage

47-22


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

3 Parking brake in travel motor

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Spring free from breakage, damage, etc.

Replace

4 Orifice of passage for parking brake in travel motor

Visual check

Free from entry of dust

Remove dust or replace

(19)Machine does not travel straight in simultaneous operation of traveling and attachment No.

Sections

1 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve

Contents/normal value Carry out service diagnosis

Corrective action, others

No.8 D-3 S-TRAVEL is should be COMP 590mA and MEAS 560 to 620mA in both travel full lever and in boom up full lever at high idling

•Check voltage of low pressure sensor other than travel sensor

2 Secondary pressure of Measure directly the travel straight proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure

Check secondary pressure is within range of 1.8 to 2.2MPa in both travel full lever and in boom up full lever at high idling

Replace proportional valve

3 Travel straight spool

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

Visual check

•In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

(20)Breaker works slowly and power is poor (In case of conflux, check p1 unload/pump and travel straight) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value •See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.16 P2 side OPT full lever and relief

Corrective action, others

1 Pressure sensor for optional attachment

Carry out service diagnosis

2 Remote control valve

Measure directly remote Check that pressure is 2.1MPa or more Check remote control valve0 control pressure of in optional attachment full lever and travel right and left high idling operation

3 Actual measuring current value of P1/P2 unload proportional valve

Carry out service diagnosis

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.16 P2 side OPT full lever and relief

Check and replace pressure senso Check remote control valve

•In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

4 Secondary pressure of Measure the P1, P2 unload proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure directly at the ports A7 and A5 of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that P1/P2 unload secondary Replace proportional valve pressures are within the range of 0.5 to 1.2MPa

5 Actual measuring current value of travel straight proportional valve

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.16 P2 side OPT full lever & relief

Carry out service diagnosis

•Check voltage of low pressure sensor other than sensor for optional attachment •In case where the reading is largely differed from the actually measured value, check proportional valve and controller for possible failure.

47-23


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

6 Secondary pressure of Measure directly the travel straight proportional valve proportional valve secondary pressure at the ports A6 (travel straight) of 8 sections solenoid block

Check that travel straight secondary Replace proportional valve pressure is 2.7MPa or more in optional attachment full lever and high idling operation

7 P1 by-pass cut valve Visual check <Trouble> Only P1 pressure is low.

No problem for sliding ability of main Clean or replace poppet and no contamination on orifice No problem for sliding ability of internal piston (Check it through PBp2 port.)

8 Relief pressure

Check set pressure

•See Service Diagnosis Data List Operation No.16 P2 side OPT full lever and relief (Set value of factory shipment is 24.5MPa.)

9 Remote control valve

Check targeted remote Check sealing ability of shuttle valve control valve and entry of dust in orifice.

Replace

10 Travel straight spool <Trouble> P1 pressure is high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

11 Spool for optional attachment <Trouble> P1, P2 pressures are high.

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

12 Over load relief valve

Check targeted spool visually

Free from dust entered in over load relief valve Seat is free from abnormality.

Replace

Reset or replace

(21)Selector valve for option malfunctions: Breaker circuit is not obtained. (Indication of failure is displayed. For reference, see "Table47-1 Action of optional selector solenoid valve") No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 N&B selector spool

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)

2 N&B selector solenoid

Screw for emergency

Check that the error indication is disappeared by turning emergency screw

Replace solenoid valve

3 N&B selector solenoid

Carry out service diagnosis

•No.11 F-4 Option selector is B mode Check solenoid valve COMP ON, MEAS ON Check harness Spool position BRK Selector switch BRK

4 N&B selector pressure sensor

Carry out service diagnosis

•No.16 B-11 Data List 3.0MPa at B mode and 0.0MPa at A mode

47-24

Check pressure sensor Check harness


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) (22)Selector valve for option malfunctions: Nibbler circuit is not obtained. (Indication of failure is displayed. For reference, see "Table47-1 Action of optional selector solenoid valve") No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 N&B selector spool

Visual check

When removing, free from abnormal resistance against sliding Free from abnormal damage, etc on outside surface Spring is free from breakage.

2 N&B selector solenoid

Carry out service diagnosis

•No.11 F-4 Option selector is A mode Check solenoid valve COMP OFF, MEAS OFF Check harness Spool position NIB Selector switch NIB

47-25

Replace (Check on the casing side for damage)


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) Table47-1 Action of optional selector solenoid valve

No.

1 2

Safety lock Safety lock Engine lever SW's lever relay's condition input output Running

ON

OFF

Work mode

Optional selector valve COMP. MEAS.

A

OFF

Selector valve Spool detecting position pressure sensor

Warning display

Failure diagnosis display

Nibbler

Normal —

— [F042] displayed simultaneously

Running

ON

OFF

A

ON

Breaker

"SELECTOR VALVE Normal FAILURE"

Running

ON

OFF

A

OFF

Breaker

Normal

4

Running

ON

OFF

A

ON

Nibbler

Normal —

[F042] displayed

5

Running

ON

OFF

B

ON

Breaker

Normal —

Running

ON

OFF

B

OFF

Nibbler

Normal

"SELECTOR VALVE FAILURE"

[F043] displayed simultaneously

Running

ON

OFF

B

ON

N&B

Normal

"SELECTOR VALVE FAILURE"

Running

ON

OFF

B

OFF

Breaker

Running

ON

OFF

Failure

3

6 7 8 9

10 Stopping

"SELECTOR VALVE FAILURE"

Normal —

[F043] displayed

"SELECTOR VALVE FAILURE"

[B113] displayed

11

OFF

12

ON

47-26


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE)

47.2

ELECTRIC SYSTEMS

47.2.1

WIRING CHECKING PROCEDURE

Check for continuity between connector terminals, presence or absences of short-circuit with other wires, and presence or absences of short-circuit with machine body grounding.

CONNECTOR

WIRE

(1) Checking for disconnection between connectors. (When both ends measurement is easy because of short distance between connectors,) Measure the resistance using tester. Pull out opposite connector first. When the resistance is zero (0), it is in normal condition.

TESTER

(When both ends measurement is difficult because of long distance between connectors,) Measure the resistance using tester. Pull out opposite connector first. Where the resistance is zero (0), if the terminal on one side is connected to frame body grounding with jumper wire, it is in normal condition.

JUMPER WIRE TESTER FRAME BODY GROUNDING

The resistance is 1M or more when the terminal on one side is not connected to frame body grounding with jumper wire, it is in normal condition. (2) Checking for presence or absence of short-circuit with machine body Measure the resistance using tester. Pull out opposite connector first. When the resistance is 1M condition.

or more, it is in normal TESTER

(3) Checking for presence or absence of short-circuit between wirings. Measure the resistance using tester. Pull out opposite connector first. When the resistance is 1M condition.

or more, it is in normal TESTER

47-27

FRAME BODY GROUNDING


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) (4) Checking connector terminal for contact Insert male terminal into female terminal unit, and then check that the inserting force is equivalent to other female terminals. If looseness is there, replace the female terminal with new one. Clean the dirt terminal.

INSERT

MALE TERMINAL

FEMALE TERMINAL

Do not insert the male terminal the thickness differs. It may cause loose connection. (5) Caution which should be paid in measuring voltage When measuring the power supply to electric equipment at connector position with the grounding terminal contained inside of connector, measure the voltage between grounding inside of connector and power terminal. When measuring the voltage between frame body grounding and power source, the disconnection of wiring to grounding inside of connector cannot be identified. Since the voltage may vary between with connector connected and with connector not connected. Measure the voltage with each connector connected whenever possible. (6) Checking the general view of connector

CRIMPED PART

a. Check the terminal crimped condition. Pull one electric cable with the about 3kg force, and make sure that the cable does not come out of the terminal. When came out, replace the terminal and crimp it again. b. Check connector for imperfect insertion Check that all top ends form a line on the same position as seen from the connector engaged side. When moved along, push it in further through wire inserting hole. c. Check connector for intruding of water. Pull out the connector and check that the inside is free from intruding of water. When water intruding is found, check rubber plug for damage and also that the sealing is fitted properly.

47-28

RUBBER PLUG RECEPTACLE. CONTACT PLUG SEALING (is housed in plug) DOUBLE LOCK PLATE FOR PLUG DOUBLE LOCK PLATE FOR CAP CAP TAB.CONTACT RUBBER PLUG


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) (7) When abnormality occurs at intervals When the abnormality situation can not be reoccurred during checking operation, try the following operations. a. Check that variable of display exists or not on the service diagnosis screen while shaking the harness or giving shock by operating the machine. b. Check that variables of resistance and voltage exist or not using tester while shaking the harness. c. Turn starter switch on and apply electricity continuously, and check it again after the temperature of wiring and equipment was raised. (8) Checking on body grounding Check attaching bolts of grounding terminal for loosening. And also check that there is no loose connection due to corrosion. There are multiple groundings like centralized grounding box shown in the figure and battery grounding, engine grounding, horn grounding fixed together with horn, body grounding placed on attaching section of boom working light.

47-29

Block of grounding is located under floor plate of cab.


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) 47.2.2

TROUBLE

(1) Engine does not stop. (2) "CPU DATA COMMUNICATION ERROR" is displayed on multi display. (3) Auto accel does not actuate. (The engine speed does not automatically slow down.) (4) Auto accel does not actuate. (The engine speed does not automatically speed up.) (5) Wiper does not function.

47-30


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) (1) Engine does not stop. No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Starter key switch

Check signal of starter key switch ON by carrying out service diagnosis.

2 Engine forcible stop relay

When ON is displayed No.4 K-3 Key switch Check on engine forcible stop with the starter switch OFF at starter key switch OFF position relay OFF, then pull out R-25 ON at starter key switch ON position engine forcible stop relay and carry out the service diagnosis.

3 Wiring

Voltage between line 0V when starter switch is OFF No.62 among starter switch, engine forcible stop relay, mechatro controller and the body grounding

No.4 K-3 Key switch Check continuity between OFF at starter key switch OFF position terminals of starter switch using ON at starter key switch ON position tester

Check harness Check diode D-9 between starter switch and auto idling stop relay 1

(2) "CPU DATA COMMUNICATION ERROR" is displayed on multi display. No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Fuse

No.1 fuse (5A)

Not blown fuse

Check harness Replace fuse

2 Mechatro controller

Accel control

Engine speed varies according to Check mechatro controller and accel potentiometer operation. replace as necessary (Use remote control because the auto accel function is working.)

3 Wiring

Transmission circuit line See "WIRING CHECKING No.770 from mechatro PROCEDURE" controller to gauge cluster

Repair wiring

4 Gauge cluster

Gauge cluster

Replace gauge cluster

(3) Auto accel does not actuate. (The engine speed does not automatically slow down). No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Engine coolant temperature

Check engine coolant No.2 G-5 WATER TEMP temperature by carrying Auto accel does not work in the out service diagnosis. temperature -15°C or less. Warm up and raise the coolant temperature to – 15°C or more

Replace engine coolant sensor

2 Gauge cluster

Indication of auto accel Mark "Display/not display" for auto accel switches by auto accel switch operation on gauge cluster.

Replace gauge cluster

3 Low pressure sensor

Service diagnosis

Check low pressure sensor

Each control pressure of No.5 and No.6 is in the range of 0~0.1MPa at control lever neutral position.

(4) Auto accel does not actuate. (The engine speed does not automatically speed up.) No.

Sections

1 Low pressure sensor

Contents/normal value Service diagnosis

Each control pressure of No.5 and No.6 is raised with control lever operated.

47-31

Corrective action, others Check low pressure sensor


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE) (5) Wiper does not function

Wiping range of forward and reverse movements

Wiper motor Rise up limit switch's ON range Reverse limit switch's ON range

Rise up (storing) position Upper reversing position Lower reversing position No.

Sections

Contents/normal value

Corrective action, others

1 Fuse

Check fuse No.20

Replace fuse

2 SW-19: Wiper interlock switch

Service diagnosis No.19 D125 Check wiper interlock switch Wiper switch display (D125) is OFF with front window closed. and repair it if necessary Check according to "WIRING CHECKING PROCEDURE" and repair it if necessary

3 Rise up limit switch built- Service diagnosis No.25 Wiper system in wiper motor Reverse limit switch Switch action in operation

Check according to "WIRING CHECKING PROCEDURE"

Normal condition

4 R-31: Arc prevention relay R-29: Forward rotation relay R-30: Reverse rotation relay

Rise up limit switch

ON

OFF

OFF

Reverse limit switch

ON

ON

OFF

Service diagnosis No.25 Wiper system When started by forward rotation:

STOP

START

Arc prevention relay

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

(STOP)

ON

ON

ON

OFF

Forward rotation relay

OFF

ON

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

Reverse rotation relay

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

Check that the relay is worked as shown in the table. * When the limit switch does not change in OFF after 4 seconds from the wiper startup, turn OFF all relay's outputs.

47-32

(STOP)

(REVERSE)

Check that the relay is excited. Check relay & fuse box and replace it if necessary.

(FORWARD)

ON


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE)

ENGINE RELATED TROUBLESHOOTING Checking Liquid

Faulty starting

Faulty engine starting/engine does not rotate.

Poor output Insufficient rotation

Poor start ability (Take a long time)

Engine poor run-up (Low follow-up ability)

Faulty engine starting/engine rotates but no exhaust gas (No fuel injection) Faulty engine starting/exhaust gas is emitted but engine does not start (With fuel injection) Rotation in bad condition (hunting) Engine stalled during operation. Output is lowered. Overheating Exhaust smoke is black Exhaust smoke is white

Other failures

Larger oil consumption (or blue exhaust gas) Early contamination of oil Larger fuel consumption Intruding of oil in coolant, back flow, reduction of coolant quantity Hydraulic pressure down (Monitor lights up) Oil quantity increased. (Intruding of water and fuel) Vibration

47-33

Muffler clogged

Poor or deteriorated battery

Contamination of water and fuel with oil

Oil level of oil pan

Coolant level

Improper fuel in use

Breather hose crushed or clogged

Fan belt slipped, fan pulley worn

Oil filter clogged

Fuel filter clogged

Trouble

Air cleaner clogged

Shortage of fuel level

Factors

Air leak between turbocharger and intake manifold

Leak, clogging

Engine oil leak

Filters

Leak, clogging of fuel system and intruding of air

47.3


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE)

Electric equipment

Faulty starting

Faulty engine starting/engine does not rotate.

Poor output Insufficient rotation

Poor start ability (Take a long time)

Engine poor run-up (Low follow-up ability)

Faulty engine starting/engine rotates but no exhaust gas (No fuel injection) Faulty engine starting/exhaust gas is emitted but engine does not start (With fuel injection) Rotation in bad condition (hunting) Engine stalled during operation. Output is lowered. Overheating Exhaust smoke is black Exhaust smoke is white

Other failures

Larger oil consumption (or blue exhaust gas) Early contamination of oil Larger fuel consumption Intruding of oil in coolant, back flow, reduction of coolant quantity Hydraulic pressure down (Monitor lights up) Oil quantity increased. (Intruding of water and fuel) Vibration

47-34

Hydraulic switch

Safety relay

Starter motor

Glow relay

Engine side

Alternator

Battery relay

Loose connection of battery cable terminal

Starter switch key

Startup circuit wiring

Failure of hydraulic system

Peeling of space insulation around radiator

Radiator core clogged/fin clogged and crushed

Trouble

Failure of radiator pressure cap

Loose mounting bolts, damage of mounting rubber

Factors

Shovel side

Glow plug

Checking Shovel side


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE)

Intake and

Fuel system exhaust system

Lubrication Cooling system system

Faulty starting

Faulty engine starting/engine does not rotate.

Poor output Insufficient rotation

Poor start ability (Take a long time)

Engine poor run-up (Low follow-up ability)

Faulty engine starting/engine rotates but no exhaust gas (No fuel injection) Faulty engine starting/exhaust gas is emitted but engine does not start (With fuel injection) Rotation in bad condition (hunting) Engine stalled during operation. Output is lowered. Overheating Exhaust smoke is black Exhaust smoke is white

Other failures

Larger oil consumption (or blue exhaust gas) Early contamination of oil Larger fuel consumption Intruding of oil in coolant, back flow, reduction of coolant quantity Hydraulic pressure down (Monitor lights up) Oil quantity increased. (Intruding of water and fuel) Vibration

47-35

Failure of thermostat (Not open)

Damage of water pump

Leak and crush of hydraulic piping

Failure of regulator valve

Failure of relief valve

Failure of oil pump

Damage of EGR cooler

Seizing and interference of turbocharger

Seal of turbocharger worn, damaged

Turbocharger oil drain tube clogged

Fuel leak into the head cover

Improper fuel injection time

Trouble

Failure of supply pump

Failure of injector

Factors


47. TROUBLESHOOTING (BY TROUBLE)

Faulty starting

Faulty engine starting/engine does not rotate.

Poor output Insufficient rotation

Poor start ability (Take a long time)

Engine poor run-up (Low follow-up ability)

Faulty engine starting/engine rotates but no exhaust gas (No fuel injection) Faulty engine starting/exhaust gas is emitted but engine does not start (With fuel injection) Rotation in bad condition (hunting) Engine stalled during operation. Output is lowered. Overheating Exhaust smoke is black Exhaust smoke is white

Other failures

Larger oil consumption (or blue exhaust gas) Early contamination of oil Larger fuel consumption Intruding of oil in coolant, back flow, reduction of coolant quantity Hydraulic pressure down (Monitor lights up) Oil quantity increased. (Intruding of water and fuel) Vibration

47-36

Damage of flywheel gear

Damage of dumper

Wear and damage of rear oil seal and seal surface

Hole due to cavitation

Wear of piston ring and liner, ring stick

Damage and seizing of piston and connecting rod

Wear and failure of valve and valve guide

Damage of cylinder head and head gasket

Strainer clogged, damage of oil pipe

Damage of engine oil cooler core and O-ring

Trouble

Failure of injection holder sleeve

Engine body

Factors


48. TROUBLESHOOTING (TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE) TABLE OF CONTENTS 48.1 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE .......................................................................................48-3

48

Book Code No. S5YN4818E01 48-1


48. TROUBLESHOOTING (TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE) Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

July, 2006

SK330–8 : LC10-07001~ SK350LC–8 : YC10-03501~

n

August, 2006

SK200–8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC–8 : YQ11-06001~

n

K

n

October, 2006

SK250-8 : LQ12-06001~ SK260LC-8 : LL12-05001~

n

K

n

February, 2007

E235BSR : YF05-02001~ E235BSR(N)LC : YU05-02001~

n

March, 2007

n

April, 2007

n

n

SK200-8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC-8 : YQ11-06001~

n

May, 2007

SK250-8: LQ12-06001~ SK260LC–8 : LL12-05001~

n

June, 2007

E225BSR : YB05-03001~ E225BSRLC : LA05-02001~

n

n

SK215SRLC : LA05-02001~

n

July, 2007

E135BSR : YY05-12001~ E135BSRLC : YH05-07001~

n

n

SK225SR : YB05-03001~ SK225SRLC : LA05-02001~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

E265B : LQ12-06001~ E265BLC : LL12-05001~

n

n

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

n

August, 2007

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~ SK235SR-2 : YF05-02001~ SK235SRLC-2 : YU05-02001~

n E385B : LC10-07001~ E385BLC : YC10-03501~

48-2

Remarks S5YN4818E01 (ASIA, OCE)

n (NHK) n (NHK Russia) n (OCE) n ASIA (HS Engine) n ASIA (HS Engine) n (NHK) n (North America) n (NHK) n (OCE) n (NHK Middle East) n (NHK Russia) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n

K

K K K K K K K K K K K K K

(NHK Middle East) HS Engine

n (NHK Middle East)

K


48. TROUBLESHOOTING (TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE)

48.1

TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE

The trouble diagnosis mode is used to automatically specify the failed sections for the troubles which can not be detected by auto diagnosis function (the trouble can be specified by error code) like disconnection, abnormal output. (1) Function There are two types of trouble diagnosis mode. 1) Trouble diagnosis mode 1: Used to diagnose unload system, pump system, travel straight system and engine system. 2) Trouble diagnosis mode 2: Used to diagnose pilot system. In any mode, with the attachment not operated, both selector valve and proportional valve are automatically actuated, the sensor detects the machine condition and the mechatro controller identifies the normal condition or failed condition of the system. (2) How to use and flow chart The operation is performed through gauge cluster. No.1 Select service adjustment select screen. (Switch starter key on while pressing buzzer stop switch and press select switch three times while pressing buzzer stop switch on the service diagnosis screen No.1.) No.2 Select Trouble diagnosis mode (Move the cursor to the desired position with screen change switch "

", and press the select switch.)

No.3 Select either "DIAG MODE 1" or "DIAG MODE 2" (Move the cursor to the desired position with screen change switch "

", and press the select switch.)

No.4 Go ahead the operation according to the instructions on the screen of cluster gauge. No.1

No.2

LANGUAGE/LOGO

No.3

8 FAULT DIAG MODE

ADJUSTING MODE 1 PRESET BY FACTORY

SELECT SWITCH

DIAG MODE 1 DIAG MODE 2

BUZZER STOP SWITCH

FEED

SCREEN CHANGE SWITCH

CASE OF DIAG MODE 1 SENSOR CHECK

CHECK

START ENG

ENGINE SPEED 0000 rpm PRESSURE C-1 00.0M PROPO-VALVE E-1 005mA D-1 300mA

C-2 00.0M

LOWER BOOM

DIAG MODE 1

RELEASE LOCK LEVER

TO GROUND

About 15 minutes

E-2 005mA D-2 300mA

Turn engine on manually.

BACK TO No.3

RESULT OF DIAGNOSIS

When not failed,

DIAG MODE 1

END

In diagnosis operation

START

ENGINE STOP

RESULT OF DETAIL

DIAG MODE 1

1 P1 UNLOAD

OK

O K DATA END

Engine stops automatically.

FEED

DIAG MODE 1 RESULT 1 P1 UN-LOAD PSV NG P1 UN-LOAD SPOOL NG

DATA END

BACK TO No.3

Notes:

FEED

The data at the time of judgment can be confirmed with the select switch.

ENGINE SPEED 0000 rpm PRESSURE C-1 00.0M PROPO-VALVE E-1 005mA D-1 300mA

C-2 00.0M E-2 005mA D-2 300mA

The other judgments can be confirmed with the feed button.

RESULT OF DIAGNOSIS

When failed,

For the diagnosing items, see Table 48-1. When required to stop in diagnosis operation, press the buzzer stop switch and the operation is forcedly stopped.

1 P1 UNLOAD

NG DATA END

FEED

ENGINE SPEED 0000 rpm PRESSURE C-1 00.0M PROPO-VALVE E-1 005mA D-1 300mA

C-2 00.0M E-2 005mA D-2 300mA

The suspected trouble sections are displayed in order of possibility. The suspected three sections in maximum are displayed. When desired to see other suspected trouble sections, press feed " " button. For diagnosis results and corrective actions to be taken, see Table 48-2.

1. When the trouble diagnosis mode is operating, lower the attachment and put the bucket on the ground. If the machine failed; the unexpected touch to the lever may move the attachment and it causes injury or death.Because the bucket-grounded/bucket-not-grounded can not be automatically identified, do not fail to start operating the trouble diagnosis mode after making sure of the bucket-grounded condition. 2. Before executing the trouble diagnosis mode, check each pressure sensor proportional valve and select valve for possible abnormality. Check that the commands of proportional valve and select valve do not largely differ from the actually measured values through the service diagnosis. The preliminary investigation of electric system makes the time saving and high precision diagnosis possible. 3. For the diagnosis results and the corrective actions to be taken, usually occurred troubles are taken as an example. When multiple troubles are occurred at the same time, there is a case no accordance of diagnosis obtained. In this case, contact our dealer/distributor. 4. When the trouble diagnosis mode is executing, the error display with self-diagnosis and warning does not appear. If necessary, examine the presence or absence of trouble referring to the trouble history.

48-3


48. TROUBLESHOOTING (TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE) No.4 CASE OF DIAG MODE 2 SENSOR CHECK

CHECK

START ENG

ENGINE SPEED 0000 rpm PRESSURE C-1 00.0M PROPO-VALVE E-1 005mA D-1 300mA

C-2 00.0M

DIAG MODE 2

LOWER BOOM

START

TO GROUND

E-2 005mA D-2 300mA

Turn engine on manually.

AT CONTROL LEVER IS NEUTRAL

Example: Case of boom up WHEN FINISHING OF DIAGNOSIS IS REQUIRED.

BOOM UP

BOOM UP

OK SEARCHABLE OPERATION Boom up Boom down Bucket digging Bucket dump Arm in Arm out Swing Travel right Travel left P1 side option P1 side option

PRESSURE 0.0

MPa

PRESSURE 1.5

MPa

PRESSURE 3.0

BACK TO No.3 MPa

In the normal condition, OK is displayed when the control lever is moved to stroke end.

Notes:

1. When the trouble diagnosis mode is operating, lower the attachment and put the bucket on the ground. If the machine failed; the unexpected touch to the lever may move the attachment and it causes injury or death. Because the bucket-grounded/bucket-not-grounded can not be automatically identified, do not fail to start operating the trouble diagnosis mode after making sure of the bucket-grounded condition. Place the bucket on the ground between both crawlers. 2. In the case of "DIAG MODE2", pump pressure is unloaded with unload valve in order not to actuate attachment. When trouble diagnosis is performed, if the pump pressure is generated, the engine stops and "UN-LOAD PSV NG" is displayed. Check the troubled section according to indication. 3. When the trouble diagnosis mode is executing, the error display with self-diagnosis and warning does not appear. If necessary, examine the presence or absence of trouble referring to the trouble history.

Table48-1 Failure diagnosis Mode-1/Diagnosis item No.

Display

Contents of diagnosis

1

1 P1 UNLOAD

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the flow rate at P1 side is minimum and the unloading valve is in the emergency position?

2

2 P1 UNLOAD

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the minimum flow rate is relieved at P1 side?

3

3 P1 UNLOAD

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the unload valve is fully opened, and P1 side flow rate is minimum?

4

1 P2 UNLOAD

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the unload valve is in emergency position, and P2 side flow rate is minimum?

5

2 P2 UNLOAD

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the minimum flow rate is relieved at P2 side?

6

3 P2 UNLOAD

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the unload valve is fully opened, and P2 side flow rate is minimum?

7

1 P1 PUMP

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the flow rate at P1 side is emergency and the unloading valve is in the emergency position?

8

2 P1 PUMP

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the unload valve is emergency, and P1 side flow rate is minimum?

9

3 P1 PUMP

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the unload valve is in emergency position, and P1 side flow rate is maximum?

10 1 P2 PUMP

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the flow rate at P2 side is emergency and the unloading valve is in the emergency position?

11 2 P2 PUMP

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the unload valve is emergency, and P2 side flow rate is minimum?

12 3 P2 PUMP

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that the unload valve is in emergency position, and P2 side flow rate is maximum?

48-4


48. TROUBLESHOOTING (TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE) Table48-1 Failure diagnosis Mode-1/Diagnosis item No.

Display

Contents of diagnosis

13 1 TRAVEL-S

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that P1 side flow rate is minimum, unload valve is emergency position and travel straight is stroked fully?

14 2 TRAVEL-S

Is normal pressure generated in the condition that P2 side flow rate is minimum, unload valve is emergency position and travel straight is stroked fully?

15 1 P1 ENGINE

Is rated engine speed obtained in the condition that P1 side flow rate increases little by little when P1 side flow rate is relieved?

16 2 P2 ENGINE

Is rated engine speed obtained in the condition that P2 side flow rate increases little by little when P2 side flow rate is relieved?

When pump regulator does not have "Total power control of Emergency mode", "1 P1 PUMP" of No.7 and "1 P2 PUMP" of No.10 are not given a diagnosis.

Table48-2 Failure diagnosis Mode-1/Diagnosis and Remedy Diagnosis (Display) SENSOR CHECK NG

P1 UN-LOAD PSV NG

P1 UN-LOAD SPOOL NG

P2 UN-LOAD PSV NG

P2 UN-LOAD SPOOL NG P1 B-P CUT NG P2 B-P CUT NG

P1 PUMP PSV NG

P1 PUMP NG

P2 PUMP PSV NG

Possible cause Disconnection of pressure sensor, Short circuit, Abnormal output

Remedy Check each pressure sensor by service diagnosis and replace it if necessary

Secondary pressure is excessive high against the command Check P1 unload proportional valve Secondary pressure is excessive low against and replace it if necessary the command Stuck at full-stroke side

Check P1 unload spool and replace it if necessary

Stuck at neutral side

Secondary pressure is excessive high against the command Check P2 unload proportional valve Secondary pressure is excessive low against and replace it if necessary the command Stuck at full-stroke side

Check P2 unload spool and replace it if necessary

Stuck at neutral side Stuck at closing side

Check P1 by-pass cut valve and replace it if necessary

Stuck at neutral side Stuck at closing side

Check P2 by-pass cut valve and replace it if necessary

Stuck at neutral side

Secondary pressure is excessive high against the command Check P1 pump proportional valve Secondary pressure is excessive low against and replace it if necessary the command Delivery rate is excessive large against the command Delivery rate is excessive small against the command

Check P1 pump regulator and replace it if necessary. Check P1 pump and replace it if necessary.

Secondary pressure is excessive high against the command Check P2 pump proportional valve Secondary pressure is excessive low against and replace it if necessary the command

48-5


48. TROUBLESHOOTING (TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS MODE) Table48-2 Failure diagnosis Mode-1/Diagnosis and Remedy Diagnosis (Display)

P2 PUMP NG

S-TRAVEL PSV NG

S-TRAVEL SPOOL NG

Possible cause Delivery rate is excessive large against the command Delivery rate is excessive small against the command

Remedy Check P2 pump regulator and replace it if necessary. Check P2 pump and replace it if necessary.

Secondary pressure is excessive high against the command Check travel straight proportional Secondary pressure is excessive low against valve and replace it if necessary the command Stuck at full-stroke side

Check travel straight spool and replace it if necessary

Stuck at neutral side

PUMP 1 PRESS. SENSOR Pressure is recognized lower than it is NG

Check P1 high pressure sensor and replace it if necessary

PUMP 2 PRESS. SENSOR Pressure is recognized lower than it is NG

Check P2 high pressure sensor and replace it if necessary

MAIN RELIEF NG ENGINE NG E/G R SENSOR NG

Set pressure decreases

Check main relief valve and replace it if necessary

Set pressure increases Output is lowered

Check engine and replace it if necessary

Characteristics is misaligned

Check engine speed sensor and replace it if necessary

48-6


51. ENGINE PREFACE This service manual explains the single engine. Note that this manual is edited without modification by based on the service manual of HINO MOTOR.

51

Book Code No. S5YN5123E01 51-1


51. ENGINE Issue

Date of Issue

Applicable Machines

First edition

April, 2007

SK200–8 : YN11-45001~ SK210LC–8 : YQ11-06001~

n

July, 2007

E215B : YN11-45001~ E215BLC : YQ11-06001~

n

n

n

51-2

Remarks S5YN5123E01 ASIA (HS Engine) n (NHK Russia) HS Engine n (NHK Middle East) HS Engine

K K K


HINO DIESEL ENGINE WORKSHOP MANUAL J05E-TG

(HS Engine) KSS-SMJ5-E011E 2007.4



GENERAL

1

STANDARD VALUE

2

PARTS TO BE PREPARED

3

ENGINE ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY

4

FUEL SYSTEM

5

EMISSION CONTROL

6

ELECTRICAL

7

INTAKE

8

ENGINE MECHANICAL

9

EXHAUST

10

COOLING

11

LUBRICATION

12

STARTING AND CHARGING

13

TURBOCHARGER

14

AIR COMPRESSOR

15

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS

16

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

17

For your information: This documentation does not contain any descriptions in regard to the hatched part

"6. Emission Control". "15. Air Compressors".



GENERAL

1–1

ENGINE

1 GENERAL General information

Warning................................................................... 1-2 How to read this manual ........................................ 1-3 Precautions for work ............................................... 1-7 Tightening of engine bolts and nuts ...................... 1-10 Tightening of chassis bolts and nuts..................... 1-12 Tightening of flare nuts and hoses........................ 1-14 Taper thread sealant for piping ............................. 1-15 Assembly of joints and gaskets for piping ............. 1-16 Handling of liquid gasket....................................... 1-18 Failure diagnosis table for each problem .............. 1-19 Failure diagnosis using HinoDX ............................ 1-20 Connection method of HinoDX ............................. 1-23 Chassis number and engine number ................... 1-23

1


1–2

GENERAL

Warning JP31199010102001

Observe the following precautions to work safely and to prevent damage to customers' vehicles. This manual is prepared for qualified service engineers who are recognized as technical expert. Those who are not qualified, who are not appropriately trained, who performs service without appropriate tool or equipment, or who perform service with the way not specified in this manual may not only damage the vehicle, but also put service engineers and surrounding people in danger. • Appropriate service and repair are essential to ensure safety of service engineers and safety and reliability of vehicles. Be sure to use Hino genuine parts for replacement of parts. Do not use deteriorated parts in quality. • Items described in this manual are the procedures to be observed in service and repair. For service and repair according to this procedure, be sure to use the special tools designed for each purpose. • If a method or a tool not recommended is used, safety of service engineers, and safety and reliability of vehicles may be impaired. Never use a method or tool not recommended. • This manual shows “Warning” and “Caution” for items that need to be observed so that accidents may not occur during service or repair, or that damage to vehicle due to improper method may not impair safety and reliability of vehicles. These instructions cannot give warning for all possible hazards. Note that items with “Warning” or “Caution” are not absolute for safety.


1–3

GENERAL

How to read this manual JP31199010102002

1.

Scope of repair work (1)

Repair work is classified into three large categories of "Diagnosis", "Mounting/removal, replacement, assembly disassembly and inspection adjustment" and "Final inspection".

(2)

This manual describes "Diagnosis" in the first process and "Mounting/removal, replacement, assembly disassembly and inspection adjustment" in the second process. Explanation of "Final inspection" in the third process is omitted here.

(3)

2.

a.

Jacking and lifting

b.

Cleaning and washing of removed parts as required

c.

Visual inspection

Standard value (1)

3.

Although the following work is not described in this manual, it should be performed in actual work.

Standard value, limit, action and tightening torque described in the text are summarized in tables.

Items to be prepared (1)

Items to be prepared before work are SST, tools, gauges and lubricant, etc. These are listed in the list section of items to be prepared. Items such as general tools, jack, rigid rack, etc. that are usually equipped in general service shop are omitted.

4.

How to read sections and titles (1)

Sections are classified according to J2008, SAE standard.

(2)

For areas that show system names like "Engine control system", "Inspection", "Adjustment", "Replacement", "Overhaul", etc. of components are described.

(3)

For areas that show part names like "Injection pump", "Mounting/removal and disassembly" is described.

(4)

Illustrations of the parts catalog are shown for part layout. (Part codes in the parts catalog are described in the illustration. Major names and tightening torque are listed in the table.)

! CAUTION

The part layouts in this manual are inserted based on illustrations and part numbers of the parts catalog CD-ROM issued in march, 2007. (Some areas do not show exploded view. They will be additionally issued when the parts catalog CD is revised.) Be sure to use the parts catalog for confirmation of illustrations and part numbers and for ordering parts.


1–4 5.

GENERAL How to read troubleshooting (1)

Failure diagnosis in this manual describes Step 2 and Step 3 below :

(1) Question

"Step 1"

Hear from customers for conditions and environments of failures and check the fact. Perform diagnosis inspection, status inspection,

(2) Pre-inspection (3) Reproduction method

"Step 2"

function inspection and basic inspection. Check the failure status. If it is difficult to reproduce the problem with status inspection, use the reproduction method. Summarize inspection results obtained from Step 2.

(4) Troubleshooting for each diagnosis code (5) Troubleshooting for each failure

"Step 3"

Perform inspection systematically according to troubleshooting procedures for each diagnosis code or failure status.

status

Check if failure occurs again after repair. If it is difficult (6) Confirmation test

"Step 4" to reproduce a failure, perform the confirmation test under the conditions and environment of the failure.

(2)

Pre-inspection • Pre-inspection is performed in the following steps : Diagnosis inspectionoDiagnosis deletionoFailure status check (Use the reproduction method if not reproduced.)oDiagnosis reconfirmation • Estimate the failure system before the reproduction test. Attach a tester and evaluate estimated failure together with failure status. Refer to the troubleshooting chart for

Preinspection

estimated cause of a failure. • An error code is displayed if a failure occurs instantaneously. If any specific failure is not found, perform troubleshooting using the reproduction method. • Failure status check If failure is reproduced, perform Step 2 o Step 3 o Step 4. If failure is not reproduced, use the reproduction method (simulation of external conditions or check of each wire harness and connector, etc.)


1–5

GENERAL 6.

How to read explanation details (1)

Part layout

Example 9–17

ENGINE MECHANICAL [J08E]

Timing Gear Cover and Flywheel Housing Part layout JP04117090402003

Part name code

Part catalog Fig. No. SAPH041170900182

11308

Flywheel housing

11390

End plate

11309

Oil seal retainer

9828A

Front oil seal*

11357

Gasket*

9828B

Rear oil seal*

11357A

Gasket*

*Parts not to be reused.

Description of part name code

Left: Part name code (nut)

Tightening torque 9069H

M14 : 171.5N m{1, 750kgf cm}

9419A

M16 : 196N m{2, 000kgf cm}

9069J

M12 : 97N m{990kgf cm}

9419B

M16 : 196N m{2, 000kgf cm}

Service procedure Overhaul item

SAPH311990100001

✩:It is the ID number for parts to prepare electronic data. It is not required for repair work.


1–6 7.

GENERAL Definition of terms Terms in this manual are defined as follows : (1)

Direction a.

Individual unit Front/back direction The power input side is front and the output side is back. Rotating direction When viewed from the rear, the clockwise direction is right rotation and the counterclockwise direction is left rotation. Vertical direction With a unit mounted on the vehicle (chassis), the upward direction is upper and the downward direction is lower. Left/right direction When viewed from the rear, the left direction is left and the right direction is right.

(2)

Standard value Basic dimension excluding tolerance and clearance generated by tolerances when two

(3)

Repair limit It is the value requiring repair. Symbol of + or - with the value means increase or decrease to

parts are joined the standard value. (4)

Service limit It is the value requiring replacement. Symbol of + or - with the value means increase or

(5)

Warning It is an item that may result in risk of human life or serious injury by incorrect handling.

(6)

Caution It is an item that should not be performed including inhibited work or an item that require

decrease to the standard value.

attention in working procedures. (7) 8.

Reference It is supplementary explanation in work.

Unit (1)

SI unit is used in this manual. SI unit is the international unit to unify the conventional different international units into one unit per quantity and to promote smooth technical communications.

(2)

This manual shows both the SI unit and conventional units. The conventional units are shown in { }.

SI unit

Convent

Conversion value*1

ional

(1[Conventional

unit

unit] = X [SI unit]) 1kgf=9.80665N

Force

N

kgf

Torque*2

N m

kgf cm

1kgf cm=0.0980665 N m

SI unit

Spring

Convent

Conversion value*1

ional

(1[Conventional unit]

unit

= X [SI unit]) 1kgf/mm=980665N/

N/mm

kgf/mm

Volume

L

cc

1cc=1mL

Efficiency

W

PS

1PS=0.735499kW

W h

cal

1kcal=1.163W h

g/W h

g/PS h

constant

mm

1kgf/ kgf/cm Pressure

2

=0.0980665MPa

Pa mmHg

Rotational speed

r/min min-1

*1

cm2=98.0665kPa

1mmHg=0.133322k

Calorific

Pa

value

1rpm=1r/min rpm

1rpm=1min-1

Fuel consumpt

1g/PS h=1.3596g/

ion rate

: X means the value when 1 [Conventional unit] is converted to the SI unit. It is used as the conversion factor from the conventional unit to the SI unit.

*2

: The conversion value of the torque may vary depending on the unit. Observe the standard values described for each unit.

kW h


1–7

GENERAL Safety information

Precautions for work JP31199010101001

1.

General precautions To ensure safety in work and to prevent accidents, observe the following items : (1)

Appearance a.

Wear safety goggles.

b.

Do not wear watch, necktie, ring, bracelet, necklace, etc. to prevent accident before work.

c.

Bind long hair at the back.

d.

Be sure to wear a cap and safety shoes.

(2)

Safety work a.

Do not touch radiator, muffler, exhaust pipe, tail pipe, etc. after stop of the engine to prevent burn.

b.

Do not put your clothes or tools near the rotating part (in particular, cooling fan or V–belt) during operation of the engine.

c.

Remove the starter key when the engine is not started.

d.

Start the engine at a well ventilated place so that carbon monoxide may not be filled.

e.

Since gas from the fuel or the battery is flammable, do not spark a fire or smoke a cigarette near the area.

f.

Since the battery fluid is poisonous and corrosive, be careful for handling.

g.

Do not short-circuit the cable of the battery or starter. Otherwise, the cable may be burned or burn may occur.

h.

If a tool or rag is left in the engine compartment, it may be bounced with a rotating part of the engine, resulting in injury.

i. 2.

To tow a failure machine, refer to "Towing" in the "Operation manual" of the machine.

Precautions for service work Pay attention to the following points before service work (1)

Preparation before disassembly a.

Prepare general tools, special tools and gauges before work.

b.

To disassemble a complicated area, put a stamp or match mark on the location not functionally affected to ease assembly. To repair the electric system, disconnect the cable from the minus terminal of the battery before work.

c. (2)

Perform inspection according to the procedure in the text before disassembly. Inspection during disassembly Every time parts are removed, check the area where the parts are assembled and check for deformation, damage, wear or scratch.

(3)

Arrangement of disassembled parts

(4)

Washing of disassembled parts

Place removed parts neatly in order. Separate parts to be replaced from parts to be reused. Clean and wash parts to be reused well. (5)

Inspection and measurement Inspect and measure parts to be reused as required.

(6)

Assembly a.

Keep the specified standard values (tightening torque, adjusting values, etc.) and assemble correct parts in the correct order.

b.

Be sure to use genuine parts for parts to be replaced.

c.

Use new packing, gasket, O–ring and cotter pin.

d.

Use seal gaskets for some areas where gaskets are used. Apply specified oil or grease to sliding areas where application of oil is required, and apply specified grease to the oil seal lip before assembly.

(7)

Check of adjustment Make adjustments to the service standard values using a gauge or tester.


1–8

GENERAL 3.

Precautions for electric system (1)

Removal of battery cable a.

In an electric system, remove the cable from the battery minus (-) terminal to prevent burnout due to short-circuit.

b.

Loosen

When the battery cable is removed, the battery terminal may be damaged. Loosen the nut completely and never pry it for removal.

SAPH311990100002

(2)

Handling of electronic parts a.

Do not give impact on electronic parts such as computer and relay.

b.

Do not place electronic parts at a high temperature and humidity area.

c.

Do not expose electronic parts to water in washing of a vehicle.

SAPH311990100003

(3)

Handling of wire harness a.

Mark clamps and clips to prevent interference of a wire harness with body edge, sharp edge and bolts. Be sure to reassemble it to the original position.

b.

When parts are assembled, be careful not to pinch a wire harness.

SAPH311990100004


GENERAL (4)

1–9

Handling of connector a.

When a connector is removed, hold the connector (as shown by the arrow in the left) and pull it out. Do not pull the wire harness.

b.

Unlock the locking connector before pulling.

c.

Insert the locking connector completely until it clicks.

d.

To insert a test lead into the connector, insert it from the back of the connector.

e.

If it is difficult to insert a test lead from the back of the connector, prepare a harness for inspection.

SAPH311990100005

4.

Precautions for electric welding Inadvertent electric welding on a cab or chassis may cause reverse welding current from the grounding circuit, resulting in damage to electric and electronic parts. Observe the following items for electric welding. (1)

Turn "OFF" the starter switch.

(2)

Make sure that switches are "OFF".

(3)

Disconnect the minus (-) terminal of the battery according to the removal procedure of the battery cable.

(4)

Disconnect connectors of each computer.

(5)

Remove all fuses. (For locations of fuses, refer to "Electrical System Chapter".)

(6)

Be sure to connect grounding of the electric welding machine near the welding area. Connect grounding from a bolt (plated bolt) or a frame near the welding area. Remove paint of the frame for connection of grounding from the frame.

(7)

Other precautions a.

Put a cover on rubber hoses, wire harnesses, pipes, tires, etc. around the welding area so that they may not be exposed to spatter.

b.

Perform welding under appropriate conditions and minimize heat effect in the peripheral area. Also maintain welding quality.

(8)

After welding, connect and assemble in the order of the fuse and the minus terminal of the battery disassembled. When paint is removed from a frame or cab, apply rust preventive coating with the same color.

(9)

After reassembly, check the function if it operates correctly. General information


1–10

GENERAL

Tightening of engine bolts and nuts JP31199010102003

1.

Tightening torque of general standard bolts (1)

For bolts with seatings Unit : N m{kgf cm} Screw diameter x Pitch

7T

9T

M8 x 1.25 (Coarse thread)

28.5{290}

36{370}

M10 x 1.25 (Fine thread)

60{610}

74.5{760}

M10 x 1.5 (Coarse thread)

55{560}

68.5{700}

M12 x 1.25 (Fine thread)

108{1, 100}

136{1, 390}

M12 x 1.75 (Coarse thread)

97{990}

125{1, 280}

M14 x 1.5 (Fine thread)

171.5{1, 750}

216{2, 210}

M14 x 2 (Coarse thread)

154{1, 570}

199{2, 030}

Remark

Bolt with number “7” on the head

Bolt with number “9” on the head

! CAUTION

(2)

• 8T bolt is in accordance with 7T bolt.

For bolts with washers Unit : N m{kgf cm}

Screw diameter x Pitch

4T

7T

9T

M6 x 1 (Coarse thread)

6{60}

10{100}

13{130}

M8 x 1.25 (Coarse thread)

14{140}

25{250}

31{320}

M10 x 1.25 (Fine thread)

29{300}

51{520}

64{650}

M10 x 1.5 (Coarse thread)

26{270}

47{480}

59{600}

M12 x 1.25 (Fine thread)

54{550}

93{950}

118{1, 200}

M12 x 1.75 (Coarse thread)

49{500}

83{850}

108{1, 100}

M14 x 1.5 (Fine thread)

83{850}

147{1, 500}

186{1, 900}

M14 x 2 (Coarse thread)

74{750}

132{1, 350}

172{1, 750}

Bolt with number “4”on Remark

the head

Bolt with number“7”on

Projection bolt Stud

the head Stud with C

with R surface at free

surface at free end

Bolt with number “9”on the head

end

! CAUTION

• 8T bolt is in accordance with 7T bolt.

R surface (4T)

C surface (7T)

SAPH311990100006


1–11

GENERAL 2.

Precoated bolt Precoated bolt is the bolt with an application of a seal lock agent at the thread. (1)

When re-application of lock agent is required a. b.

When precoated bolts are removed When precoated bolts are moved due to tightening check (for loosening or tightening)

Seal Lock Agent

• Check torque with the lower limit of the

NOTICE

tightening torque allowable value. If

SAPH311990100007

movement is found, tighten the bolt according to the procedure below. (2)

Re-use method of precoated bolt lock a.

Clean bolt and screw holes. (Clean screw holes for

b.

Dry completely by blowing air.

c.

Apply the specified seal lock agent to the thread of the

replacement.)

bolt. 3. One turn by 90°

Plastic region tightening method (angle method) (1)

Precautions Some engines are tightened with the plastic region

Tighten it 90°

tightening method. Since it is different from the conventional method, tighten it according to the instruction in the text.

SAPH311990100008

(2) One turn by 90° One turn by 45°

Tighten it 45° (Second time)

Parts tightened Cylinder head bolt, crankshaft main bearing cap bolt, connecting rod bearing cap bolt, etc.

Tighten it 90° (First time)

! CAUTION

• Measure the overall length of the bolt before assembly and replace the bolt if the length exceeds the service limit. Apply engine oil to bolt seating and bolt thread in assembly.

SAPH311990100009

(3) Two turns by 90°

Tighten it 90° (Second time)

Tightening method after tightening to seating torque Tightening of 90 q, 135 q(90 qonce and 45 qonce) and 180 q(90 qtwice) is available.

Tighten it 90° (First time)

SAPH311990100010


1–12

GENERAL

Tightening of chassis bolts and nuts JP31199010102004

1.

Tightening torque of general standard bolts and nuts (1)

Selection method of tightening torque a.

Find the applicable strength zone from the table below and select the bolt tightening torque from the table described later.

b. (2)

Select the nut tightening torque from the mating bolt as described above. Identification method of bolt strength zone

a.

Identification method with product

Hexagonal bolt Strength zone of hexagonal bolts is, in principle, indicated with recession, relief, surface depression and upset on the head with the symbol in the table. Strength zone Identification symbol for part

6T

7T

8T

9T

10T

11T

12T

6

7

8

q*1

10

11

12

(*1) : 9 may be misread with 6. It is expressed in q. Depression

Relief

Base depression

Upset

SAPH311990100011

Hexagonal nut Symbol example for identification of the strength zone of the hexagonal nut is shown in the table below :

Formula

(3)

Types of general standard bolts and nuts Standard seating

Seating A with flange

Seating B with flange


1–13

GENERAL (4)

Standard tightening torque table of general standard bolts and nuts (Representative standard seating is described) Unit : N m{kgf cm}

Strength zone Bolt

4T

7T

9T

9.0r1.8{90r20}

11.5r2.0{117r23}

22.0r4.0{220r40} *2

29.0r5.5{300r60} *2

43.0r8.5{440r90} *2

57.0r11.0{580r110} *2

(Cab)

(Cab)

51.5r10.0{530r100}

68.5r13.5{700r140}

(Chassis)

(Chassis)

76.0r15.0{776r150} *2

100.0r20.0{1, 020r200} *2

(Cab)

(Cab)

91.0r18.0{930r180}

120.0r24.0{1, 220r240}

(Chassis)

(Chassis)

diameter (mm) 4.5r1.8{50r20} M6

(Cab) 5.5r1.1{60r10} (Chassis) 14.0r3.5{140r40}

M8

(Cab) 17.0r3.0{170r30} (Chassis)

M10

M12

27.0r5.0{276r55}

48.0r9.5{490r98}

M14

77.0r15.0{786r157}

120.0r24.0{1, 220r240}

160.0r32.0{1, 630r326}

M16

120.0r24.0{1, 220r244}

190.0r38.0{1, 940r390}

250.0r50.0{2, 550r510}

M18

165.0r33.0{1, 680r336}

260.0r52.0{2, 650r530}

345.0r69.0{3, 520r704}

M20

235.0r47.0{2, 400r480}

370.0r74.0{3, 770r750}

490.0r98.0{5, 000r1, 000}

M22

320.0r64.0{3, 270r654}

505.0r100.0{5, 150r1, 030}

670.0r130.0{6, 840r1, 370}

M24

405.0r81.0{4, 130r826}

640.0r125.0{6, 530r1, 310}

845.0r165.0{8, 620r1, 720}

! CAUTION

• Use the tightening torque value for seating A with flange except for *2 in the table larger by 10% than the tightening torque value in the table. • Use the tightening torque value for seating B with flange of *2 in the table larger by 20% than the tightening torque value in the table. The tightening torque value of M8 for seating B with flange remaines unchanged. • Seating B with flange of *2 in the table is interchangeable with the standard seating in pairs. Use the standard seating for the tightening torque value.


1–14

GENERAL

Tightening of flare nuts and hoses JP31199010102005

1.

Tightening torque of pipe flare nut Unit : N m{kgf cm} Pipe outer diameter

I4.76

I6.35

I8

I10

I12

I15

15r5{150r50}

25r5{250r50}

36r5{370r50}

52r7{530r70}

67r7{680r70}

88r8{900r80}

Material Steel pipe 2.

Tightening torque of hoses Unit : N m{kgf cm} Hose outer diameter

Hose outer diameter

I13, I20, I22, fitting at

I10.5 fitting

packing

Hose outer diameter PF3/8 fitting

21.5r1.5{215r15} Air hose

Only meter gauge

41.5r2.5{425r25}

10{100} Brake hose

3.

Packing 51.5r7.5{525r75}

Lock nut tightening torque of brass joint Unit : N m{kgf cm}

Screw nominal size Tightening torque

M12

M16

M20

M27

15r2{150r20}

66r6{670r60}

97r9{990r90}

209r19{2130r190}


1–15

GENERAL

Taper thread sealant for piping JP31199010102006

The taper thread of the air pipe joint has application of sealant [Loctite # 575 (by Japan Loctite)]. Follow the procedures below for connection or disconnection of pipes. 1.

For disconnection

Removal of joint (Example: Use of magnetic valve)

(1)

Magnetic valve

The return torque of the taper joint is increased about 1.5

Air pipe (Flare joint) (No application of sealant)

Frame

Air hose

The sealant ( # Loctite 575) has strong sealing feature. times the initial tightening torque. When the joint is disconnected, use a long wrench for disconnection.

Since sealant is applied to this area, remove accessories with the joint attached and remove the joint.

(2)

When a joint at a poorly accessible area is replaced, remove accessories first and disconnect the joint.

SAPH311990100016

2. 1/4 turn

For connection (1)

Amount of application: 0.1 g/piece

For application of sealant ( # Loctite 575), wipe the sealing area completely with a rag or thinner. Apply sealant directly to about three ridges for quarter round

3 threads

with offset of one ridge from the end. Tighten it according

1 thread

to the tightening torque in the table below. Remove dirt completely from the mating part (female) before tightening.

SAPH311990100017

! CAUTION

• If your eye or skin comes in contact with sealant, wash it off immediately with water.

Tightening torque of taper joint

Unit : N m{kgf cm}

Screw diameter

1/4

3/8

1/2

Material Steel

49r10{500r100}

Aluminum, brass (2)

25r5{250r50}

64r15{650r150} 34r5{350r50}

44r5{450r50}

When a sealing tape is replaced with sealant, remove the tape completely first as in (1).

! CAUTION

• Be careful to prevent entry of dirt or foreign matter in the pipe.

(3)

If air leak is found after assembly with application of sealant, air leak cannot be stopped with additional tightening. Assemble the part again according to (1) and (2).


1–16

GENERAL

Assembly of joints and gaskets for piping JP31199010102007

1.

Tightening torque of joints Unit : N m{kgf cm} Metal sealing method

Sealing method Gasket sealing method Tightening screw

(Flare pipe type, nipple connector type)

(Aluminum + Rubber or Copper) Type A

size M8

13{130}

M10

20{200}

M12

25{250}

20{200}

M14

25{250}

31{320}

M16

29{300}

39{400}

M18

39{400}

59{600}

M20

*39{400}

64{650}

M24

69{700}

M28

*127{1300}

2.

Type B

11{110}

20{200}

Joint assembly procedure and subsequent inspection (1)

Before assembly, make sure that there is no dirt or burr on the seating surface (mating part, pipe joint, gasket, etc.).

(2)

Since pipes have some degrees of freedom for assembly, the seating surface tends to incline. Tighten pipes finally after temporary tightening to prevent leak.

(3)

After tightening, apply the specified pressure to each pipe joint to ensure that there is no leak.

(4)

Observe the values above for each tightening torque. *When assembled soft washer # 4840FR-N (aluminum and rubber carbon pressure bonding) is loosened or removed, be sure to replace it with a new part. This is not necessary for normal retightening.


1–17

GENERAL 3.

Examples of joint methods in various pipes Metal sealing method Gasket sealing method

Type A

Type B

(Flare pipe type)

(Nipple connector type)

Flare pipe Connector Flare nut

Sealing surface: 3 places

Joint bolt Gasket

Nut Connector nipple

Joint bolt

Sealing surface : 4 places One piece eye joint with sleeve

Flare connector

Gasket

Gasket Gasket

Gasket

Joint bolt

Sealing surface : 5 places

Lock washer

Sealing surface: 5 places

Nut Bracket

Nut

Sealing surface : 8 places

Connector nipple Sealing surface: 1 place

Sealing surface: 1 place Flare connector

Nut

Lock washer

Box nut

3-way joint Sealing surface : 8 places Joint pipe

Bracket Sealing surface : 3 places

One piece eye joint without sleeve Joint bolt

Sealing surface: 4 places

Joint bolt

Joint pipe

Sealing surface: 6 places


1–18

GENERAL

Handling of liquid gasket JP31199010102008

1.

Application of liquid gasket and part assembly procedure (1)

Remove old liquid gasket on each part and mating part completely. Clean the parts with a rag to prevent deposit of oil, moisture, dirt, etc. Be sure to overap parts at the beginning and at the end of application.

(2)

Be careful for offset with the mating part when a part applied with liquid gasket is assembled. Apply the

(3)

Assemble parts within 20 minutes after application of the liquid gasket.

liquid gasket again if offset occurs. If 20 minutes has passed, remove the liquid gasket and apply it again. (4) 2.

Start the engine at least 15 minutes or more after assembly of parts.

Removal of parts (1)

When parts are removed, do not pry one place only. Remove parts by prying each other using collar or clearance on the flange. When gasket is removed, be careful to prevent entry of gasket offal into the engine.

3.

Others (1)

When the liquid gasket is contained in a tube, use the accompanying winding tool. When it is contained in a cartridge, use the application gun.

Winding tool

Application gun

Tube: 150 g

Cartridge type: 300 g

For a tube, desired application width may be obtained from the cut position at the nozzle end. 1 : Approx. 2 mm at the 1st section cut 2 : Approx. 5 mm at the 2nd section cut

Nozzle of tube General information Description of function


1–19

GENERAL

Failure diagnosis table for each problem JP31199010301001

Causes and actions are described for each item.

Engine mechanical

JP03Z01020601001

Status Engine overheat (coolant)

Cause

Action

Insufficient coolant

Replenish coolant

Faulty thermostat

Replace thermostat

Water leak from cooling system

Correction

Faulty coolant pump

Repair or replace

Faulty head gasket

Replace head gasket

Engine overheat

Clogging of radiator

Cleaning of radiator

(radiator)

Corrosion of cooling system

Clean and repair cooling system

Clogging of radiator core front part

Clean radiator

Faulty radiator cap

Replace radiator cap

Engine overheat (compression

Non-synchronous injection timing

Adjust injection timing.

pressure)

Faulty fuel injection pressure

Adjust injection pressure

Faulty fuel

Replace with correct fuel

Faulty injector

Replace injector

Engine overheat (lubrication

Deterioration of engine oil

Replace engine oil

unit)

Faulty oil pump

Replace oil pump

Insufficient engine oil

Replenish engine oil

Large engine oil consumption

Wear of piston ring and cylinder

Replace piston ring and cylinder

(piston, cylinder liner and piston

liner

liner

ring)

Damage to piston ring

Replace piston ring and cylinder liner

Faulty fixing of piston ring

Replace piston ring and cylinder liner

Faulty assembly of piston ring

Replace piston ring and cylinder liner

Faulty engine oil

Replace engine oil

Faulty piston ring joint

Reassemble piston ring

Large engine oil consumption

Wear of valve stem

Replace valve and valve guide

(valve and valve guide)

Wear of valve guide

Replace valve guide

Faulty assembly of valve stem seal

Replace stem seal

Excessive oil lubrication to rocker

Inspection of clearance between

arm

rocker arm and rocker arm shaft

Large engine oil consumption

Faulty oil level gauge

Replace with correct level gauge

(others)

Excessive filling of engine oil

Fill with appropriate amount of oil.

Leak of engine oil

Repair or replace the part of oil leak.

Piston seizure (in operation)

Sudden stop of engine

Perform warm-up before stop of

Piston seizure (lubrication unit)

Insufficient engine oil

Replenish engine oil

Deterioration of engine oil

Replace engine oil

engine

Incorrect engine oil

Replace with correct engine oil.

Low oil pressure

Inspection of lubrication unit

Faulty oil pump

Replace oil pump

Piston seizure

Abnormal combustion

Refer to overheat section.

Piston seizure

Cooling unit

Refer to overheat section. SAPH311990100031


1–20

GENERAL

Failure diagnosis using HinoDX JP31199010301002

! CAUTION

• HinoDX is used for inspection and adjustment of the system in addition to failure diagnosis.

1.

HinoDX (1)

With HinoDX, failure of the common rail fuel injection system can be diagnosed. The interface box (Hino-Bowie) and the special cable are required for connection to the vehicle.

SAPH311990100032

Special tool : 09121-1040 Hino-Bowie 09042-1220 Cable between vehicle and Hino-Bowie CD-ROM HinoDX ! CAUTION

• Install the software of the Hino Diagnostic eXplorer (HinoDX) in the PC. For the installation method, refer to the instruction manual accompanying the CD.

2.

List of failure diagnosis tools Part name

Part No.

External shape

General description and function • Operating system (OS) : Windows95,

PC (DOS/V standard)

Windows98(IE5.0 or later), Windows2000(SP3, IE5.0 or later), WindowsXP(SP1a, IE6.0 or later) —

• CPU and memory : Conditions that assure operation of the above operating system • Display : 800 x 600, 256 colors or more

Hino-Bowie

09121 - 1040

(Interface box)

Cable between

• PC interface

vehicle and HinoBowie (09042 1220) Signal check

09049 - 1080

Interrupting installation between vehicle

harness

(for common rail fuel

harness and ECU allows inspection with a

injection system)

tester rod while the power is supplied.


1–21

GENERAL 3.

Deletion of past failures (1)

To delete past failures of the engine ECU, use HinoDX on the PC. (Refer to "HinoDX operation manual".)

SAPH311990100032

4.

Connection of signal check harness (1)

To prevent damage to the ECU connector and to improve accessibility, connect the signal check harness and put a testing rod on the signal check connector of the signal check harness for meaurement. a.

Disconnect the connector from the ECU.

! CAUTION

Unit harness

• Do not break the locking tab of the connector.

Signal check harness

b.

Connect the signal check harness to the machine harness and the ECU. Signal check harness

Test lead

(for common rail fuel injection system) Part No. 09049-1080 Signal check connector

SAPH311990100036


1–22 (2)

GENERAL Terminal No. For the signal check harness connector, the ECU terminal number in the text is treated as follows :

ECU unit

Signal check harness

ECU side

Unit side

SAPH311990100038


1–23

GENERAL

Connection method of HinoDX JP31199010301003

1.

Connection of HinoDX (1)

Remove the left side cover at the rear of the driver's seat and connect the failure diagnosis connector with a PC which installed HinoDX through the interface box. Special tool : 09121-1040 Hino-Bowie (Interface box) 09042-1220 Connecting cable CD-ROM HinoDX

Engine ECU

(2)

Set the starter key to "ON" and start HinoDX.

Failure diagnosis connector

SAPH311990100039

Failure diagnosis connector

Hino-Bowie

Connect to the failure diagnosis connector at the unit side.

Connecting cable SAPH311990100040 Setup layout Layout

Chassis number and engine number JP31199010401001

1. (Example)

Engine type and engine number (1)

Stamp position

Engine type and engine number are stamped at the left cylinder block when viewed from the cooling fan. For order of parts, information of this number will facilitate procedures smoothly. Ex. J05E TA10101

SAPH311990100041



STANDARD VALUE

2–1

ENGINE

2 STANDARD VALUE Specification System drawing (performance)

Engine Body................................................................ 2-2 Standard value........................................................ 2-2 Tightening torque .................................................... 2-2 Fuel System ................................................................ 2-2 Tightening torque .................................................... 2-2 Electrical...................................................................... 2-3 Standard value........................................................ 2-3 Tightening torque .................................................... 2-3 Intake ........................................................................... 2-3 Tightening torque .................................................... 2-3 Engine Mechanical ..................................................... 2-4 Standard value........................................................ 2-4 Tightening torque .................................................. 2-11 Exhaust...................................................................... 2-12 Tightening torque .................................................. 2-12 Cooling ...................................................................... 2-12 Standard value...................................................... 2-12 Lubrication ................................................................ 2-12 Standard value...................................................... 2-12 Tightening torque .................................................. 2-14 Starting and Charging.............................................. 2-14 Standard value (Alternator 50A) .......................... 2-14 Tightening torque (Alternator 50A) ....................... 2-15 Standard value (starter) ........................................ 2-15 Tightening torque (starter) .................................... 2-16 Turbocharger............................................................. 2-16 Standard value...................................................... 2-16 Tightening torque .................................................. 2-16

2


2–2

STANDARD VALUE

Engine Body Standard value JP31199020205001

MPa {kgf/cm2, lbf/in.2} Inspection item

Standard value

Compression pressure

3.4-3.7

(Engine revolution per cylinder: 150 r/min)

{35-38, 493-237}

Repair

Service

limit

limit

Action

2.7 {28, 392}

Tightening torque JP31199020205002

Unit:N m{kgf cm, lbf ft} Tightening area

Tightening torque

Remark

7.8 - 8.8

Starter B terminal

{80 - 110, 5.8 - 6.5} 3.3 - 4.4

Alternator B terminal

{33 - 45, 2.4 - 3.2}

Oil pan drain cock

41 {420, 30} 4.5 - 5.0

Radiator hose band

{45 - 50, 3.3 - 3.7}

Fuel System Tightening torque JP31199020205003

Unit : N m{kgf cm, lbf ft} Tightening area Injector clamp

Tightening torque 25 {250, 18}

Supply pump - Bearing holder case

28.5 {290, 21}

Bearing holder case - Pump drive

28.5 {290, 21}

Supply pump coupling flange mounting nut

63.7 {650, 47}

Injector harness Fuel filter air bleeding bolt

2.2 {22, 1.6} 1.7 - 2.6 {17.3 - 23, 1.2 - 1.9}

Remark


2–3

STANDARD VALUE

Electrical Standard value JP31199020205018

Inspection item

item

item

Standard value

Remark

8 - 10mm {0.3152 - 0.394in.}

Compression

(Reference push force 98N

gauge (09444-

{10kgf, 22lbf})

1210) is used.

Deflection When installing

Belt tension

a new belt

gauge (95506-

490 - 570 N

Tension

{50 - 58 kgf, 110 - 128 lbf}

00090 Denso part No.) is used.

V-belt tension adjustment Deflection

10 - 12mm {0.394 - 0.472in.}

Compression

(Reference push force 98N {10kgf,

gauge (09444-

22lbf})

1210) is used.

At the time of

Belt tension

inspection 320 - 400 N

Tension

{33 - 41 kgf, 72 - 90 lbf}

gauge (9550600090 Denso part No.) is used.

Tightening torque JP31199020205019

Unit : N m{kgf cm, lbf ft} Tightening area

Tightening torque

Starter mounting bolt

154 {1,570, 114}

Starter mounting nut

171.5 {1,750, 126}

Battery cable mounting nut

16 - 22 {165 - 225, 11 - 16}

Alternator through bolt E terminal bolt

Remark

83 {850, 61} 3.2 - 4.4{33 - 45, 2 - 3}

Fixing bolt at brace

51{520, 38}

Outside B terminal mounting nut

3.2 - 4.4{33 - 45, 2 - 3}

Through bolt

7.8 - 9.8{80 - 99, 6 - 7}

Intake Tightening torque JP31199020205005

Unit : N m{kgf cm, lbf ft} Tightening area Intake manifold mounting bolt

Tightening torque 28.5 {290, 21}

Remark


2–4

STANDARD VALUE

Engine Mechanical Standard value JP31199020205006

Unit : mm {in.} Inspection item

Standard value

Repair limit

Service limit

IN

0.30 {0.0118}

EX

0.45 {0.0177}

Valve clearance (cold) 0.01 - 0.08

Cylinder liner protrusion

{0.003 - 0.003}

Cylinder liner flange width

8 {0.314}

Cylinder block flange width

8 {0.314}

A

Cylinder block inner diameter

B

C

A

Cylinder liner outer diameter

B

C Clearance between cylinder liner and cylinder block

Cylinder liner inner diameter

Piston outer diameter (Pin hole 23mm{0.9 in.} above the lower end of the skirt Square direction)

117 - 117.008 {4.6063 - 4.6066} 117.008 - 117.014 {4.6066 - 4.6068} 117.014 - 117.022 {4.6068 - 4.6072} 116.982 - 116.99 {4.6056 - 4.6059} 116.99 - 116.996 {4.6059 - 4.6061} 116.996 - 117.004 {4.6061 - 4.6064} 0.01 - 0.026 {0.0003 - 0.0010}

112 {4.4094}

111.9r0.006 {4.4089r0.0002}

112.15 {4.4154}

Action

Cylinder Replace liner

— Cylinder

Piston clearance

0.088 - 0.112 {0.0034 - 0.0044}

Liner Replace piston


2–5

STANDARD VALUE

Inspection item

Standard value Top

Approx. 11.5 {0.4527}

Repair limit

Service limit

1.5 {0.0591}

1.2 {0.0472}

1.2 {0.0472}

Action

Free joint clearance Second

Top Gap between ends Piston

of piston ring

Second

ring Oil

dimension

Piston ring groove

{0.0118 - 0.0157} 0.75 - 0.9 {0.0295 - 0.0354} 0.15 - 0.3 {0.0059 - 0.0118}

Second

2 {0.0787}

Oil

4 {0.1574}

Top

2.5 {0.0984}

Second

2 {0.0787}

Oil

4 {0.1574}

Clearance between piston ring and

0.3 - 0.40

Top

Piston

{0.5512}

2.5 {0.0984}

Top Ring width B

Approx. 14

Second

piston ring groove Oil

0.09 - 0.13 {0.0035 - 0.0051} 0.04 - 0.08 {0.00016 - 0.0031} 0.02 - 0.06 {0.0008 - 0.0024}

Replace piston ring

–0.1 {–0.0039} –0.1 {–0.0039}

Replace piston ring

–0.1 {–0.0039} +0.2 {+0.0079} +0.2 {+0.0079}

Replace piston

+0.1 {+0.0039} — Replace

piston ring or piston.

Piston pin outer diameter

37 {1.4567}

Piston boss inner diameter

37 {1.4567}

— –0.04 {–0.0015} +0.05 {+0.0020}

Replace piston pin Replace piston

–0.002T - 0.025L Clearance between piston pin and piston boss

{0.0000 - 0.0010} (T : Tightening

allowance,

0.05 {0.0020}

Replace piston pin or piston

L : Clearance)

Connecting rod bushing inner diameter

37 {1.4567}

+0.1 {0.0039}

Replace connecting rod bushing


2–6

STANDARD VALUE

Inspection item

Standard value

Repair limit

Service limit

Action Replace

Connecting rod bushing oil clearance

0.015 - 0.036 {0.0006 - 0.0014}

0.08 {0.0031}

piston pin or connecting rod bushing

Crank pin outer diameter

Thickness of connecting rod bearing

65 {2.5590}

2.0 {0.0787}

63.8 {2.5118}

Replace the crankshaft. (Note 1)

— Replace

Connecting rod oil clearance

0.031 - 0.082 {0.0012 - 0.0032}

bearing for 0.2 {0.0079}

clearance of 0.3 or more (Note 2) Crank

Crank journal outer diameter

80{3.1496}

78.8 {3.1024}

Replace shaft (Note 1)

Cranks

Thickness of main bearing

2.5 {0.2342}

haft Crankshaft oil clearance

0.051 - 0.102 {0.0020 - 0.0040}

Replace 0.2 {0.0079}

bearing (Note 2)

Center journal width

36 {1.4173}

Thickness of thrust bearing

2.5 {0.2342}

+1.00 {+0.039}

Replace crankshaft.

— Replace

Crankshaft end play

0.050 - 0.219

0.50

1.219

{0.0020 - 0.0086}

{0.0020}

{0.0480}

thrust bearing or crankshaft

Crankshaft runout

Crank pin width

34 {13.386}

0.15 {0.0059} —

— +0.8 {+0.0315}

Ground to under-size Replace crankshaft

Note 1 : Correction with re-grinding for eccentric wear of 0.10 or more. Re-grinding for wear of 0.20 or more. Replace crankshaft for wear of 1.20 or more. Note 2 : Under-size bearing values are 0.25, 0.50, 0.75 and 1.00.

Connecting rod large end width

34 {1.3386}

–0.8 {–0.0315}

Replace connecting rod


2–7

STANDARD VALUE

Inspection item

Standard value

Repair limit

Service limit

Action Replace

0.20 - 0.52

Connecting rod end play

{0.0079 - 0.0205}

1.0 {0.0394}

connecting rod or crankshaft

Camshaft journal outer

40 {1.5748}

diameter Camshaft bearing inner

40 {1.5748}

diameter

Camshaft bearing oil

0.020 - 0.063

Clearance

Camsha Cam height ft

{0.0008 - 0.0025}

–0.15

Replace

{–0.0059}

camshaft

+0.15 {+0.059}

Bearing Replacemen t Replace

camshaft or bearing

IN

50.067 {1.9711}

–0.08

Replace

EX

52.104 {2.0513}

{–0.0031}

camshaft

IN

8.067 {0.3175}

–0.08

Replace

EX

10.104 {0.3978}

{–0.0031}

camshaft

33 {1.2992}

0.1 {0.039}

Cam lift Camshaft journal width (Rear journal)

0.100 - 0.178

Camshaft end play

{0.0039 - 0.0070} 0.04

Camshaft runout

{0.0016}

Rocker shaft outer diameter

22 {0.8661}

Rocker arm bushing inner diameter

22 {0.8661}

0.030 - 0.101

Rocker arm oil clearance

{0.00012 - 0.0040}

–0.08

Replace camshaft Replace camshaft Replace

{–0.0031}

rocker shaft

+0.08

Replace rocker

{+0.0031}

arm bushing

0.15 {0.0059}

IN

7 {0.2756}

Replace

EX

7 {0.2756}

valve

IN

7 {0.2756}

Replace

EX

7 {0.2756}

valve guide

Replace

Valve stem outer diameter

Valve guide inner diameter

IN Oil clearance between valve guide

0.023 - 0.058 {0.0009 - 0.0020}

valve or

and valve stem EX

IN

0.050 - 0.083 {0.0020 - 0.0033} 0.55 - 0.85 {0.0217 - 0.0335}

1.1 {0.0433}

Valve sink

valve guide

Replace valve and

EX

1.15 - 1.45 {0.0453 - 0.0571}

1.7 {0.0669}

valve seat


2–8

STANDARD VALUE

Inspection item

Standard value

Repair limit

Service limit

IN

30q

Allowable angle 30q - 30q35'

EX

45q

Allowable angle 45q - 30q30'

IN

30q

Allowable angle 29q30 - 45q

EX

45q

Allowable angle 44q30 - 45q

Action

Valve seat angle Correction Valve face angle

Set length

Set load

44.8 {1.764} 129N {13.1kgf, 29lbf}

Inner Free length

Squareness Valve spring Set length

Set load

64.6 {2.5433} — 46.8 {1.8252} 314N {32.0kgf, 70lbf}

— —

Squareness

75.7 {2.9803} —

{–0.3543} 2.0 {0.0787}

Outer Free length

–3.0

— —

–3.0 {–0.3543} 2.0 {0.0787}

Replace spring Replace spring

Replace spring Replace spring


2–9

STANDARD VALUE

Inspection item Crank - Main idle Main idle - Pump drive idle Pump drive idle Pump drive Backla sh

Main idle - Sub-idle

Sub-idle - Oil pump

Sub-idle - Cam idle

Cam idle - Cam Shaft outer diameter Bushing inner diameter Timing gear Main

Standard value 0.030 - 0.167 {0.0012 - 0.0066} 0.032 - 0.096 {0.0013 - 0.0038} 0.020 - 0.083 {0.0008 - 0.0033} 0.030 - 0.113 {0.0012 - 0.0044} 0.030 - 0.113 {0.0012 - 0.0044} 0.050 - 0.218 {0.0020 - 0.0086} 0.030 - 0.253 {0.0012 - 0.0100}

— — — — — — —

Service limit

{0.0012} 0.10 {0.00393} 0.10 {0.00393} 0.30 {0.0012}

0.30 {0.0012} 0.30 {0.0012}

57 {2.2441}

shaft and bushing

{0.0012 - 0.0084}

0.20 {0.0079}

Gear width

44 {1.7322}

Shaft length

44 {1.7322}

End play

Shaft outer diameter Bushing inner diameter

0.114 - 0.160 {0.0045 - 0.0063}

0.30 {0.0012}

50 {1.9685}

50 {1.9685}

Clearance between

0.025 - 0.075

shaft and bushing

{0.0010 - 0.0030}

idle

0.20 {0.0079}

Gear width

22 {0.8661}

Shaft length

22 {0.8661}

End play

0.040 - 0.120 {0.0016 - 0.0047}

replacement

{0.0012}

0.030 - 0.090

Gear

0.30

Clearance between

Action

0.30

57 {2.2441}

idle

Sub-

Repair limit

0.30 {0.0012}

Replace shaft or bushing

Replace shaft or gear

Replace shaft or bushing

Replace shaft or gear


2–10

STANDARD VALUE

Inspection item Shaft outer diameter Bushing inner diameter

Cam

Standard value

Repair limit

Service limit

34 {1.3386}

34 {1.3386}

Clearance between

0.025 - 0.075

shaft and bushing

{0.0002 - 0.0030}

idle

0.20 {0.0079}

Gear width

22 {8.6614}

Shaft length

22 {8.6614}

0.040 - 0.120

End play

{0.0016 - 0.0047}

Timing gear Shaft outer diameter Bushing inner diameter

0.30 {0.0012}

34 {1.3386}

34 {1.3386}

Pump

Clearance between

0.025 - 0.075

drive

shaft and bushing

{0.0002 - 0.0030}

idle

0.10 {0.0039}

Gear width

28.5 {1.1220}

Shaft length

28.5 {1.1220}

0.016 - 0.22

End play

{0.0006 - 0.0087}

Action

Replace shaft or bushing

Replace thrust plate or gear

Replace shaft or bushing

Grinding is inhibited because

Longitudinal direction 0.06

Flatness under cylinder head

{0.0024}

Flatness above cylinder block

Square direction

0.20 {0.0079}

backlash between cam idle – sub-idle

0.03 {0.0012}

gears is changed. 0.15

Surface runout of flywheel

Camshaft gear mounting bolt

31 {1.2205}

Replacement

Bearing cap bolt (Crankshaft mounting)

108 {4.2520}

Replacement

Connecting rod bolt

68.0 {2.6772} Replacement

long

middle

short

Head bolt

{0.0060}

187.5 {7.3819} 156.5 {6.1614} 126.5 {4.9803}

Replacement

Replacement

Replacement


2–11

STANDARD VALUE Valve timing Exhaust valve open (before BDC)

54q

Exhaust valve close (after TDC)

13q

Intake valve open (before TDC)

14q

Intake valve close (after BDC)

30q

Tightening torque JP31199020205007

Unit : N m{kgf cm, lbf ft} Tightening area

Tightening torque

Crankshaft pulley mounting bolt

118 {1,203, 87}

Head cover mounting bolt

28.5 {290, 21}

Camshaft bearing cap mounting bolt

28.5 {290, 21}

Union bolt of leakage pipe

13.5 {135, 10}

Injector harness mounting nut

28 {290, 21}

Camshaft gear mounting bolt

59 {600, 44}+90q

Rocker arm and crosshead adjusting screw lock nut Rocker arm support bolt Head bolt Cam idle gear shaft mounting bolt

25 {250, 18} 59 {600, 44} 59 {600, 44}+90q+90q 108 {1,100, 80}

Main bearing cap mounting bolt

69 {700, 51}+90q+45q

Connecting rod cap mounting bolt

69 {700, 51}+90q+45q

Oil check valve

108 {1,100, 80}

Main idle gear shaft mounting bolt

172 {1,750, 127}

Flywheel mounting bolt

186 {1,900, 137}

Flywheel housing stay - Flywheel housing Rear end plate torx bolt Supply pump bearing case mounting bolt

Refer to the main text.

22 {220, 16}

Sub-idle gear shaft mounting bolt

Flywheel housing mounting bolt

Remark

196 {2,000, 145}

M16

55 {560, 41}

M10

36 {370, 27}

M8

171.5 {1, 750}

M14

55 {560, 41} 28.5 {290, 21}


2–12

STANDARD VALUE

Exhaust Tightening torque JP31199020205008

Unit : N m{kgf cm, lbf ft} Tightening area

Tightening torque

Exhaust manifold mounting stud bolt

30 {300, 22}

Exhaust manifold mounting nut

53 {540, 40}

Remark

Cooling Standard value JP31199020205009

Inspection item

Standard

Repair

Service

value

limit

limit

Replacement

Replacement

Action

74.5 - 78.5qC Thermostat valve open temperature

{166.1 173.3qF}

Thermostat valve lift (Set temperature 95 qC)

10mm {0.3937 in.} or more

Lubrication Standard value JP31199020205010

Unit : mm {in.} Inspection item

Standard value

Repair

Service

limit

limit

39kPa Hydraulic alarm switch operation pressure

{0.4kgf/cm2, 5.66lbf/in.2}

Action


2–13

STANDARD VALUE

Inspection item Outer diameter of drive gear Cylinder block side Oil pump chamber inner diameter Clearance between drive gear and cylinder block Drive gear width Cylinder block side Depth of oil pump chamber Drive gear end play

Oil pump

Repair

Service

limit

limit

54 {2.1260}

54 {2.1260}

Standard value

0.100 - 0.202 {0.0039 - 0.0080}

0.30

28.5 {1.1220}

{0.00193 - 0.0044}

0.15 {0.059}

Outer diameter of driven gear shaft

18 {0.7087}

Cylinder block hole diameter

18 {0.7087}

Clearance between drive gear shaft outer diameter and bushing inner diameter at cylinder block side

0.040 - 0.099 {0.0016 - 0.0039}

Outer diameter of driven gear shaft

18 {0.7087}

Cylinder block hole diameter

18 {0.7087}

Clearance between driven gear shaft outer diameter and cylinder block hole diameter

0.030 - 0.075 {0.0012 - 0.0030}

Outer diameter of driven gear shaft

18 {0.7087}

Inner diameter of driven gear bushing

18 {0.7087}

Clearance between driven gear shaft outer diameter and gear bushing inner diameter Backlash between drive gear and driven gear

0.040 - 0.083 {0.016 - 0.0033} 0.072 - 0.277 {0.0028 - 0.0109}

Replace drive

{0.0118} gear or oil pump

28.5 {1.1220}

0.049 - 0.113

Action

0.15 {0.059} 0.30

Replace drive gear or oil pump

Replace drive gear or bushing

Replace oil pump

Replace oil pump or bushing Replace oil

{0.0118} pump


2–14

STANDARD VALUE

Tightening torque JP31199020205011

Unit : N m{kgf cm, lbf ft} Tightening area

Tightening torque

Oil pan mounting bolt

30 {300, 22}

Oil strainer

31 {320, 23}

Oil pan drain cock

41 {420, 30}

Oil pump mounting bolt

Remark

28.5 {290, 21} M14

24.5r4.9 {250r50, 18r4}

M20

24.5r4.9 {250r50, 18r4}

M22

29.4r4.9 {300r50, 22r4}

M24

34.3r4.9 {350r50, 25r4}

Oil circuit spring plug Oil cooler

Coolant drain plug

44.1r4.9 {450r50, 33r4}

Oil cooler case assembly mounting bolt

24.5r4.9 {250r50, 18r4}

Starting and Charging Standard value (Alternator 50A) JP31199020205012

Inspection item Resistance between stator coil terminals (for 2 phases) Resistance between stator coil core and coil Resistance of feed coil

Front Shaft outer diameter of Rear Forward resistance value

diode and rectifier holder Reverse resistance value Forward regulator terminals F — E

0.22 - 0.26: 1M:or more

1M:or more 25mm {0.9843 in.}

Repair limit

Service limit

Action

Replacement

Replacement

Replacement

Replacement

24.98mm {0.9835 in.} Replacement

rotor assembly

Resistance between

value

5.6 - 6.8:

Resistance between feed coil core and coil

Resistance between

Standard

resistance value

17mm {0.6693 in.} Approx. 10:

— —

16.98mm {0.6685 in.} — Replacement

Infinite Approx. 10:

— Replacement

Reverse resistance value

Infinite


2–15

STANDARD VALUE

Tightening torque (Alternator 50A) JP31199020205013

Unit : N m{kgf cm, lbf ft} Tightening area

Tightening torque

Bearing cover mounting bolt

Remark

1.9 - 2.5 {20 - 25, 1 - 2}

Pulley mounting nut

127 - 157 {1, 300 - 1, 600, 94 - 116}

Feed coil - Rear bracket

2.9 - 3.9 {30 - 39, 2 - 3}

Heat sink mounting bolt

1.9 - 2.5 {20 - 25, 1 - 2}

Screw lock is

Regulator mounting bolt

1.9 - 2.5 {20 - 25, 1 - 2}

used

Inside B terminal mounting nut

4.9 - 5.9 {50 - 60, 4 - 4}

Front side - Rear side mounting bolt

7.8 - 9.8 {80 - 99, 6 - 7}

Coupler holder mounting bolt

1.9 - 2.5 {20 - 25, 1 - 2}

Cover mounting bolt

3.3 - 4.4 {34 - 44, 2 - 3}

Standard value (starter) JP31199020205014

Unit : mm {in.} Inspection item Resistance between coil lead Yoke

Standard value

Service limit

1k:or less

18 {0.7087}

13 {0.5118} or less

1M:or more

1k:or less

Commutator outer diameter

36{1.4173}

34 {1.1458} or less

Shaft outer diameter A

12 {0.4724}

11.98 {0.4717} or less

Shaft outer diameter B

9 {0.3643}

8.98 {0.3535} or less

wire and yoke

Action Replace yoke assembly

assembly Brush length Resistance between commutator and core Armature assembly

Replace armature assembly

Undercut depth Resistance between holder Holder

Replace brush

0.5 - 0.8 {0.0197}

0.2{0.0079} or less

1k:or less

Brush length

18 {0.7087}

13 {0.5118} or less

A

26 {1.0236}

25.90 {1.0197} or less

and plate

Correction Replace holder assembly

assembly Shaft

Replace shaft

assembly outer

Replace brush

B

12.1 {0.4764}

12.04 {4.7401} or less

assembly

diameter Clutch assembly inner sleeve outer diameter Metal bushing inner diameter of pinion case Metal bushing inner diameter of center bracket

25 {0.9843}

24.90 {0.9803} or more Replacement

25 {0.9843}

25.2 {0.9921} or more

26 {1.02362}

26.2 {1.0315}

Replace brush Replace center bracket


2–16

STANDARD VALUE

Standard

Inspection item

Service limit

value

Metal bushing inner diameter of shaft

9 {0.3543}

assembly

Action Replace shaft

9.2 {0.3622}

assembly Replace

Bearing housing inner diameter of rear

28 {1.1024}

bracket

28.1 {1.1063} or more

commutator end frame

Start

Between C terminal and M

magnet

terminal (P coil)

switch

Between C terminal and body

assembly

(H coil)

0.12 - 0.15:

Replace start magnet switch assembly

1.13 - 1.25:

Tightening torque (starter) JP31199020205015

Unit : N m{kgf cm, lbf tt} Tightening area

Tightening torque

Remark

C lead wire mounting bolt

2 - 3 {19 - 25, 1 - 2}

M lead wire mounting nut

12.3 - 15.2 {126 - 154, 9 - 11}

Commutator end frame mounting through bolt Brush holder set bolts of commutator end frame Start magnet switch assembly mounting bolt at pinion case Pinion case switch set bolts

15.7 - 17.6 {160 - 179, 12 - 13} 3.6 - 4.9 {37 - 49, 3 - 4} 3.6 - 4.9 {37 - 49, 3 - 4} 14 - 16 {140 - 160, 10 - 12}

Turbocharger Standard value JP31199020205016

Unit : mm {in.} Inspection item

Standard value

Repair limit

Service limit

Axial direction

0.1 {0.0039}

Diameter direction

1.0 {0.0397}

Turbine shaft play

Action

Tightening torque JP31199020205017

Unit : N m{kgf cm, lbf tt} Tightening area Turbocharger mounting nut

Tightening torque 56 {570, 41}

Remark


PARTS TO BE PREPARED

3–1

ENGINE

3 PARTS TO BE PREPARED Special tool (SST)

3 Engine Body................................................................ 3-2 Special tool ............................................................. 3-2 Fuel System ................................................................ 3-2 Lubricant, etc. ........................................................ 3-2 Electrical...................................................................... 3-2 Special tool ............................................................. 3-2 Engine Mechanical ..................................................... 3-3 Special tool ............................................................. 3-3 Instruments ............................................................. 3-6 Lubricant, etc. ........................................................ 3-6 Lubrication .................................................................. 3-6 Special tool ............................................................. 3-6 Lubricant, etc. ........................................................ 3-6 Starting and Charging................................................ 3-7 Jig (reference dimensional drawing for manufacture) ................................................................................ 3-7 Instruments ............................................................. 3-8 Lubricant, etc. ........................................................ 3-8 Turbocharger............................................................... 3-8 Special tool ............................................................. 3-8 Engine Failure Diagnosis........................................... 3-9 Special tool ............................................................. 3-9


3–2

PARTS TO BE PREPARED

Engine Body Special tool JP31199030901001

Shape

Part No.

Description

09491–1010

Wire rope

09552–1030

Compression gauge adapter

09552–1060

Compression gauge adapter

09552–1110

Compression gauge adapter

Remark

For engine lifting

Fuel System Lubricant, etc. JP31199030901002

Name

Remark

Guide bolt (9069-08180)

For supply pump positioning

Electrical Special tool JP31199030901003

Shape

Part No.

09444–1210

95506–00090 (Denso part No.)

Name

Compression gauge

Belt tension gauge

Remark

For V–belt tension adjustment

For V–belt tension adjustment


3–3

PARTS TO BE PREPARED

Engine Mechanical Special tool JP31199030901004

Shape

Part No.

Name

Remark

For crankshaft front oil seal

09420–1731

Oil seal puller

09407–1030

Oil seal press

09433–1070

Eye bolt

09470–1170

Valve spring press

09471–1520

Guide

For valve guide press-fit

09472–1210

Bar

For nozzle seat clamping

9800–06100

Steel ball

09431–1020

Valve lapping tool

removal

For crankshaft front oil seal press-fit

For assembly/disassembly of cylinder head

For assembly/disassembly of valve spring retainer

For nozzle seat clamping (together with 09472–1210)

For valve adjustment


3–4

PARTS TO BE PREPARED

Shape

Part No.

Name

09472–2100

Bar

09420–2100

Cylinder liner puller

09442–1011

Piston ring expander

Remark

For valve stem seal mounting

For removal and inspection of cylinder liner

For assembly/disassembly of piston ring

For mounting of connecting 9191–08252

Bolt

rod small end bushing (together with 09402–1480 or 09402–1540)

For assembly/disassembly 09402–1530

Press sub-assembly

of connecting rod small end bushing For assembly/disassembly

9233–10360

Wing nut

of connecting rod small end bushing (together with 09402–1530)

For assembly/disassembly 09481–1130

Guide

of connecting rod small end bushing (together with 09402–1530)

For assembly/disassembly 09402–1540

Spindle

of connecting rod small end bushing

For mounting of connecting 09481–1540

Guide

rod small end bushing (together with 09402–1540)


3–5

PARTS TO BE PREPARED

Shape

Part No.

Name

09441–1370

Piston ring holder

09481–1340

Guide

09420–1742

Oil seal puller

Remark

For piston mounting

For assembly/disassembly of flywheel

For crankshaft rear oil seal removal

09420–1100 For main/sub idle gear Sliding hammer 09420–1442

assembly and cam idle gear shaft removal

For assembly/disassembly

09411–1300

Socket wrench

09407–1040

Oil seal press

09471–1490

Guide

For insertion of cylinder liner

09472–1620

Tool

For cooling jet repair

9001–24262

Check bolt

of Torx bolt

For crankshaft rear oil seal press-fit

For cooling jet inspection and adjustment


3–6

PARTS TO BE PREPARED

Shape

Part No.

Name

09470–1280

Remark

For cooling jet inspection

Tool assembly

and adjustment

Instruments JP31199030901005

Name

Remark

Micrometer

For measurement of part outer diameter

Cylinder gauge

For measurement of part inner diameter

Thickness gauge

For measurement of each clearance

Dial gauge

For measurement of parts

Lubricant, etc. JP31199030901006

Name

Remark

Liquid gasket (Threebond TB1207B or equivalent : Black) Liquid gasket (Threebond TB1207D or equivalent : Silver)

For sealing of parts

For sealing of parts

Liquid gasket (Threebond TB1211 or equivalent : White) For sealing of parts Red lead

Valve adjustment

Dye penetrant

For inspection of crack

Lubrication Special tool JP31199030901007

Shape

Part No.

09503–1110

Name

Remark

Oil filter wrench

Lubricant, etc. JP31199030901008

Name Liquid gasket (Threebond TB1207D or equivalent : Silver)

Remark For sealing of parts

Liquid gasket (Threebond TB1211 or equivalent : White) For sealing of parts


3–7

PARTS TO BE PREPARED

Starting and Charging Jig (reference dimensional drawing for manufacture) JP31199030901009

This is used for assembly of bearing. Reference dimensions are shown in the figures below: Jig B (Support jig)

Jig A (Roller bearing insertion jig) φ23{20.827}

Unit : mm{in.}

φ25{0.984}

1C{0.039}

35{1.378} 50{1.964} 70{2.756}

50{1.964}

1C{0.039}

φ50{1.969}

10 - 20 {0.394 - 0.787}

+0.5{0.0196} φ19{0.748} 0 φ30{1.181}

Jig C

Jig D

φ34{1.339}

φ54{2.126} φ60{2.362}

φ41{1.614}

10{0.394}

20{0.787}

20{0.787}

40{1.575}

40{1.575} φ64{2.520}

10{0.394}

φ70{2.756} SAPH311990300034


3–8

PARTS TO BE PREPARED

Instruments JP31199030901010

Alternator Name

Remark

Circuit tester

For measurement of parts

Micrometer

For measurement of parts

Regulator checker (G&M Machinery ICD-101D or equivalent)

For inspection of regulator

Starter Name

Remark

Circuit tester

For measurement of parts

Micrometer

For measurement of part outer diameter

Growler tester

For inspection of armature

Cylinder gauge

For measurement of part inner diameter

Lubricant, etc. JP31199030901011

Name

Remark

Kyodo Yushi Multemp AC-N

For lubrication of parts

Nisseki Mitsubishi Pyroknock #2

For lubrication of parts

Turbocharger Special tool JP31199030901012

Shape

Part No.

09444-1800

Name

Tool assembly

Remark


3–9

PARTS TO BE PREPARED

Engine Failure Diagnosis Special tool JP31199030901016

Shape

Part No.

Name

Remark • Operating system(OS):Windows95, Windows98(IE5.0 or later), Windows2000(SP3, IE5.0 or later),

WindowsXP(SP1a, IE6.0 Personal computer (DOS-V)

or later) • CPU and memory: Conditions that assure operation of the above operating system • Display: 800 x 600, 256 colors or more

HinoDX

Failure diagnosis software (CD-ROM) Used together with the

09121–1040

Hino-Bowie (Interface box)

cable between the vehicle and Hino-Bowie (090421220) This is installed as interruption between vehicle

09049–1080

Signal check harness

harness and the ECU. Tester inspection is allowed in energized status.



ENGINE ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY

4–1

ENGINE

4 ENGINE ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY Service procedure Overhaul item

Inspection Before Service ......................................... 4-2 Measurement of compression pressure ................. 4-2 Engine Body................................................................ 4-4 Removal .................................................................. 4-4 Installation............................................................... 4-6 Work after installation ............................................. 4-6

4


4–2

ENGINE ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY

Inspection Before Service Measurement of compression pressure JP31199040702001

• Measure the compression pressure before

NOTICE

disassembly of the engine and record the result. Regular measurement of the compression pressure can tell the engine status. 1.

Preparation before measurement (1)

Charge the battery completely.

(2)

Check the valve clearance and adjust it when exceeding the standard value.

(3)

Warm the engine and set the water temperature to 80

(4)

Remove the air cleaner.

(5)

Remove the head cover.

qC{176qF}.

(6)

Remove all injectors.

(7)

To prevent spread of engine oil, attach a jig which cuts a head cover in half. (Cut it so that the camshaft may be covered.

2.

Measurement (1)

Attach a special tool to the nozzle sheet of the cylinder where the compression pressure is measured with nozzle clamp and clamp fixing bolts.

Special tool

Special tool : Compression gauge adapter Engine

Part No. 09952-1110

SAPH311990400001

09552-1030 (3/4-16 UNF) 09552-1060 (W16 ridges 18) (2)

Parts tightened Insert in the injector mounting area Adjusting to screw size of air gauge, the adapter which it selects

Turn the starter and measure the compression pressure.

! CAUTION

• Do not operate the starter for 15 seconds or more. • Since the air cleaner is removed, prevent entry of dirt.


4–3

ENGINE ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY (3)

Measure the compression pressure of each cylinder continuously. Engine revolution 150r/min {rpm} Compression pressure: Unit MPa {kgf/cm2,lbf/in.2} Standard value Service limit Difference between cylinders

(4)

3.4 - 3.7 {35 - 38 ,493 - 537} 2.7 {28, 392} 0.3{3, 44} or less

If the compression pressure is the service limit or less or if the difference between cylinders is over the standard value, overhaul the engine.

(5)

After measurement, reassemble the removed parts.


4–4

ENGINE ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY

Engine Body Removal JP31199040702002

1.

2. Right side of engine

Preliminary work before removal of engine (1)

Place the vehicle on a level ground.

(2)

Block tires with scotch.

(3)

Remove the battery cable from the battery minus terminal.

Drain of coolant and engine oil (1)

Drain coolant from the radiator drain cock and the oil cooler drain plug. • Removal of the filler cap facilitates quick

NOTICE

drain. • Connection of an appropriate hose to the oil cooler drain pipe facilitates drain of coolant

Oil cooler drain plug

without spread.

SAPH311990400002

! CAUTION

• To prevent burn, drain coolant after the temperature is sufficiently low. • To dispose coolant, observe the specified method (waste disposal) or the method with attention to environment.

(2)

Drain engine oil from the oil pan drain plug as required.

! CAUTION

• To prevent burn, drain coolant after the temperature is sufficiently low. • Dispose coolant according to the specified method (waste treatment) or with a method considering the environment.

3.

Removal of intake hose, intercooler hose and exhaust pipe

Intake manifold

(1)

Loosen the clamp and remove the intake hose.

(2)

Remove nuts and remove the exhaust pipe.

! CAUTION

• Close the opening of the intake manifold with a packing tape to prevent entry of dirt inside

Cylinder head Cover

SAPH311990400003

the engine.


ENGINE ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY 4.

4–5

Disconnection of fuel hose (1)

Remove the fuel hoses (feed side and return side). Wrap the removed hose with a plastic sheet with its end facing upward to prevent spill of fuel.

! CAUTION

• Wipe spilled fuel with a rag.

SAPH311990400004

Fan shroud

5. Cooling Fan

Connector

Clip

Disconnection of water, engine oil pipes, etc. (1)

Disconnect the hose between the radiator and the engine.

(2)

Disconnect the car heater pipe.

(3)

Disconnect the oil filter hose.

(4)

Disconnect the fuel filter hose.

! CAUTION

• Wipe off spilled water and engine oil with waste.

SAPH311990400005

6. Shackle

Within 30

Engine lifting (Lifting the engine single unit) (1)

Shackle

Place a commercially available shackle and a special tool wire rope with the engine hanger. Special tool : 09491–1010 Wire rope

(2)

Keep a little slack of the wire rope.

! CAUTION

• Keep the wire inclination 30q from the vertical line.

SAPH311990400006

(3)

Image drawing

When the wire is completely tense, make sure that the wire is firmly engaged with the engine hanger. Then, lift the engine slowly.

! CAUTION

• Work carefully so that the engine may not come in contact with the frame and others.

SAPH311990400007


4–6

ENGINE ASSEMBLY/DISASSEMBLY

Installation JP31199040702003

1.

Connection of fuel hose (1)

Insert a fuel hose and fix it with a hose band.

Work after installation JP31199040702004

1.

Inspection of engine oil (1)

Make sure that the drain cock is closed.

(2)

Pour engine oil.

(3)

Check the amount of oil with an oil level gauge. Engine oil amount (L{us gal}) Oil pan

Oil filter and etc

Approx. 18{4.76}

Approx. 2.5{0.66}

Filler cap SAPH311990400008

! CAUTION

• Please use Hino genuine engine oil

Multi grade

SAE #10W-30

Single grade

SAE #30

2.

Air bleeding of fuel system

Air bleeding bolt Priming pump

(1)

Prepare a rag to receive fuel at the end of the drain valve.

(2)

Loosen the air bleeding plug of the fuel filter.

(3)

The priming pump is moved front and back.

(4)

Move the pump until fuel without bubble comes out from the drain valve.

Drain valve

(5)

Tighten the air bleeding bolt. Tightening torque : 1.7 - 2.6 N m {17.3 - 23 kgf cm, 1.2 - 1.9 lbf ft}

SAPH311990400009

(6)

Move the priming pump again until it becomes heavy.

! CAUTION

• After work, wipe off spilled fuel. After start of the engine, make sure that there is no fuel leak.


FUEL SYSTEM

5–1

ENGINE

5 FUEL SYSTEM Setup layout Layout

Fuel System ................................................................ 5-2 Fuel system diagram............................................... 5-2 Part layout .............................................................. 5-3 Fuel filter drain (on machine main unit)................... 5-5 Replacement of fuel filter element (on machine main unit) ........................................... 5-6 Replacement of supply pump ................................ 5-7 Inspection of supply pump ...................................... 5-9 Replacement of injector ........................................ 5-10 Inspection of injector ............................................. 5-11 Replacement of common rail ................................ 5-12 Inspection of common rail ..................................... 5-12

5


5–2

FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel System Fuel system diagram JP31199050402001

Feed pipe

Injection pipe Flow damper Injector Common rail Leakage pipe

Pressure limiter

Through feed pipe

Overflow pipe Supply pump

Fuel tank Fuel filter

SAPH311990500001


5–3

FUEL SYSTEM

Part layout JP31199050402003

SAPH311990500034

11195

Nozzle clamp holder

23670

Injector

11334

Bearing holder case

23810

Common rail assembly

11491A

Common rail bracket

9645A

O–ring*

22100

Supply pump

9851A

O–ring*

*Parts not to be reused. Tightening torque 22825

63.7N m {650 kgf cm, 47lbf ft}

9068-08320

28.5N m {290kgf cm, 21lbf ft}

900124

108N m {1,100 kgf cm, 80lbf ft}

9068-08400

28.5N m {290kgf cm, 21lbf ft}

900124A

25N m {250 kgf cm, 18lbf ft}

9068-08850

28.5N m {290kgf cm, 21lbf ft}

9068-08250

28.5N m {290kgf cm, 21lbf ft}


5–4

FUEL SYSTEM

SAPH311990500035

23081

Leakage pipe

23816A

Through feed pipe

23711

Injection pipe

23816B

Through feed pipe

23712

Injection pipe

9659B

Gasket*

23713

Injection pipe

9659C

Gasket*

23714

Injection pipe

9659D

Gasket*

23783A

Fuel pipe

9659E

Gasket*

23816

Through feed pipe *Parts not to be reused. Service procedure Replacement procedure item


5–5

FUEL SYSTEM

Fuel filter drain (on machine main unit) JP31199050704001

1.

Prepare a water container under the drain pipe.

2.

Loosen the fuel filter air bleeding bolt and the drain valve.

Air bleeding bolt Priming pump

Discharge water at the bottom of the fuel filter case. ! CAUTION

• Since discharged water contains fuel, observe the local disposal procedure for

Drain valve

disposal. 3.

Close the drain valve.

4.

Start the priming pump and bleed air from the system.

SAPH311990500006

! CAUTION

• Make sure that the fuel filter air bleeding bolt is loose.

5.

Tighten the fuel filter air bleeding bolt. Tightening torque : 1.7 - 2.6 N m {17.3 - 23 kgf cm, 1.2 - 1.9 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• After work, wipe off spilled water or fuel. After start of the engine, make sure that there is no fuel leak.


5–6

FUEL SYSTEM

Replacement of fuel filter element (on machine main unit) JP31199050704002

1.

Removal of water cup (1)

Fuel filter head

the fuel filter.

Fuel filter element

(2) O-ring

O-ring

Refer to "Drain of the fuel filter" and discharge water from

2.

Removal of fuel filter element (1)

Water cup

Remove the water cup of the fuel filter.

Remove the fuel filter element.

! CAUTION

• Since the filter contains diesel oil, prepare a tray.

SAPH311990500007

3.

Installation of fuel filter element (1)

The soiling and the foreign material of the clamp face are removed.

! CAUTION

• The fuel is applied to the O-ring surface of fuel filter element.

(2)

After the O-ring of the fuel filter element touches the fuel filter head, turn by 3/4 to 1 1/2 and install the fuel filter head.

! CAUTION

• The fuel is applied to the O-ring surface of the water cup.

(3)

After the O-ring of the water cup touches the fuel filter element, turn by 1/2 to 3/4 and install the fuel filter element.

(4)

Tighten the fuel filter drain valve.

! CAUTION

(5)

• Element is not reused.

Start the priming pump and bleed air from the system.

! CAUTION

• Make sure that the fuel filter air bleeding bolt is loose.

(6)

Tighten the fuel filter air bleeding bolt. Tightening torque : 1.7 - 2.6 N m {17.3 - 23 kgf cm, 1.2 - 1.9 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• After work, wipe off spilled fuel. After start of the engine, make sure that there is no fuel leak.


5–7

FUEL SYSTEM

Replacement of supply pump JP31199050704003

1.

Compression upper dead center setting of No.1 cylinder (1)

Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise when viewed from the flywheel. Set the timing mark in the flywheel housing inspection window to "1".

Flywheel

(2)

Remove the inspection window plug in the bearing holder case of the supply pump. Tighten the guide bolt (9069-

1 Flywheel housing

08180) very gently and make sure that the bolt seating comes in close contact with the bearing holder. ! CAUTION

• If it is raised, there must be contact other than the stopper key for the coupling flange. Do

SAPH311990500008

not tighten hard.

Close contact

Raised

SAPH311990500009

2.

Removal of supply pump (1)

Remove the fuel pipe connected to the supply pump.

Supply pump

! CAUTION Pipe A

• Do not remove pipes A.

(2)

Remove the supply pump at the bearing holder case.

(3)

Remove the drive gear using the special tool designed for that purpose. Special tool : 09650-1101 Bearing puller

SAPH311990500010

3. O-ring

Assembly of supply pump and bearing holder case (1)

Fit a new O-ring to the supply pump and install the bearing holder case.

Supply pump

Tightening torque : 28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21 lbf ft}

Bearing holder case

Bolt SAPH311990500011


5–8

FUEL SYSTEM (2)

Secure the supply pump, install the injection pump drive gear on the shaft, and use a vice or similar to prevent turning while tightening the nut. Tightening torque : 63.7 N m {650 kgf cm, 47 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• Do not use the guide bolt for stopper key of the shaft.

SAPH311990500012

4.

Installation of supply pump (1)

Match the match mark of the bearing holder case with the missing tooth of the injection pump drive gear.

SAPH311990500013

(2) Supply pump

O-ring

Install a new O-ring and mount the air compressor and supply pump assembly on the flywheel housing. Tightening torque : 28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• Adjust the gear so that the compression top dead center alignment of the No.1 cylinder may not be changed. • Be sure to remove the guide bolt in cranking the engine. • After assembly, be sure to remove the guide

SAPH311990500014

bolt and install the inspection window plug. 5.

Update of supply pump learning value (1)

When the supply pump is replaced, update the learning value memorized in the engine ECU with the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC. (Refer to "HinoDX operation manual".)

! CAUTION

• If learning value is not updated, correct common rail pressure is not controlled, resulting in engine stall or high common rail pressure. Therefore, when the supply pump is replaced, be sure to update the learning value.


5–9

FUEL SYSTEM

Inspection of supply pump JP31199050704004

1.

Inspection of suction control valve and fuel temperature sensor (1)

Measure the resistance of the suction control valve terminals and the fuel temperature sensor terminals using a circuit tester. If it is beyond the standard, remove the

Fuel temperature sensor

supply pump assembly and request for replacement at the Denso service shop.

Suction control valve

Between suction control valve terminals SAPH311990500026

Standard value

7.65 - 8.15:(at 20qC {68qF})

Terminals between fuel temperature sensors 13.5 - 16.5k:(at -20qC{68qF}) Standard value

2.2 - 2.7k:(at 20qC{68qF}) 0.29 - 0.35k:(at 80qC{176qF})


5–10

FUEL SYSTEM

Replacement of injector JP31199050704005

1.

Removal of injector (1)

Remove the fixing bolt and remove the plate and the injection pipe oil seal.

(2) 2.

Remove the nozzle clamp holder and remove the injector.

Installation of injector (1)

Attach a new O-ring to the groove of the cylinder head and insert the injector.

Fixing bolt

Injector

! CAUTION

• Apply engine oil to the O-ring and be careful to prevent pinching of the O-ring.

Injection pipe

(2)

Install the nozzle clamp holder and tack weld the injector temporarily.

! CAUTION

Nozzle clamp holder

• Do not fix the nozzle holder until the injection pipe is tack welded.

(3)

Put a new injection pipe oil seal on the injector and install the plate.

Injection pipe oil seal

! CAUTION

• Install the injection pipe oil seal to prevent undue force to the injection nozzle. (Offset

O-ring

position between the injection pipe oil seal and the injection nozzle may cause oil leak or poor assembly of the injection pipe.) (4)

SAPH311990500027

Assemble the injection pipe temporarily and tighten the fixing bolt of the nozzle clamp holder. Tightening torque : 25 N m {250 kgf cm, 1.8 lbf ft}

3.

Entry of injector correction value to the engine ECU (entry using HinoDX and QR code reader)

QR code

! CAUTION

• When the injector is replaced, it is necessary to enter the injector correction value (QR code) described on the new injector to the engine ECU. Incorrect entry of the correction

Injector

value may result in faulty engine. NOTICE

SAPH311990500028

• Available entry methods of the injector correction value are the PC tool and the QR code reader. • The flow of work is described in the following. If you want details regarding any procedure, however, refer to the PC Tools instruction manual.


5–11

FUEL SYSTEM (1)

Read the injector QR code with the scanner of the QR code reader and prepare the correction data file.

(2)

Enter the injector correction value directly from the PC tools to the engine ECU.

PC QR Code reader

Hino-Bowie Engine-use code QR code

Connector New injector ECU

SAPH311990500029

Inspection of injector JP31199050704006

1. <Cross-section view of injector head>

Inspection of injector insulation (1)

Remove the injector plastic terminal cap (upper).

(2)

Measure the insulation resistance between the injector upper body and one terminal (no polarity) of two terminals for the injector harness.

Terminal (harness tightening area)

Terminal cap (upper)

Standard value (normal Terminal cap (lower)

temperature) (3)

1000M:or more

Measure the resistance value between two terminals above.

Injector harness and rubber seal

Standard value (at 20qC) (4)

0.45:r0.1

If the resistance value in (2) and (3) exceeds the standard value, replace the injector assembly.

Upper body

SAPH311990500030

2.

Cleaning of injector (1)

Remove sludge at or around the terminal, if any.

! CAUTION

• In removing sludge, do not use a cleaning agent. Wipe it off with a rag. Use of a cleaning agent may result in electric failure due to penetration of the agent.


5–12

FUEL SYSTEM

Replacement of common rail JP31199050704007

1.

Removal of common rail (1)

Remove the common rail together with the flow damper, pressure sensor and pressure limiter from the intake manifold.

! CAUTION Pressure limiter

• Remove dirt around parts before removing the common rail

Flow damper Pressure sensor SAPH311990500031

2.

Installation of common rail (1)

Install the common rail on the intake manifold.

SAPH311990500032

Inspection of common rail JP31199050704008

1.

Inspection of common rail pressure sensor (1)

Measure the resistance value between terminals using a circuit tester. If it exceeds the standard value, replace the common rail assembly

Between 1 and 2 Between 2 and 3 SAPH311990500033

Standard value (k:) At stop of engine

0.5 - 3.0

6.5 - 18.5


ELECTRICAL

7–1

ENGINE

7 ELECTRICAL Setup layout Layout

Electrical System........................................................ 7-2 Part layout ............................................................... 7-2 Part layout ............................................................... 7-5 Layout of components............................................. 7-5 Inspection of components ....................................... 7-8 Installation of component ...................................... 7-10 Installation of starter ............................................. 7-10 Installation of alternator ........................................ 7-11

7


7–2

ELECTRICAL

Electrical System Part layout JP31199070402001

SAPH311990700001

82051

Injector harness

89390

Boost pressure sensor

83420

Water temperature sender gauge

89410

Engine sub revolution sensor

83530

Oil pressure warning switch

89411

Engine main revolution sensor

Tightening torque 9190-06121

4N m{40kgf cm, 3lbf ft}


7–3

ELECTRICAL

SAPH311990700002

12509

Alternator brace

9011-64410

Through bolt

12511

Alternator bracket

9241-10107

Fixing bolt at brace

27040

Alternator assembly

9189A

Adjusting bolt

28100

Starter assembly

Tightening torque 9069A

154N m{1,570kgf cm, 114lbf ft}

9241-10107

51N m{520kgf cm, 38lbf ft}

9011-64401

83N m{850kgf cm, 61lbf ft}

9241-14147

154N m{1,570kgf cm, 114lbf ft}

9189A

5.9N m{60kgf cm, 4lbf ft}


7–4

ELECTRICAL

SAPH311990700003

19110

Glow plug


7–5

ELECTRICAL

Layout of components JP31199070402003

Boost pressure sensor Engine sub revolution sensor

Engine main revolution sensor

Engine revolution sensor

Common rail pressure sensor

Fuel temperature sensor Suction control valve (SCV)

Left side view SAPH311990700004


7–6

ELECTRICAL

Oil pressure warning switch Coolamt temperature sender gauge

Engine sub revolution sensor

Engine main revolution sensor

Boost pressure sensor

Suction control valve (SCV)

Fuel temperature sensor

Upper view SAPH311990700005


7–7

ELECTRICAL

Boost pressure sensor Coolamt temperature sender gauge

Engine revolution sensor

Front view SAPH311990700006 Service procedure Overhaul item


7–8

ELECTRICAL

Inspection of components JP31199070702001

1.

Inspection of oil pressure warning switch (Laid out on the oil filter) (1)

Apply pressure with air or oil and check continuity between terminals using a circuit tester. If it is faulty, replace it. At no load or less than 39kPa

With continuity

{0.4kgf/cm2 ,5.6565lbf/in.2} At 39kPa

SAPH311990700007

{0.4kgf/cm2 ,5.6565lbf/in.2}

Without continuity

Oil pressure warning switch

39.2 - 58.8kPa 2 2 {0.4 - 0.6kgf/cm ,5.7 - 8.5 lbf/in } ON 2

2.9kPa{0.3kgf/cm , 2 4.7lbf/in } Within Toward pressure increase

OFF

SAPH311990700008

2. Coolant temperature sender gauge

Inspection of coolant temperature sender gauge (Installation on thermostat case)

Connector color: Dark

(1)

Heat the coolant temperature sender gauge using hot water.

(2)

A

Measure the resistance between terminals using a circuit tester. If it is faulty, replace the gauge. Between A and C

C B

Temperat SAPH311990700009

ure (qC{qF}) Resistanc e value (:)

-20

20

80

110

{-68}

{68}

{176}

{230}

13.84 -

2.32 -

0.31 -

0.1399 -

16.33

2.59

0.326

0.1435

Between B and body Temperat ure (qC,qF)

75

100

{167}

{212}

Resistanc e value (:)

79 - 92

35.5 42.5


7–9

ELECTRICAL 3.

Inspection of glow plug (1)

Measure continuity between the body and the terminal using a circuit tester. If it is faulty, replace the glow plug. Standard value Resistance value : :(Normal temperature

2.59 - 3.29

20qC{68qF}) SAPH311990700010

4.

Inspection of suction control valve SCV and fuel temperature sensor (1)

For inspection and replacement of the suction control valve (SCV) and the fuel temperature sensor, refer to the

Fuel temperature sensor

chapter of "J05E FUEL SYSTEM ".

Suction control valve (SCV) SAPH311990700011

5.

Inspection of common rail pressure sensor (1)

For inspection and replacement of the common rail pressure sensor, refer to the chapter of "J05E FUEL SYSTEM".

SAPH311990700012

6.

Inspection of injector (1)

For inspection and replacement of the injector, refer to the chapter of "J05E FUEL SYSTEM".


7–10

ELECTRICAL

Installation of component JP31199070702002

1.

Installation of engine revolution sensor (1)

Confirm that there are O-rings on the sensors and then mount one sensor on top of the flywheel housing and one on the cam housing.

O-ring

NOTICE

• Since this sensor is a flange type, gap does not have to be adjusted.

Engine sub-revolution sensor

O-ring

Engine main revolution sensor SAPH311990700013

Installation of starter JP31199070702003

1.

Install the starter with bolts and nuts. Tightening torque : 154 N m {1,570 kgf cm, 114 lbf ft}

SAPH311990700014


7–11

ELECTRICAL

Installation of alternator JP31199070702004

1.

Installation of alternator (1)

Tighten the alternator temporarily using through bolts and nuts.

(2) 2. 㧭

Tighten the adjusting bolts and fixing bolts temporarily.

V–belt tension adjustment

Coolant Pump Pulley

When installing a

Item

new belt

Deflection Alternator Pulley

At the time of inspection

8 - 10mm

10 - 12mm

{0.3152 - 0.394in.}

{0.394 - 0.472in.}

490 - 570 N Tension

{50 - 58 kgf, 110 -

Crankshaft Pulley SAPH311990700015

128 lbf}

320 - 400 N {33 - 41 kgf, 72 - 90 lbf}

Special tool : 09444-1210 Compression gauge (used at the time of measuring the deflection amount) [ Reference push force 98N {10kgf, 22lbf} ] 95506-00090 (Denso part No.) Belt tension gauge (used at the time of measuring the tension force) ! CAUTION

• If the V-belt is replaced with a new one, it becomes loose due to initial fitting. Run the engine for three to five minutes and adjust the tension of the belt again.

NOTICE

• At the time of inspection, the new V-belt has reached the value after complete initial stretching. A new V-belt completes initial stretching after running the engine for approximately two hours.

(1)

Tighten the through bolt of the commutator end frame. Tightening torque : Through bolt 83 N m {850 kgf cm, 61 lbf ft}

(2)

Tighten the lock nut on the brace side. Tightening torque : Adjusting bolt 51 N m {520 kgf cm, 38 lbf ft}

(3)

Tighten the adjusting bolt and make sure the bolt is locked. Tightening torque : Adjusting bolt 5.9 N m {60 kgf cm, 4 lbf ft}

(4)

Securely connect the ground wire terminal for the alternator. Tightening torque : Adjusting bolt 4 N m {40 kgf cm, 3 lbf ft}



INTAKE

8–1

ENGINE

8 INTAKE Setup layout Layout

Intake Manifold ........................................................... 8-2 Part layout ............................................................... 8-2 Replacement........................................................... 8-4

8


8–2

INTAKE

Intake Manifold Part layout JP31199080402001

SAPH311990800001

17103

Intake pipe

17113

Intake pipe

17111

Intake manifold

17171

Gasket*

9240-08087

28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21lbf ft}

*Parts not to be reused. Tightening torque 9068-08320

28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21lbf ft}

9068-08550

28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21lbf ft}


8–3

INTAKE

SAPH311990800002

17104A

Gasket*

17148

*Parts not to be reused. Service procedure Replacement procedure item

Plate


8–4

INTAKE

Replacement JP31199080704001

1.

Removal of intake manifold (1)

2.

Remove bolts and nuts and remove the intake manifold.

Installation of intake manifold (1)

Clean inside of the intake manifold and the cylinder head.

(2)

Assemble a new gasket.

! CAUTION

• Install the gasket so that the protrusion may come at the rear end stud bolt of the cylinder head.

Protrusion SAPH311990800003

(3)

Install the intake manifold and tighten it with bolts and nuts. Tightening torque : 28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21 lbf ft}

SAPH311990800004

3.

Installation of intake pipe (1)

After removing contamination on the contact surface, apply liquid gasket [Threebond TB1207B(black) or equivalent] to the circumference of the contact surface.

! CAUTION

• Apply it continuously. • Apply the liquid gasket at the width of 1.5 to 2.5 mm {0.0591 to 0.09843 in.} • Install the oil cooler within 20 minutes after application of the liquid gasket.

(2)

Install the intake pipe with bolts and nuts.


ENGINE MECHANICAL

9–1

ENGINE

9 ENGINE MECHANICAL Setup layout Layout

Cylinder Head ............................................................. 9-2 Part layout ............................................................... 9-2 Replacement of cylinder head ................................ 9-4 Liquid gasket application procedure for semicircular plug (only when semicircular plug is removed) ....... 9-7 Replacement of head cover .................................... 9-7 Overhaul of cylinder head ....................................... 9-8 Cylinder Block .......................................................... 9-11 Part layout ............................................................. 9-11 Overhaul ............................................................... 9-12 Timing Gear Cover and Flywheel Housing............. 9-16 Part layout ............................................................. 9-16 Replacement of flywheel housing ......................... 9-17 Replacement of end plate ..................................... 9-17 Replacement of crankshaft front oil seal............... 9-18 Replacement of crankshaft rear oil seal................ 9-20 Main Moving Parts.................................................... 9-22 Part layout ............................................................. 9-22 Replacement of piston and connecting rod .......... 9-23 Inspection of piston and connecting rod ............... 9-27 Replacement of connecting rod bushing............... 9-29 Replacement of crankshaft ................................... 9-31 Inspection of crankshaft ........................................ 9-33 Replacement of crankshaft pulley ......................... 9-36 Replacement of flywheel ...................................... 9-36 Camshaft and Idle Gear ........................................... 9-39 Part layout ............................................................. 9-39 Removal of camshaft ............................................ 9-40 Disassembly of camshaft ...................................... 9-40 Inspection of camshaft and camshaft bearing ...... 9-41 Assembly of camshaft........................................... 9-42 Installation of camshaft ......................................... 9-43 Gear train layout ................................................... 9-45 Removal of timing gear ........................................ 9-45 Inspection of timing gear components .................. 9-46 Installation of timing gear ...................................... 9-47 Overhaul of sub-idle gear (bearing case side) ...... 9-49 Inspection of installation status for each gear ...... 9-51 Valve System............................................................. 9-55 Part layout ............................................................. 9-55 Overhaul of valve system...................................... 9-56 Adjustment of valve clearance .............................. 9-59

9


9–2

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Cylinder Head Part layout JP31199090402001

SAPH311990900001

11101

Cylinder head assembly

11135

Exhaust valve seat

11122

Valve guide

11176

Nozzle seat

11131

Intake valve seat

900115

O-ring*

*Parts not to be reused.


9–3

ENGINE MECHANICAL

SAPH311990900002

11115

Cylinder head gasket

12108

Oil filler cap

11188

Semicircular plug

12505

Silent block

11201

Cylinder head cover

23074

Injection pipe oil seal*

11213

Head cover gasket *Parts not to be reused.

Tightening torque 11185

59N m{600kgf cm, 44lbf ft}+90q+90q

9069B

59N m{600kgf cm, 44lbf ft}

11185A

59N m{600kgf cm, 44lbf ft}+90q+135q

9349A

30N m{300kgf cm, 22lbf ft}

11185B

59N m{600kgf cm, 44lbf ft}+90q+180q

SZ105

59N m{600kgf cm, 44lbf ft}

9068-08400

28.5N m{290kgf cm, 21lbf ft} Service procedure Replacement procedure item


9–4

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Replacement of cylinder head JP31199090704001

1.

Removal of cylinder head and head gasket (1)

Loosen the head bolts from outside to inside gradually (1/ 4 turn for each) as shown in the order of the figure and

10

6

18

14

7

21

15 11

17

13

20 19

9

4

12 16

remove them. 5

8

No.4 - No.21 : M12 Bolts SAPH311990900003

(2) Figure is an example of work.

Remove the cylinder head using a special tool and hoist. Special tool : 09433–1070 Eye bolt

NOTICE

• If it is difficult to remove the cylinder head, insert a chisel between the cylinder head and the cylinder block, and move the chisel vertically so that the contact surface may not be damaged. Then, separate the cylinder head.

SAPH311990900004

2.

Inspection of head bolt length (1)

Measure the underhead length of the head bolt (M12 only) using vernier calipers. If it is beyond the service limit, replace it with a new one.

Underhead length

SAPH311990900005

Service limit (mm{in.})

126.5{4.9803 in.}


ENGINE MECHANICAL 3.

9–5

Installation of cylinder head gasket and liquid gasket application procedure (1)

Water hole seal ring

Cut the rear end plate gasket to be flush with the surface of the cylinder block upper surface using a scraper.

(2)

Install the cylinder head gasket on the cylinder block and the flywheel housing.

! CAUTION

• Remove dirt, water or oil from the mounting surfaces of the cylinder head and the cylinder block before work.

SAPH311990900006

• Never reuse the gasket. Otherwise, it may damage the engine. • The water hole seal ring of the cylinder head gasket is susceptible to damage. Avoid contact with hand or object. • Before installation of the cylinder head gasket, make sure that there is no fall of or damage to the seal ring. (3)

Apply appropriate amount of liquid gasket [Threebond TB1211 (white) or equivalent] to the cylinder head gasket

Application area of liquid gasket

hole at the joint surface between the cylinder block and The arrow shape area is different from the actual shape.

the flywheel housing. ! CAUTION

• Apply the liquid gasket so that the surface of the liquid gasket may be raised on the cylinder head gasket. • Install the oil cooler within 20 minutes after

Application area of liquid gasket

application of the liquid gasket.

Liquid gasket Cylinder head Cylinder block

Flywheel housing

Small

Rear end plate Clearance Too small Clearance

Section A - A

Clearance Raised from upper surface SAPH311990900007

4.

Installation of cylinder head (1)

Clean the head bolt seat at the cylinder head upper surface and the cylinder head lower surface.

(2)

Apply engine oil to the head bolt seat and the bolt thread.


9–6

ENGINE MECHANICAL (3)

Align the dowel pins of the cylinder block using a special tool and hoist and mount the cylinder head.

Figure is an example of work.

Special tool : 09433–1070 Eye bolt ! CAUTION

• Before mounting the cylinder head, make sure that there is no foreign matter in the cylinder. • When the cylinder head is mounted, be careful for engagement between the cam idle

SAPH311990900004

gear and the sub-idle gear. (Contact of gear teeth with undue force may cause impact mark or chipping, resulting in abnormal noise or missing tooth.) • Mounting of the cylinder head with guide bolt

NOTICE

can prevent displacement of the liquid gasket. (4)

Tighten the Nos. 21 - 4 head bolts (M12 only) in order, starting at the center and working outward. Tightening torque : 59 N˜m {600 kgf˜cm, 44 lbf˜ft}

(5)

Re-tighten the Nos. 21 - 4 head bolts in order, starting at the center and working outward.

Tightening torque : 59 N˜m {600 kgf˜cm, 44 lbf˜ft} (6)

Mark the heads of the head bolts (M12 only) using paint.

(7)

Tighten the head bolts (M12 only) 90q more, following the tightening sequence. (1st time)

SAPH311990900008

(8)

Using the same procedure, tighten the head bolts (M12 only) to the angles shown in the table. (2nd time) Tightening angle

Head bolts No.

90q

1,2,7,8,9,10,15,16,17

135q

4,5,12,13

180q

3,6,11,14,18

SAPH311990900009

(9)

Make sure the head bolts that have the same tightening angle markings have the same orientation.

Paint mark

! CAUTION

• If a bolt is turned excessively in retightening, do not loosen it.

SAPH311990900010


9–7

ENGINE MECHANICAL (10) Tighten remaining head bolts (M10) in the order in the figure. This just 3 tighten

Tightening torque : 59 N m {600 kgf cm, 44 lbf ft}

3 2 1

SAPH311990900012

Liquid gasket application procedure for semicircular plug (only when semicircular plug is removed) JP31199090704002

1.

Remove liquid gasket from the cylinder plug and the camshaft housing.

Semicircular plug

2.

Coat the semicircular plugs at the front and rear of the cylinder head with liquid gasket (Three Bond TB 1207BBlack or equivalent), and install the semicircular plugs.

3.

Liquid gasket application region

Temporarily install the cylinder head cover with the gasket attached, and execute a parallel adjustment of the semicircular plugs.

SAPH311990900013

! CAUTION

• Be sure to wipe protruding liquid gasket.

Replacement of head cover JP31199090704003

1.

Installation of head cover (1)

Wipe off the liquid gasket stuck to the sides of the semicircular plugs on the front and rear ends of the cylinder head.

(2)

surfaces of the cylinder head cover and the camshaft

Cylinder Head Cover

housing. Install a new head cover gasket on the cylinder head cover.

bolt

Silent Block

Wipe dirt (including liquid gasket) and oil on the joint

Cylinder Head Cover Gasket SAPH311990900014


9–8

ENGINE MECHANICAL (3)

Coat the semicircular plugs with liquid gasket (Three Bond TB 1207B-Black or equivalent) just before you install the cylinder head cover.

! CAUTION

• Install the oil cooler within 20 minutes after application of the liquid gasket.

SAPH311990900015

(4) Cylinder Head cover

Bolt

Put the cylinder head cover on the cylinder head and tighten bolts.

Silent block

Tightening torque : 28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21 lbf ft} • Silent block the rubber is attached to the

NOTICE Cylinder Head cover gasket

spacer Cylinder Head cover lower surface Cylinder head SAPH311990900016

Overhaul item

Overhaul of cylinder head JP31199090702001

1.

Cleaning of cylinder head (1)

Remove carbon or other deposit using a scraper.

(2)

Clean the cylinder head.

! CAUTION

• To remove carbon or other deposit, do not damage the lower surface of the cylinder head.

SAPH311990900017

2. Intake

Replacement of valve guide

Exhaust

(1)

Remove the valve stem seal.

(2)

Remove the valve guide using a brass bar or press.

(3)

When a new valve guide is assembled, do not pry the end in assembly and press fit using a special tool. Special tool : 09471–1520 Guide

Lower surface of cylinder head SAPH311990900018

! CAUTION

• In press fit, be careful not to damage the valve stem at the upper/lower ends of the guide. • In press fit, be sure to apply engine oil to the circumference of the valve guide.


ENGINE MECHANICAL 3. Backing metal

Valve seat

9–9

Replacement of valve seat

! CAUTION

• The valve seat replacement procedure below may damage the cylinder head depending on the case. It is recommended that a request for replacement be made to a machining vendor.

Valve

Electric welding

(1) Cut three areas from here.

If the valve seat is replaced, use an out-of-use valve. After cutting three pieces from the valve circumference, weld them to the valve seat.

SAPH311990900019

! CAUTION

• Apply grease to protect the cylinder head lower surface from welding spatter before work.

(2)

Put a backup metal (e.g. brass bar) at the valve stem head and pull out the valve seat using a press.

(3) (4)

Remove welding spatter or dirt on the valve seat surface. Heat the cylinder head to approx. 80 to 100 qC and strike the cooled valve seat into the mounting area of the cylinder head.

SAPH311990900020

(5)

Apply small amount of lapping compound to the contact surface between the valve and the valve seat.

(6)

Strike gently while turning the valve using a special tool for adjustment. Special tool : 09431–1020 Valve lapping tool

SAPH311990900021

4.

Replacement of nozzle seat (1)

Tap the nozzle seat from the cylinder head lower part. Then, put an appropriate bolt inside.

(2)

Hit the bolt head using a hammer and pull out the nozzle seat toward the the cylinder head upper part.

(3)

Remove the O-ring from the cylinder head.

! CAUTION

• After pulling out the nozzle seat, be sure to remove deposit such as remaining liquid

SAPH311990900022

gasket or dirt.


9–10

ENGINE MECHANICAL (4)

After attaching a new O-ring into the nozzle seat hole of

Cylinder head

the cylinder head, apply the liquid gasket [Threebond TB1211 (white) or equivalent] at the lower part of a new

O-ring

nozzle seat and assemble it on the cylinder head. Nozzle sheet

! CAUTION

• Be sure to replace the O-ring with a new part. Reuse may cause water leak or gas leak, resulting in overheat or crack of the cylinder head.

SAPH311990900023

(5)

Clamp the nozzle seat using a special tool.

Nozzle seat

Bar

Special tool : 09472–1210 Bar 9800–06100 Steel ball

Cylinder Head

Steel ball Stamp out and clamp SAPH311990900024

5.

Inspection of cylinder head (1)

Inspection of cylinder head distortion a.

Measure distortion of the cylinder head lower surface and the manifold mounting surface using a ruler. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

Longitudinal direction 0.06{0.0024}

0.2{0.0079}

Square direction 0.03{0.0012} b.

If the measurement value is beyond the service limit, replace it.

! CAUTION

• Repair of the lower surface by grinding can change backlash of the timing gear. Do not grind it.

(2)

Inspection of cylinder head crack a.

With dye penetrant test method (red check), make sure that there is no crack or damage in the cylinder head.

Setup layout Layout

SAPH311990900025


9–11

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Cylinder Block Part layout JP31199090402002

SAPH311990900026

11401

Cylinder block assembly

11408

Cooling jet

11467

Cylinder liner

15605

22N m{220kgf cm, 16lbf ft}

Tightening torque 11521

69N m{700kgf cm, 51lbf ft}+90q+45q Service procedure Overhaul item


9–12

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Overhaul JP31199090702002

1.

Replacement of cylinder liner (1)

Put match marks on the flange surfaces of the cylinder block and the cylinder liner using a oil based marker.

! CAUTION

• Store removed cylinder liners for each cylinder number.

Match mark

• Never provide match marks with a punch.

SAPH311990900027

(2)

Pull out the cylinder liner toward the cylinder block upper part using a special tool. Special tool : 09420-2100 Cylinder liner puller

! CAUTION

• Be careful for handling of the cylinder liner. Do not reuse the cylinder liner which has been dropped. • Do not touch the cooling jet during work.

SAPH311990900028

(3)

Apply engine oil to the inner bore of the cylinder block.

(4)

Align the match mark of the cylinder liner with that of the cylinder block. Install the cylinder liner using a special tool. Special tool : 09471–1490 Guide

SAPH311990900029


9–13

ENGINE MECHANICAL

! CAUTION Liner identification mark

Engine type

• When a new cylinder liner is installed, install the cylinder liner with the same identification mark (A, B, C) stamped on the cylinder block.

Block front

Front of engine SAPH311990900030

Cylinder liner

A, B and C marking position

SAPH311990900031

2.

Inspection of protrusion at cylinder liner flange (1)

Fix the cylinder liner using a special tool. Tightening torque : 9.8 N m {100 kgf cm, 7 lbf ft} Special tool : 09420–2100 Cylinder liner puller

(2)

Measure protrusion of the flange using a dial gauge.

Standard value (mm{in.})

0.01 - 0.08 {0.0004 - 0.0031}

SAPH311990900032

3.

Inspection and adjustment of cooling jet (1)

Remove the standard oil check valve and install the cooling jet on the cylinder block using a special tool. Special tool : 9001–24262 Check bolt

Check bolt SAPH311990900033


9–14

ENGINE MECHANICAL (2)

Connect the injection test oil hose from the lower part of the cylinder block to the special tool check bolt.

! CAUTION

• Use new engine oil for injection of oil.

Check bolt Oil hose

SAPH311990900034

(3)

Set a special tool on the cylinder block. Special tool : 09470–1280 Tool assembly

Special tool Tool assembly

Cylinder liner Cooling jet

SAPH311990900035

(4) Oil injection unit (example)

pressure of 196kPa{2kgf/cm2, 28lbf/in.2}.

Pressure Regulator Oil Hose

Inject oil from the nozzle of the cooling jet at the hydraulic

• Refer to the drawing for the oil injection unit.

NOTICE Air tank (Oil tank)

Compressed air

Air gauge

Air hose To cooling jet

Valve SAPH311990900036

(5)

When the injection center hits within the specified line of the gauge, it is considered normal.

Injection

Gauge target circle

! CAUTION

• Oil is susceptible to combustion due to spread. Do not use fire near around. • Work at well ventilated place.

Faulty

Faulty

Normal

Normal

(6)

Make sure that the jet position check gauge hole at the tool assembly end may not interfere with the cooling jet pipe.

SAPH311990900037


9–15

ENGINE MECHANICAL (7)

If injection does not hit the target circle, correct it with a special tool. Special tool : 09472–1620 Tool

(8)

If it cannot be corrected, install a new cooling jet for reinspection.

(9)

Remove the check bolt and install the cooling jet on the cylinder block using the genuine oil check valve. Tightening torque : 22 N m {220 kgf cm, 16 lbf ft}

SAPH311990900038

(10) After assembly of the piston, make sure that the cooling jet does not interfere with the piston at the piston bottom dead center. 4.

Inspection of cylinder block (1)

Inspection of cylinder block distortion a.

Measure distortion on the cylinder block using a ruler. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

Longitudinal direction 0.06{0.0024} Square direction

0.2{0.0079}

0.03{0.0012} b.

If the measurement value is beyond the service limit, replace it.

! CAUTION

• Repair of the upper surface by grinding can change backlash of the timing gear. Do not grind it.

(2)

Inspection of cylinder block crack a.

With dye penetrant test method (red check), make sure that there is no crack or damage in the cylinder block.

Setup layout Layout

SAPH311990900039


9–16

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Timing Gear Cover and Flywheel Housing Part layout JP31199090402003

SAPH311990900040

11309

Front oil seal retainer

11390

End plate

11351

Flywheel housing

9828A

Front oil seal*

11357

Gasket*

9828B

Rear oil seal*

11357A

Gasket*

*Parts not to be reused. Tightening torque 9068-08000

36N m{370kgf cm, 27lbf ft}

90124A

196N m{2,000kgf cm, 145lbf ft}

9068-10750

55N m{560kgf cm, 41lbf ft}

9241-10107

55N m{560kgf cm, 41lbf ft}

9068-60850

55N m{560kgf cm, 41lbf ft}

9339A

55N m{560kgf cm, 41lbf ft}

90124

196N m{2,000kgf cm, 145lbf ft}

9419A

196N m{2,000kgf cm, 145lbf ft}

Service procedure Overhaul item


9–17

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Replacement of flywheel housing JP31199090702003

1.

Removal of flywheel housing (1)

Remove bolts and remove the flywheel housing.

! CAUTION

• Remove bolts fixing the flywheel housing from the cylinder block.

SAPH311990900041

2. Liquid gasket

Installation of flywheel housing (1)

Remove contamination from the joint surfaces of the

(2)

Apply the liquid gasket [Threebond TB1207D (silver) or

flywheel housing and the end plate using a scraper. equivalent] to the flywheel housing as shown in the figure. ! CAUTION

• Apply it continuously. • Apply the liquid gasket at the width of 1.5 to 2.5 mm{0.0591 to 0.0984 in.}.

SAPH311990900042

• Install the oil cooler within 20 minutes after application of the liquid gasket. (3)

B A B

C A A

Install the flywheel housing on the cylinder block with

A

bolts.

C

Tightening torque : 196 N m {2,000 kgf cm, 145 lbf ft} (Area A)

C

36 N m {370 kgf cm, 27 lbf ft} (Area B)

C A A

55 N m {560 kgf cm, 41 lbf ft} (Area C) ! CAUTION

• Tighten bolts fixing the flywheel housing from the cylinder block.

SAPH311990900043

Replacement of end plate JP31199090702004

1.

Removal of end plate (1)

Remove bolts.

(2)

Remove the Torx bolt and remove the end plate using a special tool. Special tool : 09411–1300 Socket wrench

SAPH311990900044


9–18

ENGINE MECHANICAL 2.

Installation of end plate (1)

Install the end plate and a new gasket with bolts.

! CAUTION

• Make sure that there is no dirt or foreign matter on the installation surface of the cylinder block and the screw holes.

(2)

Apply sealant (Super 5M or equivalent) to the thread of the Torx bolt.

(3)

Install the Torx bolt using a special tool. Special tool : 09411–1300 Socket wrench

SAPH311990900044

Tightening torque : 55 N m {560 kgf cm, 41 lbf ft} (4) Cylinder block

Gasket

Cut the gasket with a scraper to be flush to the upper/ lower surfaces of the cylinder block.

End plate Flywheel housing

SAPH311990900045 Replacement procedure item

Replacement of crankshaft front oil seal JP31199090704004

1.

Removal of front oil seal (1)

Install the plate of the special tool oil seal puller on the crankshaft using two crankshaft damper mounting bolts. Special tool : 09420–1731 Oil seal puller

SAPH311990900046

(2)

Hook the special tool oil seal puller with the tab of the front oil seal and install the hook on the plate of the special tool oil seal puller with accompanying bolts.

SAPH311990900047


ENGINE MECHANICAL (3)

9–19

Remove two bolts which installed the plate of the special tool oil seal puller on the crankshaft.

(4)

Attach the accompanying center bolt to the special tool oil seal puller and tighten it. Pull out the front oil seal.

SAPH311990900048

2. Guide

Installation of front oil seal (1)

Insert a new oil seal into the guide of the oil seal press. Special tool : 09407–1030 Oil seal press

! CAUTION

• Be careful for front/rear directions of the front oil seal. (The felt surface is at the crankshaft damper side.)

Oil seal SAPH311990900049

(2)

Remove contamination from the joint surface of the front oil seal and the cylinder block.

(3)

Apply small amount of engine oil to the seal area of the front oil seal.

(4)

Install the oil seal press guide inserting a new front oil seal with accompanying guide bolts on the crankshaft.

SAPH311990900050

(5)

Align the oil seal press hole to the guide bolt and insert the oil seal press.

(6)

Attach the accompanying center bolt to the oil seal press and tighten it until stop. Press fit the front oil seal.

SAPH311990900051


9–20

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Replacement of crankshaft rear oil seal JP31199090704005

1.

Removal of rear oil seal (1)

Install the plate of the special tool oil seal puller on the crankshaft using two flywheel assembly mounting bolts. Special tool : 09420–1742 Oil seal puller

! CAUTION

• Align the large hole of the plate with the collar dowel of the crankshaft.

SAPH311990900052

(2)

Hook the oil seal puller with the tab of the rear oil seal and install the hook on the plate of the oil seal puller with accompanying bolts.

(3)

Remove two bolts which installed the plate of the oil seal puller on the crankshaft.

SAPH311990900053

(4)

Attach the accompanying center bolt to the oil seal puller and tighten it. Pull out the rear oil seal.

SAPH311990900054

2.

Installation of rear oil seal (1)

Guide of oil seal press

Insert a new rear oil seal into the guide of the oil seal press. Special tool : 09407–1040 Oil seal press

! CAUTION

• Be careful for front/rear directions of the rear oil seal. (The felt surface is at the flywheel

Rear oil seal SAPH311990900055

side.)


ENGINE MECHANICAL (2)

9–21

Remove contamination from the joint surface of the rear oil seal and the flywheel housing

(3)

Apply small amount of engine oil to the seal area of the rear oil seal.

(4)

Install the oil seal press guide inserting a new rear oil seal with accompanying guide bolts on the crankshaft.

! CAUTION

• Align the large hole of the guide with the collar dowel of the crankshaft.

SAPH311990900056

(5)

Align the oil seal press hole to the guide bolt and insert the oil seal press.

SAPH311990900057

(6)

Attach the accompanying center bolt to the oil seal press and tighten it until stop. Press fit the rear oil seal.

Setup layout Layout

SAPH311990900058


9–22

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Main Moving Parts Part layout JP31199090402004

SAPH311990900059

11011

Thrust bearing

13260

Connecting rod assembly

11701

Main bearing

13271

Connecting rod bush

11703

Main bearing US 0.25

13411

Crankshaft

11704

Main bearing US 0.50

13450

Flywheel assembly

13005

Piston, Piston ring set

13453

Ring gear

13041

Connecting rod bearing

13470

Crankshaft pulley

13041A

Connecting rod bearing

13521

Crankshaft gear

13041B

Connecting rod bearing

9819A

Retainer ring*

900125

118N m {1, 200 kgf cm, 87lbf ft}

*Parts not to be reused. Tightening torque 13265

69N m{700kgf cm, 51lbf ft}+90q+45q

13455

186N m {1, 900 kgf cm, 137lbf ft} Service procedure Overhaul item


9–23

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Replacement of piston and connecting rod JP31199090702005

1. Figure is an example of work.

Removal of piston (1)

Remove bolts and remove the connecting rod cap.

! CAUTION

• Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the flywheel gear from the flywheel housing inspection hole to prevent turning of the crankshaft. • Store removed connecting rod cap for each cylinder number so that combinations of the connecting rod and the connecting rod cap

SAPH311990900060

may not be changed. (2)

Remove carbon on the cylinder liner inner surface with a scraper or a sand paper (No. 150 or so) in the circumferential direction.

! CAUTION

• Do not damage parts lower than the carbon deposit area.

(3)

Fix the cylinder liner with bolts and a plate.

(4)

Hit the connecting rod from underneath the engine using

SAPH311990900061

a handle of a hammer. Remove the piston together with the connecting rod.

SAPH311990900062

NOTICE Cooling jet

• In removing the piston, rotate the connecting rod as shown in the figure. Do not bend the cooling jet.

! CAUTION

• Store removed pistons and connecting rods for each cylinder number. • Be careful not to touch the cooling jet.

0

SAPH311990900063


9–24

ENGINE MECHANICAL 2.

Disassembly of piston and connecting rod (1)

Remove the retainer ring using snap ring pliers.

(2)

Remove the piston pin using the brass bar and disconnect the piston from the connecting rod.

SAPH311990900064

(3)

Remove the piston ring using a special tool. Special tool : 09442–1011 Piston ring expander

! CAUTION

• Since the piston ring is susceptible to damage, be careful for handling. • Store piston rings for each cylinder number. • Store the piston rings so that the upper and lower surfaces may be identified.

SAPH311990900065

3. "0" mark position

Assembly of piston and connecting rod

Piston

(1) Exhaust side

Install the piston on the connecting rod so that the "0" mark on the piston may be opposite to the match mark

Intake side

stamp on the connecting rod (2)

Install a new retainer ring using a snap ring pliers.

Oil hole

! CAUTION Match mark stamp

SAPH311990900066

• Make sure that there is no backlash in the retainer ring.


ENGINE MECHANICAL (3)

9–25

Face the side with the piston ring identification print upward and install in the order of the oil ring, second ring and top ring using a special tool. • The identification print is present only on the

NOTICE

secondary ring and the top and bottom of the Top ring Upper surface

Second ring

top ring and the oil ring are not identified.

Oil ring

Special tool : 09442–1011 Piston ring expander (4)

Lower surface

Oil ring joint

Connect the joint of the coil expander and fit the oil ring inside the ring. Offset the coil expander joint with the ring joint by 180 deg for installation.

Clearance

(5)

Allocate the joints of the piston ring with uniform intervals as shown in the figure.

Coil expander

Ring Second ring

Oil ring

Top ring SAPH311990900067

4. Concave shape

Oil hole

Installation of piston and connecting rod (1)

Allocate the joints of the piston ring with uniform intervals as shown in the figure.

Oil hole

Bearing

(2)

Install the connecting rod bearing to suit concave shape of the connecting rod.

! CAUTION

• Make sure that the oil hole of the connecting rod bearing is aligned with the oil hole of the

Connecting rod

connecting rod.

SAPH311990900068

(3)

Apply engine oil to the piston, cylinder liner and connecting rod bearing and compress the piston ring using a special tool. Special tool : 09441–1370 Piston ring holder

! CAUTION

• Make sure that there is no deformation or damage to the special tool piston ring holder.

SAPH311990900069


9–26

ENGINE MECHANICAL (4)

Insert the piston carefully so that the connecting rod may not come in contact with the cooling jet.

! CAUTION

• Face the "0" mark on the piston toward the exhaust side for insertion. • Set the crankshaft of the cylinder as the top dead center for assembly. • Do not damage the cylinder liner, crankshaft and cooling jet during work.

SAPH311990900070

(5)

Install the connecting rod bearing to suit concave shape of the connecting rod cap.

Cap

Bearing

SAPH311990900071

(6)

Align the match mark of the connecting rod cap with that of the connecting rod and fix it with a dowel pin.

Match mark Stamp

! CAUTION

• Do not change the combination between the

1234 1234

connecting rod and the connecting rod cap.

SAPH311990900072

(7)

Measure the underhead length of the connecting rod bolt using a vernier calipers. If it is out of the service limit, replace it with a new one. Service limit (mm{in.})

68.0{2.6772} or less

Underhead length

(8)

Apply engine oil to the connecting rod bolt thread and the seat and install it on the connecting rod.

SAPH311990900073


9–27

ENGINE MECHANICAL (9)

Tighten the connecting rod bolt and mark the bolt head in

Paint mark

the same direction with paint.

Connecting rod cap

Tightening torque : 69 N m {700 kgf cm, 51 lbf ft} (10) Retighten the connecting rod bolt 90 q. (11) Retighten the connecting rod bolt further 45 q.

45°

(12) Make sure that all marks are in the same direction.

90°

! CAUTION

• If a bolt is turned excessively in retightening, do not loosen it.

SAPH311990900074 Inspection procedure item

Inspection of piston and connecting rod JP31199090703001

1.

Inspection of piston clearance (1)

Measure the inner diameter of the cylinder liner sliding surface using a cylinder gauge. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

112{4.4095}

112.15{4.4153}

SAPH311990900075

(2)

Measure the piston outer diameter using a micrometer.

! CAUTION

• The measuring position is 23 mm{0.9055 in.} above the piston lower end and square to the pin hole. Standard value (mm{in.})

(3)

111.9r0.006{4.4055r0.0002}

Calculate the difference between the inner diameter of the cylinder liner and the outer diameter of the piston. If it is beyond

SAPH311990900076

the standard value, replace the cylinder liner and the piston. Standard value (mm{in.}) 2.

0.088 - 0.112{0.0035 - 0.0044}}

Inspection of clearance between piston ring and ring groove (1)

Measure the piston ring width using a micrometer. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the piston ring.

SAPH311990900077

Standard value

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

Top ring

2.5{0.0984}

2.40{0.0945}

Second ring

2{0.0787}

1.90{0.0748}

Oil ring

4{0.1575}

3.90{0.1535}


9–28

ENGINE MECHANICAL (2)

Measure the piston ring groove using a thickness gauge. If it is out of the service limit, replace the piston. Standard value

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

Top ring groove

2.5{0.0984}

2.70{0.1063}

Second ring groove

2{0.0787}

2.20{0.0866}

Oil ring groove

4{0.1575}

4.10{0.1614}

SAPH311990900078

3. Cylinder liner

Inspection of piston ring joint clearance (1)

Insert the piston ring into the cylinder liner by 80 mm

(2)

Measure the piston ring joint clearance using a thickness

horizontally using piston. gauge. If it is out of the service limit, replace the piston ring. Piston Ring

Standard value (mm{in.}) Top ring

SAPH311990900079

Second ring Oil ring

4.

Service limit (mm{in.})

0.3 - 0.40 {0.0118 - 0.0157}

1.5{0.0591}

0.75 - 0.9 {0.0295 - 0.0354}

1.2{0.0472}

0.15 - 0.3 {0.0059 - 0.1181}

1.2{0.0472}

Inspection of piston pin (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the contact area of the piston pin with the piston boss using a micrometer. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

37 {1.4567}

36.96{1.4551}

SAPH311990900080

(2)

(3)

Measure the piston boss inner diameter using a cylinder gauge. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

37 {1.4567}

37.05{1.4587}

Calculate the difference between the outer diameter of the piston pin contact area with the piston boss and the inner diameter of the piston boss. If it is out of the service limit, replace the piston pin or piston.

SAPH311990900081

Standard value (mm)

Service limit (mm{in.})

–0.002T-0.025L

0.05{0.0020}

T : Tightening allowance, L : Clearance Replacement procedure item


9–29

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Replacement of connecting rod bushing JP31199090704006

1. Press Sub-assembly

Wing nut

Removal of connecting rod bushing (1)

Put the special tool press sub-assembly together with the special tool guide nut and fix them using the special tool wing nut.

Guide

Special tool : 09481–1130 Guide 09402–1530 Press sub-assembly 9233–10360 Wing nut

SAPH311990900082

! CAUTION

• Face "H" mark of the guide upward for assembly. • Assemble it on a level table and make sure that the lower end of the guide and the press sub-assembly is flat.

(2)

With the large end bearing removed, assemble the connecting rod and put it on the assembled special tool.

SAPH311990900083

(3)

Install the special tool spindle on the bushing of the connecting rod.

Groove

Special tool : 09402–1540 Spindle

Spindle

Connecting rod

! CAUTION

• Align the press sub-assembly groove with the special tool spindle groove for installation.

Press Sub-assembly

SAPH311990900084

(4)

Remove the bushing of the connecting rod using a press.

! CAUTION

SAPH311990900085

• Move the press slowly.


9–30

ENGINE MECHANICAL (5)

Chamfer one side of the connecting rod small end uniformly according to the figure.

Chamfer

! CAUTION

• Remove burr completely. • After chamfering, remove dirt from the inner surface at the small end and from the oil hole.

SAPH311990900086

2.

Installation of connecting rod bushing (1)

Groove

Install a new bushing on the special tool spindle and install the special tool guide and the special tool bolt.

Spindle

Special tool : 09402–1540 Spindle 09481–1540 Guide

Bushing

9191–08252 Bolt

Guide

Tightening torque :

Bolt

5 - 6 N m {50 - 70 kgf cm, 3.5 - 4 lbf ft} SAPH311990900087

! CAUTION

• Align grooves of the special tool guide and the special tool spindle for installation. • Make sure that the edge of the special tool spindle and the special tool guide is in close contact.

(2)

Align the connecting rod oil hole with the bushing oil hole assembled on the special tool. Make sure that the groove of the special tool spindle is in alignment with the groove of the special tool press sub-assembly.

Groove Oil hole

! CAUTION

• Place the connecting rod so that the chamfer side of the connecting rod small end inner diameter may be the bushing side • Apply engine oil to the inner diameter surface of the connecting rod.

SAPH311990900088

(3)

Install the bushing on the connecting rod using a press.

(4)

Insert a rod with the diameter of 6 mm from the oil hole at the connecting rod large end and make sure that it goes through the oil hole at the small end.

NOTICE

• Displacement of oil holes may cause insufficient lubrication, resulting in seizure.

(5)

Insert a new piston pin and check if there is no drag or backlash.

SAPH311990900089


9–31

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Replacement of crankshaft JP31199090704007

1.

Removal of crankshaft (1)

Remove the main bearing cap and the main shaft bearing. Remove the crankshaft using a hoist.

! CAUTION

• Since the part is heavy, be careful for handling. • Store removed main bearing caps and main bearings for each cylinder number.

SAPH311990900090

2.

Installation of crankshaft (1)

Face the groove side (front) of the thrust bearing toward the crankarm and the part number side (back) toward the main bearing cap or the cylinder block. Install it on the cylinder block and the main bearing cap.

! CAUTION

• To prevent falling in assembly, apply engine oil or grease to the back of the thrust bearing.

(2)

Install the main bearing on the cylinder block and each bearing cap.

! CAUTION

• Assemble the bearing with oil hole on the cylinder block and assemble the bearing without oil hole on the cap. • Apply new engine oil to the sliding surfaces of each bearing.

(3)

Align the crankshaft with the cylinder block.

(4)

Align the main bearing cap which has the thrust bearing

SAPH311990900091

and the main bearing with the cylinder block.

Stamp number Front of engine

! CAUTION

• The pentagon mark on the main bearing cap should face the front of the vehicle. Align in

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 from the front. • Check the stamp number of each main

Stamp number SAPH311990900092

bearing cap with the stamp number of the cylinder block.


9–32

ENGINE MECHANICAL (5)

Measure the underhead length of the bearing cap bolt using a vernier calipers. If it is out of the service limit, replace it with a new one. Service limit (mm{in.})

108{4.252}

Underhead length

SAPH311990900073

(6)

Apply engine oil to the bolt seat and the bolt thread of the bearing cap bolt.

(7) 2

4

6

8

10

12

14

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

Tighten the bearing cap bolt according to the sequence in the figure. Tightening torque : 69 N m {700 kgf cm, 51 lbf ft}

(8)

Loosen the bearing cap fixing the thrust bearing and hit the crankshaft gently at the front/rear end using a plastic hammer.

Front of engine

(9) SAPH311990900093

Loosen all bearing cap bolts.

(10) Tighten the bearing cap bolt as in (7). Tightening torque : 69 N m {700 kgf cm, 51 lbf ft} (11) Mark bearing cap bolt heads in the same direction with paint. (12) Tighten 90 deg (1/4 turn) with the same order as in (7). (13) Retighten 45 deg (1/8 turn) as in (7). (14) Make sure that all paint marks are in the same direction.

Paint mark

! CAUTION

• If it is excessively retightened, do not loosen it.

(15) After tightening, hit the front/rear ends of the crankshaft

45ࠑ 90ࠑ

gently with a plastic hammer for initial fit. ! CAUTION

• Make sure that the crankshaft turns smoothly. • Measure the end play of the crankshaft and

SAPH311990900094

make sure that it is within the standard value. Standard value

Repair limit

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

0.50{0.0197}

1.219{0.0480}

0.050 - 0.219 {0.0020 0.0086}} Inspection procedure item


9–33

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Inspection of crankshaft JP31199090703002

1.

Inspection of end play (1)

Measure the end play of the crankshaft using a dial gauge. If it is beyond the repair limit, replace the thrust bearing. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the crankshaft.

SAPH311990900095

Standard value

Repair limit

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

0.50{0.0197}

1.219{0.0480}

0.050 - 0.219 {0.020 - 0.0086} NOTICE

• Standard width of thrust bearing2.5mm{0.0984in.}

2. Figure is an example of work.

Inspection of rotation runout (1)

Measure the crankshaft rotation runout using a dial gauge. If it is beyond the repair limit, grind the crankshaft and use the undersize bearing. Repair limit (mm{in.})

0.15{0.0060}

SAPH311990900096

3. Measure two places. 90ࠑ

Inspection of journal wear (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the crankshaft journal using a micrometer. If it is faulty, grind or replace the crankshaft. When the crankshaft is ground, use the undersize bearing. Journal standard value (mm{in.})

80{3.1496}

SAPH311990900097

Wear value (mm{in.}) Eccentric wear 0.10{0.0039} Wear of 0.20{0.0079} or more Wear of 1.20{0.0472}

Action Regrind for correction.

Regrind Replace the crankshaft.


9–34

ENGINE MECHANICAL (2)

Measure the crankshaft center journal width using a vernier calipers. If it is out of the service limit, replace the

Figure is an example of work.

crankshaft. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

36{1.4173}

37.0{1.4567}

SAPH311990900098

4.

Inspection of crankshaft oil clearance (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the crankshaft journal using a micrometer.

90

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

80{3.1496}

78.8{3.1024}

SAPH311990900099

(2)

Do not install the crankshaft. Install the crankshaft bearing and the main bearing cap on the cylinder block.

(3)

Measure the crankshaft bearing inner diameter using a cylinder gauge.

(4)

Calculate the difference between the outer diameter of the crankshaft journal and the inner diameter of the crankshaft bearing. If it is beyond the repair limit, grind the crankshaft and use the undersize bearing.

SAPH311990900100

Standard value (mm{in.}) 0.051 - 0.102 {0.0020 - 0.0040} NOTICE

Repair limit (mm{in.}) 0.2{0.0079}

• Standard bearing thickness : 2.5mm • Undersize bearing value : 0.25, 0.50, 0.75, 1.00 Bearing size

Journal outer diameter (mm{in.})

Standard

79.940 - 79.960 {3.1472 - 3.1480}

0.25.00US

79.690 - 79.710 {3.1374 - 3.1382}

0.50US

79.440 - 79.460 {3.1276 - 3.1283}

0.75US

79.190 - 79.210 {3.1177 - 3.1185}

1.00US

78.940 - 78.960 {3.1079 - 3.1087}


9–35

ENGINE MECHANICAL (5)

Dimension of fillet "R" Crank pin

Radius is incomplete.

Radius is small.

2.5 to 3.0mm {0.0984 to 0.1181 in.} Step

Step

Journal

R

2.5 to 3.0mm {0.0984 to 0.1181 in.} Good

Poor

SAPH311990900101

5.

Inspection of crack and damage on crankshaft and of oil hole

Figure is an example of work.

(1)

Check for crack or damage using dye penetrant. If a faulty condition is found, replace the crankshaft.

SAPH311990900102

(2)

Check for clogging of the crankshaft oil hole. If faulty condition is found, replace the crankshaft.

Figure is an example of work.

SAPH311990900103

6. 90°Measurement at 2 places

Inspection of pin wear (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the crankshaft crank pin using a micrometer. If it is faulty, grind or replace the crankshaft. When the crankshaft is ground, use the undersize bearing. Crank pin standard value

65

Wear value (mm{in.})

Action

SAPH311990900104

Eccentric wear 0.10{0.0039} Wear of 0.20{0.0079} or more Wear of 1.20{0.0472}

Regrind for correction.

Regrind Replace the crankshaft.


9–36

ENGINE MECHANICAL Replacement procedure item

Replacement of crankshaft pulley JP31199090704008

1.

Removal of crankshaft pulley (1)

Remove bolts and remove the crankshaft pulley. • Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the

NOTICE

flywheel gear from the flywheel housing inspection hole to prevent turning of the crankshaft.

SAPH311990900105

2.

Installation of crankshaft pulley (1)

crankshaft pulley mounting bolt.

1 6

Apply engine oil to the bolt seat and the bolt thread of the

(2)

3

Install the crankshaft pulley on the crankshaft and tighten it according to the figure.

4

Tightening torque : 118 N m {1,200 kgf cm, 87 lbf ft}

5 2

• Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the

NOTICE

flywheel gear from the flywheel housing inspection hole to prevent turning of the

SAPH311990900106

crankshaft.

Replacement of flywheel JP31199090704009

1. Engine revolution sensor Flywheel Mounting bolt

Removal of flywheel (1)

Remove the engine revolution sensor.

(2)

Remove bolts fixing the flywheel. • Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the

NOTICE

flywheel gear from the flywheel housing inspection hole to prevent turning of the crankshaft. SAPH311990900107

(3)

Install a special tool into the bolt hole of the crankshaft to remove the flywheel. Special tool : 09481–1340 Guide

! CAUTION

• Since the flywheel is heavy, be careful for handling. • Do not give impact to the special tool during work.

SAPH311990900108


ENGINE MECHANICAL 2.

9–37

Removal of ring gear (1)

Heat the entire ring gear circumference with a burner until it is about 200 qC(392qF).

! CAUTION

• Do not touch the ring gear and the flywheel with bare hand while they are hot.

SAPH311990900109

(2)

Hit the circumference of the ring gear gently using a backing rod to remove the ring gear from the flywheel.

! CAUTION

• Do not touch the ring gear and the flywheel with bare hand while they are hot.

SAPH311990900110

3.

Installation of ring gear (1)

Heat the entire ring gear circumference with a burner until it is about 200 qC(392qF).

! CAUTION

• Do not touch the ring gear and the flywheel with bare hand while they are hot.

SAPH311990900111

(2)

Face the chamfered side toward the flywheel and install it on the flywheel quickly.

! CAUTION

• Do not touch the ring gear and the flywheel with bare hand while they are hot.

SAPH311990900112


9–38

ENGINE MECHANICAL 4.

Installation of flywheel (1)

Make sure that there is no burr or dirt on the joint surface of the crankshaft and the flywheel and the screw hole.

(2)

Install the special tool into the bolt hole of the crankshaft. Special tool : 09481–1340 Guide • Install one special tool on the collar dowel

NOTICE

and the other at the opposite side of the collar dowel.

SAPH311990900113

(3)

Insert the flywheel until it comes in contact with the collar dowel of the crankshaft and adjust the position.

! CAUTION

• Since the flywheel is heavy, be careful for handling. • Do not give impact to the special tool during work.

(4)

Insert the flywheel until it comes in contact with the crankshaft.

(5)

Apply engine oil to the bolt seat and the bolt thread of the flywheel mounting bolt.

SAPH311990900114

(6)

Tighten 6 bolts by 2 to 3 threads temporarily with hand in the bolt holes without installation of the special tool.

(7)

Tighten 6 bolts gradually and tighten temporarily.

(8)

Remove the special tool and tighten remaining two bolts temporarily as in (6) and (7).

SAPH311990900115

(9)

Tighten the flywheel according to the order in the figure. Tightening torque : 186 N m {1,900 kgf cm, 137 lbf ft}

5

1

NOTICE

8

• Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the flywheel gear from the flywheel housing

3

4 7 2

inspection hole to prevent turning of the

6

crankshaft. (10) Loosen all bolts. (11) Tighten the bolts again. SAPH311990900116

Tightening torque : 186 N m {1,900 kgf cm, 137 lbf ft} (12) Install the engine revolution sensor. Setup layout Layout


9–39

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Camshaft and Idle Gear Part layout JP31199090402005

SAPH311990900117

13501

Camshaft assembly

13572B

Idle gear thrust plate

13505

Cam idle gear

13581

Idle gear shaft

13505A

Sub-idle gear

13581A

Idle gear shaft

13505B

Main idle gear

13581B

Idle gear shaft

13520

Camshaft gear

9867A

Idle gear bush

13572

Idle gear thrust plate

9867B

Idle gear bush

13572A

Idle gear thrust plate

900125

172N m {1, 750 kgf cm, 127lbf ft}

Tightening torque 900124

59N m{600kgf cm, 44lbf ft}+90q

900124A

108N m {1, 100 kgf cm, 80lbf ft} Service procedure Overhaul item


9–40

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Removal of camshaft JP31199090702006

1.

Removal of rocker arm and camshaft assembly (1)

Loosen the lock nut and turn the adjusting screw completely.

Rock nut

! CAUTION

• Removal without turning the adjusting screw may bend the rocker shaft.

SAPH311990900118

(2)

Loosen the rocker arm support bolts gradually from the center and remove the rocker arm and the rocker arm shaft.

SAPH311990900119

Disassembly of camshaft JP31199090702007

1.

Disassembly of camshaft (1)

Fix the camshaft gear using a vice to disassemble the camshaft.

! CAUTION

• Prevent faulty conditions on the gear such as deformation, impact, scratch, etc.

SAPH311990900120


9–41

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Inspection of camshaft and camshaft bearing JP31199090702008

1.

Inspection of cam height on camshaft (1)

Measure the cam height using a micrometer. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft.

SAPH311990900121

Standard value

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

Cam

IN

50.067{1.9711}

49.987{1.9680}

height

EX

52.104{2.0513}

52.024{2.0482}

IN

8.067{0.3176}

(7.987{0.3144})

EX

10.104{0.3978}

(10.024{0.3946})

Cam lift

2.

Inspection of camshaft runout (1)

Camshaft contact measuring area

Put the journal at both ends of the camshaft on the V block.

(2)

Put a dial gauge to each journal of the camshaft and measure runout of the camshaft. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the camshaft.

SAPH311990900122

3.

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

0.04{0.0016}

0.1{0.0039}

Inspection of camshaft bearing oil clearance (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the camshaft journal using a micrometer.

(2)

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

40{1.5748}

39.85{1.5689}

Measure the camshaft bearing inner diameter using a cylinder gauge.

SAPH311990900123

(3)

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

40{1.5748}

40.15{1.5807}

Calculate the difference of the camshaft journal bearing inner diameter. If it is beyond the standard value, replace the camshaft or the camshaft bearing.

Standard value (mm{in.})

0.020 - 0.063 {0.0008 - 0.0025}


9–42

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Assembly of camshaft JP31199090702009

1.

Measure the camshaft mounting bolt using a vernier calipers. If it is out of the service limit, replace it with a new one. Service limit (mm{in.})

31{1.2205}

Underhead length

SAPH311990900124

2.

Fix the camshaft gear using a vice. Apply engine oil to the seat and the bolt thread of the camshaft gear mounting bolt.

3.

Set the dowel pin to the camshaft and the camshaft gear and tighten the camshaft gear mounting bolt. Tightening torque : 59 N m {600 kgf cm, 44 lbf ft}

4. SAPH311990900125

Retighten 90 deg (1/4 turn).

! CAUTION

• If it is excessively retightened, do not loosen it. • Prevent faulty conditions on the gear such as deformation, impact, scratch, etc.


9–43

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Installation of camshaft JP31199090702010

1.

Align the No. 1 cylinder to the compression top dead center.

2.

Installation of camshaft and rocker arm. (1)

Place the camshaft so that two holes at 180 degrees from the three drilled holes of the camshaft gear may be

Timing decision drill hole

horizontal to the upper surface of the camshaft housing. ! CAUTION

• Place a transparent plastic ruler or an edged ruler on the upper surface of the camshaft housing and the side of the camshaft gear. Make sure that the position of the foolproof

Ruler or etc

drilled hole is below the ruler. Misconnection prevention drill hole SAPH311990900126

(2)

Coat the bearing parts with engine oil and then install the the front of the engine, making sure the five-sided mark on

camshaft bearing caps in numerical order 1-2-3-4-5 from the cap points forward.

Engine Foreword SAPH311990900127

(3)

Make sure the crosshead is correctly laid across each valve.

Crosshead

! CAUTION

• To make sure the crosshead is correctly in place, move it to the left and right by hand and make sure it clicks against the valves. • If the crosshead is not sitting properly on the valves, it will push the upper seat and cause the valve to drop out.

SAPH311990900128

(4)

Make sure the rocker arm is correctly assembled on the rocker arm shaft.

(5)

Fully unscrew the adjust screw on the end of the rocker arm.

NOTICE

• Securing the rocker arm and nozzle clamp together with a string will facilitate installation work.


9–44

ENGINE MECHANICAL (6)

Apply engine oil to the cam threads and set the rocker arm in position, making sure it is correctly laid on the crosshead. Then, tighten the bolts in the sequence shown in the figure, making several passes and gradually tightening them each time. Tightening torque : 28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• After the bolts are tightened, make sure the rocker arm moves smoothly.

Setup layout Layout

SAPH311990900129


9–45

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Gear train layout JP31199090402006

SAPH311990900130 Service procedure Overhaul item

Removal of timing gear JP31199090702011

1.

Removal of main idle gear (1)

Remove the idle gear shaft mounting bolt and pull out the main idle gear assembly using a special tool. Special tool : 09420–1100 Sliding hammer 09420–1442 Sliding hammer

SAPH311990900131

(2)

Remove the idle gear thrust plate.

(3)

Remove the idle gear shaft from the main idle gear.


9–46

ENGINE MECHANICAL 2.

Removal of sub-idle gear (1)

Remove the idle gear shaft mounting bolt and the idle gear thrust plate and pull out the sub-idle gear assembly using a special tool. Special tool : 09420–1100 Sliding hammer 09420–1442 Sliding hammer

(2)

Remove the idle gear thrust plate.

(3)

Remove the idle gear shaft from the sub-idle gear.

SAPH311990900132

Inspection of timing gear components JP31199090702012

1.

Inspection of clearance between idle gear shaft and idle gear bushing (1)

Measure the idle gear shaft outer diameter using a micrometer and the idle gear bushing inner diameter using a cylinder gauge. Standard value (mm{in.}) Main idle

Shaft outer diameter

gear shaft Bushing inner diameter Sub-idle

Shaft outer diameter

gear shaft Bushing inner diameter

(2)

57{2.2441} 57{2.2441} 50{1.9685} 50{1.9685}

Calculate the difference between the idle gear bushing inner diameter and the idle gear shaft outer diameter. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the idle gear shaft and the idle gear bushing.

SAPH311990900133

Main idle gear shaft Sub-idle gear shaft

Standard value

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

0.030 - 0.090 {0.0012 - 0.0035} 0.025 - 0.075 {0.0010 - 0.030}

0.20{0.0079}

0.20{0.0079}


9–47

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Installation of timing gear JP31199090702013

1. Thrust plate

Installation of sub-idle gear (1)

Install the idle gear shaft on the sub-idle gear.

(2)

Install the idle gear thrust plate.

(3)

Provide the lubricating hole of the idle gear shaft in the vertical direction.

Idle gear thrust plate Lubricating hole

(4)

Install the idle gear thrust plate on the idle gear shaft.

(5)

Apply engine oil to the bolt seat and the bolt thread of the idle gear shaft mounting bolt.

Cylinder block SAPH311990900134

(6)

Install the idle gear shaft mounting bolt. Tightening torque : 108 N m {1,100 kgf cm, 80 lbf ft}

SAPH311990900135

2. Idle gear thrust plate

Lubricating hole Cylinder Block SAPH311990900136

Installation of main idle gear (1)

Install the idle gear shaft on the main idle gear.

(2)

Install the idle gear thrust plate.


9–48

ENGINE MECHANICAL (3)

Face the lubricating hole of the idle gear shaft toward the oil pan (downward). Install A in the figure by adjusting the timing of the crankshaft gear and the main idle gear as in

Sub-idle gear

the detailed drawing.

Oil pump gear

A

Main idle gear Crankshaft gear Arrange drilled holes in line. Detail

SAPH311990900137

(4)

Apply engine oil to the bolt seat and the bolt thread of the idle gear shaft mounting bolt.

(5)

Install the idle gear shaft mounting bolt. Tightening torque : 172 N m {1,750 kgf cm, 127 lbf ft}

(6)

Measure backlash and end play of each idle gear. Make sure that it is within the standard value.

SAPH311990900138


ENGINE MECHANICAL

9–49

Overhaul of sub-idle gear (bearing case side) JP31199090702014

1.

Removal of bearing case assembly (1)

Remove the supply pump. "Reference : Replacement, Supply pump".

(2)

Disconnect the bearing case assembly.

! CAUTION

• One bolt is tightened from the timing gear case.

(3)

Fix the bearing case with a vice.

SAPH311990900139

(4)

Remove the sub-idle gear shaft mounting bolt and pull out the idle gear shaft using a sliding hammer.

SAPH311990900140

SAPH311990900141

(5)

Remove the sub-idle gear.

(6)

Remove the idle gear thrust plate.


9–50

ENGINE MECHANICAL 2.

Inspection of clearance between sub-idle gear shaft and sub-idle gear bushing (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the idle gear shaft.

(2)

Measure the inner diameter of the sub-idle gear.

(3)

Calculate the clearance. If it is beyond the standard value,

SAPH311990900142

replace the shaft and the bushing.

Standard value (mm{in.})

0.025 - 0.075 {0.0010 - 0.030}

SAPH311990900143

3.

Installation of bearing case assembly (1)

Install the idle gear thrust plate.

(2)

Install the gear shaft on the sub-idle gear.

(3)

Face the lubricating hole of the gear shaft downward and install it on the bearing case.

(4)

Install the sub-idle gear shaft mounting bolt. Tightening torque : 108 N m {1,100 kgf cm, 80 lbf ft}

SAPH311990900144

(5)

Assemble the supply pump and bearing case. Tightening torque : 28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21 lbf ft}

! CAUTION Inspection procedure item

SAPH311990900145

• Be careful for fall of the O-ring


9–51

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Inspection of installation status for each gear JP31199090703003

1.

Inspection of backlash between camshaft gear and cam idle gear (1)

Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the cam idle gear from the side of the camshaft gear of the camshaft housing to prevent turning of the cam idle gear.

SAPH311990900146

(2)

Measure backlash between the camshaft gear and the cam idle gear using a dial gauge. If it is beyond the service limit, replace each gear. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

0.030 - 0.253

0.30{0.0118}

{0.0012 - 0.0100}

SAPH311990900147

2.

Inspection of camshaft end play (1)

Measure the end play of the camshaft using a thickness gauge. If it is beyond the standard value, replace the camshaft.

Standard value (mm)

0.100 - 0.178 {0.0039 - 0.0070}

SAPH311990900148

3.

Inspection of backlash between main idle gear and air compressor idle gear (1)

Remove the supply pump drive at the bearing case. "Reference : Replacement, Supply pump".

(2)

Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the main idle gear from the timing gear dust cover of the flywheel housing to prevent turning of the main idle gear.

SAPH311990900149


9–52

ENGINE MECHANICAL (3)

Measure backlash between the main idle gear and the air compressor idle gear using a dial gauge and a magnet stand. If it is beyond the service limit, replace each gear. • If the magnet stand is not stable, provide a

NOTICE

steel plate for measurement using bolt holes of the cylinder block. Standard value (mm{in.}) SAPH311990900150

Service limit (mm{in.})

0.032 - 0.096

0.10{0.0039}

{0.0013 - 0.0038} 4.

Inspection of backlash between idle gear at bearing case and supply pump drive gear (1)

Remove the supply pump drive. "Reference : Replacement, Supply pump"

(2)

Remove the bearing case assembly.

(3)

Fix the supply pump drive with a vice and install the

Work example

bearing case assembly. (4)

Measure backlash between the idle gear and the supply pump drive gear using a dial gauge and a magnet stand. If it is beyond the service limit, replace each gear. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

0.020 - 0.083

0.10{0.0039}

{0.0008 - 0.0033}

SAPH311990900151

5.

Inspection of backlash between main idle gear and subidle gear (1)

Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the main idle gear from the timing gear dust cover of the flywheel housing to prevent turning of the main idle gear.

SAPH311990900152

(2)

Measure backlash between the main idle gear and the sub-idle gear using a dial gauge and a magnet stand. If it is beyond the service limit, replace each gear. Standard value (mm{in.}) 0.030 - 0.113 {0.0012 - 0.0044}

SAPH311990900153

Service limit (mm{in.}) 0.30{0.0118}


9–53

ENGINE MECHANICAL 6.

Inspection of backlash between sub-idle gear at cam idle gear and oil pump gear (1)

Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the sub-idle gear to prevent turning of the sub-idle gear.

SAPH311990900154

(2)

Measure backlash between the sub-idle gear and the oil pump gear using a dial gauge and a magnet stand. If it is beyond the service limit, replace each gear. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

0.030 - 0.131

0.30{0.0118}

{0.0012 - 0.0005}

SAPH311990900155

7.

Inspection of idle gear end play (1)

Measure the end play of each gear using a thickness gauge. If it is beyond the service limit, replace each gear or shaft. Standard value

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

0.114 - 0.160 Main idle gear

SAPH311990900156

{0.0045 -

0.30{0.0118}

0.0063} 0.040 - 0.095 Sub-idle gear

{0.0016 -

0.30{0.0118}

0.0037}

8.

Inspection of backlash between cam idle gear and sub-idle gear (1)

Insert a large flat tip screwdriver into the sub-idle gear from the side of the cam idle gear of the cylinder head to prevent turning of the sub-idle gear.

SAPH311990900157


9–54

ENGINE MECHANICAL (2)

Measure backlash between the cam idle gear and the sub-idle gear using a dial gauge. If it is beyond the service limit, replace each gear. Standard value (mm{in.}) 0.050 - 0.218 {0.0020 - 0.0086}

Setup layout Layout

SAPH311990900158

Service limit (mm{in.}) 0.30{0.0118}


9–55

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Valve System Part layout JP31199090402007

SAPH311990900159

13706

Crosshead assembly

13735

Valve spring upper seat

13709

Adjusting screw (rocker arm)

13787

Adjusting screw (cross head)

13711

Intake valve

13830

Rocker arm intake

13715

Exhaust valve

13840

Rocker arm (exhaust)

13719

Valve stem seal*

13901

Rocker shaft

13731

Outer valve spring

13951

Rocker arm support

13732

Inner valve spring

900126

Valve spring retainer

13734

Valve spring lower seat

9069B

28.5N m{290kgf cm, 21lbf ft}

9069C

28.5N m{290kgf cm, 21lbf ft}

*Parts not to be reused. Tightening torque 13788

25N m {250 kgf cm, 18lbf ft}

9069A

28.5N m{290kgf cm, 21lbf ft} Service procedure Overhaul item


9–56

ENGINE MECHANICAL

Overhaul of valve system JP31199090702015

1.

Inspection of rocker arm oil clearance (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the rocker shaft using a micrometer.

(2)

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

22{0.8661}

21.92{0.8630}

Measure the rocker arm bushing inner diameter using a cylinder gauge.

SAPH311990900160

(3)

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

22{0.8661}

20.08{0.7905}

Calculate the difference between the outer diameter of the rocker shaft and the inner diameter of the rocker arm bushing. If it is beyond the standard value, replace the rocker shaft or the rocker arm bushing. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

0.03 - 0.101 {0.0012 - 0.0039} 2. Example

0.15{0.0059}

Removal of valve spring (1)

Compress the valve spring using a special tool and remove the valve spring retainer. Special tool : 09470–1170 Valve spring press

SAPH311990900161

(2)

Remove the intake and exhaust valves.

! CAUTION

• Attach a tag with the applicable cylinder number to the valve so that combinations of the valve and the cylinder head may not be mixed.

SAPH311990900162


9–57

ENGINE MECHANICAL 3. Valve stem seal

Replacement of valve stem seal (1)

Special tool

After removing the valve stem seal, assemble the valve spring lower seat. Apply engine oil to the lip and the inner

Valve spring lower seat

surface of the valve stem seal. Strike the valve guide using a special tool until the special tool comes in contact with the valve spring lower sea Special tool : 09472–2100 Bar ! CAUTION

• After assembly of the valve stem seal, make sure that there is no deformation, crack or inclination of the rubber.

Oil application Rubber

SAPH311990900163

(2)

After striking, check the height.

Standard value (mm{in.}) +0.1{0.0039in.} 22.9mm{0.9022in.} -0.4{0.0157in.}

22.5 - 23.0 {0.8858 - 0.9055}

SAPH311990900164

4.

Installation of valve spring (1) (2)

Install the valve spring upper seat on the valve spring. Compress the valve spring using a special tool and install the valve spring retainer. Special tool : 09470–1170 Valve spring press

! CAUTION

• Apply engine oil to the contact surface of each part before assembly.

SAPH311990900165

• Be sure to assemble each valve at the original cylinder position. • When the valve spring is compressed, avoid contact of the valve spring upper seat with the valve stem seal. • Since the valve spring has equal spacing, vertical direction is not specified for assembly. • Check for scratch on the valve stem seal when the valve is reused.


9–58

ENGINE MECHANICAL 5.

Inspection of valve spring

Clearance A

(1)

Measure squareness of the valve spring using a square or a thickness gauge. If it is beyond the service limit (clearance A), replace the valve spring. Clearance A (mm{in.})

2.0{0.0787}

SAPH311990900166

(2)

Measure the free length of the valve spring using a vernier calipers. If it is out of the service limit, replace the valve spring. Standard value

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

Inner valve spring

(64.6[2.5433])

61.6[2.4252]

Outer valve spring

(75.7[2.9803])

72.7[2.8622]

Measuring item

The value in [ ] is the reference value.

SAPH311990900167

6.

Inspection of oil clearance between valve guide and valve stem (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the valve stem using a micrometer. Measuring item

Standard value (mm{in.})

Intake valve stem

7{0.2756}

Exhaust valve stem

7{0.2756}

SAPH311990900168

(2)

Measure the valve guide inner diameter using a cylinder gauge.

(3) SAPH311990900169

Measuring item

Standard value (mm{in.})

Intake valve guide

7{0.2756}

Exhaust valve guide

7{0.2756}

Calculate the difference between the valve stem outer diameter and the valve guide inner diameter. If it is beyond the standard value, replace the valve or the valve guide. Measuring item Intake valve oil clearance Exhaust valve oil clearance

Standard value (mm{in.}) 0.023 - 0.058 {0.0009 - 0.0023} 0.050 - 0.083 {0.0020 - 0.0033}


9–59

ENGINE MECHANICAL Attachment procedure item

Adjustment of valve clearance JP31199090706001

1.

Precautions before adjustment

! CAUTION

2.

• Before adjustment, make sure that bolts of the cylinder head, rocker arm support, nozzle clamp, camshaft housing and camshaft bearing cap are tightened to the specified torque.

Adjustment of valve clearance (1)

Make sure that there is no dirt between the crosshead and

(2)

Turn the crankshaft in the forward direction and adjust the

the valve stem cylinder to the compression top dead center. ! CAUTION

• Make sure that there is a roller on the cam base circle.

(3) Cam base circle

Adjusting screw of rocker arm

Roller

Lock nut Adjusting screw of crosshead 10 mm or more

Loosen the adjusting screw and the lock nut of the crosshead completely.

! CAUTION

• Provide the adjusting screw protrusion of 10 mm or more from the top surface of the crosshead. If the adjusting screw is not completely separated from the valve stem,

Clearance

Close contact

correct adjustment is not allowed.

Lock Nut SAPH311990900170

(4) Rocker arm

Insert a thickness gauge between the rocker arm and the crosshead and adjust the clearance with the adjusting

Thickness gauge

screw of the rocker arm. Tighten the lock nut.

Standard value

IN

0.30mm{0.0118 in.}

(cold engine)

EX

0.45mm{0.0177 in.}

Tightening torque : 25 N m {250 kgf cm, 18 lbf ft}

Close contact Crosshead SAPH311990900171

Feel of thickness gauge

(5)

Loosen the adjusting screw of the crosshead with the thickness gauge inserted. Make sure that feel on the

Start

thickness gauge is not lighter. (No move)

Nut fixing position

! CAUTION

• If it becomes lighter, make adjustments again from the beginning.

(Appropriate contact) Feel remains the same. Loosening of adjusting screw Large SAPH311990900172


9–60

ENGINE MECHANICAL (6)

Tighten the adjusting screw of the crosshead until the thickness gauge does not move.

Close contact Close contact SAPH311990900173

Feel of thickness gauge

(7)

While loosening the adjusting screw of the crosshead gradually, tighten the lock nut of the crosshead at the

Start

position where feel on the thickness gauge is appropriate. (No move)

Nut fixing position

(Appropriate contact)

Tightening torque : 25 N m {250 kgf cm, 18 lbf ft} ! CAUTION

• Do not over-loosen the adjusting screw. Overloosening of the adjusting screw reproduces

Feel remains the same. Loosening of adjusting screw Large SAPH311990900174

the original status. Although feel on the thickness gauge is appropriate, there is clearance between the adjusting screw and the valve of the crosshead. Correct adjustment is not allowed.


EXHAUST

10–1

ENGINE

10 EXHAUST Setup layout Layout

Exhaust Manifold...................................................... 10-2 Part layout ............................................................. 10-2 Replacement......................................................... 10-4

10


10–2

EXHAUST

Exhaust Manifold Part layout JP31199100402001

SAPH311991000001

17104

Gasket* *Parts not to be reused.

Tightening torque 9209A

53 N m {540 kgf cm, 40lbf ft}

17141

Exhaust manifold


10–3

EXHAUST

SAPH311991000002

17104A

Gasket*

17148

*Parts not to be reused. Service procedure Replacement procedure item

Plate


10–4

EXHAUST

Replacement JP31199100704001

1.

Removal of exhaust manifold (1)

2.

Remove nuts and remove the exhaust manifold.

Replacement of stud bolt (1)

Remove dirt (e.g. sealant) at the female thread of the cylinder head and clean the thread again with tap (M10 x 1.5).

(2)

Use the Torx wrench to tighten a new stud bolt. Tightening torque : 30 N m {300 kgf cm, 22 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• Excessive tightening with over torque may cause crack in the cylinder head.

3.

Installation of exhaust manifold (1)

Assemble a new gasket.

! CAUTION

• Since a gasket has front and back, install the black side on the exhaust manifold.

Black side SAPH311991000003

(2)

Tighten the mounting nut of the exhaust manifold according to the order in the figure. Tightening torque : 53 N m {540 kgf cm, 40 lbf ft}

When a new exhaust manifold is used 12 11

10 9

6 5

8 7

! CAUTION

• When nuts are tightened, prevent each spacer from riding on the counterbore area of

1

2

the manifold flange.

4

3

• The tightening sequence of the exhaust

When exhaust manifold is reused

8 9

2 3

5 6

manifold varies between use of a new part

11 12

and reuse. (3)

7

1

10

4

Tighten the same nuts again according to the order in the figure. Tightening torque : 53 N m {540 kgf cm, 40 lbf ft}

Spacer

! CAUTION

SAPH311991000004

• Be sure to retighten it.


COOLING

11–1

ENGINE

11 COOLING System drawing

Cooling System ........................................................ 11-2 Cooling system drawing........................................ 11-2 Part layout ............................................................. 11-3 Replacement of thermostat case .......................... 11-4 Inspection of thermostat ....................................... 11-5 Replacement of coolant pump .............................. 11-6

11


11–2

COOLING

Cooling System Cooling system drawing JP31199110803001

Reservoir Water temperature

Thermostat case Cylinder head

Radiator

Thermostat Cylinder block Turbo charger

Car heater

Coolant pump

Oil cooler

Drain cock

Drain cock

SAPH311991100001 Setup layout Layout


11–3

COOLING

Part layout JP31199110402002

SAPH311991100002

16100

Coolant pump assembly

16325

Gasket*

16173

Coolant pump pulley

16331

Thermostat case cover

16303

Thermostat case

16377

Fan spacer

16306

Cooling fan

9851A

O–ring*

16323

Thermostat case cover *Parts not to be reused. Service procedure Replacement procedure item


11–4

COOLING

Replacement of thermostat case JP31199110704001

1.

Removal of thermostat case (1)

Remove bolts and remove the thermostat case.

(2)

Remove the O-ring from the groove on the coolant pump.

SAPH311991100003

2.

Installation of thermostat case (1)

Liquid gasket

Remove contamination on the joint between the thermostat case and the cylinder head using a scraper.

Cylinder head Opening

(2)

Apply liquid gasket [Threebond TB1207B(black) or equivalent] to the thermostat case as shown in the figure.

! CAUTION

• Apply it continuously. • Apply the liquid gasket at the width of 1.5 to 2.5 mm{0.0591 to 0.0984 in.}.

SAPH311991100004

• Install the oil cooler within 20 minutes after application of the liquid gasket. (3)

Install the new O-ring on the groove of the coolant pump.

(4)

Put the thermostat case mounting bolt through the

bolt2

thermostat case in advance. (5)

Align the thermostat case at the mounting position and

(6)

Tighten mounting bolt 2 temporarily to the coolant pump.

(7)

Tighten bolts in the order mounting bolt 1 to the cylinder

tighten mounting bolt 1 temporarily to the cylinder head.

bolt1

head and mounting bolt 2 to the coolant pump. Inspection procedure item

SAPH311991100005


11–5

COOLING

Inspection of thermostat JP31199110703001

1. Wire

Thermometer

Individual inspection of thermostat (1)

Put the thermostat in water as shown in the figure and heat it.

! CAUTION

• Support the thermostat in the center to prevent approach to the heat source. • Stir the water well so that water temperature

Thermostat

in the container may be uniform. Valve lift

Heat source

SAPH311991100006

(2) T1 : Valve opening temperature (start of valve opening) T2: Full open lift inspection temperature

Measure the temperature (valve opening temperature) that opens the thermostat valve.

13mm {0.5122in.}

Thermostat valve opening

Valve lift

temperature standard value :

0°C{32°F}

T1(qC{qF})

T1°C{°F}

10°C {50°F}

T2°C{°F}

Temperature

NOTICE

74.5 - 78.5 {166.1 - 173.3}

• The thermostat valve opening temperature (T1) is stamped on the thermostat seat.

SAPH311991100007

(3)

Increase the water temperature to 95 qC{203qF} and measure the lift of the thermostat valve. Thermostat valve full open lift inspection

L1 At cold open L2 :Temperature at (T2)°C{°F} L : Valve lift

temperature : T2 (qC{qF}) 95{203}

L L 1 L 2

Valve lift : L (mm{in.})

(4) SAPH311991100008

10{0.3937} or more

Put the full open thermostat valve in water at normal temperature. Make sure that the thermostat valve closes completely within 5 minutes.

(5)

If faulty item is found with the inspection above, replace the thermostat.

Replacement procedure item


11–6

COOLING

Replacement of coolant pump JP31199110704002

1.

Removal of coolant pump (1)

Remove bolts and remove the coolant pump.

SAPH311991100009

2. Liquid gasket

Installation of coolant pump (1)

Remove contamination on the joint surface between the coolant pump and the cylinder block using a scraper and degrease the surface.

(2)

Apply the liquid gasket [Threebond TB1207B (black) or equivalent] to the coolant pump as shown in the figure.

! CAUTION

• Apply it continuously. • Apply the liquid gasket at the width of 2 to 3mm{0.0787 to 0.1181in.}.

SAPH311991100010

• Install the oil cooler within 20 minutes after application of the liquid gasket. • Fill the groove on the water pump flange with the liquid gasket. (3)

Install the coolant pump to the dowel pin of the cylinder block.

NOTICE

• When the coolant pump is installed using a guide bolt, displacement of the liquid gasket does not occur.

SAPH311991100009


LUBRICATION

12–1

ENGINE

12 LUBRICATION System drawing

Oil Cooler, Oil Filter and Oil Pump.......................... 12-2 System drawing .................................................... 12-2 Part layout ............................................................. 12-3 Replacement of oil cooler ..................................... 12-5 Overhaul of oil cooler ............................................ 12-6 Replacement of oil pump ...................................... 12-9 Overhaul of oil pump........................................... 12-10 Replacement of oil strainer ................................. 12-13 Oil Pan ..................................................................... 12-14 Part layout ........................................................... 12-14 Replacement....................................................... 12-15 Inspection of lubrication status ........................... 12-16

12


12–2

LUBRICATION

Oil Cooler, Oil Filter and Oil Pump System drawing JP31199120805001

Roller pin

Valve

Cam

Roller

Crosshead

Adjusting screw

Rocker arm

Rocker arm shaft

Oil pan

Camshaft

Cam idle gear shaft Sub-idle gear shaft

Turbocharger Strainer

Oil pump

Oil cooler

Oil filter

Main oil hole

Piston pin

Connecting rod

Crankshaft

Supply pump drive Sub-idle gear shaft (supply pump drive)

Piston cooling jet (check valve)

Sub-oil hole

Main idle gear shaft : Lubrication : Return SAPH311991200001 Setup layout Layout


12–3

LUBRICATION

Part layout JP31199120402001

SAPH311991200002

15012

Oil pump cover assembly

15710

Oil cooler

15104

Oil strainer

9500-40400

Cotter pin*

15107

Driven gear

9851A

O–ring*

15110

Oil pump assembly

9851B

D–ring*

15119

Gasket*

15139

Seat2

15132

Relief valve spring

15139A

Seat1

15135

Safety valve *Parts not to be reused.

Tightening torque 9068-08160

28.5N m {290kgf cm, 21lbf ft}

9068-08750

24.5r4.9N m {250r50kgf cm, 18r4llbf ft}

9068-08250

31N m {320kgf cm, 23lbf ft}

9068-08900

24.5r4.9N m {250r50kgf cm, 18r4lbf ft}

9068-08320

24.5r4.9N m {250r50kgf cm, 18r4lbf ft}

9068-58100

24.5r4.9N m {250r50kgf cm, 18r4llbf ft}

9068-08550

28.5N m {290kgf cm, 21lbf ft}


12–4

LUBRICATION

SAPH311991200003

15662

Drain plug

9644A

O–ring*

15675

Safety valve

9739A

Elbow

15701

Oil cooler case

9851A

O–ring*

15710

Oil cooler assembly

9851B

O–ring*

15712

Oil cooler element

9851C

O–ring*

15717

Gasket*

9851D

O–ring*

15720

Oil cooler case assembly

9851E

O–ring*

*Parts not to be reused. Tightening torque 15662

44.1r4.9 N m {450r50 kgf cm, 33r4llbf ft} 9201-10080 Service procedure Replacement procedure item

24.5r4.9 N m {250r50 kgf cm, 18r4llbf ft}


12–5

LUBRICATION

Replacement of oil cooler JP31199120704001

1.

Removal of oil cooler (1)

Remove bolts and hose joint, and remove the oil cooler.

(2)

If it is difficult to remove the oil cooler due to liquid gasket

SAPH311991200004

Figure is an example of work.

sticking to the cylinder block, put a flat tip screwdriver at the protrusion in the figure for removal.

SAPH311991200005

2. D-Ring Block

Installation of oil cooler (1)

Assemble the new D-ring into the D-ring groove of the oil cooler.

Oil cooler

! CAUTION

• Face the D-ring flat area toward the oil cooler.

Flat area SAPH311991200006

(2)

Remove contamination on the joint surface between the oil cooler and the cylinder block using a scraper. Apply the

Liquid gasket

liquid gasket [Threebond TB1207 (silver) or equivalent] to the oil cooler as shown in the figure. ! CAUTION

• Apply it continuously. • Apply the liquid gasket at the width of 1.5 to 2.5 mm{0.0590 to 0.0984 in.}. • Install the oil cooler within 20 minutes after

SAPH311991200007

application of the liquid gasket.


12–6

LUBRICATION (3)

Insert the positioning stud into the screw hole of the cylinder block and install the oil cooler.

(4)

After temporary tightening with bolts, remove the positioning stud and tighten bolts. Tightening torque : 24.5r4.9 N m {250r50 kgf cm, 18r4 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• Tighten together with the alternator ground. • Be sure to connect the turbocharger lubricating oil hose.

SAPH311991200008

(5)

Install the drain plug. Tightening torque : 44.1r4.9 N m {450r50 kgf cm, 33r4 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• If a new part is used, tighten it to 58.8±4.9N·m {600±50kgf·cm, 43±4lbf·ft} and loosen it. Then, tighten it again to the torque above.

SAPH311991200009

Overhaul item

Overhaul of oil cooler JP31199120702001

1.

Removal of oil cooler element (1)

2.

Remove nuts and remove the oil cooler element.

Inspection of oil cooler element (1)

Wash water and oil channels with kerosene oil or washing fluid.

(2)

Check for crack or deformation on the stud bolt mounting area and element visually.

(3)

Blow air of approx. 0.5kgf/cm2 into the oil channel to check for leak from parts. If crack, leak or deformation is

SAPH311991200010

found, replace it with a new part. 3.

Disassembly of oil cooler case

! CAUTION

• Disassembly immediately after stop of the engine may cause blowout of engine oil.

(1)

Remove valve spring plugs and safety valves using a hexagonal wrench.

SAPH311991200011


LUBRICATION (2)

12–7

Remove the oil pressure warning switch.

SAPH311991200012

4.

Inspection of safety valve wear and damage (1)

If wear or damage is found, replace it.

SAPH311991200013

5.

Inspection of oil pressure warning switch (1)

For inspection of oil pressure warning switch, refer to "Inspection of components"- "Electrical".

6.

Assembly of oil cooler case (1)

Install a new O-ring and install valve spring plugs and safety valves using a hexagonal wrench. Tightening torque : 24.5r4.9 N m {250r50 kgf cm, 18r4 lbf ft} (M14, M20) 29.4r4.9 N m {300r50 kgf cm, 22r4 lbf ft} (M22) 34.3r4.9 N m {350r50 kgf cm, 25r4 lbf ft} (M24)

SAPH311991200011

(2)

Apply the liquid gasket [Threebond TB1211 (white) or equivalent] to the sealing surface of a new soft washer.

(3)

Install the soft washer in (2) and the oil pressure warning switch.

SAPH311991200012


12–8

LUBRICATION 7.

Installation of oil cooler element (1)

Assemble new gasket and new O-ring and assemble the oil cooler element with nuts. Tightening torque : 24.5r4.9 N m {250r50 kgf cm, 18r4 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• In handling the oil cooler element, be careful not to give damage to it.

SAPH311991200010

Replacement procedure item


12–9

LUBRICATION

Replacement of oil pump JP31199120704002

1.

2.

Removal of oil pump (1)

Dismount the engine from the machine.

(2)

Remove the flywheel.

(3)

Remove the flywheel housing.

(4)

Remove the timing gear.

(5)

Remove the oil pump.

Installation of oil pump (1)

Apply engine oil to the pump case and the bearing (shaded area) of the cylinder block.

! CAUTION

• Without application of engine oil, poor oil suction may occur at the initial start, resulting in seizure or abnormal wear.

Application of engine oil (Shaded area)

SAPH311991200014

(2)

To prevent bolt hole offset of the new gasket, apply engine oil to the cylinder block in advance and place and fix the gasket.

! CAUTION

• Assembly with offset gasket may cause faulty sealing. Oil in the oil pump may be completely discharged when the engine stops. Faulty sealing may cause insufficient suction of oil at initial revolution of engine restart, resulting in seizure or abnormal wear.

(3)

Tighten the oil pump according to the order in the figure. Tightening torque : 28.5 N m {290 kgf cm, 21 lbf ft}

Gasket

! CAUTION

• If the tightening order is not observed, the oil pump may be damaged. • After tightening, make sure that the gear can

Oil pump

be turned with hand. Overhaul item

SAPH311991200015


12–10

LUBRICATION

Overhaul of oil pump JP31199120702002

1.

Remove the driven gear.

SAPH311991200016

2.

Remove the cotter pin and remove seat 2, seat 1, relief valve spring and safety valve.

! CAUTION

• When the cotter pin is removed, seat 2 and the relief valve spring may eject out.

SAPH311991200017

3.

Inspection of clearance between drive gear and cylinder block (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the drive gear and the inner diameter of the pump chamber at cylinder block. Standard value

Measuring area

(mm{in.})

Outer diameter of drive gear

54{2.1260}

Inner diameter of pump chamber

SAPH311991200018

at cylinder block

(2)

54{2.1260}

Calculate the difference between the outer diameter of the drive gear and the inner diameter of the pump chamber at the cylinder block. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly. Standard value (mm{in.}) 0.100 - 0.202{0.0039 0.0080} (reference)

SAPH311991200019

Service limit (mm{in.}) 0.30{0.0118}


12–11

LUBRICATION 4.

End play inspection between drive gear and cylinder block (1)

Measure the drive gear width and the pump chamber depth at the cylinder block using a depth gauge. Standard value

Measuring area

(mm{in.})

Width of drive gear

28.5{1.1220}

Depth of pump chamber at

28.5{1.1220}

cylinder block

SAPH311991200020

(2)

Calculate the difference between the depth of the drive gear and the pump chamber depth at the cylinder block. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

0.049 - 0.113{0.0020 -

0.15{0.0060}

0.0044} (reference) SAPH311991200021

5.

Inspection of clearance between outer diameter of driven gear shaft and cylinder block hole diameter (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the driven gear shaft using a micrometer and measure the cylinder block hole diameter using a cylinder gauge. Standard value

Measuring area

(mm{in.})

Outer diameter of driven gear

SAPH311991200022

shaft Cylinder block hole diameter (2)

18{0.7087} 18{0.7087}

Calculate the difference between the outer diameter of the driven gear and the cylinder block hole diameter. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.

Standard value (mm{in.})

SAPH311991200023

0.040 - 0.099 {0.0016 - 0.0039}


12–12

LUBRICATION 6.

Inspection of clearance betweeen outer diameter of driven gear shaft and inner diameter of driven gear bushing (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the driven gear shaft using a micrometer and measure the inner diameter of the driven gear bushing using a cylinder gauge. Standard value

Measuring area

(mm{in.})

Outer diameter of driven gear

SAPH311991200024

shaft Cylinder block hole diameter

(2)

18{0.7087} 18{0.7087}

Calculate the difference between the outer diameter of the driven gear and the cylinder block hole diameter. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly.

Standard value (mm{in.})

0.030 - 0.075 {0.0012 - 0.0030}

SAPH311991200025

7.

Inspection of clearance betweeen outer diameter of driven gear shaft and inner diameter of driven gear bushing (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the driven gear shaft using a micrometer and measure the inner diameter of the driven gear bushing using a cylinder gauge. Standard value

Measuring area

(mm{in.})

Outer diameter of driven gear

SAPH311991200024

shaft Inner diameter of driven gear bushing

(2)

18{0.7087}

18{0.7087}

Calculate the difference between the outer diameter of the driven gear shaft and the inner diameter of the driven gear bushing. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly or the driven gear bushing. Standard value (mm{in.}) 0.040 - 0.083 {0.0016 - 0.0033}

SAPH311991200026

Service limit (mm{in.}) 0.15{0.00059}


12–13

LUBRICATION 8.

Inspection of drive gear backlash (1)

Fix the oil pump assembly with a vice.

(2)

Measure backlash between the drive gear and the driven gear using a dial gauge. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the oil pump assembly. Standard value (mm{in.}) 0.072 - 0.277 {0.0028 - 0.0109}

SAPH311991200027

9.

Service limit (mm{in.}) 0.30{0.0118}

Assembly of oil pump (1)

Install the safety valve, relief valve, seat 1 and seat 2 on the oil pump cover assembly with new cotter pins.

SAPH311991200017

(2)

Install the driven gear.

SAPH311991200016 Replacement procedure item

Replacement of oil strainer JP31199120704003

1.

Removal of oil strainer (1)

2.

Remove bolts and remove the oil strainer.

Installation of oil strainer (1)

Replace the O-ring with new ones and install the oil strainer. Tightening torque : 31 N m {320 kgf cm, 23 lbf ft}

Setup layout Layout

SAPH311991200028


12–14

LUBRICATION

Oil Pan Part layout JP31199120402003

SAPH311991200029

12111

Oil pan assembly

12149

Drain plug

12151

Oil pan gasket*

9659A

Gasket*

9068-08800

30 N m {300 kgf cm, 22lbf ft}

*Parts not to be reused. Tightening torque 12149

30 N m {300 kgf cm, 22lbf ft} Service procedure Replacement procedure item


12–15

LUBRICATION

Replacement JP31199120704004

1.

Installation of oil pan (1)

Cut the gasket of the rear end plate to be flush to the cylinder block lower surface using a scraper.

(2)

Make sure that there is no deformation, dirt or oil on the joint surface between the cylinder block and the oil pan.

Protrusion

Apply liquid gasket [Threebond TB1207D (silver) or equivalent] to the front rear end of the cylinder block lower surface. (3) Bolt tightening attaching direction

Insert several stud bolts (70 mm{2.7559 in.} or larger) for positioning into the cylinder block screw hole.

(4)

Position the oil pan gasket protrusion at the intake side and the flywheel housing (printed seal surface at cylinder block). Align the new oil pan gasket and oil pan to the cylinder block lower surface and tighten bolts in the arrow order of the figure. Tightening torque : 19.6 - 24.5 N m {200 - 250 kgf cm, 14 - 18 lbf ft}

Liquied gasket application position Engine front side

(5)

Remove positioning stud bolts and install the correct bolts.

(6)

Tighten bolts in the arrow order of the figure.

SAPH311991200030

Tightening torque : 30 N m {300 kgf cm, 22 lbf ft} ! CAUTION

• Check if the washer is not riding on the flange. • Make sure that the printed seal is not peeled or damaged before installation of the oil pan gasket.

Inspection procedure item


12–16

LUBRICATION

Inspection of lubrication status JP31199120703001

1.

Inspection of valve system

! CAUTION

• Perform inspection with the water temperature at 60 qC{140qF}.

(1)

Remove the head cover.

! CAUTION

• To prevent spread of engine oil, attach a jig which cuts a head cover in half. Cut it to the degree that the camshaft is covered.

(2)

Adjust the engine revolution to the standard idling revolution [1,000/min{rpm}].

(3)

After start of the engine, make sure that oil is supplied to the areas below of all rocker arms within about 10 seconds. • Roller and cam surface • Cross head and spring upper seat surface through adjusting screw

! CAUTION SAPH311991200031

• If time until lubrication is long or if lubrication is not performed, the oil pressure may be low or the oil channel may be clogged. Seizure, abnormal wear or abnormal noise may occur due to insufficient lubrication.


STARTING AND CHARGING

13–1

ENGINE

13 STARTING AND CHARGING Setup layout Layout

Starter ........................................................................ 13-2 Part layout (typical example)................................. 13-2 Disassembly.......................................................... 13-3 Inspection of components ..................................... 13-9 Assembly ............................................................ 13-14 Alternator (50A) ...................................................... 13-21 Part layout (typical example of 50A) ................... 13-21 Circuit drawing (50A) .......................................... 13-22 Disassembly........................................................ 13-23 Inspection of components ................................... 13-26 Assembly ............................................................ 13-29 Inspection after assembly ................................... 13-33

13


13–2

STARTING AND CHARGING

Starter Part layout (typical example) JP31199130402001

SAPH311991300001

28011

Clutch assembly

28138

Packing*

28100

Starter

28140

Brush holder assembly

28111

Bushing

28142

Brush

28111A

Bushing

28142A

Brush

28113

Lever assembly

28143

Spring

28115

Start drive housing

28150

Center bracket

28117

Packing*

28160

Armature assembly

28117A

Packing*

28168

Retainer clip*

28118

Plate

28199

Dust protector

28118A

Brake plate

28240

Start magnet switch

28118B

Plate

28251

Pinion

28118C

Sim

28252

Rear side bearing*

28118D

Cover

28255

Shaft assembly

28120

Yoke assembly

28253

Planetary gear

28133

Commutator end frame

28253A

Internal gear

28112E

15.7-17.6 N m{160-179kgf cm, 12-13lbf ft}

*Parts not to be reused. Tightening torque 28112

14-16 N m{140-160kgf cm, 10-12lbf ft}

28112A

3.6-4.9 N m{37-49kgf cm, 3-4lbf ft} Service procedure Overhaul item


13–3

STARTING AND CHARGING

Disassembly JP31199130702001

M lead wire

• Fix the starter on the working table to ease

NOTICE

accessibility.

M terminal

1.

MRemoval of lead wire (1)

Remove the cap of the M terminal.

(2)

Remove nuts and remove the M lead wire.

SAPH311991300002

2. Through bolt

Removal of commutator end frame (1)

Loosen and remove two through bolts.

(2)

Remove two set bolts and remove the commutator end

Commutator end frame SAPH311991300003

frame.

Set bolt

! CAUTION

• Hold the M lead wire and remove the commutator end frame by lifting.

SAPH311991300004


13–4

STARTING AND CHARGING 3. Brush holder Assembly

Removal of brush holder assembly (1)

Lift the spring using a flat tip screwdriver or pliers. Remove four brushes from the brush holder assembly.

! CAUTION

(2)

• Do not cut the brush lead fixing clamp.

Remove the brush holder assembly from the armature assembly.

Spring Brush

Brush lead Clamp

SAPH311991300005

4. M lead wire

Removal of yoke assembly (1)

Yoke assembly

Remove the yoke assembly from the center bracket assembly.

! CAUTION

• Do not hold the M lead wire and hold the yoke assembly outer diameter for removal.

Center bracket assembly SAPH311991300006

5. Yoke assembly

Removal of packing (1)

Remove the packing from the centering parts at both ends of the yoke assembly.

! CAUTION

• Damaged packing must not be resued. Replace it with a new part.

Packing

Packing SAPH311991300007


STARTING AND CHARGING 6.

Removal of armature assembly (1)

Armature assembly

13–5

Remove the armature assembly by lifting.

! CAUTION

• When the armature assembly is removed, the washer at the end of the gear may be dropped and lost. Be careful for handling.

Center bracket assembly

SAPH311991300008

7.

Removal of rear bearing (1)

Pull out the bearing of the armature assembly using a puller or press.

Rear bearing

! CAUTION

• Removed bearing must not be reused. Replace it with a new one.

Puller SAPH311991300009

8. Packing

Cover

Removal of cover (1)

Remove the cover from the center bracket assembly.

(2)

Remove the packing.

! CAUTION

• Damaged packing must not be resued. Replace it with a new part.

SAPH311991300010

9.

Removal of planetary gear (1)

Planetary gear

Remove the planetary gear from the carrier pin.

! CAUTION

• Make sure that the gear is not damaged or chipped.

Carrier pin

SAPH311991300011


13–6

STARTING AND CHARGING 10. Removal of internal gear (1)

Remove the internal gear from the center bracket.

! CAUTION

• Make sure that the gear is not damaged or chipped.

Internal gear Center bracket

SAPH311991300012

11. Removal of shim washer (1)

Remove the shim washer from the center bracket.

Shim

SAPH311991300013

12. Removal of pinion (1)

Remove the retainer clip using a tool such as snap ring pliers.

Retainer clip

! CAUTION

• Retainer clip must not be reused. Replace it with a new one.

Pinion stopper

• Push upward or pull out the chipped part of

NOTICE

the clip mouth. Pinion SAPH311991300014

(2)

Remove the pinion stopper.

(3)

Remove the pinion.

Pinion stopper

! CAUTION

• Make sure that the gear is not damaged or chipped.

Pinion

SAPH311991300015


STARTING AND CHARGING

13–7

13. Removal of center bracket Center bracket

(1)

Remove two set bolts at the switch using a box screwdriver or offset wrench.

(2)

Lift and remove the center bracket.

Clutch assembly

SAPH311991300016

14. Removal of lever (1)

Hold the lever holder and press the entire lever to the clutch. Remove the link with the plunger.

Plunger

Holder Lever assembly

SAPH311991300017

(2)

Turn and pull out the lever assembly using the clutch as the axis.

Lever assembly SAPH311991300018


13–8

STARTING AND CHARGING 15. Removal of brake plate (1)

Hold the clutch case outer diameter and slide the clutch assembly upward. Pinch the clip end fixing the brake plate and remove it by bending.

SAPH311991300019

(2)

Remove the brake plate.

Brake plate

SAPH311991300020

16. Removal of clutch assembly (1) Clutch assembly

While pressing the clutch assembly to the center bracket assembly, offset the helical spline by one tooth. Pull out the clutch assembly upward from the offset position and remove it.

Center bracket assembly

SAPH311991300021

17. Removal of shaft assembly Washer

(1)

Turn the center bracket assembly upside down. Hold the carrier plate and pull out the shaft assembly.

! CAUTION

• Washers are available at the upper and lower parts of the carrier plate. Be careful for loss of the washers.

Shaft assembly

SAPH311991300022


13–9

STARTING AND CHARGING 18. Removal of packing (1)

Turn the center bracket upside down again and remove the packing.

! CAUTION

• Packing must not be reused.

Packing

SAPH311991300023

Inspection procedure item

Inspection of components JP31199130703001

1.

Inspection of yoke assembly (1)

Make sure that the coil lead wire has electric continuity using a circuit tester.

(2)

Make sure that there is no discoloration at the coil.

(3)

Measure the resistance between the coil lead wire and the

SAPH311991300024

Tester rod

yoke with a circuit tester and check insulation. When the value is below the service limit, replace it. Feed coil

Service limit ! CAUTION

1k:or less

• After cleaning and drying, take measurements.

Yoke assembly

SAPH311991300025

(4)

Measure the brush length using vernier calipers. When the value is below the service limit, replace it.

SAPH311991300026

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

18{0.7087}

13{0.5118} or less


13–10

STARTING AND CHARGING 2.

Inspection of armature assembly (1)

Piece of steel

Turn the armature assembly using a commercially available growler tester and put a piece of steel on the armature assembly. Make sure that the steel piece is not vibrating on the core circumference.

Growler tester

SAPH311991300027

(2)

Make sure that adjacent segments of the commutator have electric continuity using a circuit tester.

(3)

Make sure that there is no discoloration at the coil.

(4)

Measure the resistance between the commutator and the

SAPH311991300028

core using a circuit tester and check insulation. When the value is below the service limit, replace it. Core Commutator

! CAUTION

Standard value

Service limit

1M:or more

1k:or less

• After cleaning and drying, take measurements.

SAPH311991300029

(5)

Measure the commutator outer diameter using vernier calipers. When the value is below the service limit, replace it.

! CAUTION

• After removing roughness on the surface (after polishing), take measurements.

Commutator outer diameter Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

36{1.4173}

34{1.3386} or less

Commutator SAPH311991300030


13–11

STARTING AND CHARGING (6)

Measure the undercut depth between segments. If the undercut depth is beyond the service limit, repair it.

Segment

Undercut length: 0.5 to 0.8 mm {0.0197 - 0.0315}

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

0.5 - 0.8{0.0197 - 0.0315}

0.2{0.0079} or less

! CAUTION

• In repair, do not leave insulation material at the end of the segment.

Insulating material SAPH311991300031

(7)

Measure the shaft outer diameter using a micrometer. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the shaft.

A

Measuring area

Standard value

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

B

Area

12{0.4724}

Area

9{0.3543}

11.98{0.4717} or less 8.98{0.3535} or less

SAPH311991300032

3.

Inspection of brush holder assembly (1)

Measure the resistance between the holder (plus) and the plate using a circuit tester and check insulation. When the value is below the service limit, replace it. Service limit

! CAUTION

1k:or less

• After cleaning and drying, take measurements.

SAPH311991300033

(2) Brush

Measure the brush length using vernier calipers. When the value is below the service limit, replace it.

Spring

(3) Brush SAPH311991300034

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

18{0.7087}

13{0.5118} or less

Make sure that the spring has pressure.


13–12

STARTING AND CHARGING 4.

Inspection of shaft assembly (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the shaft using a micrometer If it is beyond the service limit, replace the shaft.

B

A

Measuring area

Standard value

Service limit

(mm{in.})

(mm{in.})

Area

26{1.0236}

Area

12.1{0.4764}

25.90{1.0197} or less

SAPH311991300035

5.

12.04{0.4740} or less

Inspection of clutch assembly (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the inner sleeve using a micrometer. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the clutch assembly. Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

25{0.9843}

24.90{0.9803} or less

SAPH311991300036

6.

Inspection of bearing (1)

Measure the bearing metal inner diameter (1 in the figure) of the pinion case using a cylinder gauge. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the bushing.

1

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

25{0.9843}

25.2{0.9921} or more

SAPH311991300037

(2)

Measure the bearing metal inner diameter (2 in the figure) of the center bracket using a cylinder gauge. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the center bracket.

2

SAPH311991300038

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

26{1.0236}

26.2{1.0315}


13–13

STARTING AND CHARGING (3)

of the shaft assembly using a cylinder gauge. If it is

4

3

Measure the bearing metal inner diameter (3 in the figure) beyond the service limit, replace the shaft assembly.

(4)

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

9{0.3543}

9.2{3.6220}

Measure the bearing housing inner diameter (4 in the figure) of the commutator end frame using a cylinder

SAPH311991300039

gauge. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the commutator end frame.

7. C terminal

Standard value (mm{in.})

Service limit (mm{in.})

28{1.1024}

28.1{1.1063} or more

Inspection of start magnet switch assembly (resistance of P coil) (1)

M terminal

Measure the P coil resistance between the C terminal and the M terminal using a circuit tester. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the start magnet switch. Standard value (:)

0.12 - 0.14

SAPH311991300040

8.

Inspection of start magnet switch assembly (resistance of H coil) (1)

C terminal

Measure the H coil resistance between the C terminal and the body using a circuit tester. If it is beyond the service limit, replace the start magnet switch.

Body

Standard value(:)

1.13 - 1.25

SAPH311991300041

9.

Inspection of start magnet switch assembly (electric continuity inspection) (1)

M terminal

Check electric continuity between the B terminal and the M terminal using a circuit tester, and make sure that there is no electric continuity.

B terminal SAPH311991300042


13–14

STARTING AND CHARGING (2)

Push the end of the start magnet switch assembly (close the internal contact) and make sure that there is electric continuity between the B terminal and the M terminal using a circuit tester.

SAPH311991300043 Overhaul item

Assembly JP31199130702002

1.

Installation of packing (1)

Install a new packing on the center bracket assembly.

Packing

SAPH311991300023

2.

Installation of shaft assembly (1)

Washer

Turn the center bracket assembly upside down and hold the carrier plate. Lubricate parts (refer to the lubrication point drawing and the lubrication list) and install the shaft assembly.

! CAUTION

• Washers are available at the upper and lower parts of the carrier plate. Be careful for loss of

Shaft assembly

the washers. SAPH311991300022

3.

Installation of clutch assembly (1)

Clutch assembly

Lubricate parts (refer to the lubrication point drawing and the lubrication list) and insert the clutch assembly into the center bracket assembly.

Center bracket assembly

SAPH311991300044


STARTING AND CHARGING 4.

13–15

Installation of brake plate (1)

Lubricate parts (refer to the lubrication point drawing and the lubrication list) and install the brake plate.

Brake plate

SAPH311991300045

5.

Installation of lever (1)

Lubricate parts (refer to the lubrication point drawing and the lubrication list). Turn and install the lever assembly using the clutch as the axis.

Lever assembly SAPH311991300018

6. Center bracket

Installation of pinion case (1)

Install two set bolts at the switch using a box screwdriver or offset wrench. Tightening torque : 14 - 16 N m {140 - 160 kgf cm, 10 - 12 lbf ft}

Clutch assembly

SAPH311991300016

7.

Installation of pinion (1)

Pinion stopper

Lubricate parts (refer to the lubrication point drawing and the lubrication list) and install the pinion and the pinion stopper.

Pinion

SAPH311991300015


13–16

STARTING AND CHARGING (2)

Install the retainer clip using a tool such as snap ring pliers.

Retainer clip Pinion stopper

Pinion SAPH311991300014

8.

Installation of shim washer (1)

Lubricate parts (refer to the lubrication point drawing and the lubrication list) and install the shim washer on the center bracket.

Shim

SAPH311991300013

9.

Removal of internal gear (1)

Lubricate parts (refer to the lubrication point drawing and the lubrication list) and install the internal gear on the center bracket.

Internal gear Center bracket

SAPH311991300012

10. Installation of planetary gear (1)

Lubricate parts (refer to the lubrication point drawing and the lubrication list) and install the planetary gear on the

Planetary gear Carrier pin

SAPH311991300011

carrier pin.


STARTING AND CHARGING

13–17

11. Installation of cover Packing

Cover

(1)

Install a new packing.

(2)

Install the cover on the center bracket assembly.

SAPH311991300010

12. Installation of rear bearing (1)

Install the bearing on the armature assembly using a press.

! CAUTION

• When the bearing is removed, replace it with a new one.

13. Installation of armature assembly (1) Armature assembly

Install the armature assembly.

! CAUTION

• When the armature assembly is installed, the washer at the end of the gear may be dropped and lost. Be careful for handling.

Center bracket assembly

SAPH311991300008

14. Installation of packing Yoke assembly

(1)

Install a new packing on the centering location at both ends of the yoke assembly.

! CAUTION

• Damaged packing must not be resued. Replace it with a new part.

Packing

Packing SAPH311991300007

15. Installation of yoke assembly M lead wire

(1) Yoke assembly

Center bracket assembly SAPH311991300006

Install the yoke assembly on the center bracket assembly.


13–18

STARTING AND CHARGING 16. Installation of brush holder assembly Brush holder Assembly

(1)

Lift the spring using a flat tip screwdriver, long-nose pliers or pliers. Install four brushes on the brush holder assembly.

Spring Brush

Brush lead Clamp

SAPH311991300005

17. Installation of commutator end frame (1)

Through bolt

Tighten the through bolt of the commutator end frame. Tightening torque : 15.7 - 17.6 N m {160 - 179 kgf cm, 12 - 13 lbf ft}

Commutator end frame SAPH311991300003

(2)

Tighten two set bolts. Tightening torque :

Set bolt

3.6 - 4.9 N m {37 - 49 kgf cm, 3 - 4 lbf ft} ! CAUTION

• Hold the M lead wire and remove the commutator end frame by lifting.

SAPH311991300004


STARTING AND CHARGING

13–19

18. Installation of lead wire M lead wire

(1)

Install the M lead wire.

M terminal

SAPH311991300002

19. Lubrication Refer to the following figure and table for lubricant to be applied. ! CAUTION

• There shall be no lubricant on the commutator surface, brush and contact.

SAPH311991300046


13–20

STARTING AND CHARGING

Table of lubricant Code

1

2

Lubricating point Pinion case metal and grease reservoir Bracket center metal and grease reservoir

Lubricant used

Multemp AC-N

Multemp AC-N

3

Shim washer

Multemp AC-N

4

Armature front metal

Multemp AC-N

5

Shim washer

Multemp AC-N

Amount (g{oz})

Remark

0.8 - 1.5

0.5 - 1.5

Kyodo Yushi

{0.03 - 0.05} Applied to both sides

{0.01 - 0.02} of washer. 0.5 - 1

Kyodo Yushi

Kyodo Yushi

{0.02 - 0.04} 0.2 - 0.5

manufacturer Kyodo Yushi

{0.03 - 0.05}

0.2 - 0.5

Lubricant

Applied to both sides

{0.01 - 0.02} of washer.

Kyodo Yushi

Internal gear 6

Armature gear

Multemp AC-N

7 -11

Kyodo Yushi

{0.25 - 0.39}

Planetary gear 7

Pinion straight Spline

Multemp AC-N

8

Inner sleeve metal

Multemp AC-N

9

Helical spline

Multemp AC-N

10

11

Clutch case lever shifter Bracket rear bearing housing

Pyroknock No.2

Pyroknock No.2

12

Planetary gear metal

Multemp AC-N

13

Lever holder

Multemp AC-N

0.5 - 1

Kyodo Yushi

{0.02 - 0.04} 0.3 - 0.6

Kyodo Yushi

{0.01 - 0.02} 0.5 - 1

Kyodo Yushi

{0.02 - 0.04} 1-2

Nippon Oil

{0.04 - 0.07}

Corporation

0.2 - 0.5

Nippon Oil

{0.01 - 0.02}

Corporation

1-2

Kyodo Yushi

{0.04 - 0.07} 0.4 - 0.8

Kyodo Yushi

{0.01 - 0.03} Assemble the roller

14

Lever roller rod

Pyroknock No.2

0.2 - 0.5 {0.01 - 0.02}

after application of grease to prevent fall of the roller in assembly.

Setup layout Layout

Nippon Oil Corporation


13–21

STARTING AND CHARGING

Alternator (50A) Part layout (typical example of 60A) JP31199130402002

SAPH311991300047

27017

Feed coil

27383A

Insulator

27040

Alternator

27389

Insulator

27310

Drive end frame assembly

27392

Cover

27311

Drive end frame

27410

Stator coil

27312

Bearing cover

27412

Collar

27330

Rotor assembly

27431

Pulley

27350

End frame assembly

27441

Fan

27353

Rectifier minus

27445A

Coupler holder

27356

Rectifier plus

27700

Regulator

27359

End frame

28252

Front bearing

27383

Insulator

28252A

Rear bearing

Tightening torque 27317

7.8-9.8 N m{80-99 kgf cm, 6-7lbf ft}

27317C

1.9-2.5 N m{20-25 kgf cm, 1-2lbf ft}

27317A

1.9-2.5 N m{20-25 kgf cm, 1-2lbf ft}

27391

127 - 157 N m{1, 300 - 1, 600 kgf cm, 94116lbf ft}

27317B

2.9 - 3.9 N m{30 - 39 kgf cm, 2-3lbf ft}

27391A

Internal nut : 4.9-5.9 N m{50-60 kgf cm, 3.6-4.3lbf ft}

System drawing


13–22

STARTING AND CHARGING

Circuit drawing (50A) JP31199130803001

Capacitor Diode Fuse L

Load

Lamp 1.4 to 3W

R P

Starter switch

Feed coil N

Regulator Battery 24V

Stator coil

E Alternator

SAPH311991300048 Service procedure Overhaul item


13–23

STARTING AND CHARGING

Disassembly JP31199130702003

! CAUTION

• Place a rubber mat and perform work on the mat.

1.

Disconnection of front from rear (1)

Remove fixing bolts and remove the cover.

! CAUTION

• Press the tabs of the cover for removal. Be careful not to break the tab with excessive force.

SAPH311991300049

(2)

Remove bolts with a screwdriver and remove the coupler holder.

SAPH311991300050

(3)

Remove three through bolts and disconnect the front from the rear.

SAPH311991300051

2.

Disassembly of front (1)

Remove nuts and remove the pulley, fan and collar.

! CAUTION

• Tie around a general V –belt in the pulley groove and fix the pulley with a vice.

SAPH311991300052


13–24

STARTING AND CHARGING (2)

Remove the rotor assembly using a press.

! CAUTION

• Do not damage the end of the thread. • Support the rotor assembly to prevent fall of the rotor assembly.

SAPH311991300053

(3)

Remove three bolts with a screwdriver and remove the bearing cover.

SAPH311991300054

(4)

Remove the ball bearing from the front bracket using a press or jig C.

Jig C

! CAUTION

• Place jig C at the inner race of the front bearing. • Removed bearing must not be reused.

SAPH311991300055

3.

Disassembly of rear (1)

Remove solder of the lead wire connecting the stator coil and the diode using a soldering bit and suction line or a solder suction device

! CAUTION

• At solder of the stator coil and the diode, the end of the diode is clamped. Do not damage the diode by prying. Deformed diode must not be reused.

SAPH311991300056

• Perform soldering in a short time (within 5 seconds).


STARTING AND CHARGING (2)

13–25

Remove the stator coil from the rear bracket.

! CAUTION

• Do not damage the stator coil.

SAPH311991300057

(3)

Remove solder of the lead wire connecting the regulator and the field coil using a soldering bit.

! CAUTION

• Remove the lead wire of the field coil by raising the terminal of the regulator. • Perform soldering in a short time (within 5 seconds).

SAPH311991300058

Terminal Lead wire

Regulator assembly SAPH311991300059

(4)

Loosen the nut at the B terminal.

! CAUTION

• Loosen the nut to some extent and do not remove it from the B terminal.

SAPH311991300060


13–26

STARTING AND CHARGING (5)

Remove five bolts using a screwdriver and remove the heat sink assembly (plus), heat sink assembly (minus) and regulator all together.

! CAUTION

• Screw lock is used. Since torque is high until bolt is removed, be careful not to damage the groove of the bolt head. • When the rear bracket is reused, clean the screw hole.

SAPH311991300061

(6)

Remove the capacitor.

(7)

Remove three bolts with a screwdriver and remove the field coil from the rear bracket.

SAPH311991300062

(8)

Remove the roller bearing from the rear bracket using a press, jig A and jig B.

! CAUTION

• Removed bearing must not be reused.

SAPH311991300063 Inspection procedure item

Inspection of components JP31199130703002

! CAUTION

• Place a rubber mat and perform work on the mat.

1.

Inspection of stator coil and field coil (1)

Measure the resistance between U-V, V-W and W-U terminals of the stator coil using a circuit tester. Standard value (:)

SAPH311991300064

0.15 - 0.17


13–27

STARTING AND CHARGING (2)

Measure the resistance between the stator coil core and each terminal using a megger tester. Standard value (M:)

1 or more

SAPH311991300065

(3)

Measure the resistance of the field coil using a circuit tester. Standard value (:)

! CAUTION

6.4 - 7.0

• Do not damage the circumferential surface of the coil. • Damaged coil circumference must not be reused.

SAPH311991300066

(4)

Measure the resistance between the core and the coil using a megger tester. Standard value (M:)

1 or more

SAPH311991300067

2.

Inspection of rotor assembly (1)

Measure the outer diameter of the shaft at the ball bearing insertion area of the rotor assembly using a micrometer.

SAPH311991300068

Standard value (mm{in.})

25{0.9843}

Service limit (mm{in.})

24.98{0.9835}


13–28

STARTING AND CHARGING (2)

Measure the outer diameter of the shaft at the roller bearing insertion area of the rotor assembly using a micrometer. Standard value (mm{in.})

17{0.6693}

Service limit (mm{in.})

16.98{0.6685}

SAPH311991300069

3.

Inspection of diode, capacitor and regulator (1)

Measure the resistance of the holder between the minus diode and the heat sink holder using a circuit tester. Standard value Forward resistance value

Approx. 10 :

Reverse resistance value

Infinite

SAPH311991300070

(2)

Measure the resistance between the capacitor terminal and the body using a circuit tester. Make sure that it indicates 800 k: and then immediately indicates infinite value.

SAPH311991300071

(3)

Inspection of regulator Measure the resistance between regulator terminals F and E using a circuit tester. Standard value

Overhaul item

SAPH311991300072

Forward resistance value

Approx. 10 :

Reverse resistance value

Infinite


13–29

STARTING AND CHARGING

Assembly JP31199130702004

! CAUTION

• Place a rubber mat and perform work on the mat.

Jig C

1.

Assembly of front (1)

Press fit a new ball bearing into the front bracket using a press and jig C.

! CAUTION

• Place jig C at the outer race of the ball bearing. • Removed bearing must not be reused.

SAPH311991300073

(2)

Install the bearing cover with bolts. Tightening torque : 1.9 - 2.5 N m {20 - 25 kgf cm, 1 - 2 lbf ft}

SAPH311991300074

(3)

Install the rotor assembly using a press.

! CAUTION

• Be sure to support the inner race of the bearing for press fit of the rotor. • Do not damage the shaft.

SAPH311991300075

(4)

Install the space collar, fan and pulley on the shaft of the rotor assembly. Tightening torque : 127 - 157 N m {1,300 - 1,600 kgf cm, 94 - 116 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• Tie around a general V –belt in the pulley groove and fix the pulley with a vice.

SAPH311991300076


13–30

STARTING AND CHARGING 2.

Assembly of rear (1)

Jig A

Press fit a new roller bearing into the rear bracket using a press, jig A and jig B.

! CAUTION

• Press fit until jig A comes in contact with the rear bracket.

Roller bearing Jig B

SAPH311991300077

(2)

Install the field coil on the rear bracket. Tightening torque : 2.9 - 3.9 N m {30 - 39 kgf cm, 2 - 3 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• Tighten bolts finally after temporary tightening. Tighten them evenly.

SAPH311991300078

(3)

Assemble the stator coil on the rear bracket temporarily.

! CAUTION

• Do not damage the stator coil.

SAPH311991300079

(4)

Install parts referring to the part layout. Tightening torque : 1.9 - 2.5 N m {20 - 25 kgf cm, 1 - 2 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• Apply screw lock to the ends of the heat sink mounting bolt and the regulator mounting bolt.

SAPH311991300080


STARTING AND CHARGING (5)

13–31

Solder the lead wire connecting the regulator and the field coil, and connecting the stator coil and the diode using a soldering bit.

! CAUTION

• Perform soldering after tightening of bolts. • Bend and fix the regulator terminal before soldering the lead wire of the field coil. • Clamp the end of the diode of the stator coil before soldering. • Perform soldering in a short time (within 5

SAPH311991300081

seconds).

Terminal Lead wire

Regulator assembly SAPH311991300082

(6)

Tighten the nut inside the B terminal. Tightening torque : 4.9 - 5.9 N m {50 - 60 kgf cm, 3.6 - 4.3 lbf ft} • After installation of the alternator, connect

NOTICE

the wire and tighten the outside nut

SAPH311991300083

3.

Joint of front and rear (1)

Joint the front with the rear with bolts. Tightening torque : 7.8 - 9.8 N m {80 - 99 kgf cm, 6 - 7 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

SAPH311991300084

• Tighten bolts evenly.


13–32

STARTING AND CHARGING (2)

Install the coupler holder and tighten bolts. Tightening torque : 1.9 - 2.5 N m {20 - 25 kgf cm, 1 - 2 lbf ft}

SAPH311991300085

(3)

Align the tab and install the cover. Fix it with bolts. Tightening torque : 3.3 - 4.4 N m {34 - 44 kgf cm, 2 - 3 lbf ft}

! CAUTION

• Do not hit the cover because the tab may be broken.

Inspection procedure item

SAPH311991300086


13–33

STARTING AND CHARGING

Inspection after assembly JP31199130703003

! CAUTION

• Place a rubber mat and perform work on the mat.

1.

Inspection of rotation (1)

Turn the pulley with hand to check if there is no interference with internal parts and if rotation is smooth.

SAPH311991300087

(2)

Measure the resistance between B and E terminals and between P and E terminals using a circuit tester. If it is beyond the standard value (e.g. 0 :), disassemble it again and reassemble the unit correctly. Circuit tester lead Standard value

SAPH311991300088

(+)

(–)

B

E

Approx. 20 :

E

B

Infinite

P

E

Approx.7 :

E

P

Infinite

B

R

L

N

P E Connector details

SAPH311991300089



TURBOCHARGER

14–1

ENGINE

14 TURBOCHARGER Setup layout Layout

Turbocharger Assembly........................................... 14-2 Part layout ............................................................ 14-2 Inspection ............................................................. 14-3 Replacement......................................................... 14-6

14


14–2

TURBOCHARGER

Turbocharger Assembly Part layout JP31199140402001

SAPH311991400010

15407

Oil inlet pipe

24109

Gasket*

16691

Coolant pipe

24109A

Gasket*

16691A

Coolant pipe

24135

Gasket*

17291

Exhaust manifold connector

24135A

Gasket*

24100

Turbocharger assembly

9654-12100

Gasket*

24107

Oil outlet pipe

9659A

Gasket*

*Parts not to be reused. Tightening torque 9209A

56 N m {570 kgf cm, 41lbf ft} Maintenance List of maintenance inspection inspection (preventive service)


14–3

TURBOCHARGER

Inspection JP31199140501001

1.

Inspection of turbine shaft axial play (1)

Inspect play of the turbine shaft at the exhaust side using a special tool. Special tool : 09444-1800 Tool assembly

(2)

If the measurement value is beyond the standard value, ask the manufacturer to overhaul the unit. Standard value

SAPH311991400002

(mm{in.}) NOTICE

Axial direction

0.1 {0.0039}

Radial direction

1.0 {0.0393}

• Since the assembly is replaced, disassembly and inspection are not allowed.

2.

Inspection procedure with special tool (1)

Remove dial gauge (key No. 1), loosen the bolt (key No. 13) of the guide (key No. 13) and turn the guide (key No. 2) 90q. Put the dial gauge into the plate (key No. 8) which is inspected for axial play, and tighten the bolt (key No. 19) for fixing.

SAPH311991400003

Bolt SAPH311991400004

(2) Guide

SAPH311991400005

Insert the guide (key No. 9) to preventment horizontal movement of the measuring instrument.


14–4

TURBOCHARGER (3)

When the guide (key No. 9) is fixed, move the bar (key No. 4) vertically and fix the guide (key No. 9) with the stopper (key No. 10) so that the needle of the dial gauge may come at the center.

SAPH311991400006

(4)

Hold the puller (key No. 5) and press it toward the turbine in the axial direction. Set the dial gauge reading to 0.

0 point adjustment SAPH311991400007

(5)

Pull it to the opposite side and measure movement in the

(6)

Take three measurements and use the average value as

axial direction. the measurement value.

SAPH311991400008


14–5

TURBOCHARGER

Special Tool Details

Key No. Assembly

Part name

Key No.

Part name

Tool assembly

10

Stopper

1

Gauge (dial gauge)

11

Bolt

2

Guide

12

Sleeve

3

Stopper

13

Bolt

4

Bar

14

Bolt

5

Puller

15

Bolt

6

Sleeve

16

Hook

7

Plate

17

Snap ring (cotter pin)

8

Plate

18

Bar (spring)

9

Guide

19

Bolt SAPH311991400009

Service procedure Replacement procedure item


14–6

TURBOCHARGER

Replacement JP31199140704001

1.

Removal (1)

Remove the boost pipe and U-turn pipe.

(2)

Disconnect all pipes connected to the turbocharger.

! CAUTION

• Loosen union bolt of the coolant pipe, drain coolant and remove the pipe. Disconnect the lower pipe similarly and remove the oil pipe. • After removing pipes, be sure to seal oil holes, water holes and cylinder block holes to prevent entry of dirt.

(3)

Remove the bolts fixing the exhaust pipe and the turbocharger and remove the turbocharger.

! CAUTION

• After removal, seal holes both at the exhaust manifold and the exhaust pipe to prevent entry of foreign matter. • If a stud bolt is sticking, remove and replace the stud bolt using a commercially available stud remover.

2.

Installation (1)

Install the turbocharger in the reverse order of disassembly. When the turbocharger is installed on the engine or after installation, observe the following precautions for work. Pay special attention to entry of foreign matter inside the turbocharger. Tightening torque : 56 N m {570 kgf cm, 41 lbf ft} (Turbocharger to exhaust manifold)

(2)

Lubrication and cooling system a.

Before installation on the engine, pour new engine oil from the oil inlet and turn the turbocharger with hand to lubricate the journal bearing and the thrust bearing.

b.

Clean the oil pipe, oil hose, coolant pipe and hose. Check for pipe deformation, hose crack or dirt or foreign matter in the pipe or hose.

c.

Do not use sealant at the installation surface of the oil pipe and the coolant pipe or joint between the coolant hose and the coolant pipe to prevent failures such as damage due to clogging or loosening of tightened areas.

d.

Be sure to use new soft washers, O-rings and gaskets.

e.

Be sure to install the oil pipe, oil hose, coolant pipe and coolant hose correctly to prevent leak of oil or water from connections.


TURBOCHARGER (3)

14–7

Air intake system a.

Make sure that there is no dirt or foreign matter in the air intake system.

b.

Do not use sealant at the inlet/outlet of air to prevent failures such as damage due to clogging or loosening of tightened areas.

c.

Be sure to install the air feed pipe and the air hose correctly to prevent air leak from connections.

(4)

Exhaust system a.

Make sure that there is no dirt or foreign matter in the exhaust piping system.

b.

Since heat resistant steel is used for bolts and nuts, do not mix them with normal bolts for installation.



FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS

16–1

ENGINE

16 FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS Failure diagnosis list

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS .................................................................................... 16-2 Engine mechanical ............................................... 16-2 Alternator .............................................................. 16-5 Starter ................................................................... 16-6 Turbocharger......................................................... 16-7

16


16–2

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS Engine mechanical JP31199160601001

Status Engine overheat (coolant)

Cause

Action

Insufficient coolant

Replenish coolant

Faulty thermostat

Replace thermostat

Water leak from cooling system

Correction

Faulty coolant pump

Repair or replace

Faulty head gasket

Replace head gasket

Engine overheat

Clogging of radiator

Cleaning of radiator

(radiator)

Corrosion of cooling system

Clean and repair cooling system

Clogging of radiator core front part

Clean radiator

Faulty radiator cap

Replace radiator cap

Engine overheat (compression

Non-synchronous injection timing

Injection timing inspection

pressure)

Faulty fuel injection pressure

Injection pressure inspection

Faulty fuel

Replace with correct fuel

Faulty injector

Replace injector

Engine overheat (lubrication

Deterioration of engine oil

Replace engine oil

unit)

Faulty oil pump

Replace oil pump

Insufficient engine oil

Replenish engine oil

Large engine oil consumption

Wear of piston ring and cylinder

Replace piston ring and cylinder

(piston, cylinder liner and piston

liner

liner

ring)

Damage to piston ring

Replace piston ring and cylinder liner

Faulty fixing of piston ring

Replace piston ring and cylinder liner

Faulty assembly of piston ring

Replace piston ring and cylinder liner

Faulty engine oil

Replace engine oil

Faulty piston ring joint

Reassemble piston ring

Large engine oil consumption

Wear of valve stem

Replace valve and valve guide

(valve and valve guide)

Wear of valve guide

Replace valve guide

Faulty assembly of valve stem seal

Replace stem seal

Excessive oil lubrication to rocker

Inspection of clearance between

arm

rocker arm and rocker arm shaft

Large engine oil consumption

Faulty oil level gauge

Replace with correct level gauge

(others)

Excessive filling of engine oil

Fill with appropriate amount of oil.

Leak of engine oil

Repair or replace the part of oil leak.

Piston seizure (in operation)

Sudden stop of engine

Perform warm-up before stop of engine

Piston seizure (lubrication unit)

Insufficient engine oil

Replenish engine oil

Deterioration of engine oil

Replace engine oil

Incorrect engine oil

Replace with correct engine oil.

Low oil pressure

Inspection of lubrication unit

Faulty oil pump

Replace oil pump


16–3

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS Status

Cause

Action

Piston seizure

Abnormal combustion

Refer to overheat section.

Piston seizure

Cooling unit

Refer to overheat section.

Insufficient engine power (air

Clogging of air cleaner element

Clean or replace air cleaner

cleaner)

element

Insufficient engine power

Overheat

Refer to overheat section.

Insufficient engine power (fuel

Faulty injection of injector

Replace injector

unit)

Faulty injector due to deposit of

Replace injector

carbon Entry of air into fuel system

Air bleeding of fuel system

Faulty fuel filter

Replace element

Faulty fuel

Replace with correct fuel

Insufficient engine power

Abnormal compression pressure

Refer to overheat section.

Insufficient engine power

Piston, cylinder liner and piston

Refer to overheat section.

ring Faulty engine start (electric unit)

Faulty battery

Check battery

Faulty wiring of starter

Replace starter wiring

Loose battery cable

Tighten battery terminal connection or replace cable

Faulty engine start (air cleaner)

Faulty operation of starter

Replace starter assembly

Faulty start assist unit

Replace start assist unit

Clogging of air cleaner element

Clean or replace air cleaner element

Faulty engine start (fuel unit)

Insufficient fuel

Replenish fuel and bleed air from fuel system

Clogging of fuel system

Clean fuel system.

Air intake from connection of fuel

Tighten connections

system Clogging of fuel filter

Replace fuel filter

Loose connection of injection pipe

Tighten connecting nut of injection pump

Faulty engine start (injector)

Injector seizure

Faulty engine start (lubrication

Excessive viscosity of engine oil

unit) Faulty engine start (others)

Replace injector Replace with engine oil with correct viscosity

Piston seizure

Replace piston, piston ring and cylinder liner

Bearing seizure

Replace bearing and crankshaft

Low compression pressure

Overhaul engine

Damage to ring gear

Replace ring gear and replace starter pinion gear.

Faulty idling (injector)

Faulty injection pressure

Injection pressure inspection

Faulty injection status

Adjust or replace injector.


16–4

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS Status

Faulty idling (nozzle)

Faulty idling (engine)

Cause

Action

Faulty injection pressure

Injection pressure inspection

Faulty spray status

Adjust or replace nozzle

Carbon deposit at nozzle end

Remove carbon

Seizure of needle valve

Replace nozzle

Faulty valve clearance

Adjustment of valve clearance

Faulty contact of valve seat

Adjust or replace valve and valve seat.

Low coolant temperature

Perform warm-up.

Large variation of compression

Overhaul engine

pressure between cylinders

Training of engine difference not performed after exchange of the engine ECU

Gas leak (head gasket)

Gas leak (head bolt)

Training of engine difference not

Perform training of engine

performed after exchange of the

difference after exchange of the

engine ECU

engine ECU

Reuse

Replace gasket.

Damage

Replace gasket.

Replace gasket.

Replace gasket.

Loose head bolt

Tighten bolt.

Incorrect tightening sequence or

Tighten bolt to correct torque

incorrect tightening torque

according to the correct tightening sequence.

Gas leak (cylinder block)

Extension of head bolt

Replace bolt.

Crack

Replace cylinder block.

Distortion of cylinder block upper

Repair or replace cylinder block.

surface Depression of cylinder liner

Replace cylinder liner or block.

insertion (insufficient protrusion of cylinder liner) Gas leak (cylinder head)

Crack of cylinder head

Replace cylinder head.

Distortion of cylinder head lower

Repair or replace cylinder head.

surface Gas leak (cylinder liner)

Crack of cylinder liner

Replace cylinder liner.

Corrosion of cylinder liner

Replace cylinder liner.

Insufficient protrusion of cylinder

Replace cylinder liner or block.

liner Gas leak (others)

Incorrect injection timing

Injection timing inspection


16–5

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS

Alternator JP31199160601002

Status

Cause

Action

Lamp is ON.oCharge current

Faulty regulator (open PTr)

Replace regulator.

does not run (alternator).

Faulty stator coil (disconnection,

Replace stator coil.

rare shorting) Fault feed coil (disconnection, rare

Replace feed coil.

shorting) Faulty diode (open, shorting)

Replace rectifier.

Disconnection or poor contact of

Repair or replace lead wire.

lead wire (plate, support, etc.) Lamp is ON.oCharge current

Disconnection of wire (fuse)

Replace wire (fuse).

Lamp is ON.oVoltmeter

Faulty regulator (shorting of PTr)

Replace regulator.

indicates 29V or more

Faulty tightening of voltage

Repair, replace voltage detection

(alternator).

detection circuit (e.g. support)

circuit or replace regulator.

Lamp is ON.oCharge current is

Faulty regulator (open Tr)

Replace regulator.

Lamp is OFF.oCharge current is

Faulty stator coil (disconnection of 1

Replace stator coil.

always limited.oBattery goes flat

phase, rare shorting)

(alternator).

Faulty diode (open, shorting)

Replace rectifier.

Disconnection or poor contact of

Repair or replace lead wire.

does not run (wiring).

correctly running (alternator).

lead wire (plate, support, etc.) Lamp is OFF.oCharge current is

Operation load is large (Load

always limited.oBattery goes flat

balance is poor).

Reduce load

(operation load). Lamp is OFF.oCharge current is

Faulty regulator (shorting of PTr)

Replace regulator.

always large.oBattery fluid runs

Faulty tightening of voltage

Repair or replace voltage detection

short in a short period of time

detection circuit (e.g. support)

circuit.

Battery is close to the service life.

Replace battery.

OthersoAbnormal noise

Faulty stator coil (rare shorting,

Replace stator coil.

(alternator)

grounding)

(alternator). Lamp is OFF.oCharge current is always large.oBattery fluid runs short in a short period of time (battery).

Contact of inner surface (faulty

Repair or replace bearing.

bearing, wear of bracket) OthersoAbnormal noise (V belt)

Faulty tension of V belt (belt slip)

Correction


16–6

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS

Starter JP31199160601003

Status

Cause

Action

Starter does not turn. Turning is

Faulty connection of starter key

Repair connecting area.

low.

Flat battery

Charge or replace.

Disconnection, loosening or

After cleaning, tighten.

corrosion of battery terminal Grounding wire is disconnected.

Be sure to connect it.

Use of incorrect engine oil

Replace with correct oil.

Faulty contact of start magnet

Replace start magnet switch

switch assembly.

assembly

Faulty contact or failure of starter

Replace starter relay.

relay Wear of starter brush

Replace brush

Seizure of commutator

Repair commutator.

Wear of commutator

Undercut

Shorting of armature

Replace armature assembly

Insufficient tension of brush spring

Replace brush spring.

Faulty operation of clutch

Clean or replace.


16–7

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS

Turbocharger JP31199160601004

Status Exhaust smoke is black

Cause Clogging of air cleaner element

(insufficient intake air).

Action Clean or replace air cleaner element.

Air intake inlet is closed.

Recover normal status.

Leak from connection of air intake

Check and repair.

system Revolution of blower impeller and

Disassembly and repair.

turbine shaft is heavy Exhaust smoke is black

Oil impurities are deposited at the

Replace engine oil and

(Turbocharger is not operating).

sealing part of the turbine and

disassemble the turbocharger for

revolution of the turbine shaft is heavy.

cleaning.

Seizure of bearing

Replace turbocharger.

Seizure of bearing (insufficient

Check the oil system of the engine

lubrication or clogging of oil pipe)

and repair faulty areas. Also, replace engine oil.

Seizure of bearing (Oil temperature

Check the oil system of the engine

is too high.)

and repair faulty areas. Also, replace engine oil.

Seizure of bearing (Balance of

Replace or clean revolving part.

revolving body is poor.) Seizure of bearing (insufficient

Observe the precautions strictly in

warm-up or sudden stop from

the operation manual.

loaded operation: Unloaded operation) Contact of or damage to turbine

Check and repair engine parts.

shaft and blower impeller (excessive operation) Contact of or damage to turbine

Check and repair engine parts.

shaft and blower impeller (excessive increase of exhaust gas temperature) Contact of or damage to turbine

Disassemble the engine to remove

shaft and blower impeller (entry of

foreign matter completely. Check

foreign matter)

and repair the air cleaner and engine parts.

Contact of or damage to turbine shaft

Replace turbocharger.

and blower impeller (wear of bearing) Contact of or damage to turbine shaft

Reassemble or replace.

and blower impeller (faulty assembly) Exhaust smoke is black (due to

Exhaust gas is leaking before the

exhaust gas resistance).

turbocharger. Revolution is not

Check and repair mounting area.

increased. Since pipe of the exhaust system is deformed or clogged, revolution of the turbocharger is not increased.

Recover normal status.


16–8

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS Status

Exhaust smoke is white.

Cause Engine oil runs out to the blower or

Action Repair or replace pipe.

the turbine due to clogging or deformation of the oil return pipe. Negative pressure at the back of

Check and replace the pipe.

the blower impeller is increased and

Replace or clean the air cleaner

engine oil runs out to the blower.

element.

Seal ring is excessively worn or

Disassemble and repair

damaged due to excessive wear of

turbocharger.

the bearing. Entry of water into the cylinder

Exchange or repair of the parts where water has entered

Oil is quickly reduced.

Seal ring is excessively worn or

Disassemble and repair

damaged due to excessive wear of

turbocharger.

the bearing. Engine oil enters into exhaust gas

Check and service engine parts.

before the turbocharger. Low engine output

Gas leak from exhaust system

Check and repair faulty areas.

parts Air leak from blower outlet

Check and repair faulty areas.

Clogging of air cleaner element

Clean or replace air cleaner element

Contamination of or damage to

Replace turbocharger.

turbocharger Acceleration (follow-up of

Carbon deposit at the turbine (disc

Replace engine oil and clean

turbocharger) is poor (slow).

sealing area) makes revolution of

turbocharger.

the turbine heavy. Air and gas leak from intake/

Check and repair faulty areas.

exhaust system parts Combustion is faulty.

Check the engine fuel system and recover correct combustion status.

Abnormal noise

If the gas passage is extremely

Replace turbocharger.

narrowed due to clogging at the turbine case nozzle or if acceleration is performed, reverse flow (usually called surging) occurs due to clogging of blower discharge air. Revolving part is in contact.

Replace turbocharger.

Air and gas leak from intake/

Check and repair faulty areas.

exhaust system parts


16–9

FAILURE DIAGNOSIS FOR EACH ENGINE STATUS Status Vibration

Cause

Action

Loosening between turbocharger

Check the turbocharger mounting

and intake/exhaust pipe and

status and repair faulty areas.

between oil pipe and mounting area Failure of metal, contact between

Replace turbocharger. Remove

revolving part and peripheral parts,

foreign matter completely, if any.

or damage to the blower impeller of the turbine rotor due to entry of foreign matter is found. Balance of revolving body is poor.

Replace revolving body.



ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

17–1

ENGINE

17 ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE General information

Engine ECU ............................................................... 17-2 Precautions ........................................................... 17-2 System block diagram........................................... 17-3 Inspection ............................................................. 17-4 Table of failure code .............................................. 17-5 Signal check harness............................................ 17-8 Computer pin arrangement ................................. 17-10 Check the ECU power supply voltage................. 17-11 Check the ground................................................ 17-11 Engine speed main sensor circuit malfunction (DTC code P0335) .............................................. 17-12 Engine speed sub sensor circuit malfunction (DTC code P0340) .............................................. 17-14 Engine speed main and sub sensor circuit malfunction (DTC code P0335) .............................................. 17-15 Coolant temperature sensor malfunction (DTC code P0117, P0118) ................................. 17-16 Engine overheat (DTC code P0217) .............................................. 17-17 Engine overrun (DTC code P0219) .............................................. 17-17 Fuel temperature sensor malfunction (DTC code P0182, P0183) ................................. 17-18 Boost pressure sensor malfunction (DTC code P0108, P0237) ................................. 17-19 Turbocharger over boost (DTC code P0234) .............................................. 17-21 Excessive common rail pressure (DTC code P0088) .............................................. 17-21 Excessive common rail pressure, supply pump excess forced feed (DTC code P0088) ........................... 17-22 Common rail pressure sensor malfunction (DTC code P0191) .............................................. 17-23 Common rail pressure sensor malfunction (DTC code P0192, P0193) ................................. 17-24 Accelerator sensor 1 malfunction (DTC code P2122, P2123) ................................. 17-26 Accelerator sensor 2 malfunction (DTC code P2127, P2128) ................................. 17-28 Accelerator sensor 1 and 2 malfunction (DTC code P2120) .............................................. 17-30 Emergency accelerator sensor malfunction (DTC code P1133) .............................................. 17-31 Atmospheric pressure sensor malfunction (DTC code P2228, P2229) ................................. 17-33

Injector common 1 ground short (DTC code P1211), Injector common 2 ground short (DTC code P1214) .............................................. 17-34 Injector common 1 power source line short (DTC code P1212), Injector common 2 power source line short (DTC code P1215) .............................................. 17-36 Injector circuit malfunction (DTC code P0201 to P0204)............................... 17-38 Cylinder contribution/balance fault (DTC codes P0263, P0266, P0269, P0272) ....... 17-41 Supply pump SCV malfunction (DTC code P0628, P0629).................................. 17-43 Supply pump SCV sticking (DTC code P2635), Supply pump malfunction (DTC code P2635), Supply pump abnormal pressure record (DTC code P2635) .............................................. 17-45 Preheat circuit malfunction (DTC code P0540) .............................................. 17-46 Injector correction data conformity error (DTC code P1601) ............................................. 17-47 ECU internal error (DTC code P0605, P0606, P0607) ..................... 17-47 ECU charge circuit malfunction (DTC code P0200, P0611).................................. 17-48 Main relay malfunction (DTC code P0686) .............................................. 17-49 Starter signal malfunction (DTC code P0617) .............................................. 17-49

17


17–2

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Engine ECU Precautions JP31199170102001

! CAUTION

• Make sure that each connector is connected before inspection. • Do not place a tester rod on the connecting surface of the connector. Otherwise, terminals are damaged or short-circuited. • Delete the past failure memory after recording. Perform failure diagnosis again to check current failure. • After failure analysis, delete the past failure memory. If the past failure memory is not deleted, the failure indicator lamp remains ON. • All connector drawings are viewed from the connecting surface. Place the tester rod from

SAPH311991700001

the back. System drawing


17–3

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

System block diagram JP31199170803001

ACT Relay

Fuse

Each Sensor Power Main relay

Key switch signal

Fuse

Starter signal -

+

Battery

Accelerator signal 1,2 Diagnosis tool

Diagnosis switch Accelerator sensor for operation

I/F

Engine speed main sensor Engine speed sub sensor

OUTPUT

PC Diagnosis tool

Glow relay

INPUT

Injector drive signal Supply pump Supply pump control valve drive signal Supply pump drive signal

S/P

Others Fuel temperature sensor (Supply pump)

Boost pressure sensor Common rail pressure sensor1 Common rail pressure sensor2

Engine ECU

Common rail

Water temperature sensor

T

Engine P

SAPH311991700002 Service procedure Inspection procedure item


17–4

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Inspection JP31199170703001

1.

Pre-inspection (1)

If an error occurs on the system, The DTC code is indicated in the console panel.

(2)

Reading of failure code a.

Connection of HinoDX 1. Remove the left side cover at the rear of the driver's seat and connect the failure diagnosis connector with a PC which installed HinoDX through the interface box.

Engine ECU

Failure diagnosis connector

SAPH311991700003

Special tool : 09121-1040 Hino-Bowie (Interface

Failure diagnosis connector

box) 09042-1220 Connecting cable CD-ROM HinoDX

Hino-Bowie

Connect to the failure diagnosis connector at the unit side.

Connecting cable SAPH311991700004

2.

Deletion method of past failure (1)

To delete past failures of the engine ECU, use HinoDX on the PC. (Refer to "HinoDX operation manual".)

Failure List of failure diagnosis diagnosis

SAPH311991700005


ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

17–5

Table of failure code JP31199170601001

NOTICE

• For the system status by indication of DTC code in the table, refer to "1. Pre-inspection, Inspection, Engine ECU". "Reference : Inspection, Engine ECU, Engine diagnosis code"

[a] Failure diagnosis and [b] Alarm display (alarm status) a. Engine does not start

DTC code P0335

Engine speed main sensor circuit malfunction

Engine stopped. b. DTC code indication.

Estimated failure cause

P0606

CPU malfunction (Hard detection)

P0629

Supply pump SCV malfunction (Power source line short)

a. Low output

P0200

ECU charge circuit high input

P0611

ECU charge circuit low input

P2120

Accelerator sensor 1 and 2 malfunction

b. DTC code indication. a. Low output (LOW idle 800rpm fixing)

Page

17-12 17-47 17-43 17-48 17-48

17-30

b. DTC code indication. a. Low output

P0217

Engine overheat 17-17

b. DTC code indication. a. Difficult to start engine.

P0540

Preheat circuit malfunction 17-46

b. DTC code indication. a. Low output b. DTC code indication.

P0234

Turbocharger over boost

17-21

P0088

Excessive common rail pressure

17-21

P0088

Excessive common rail pressure, supply pump excess forced feed

P0108

Boost pressure sensor circuit high input

P0117

Coolant temperature sensor circuit low input

P0118

Coolant temperature sensor circuit high input

P0191

Common rail pressure sensor malfunction

P0192

Common rail pressure sensor circuit low input

P0193

Common rail pressure sensor circuit high input

17-22 17-19 17-16

17-16 17-23 17-24

17-24

P0201

Injector circuit malfunction -cylinder 1

17-38

P0202

Injector circuit malfunction -cylinder 2

17-38


17–6

[a] Failure diagnosis and [b] Alarm display (alarm status) a. Low output b. DTC code indication.

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

DTC code

Estimated failure cause

P0203

Injector circuit malfunction -cylinder 3

17-38

P0204

Injector circuit malfunction -cylinder 4

17-38

P0237

Boost pressure sensor circuit low input

17-19

P0605

Flash ROM error

17-47

P0607

Monitoring IC malfunction in CPU

17-47

P0628

Supply pump SCV malfunction (Full discharge mode) Injector common 1 ground short

17-34

P1212

Injector common 1 power source line short

17-36

P1212

Injector common 1 open circuit

17-36

P1214

Injector common 2 ground short

17-34

P1215

Injector common 2 power source line short

17-36

P1215

Injector common 2 open circuit

17-36

P1601

Injector correction data conformity error

17-47

P2228

Atmospheric pressure sensor circuit low

P2229

Atmospheric pressure sensor circuit high input

b. DTC code indication.

17-43

P1211

input

a. Other problems

Page

17-33

17-33

P2635

Supply pump SCV sticking

17-45

P2635

Supply pump malfunction

17-45

P0182

Fuel temperature sensor circuit low input

17-18

P0183

Fuel temperature sensor circuit high input

17-18

P0340

Engine speed sub sensor circuit malfunction

17-14

P0686

Main relay malfunction

17-49

P2122

Accelerator sensor circuit 1 low voltage

17-26

P2123

Accelerator sensor circuit 1 high voltage

17-26

P2127

Accelerator sensor circuit 2 low voltage

17-28

P2128

Accelerator sensor circuit 2 high voltage

17-28

P1133

Emergency accelerator sensor malfunction high input

17-31


17–7

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

[a] Failure diagnosis and [b] Alarm display (alarm status) a. Other problems b. No indication

DTC code

Estimated failure cause

Page

P0219

Engine overrun

17-17

P0263

Cylinder 1 contribution/balance fault

17-41

P0266

Cylinder 2 contribution/balance fault

17-41

P0269

Cylinder 3 contribution/balance fault

17-41

P0272

Cylinder 4 contribution/balance fault

17-41

P0617

Starter signal malfunction

17-49

P2635

Supply pump abnormal pressure record

17-45

U1001

Interruption of CAN communication (unit)

Function, movement Description of function and operation

-


17–8

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Signal check harness JP31199170301001

1.

Signal check harness

! CAUTION

• When measuring terminal of the engine ECU, connect the signal check harness to prevent damage to the connector. Place the tester rod on the contact box of the signal check harness for measurement.

NOTICE

• Terminal numbers in the text and the illustrations correspond as shown below in the "Computer pin arrangement".

ECU terminal name

[Example] For A8 terminal

ECU terminal number

Signal check harness (contact box)

SAPH311991700006


ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE 2.

17–9

Connection of signal check harness (1)

Set the starter key to "OFF" and disconnect the connector from the engine ECU.

(2)

Connect the signal check harness to the engine ECU and the unit harness. Special tool : Signal check harness (09049-1080)

Specification Wiring diagram (performance)

Unit harness Signal check harness

Test lead

Signal check connector

SAPH311991700007


17–10

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Computer pin arrangement JP31199170201001

SAPH311991700008 Failure diagnosis list


17–11

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Check the ECU power supply voltage JP31199170601002

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

#

&

#

'

harness.

'

#

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check

2.

Turn the starter key "ON" and measure voltage between terminals A5, A6, A7 and terminals D1, E4, E5. Standard value : 20 V or more • 0 V : Blown fuse, harness failure, ground failure,

NG

etc. • 20 V or less : Battery deterioration, ground

SAPH311991700009

failure, etc.

OK

Normal

Check the ground JP31199170601003

1

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1. D1

D

E4

E

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

E5

2.

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness and measure the resistance between terminals D1,

Frame

E4, E5 and the terminal (-) of the battery. Standard value : 1 : or less NG SAPH311991700010

OK

Normal

Disconnection of ground harness, contact failure, etc.


17–12

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Engine speed main sensor circuit malfunction (DTC code P0335) JP31199170601004

1

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1. B6

B

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

B7

2.

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness and measure the resistance between terminal B6 and terminal B7. Standard value : Approx. 125.5 r 17 : (20 qC{68 qF}) NG

[3] Go to measurement of resistance between sensor terminals.

SAPH311991700011

OK

2

Check of diagnosis code 1.

Connect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness. After deleting the past failure, Start the engine and confirm that no diagnostic code is put out. Standard : No diagnostic code NG

Contact failure of ECU connector, ECU failure, short-circuit of harness

SAPH311991700012

OK

Normal


ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

3

17–13

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

Disconnect the connector of the main engine speed sensor and measure the resistance between No. 1 and No. 2 terminals at the sensor. Standard value : Approx. 125.5 r 17 : (20 qC{68 qF}) NG

SAPH311991700013

OK

Harness disconnection or connector failure

Failure of main engine speed sensor


17–14

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Engine speed sub sensor circuit malfunction (DTC code P0340) JP31199170601005

1

Measurement of voltage between sensor terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

GND

+5V

2.

Disconnect the connector of the sub-speed sensor.

3.

Set the starter key to "ON" and measure voltage between the +5V terminal and the GND terminal of the sub-speed sensor connector (at unit harness side). Standard value : 5.0 r 0.5 V

SAPH311991700014

NG

[2] Go to measurement of voltage between terminals.

OK

[3] Go to measurement of voltage between terminals.

2

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

the signal check harness.

D D32

Measure voltage between terminal D32 and terminal D30 of

D30

Standard value : 5.0 r 0.5V NG

SAPH311991700015

OK

Harness failure

Engine ECU failure, connector failure


17–15

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

3

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

D

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the connector of the sub-speed sensor.

D19 D30

2.

Start the engine and keep idling status.

3.

Measure voltage between terminal D19 and terminal D30 of the signal check harness.

4.

After measurement, stop the engine. Standard : Pulse waveform of 0 l 5 V

SAPH311991700016

NG

[4] Go to measurement of resistance between terminals.

OK

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure

4

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

Leave the connector of the sub-speed sensor connected.

2.

Measure resistance between the No. 1 terminal at the unit

SIG D19

harness of the sub-speed sensor connector and terminal D19 of the signal check harness. ! CAUTION

• The connector of the sub-speed sensor in the figure is viewed from the fitting surface.

Standard value : 2 : or less SAPH311991700017

NG

Harness failure

OK

Failure of sub-speed sensor

Engine speed main and sub sensor circuit malfunction (DTC code P0335) JP31199170601006

1.

Inspection item (1)

Take actions of (DTC code P0335) and (DTC code P0340). "Reference : Engine speed main sensor circuit malfunction (DTC code P0335), Engine ECU, Engine diagnosis code" "Reference : Engine speed sub sensor circuit malfunction (DTC code P0340), Engine ECU, Engine diagnosis code"


17–16

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Coolant temperature sensor malfunction (DTC code P0117, P0118) JP31199170601007

DTC

P0117

Coolant temperature sensor circuit low input

DTC

P0118

Coolant temperature sensor circuit high input

1

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

D

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

E E19

2.

D34

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness and measure the resistance between terminal E19 and terminal D34. Standard value (Measure either one point of the following.) : 2.45 k: (Coolant temperature at 20 qC{68 qF})

SAPH311991700018

: 1.15 k: (Coolant temperature at 40 qC{104 qF}) : 584 : (Coolant temperature at 60 qC{140 qF}) : 318 : (Coolant temperature at 80 qC{176 qF}) NG

[2] Go to measurement of resistance between sensor terminals.

OK

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure, harness short-circuit

2

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

Disconnect the connector of the coolant temperature sensor and measure the resistance between No. 1 and No. 2 terminals at the sensor. Standard value (Measure either one point of the following.) : 2.45 k: (Coolant temperature at 20 qC{68 qF}) : 1.15 k: (Coolant temperature at 40 qC{104 qF}) : 584 : (Coolant temperature at 60 qC{140 qF}) : 318 : (Coolant temperature at 80 qC{176 qF})

SAPH311991700019

NG OK

Harness disconnection, connector failure

Failure of coolant temperature sensor


17–17

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Engine overheat (DTC code P0217) JP31199170601008

1

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF", disconnect the connector of the coolant temperature sensor and measure the resistance between No. 1 and No. 2 terminals at the sensor. Standard value (Measure either one point of the following.) : 2.45k: (Coolant temperature at 20 qC{68 qF}) : 1.15k: (Coolant temperature at 40 qC{104 qF}) : 584: (Coolant temperature at 60 qC{140 qF}) : 318: (Coolant temperature at 80 qC{176 qF})

SAPH311991700019

• This code is displayed when the coolant

NOTICE

temperature sensor is normal and the coolant temperature is 115 qC{221 qF} or more. • While this failure code is detected, the maximum injection volume is restricted. When the coolant temperature is 80 qC{176qF} or less, normal control is resumed. NG

Failure of coolant temperature sensor Take actions of (DTC code P0117,P0118)

OK

Failure of engine cooling system

Engine overrun (DTC code P0219) JP31199170601009

1.

This failure code is displayed when the engine speed of 2,600 r/min or more is detected. While this failure code is detected, fuel injection is stopped. When the engine speed is lower than 2,500 r/min., fuel injection is resumed.

NOTICE

• The objective of this failure code is not to detect overrun due to failure of this system, but to memorize high revolution of the engine. • Engine speed may be incorrectly recognized with noise on the speed sensor signal due to harness failure or modification, resulting in detection of overrun.


17–18

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Fuel temperature sensor malfunction (DTC code P0182, P0183) JP31199170601010

DTC

P0182

Fuel temperature sensor circuit low input

DTC

P0183

Fuel temperature sensor circuit high input

1

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1. D34

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

E27

2.

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness and measure the resistance between terminal E27 and terminal D34. Standard value (Measure either one point of the following.) : 2.45 k: (Fuel temperature at 20 qC{68 qF})

SAPH311991700020

: 1.15 k: (Fuel temperature at 40 qC{104 qF}) : 584 : (Fuel temperature at 60 qC{140 qF}) : 318 : (Fuel temperature at 80 qC{176 qF}) NG

[2] Go to measurement of resistance between terminals.

OK

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure, harness short-circuit

2

Measurement of sensor resistance 1.

Disconnect the connector of the fuel temperature sensor and measure the resistance between No. 1 and No. 2 terminals at the sensor. Standard value (Measure either one point of the following.) : 2.45 k: (Fuel temperature at 20 qC{68 qF}) : 1.15 k: (Fuel temperature at 40 qC{104 qF}) : 584 : (Fuel temperature at 60 qC{140 qF}) : 318 : (Fuel temperature at 80 qC{176 qF})

SAPH311991700021

NG OK

Harness disconnection, connector failure

Failure of fuel temperature sensor


17–19

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Boost pressure sensor malfunction (DTC code P0108, P0237) JP31199170601011

DTC

P0108

Boost pressure sensor circuit high input

DTC

P0237

Boost pressure sensor circuit low input

1

Measurement of voltage between sensor terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

GND

+5V

2.

Disconnect the connector of the boost pressure sensor.

3.

Set the starter key to "ON" and measure voltage between the +5V terminal and the GND terminal of the boost pressure sensor connector (at unit harness side). Standard value : 5 r 0.5 V

SAPH311991700022

NG

[2] Go to measurement of voltage between terminals.

OK

[3] Go to measurement of voltage between terminals.

2

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

D

D25

Measure the voltage between terminal D25 and terminal D33 of the signal check harness. Standard value : 5 r 0.5 V

D33

NG

SAPH311991700023

OK

Harness failure

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure


17–20

3

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

D

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the connector of the boost pressure sensor.

D27

2.

Set the starter key to "ON" and measure the voltage between terminal D27 and terminal D33 of the signal check harness.

D33

Standard value : 0.2 to 4.8 V NG

[4] Go to measurement of voltage between terminals.

SAPH311991700024

OK

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure

4

Measurement of voltage between sensor terminals

GND

1.

Leave the connector of the boost pressure sensor connected.

2.

Measure the voltage between the SIG terminal and the GND

SIG

terminal of the boost pressure sensor connector (at unit harness side). Standard value : 0.2 to 4.8 V NG SAPH311991700025

OK

Harness failure

Boost pressure sensor failure


17–21

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Turbocharger over boost (DTC code P0234) JP31199170601012

1

Inspection with failure diagnosis tool 1.

After failure, perform failure diagnosis with a failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC.

2.

Connect the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC and set the starter key to "ON".

SAPH311991700026

OK

Perform diagnosis of the boost pressure sensor (DTC code P0108, P0237).

Excessive common rail pressure (DTC code P0088) JP31199170601013

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

D

harness.

D20

D31

2. D33

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check

Set the starter key to "ON" and measure the voltage between terminals D20/D31 and terminal D33 of the signal check harness. Standard value : 3.6 to 4.7 V NG

SAPH311991700027

OK

Failure of common rail pressure sensor

Engine ECU failure or harness/connector contact failure


17–22

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Excessive common rail pressure, supply pump excess forced feed (DTC code P0088) JP31199170601014

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

㧰

harness.

D20

D31

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check

2. D33

Start and warm-up the engine until the coolant temperature gauge moves.

3.

Set the engine speed to idling. PFIN = Approx. 30 MPa (approx. 1.5V)

4. SAPH311991700028

Measure the voltage between terminal D20/D31 and terminal D33 of the signal check harness. Standard value : 1.56 V or less NG

Failure of common rail pressure sensor

OK

2

Check of failure code 1.

Make sure that other failure code is not output. If other failure code is output, repair the failure code and make sure again that DTC code P0088 is output. In particular, if a failure code of the main and sub-engine speed sensor systems is output, make necessary repairs to prevent output of the code.

2.

Check the fuel injection timing of the supply pump. If the timing is not set 0q for the top dead center, set it correctly.

3.

When there is no error after the check above, delete the past failure using the PC diagnosis tool and start the engine. If the same code is output again, possible failures are the supply pump, common rail pressure sensor system and engine ECU. Perform more detailed diagnosis with failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC.


17–23

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Common rail pressure sensor malfunction (DTC code P0191) JP31199170601015

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

D

harness.

D20

D31

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check

2. D33

Set the starter key to "ON" and measure the voltage between terminals D20/D31 and terminal D33. Standard value : 0.9 to 1.1 V NG

Engine ECU failure or harness/connector contact failure

SAPH311991700029

OK

2

Measurement of voltage between terminals

㧰

1.

Start the engine.

2.

While measuring the voltage between terminals D20/D31 and

D20

D31

terminal D33 of the signal check harness, repeat full opening/ D33

closing of the accelerator. Standard : Voltage must change. (1.0 to 3.2 V) NG

Common rail pressure sensor failure or harness/ connector contact failure

SAPH311991700030

OK

Engine ECU failure, connector contact failure


17–24

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Common rail pressure sensor malfunction (DTC code P0192, P0193) JP31199170601016

DTC

P0192

Common rail pressure sensor circuit low input

DTC

P0193

Common rail pressure sensor circuit high input

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1. D33

D

harness.

D20

2.

D31

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check

Set the starter key to "ON" and measure the voltage between terminals D20/D31 and terminal D33 of the signal check harness. Standard value : 0.7 to 4.7 V NG

[2] Go to measurement of voltage between terminals.

SAPH311991700031

OK

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure

2

Measurement of voltage between sensor terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and disconnect the connector of the common rail pressure sensor.

GND

+5V

2.

Set the starter key to "ON" and measure voltage between the +5V terminal and the GND terminal of the common rail pressure sensor connector (at unit harness side). Standard value : 5 r 0.5 V NG

SAPH311991700032

OK

[4] Go to measurement of resistance between terminals.


ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

3

17–25

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness.

D

D20

2.

D31

Measure the resistance between terminals D20/D31 of the signal check harness and the SIG terminal of the common rail pressure sensor connector (at unit harness side).

SIG

Standard value : 2 : or less NG

Harness failure

SAPH311991700033

OK

Connector contact failure

4

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness.

2. D24

+5V

D

Measure the resistance between terminals D24 of the signal check harness and the +5 V terminal of the common rail pressure sensor connector (at unit harness side). Standard value : 2 : or less

SAPH311991700034

3.

Measure the resistance between terminal D33 of the signal check harness and the GND terminal of the common rail

D

GND

pressure sensor connector (at unit harness side). Standard value : 2 : or less NG

D33

SAPH311991700035

OK

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure

Harness failure


17–26

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Accelerator sensor 1 malfunction (DTC code P2122, P2123) JP31199170601017

DTC

P2122

Accelerator sensor circuit 1 low voltage

DTC

P2123

Accelerator sensor circuit 1 high voltage

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

2.

Set the starter key to "ON" and measure the voltage between terminal A21 and terminal B20 of the signal check harness.

B20

A21

Standard value : 0.7 - 1.5V (idle status) NG

[3] Voltage measuring at the output port of the mechatronic controller

SAPH311991700036

OK

2

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

While increasing the throttle, measure the voltage between terminal A21 and terminal B20 of the signal check harness. Standard value

A21

B20

Measuring item

Engine revolution (r/min)

Low idle

1,000

Approx.1.4

High idle

2,000

Approx.3.3

SAPH311991700036

NG OK

Harness failure

Voltage(V)

Defective mechatronic controller


ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

3

17–27

Voltage measuring at the output port of the mechatronic controller 1.

With the starter key set to "ON", do not open the slot and measure the voltage between pin 25 of the pin connector 28 of the mechatronics controller and B21 of the signal check harness. When an abnormal value is detected, the mechatronics controller becomes defective. Abnormal value : 0.3 V or less : 4.85 V or more NG

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure or disconnection of harness, short-circuit of harness

OK

Defective mechatronic controller


17–28

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Accelerator sensor 1 malfunction (DTC code P2127, P2128) JP31199170601018

DTC

P2127

Accelerator sensor circuit 2 low voltage

DTC

P2128

Accelerator sensor circuit 2 high voltage

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

A22

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

B21

2.

Set the starter key to "ON" and measure the voltage between terminal A22 and terminal B21 of the signal check harness. Standard value : 0.7 - 1.5V (idle status) NG

[3] Voltage measuring at the output port of the mechatronic controller

SAPH311991700037

OK

2

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

A22

While increasing the throttle, measure the voltage between terminal A22 and terminal B21 of the signal check harness.

B21

Standard value Measuring item

Engine revolution (r/min)

Low idle

1,000

Approx.1.4

High idle

2,000

Approx.3.3

SAPH311991700037

NG OK

Harness failure

Voltage(V)

Defective mechatronic controller


ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

3

17–29

Voltage measuring at the output port of the mechatronic controller 1.

With the starter key set to "ON", do not open the slot and measure the voltage between pin 25 of the pin connector 28 of the mechatronics controller and B21 of the signal check harness. When an abnormal value is detected, the mechatronics controller becomes defective. Abnormal value : 0.3 V or less : 4.85 V or more NG

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure or disconnection of harness, short-circuit of harness

OK

Defective mechatronic controller


17–30

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Accelerator sensor 1 and 2 malfunction (DTC code P2120) JP31199170601019

1

Inspection item 1.

Take action of DTC code P2120. "Reference : Accelerator sensor 1 malfunction (DTC code P2122, P2123), Engine ECU, Engine diagnosis code" "Reference : Accelerator sensor 2 malfunction (DTC code P2126), Engine ECU, Engine diagnosis code"


17–31

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Emergency accelerator sensor malfunction (DTC code P1133) JP03Z01030703026

1

Power supply voltage measuring 1.

With the ECU connector connected, disconnect the sensor connector and measure the voltage between the power

+5V

terminal (+5 V) and the GND terminal. ! CAUTION

• The connector in the figure is seen from the fitting surface.

GND

Standard value : 5.0 r 0.5 V ÎÇ

[2] Go to measurement of voltage between terminals.

SAPH311991700038

OK

[3] Go to measurement of voltage between terminals.

2

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1. B23

Measure the voltage between terminals B20 and B23 of the signal check harness.

B20

Standard value : 5.0 r 0.5 V NG

SAPH311991700039

OK

Harness failure

Engine ECU, engine ECU connector failure


17–32

3

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

Connect the sensor connector and measure the voltage between terminals A23 and B20 of the signal check harness. Standard value : Approx. 0.0 to 3.2 V (idle to full throttle)

B20

NG

A23

[4] Go to measurement of voltage between terminals.

SAPH311991700040

OK

Engine ECU failure, engine ECU connector failure

4

Measurement of voltage between sensor terminals

GND

1.

Leave the emergency accelerator sensor connected.

2.

Connect the sensor connector and measure the voltage between the terminals SIG and GND of the sensor.

! CAUTION SIG

• The connector in the figure is seen from the fitting surface.

Standard value : Approx. 0.0 to 3.2 V (idle to full throttle) SAPH311991700041

NG OK

Harness failure

Emergency accelerator sensor failure


ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

17–33

Atmospheric pressure sensor malfunction (DTC code P2228, P2229) JP31199170601020

DTC

P2228

Atmospheric pressure sensor circuit low input

DTC

P2229

Atmospheric pressure sensor circuit high input

1

Check of diagnosis code 1.

After deleting the past failures with the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC, check again if the same code (DTC code P2228, P2229) is output. Standard : Normal NG

Engine ECU failure

SAPH311991700026

OK

Since it may be a temporary malfunction due to radio interference, it is acceptable when the system recovers normal operation.


17–34

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Injector common 1 ground short (DTC code P1211), Injector common 2 ground short (DTC code P1214) JP31199170601021

1

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

2.

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check

3.

Measure the resistance between each terminal of the signal

harness. D5

D

D6

check harness and the ECU case ground.

ECU case ground (ECU mounting bolt)

DTC code E6

E

E7

Terminal to measure resistance

P1211

D5, D6

P1214

E6, E7

ECU case ground ECU case ground

Standard value : f :

SAPH311991700042

NG

[3] Go to measurement of resistance between injector terminals.

OK

2

Check of diagnosis code 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness.

2.

Start the engine and delete the past failures with the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC.

3.

If the same failure code is output again, replace the engine ECU. If the normal code is output, it is considered that a temporary error has occurred.

SAPH311991700026


17–35

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

3

Measurement of resistance between injector terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF".

2.

The injector clustered connector at the front side of the engine shall be disconnected.

1

2

12 11

7

8

6

5

3

4

10

9

3.

Measure the resistance between terminals of the injector clustered connector (at unit harness side).

DTC code

Terminal to measure resistance + side

SAPH311991700043

P1211

5, 6, 10, 12

P1214

2, 4, 7, 8

– side ECU case ground ECU case ground

Standard value : f : NG

Harness failure (failure including pinching of harness which has not satisfied the standard value)

OK

Inspection of harness inside head cover (Short-circuit of the harness inside the head cover to the ground line may have occurred.)


17–36

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Injector common 1 power source line short (DTC code P1212), Injector common 2 power source line short (DTC code P1215) JP31199170601022

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

D5

D

D6

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

ECU case ground (ECU mounting bolt)

2.

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness and set the starter key to "ON".

E6

E

E7

3.

Measure the voltage between each terminal of the signal check harness and the ECU case ground.

! CAUTION

• Never start the engine because it may cause failure of the unit or electric shock.

SAPH311991700044

DTC code

Terminal to measure voltage + side

P1212

D5, D6

P1215

E6, E7

– side ECU case ground ECU case ground

Standard value : 14 V or less NG

[3] Go to measurement of voltage between injector terminals.

OK

2

Check of diagnosis code 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness.

2.

Start the engine and delete the past failures with the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC.

3.

If the same failure code is output again, replace the common rail ECU. If the normal code is output, it is considered that a temporary error has occurred.

SAPH311991700026


17–37

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

3

Measurement of voltage between injector terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF".

2.

The injector clustered connector at the front side of the engine shall be disconnected and set the starter key to "ON".

1

2

12 11

7

8

6

5

3

4

10

9

3.

Measure the voltage between terminals of the injector clustered connector (at unit harness side).

! CAUTION

• Never start the engine because it may cause failure of the unit or electric shock.

SAPH311991700043

DTC code

Terminal to measure voltage + side

1212

5, 6

1215

7, 8

– side ECU case ground ECU case ground

Standard value : 14 V or less NG

Harness failure (harness failure of terminal that has not satisfied the standard value)

OK

Inspection of harness inside head cover (Short-circuit of the harness inside the head cover to the power line may have occurred.)


17–38

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Injector circuit malfunction (DTC code P0201 to P0204) JP31199170601023

DTC

P0201

Injector circuit malfunction -cylinder 1

DTC

P0202

Injector circuit malfunction -cylinder 2

DTC

P0203

Injector circuit malfunction -cylinder 3

DTC

P0204

Injector circuit malfunction -cylinder 4

1

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

D2 D3

2. D5

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness and measure the resistance between terminals.

E1 E2

DTC code

Failure area

E6 SAPH311991700045

(injector)

Terminal to measure resistance

P0201

#1

D2 l D5

P0202

#2

E2 l E6

P0203

#3

E1 l E7

P0204

#4

D3 l D6

Standard value : 2 : or less NG

[3] Go to measurement of resistance between injector terminals.

OK

2

Check of diagnosis code 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness.

2.

Start the engine and delete the past failures with the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC.

3.

If the same failure code is output again, replace the common rail ECU. If the normal code is output, it is considered that a temporary error has occurred.

SAPH311991700026


17–39

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

3

Measurement of resistance between injector terminals 1.

The injector clustered connector at the front side of the engine shall be disconnected.

2. 1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Measure the resistance between terminals of the injector clustered connector (male) at the cam housing.

9 10 11 12

DTC code

SAPH311991700046

Terminal to measure resistance

P0201

5 l 10

P0202

7 l 11

P0203

3l8

P0204

2l6

Standard value : 2 : or less NG

[4] Go to measurement of resistance between injector terminals.

OK

unit harness disconnection (Check the harness between the ECU and the injector clustered connector.)

4

Measurement of resistance between injector terminals 1.

Remove the head cover and disconnect the injector connector (injector side) of the cylinder indicated by the failure code. Measure the resistance between the No. 1 terminal and the No. 2 terminal. Standard value : 0.45 r 0.05 : NG

[5] Go to measurement of resistance between injector terminals.

SAPH311991700047

OK

Contact failure of harness or connector inside the head cover


17–40

5

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Measurement of resistance between injector terminals 1.

Remove the terminal cap of the injector of the cylinder indicated by the failure code and measure the insulation resistance between the terminal and the upper body. Standard value : 1, 000 M: or more NG

Injector TWV coil disconnection (Replace the injector assembly.)

SAPH311991700048

OK

Injector harness disconnection (Replace the injector harness.)


17–41

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Cylinder contribution/balance fault (DTC codes P0263, P0266, P0269, P0272) JP31199170601024 DTC

P0263

Cylinder 1 contribution/balance fault

DTC

P0266

Cylinder 2 contribution/balance fault

DTC

P0269

Cylinder 3 contribution/balance fault

DTC

P0272

Cylinder 4 contribution/balance fault

1

Inspection of flow damper 1 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and stop the engine.

2.

Wait for approx. 30 seconds and start the engine.

3.

Warm-up the engine until coolant temperature is 60 qC{140 qF} or more, delete the past failure with a failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC.

SAPH311991700026

4.

If the same failure code is displayed as the current failure after deleting the past failure, check the flow damper of the cylinder indicated by the failure code. DTC code

Failure area (Flow damper)

P0263

#1

P0266

#2

P0269

#3

P0272

#4

SAPH311991700049

2

Inspection of flow damper 2 1.

Remove the flow damper from the common rail and run air from one side of the flow damper. Check if the damper is not blocked by release of air to the opposite side.

! CAUTION

• When air is run, be careful so that dirt, water, etc. may not enter the flow damper.

Standard value : Air must flow. (Flow damper is normal.) NG SAPH311991700050

OK

Replace the flow damper (if air is not run)


17–42

3

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Check of failure code 1.

Make sure that other failure code is not output. If other failure code is output, repair the failure first and delete the past failure with the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC. Then, if this failure code is output again, the following failures may be estimated. • Excessive fuel flow due to leak from broken pipe, crack in pipe or pipe connection between the flow damper and the injector pipe

SAPH311991700026

o Check for leak • Too large or too small fuel flow due to increase of leak inside inside the injector o Check for leak on the individual injector with a nozzle tester • Excessive fuel flow due to failure of injection nozzle and seat o Check for seat failure on the individual injector with a nozzle tester • Too large or too small fuel flow due to malfunction of the injector o Check with replacement of injector • Too small fuel flow due to clogging in the fuel supply system o Inspection of fuel filter 2.

To specify a failure location above, check the compensation between cylinders with the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC and stop an injector. Then, perform diagnosis while viewing the engine data.


17–43

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Supply pump SCV malfunction (DTC code P0628, P0629) JP31199170601025

DTC

P0628

Supply pump SCV malfunction (Full discharge mode)

DTC

P0629

Supply pump SCV malfunction (Power source line short)

1

Measurement of resistance between solenoid terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF", disconnect the connector of the supply pump solenoid valve and measure the resistance between No. 1 and No. 2 terminals at the supply pump solenoid valve. Standard value : 7.9 r 0.5 : (20 qC{68 qF}) NG

Failure of supply pump solenoid valve

SAPH311991700051

OK

2

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF", connect the signal check harness and disconnect the ECU side connector.

2.

E E11

E8 E9 E10

Measure the resistance between terminals E10/E11 of the signal check harness and the No. 1 terminal of the supply pump solenoid valve (at unit harness side). In a similar manner, measure the resistance of terminals E8/E9 of the signal check harness and the No. 2 terminal of the supply pump solenoid valve connector (at unit harness side).

SAPH311991700052

Standard value : 1 : or less NG

OK

Harness disconnection, connector failure


17–44

3

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Measurement of voltage between terminals

E4

E

E8 E9

1.

Turn "ON" the starter key.

2.

Measure voltage between terminal E4 and terminals E8/E9 of the signal check harness. Standard value : Pulse waveform at 24V l 0V NG

Failure of ECU connector

SAPH311991700053

OK

Engine ECU failure ! CAUTION

• After turning "ON" the starter key, take measurements within 40 seconds.


17–45

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Supply pump SCV sticking (DTC code P2635), Supply pump malfunction (DTC code P2635), Supply pump abnormal pressure record (DTC code P2635) JP31199170601026

1

Inspection of supply pump 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and stop the engine.

2.

Wait for approx. 30 seconds and start the engine.

3.

Warm-up the engine until coolant temperature is 60 qC{140 qF} or more, and delete the past failure with the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC.

4.

Run the engine at no load up to HI idle. Or repeat no-load operation from LOW idle to HI idle two or three times and

SAPH311991700026

confirm that the same fault code is displayed again. NG

Replace supply pump.

OK

2

Check of failure code 1.

Make sure that other failure code is not output. If other failure code is output, repair the failure code and make sure again that DTC code P2635 is output.

2.

When there is no error after the check above, delete the past failure and operate the engine. If the same code is output again, possible failures are the supply pump and engine ECU. Perform more detailed diagnosis with failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) - HinoDX

SAPH311991700054

[Inspection Menu], using PC.


17–46

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Preheat circuit malfunction (DTC code P0540) JP31199170601030

1

Measurement of resistance between terminals 1.

C2 C1

C

D1

D

E

E4

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check harness.

E5

2.

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness and measure the resistance between terminals C1, C2 and terminals D1, E4, E5. Standard value : 25 r 2.5 : NG

SAPH311991700055

[2] Go to measurement of resistance between terminals.

OK

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure

2

Measurement of relay resistance 1.

Remove the heater relay and measure the resistance between terminals. Standard value : 24.8 r 0.5 : NG

SAPH311991700056

OK

Harness failure, connector failure

Heater relay failure


17–47

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Injector correction data conformity error (DTC code P1601) JP31199170601031

1

Inspection of QR code 1.

Read the QR code data with the failure diagnosis tool (HinoDX) using PC. Reference value: This shall coincide with the QR code managed by the unit manufacturer. NG

Write the QR code again.

SAPH311991700026

OK

Replace engine ECU.

ECU internal error (DTC code P0605, P0606, P0607) JP31199170601032

DTC

P0605

Flash ROM error

DTC

P0606

CPU malfunction (Hard detection)

DTC

P0607

Monitoring IC malfunction in CPU

1

Check of diagnosis code 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and set it to "ON" again.

2.

After deleting the past failure, check if the same code (DTC code P0605, P0606, P0607) is output again. Standard : Normal NG

Engine ECU failure

SAPH311991700026

OK

Since it may be a temporary malfunction due to radio interference, it is acceptable when the system recovers normal operation.


17–48

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

ECU charge circuit malfunction (DTC code P0200, P0611) JP31199170601033

DTC

P0200

ECU charge circuit high input

DTC

P0611

ECU charge circuit malfunction

1

Check of ECU 1.

Set the starter key to "OFF" and set it to "ON" again.

2.

After deleting the past failure, check if the same code (DTC code P0611, P0200) is output again. Standard : Normal NG

Engine ECU failure

SAPH311991700026

OK

Since it may be a temporary malfunction due to radio interference, it is acceptable when the system recovers normal operation.


17–49

ENGINE DIAGNOSIS CODE

Main relay malfunction (DTC code P0686) JP31199170601034

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

A

A5

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check

A6 A7

harness. 2.

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness and set the starter key to "ON". Measure the voltage

Frame

between terminals A5, A6, A7 and the chassis GND. Standard value : 0 V NG

Defective harness

SAPH311991700057

OK

Engine ECU failure, engine ECU connector failure

Starter signal malfunction (DTC code P0617) JP31199170601035

1

Measurement of voltage between terminals 1.

B

C

B14

harness.

C4

2.

C3

Set the starter key to "OFF" and connect the signal check

Disconnect the ECU side connector of the signal check harness and set the starter key to "ON".

3.

Measure voltage between terminal B14 and terminals C3/C4.

! CAUTION

• Measuring shall be done in an environment where the engine may be started.

SAPH311991700058

Standard value : 0 V (when starter key is at "OFF") : 24 V (when starter key is at "START") NG OK

Engine ECU failure, ECU connector failure

Harness failure



Issuu converts static files into: digital portfolios, online yearbooks, online catalogs, digital photo albums and more. Sign up and create your flipbook.